JP7481715B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

Gaming machines capable of executing display effects are known in the past (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2001-137471 A

However, there is still room for improvement in the presentation.

In light of this situation, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can execute creative presentations.

[Means 1]
A lottery means for acquiring lottery information related to a win based on the establishment of a start condition, and for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition for the acquired lottery information;
a performance display device on which a performance is displayed;
A decorative pattern varying means for varying and displaying decorative patterns on the performance display device in response to the execution of the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition;
and a holding means for storing the lottery information until the start condition is satisfied when the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied,
When the decorative symbols are being varied, a specific reach effect can be executed based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
when a specific timing arrives in the specific reach performance, whether or not a result of the lottery by the lottery means is the win is displayed;
Under a situation where the lottery information is stored by the reserve means, after the specific timing arrives in the specific reach performance and it is displayed that it is not a win but a miss, it is possible to display an expectation performance regarding the result of the lottery of the lottery information stored by the reserve means;
The expected performance can be executed in a plurality of types including a first display type and a second display type, and when the expected performance that can be executed in a plurality of types is executed in the first display type, it can be executed in a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, and when the expected performance is executed in the first display type, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the outline of the performance after the expected performance regardless of which of the plurality of modes the execution mode is.
The expected performance executed in the first display type and the expected performance executed in the second display type are executable within one variation,
the expected performance can be executed in a third display type different from the first display type and the second display type, and when the expected performance is executed in the third display type, an operation acceptance period is generated in which an operation by a player can be accepted by an operation means;
the third display type, which will result in the operation accepting period, can be executed in a plurality of modes including a specific mode and a special mode, and an operation instruction image corresponding to the executed mode can be displayed during the operation accepting period;
The expected performance can be executed in a fourth display type different from any of the first display type, the second display type, and the third display type. When the expected performance is executed in the fourth display type, the variation is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and the decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped starts to vary again.
It is characterized by:

The present invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute creative effects.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 1A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 1A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame has been removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of a locking member in the outer frame. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from the front. An explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit of Figure 37. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame of the operation button, etc., in a view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame, etc., in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the appearance of the performance operation unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). 1A is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in Figure 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in Figure 56. FIG. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the rear. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine; FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of a game panel of a different configuration from that of Figure 63, seen from the front, along with its front components, board holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from behind. This is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board, which relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and degree display board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. 2 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; This is a block diagram of the liquid crystal and sound control unit and the surroundings of the VDP with built-in sound source. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 75. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between a main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of a dispensing control unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing control input circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Figure 81. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing motor drive circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board. 10 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that performs drawing in the display area of the door frame side liquid crystal display device. FIG. A table showing examples of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the dispensing control board. 11 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. A table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing examples of various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a LOCKN signal history creating process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection malfunction determination process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process. 11 is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper tray side liquid crystal transmitter IC. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing (step S5232). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing processing (step S5234). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process processing (step S5238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S5280). A flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). 1A is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a pattern determination table. A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S5281). A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). A flowchart showing the steps for the first special pattern change processing (step S5283). A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop processing (step S5284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403). 1A and 1B are front views, (C) is a plan view, and (D) and (E) are right side views showing a pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the operation mode, display state, and light emission performance state in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the operation mode, display state, and light emission performance state in this embodiment. This is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in this embodiment, and the changes in the movement state of the frame movable body and the light-emitting performance state over time. This is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in this embodiment, and the changes in the movement state of the frame movable body and the light-emitting performance state over time. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing a display mode of a display area in the present embodiment. 5 is a time chart showing a display mode of a display area in the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing a display mode of a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a blocking nail and a panel board in this embodiment. A diagram showing obstacle nails, a panel board, and a game ball in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a panel board and obstacle nails in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game board in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game board in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a housing according to the embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a housing according to the embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a display example in a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image of the movement of the player's tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image of the movement of the player's tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. 11 is a diagram illustrating the game state in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a transition diagram of the game state in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing moving images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the display priority of a display image in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 5A and 5B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart according to the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 2A to 2C are diagrams showing a light guide plate and the like in the present embodiment. 2A to 2C are diagrams showing a light guide plate and the like in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 1 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing a rendering example in this embodiment. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 10. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Fig. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in the island equipment (not shown) of an amusement parlor, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots game balls.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a panel member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an upper outer frame hinge member 60 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 that is attached to the upper left end side of the panel member 50 when viewed from the front and to the left frame member 30. The upper outer frame hinge member 60 and the lower outer frame hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be operated by the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plate unit 320 that is attached to the lower front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and a participatory type display unit 320 that is attached to the center of the plate unit 320 and allows the player to select a participatory type display depending on the game state that changes as game balls are shot into the game area 5a. It is equipped with a performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting performances, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left of the front side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the top of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the door frame top unit 570.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a portion of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main body frame upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame lower hinge member 640 which are attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which are rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and to which the door frame upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 are rotatably attached, respectively; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front; and a reinforcing frame 670 attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base 600. The game machine includes a ball launcher 680 for shooting game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a locking unit 700 attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, an inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out game balls to the player, a base unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a back cover 980 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable, covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

The payout unit 800 of the main frame 4 comprises an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, a ball tank 802 attached to the top of the payout unit base 801, which is a box-shaped tank that is open upward and extends to the left and right, and which stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), a tank rail 803 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extends to the left and right to guide the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and guides the game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine shape, and a ball guide unit 820 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 820, and which stores the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 in a payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 pays out balls one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951; an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and releasing the game balls from either the normal release port 850d or the full release port 850e depending on the storage state of the game balls in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320; and a lower full ball path unit 860 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and having a normal guide path 861 that guides the game balls released from the normal release port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a full guide path 862 that guides the game balls released from the full release port 850e forward and guides them from the front end to the full ball receiving port 274 of the door frame 3.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600, a speaker unit 920 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a lower low-pitched speaker 921 inside, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and housing a power supply board inside, an interface control board box 940 attached to the rear of the speaker unit 920 and housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board box 950 attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and housing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls inside.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that define the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which game balls are shot and guides game balls launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5a, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 321 and the player rotates the handle 302, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302. When the game balls shot into the game area 5a are received by a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the winning hole into which the game ball was received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest, so that the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be shot into the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 16. Figure 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and Figure 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. Figure 16(a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and Figure 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 16(a) exploded. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement parlor or the like.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend left and right, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend up and down. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces facing outward in the horizontal direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other.

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the underside of the outer frame upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the front view of the apron member 50 and to the left frame member 30. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The outer frame 2 also includes a fascia member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, a fascia reinforcement member 80 that is attached to the rear side of the fascia member 50 and has both ends attached to the left and right frame members 30 and 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position to the left of the center, and a flat right sliding member 82 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position near the right end. The fascia reinforcement member 80 is made of a solid member (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

The outer frame 2 further includes connecting members 85 that respectively connect the upper frame member 10 to the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 to the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 to the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 to the right frame member 40. The outer frame 2 also includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage with an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described below.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 that penetrates from top to bottom and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper horizontal fixing parts 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of a connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached within this engagement notch 11. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has an attachment step 12 that is recessed from the general surface on the top surface and front surface of the left end when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The left-right length and top-bottom thickness of this lower frame member 20 are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and the front-to-back width is longer than that of the upper frame member 10. The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the left-to-right center at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-to-back direction at both left and right ends. Lower lateral fixing portions 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a right lower connecting member 85D (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within the engagement cutouts 21.

The lower frame member 20 also has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. The width of the lower frame member 20 in the front-to-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notches 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same dimension as the front-to-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the area between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the fascia board member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When assembled into the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have, on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction, recesses 31, 41 recessed inwardly between a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end, and protrusions 32, 42 that bulge from the side surface opposite the recesses 31, 41 and are formed with a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32, 42. In addition, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32, 42 and attached.

The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 also have multiple grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These multiple grooves provide fingerholds for the worker when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in an amusement parlor, etc., making it easier to hold the pachinko machine 1, and also improve the design quality of the pachinko machine 1's exterior.

[2-4. Skirting panel members]
The fascia board member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The fascia board member 50 includes a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front, a left discharge hole 52 cut out in a U-shape from the left end of the rear extension portion 51 to a size that allows game balls to pass through and penetrating vertically, a right discharge hole 53 penetrating vertically to the right of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 to a size that allows game balls to pass through, a standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the top surface of the fascia board member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51, and a return portion 55 bulging forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and inclining rearward as the front surface moves upward.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (described later) is attached to the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on it. The left discharge hole 52 of the front panel member 50 is formed in a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74 (described later) of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed in a position that is to the right of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

The top surface of the fascia board member 50 to the right of the rear extension 51 is inclined so that the front end is lower. The fascia board member 50 also has a left attachment portion 56 for attaching a left sliding member 81 to a portion of the top surface to the right of the rear extension 51, and a right attachment portion 57 for attaching a right sliding member 82 near the right end of the top surface. The bottom surface of the main frame 4 is placed on the top surface of the fascia board member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the front of the fascia board member 50 is decorated with a shallow relief. Although not shown in the figure, the box-shaped interior of the fascia board member 50 is divided into a lattice pattern by multiple ribs, which increases its strength and rigidity. The fascia board member 50 is also formed so that the front half of the fascia board reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 comprises a horizontally extending, flat upper fixing portion 61 with a rectangular outline, a flat forward extension portion 62 extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61, a bearing groove 63 extending forward from the right end of the forward extension portion 62 to the center of the left and right sides of the forward extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, a flat lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 61 in a planar view, and a flat hanging portion 65 extending downward from the edge from the left end of the forward extension portion 62, around the front end to the point where the bearing groove 63 opens, and which is continuous with the lateral fixing portion 64 (see Figure 16 (b) etc.).

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 has its upper fixing portion 61 placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed with screws (not shown). The forward extension portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

By inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, the outer frame upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame lower hinge member 70 to support the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Locking member]
As shown in Fig. 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped locking body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, an operating portion 66b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 66a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 66a and then extending diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 66d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 66a. The locking member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the underside of the forward extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by mounting screws 67.

The rear end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is attached through the mounting hole 66d at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. Furthermore, when the locking member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the locking body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so as to be able to abut against a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 abuts against the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 forward of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking member 66 can rotate the locking body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking body 66a can be rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the locking body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 into the bearing groove 63 or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from within the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 comprises a flat horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 72 rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a discharge hole 74 that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 from top to bottom and is large enough to allow only one game ball to pass through. This lower outer frame hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the central part of the rising portion 72 in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. This discharge hole 74 is formed to be approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the fascia board member 50.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has a horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the fascia board member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the fascia board reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) that penetrates the upper surface of the fascia board member 50. Also, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached by a screw (not shown) to a portion forward of the protruding portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30. This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can cooperate with the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the skirting board member 50. This allows game balls on the horizontal portion 71 to fall (discharge) to the rear side of the skirting board member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 roll to the rear side where the gap is wider, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74, because the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed. In this case, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and game balls can be made less likely to become stuck in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side of the horizontal fixing portion 86 as the part from which the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, an upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-to-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. In other words, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of abutting against the underside of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left-to-right ends of the upper frame member 10. Additionally, the front lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces forward of the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, by screws that are inserted into the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed in from the outer side surfaces.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the lower end of the part of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 that protrudes further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 86. In addition, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of abutting against the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface forward of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end faces of the lower frame member 20, respectively.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for outer frame upper hinge member]
Next, the locking mechanism for the main body frame 4 upper hinge member 620 by the locking member 66 in the outer frame upper hinge member 60 in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65, and the locking body 66a closes a part of the L-shaped bent bearing groove 63. At the same time, the tip of the locking body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and a space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism for the main frame hinge pin 622 using the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that in the normal support state, in which the main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a is close to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a small gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65, and they are not in contact), the centers of the main frame hinge pin 622 located in the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are offset diagonally and face each other.

In this normal support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame, which supports the heavy main frame 4, is in contact with the front end of the bearing groove 63, so there is almost no load from the hinge pin 622 on the front end of the lock body 66a. In other words, there is no load on the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. In the figure, the center of the arc on the front end of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the action force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is pulled out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a L-shape and abuts against the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, when the action force F is divided into a component force F1 (normal to the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and a component force F2 acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66), so no moment is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in a direction away from the right hanging portion 65, and the state in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is sandwiched between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63 is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal support state or when the force of the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is applied to the locking member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66 is not constantly loaded, preventing plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c which is integrally formed from synthetic resin, and preventing the hinge pin 622 on the main frame from falling off the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is rotated in a direction moving to the right, the front right side of the locking body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65 and does not rotate any further, so that the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension 62.

In addition, even if the shape of the front end surface of the locking body 66a is not arc-shaped, by positioning the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or at a position where a rotational moment is generated that rotates the front end of the locking member 66 toward the outside of the forward extension portion 62, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66, and even if the locking member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the locking body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension portion 62.

When the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. When the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 622 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is abutted against the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. As a result, the lock body 66a that had been closing the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves to the right due to the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is housed in the space in front of the front end of the lock body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is held (locked) in a rotatable state in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63.

When removing the main frame hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to rotate the locking member 66 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the left, and the locking body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This places the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 in communication with the opening, and the main frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Anti-theft mechanism and ball-trapping prevention mechanism at the outer frame lower hinge member]
The following describes the anti-theft mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and the ball trap prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. This fascia board member 50 has a vertical wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640, the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50, so that the illegal tool cannot be inserted any further to the rear side, and illegal acts can be prevented from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 that extends forward. If an unauthorized tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 and bends upward, the return portion 55 can bend the tip of the unauthorized tool further forward, preventing unauthorized tools from being inserted into the rear of the main body frame 4 and reliably preventing unauthorized acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

When the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 is provided with a vertical wall portion 54 extending upward, if a game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so there is a risk of it being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. In contrast, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the fascia board member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74, a left discharge hole 52, and a right discharge hole 53 through which the game ball can pass, so that the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74, etc., and the game ball can be reduced from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

This prevents a game ball from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could cause damage around the outer frame lower hinge member 70, or the main frame 4 not closing normally and creating a gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could then be used to commit fraud.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. Figure 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 20 is a right side view of the door frame, Figure 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 22 is a rear view of the door frame. Figure 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in Figure 19, Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in Figure 19, and Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line C-C in Figure 19. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the rear.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 that is a rectangular frame-shaped unit that extends vertically when viewed from the front, a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular (quadrilateral) outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left end side when viewed from the front of the reinforcement unit 130 and hingedly rotatably attached to the main frame 4, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, and a glass unit 190 attached to the rear underside of the glass unit 190. The door frame 3 and main frame 4 are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, and can be opened and closed. An opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is used to lock the gap between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2. A ball sending unit 250 is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send game balls to the ball launcher 680. A foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to receive game balls that have been launched by the ball launcher 680 but have not reached the play area 5a and discharge them into the lower tray 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to shoot the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the lower part of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, with the front side bulging forward and the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 comprises an upper tray 321 for storing game balls to be shot into the game area 5a, a lower tray 322 arranged below the upper tray 321 and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 or the foul cover unit 270, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, a ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player within the amount of cash inserted into the ball lending machine or the remaining balance on a prepaid card, and It is equipped with a return button 329 for returning cash or prepaid cards minus the amount of game balls loaned from the ball loan machine, a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball loan machine, a left effect selection button 331 and a right effect selection button 332 that can be operated by the player when an effect is presented, and a lower tray ball removal button 333 for ejecting game balls in the lower tray 322 below the tray unit 320.

The performance operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the center of the left and right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can present performance images to the player. This performance operation unit 400, which will be described in detail later, is equipped with a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is positioned within the operation button 410 so that it can be seen from the player side and can display performance images.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and serves to decorate the left outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 is equipped with a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be illuminated for decoration.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the right of the through hole 111, and decorates the right outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is equipped with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 at the front end. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and decorates the upper part of the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, the details of which will be described later, is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center of the front surface, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the back.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front of the main frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 attached to the lower front corner of the front, a tray unit 320 to which the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left outer front surface of the through hole 111, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 with a through hole 111 that is a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and penetrates from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and rotatably attached to the main body frame upper hinge member 620 and main body frame lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, a door frame left side decorative board 160 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 to the left of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and a glass unit mounting member 170 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 is equipped with various decorative boards, ball sending solenoid 255, handle rotation detection sensor 307, handle touch sensor 310, single button operation sensor 312, ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending/returning display unit 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461), upper speaker 573, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has an outer shape in a front view that is a square (rectangle) extending vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape in a front view that is approximately a square extending vertically. The through hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and a lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 110. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is provided with a handle mounting seat 112 formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder mounting section 113 recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end when viewed from the front between the handle mounting seat 112 and the through hole 111 and to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached, a cylinder insertion hole 114 that penetrates the cylinder mounting section 113 from front to back and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, and a ball feed opening 115 that penetrates the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat 112 from front to front on the left side when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance 251a and ball removal opening 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 110 also has a lower tray passage hole 116 that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and exposes the ball discharge hole 276 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, an upper tray passage hole 117 that penetrates from front to back near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, adjacent to the lower edge of the through hole 111, and exposes the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, a glass unit mounting section 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and a speaker insertion hole 119 that penetrates from front to back at both upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110 and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 and 33. The reinforcement unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement metal plate 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a middle reinforcement metal plate 132 extending left and right and attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a left reinforcement metal plate 133 extending up and down and attached along the left edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, a right reinforcement metal plate 134 extending up and down and attached along the right edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcement metal plate 134 and engaging with the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing metal plate 133 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the left reinforcing metal plate 133 with screws. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, etc.

The upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, the right reinforcing metal plate 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing metal plate 132 has a notch 132a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions that are bent in the front-to-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, which increase the strength and rigidity of the plate and also prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire or flathead screwdrivers from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33 etc. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 comprises: a door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 attached to the door-frame base 110 and having a pair of protruding pieces 141a spaced apart vertically; a cylindrical door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 which passes through the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 and has an upper end which is inserted into the door-frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620; a disk-shaped flange member 143 attached to a position between the pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142; and a lock spring 144 which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, through which the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 is inserted, and which urges the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 upward.

The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of a pair of protruding pieces 141a (not shown), and is U-shaped in side view with an open front. The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects the pair of protruding pieces 141a, which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which protrudes above the upper protruding piece 141a, is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the upper door frame hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a that is bent horizontally. This bent portion abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring that can be inserted through the door frame upper hinge pin 142, with its upper end abutting the flange member 143 and its lower end abutting the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143.

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the upper hinge member 140 of the door frame side upper hinge member 620 can be inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or removed downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the upper hinge axis bracket 141 on the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame, and is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 of the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, which will be described later. This allows the upper hinge member 140 and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame-side lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extension piece 151a attached to the door-frame base 110 and extending forward, and a cylindrical door-frame-side lower hinge pin 152 (see Figures 21 and 22) protruding downward from near the front end of the extension piece 151a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape that is roughly L-shaped when viewed from the side. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows toward the bottom. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described below. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 can support the door frame 3 so that it can rotate relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative board 160 includes a door frame left side upper decorative board 161 that extends vertically from a height position lower than the speaker insertion hole 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction, and a door frame left side lower decorative board 162 that extends vertically from a height position lower than the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to a height approximately the same as the lower end of the upper tray passage hole 117.

The upper left side decorative board 161 and the lower left side decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 each have a number of LEDs 161a, 162a on their front surfaces that can radiate light forward. These LEDs 161a, 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 (described later) when the door frame 3 is assembled, and by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 161a, 162a provided (mounted) on the front, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 31(b) etc. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a protruding portion 172 that protrudes in a rod shape from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below a pair of speaker insertion holes 119, at a location outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

By rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is positioned outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from behind, allowing the glass unit 190 to be inserted into or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 while the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, restricting the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted to the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 has a protruding portion 172 protruding from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so that the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. For this reason, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which it can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state in which it protrudes downward from the base 171. In addition, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a rotation position in which the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 170, the entire member does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is moved outward beyond the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, allowing the upper side of the glass unit 190 to be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle attachment member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 182 extending from the rear end of the tube portion 181 outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181, a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 183 protruding into the tube portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the tube portion 181 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer circumferential surface of the tube portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181.

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 abutting against the front surface of the handle mounting surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side of the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed in positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned, and the rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated relative to the door frame base 110.

In addition, since the axis of the tube portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, by mounting it on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, the axis of the tube portion 181 is inclined to extend forward to the right, and the handle unit 300 can be mounted to the door frame base 110 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and two transparent glass plates 192 that close the inside of the frame of the glass frame 191 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear directions so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 191b that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 191a of the glass frame 191 are capable of abutting the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b is capable of being inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame base 110 by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110, abutting the front end of the glass frame 191 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, and rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 to abut the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 against the rear surface of the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191.

To remove the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 190 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Anti-theft cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 202 projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the body portion 201, and a pair of locking pieces 203 arranged spaced apart on the left and right, projecting forward beyond the body portion 201, and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion 202 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 201. This rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 202 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game balls (game balls launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and do not impede the shooting of game balls into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. This allows the security cover 200 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the rear projection 202, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201, is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the component 1000 described below. Also, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projection 202 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 located near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view and between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112, and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 in cooperation with a locking unit 700 (described later).

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is equipped with a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends forward and backward, a rotation transmission member 212 that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and transmits the rotation operation of the key inserted into the keyhole 211a to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and if the key is a corresponding one, it can be rotated a specified angle in either the clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and has a pair of notches 212a cut from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other across the central axis. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and by inserting the protrusions of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 into the pair of notches 212a, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In detail, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular, flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view, a pair of side plate portions 213b extending flatly backward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a, and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending flatly from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in a direction away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 from the rear at a position approximately in the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is such that the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side as viewed from the front is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side as viewed from the front is attached to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130. As a result, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 connects the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 114 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed within the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open to the rear.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 34 to 41. Fig. 34(a) is a front view of the performance operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the performance operation unit. Also, Fig. 35(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. Fig. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Fig. 37 is a cross-sectional view cut along line D-D in Fig. 34(a), and Fig. 38 is a cross-sectional view cut along line E-E in Fig. 34(b). Fig. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along line F-F in Fig. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). Fig. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Fig. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can also present performance images to the player.

The performance operation unit 400 is equipped with an operation button 410 that has a circular outer shape and is transparent at the center except for the outer edge, which can be pressed by the player, a frame unit 415 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, a decorative board unit 420 that is positioned behind the operation button 410 and can illuminate and decorate the outer edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, a base unit 430 that is attached to the rear of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and decorative board unit 420 attached to the front, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is attached to the base unit 430 so that it can be seen from the player side through the operation button 410 and can display performance images.

[3-4a. Operation buttons]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 42. Fig. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side except for the outer periphery is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is equipped with a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical shape) with a circular periphery and a central side bulging forward, an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a material that is difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially uniform thickness throughout. The front side of the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without any irregularities. The button lens 411 includes a first button decoration part 411a that extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) at a position on the inner periphery of the button frame 412, recessed from the back surface into a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b that extend on an axis toward the center at a position on the outer periphery side of the first button decoration part 411a, recessed from the back surface into an arc-shaped cross section, and are arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction.

As shown in the figure, when assembled to the operating button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 toward the center, with the groups on the left and right sides extending further toward the center than the groups on the top and bottom sides.

The multiple second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, with three formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that their front sides are approximately flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 has a lens effect that refracts light due to the unevenness of the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, making it difficult to see clearly from behind.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and has multiple (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an arc shape for a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a main body 413a that is approximately cylindrical and extends in the front-rear direction, a ring-shaped flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, a plurality of guide bosses 413c (four in number) that protrude cylindrically from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, a plurality of detection pieces 413d (three in number) that protrude in a strip-like shape from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged in the circumferential direction, a base opening 413e that penetrates the flange 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body 413a, extends a predetermined length along the outer periphery, and is formed in the circumferential direction in a plurality of (six) base openings 413e, and an inner extension 413f that extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape and narrows inward (toward the center) so that the front end side fits along the inner surface of the button lens 411.

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the main body 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide bosses 413c are each slidably inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, with two on the upper side and one on the lower side, in the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided three on each side, and correspond to the second button decorative part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension 413f, which tapers inward, is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface) and is formed transparent, so that the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and is biased forward by the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer periphery abutting against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and moves backward until the rear end abuts against the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. When the pressure detection sensor 440 detects the detection piece 413d, it means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the first button decoration 411a is formed around the entire circumference of the operation button 410, extending from the inner edge of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 toward the center, making it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

The front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 of the operation button 410 is closed by the button lens 411 and button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 makes the transparent portion through which the rear can be seen narrow inward from the outer periphery relative to the outer diameter of the operation button 410. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner periphery of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413a) protrudes rearward from the front surface of the decorative board unit 420 through the inner periphery of the decorative board unit 420. This prevents light irradiated forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420 from leaking from the outside to the inside of the button base 413, and prevents light irradiated forward from the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, operation button right inner decorative board 434, operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and operation button lower inner decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the LEDs mounted on the first LED 422a, 423a and second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, and the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 can prevent areas other than those intended for illumination decoration from being illuminated, allowing for attractive illumination decoration.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 41. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed into a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a.

The frame unit 415 comprises a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a and attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates from front to back, a plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that penetrate from front to back on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and extend in an arc along the periphery of the central opening 416a and are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a cutout portion 416c that is cut out to a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The central opening 416a is formed to be approximately the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 to abut against the outer periphery rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, three on each side, and are closed from the rear by frame side lenses 417. The cutouts 416c also penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and a frame top lens 418 is fitted into them from the front.

The frame body 416 also has a generally cylindrical inner tube portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner tube portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tube portion 416d is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, and separates the first LEDs 422a, 423a from the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting parts 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame body 416 (performance operation unit 400) has a pair of mounting parts 416e and the left and right sides of the cutout part 416c that are attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 has a plated layer with a metallic luster formed on almost the entire surface, except for a region of the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite the central opening 416a from the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached).

The frame side lens 417 closes the peripheral openings 416b, three of which are formed on each side of the frame body 416 from the rear. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed as a smooth surface without any irregularities, and the rear side has multiple irregularities formed along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 39 and 46). These multiple irregularities refract light, making it impossible to see behind the frame side lens 417.

The frame top lens 418 has a generally rectangular outer shape so that it fits into the cutout 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In addition, the rear side of the frame top lens 418 has multiple rows of irregularities that extend in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see Figures 37 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple irregularities, making it impossible to see the rear side of the frame top lens 418.

When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 are positioned in front of the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be illuminated and decorated by the second LEDs 422b, 423b etc. mounted thereon.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 43. Fig. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit when viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, and can impart vibration to the performance operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 comprises a C-shaped board base 421 that is open on the upper side, a left outer decorative board for operation buttons 422 and a right outer decorative board for operation buttons 423 that are respectively attached to the front of both the left and right sides of the board base 421, a vibration motor 424 that is attached to the lower front of the board base 421, and a motor cover 425 that is attached to the front of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The inner circumference of the substrate base 421 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer circumference is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 and smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left operation button outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The left operation button outer decorative board 422 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 422a. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 423a. Both the front and rear surfaces of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and vibrations can be generated by rotating this weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame unit 415 is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 can illuminate and decorate only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, and can illuminate and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b.

In addition, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, causing the entire performance operation unit 400 to vibrate.

[3-4d. Effects of the Production Operation Unit]
The effect of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 44 to 46. Fig. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in Fig. 37. Fig. 45(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the view of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and Fig. 45(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. Fig. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and Fig. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends.

The presentation operation unit 400 of this embodiment can show the player presentation images according to the game state that changes as the game ball is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and can have the player operate the operation button 410 to participate in the presented presentation, allowing the player to enjoy it.

The performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall height is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall width is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. When viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is positioned in the center in the left-right direction below the play area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110).

The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. When the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In other words, only the upper portion of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, and it is attached in a suspended state.

The performance operation unit 400 is attached so that the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 is inclined so that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface), moves upward as it moves forward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. As a result, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1 to play a game using this pachinko machine 1, the player's head is located in front of the center of the play area 5a on the game board 5 located above the plate unit 320 (performance operation unit 400), so that the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the play area 5a to the performance operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 will be seen as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL), allowing the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 inside the operation button 410 to be clearly visible.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four retaining holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are biased forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not being pressed), the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 400, the center side (the side of the central axis CL) near the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the part that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

In this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) protrudes approximately 4 cm forward from the front surface of the frame unit 415 in the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

Under normal conditions, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts against the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 stops. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for effects provided on conventional pachinko machines, so there is a high possibility that the peripheral area away from the center of the button lens 411 will be pressed. In more detail, the operation buttons for effects on conventional pachinko machines are attached so that their central axes extend approximately parallel to the vertical, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached so that its central axis CL is inclined relative to the vertical. Therefore, when a player presses the operation button 410 from above as in conventional pachinko machines, the player will press a part of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL, as shown by the hollow arrow in FIG. 44.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the operation buttons for effects are formed on a flat surface that is pressed by the player. If the operation button is made larger while keeping the part that is pressed on a flat surface, when a part of the operation button that is not in the center is pressed, the surface that is pressed will tilt so that the part that is pressed will move back first, and the operation button will not be able to move back in a straight line, which could make it impossible to press the operation button.

In contrast, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface (a part of a roughly spherical surface) that bulges forward at the part (button lens 411) that the player presses, so when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 can move straight backward. Therefore, no matter where on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can move back smoothly without tilting, so the pressing operation can be detected reliably, and the effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be fully enjoyed.

In addition, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 so that the performance operation unit 400 can be suspended. Therefore, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration occurs at the part farthest from the part where it is attached, so the entire performance operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly) and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the performance operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is located directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press (the position of the white arrow in Figure 44), a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, surprising the player and allowing him to enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 that forms the lower surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, so that when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., can bend downward to absorb the impact until the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and excessive force is prevented from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the performance operation unit 400, etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a lot of force when a performance is presented to the player in which the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the performance operation unit 400 will not be damaged, and interruption of the game due to damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented, and by making it less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the gaming facility can be prevented.

As mentioned above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses is formed into a curved surface (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) that protrudes forward, making it stronger and more rigid than if it were flat. Even if it is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the entire button lens 411, making it less likely to break.

As shown in FIG. 46, the button lens 411, frame side lens 417, frame top lens 418, and operation button interior decorative member 432 of the performance operation unit 400 are made of transparent materials, so that the uneven decorations formed on the back sides of the first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button interior decorative part 432f, and second button interior decorative part 432g can be seen from the front side (player side). In addition, in the areas where the uneven decorations are formed, the plate thickness changes and light refracts in a complex manner, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where the uneven decorations are formed.

The performance operation unit 400 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, and the uneven decoration of this first button decoration part 411a makes it difficult to see behind at the outer edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (behind the direction of the central axis CL), there is a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall part 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432, but the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side). This prevents the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 is provided with an internal decorative member 432 that is fixed in position, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable when they see the operation button 410, and also allows the internal decorative member 432 to be positioned without problems inside the transparent operation button 410, improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In more detail, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 prevent the unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420, which are located outside the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 and on the rear side (back side) from being seen by the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is made invisible to the player. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412, the outside and back side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be hidden and made difficult to see, improving the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, while the second button interior decoration 432g formed on the front plate 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 located on the inside rear of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL and is arranged in a row in concentric circles, so that, as shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button interior decoration 432g intersect, allowing the player to see a geometric decoration.

In addition, because the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the performance operation unit 400 are separated in the front-to-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g can present the player with a geometric pattern that has a deep, three-dimensional feel, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g are separated in the front-to-rear direction, so that when the player's eye position moves, the overlapping degree between the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration 432g changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration and entertaining the player.

In this way, the performance operation unit 400 can present a dynamic, three-dimensional decoration to the player through the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, the operation unit 400 has a left operation button interior decorative board 433, a right operation button interior decorative board 434, an upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and a lower operation button interior decorative board 436 arranged behind the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the front of these, the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. In other words, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are positioned inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, as shown in Figure 38, so that the light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a first LED 422a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and a first LED 423a on the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the second button decorative part 411b facing through the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and by illuminating these first LEDs 422a, 423a, the six second button decorative parts 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a on the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the first LED 423a on the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are positioned between the cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the cylindrical inner tube 416d in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415, so that light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body 413a or to the outside of the inner tube 416d, and only the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating these second LEDs 422b, 423b. The second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are located between the cylindrical inner tube portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416, and the light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner tube portion 416d or to the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating a number of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 is attached, up to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418, so that light from the LEDs of the frame top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view cut along line L-L in Figure 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the front left side so as to cover the front sides of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 comprises a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front of the left unit base 531; a translucent left unit decorative lens member (not shown) disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at its front end; and a cylindrical frame-shaped member attached to the upper front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. a left unit upper decorative base 534 that extends vertically along with the left unit upper decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 that is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member; and a plurality of decorative members 537 that are attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has multiple openings 531a penetrating the front from front to back. As shown in the figure, the multiple openings 531a include circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is attached to the left front side of the door frame base 110 so that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) face forward from the multiple openings 531a. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is located approximately in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. This left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque material.

The left unit base 531 also has a left reflective standing wall 538 (see Figs. 5 and 23) that stands toward the front from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. The left reflective standing wall 538 has a flat inner surface that faces the through hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. The reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the left reflective standing wall 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall 33.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular when viewed from the front and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion 532b that is rectangular when viewed from the front and corresponds to the rectangular opening 531a. The door frame left side unit 530 is formed so that the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b when assembled to the door frame 3.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward as a point. The light irradiated forward from this circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated.

The rectangular lens section 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 comprises a central diffusion reflection section 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, a front diffusion lens section 532d that is formed outside the central diffusion reflection section 532c on the front surface, an input lens section 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection section 532c), and a front reflection section 532f that is outside the input lens section 532e on the rear surface and is generally inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e.

The front diffuse lens section 532d of the rectangular lens section 532b is formed by a number of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection section 532c. More specifically, when the front diffuse lens section 532d is cut in the radial direction, the cross-sectional shape is such that the grooves are recessed in an arc shape toward the rear, and the peaks between the grooves are bulged in an arc shape toward the front, forming a smooth wavy front surface. The front diffuse lens section 532d is also formed such that the grooves and peaks are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing it in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are V-shaped from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape, with the mountain parts between the grooves being triangular and pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and mountain parts move forward as they move away from the center. The front reflecting portion 532f is also formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines dividing the front reflecting portion 532f ...

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a on the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the rectangular lens section 532b, the light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens section 532e into the rectangular lens section 532b. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it can refract the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front, and guide almost all of the input light to the cone-shaped central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is reflected by the inclined cone surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c so as to be diffused in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (a direction parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160), and travels from the center to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b. Furthermore, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels from the center to the outside (away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) throughout the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b approximately parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. At this time, the forward reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, so that the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center (see FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction at the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c can be sequentially reflected forward by the forward reflecting portion 532f as it moves from the center to the outside.

The light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffuser lens section 532d has a wavy cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f in various directions, and can irradiate the light forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) approximately uniformly from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b.

In the front diffusion lens section 532d and the front reflection section 532f of this rectangular lens section 532b, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple lines extending radially, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b from becoming light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and to irradiate light with a more uniform shade forward. This allows the multifaceted decorative section in front of the rectangular lens section 532b in the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed to fit the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and a polyhedral decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion that is recessed in the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. The circular decorative portion and the polyhedral decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the polyhedral decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube that extends from front to back. The part that forms the lower surface of the outer periphery of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that it protrudes downward as it moves from the front end to the rear end, and the lower part of this part is perforated from front to rear. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, which is open upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it moves upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the vertical middle part is concave backwards, and is composed of an L-shaped part whose lower part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, an L-shaped part whose upper part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit lower decorative base 535, and a straight part connecting the lower end of the upper L-shaped part and the upper end of the lower L-shaped part.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both the top and bottom ends to the front of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front of the left unit lower decorative base 535. This left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent material, so that the left unit decorative lens member located at the rear can be seen from the front.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative members 537 are made of an opaque material.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the back. Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line M-M in Figure 51(a). Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in Figure 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front, a door frame right side decorative board 552 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551, a transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553 that is attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, to the left of the center when viewed from the front, on the front of the right unit base 551, and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 that is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit left cover 555 that is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit left decorative member 554.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the right side of the center in front view on the front surface of the right unit base 551 and to the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in a front view, extending in the up-down and front-to-back directions, a sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit right cover 558 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a right unit left light blocking member 559, which is a shallow box-like opaque member that is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions with the front and right sides open, and a right unit right light blocking member 560, which is a flat, opaque member that is attached to the left of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559.

The door frame right side unit 550 is provided with a right unit decorative lens member 561 having translucency and a polyhedral decoration at the front end, which is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a right unit decorative base 562 in the form of a frame that penetrates from front to back and is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the right unit cover 563. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right unit base 551 so as to penetrate vertically, and is provided with a connection cable for connecting the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame top unit relay board 589 of the door frame top unit 570.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, extending vertically and horizontally, and a short rectangular cylindrical shape extending front to back, with the center in the front to back direction closed off in a box shape. This right unit base 551 is made of an opaque material.

The right unit base 551 also has a right reflective wall portion 568 (see Figs. 6 and 24) that stands toward the front side from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. In this right reflective wall portion 568, the inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. In addition, like the inner surface of the left reflective wall portion 538, this reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the right reflective wall portion 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, this right reflective wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective wall portion 33.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is equipped with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of middle LEDs 552c mounted in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating and decorating the right unit left decorative member 554 through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for illuminating and decorating the right unit right decorative member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in white on both the front and back. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comprises a flat main body 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall 553b protruding in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body 553a to the right as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout 553c cut from the right end side of the rear wall 553b to the left as viewed from the front and formed in multiple places at regular intervals in the vertical direction, a shallow storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a as viewed from the front so that the right unit left decorative member 554 can be stored in it, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and provided in multiple vertical directions, and side reflecting portions 553f arranged in multiple vertical directions on the right side of the main body 553a as viewed from the front so that each input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 553b abuts against the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The multiple cutouts 553c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be effectively illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 553e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 553a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 553e has a rectangular part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 553e are each located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the left LED 552a to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 553a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, the side reflector 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain portion between the grooves facing toward the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc grooves as the boundary.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 553a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 553e as the center.

The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 553a moves to the right as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens section 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body 553a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflector 553f.

The light that is incident forward from the input lens section 553e into the main body section 553a hits the sawtooth side reflecting section 553f and is reflected to the left when viewed from the front, and is irradiated outward from the left surface of the main body section 553a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right when viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 553f) of the main body section 553a, but since the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body section 553a is a white material, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body section 553a and is irradiated to the left. Therefore, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f inside the main body 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflector 553f, reflected to the left by the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559, and passed through the main body 553a are irradiated to the left from the left surface of the main body 553a, allowing the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 553f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines to alternately arrange the concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a does not become light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and light with a more uniform shade can be irradiated to the left. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is made of a transparent material, so that from the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 553d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 553f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflector 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be decorated with the side reflector 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is decorated with translucent decorations such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. In detail, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 556b protruding in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 556a to the left as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 556c cut from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b as viewed from the front to the right and formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, a storage recess 556d that is shallowly recessed on the right side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front so that the right unit right decorative member 557 can be stored, input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and side reflecting portions 556f that are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front.

The body 556a of the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corners on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the body 553a of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the body 556a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves leftward as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. The front end of the body 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of this rear wall 556b abuts against the right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553.

The multiple cutouts 556c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutouts 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening that penetrates from front to back, and the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from this opening, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 556e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 556a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 556e are each located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the right LED 552b to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 556a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 556f is formed of multiple concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens 556e. In each of these multiple concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens 556e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens 556e, the side reflector 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain part between the grooves facing the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 556f is formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial lines dividing the multiple concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 556a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 556e as the center.

The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 556a moves to the left as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens section 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflector 556f.

The light incident forward from the input lens section 556e into the main body section 556a hits the sawtooth side reflecting section 556f and is reflected to the right when viewed from the front, and is irradiated outward from the right surface of the main body section 556a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (leftward when viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 556f) of the main body section 556a, but since the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body section 556a is a white member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body section 556a and is irradiated to the right side. Therefore, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f inside the main body 556a and the light irradiated to the left from the side reflector 556f, reflected to the right by the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560, and passed through the main body 556a are irradiated to the right from the right surface of the main body 556a, allowing the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a to be illuminated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 556f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines to alternately arrange the concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated outward (to the right) from the right surface of the main body 556a does not become light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and light with a more uniform shade can be irradiated to the right. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent material, so that from the right side of the main body 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 556d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 556f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflector 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with translucent material, such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same or different.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape in a side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is provided with a flat body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b that protrudes in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 559a to the right when viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 559c that is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall portion 559b when viewed from the front to the left and is formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d that extend to the right from the right surface of the body portion 559a and extend from the rear wall portion 559b to the front end of the body portion 559a.

The body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is vertically extending rectangular with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed to have approximately the same external shape as the body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right of approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 559b abuts against the left surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560.

The multiple cutouts 559c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The multiple reinforcing parts 559d are provided in three sets spaced a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction, with each set consisting of a pair of reinforcing parts 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction at approximately the same height as the left-right width. Each set of reinforcing parts 559d is formed in a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These multiple reinforcing parts 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is slanted so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right side opening that opens to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white material. As shown in FIG. 55, when the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the respective main body parts 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged in close proximity to the main body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body parts 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart in the left-right direction, forming a space that extends up-down and front-back by a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decorative lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed from an opaque material, preventing the light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 from interfering with each other, and the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated only by the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and middle LED 552c, respectively.

Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 have their internal spaces vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, so that the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552, which are located at the rear of each divided space, can prevent light interference between the spaces, and the parts located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided vertically into multiple (four) areas, and each can be illuminated and decorated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 has a circular decorative part 561a that is circular when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative part 561b that extends vertically and has multiple polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative part 561a is formed in a shape with multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical part that is concave on the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative part 561b is formed in a shape in which multiple rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of multiple triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part.

In more detail, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed so that, in the areas located in front of each of the spaces divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left shading member 559, in the top three areas, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on both the top and bottom sides of the circular decorative part 561a located in the vertical center, and in the lowest area, only the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 located at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so that it can cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward beyond the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decorative base 562 is formed from an opaque material.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that it can close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit cover 563 is formed from a transparent material, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 located on the rear side can be seen from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically and are attached to the front of the right unit cover 563 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 564 are made of an opaque material. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward in a plate shape farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The door frame right side unit 550 can independently illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 and right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end.

The door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, so when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement parlor, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between it and the adjacent pachinko machine on the right side. This gives players playing with this pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

In addition, because the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in an amusement parlor where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can be seen from the side along the island equipment, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out in an amusement parlor where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a malfunction such as ball jamming or an error occurs in this pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 on both the left and right sides are illuminated and decorated in a unique manner, so that the occurrence of the malfunction can be immediately notified to the game parlor staff so that they can respond quickly to the malfunction, which can quickly resolve the interruption of the player's play and prevent the player from becoming frustrated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 56 to 59. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line P-P in Figure 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 comprises a central base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, a pair of side bases 572 attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571 and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a box-shaped base 573 extending left and right with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward and open at the rear, penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573. The unit body 271 has a pair of openings 574a and multiple slits 574b (three on each side) that extend from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center, penetrate in the front-rear direction, and are spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572; and speaker covers 575 made of punching metal that are disposed in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 is made up of a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front of the unit body 271 in the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a plurality of transparent flat light guide members (three on each side) that are attached to the front of the unit body 271, close the plurality of slits 574b, and extend from near the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 across the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 271. 578, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271 and cover the front surfaces of the multiple (three) light guide members 578, and a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 further includes a door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584, which are attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, respectively, and have LEDs mounted at the locations facing the left and right outer ends of the multiple (three) light-guiding members 578, a pair of board bases 585 attached to the locations through which multiple (three) slits 574b are formed on both the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585, respectively, and have multiple LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271, and a pair of light-shielding members 588 attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 in front of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, a relay board cover 590 attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front of the door frame top unit relay board 589, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and a lower cover 592 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed into a rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has multiple projections and recesses on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached at an angle so that the front surface of each of the pair of upper speakers 573 moves backwards on the side closer to the left-right center of the door frame top unit 570 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers that can output sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the lower portions near both the left and right ends of a rectangle extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower edge. The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the shape seen from the front combines a rectangle extending left and right, a trapezoid that protrudes forward with a base that is about 1/2 the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the left and right center of the front edge of the rectangle, and a rectangle that protrudes forward a short distance with the front edge of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, both sides of the part that protrudes forward at the left and right center on the front surface of the unit body 271 are located behind (recessed) the line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the part that protrudes forward.

The unit body 271 has openings 574a that penetrate from the front to the rear in areas from both left and right ends of the front surface to positions outside the area protruding forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits 574b that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front and rear direction in areas that extend diagonally from the area protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of the area that extends diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit body 271 to near the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 271, three on each side, spaced apart vertically.

The unit body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut into a square shape from the rear end to the front in the center of the left-right direction on the top surface, and a lower opening 574d cut into the bottom surface from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit body 271 also has a top left decorative part 574e and a top right decorative part 574f that extend vertically on both the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative part 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative part 574f is formed so that its front surface is located further forward than the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. This unit body 271 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the left-right center on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a shape that, when viewed from the front, combines a roughly square irregular pentagon bent so that the left-right center of the bottom side is located downward, and a roughly right-angled triangle that connects the tips of the sides that extend outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the irregular pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it moves downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape overall and is translucent.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 in a tilted state, with its front surface aligned with the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576, and moving rearward as it moves downward. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and by illuminating these LEDs, the top middle decorative member 576 can be illuminated and decorated.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent material. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape of both the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit body 271. If the side closer to both left and right ends of the unit body 271 is the end side, and the side closer to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is composed of a straight portion 578a that extends straight from the end side to the center side, and an arc portion 578b that extends in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward as it moves from the end side of the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b. In addition, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the up-down direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b decreases as it moves toward the center side. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection section 578c consisting of sawtooth projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the straight section 578a, and a diffuse input section 578d consisting of multiple projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the arc section 578b.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends in the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584, and the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the outer ends in the left and right directions, the light travels toward the center inside the straight portion 578a and is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffusion reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light-guiding member 578, and the portion of each of these in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated and decorated.

When light from the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is incident on the light guide member 578 through the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. This allows the area located in front of the arc portion 578b on the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated.

In this way, the light-guiding member 578 guides the light from the LEDs 583a, 586a on the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the LEDs 584a, 587a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, allowing the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 located in front to be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guiding members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 are formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding members 578, and cover the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding members 578. The front of each decorative lens portion 579a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates almost the entire area to the left of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens sections 580a that accommodate the three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens section 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding member 578, and covers the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding member 578. The front of each decorative lens section 580a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative part 574f of the unit body 271. In other words, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates almost the entire area to the right of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a, 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271, between the left opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576, from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the gap between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579, with the center of the front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580, between the right opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side protrudes forward further than the front side of the top right decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is made of an opaque material.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative part 574e) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has the LED 583a mounted in a position facing the left end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front side to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative part 574f) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has the LED 584a mounted in a position facing the right end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall that is approximately square in side view with sides extending up and down and front and rear, a rear wall that is rectangular in front view extending from the rear side of the side wall at a right angle outward in the left and right direction, an upper wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the upper sides of the side wall and the rear wall with a line connecting the front end of the upper side of the side wall to the middle of the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a lower wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the lower sides of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with the upper and lower hypotenuses open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. This board base 585 is fitted with a door frame top center left decorative board 586 or a door frame top center right decorative board 587 so that the open areas are closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the left side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the left of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 has multiple LEDs 586a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b to the left of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 586a, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 can illuminate and decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the right side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the right of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has multiple LEDs 587a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b to the right of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 587a, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can illuminate and decorate the area of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other by opaque materials. The light-shielding members 588 separate the upper and lower portions of the multiple LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. This light-shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light-guiding members 578 only by the LEDs 586a, 587a located immediately behind each light-guiding member 578, and the decorative lens parts 579a, 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well illuminated and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 relays the connections between the pair of upper speakers 573, the door frame top middle decorative board 577, the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of this door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction, and the front sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on both the left and right sides are curved as if carved out backwards, giving the player the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes significantly forward, strongly drawing the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 located in the center, and are formed to extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on both the left and right ends of the unit body 271. This allows the door frame top unit 570 to decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3.

In this case, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal, located behind each of the left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are located, and the speaker covers 575 face forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a, 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the player to hear the sounds output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition and enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

The door frame top unit 570 can also guide light from the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 through a plurality of light-guiding members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front of the upper part of the door frame 3, including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Function and effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines, and the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. As a result, the front of the game board 5 (play area 5a) attached to the main frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190), and this corresponds to the game board 5 with a wide play area 5a.

The door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 400 having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the left-right center of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111, and the front (front of the dish front lower decorative part 326c) of the lower half (part below the upper dish 321) on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape that is carved out backwards (a concave curved shape so that the front of both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located further back than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the dish unit 320 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front of the dish unit 320 in the left-right center appears to protrude forward, so that the performance operation unit 400 can be made to stand out and be emphasized to the player, and the performance operation unit 400 can be strongly drawn attention to it.

The door frame 3 is attached with the performance operation unit 400, which is located on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through hole 111, tilted so that the large, semi-spherical, transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Therefore, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face). When the player lowers his or her eyes to look at the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 appears almost directly ahead, allowing the large, round operation button 410 to be strongly visible, heightening anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410. At the same time, the performance image displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, which is located inside the transparent operation button 410, can be clearly seen, allowing the player to fully enjoy the performance image.

The door frame 3 is also provided with a large operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape and has a diameter roughly the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320, so that when operating the operation button 410, any part of the operation button 410 can be touched by moving the hand a short distance, making it relatively easy to "quickly press" the operation button 410. In addition, the large-diameter operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape is attached in an inclined state, so not only can it be pressed from above like the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, but it can also be easily operated from the left, right, or front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 makes the performance using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

The door frame 3 also has the effect of attaching the operation unit 400 to the tray unit 320 in a suspended state, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations according to the game status, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and making the effect using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 in the center of the front of the tray unit 320, making the lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 less noticeable compared to conventional pachinko machines, making it easier for players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400 with respect to the lower dish opening 326d that opens to the left of the performance operation unit 400 on the front of the dish unit 320. This allows the volume of the lower dish 322 to be large relative to the size of the lower dish opening 326d, and ensures a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower dish 322. In addition, since the rear of the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400, when a player puts his/her left hand inside the lower dish 322 or places his/her fingers on the lower dish opening 326d, it is difficult for the player's fingertips to touch the rear wall of the lower dish 322, making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and allowing the player to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower dish 322 is larger than the size of the lower dish opening 326d.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c, through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are released into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a, through which game balls on the lower tray 322 are removed into a money box or the like below the tray unit 320, arranged in a straight line from front to back, and are located on the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d when viewed from the front (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400). In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located at the rear of the performance operation unit 400, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d) on the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, etc., so that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, which makes the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) neater and improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a located below (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322. Therefore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the upper tray 321, etc. to the lower tray 322 are immediately ejected from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a to the dollar box, etc. below as soon as they enter the lower tray 322. At this time, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are not visible from the player's side, so the flow of game balls ejected from the upper tray 321, etc. through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box cannot be seen. This gives the player the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 or the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being discharged directly into the coin box, making it less annoying for the game balls to pass through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of shooting the game balls, the presentation images, etc.) and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a located in a position on the lower tray 322, forward and to the left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the raised wall portion of the lower tray 322 to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is curved diagonally toward the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, so that game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by being reflected off the right wall portion. As a result, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322 (lower tray first area A1). This means that the game balls can be discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without the player being able to see the game balls circulating inside the lower tray 322, achieving the same effect as described above.

The door frame 3 also has a lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326, through which the lower dish 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if a player places his/her hand on the lower dish opening 326d or places his/her hand in the lower dish 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. Therefore, the sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 can be output forward well, allowing the player to enjoy the sound from this pachinko machine 1. In addition, when a player places his/her hand in or approaches the lower dish 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

The door frame 3 is also equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that protrudes forward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the through hole 111. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement parlor, the door frame right side unit 550 acts as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, giving players playing with the pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

Furthermore, the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, can be decorated with illuminating lights, so that even in an amusement parlor where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if you are not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, you can make the presence of the pachinko machine 1 known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

The door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the left-right center in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are formed in a concave shape that carves out the front rearward (a concave curved shape such that the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 are positioned further rearward than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576). This makes it appear as if only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes forward significantly, making the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized to the player, drawing strong attention to the top middle decorative member 576.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the upper part of the door frame is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, the door frame 3 of this embodiment is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, and also includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker covers 575, to both left and right ends, so that the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated. This allows the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 to be decorated, making the pair of upper speakers 573 less noticeable at the top of the door frame 3, and allowing players to immediately recognize that the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing to players, and allowing players to enjoy high-quality stereo sound from the pair of upper speakers 573.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the performance operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protruding forward significantly at the center in the left-right direction below and above the through hole 111, so that the player can see a unified decoration from top to bottom, with a prominent imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and the sophisticated decoration makes the machine stand out more than other pachinko machines, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward. Therefore, when the top middle decorative member 576 and the performance operation unit 400 are illuminated, the player can see an illuminated line extending vertically in the center in the left-right direction on the front of the door frame 3, and the player's gaze can be guided to the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, which is arranged in the center in the left-right direction.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall structure of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 60 to 66. Fig. 60 is a front view of the game board. Fig. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. Fig. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, Fig. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. Fig. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the function display unit in an enlarged view from the front when the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are shot by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 also includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 that controls the game content that is played by shooting game balls into the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 further includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is equipped with a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, with the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a movable piece 2004a that is driven to be able to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 depending on the result of the normal lottery, and a large winning opening 2005 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate section 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached.

The rear unit 3000 further includes a rear left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in the clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the component 1000 has security recesses 1008 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas extending approximately vertically from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the security recesses 1008 are inserted into the rear protruding pieces 202 of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has multiple positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position and fix the inner rail 1002 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has a number of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100 to determine the position relative to the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has a notch 1011 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

[5-2. Game Panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel board 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold obstacle nails planted on the front and the front unit 2000 attached. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the bottom end at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has a number of fitting holes 1113, which are round holes that are arranged near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is arranged near the outer periphery in the lower left corner and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. These fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 are arranged outside the play area 5a and are used to position the panel plate 1110 with respect to the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 also has step-shaped engagement steps 1115 with a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the play area 5a, just like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, to engage and fix the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed in a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusions 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1121 that detachably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction inside the holding step 1121 and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step 1121 is approximately flush with the front surface of the panel holder 1120. The holding step 1121 is also sized so that its front inner peripheral surface forms a predetermined amount of clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the panel plate 1110 to absorb any expansion or contraction that occurs relative to the panel plate 1110 due to temperature changes or changes over time.

The panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and has a number of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into and into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. In detail, the engagement claw 1124 is disposed at the top of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and elastically engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed at the bottom of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 extends a predetermined distance upward (towards the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120, with a gap formed between the front surface of the holding step 1121 and the engagement piece 1125 large enough to insert the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. By engaging the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws 1124 and engagement piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is removably held relative to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has an outlet 1126 that penetrates from front to back at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The lower rear surface of the panel holder 1120 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

The panel holder 1120 further includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a number of mounting holes 1128 that penetrate from front to back at positions corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned between the previous component 1000 and the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the functional display unit 1400 is inserted into this insertion hole 1129.

When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1126 of the panel holder 1120 opens to the rear of the out-guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1126, and are discharged through the outlet 1126 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of the gaming panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 67 and 68. Fig. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel of a different form from that shown in Fig. 63, together with a front component, a board holder, and a main control unit. Fig. 68 is an exploded perspective view of Fig. 67, seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape formed to be approximately the same as that of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 has an outlet 1151 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the previous component 1000 at the lower portion approximately in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 of the gaming panel 1150 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

The game panel 1150 also has a notch 1152 that penetrates horizontally in the front-to-back direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is open downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and a square insertion hole 1153 that penetrates in the vertical direction above the notch 1152 and through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1154 penetrating from the front to the rear, into which the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted, at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating from the front to the rear, at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the gaming panel 1150 can be positioned between the previous component 1000.

Furthermore, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with multiple openings that run through it from front to back for mounting the front unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1151 opens to the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, game balls that flow down to the bottom end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1151, and are discharged through the outlet 1151 to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom. This allows the board holder 1200 to receive all game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and to discharge them downward from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 65. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms, and when one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, that sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board box 1320 and the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 are all made of transparent materials so that they can be visually inspected from the outside. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are provided with surface mounting areas that are inferior in terms of fraud prevention performance, and therefore it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain the various effects related to the fraud prevention measures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 64 to Fig. 66. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the play board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see Fig. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 comprises a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, a normal pattern indicator 1402 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, a first special pattern indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002, and a second special pattern indicator 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002. It mainly comprises a first special reserved number display 1404 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number; a second special pattern display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; a second special reserved number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; and a round display 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot", etc.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Although not shown in the figure, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, moving performance, etc., and a performance display control unit for controlling performance images.

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side performance display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. In detail, the game board side performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the approximate center of the rear wall of the rear box 3010. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side performance display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and videos.

The game board side performance display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side as viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side as viewed from the front. With the LCD screen facing forward, the game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixed grooves 3010c opening on the left inner peripheral surface as viewed from the front in the frame-shaped LCD mounting part 3010b of the rear box 3010 described later, and then moving the right fixed piece 1602 side forward to insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020 and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, with the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and the rear end penetrating the opening 1112 and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 of this embodiment is equipped with a plurality of regular winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive game balls shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of regular winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the regular lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive the game ball depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery that is drawn when the game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

Multiple general winning openings 2001 are located at the bottom of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and approximately directly below the impact stop section 1006. The second starting opening 2004 is located directly below the gate section 2003 and to the right when viewed from the front. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the outlet 1126.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located directly above the outlet 1126 near the bottom end of the left-right center in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time, and a large winning port 2005 that extends left and right and is large enough to accept multiple game balls at a time (e.g., 4 to 6 balls), and is formed so that it can be opened and closed depending on the game status.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has multiple general winning holes 2001 that can always receive game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly below the vertical center, at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, within the play area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and game balls that flow down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right (the left-right center of the play area 5a).

The center role 2500 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front. The center role 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center device 2500, except for the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center device 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2520 on the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which opens to allow game balls in the game area 5a to enter, a warp exit 2522 which opens into the frame and allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2520 to be released, and a stage 2530 which releases game balls released from the warp exit 2522 into the game area 5a after rolling them left and right. A start opening unit 2100 is located directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will be received by the first start opening 2002.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board side performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the bottom edge of the opening 3010a and which houses the performance drive board.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the outside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the vertical center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting portion 3010b is formed to be large enough to fit the game board side performance display device 1600 into the frame. The rear box 3010 has a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind, so that the locking mechanism 3020 can slide up and down.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface abutting against the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit, etc.

The back unit 3000 can provide light-emitting effects, movement effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the back-down rear movable performance unit 3100, the back-upper left movable performance unit 3200, the back-left movable performance unit 3300, the back-upper middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back-down front movable performance unit 3500, etc., and can entertain players with various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game Contents]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through the gap between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the front right lower corner of the door frame 3, and the game with the game balls is started. The game balls shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flow down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 302, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the balls can be shot, and up to 100 game balls can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). When the game ball hits the obstacle nails, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, there is also provided at an appropriate position a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball hits it.

When a game ball is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500 while abutting multiple obstacle nails (not shown). Then, when the game ball flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 that opens into the outer periphery of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll back and forth on the stage 2530 before being released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is highly likely to be received by the first starting hole 2002, since it is located directly above the first starting hole 2002. When a game ball is received by the first starting hole 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from anywhere other than the center, it flows down toward the start opening unit 2100. A game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 or an open big prize opening 2005.

If a game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it may be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300 and accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the lower side unit 2200. When a game ball is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when a game ball is hit into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (i.e., hits to the right), the game ball flows down through an area downstream where the gate section 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 are provided.

When the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the second starting hole 2004 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing the game ball to be received by the second starting hole 2004. When the game ball is received by the second starting hole 2004, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., four balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 between the time the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is reserved until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has ended. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming establishment from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., "big win", "medium win", "small win", "probability-changing win", "time-saving win", etc.) that is favorable to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "miss", "small win", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win", "probability-changing (probability-changing) win", "time-saving (time-saving) win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", and "no time-saving win".

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 becomes capable of receiving game balls in a predetermined opening and closing pattern after the special variable time has elapsed. When the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state and a game ball is received into the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by having the large prize opening 2005 receive game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, which can entertain the player.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the large prize opening 2005 repeats an opening and closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it is open for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) to receive game balls and then closes. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big win", when either a predetermined time (e.g., about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large prize opening 2005 has been open to receive game balls, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been received by the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) in which it is closed and cannot receive game balls is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if there is a "2R big win", it repeats two rounds, if there is a "5R big win", it repeats five rounds, if there is a "15R big win", it repeats fifteen rounds, and creates an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "hits" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn ("probability hit"), or that change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving hit").

In this embodiment, if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the indication of the drawn special lottery result, the indication of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the gaming establishment from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 displays three pattern rows consisting of multiple patterns lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each pattern row, sequentially stops and displays the pattern rows that are displayed in a variable manner, and each pattern row that is stopped and displayed is displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows are a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss," after the three pattern rows have stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a small win game, a big win game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the result of the special lottery by the game board side performance display device 1600, depending on the special lottery result, it is possible to appropriately use the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3, the door frame side performance display device 460, various decorations of the center role 2500, various decorations of the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable performance unit 3100, the back top left movable performance unit 3200, the back left movable performance unit 3300, the back top middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable performance unit 3500, etc. to perform light-emitting performance, movable performance, display performance, etc., so that the player can be entertained by various performances and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 is viewed from the outside, the player can see a decoration full of perspective that has never been seen before, such as the overlapping decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and the overlapping decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side performance display device 460, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and differentiated from other pachinko machines.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are arranged in the direction of movement of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 so that it can be moved by the player's operation. Therefore, when the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g move closer to or farther away from each other. This makes it possible to change the perspective of the decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g appear to overlap by changing the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g. The player can change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g by himself, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward toward the opposite side to the internal decorative member 432 of the operation button, a space is formed between them, and therefore, when viewed from the player, the distance between the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button decorative portion 432g of the internal decorative member 432 of the operation button are more greatly different. Even when the button lens 411 is not being moved by operation, when the player's eye position moves, the intersection pattern (degree of overlap) between the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 432g changes, so that the player can be presented with a dynamic decoration, which strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, so that the inner operation button decoration part 432 at the back and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be clearly seen through the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided, and the radial decoration of the first button decoration part 411a can direct the player's gaze toward the center of the button lens 411, so that the player's attention can be strongly directed to the inner operation button decoration part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 is equipped with a second button interior decorative portion 432g having multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered at the center. When viewed from the outside, the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 intersect with each other, ensuring a sense of perspective for the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g. This makes the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g stand out, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

In addition, the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 has multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered on the center, so that the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g can direct the player's gaze and attention to the door frame side performance display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the operation button interior decorative member 432, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration (performance image) of the door frame side performance display device 460.

Furthermore, when the LEDs mounted on the left operation button inner decorative board 433, the right operation button inner decorative board 434, the upper operation button inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button inner decorative board 436 are illuminated, the light can be used to illuminate and decorate the operation button inner decorative member 432, and further, the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated, so that in addition to the decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g, the player can also be entertained by the illuminated decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g can diffuse the light from each of the LEDs of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436. Therefore, the second button interior decoration part 432g is illuminated and decorated by direct light from each of the LEDs of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436, whereas the first button decoration part 411a is illuminated and decorated by the light diffused by the second button interior decoration part 432g. The second button decorative part 432g is illuminated by direct light, and the first button decorative part 411a is illuminated weakly while the second button decorative part 432g is illuminated strongly. Therefore, when the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 432g are viewed from the outside with the LEDs of the left operation button decorative board 433, the right operation button decorative board 434, the upper operation button decorative board 435, and the lower operation button decorative board 436 illuminated, the player can see decorations with a more emphasized sense of perspective, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, there is no need to secure space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be expanded outward and made as large as possible, and the increased size makes the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button stand out. Also, as described above, since there is no need to secure space outside the button lens 411 to move it, by arranging the frame unit 415 in the outer area of the button lens 411, the decorativeness of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and have a high appeal that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when a player strikes the button lens 411 or applies impact to part of its surface, the applied impact force is more likely to be dispersed over the entire button lens 411 than if the button lens 411 had a flat shape, making the button lens 411 less likely to break (be damaged). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during play can be prevented, which can cause the game to be interrupted and can lead to frustration and reduced interest for some players, and because the button lens 411 is less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the gaming parlor in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 arranged in the main frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, the operation button 410, which is a circular shape of about 15 cm in outer diameter within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm and can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player, and the transparent button of the operation button 410 are attached to the unit base 431 of the performance operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111. By attaching the operation button interior decorative member 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 which can be seen from the front through the lens 411, and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame, the performance operation unit 400 having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen in a position where the game ball storage tray would be prominent in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. First LEDs 422a, 423a are provided for illuminating and decorating the second button decorative part 411b, and second LEDs 422b, 423b are provided for illuminating and decorating the frame side lens 417. The frame body 416 includes an inner cylinder 416d that separates the frame side lens 417 from the button lens 411b, and a main body 413a and inner extension 413f that separate the second button decoration 411b from the center of the button lens 411. The inner cylinder 416d, main body 413a, and inner extension 413f prevent light from the first LED 422a, 423a from illuminating the frame side lens 417 or the center of the button lens 411, and prevent light from the second LED 422b, 423b from illuminating the second button decoration 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated clearly, and a good-looking illumination can be produced. In addition, by appropriately combining the off, on, blinking, brightness, color, etc. of the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration 411b, a variety of light-emitting patterns can be produced, preventing the player from becoming bored and entertaining the player, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a, 423a that illuminate and decorate the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b that illuminate and decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided on a single operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431. Therefore, compared to the case where a board is provided on the second button decorative part 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be placed as far away as possible from the second button decorative part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be irradiated to the second button decorative part 411b in a sufficiently diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration 411b can be uniformly illuminated, the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which can strongly attract the player's attention and entertain the player, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431, the wiring connected to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 does not bend or extend as the operation button 410 moves back and forth, eliminating the risk of the wiring breaking due to fatigue. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decorative part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not break, so the player can enjoy the movement (operation) of the operation button 410 and the illuminated decoration of the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative part 411b without any problems, and a decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since a second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, when the rear operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are viewed through the transparent button lens 411, the second button decorative part 411b decorates the outer edges of the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. By appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411, through which the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be seen to the rear, can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns as described above, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and the player can enjoy the illumination effects, the operation of the operation button 410, and the performance images by the door frame side performance display device 460, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the button lens 411 (operation button 410) with the second button decoration 411b on its outer edge can be operated by the player, so that by having the player operate the operation button 410 while a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Furthermore, by illuminating and decorating the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 when a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the operation button 410, so that the player can be encouraged to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player-participation type performance and enjoy it.

Furthermore, since the opaque main body 413a and the inner extension 413f are provided so that only the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the part of the operation button 410 that is closer to the center than the second button decoration 411b is not illuminated (lighted) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 located at the rear are prevented from being difficult to see from the front due to the central side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becoming bright. Therefore, the second button decoration member 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 at the rear can be viewed in a good state through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner tube portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 which is equipped with the frame side lens 417, at the rear side of the frame unit 415, the inner tube portion 416d can completely separate the frame side lens 417 from the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tube 416d closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the rear end of the inner tube 416d is located closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range of the light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, so even if a gap is formed between the front of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a will not illuminate the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b will not illuminate the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner tube 416d, and a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f can completely separate the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the operation button 410. On the other hand, the end (rear end) of the main body 413a close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends further rearward than the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, so that the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration 411b in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

When viewed from the front, the second button decoration 411b is located in front of the outer part of the operation button interior decorative member 432 located behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411), so the second button decoration 411b can make the outer parts and rear side (back side) of the operation button interior decorative member 432 less visible through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative member 432, preventing deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410. In addition, when the second button decoration 411b is illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the outer side and rear side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 become relatively dark compared to the brightness of the second button decoration 411b, so that the outer side and rear side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be made less visible. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410, frame unit 415, decorative members inside the operation buttons 432, and door frame side performance display device 460, and thus prevent a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame side lens 417 adjacent to the second button decoration 411b are formed in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light goes around the outer edge of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., so that the player is less likely to get bored with the various light-emitting effects, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3, and the stored game balls are shot into the game area 5a and used for game play. The performance operation unit 400 is removably attached to the front and below the upper tray 321 to form the remaining space of the mounting space 326j of a predetermined width behind the performance operation unit 400. A portion corresponding to the lower tray first area A1 in the lower tray main body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and a portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended from that portion into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j to attach the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls. This makes the lower tray 322 appear smaller when viewed from the front, making the lower tray 322 less noticeable and making the performance operation unit 400 relatively more noticeable. Therefore, when this pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is visible in the position where the upper and lower trays are seen lined up one above the other in conventional pachinko machines, allowing players to recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to make this pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the player's attention.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery is provided with a lower tray cover 340, 340A that restricts the movement of the game balls to the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that the game balls in the lower tray 322 can be prevented from contacting the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, and the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be prevented from abutting or pressing against the rear side of the performance operation unit 400. Therefore, the game balls do not abut against the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, and the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 is not damaged by the game balls, so that it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to damage to the performance operation unit 400, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game parlor where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is equipped with the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the lower tray cover 340, 340A that restricts the movement of the game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that the game balls can be prevented from entering (spill) from the lower tray body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like he or she has lost money or is uncomfortable if the game ball enters the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325 in the lower tray 322, even if the game ball supplied into the lower tray 322 bounces up inside the lower tray 322, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325, when a player inserts his/her hand into the lower tray second area A2 from the lower tray first area A1 side (lower tray opening 326d) of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A can restrict the fingertips, etc. from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that the fingertips, etc. can be prevented from touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, etc., and being injured, allowing the player to play in a safe environment.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the performance operation unit 400, even if an impact or pressure is applied to the lower tray covers 340, 340A due to a game ball hitting them, the impact or pressure is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the performance operation unit 400, and damage to the performance operation unit 400 can be reliably prevented.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322, a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, so that when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a directly and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), making it difficult for the game balls to reach the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, as described above, the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided, so that the game ball can be prevented from abutting against the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, thereby preventing damage to the performance operation unit 400, reducing interruptions to the game and suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher as it moves forward, so that the game ball moving toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 climbs the inclined bottom surface, thereby attenuating the moving speed of the game ball. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball that abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray cover 340, 340A can reliably restrict the game ball from moving toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the impact when the game ball abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A or the main body vertical wall portion 325b can be reduced, thereby preventing them from being damaged.

In addition, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate components, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, which reduces the burden on the gaming parlor that installs this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001, etc., a tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 is provided, which bulges furthest forward from the center of the left-right direction on the front side, and the performance operation unit 400 is detachably attached to the most forward bulging part, and the tray unit cover 326 is provided with a storage tray consisting of an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 in which game balls can be stored, and the storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) has a lower tray first area A1 located outside the performance operation unit 400 when viewed from the front, and a lower tray second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j which is behind the performance operation unit 400 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 can be made to stand out, and the storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) can be made to appear smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, because the prominent presentation operation unit 400 is visible in the area where the upper and lower trays are visible in conventional pachinko machines, players can immediately recognize that this is a gaming machine that is different from conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the front of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the area on the surface of the dish unit cover 326 where the lower dish 322 is open is small, but since the lower dish main body 325 has the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower dish cover 340, 340A, which has the lower dish second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j, which is behind the performance operation unit 400 when viewed from the front, it is possible to store game balls in the area of the lower dish 322 that cannot be seen from the front (lower dish second area A2). Therefore, contrary to appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, so that the player can concentrate on playing without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower dish 322, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is formed by attaching (combining) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C having the lower tray second area A2 to the lower tray main body 325 and main body part 325A having the lower tray first area A1.By preparing multiple lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of different sizes in advance and attaching the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of sizes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the width of the mounting space 326j within the tray unit cover 326, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be optimized. Also, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C, it is possible to accommodate the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j, and since the size of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the performance operation unit 400, it is possible to make the lower tray 322 compatible with various performance operation units 400 with different amounts of rearward protrusion, thereby increasing the versatility of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the lower tray 322 has a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body vertical wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, so that the lower tray 322 is in the shape of a container recessed downward, and game balls can be stored reliably. In addition, the lower tray cover 340, 340A has a cover vertical wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325, so by preparing lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes in advance and combining (attaching) lower tray covers 340, 340A of shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, it is possible to accommodate various forms and achieve the same effects as described above.

In addition, in the lower dish 322, which is composed of the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A, the lower dish covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325, so the part of the lower dish 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower dish main body 325, and the boundary (seam, dividing line PL) between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A is not located in the part where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower dish main body 325, no force is applied that pulls the lower dish covers 340, 340A away from the lower dish main body 325 even if many game balls are stored, and it is possible to prevent the lower dish covers 340, 340A from coming off the lower dish main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls are provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001, etc., and the performance operation unit 400 arranged in the center in the left-right direction makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322, difficult to see (makes it difficult to see) from the front (player), so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and it can be made into a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 makes it difficult to see the game balls moving from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls inside the lower tray 322, preventing the player from becoming distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 makes it difficult to see the game balls guided by the guide means such as the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, which are located between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 that guides the game balls from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a. Therefore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guide means and smoothly (instantly) ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 400 makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is likely that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400. In other words, because more than half of the lower tray 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400, the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 as it appears from the front, so the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be secured sufficiently compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the guide means such as the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322, the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, and discharged to the bottom of the lower tray 322 (dollar box). This prevents the game balls from circulating around the lower tray 322, and makes it possible to reliably make the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be instantly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the ball guide section 322c etc. without the player noticing, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for the player to feel annoyed by the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 makes more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 in a plan view difficult to see from the front, so the actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size that appears from the front, ensuring a sufficient amount of storage for game balls, just like the lower trays of conventional pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a for mounting a large presentation operation unit 400 of the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 is provided at the left-right center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which bulges forward when viewed from the front below the playing area 5a of the game board 5 where games such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001 etc. are played, and the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, which is lower than approximately the center in the up-down direction, is shaped to be concave so as to be carved out toward the rear, so that the presentation operation unit 400 attached to the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear to protrude significantly forward, making the presentation operation unit 400 stand out. Therefore, in the position where the upper and lower trays were seen lined up in a vertical direction in a conventional pachinko machine, the large presentation operation unit 400 is seen in an emphasized state, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. And, the lower tray 322 is recessed backward from the tray front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed backward on both the left and right outer sides of the presentation operation unit 400 on the front of the tray unit cover 326, and a part of it is made to wrap around the rear of the presentation operation unit 400, so that the storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322 (the volume of the lower tray 322) can be sufficiently secured, so that the player does not have to worry about the lower tray 322 becoming full of game balls while playing, and can concentrate on playing, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400, when a player puts his/her hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, the fingertips are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the front of the tray unit base 323) or the lower tray cover 340. This allows the player to recognize that there is a sufficient amount of game balls stored by touch, and when game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the player can recognize that many game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, so the player can feel satisfied, enjoy the game, and suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 or the lower tray cover 340, the player can be given the same sensation as the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, and makes the player feel at ease and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the lower tray 322 is formed to be wider as it goes towards the back (rear), even if the front side is small, it is possible to ensure a sufficient amount of storage for game balls. In other words, because the front end portion of the lower tray 322 is small, it is possible to make the lower tray 322 less noticeable on the front surface (lower tray front decorative portion 326c) of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 opens, and in comparison, it is possible to make the presentation operation unit 400 more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to provide the presentation operation unit 400 while ensuring a sufficient amount of storage for game balls in the lower tray 322, which increases the appeal to players and entertains the players, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the sides and top of the part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 are covered with the lower tray cover 340, so when a player puts their hand inside the lower tray 322, their fingertips are prevented from touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400, etc., and injury can be prevented, allowing the player to play in a safe environment. The lower tray cover 340 also prevents game balls from entering (spill) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the presentation operation unit 400 is positioned in the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the tray unit cover 326, the presentation operation unit 400 can be made more noticeable to the player, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing and able to strongly attract the player's attention. In addition, the decorations made by the presentation operation unit 400 can be easily seen, allowing players to enjoy the decorations and presentations made by the presentation operation unit 400 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates vertically, so that it has the same function as the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, when a player who is accustomed to conventional pachinko machines plays this pachinko machine 1, he or she will not be confused by the function of the lower tray 322, and can play in the same way as before, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are each located behind the performance operation unit 400, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player's side when viewed from the front, which makes the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and attractive, and makes it possible to make a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and can strongly attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base unit 430 of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the play area 5a in the door frame 3. The operation button interior decorative member 432 that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present a performance to the player is attached to the base unit 430, and a transparent button lever with an outer diameter of about 15 cm and a center that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (outward) is attached to the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432. The operation button 410 having the lens 411 is attached, and the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412, and the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 side is provided. Therefore, the first button decoration part 411a and the button base 413 can reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the inner side (rear side) of the operation button interior decoration part 432 from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration part 432, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration part 432 provided inside, the door frame side performance display device 460, etc. can be further improved, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can make the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 difficult to see through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432. Therefore, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 becomes relatively large by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, it can be well hidden by the first button decoration 411a, etc., so that it is possible to realize a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of about 15 cm without any problems while preventing deterioration of the appearance. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be enlarged, the present pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and it can be made a pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of players and has high appeal.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 side, when the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield anything outside the operation button internal decorative member 432, making it impossible to see, thereby further improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 is made to have a three-dimensional shape (semi-spherical) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (outward), the surface near the outer edge of the button lens 411 is inclined with respect to the plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, a plane perpendicular to the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410), so light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413, it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration part 432 through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432, and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved.

In addition, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 is increased, making it possible to make the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 placed inside the operation button 410 larger and easier to move, making it easier to provide the door frame side performance display device 460 that entertains the player inside the operation button 410, and realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides even more entertainment for the player.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative) quality, which makes the operation button 410 stand out on this pachinko machine 1 and attracts the player's attention, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine as the machine to play.

In addition, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412, which are provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, are opaque, so that the button frame 412 can reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 from being seen through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432, thereby reducing deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410, etc., and improving its appearance.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 that extends from the outer periphery of the button to the inside at a specified width, and works together with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b to make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 and the decorative member inside the operation button 432. This makes it possible to enlarge the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member inside the operation button 432, making it easier to secure space for the operation button 410 to move, and allowing it to move smoothly.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, there is no directionality to the outer periphery compared to when it is polygonal, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made large, it can be pressed without any problems, allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation presentation using the operation button 410 without losing interest.

In addition, because the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player-participation type presentation is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the player can easily touch and press the operation button 410 without having to check the position of the operation button 410 while operating it. This makes it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type presentation using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with a door frame side performance display device 460, by presenting performance images according to the game status, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the door frame side performance display device 460 within the operation button 410, and the player can enjoy the performance provided by the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, the performance images and light-emitting performance provided by the door frame side performance display device 460 can encourage the player to operate the operation button 410, and by having the player actively participate in the player-participation performance and enjoying it, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, some players can be made to think that something good is going to happen, which increases their expectations for the game and suppresses a decrease in interest.

In addition, because the door frame side performance display device 460 can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (the area inside the first button decorative portion 411a) of the large operation button 410, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of this pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players and increasing the player's anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 inside the operation button 410, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is shown to have the first button decoration 411a formed on the inner periphery of the button frame 412, but this is not limited to this, and a button lens 411 that does not have the first button decoration 411a may be used.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. Instead of attaching the button frame 412, a decorative part for hiding the rear side over the entire circumference may be formed at the part of the button lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is shown to have a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the outer edge of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 so as to surround the entire outer circumference of the decorative member inside the operation button 432, but this is not limited to this, and at least one of the button bases may protrude toward the base unit 430 so as to surround only a portion of the entire outer circumference of the decorative member inside the operation button 432. The shape of this button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411, or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration on at least the inner wall side.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the outer left portion of the performance operation unit 400 on the front surface of the tray unit cover 326, but this is not limited to this, and the lower tray 322 may be recessed rearward from both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 and connected to each other behind the performance operation unit 400, or may be recessed rearward only from the outer right portion of the performance operation unit 400, with a portion of it wrapping around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the shape (shape of the front end of the lower dish 322) of the portion (lower dish front decorative portion 326c) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 where the lower dish 322 is recessed rearward is shown as a curved surface recessed rearward, but this is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal column or polyhedron.

In the above embodiment, the example of attaching the performance operation unit 400 to the front of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to attach a unit or panel that includes "one with an operation device such as an operation dial or touch panel," "one with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface," "one with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body," "one with a decorative body that three-dimensionally imitates characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that match the concept of the gaming machine," "one with characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns, etc., that are decorated by stickers or printing, etc., that match the concept of the gaming machine." Also, the member attached to the mounting space 326j (performance operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and multiple (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

In the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is shown to have a performance operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the performance operation unit 400, but this is not limited to the above. The plate unit cover (e.g., a panel-shaped cover portion) may not have an opening (performance operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the performance operation unit 400, and a space equivalent to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. It is preferable to decorate the front of such a plate unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine by using stickers, printing, mounting decorative members, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an area slightly larger than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in a plan view of the lower tray 322 is covered by the performance operation unit 400 as a covering part to make it difficult to see from the front, but this is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the game ball storage area in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as being arc-shaped and partially arranged in the circumferential direction, but this is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be annular and extend around the entire circumference.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the performance operation unit 400 is shown as a decoration having multiple polygonal shapes in a concentric circle centered on the center, but this is not limited to this, and the second button interior decorative part 432g may also be a decoration having multiple circular shapes (including ovals) in a concentric circle centered on the center.

[7. Main control board, dispensing control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 69 to Fig. 74. Fig. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, Fig. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board and the CR unit and the degree display board, Fig. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 73 is a block diagram showing the outline of the peripheral control MPU, and Fig. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that generates a control power source (e.g., +5V, etc.) and controls the game, including the payout of prize balls, and a second control unit SCG that performs presentations related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing multiple boards, and includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931 as the first control unit MCG, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. In explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will first be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510).

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the above-mentioned first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is mainly composed of a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on and has various control programs such as a main control program that controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, as shown in FIG. 69, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code that is assigned a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual unit. Once assigned, this ID code cannot be rewritten, even using an external device, because it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an") that uses hardware to update random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on a clock signal (a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator, described later) input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as a random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit 1310b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset described below. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type circuit with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, which has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to external boards, etc. is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that no signal based on that information is output from its various output terminals. In contrast, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is not input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, the first start port sensor 4002 that detects game balls that have entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 that detects game balls that have entered the second start port 2004, and the general winning port sensor 4020 that detects game balls that have entered the general winning port 2001, as well as the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Also, the detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, the count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the large winning port 2005, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 69 and detects fraudulent acts using magnets are input to the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on the detection signals from each of these switches, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of a specific output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407 via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, so that the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 951, and outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e by outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general winning hole sensor 4020 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004 and frequently pass through the gate section 2003, so the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 frequently detect game balls. For this reason, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 use long-life proximity switches. In addition, when a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long lifespan is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, the general winning opening 2001, where game balls do not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general winning opening sensor 4020. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to dispensing as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the dispensing control board 951. When the dispensing control board 951 has successfully received the various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310 to inform the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a also receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and receives various commands from the main control input circuit 1310b as serial data at the input terminal of its specified serial input port. When the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, we will briefly explain the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, is circuit-connected via the bus 1310ah (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and is mainly configured of the transmission shift register 1310aea, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb, the serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa sets multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, thereby continuously transmitting multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") BC0 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 of the dispensing control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is output from the dispensing control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that performs various functions, and an error LED indicator 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 70. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase information stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a, based on a detection signal output by being operated.

[7-2-1. Dispense control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, including a payout control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and controls the payout operation of the gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, a payout control input circuit 952b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as the ``built-in payout control RAM'') and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as the ``built-in payout control ROM''), the payout control MPU 952a also has a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control program receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 as serial data in a serial manner as a main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game balls, and creates a 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 as an error release unit, and outputs these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands as serial data in a serial manner as a payout main serial data transmission signal to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, if an error occurs with respect to the payout operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and payout control is started, this payout control program releases the error based on a detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954 and stops the output of warning information corresponding to the error (error release control means).

In addition, this dispensing control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame open command (first main frame open command) when a detection signal (main frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame open switch 619. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also outputs a door frame close command (first door frame close command) when a detection signal (door frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame close command (first main frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main frame open switch 619.

The dispensing control input circuit 952b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted to various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is inputted. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is reset by a payout control system reset described later, so that no signal based on that information is outputted from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not inputted. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The detection signals from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 827, which detects the exhaustion of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guide unit 820 of the payout unit 800, the payout detection sensor 842, which detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b, 832b of the payout device 830, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840, which detects the rotation of the payout blade 839, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. For the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch 619, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether the storage space of the ball cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls, is first input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 in serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port via the payout control input circuit 952b, and outputs the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a has successfully received various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

The payout control MPU 952a also transmits various commands indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of its serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from the payout motor drive circuit 952d, or outputs a drive signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the error LED indicator 860b from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is "connection abnormal" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball stuck" (specifically, that at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotor and the game ball are engaged near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotor to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 840 detects ... 2, a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842; when the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of payout retry attempts has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, a "full" has occurred (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279); when the number "7" is displayed, a "CR not connected" has occurred (electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6); and when the number "9" is displayed, a "stocked (there are prize balls in stock (unpaid))" has occurred (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., from the output terminal of a specified output port to a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, which then outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor not shown.

The payout control board 951 also outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a number of photocouplers (not shown, which are configured with an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and through these multiple photocouplers, it transmits the number of game balls and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of the game balls or the fact that an error has occurred) to the hall computer installed in the game parlor (hall). The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by the multiple photocouplers, so that an abnormal voltage is not applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, which causes the hall computer to malfunction or break down, and also so that an abnormal voltage is not applied from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 that proceeds with the game and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout, etc., which causes ... The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining information such as the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information about the pachinko machine 1.

The ball loan request signal from the ball loan button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first input to the CR unit 6 via the degree display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the CR unit input/output circuit 952e. The CR unit 6 also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the degree display board 365 to display the remaining balance on the ball lending and return display unit 330, and this signal is input to the ball lending and return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending and return display unit 330 is also input with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951, is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC1 allows the dispensing control MPU 952a to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM (dispensing memory unit) during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and the dispensing control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and the information is completely erased (cleared) from the dispensing control built-in RAM by the dispensing control MPU 952a using this as a trigger. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game ball lending device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. As shown in Fig. 71, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 (to be precise, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 880 and the point display board 365 are electrically connected). The CR unit 6 and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the degree display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). In addition, AC 24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, direct current +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using an internal voltage generation circuit (not shown) and supplies this voltage, together with the ground LG, to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, while also supplying it to the degree display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

A push button switch is mounted on the component side of the degree display board 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, a push button switch is mounted on a position corresponding to the return button 329, and a segment display that functions as the ball lending/return display unit 330 is mounted. In addition, a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the component side of the degree display board 365. The display mode of the segment display and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d are configured to be visible to the player, allowing the player and the staff of the gaming facility to check the display mode and light emission mode.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the switch of the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

The ball lending/return display unit 330 has three segment displays arranged in a row, and the lighting of these three-digit segment displays is controlled by a so-called dynamic lighting method, which sequentially drives each digit of the three-digit segment displays. By controlling the lighting in this way, the ball lending/return display unit 330 can display the remaining balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6, or display errors in the CR unit 6. When the ball lending/return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0-DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one of the three-digit segment displays, and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up the specified one-digit segment display from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, the one-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and the content shown by the illumination of these three-digit segment displays can be viewed from the outside.

The degree display board 365 is provided with a CR unit lamp 365d mounted adjacent to the ball lending/returning display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d receives a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending possible signal TDL via the CR unit lamp 365d through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using a built-in voltage generating circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are active and ball lending is possible, the logic of the ball lending possible signal TDL is controlled to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and the light emission state can be seen from the outside. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/return display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor implemented on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

When the ball loan button 328 is pressed and the ball loan operation signal TDS from the ball loan button 328 is input from the degree display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball loan request signal BRDY to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 then outputs a BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, equivalent to 100 yen) in one payout operation, to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input outputs an EXS signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that one payout operation has started or ended, and outputs a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible or impossible. For example, if the hall staff or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out next, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen.

When the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the point display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects and returns the prepaid card from an insertion port (not shown). This returned prepaid card stores the remaining balance after deducting the amount equivalent to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board
Next, a brief description will be given of the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG. The power supply board 931 electrically connects and disconnects the 24 volt AC (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment. a power switch 934 that can be turned on or off; a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources; and a launch control unit that controls launching by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 680 and ball sending by the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250. A control unit 953 is provided.

[7-3-1. Power supply control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, a power factor correction circuit 935b that improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and a power supply creation circuit 935d that creates various DC power supplies from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to supply to various boards.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball sending control by the ball sending solenoid 255, is mainly composed of a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 302, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal that notifies the player is input to the launch control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for shooting (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682, while at the same time outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal board 315, so that the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and sends the received game ball to the ball launching device 680.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
In contrast to this first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG, as shown in FIG. 72, is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the performance display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, while controlling the sound of music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a volume adjustment volume 4140a that adjusts the volume of the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the presentation includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and that controls the presentation operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and various information (e.g., game board, It is equipped with a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores various information (such as schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the side performance display device 1600 and information for managing schedule data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.), a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state has occurred and information for managing special performance flags, etc.), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as ``peripheral control external WDT 1511e'') for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents for the time it takes for power to be restored after a momentary power outage, and loses its contents if power is cut off for a long period of time (if a long-term power outage occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), allowing it to retain its stored contents for approximately 50 hours. By providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is no longer able to retain its stored contents and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is out of control, and when this timer expires, a hardware reset is applied. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), a reset is applied. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so a reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), and transmits game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 to the motor drive board via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board and the peripheral control output circuit. The motor drive board 4180 is sent to the motor drive board 4180, door side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the left performance selection button 331, the detection signal from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the right performance selection button 332, and the detection signal from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation button 410 are serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized performance operation unit detection data is input from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit via the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

The detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit via a peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as the "peripheral control built-in WDT") and uses the peripheral control built-in WDT in conjunction with the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to diagnose whether the system itself is out of control.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in Fig. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at the center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, a peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac communicates, via the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, between the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently, data is read from and written to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac independently transfers data between storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that are external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak that are built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To transfer data, data is read from and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad is a dedicated controller that controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to exchange various data between the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for the motor drive board, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring information from the performance operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer expires, a hardware reset is applied. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires), a reset is applied. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within the certain period, it can restart the timer count, so a reset is not applied.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and serializes detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 using a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving this serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-brightness white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that a jackpot game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly to shorten the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag, thereby taking measures against noise in the lighting control of the LED, which is important for the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the other LEDs, etc., except for this LED, are executed in the peripheral control unit regular process described later.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source described later) is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sounds and notification sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source described later) by a program. Unlike the board volume divided into seven stages described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects coming from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from being difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be low so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be high to make the screen unfolding on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral Control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen being arranged in chronological order, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is specified. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by light emission data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs being arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by sound command data that is arranged in chronological order, and the order in which the music and sound effects are played is specified. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for specifying which of a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is to be used, and a track number for specifying which of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is to be incorporated with sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to various control program copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read and executed. Also, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of the various control programs that control the RTC control unit 4165, a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness that occurs with aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, and obtains the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and corrects the obtained brightness setting information based on the correction information. This correction information is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. The brightness setting information, as described below, includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information obtained for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is an additional 5% of the positive information, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information obtained for this 75%.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral Control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management subject work area 1511ca for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, a first backup area 1511cb and a second backup area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of the various information stored in the backup management subject work area 1511ca, a various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, a various control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copies of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and a non-backup management subject work area 1511cf for exclusively storing information not to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored after a momentary or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf to clear it to zero, whereas the backup managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc are cleared to zero when the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on).

The backup management target work area 1511ca is composed of Bank0 (1fr), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and Bank0 (1ms), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs described later. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Furthermore, "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4", which are provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc described below, have the same memory area size as "Bank 0". As described below, when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform the peripheral control MPU 1511a that it is in a state where it can accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, each time a V blank signal is input, in other words, every frame (1 frame), the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and therefore "(1fr)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" respectively (the same meaning is also used for performance information (1fr) and performance backup information (1fr) described below). "(1 ms)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because, as described below, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs (the same meaning is also used for the performance information (1 ms) and the performance backup information (1 ms) described below).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, a received command memory area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad, and a schedule data memory area 1511cae. The lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa is a memory area in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab is a memory area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The received command memory area 1511cac is a memory area in which the main control The RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad is a memory area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data memory area 1511cae is a memory area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is set based on the commands received. In the schedule data memory area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce is read and set, and in some cases, various schedule data is read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a motor transmission data memory area 1511caf on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, and a drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak, etc. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf is a memory area in which door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is set. The motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag is a memory area in which game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is set. The movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah is a memory area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set. The performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai is a memory area in which the performance selection left button 331, the performance selection right button 332, the operation button 4 10 based on the detection signals from the various detection switches that detect the operation of the performance selection left button 331, the performance selection right button 332, and the operation button 410 (for example, operation history information created based on the detection signals from the various detection switches that detect the operation of the performance selection left button 331, the performance selection right button 332, and the operation button 410). The drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak is a memory area in which various information is set that is acquired by receiving drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 when the performance display drive board 4450 receives drawing data and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, based on the LOCKN signal that is output to notify the same, as described below, and that acquires the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450.

The lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab in Bank0 (1fr), and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data memory area 1511caf and the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag in Bank0 (1ms) are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and for example, when game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit routine processing, processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT that was set in the first area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa when the previous peripheral control unit routine processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, processing proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT that was set in the first area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the previous peripheral control unit regular processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the process proceeds based on the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT that was set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information, which is the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs, each consisting of two banks, are managed as one page. The performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb manages two pairs as one page: Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, the backup second area 1511cc has Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair, with a total of two pairs being managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and the backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, and the program that executes these high-speed copies by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral Control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup targets among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, and a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not cleared to zero even when a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 instructs the start of a RAM clear performance and a game state when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored after a momentary stop or blackout) (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power). This is completely different from the above-mentioned backup management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c being cleared to zero. In addition, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of when a big win game state occurred, etc.) can be cleared, while the content (item) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management work area 1511da is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) which stores various information (SRAM) that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a big win game state has occurred, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, as described above, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. And, "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc described later have the same memory area size as "Bank0". "(SRAM)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is the target for backup (the same meaning is also used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) described below).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are described, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks as one pair. The performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area, is quickly copied as performance backup information (SRAM) to the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the first backup area 1511db is managed as a page, with Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The second backup area 1511dc also consists of a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), which are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the second backup area 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 and controls the sound of the music and sound effects etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, has a built-in sound source for controlling the sound of music and sound effects etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in sound source") as shown in FIG. 72, and also has a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data for the screens displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460; an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; and a door frame side performance transmitter 1512b for transmitting serialized drawing data to the door frame side performance display device 460 to a performance display drive board 4450 located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates, into a positive signal and a negative signal, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; and a forced switching circuit 1512f that receives a signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, connects the circuit to transmit this signal, but when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, connects the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. This LCD and sound control ROM 1512b stores image data used to display images displayed in the display areas of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, such as decorative pattern image data used to display decorative patterns, background image data used to display background images, tone adjustment image data used to display volume adjustment images, and standby image data used to display standby images, as character data.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and copies the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next screen data following the first screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when the V blank signal described later is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one starting from the first screen data according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and transfers the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control R After extracting the sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the OM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next sound command data following the first sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when a V blank signal is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one, starting from the first sound command data, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source mentioned above, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in VRAM") which, when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts game board side character data and upper tray side character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. 74, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data generated on its built-in VRAM, which is for the game board side performance display device 1600, from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) drawing data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, thereby synchronizing the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, while the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 which is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. In this way, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side performance display device 1600 are each attached to the game board 5, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short. However, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5, while the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the performance display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to channel CH1, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is significantly longer than that for channel CH1, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to the effects of noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, namely red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronous signals, namely horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal, and is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and transmitted to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The various serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals in the performance display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen (one frame) of screen data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side performance display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 is output (transmitted) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In other words, "one screen (one frame) of screen data" refers to data for generating one screen (one frame) of drawing data on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When this is done, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives this V blank signal, it executes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described below. The interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

The sound source built-in VDP 1512a uses a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a system in which one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is stored in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) stored in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source as shown in FIG. 74, and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects into tracks according to the track number specified in the sound command data, sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, and serializes the music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In addition, the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and in addition to the sound data of the performance sound such as music and sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a incorporate sound data of the notification sound for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof. Specifically, for the performance sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending at all on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the performance sound can be adjusted by switching to the setting mode by operating the performance selection left button 331, the performance selection right button 332, or the operation button 410. In the setting mode, for example, the sub-volume value is decreased by operating the left performance selection button 331, the sub-volume value is increased by operating the right performance selection button 332, and the sub-volume value is determined by the operation button 410.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that is actually the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the performance sound, the sound data of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks and the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized performance sound is amplified to the master volume value that is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and transmitted as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, a brief explanation of the control of playing an alarm sound to notify parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 when the sound effect is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be given. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the alarm sound volume is set to maximum volume are mixed together, and the volume of this mixed sound effect and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified sound effect and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the only sound that actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is the notification sound at the maximum volume. At this time, since the performance sound is muted, it is not played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the performance sound proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation described above. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that has been proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is set again as the sub-volume value to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a (at this time, if the volume has been adjusted by switching to the setting mode by operating the performance selection left button 331, the performance selection right button 332, or the operation button 410, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted performance sound), and is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, since this muted sound effects progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not resume from the point where the alarm sound started, but rather resume from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined period of time had elapsed since the alarm sound started.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b pre-stores game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and upper tray side character data for drawing in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, and also pre-stores various sound data such as music, sound effects, alert sounds, and notification sounds.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and transmits the left-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music and sound effects according to various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data for the left and right sides between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This means that even if the positive and negative signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, when the noise components on the positive and negative signals are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to form a single left audio data, the noise components cancel each other out, eliminating the noise components, and thus providing a noise countermeasure.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side performance transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, namely, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronous signals, namely, a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal, and the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, totaling 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each composed of 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, so the lower 2 bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

When the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, which are the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d serializes the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, into differential type serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and transmits these various signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 using only a differential one-pair cable.

As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, so the length of the wiring required for the path (first path) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 to the door frame side performance display device 460, so the length of the wiring required for the path (second path) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main frame 4 so as to be freely opened and closed, it is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect various boards provided on the main frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side, such as the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, on the closed side, which is the opposite side of the locking unit 700 provided along the open side edge of the main frame 4. However, in addition to the payout device 830, a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged on the closed side of the main frame 4, which can guide the game balls paid out by this payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and can branch and guide the paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the upper tray 321 is full of game balls. In addition, a payout unit 800 is arranged on the lower side of the main frame 4, which is a unit that collectively includes a power supply board 931 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island equipment. In this way, the various wiring that electrically connects the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side is routed near the payout device 830, full tank branch unit 770, power supply board 931, etc., and is in an environment that is subject to noise caused by the operation of the payout motor 834 provided on the payout device 830, as well as noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has infiltrated the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Corporation is adopted for the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, making it less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, as described above, a differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential one pair cable is not a parallel line in which two wires are simply arranged in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair cable.

Here, we will briefly explain the case where parallel wires are used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. For channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise. However, with only this hardware configuration, the serial data in the parallel wires may be corrupted by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. If affected, the noise is not cancelled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 mounted on the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, so the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data different from the normal data, causing a problem that an image resembling a snowstorm is displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, making it impossible to discern what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. is adopted in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to make it less susceptible to the effects of noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver, which is capable of canceling (removing) noise on the receiving side even if the differential method serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. As a result, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the noise is cancelled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is reliably received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460, so that the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460. By cancelling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent images such as sandstorms that make it impossible to recognize what the image is, from being displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. This helps prevent players from losing motivation to play due to noise.

In this embodiment, between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, there are a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, so that the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side can be electrically connected to the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4 and removing the various wiring, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main frame 4 to perform maintenance on the main frame 4 and the door frame 3. If a problem with the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' can be attached to the main frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the various wiring from the various boards on the door frame 3' side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards on the main frame 4 side to the various boards on the door frame 3' side.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, the boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the boards between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power wiring and wiring that transmits various other signals are each electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, a power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are each formed with the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver crosses multiple relay terminal boards, namely the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a problem occurs in that a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise or the output level of the signal decreases between the input and output of the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and the wiring that transmits various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses, with one of the twisted pair cables being red and the other being gray, and the wiring that supplies power in the harness being red and the other multiple wirings being gray. Note that the wiring that supplies power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differentiating circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f receives the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the pachinko machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. The forced switching circuit 1512f is configured to connect the circuit to transmit two signals when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, and to connect the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so that the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the performance display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600.

The performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V, which receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 via the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described below, restores the various serialized signals to parallel signals, and outputs them to the door frame side performance display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to inform the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image to inform the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs the image to the game board side performance display device 1600, thereby displaying it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user.

When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no malfunction in the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a malfunction in the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the performance display device on the door frame side. Please call a store staff member.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the performance display device on the door frame side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, so that the alert sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for decorative illumination provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is configured with the RTC 4165a at its core, as shown in Fig. 72. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") in which calendar information and time information are held. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). This allows the RTC 4165a to update and retain calendar information and time information using power supplied from the battery 4165b even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and is able to display effects based on the acquired calendar information and time information on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. Examples of such effects include, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a screen performing a New Year countdown is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. When the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

In addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores input date and time information, which is the date and hour, minute, and second when the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information were first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa.

When the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are cold cathode fluorescent tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the backlight ON/OFF or only turns it ON.

The various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the production line, in order to perform various tests, such as display tests of the gaming board side performance display device 1600, for example, the input date and time information is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second input on the production line as the date and time when the gaming board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on.

In this way, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa can store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the probability of a low or high probability jackpot game state occurring), such as brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of the LED type, and input date and time information.

In addition, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dark for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 set at the time of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, by operating the performance selection left button 331, the performance selection right button 332, or the operation button 410, it is possible to switch to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. In the setting mode, for example, the brightness is decreased by operating the performance selection left button 331, the brightness of the performance selection right button 332 is increased, and the brightness is determined by the operation button 410. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, or the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, or the operation button 410 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, or the operation button 410 according to this setting mode screen, it is possible to reset calendar information and time information, or adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 to a desired brightness. The desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 that has been adjusted is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above to correct the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is an LED type. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 to identify the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second to identify the current date and time, and acquires brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information previously stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if it has already been six months since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, corresponding correction information (e.g., 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness becomes 80%, which is 5% higher than this 75%, which is the obtained correction information. The brightness of the backlight is adjusted and turned on, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is 75% plus the obtained correction information of 10%.

The current date and time may be determined by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the year, month, and date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the current date and time may be determined by acquiring the current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described below.

[7-4-4. Volume Control]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a can adjust the volume of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 4140a has a resistance value that can be changed by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, and converts it into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sounds and notification sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven stages as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the sound effects such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is cheating, a warning sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is low, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from having difficulty noticing malfunctions or player cheating due to the warning sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

In this embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted by operating the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, and the operation button 410. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, and the operation button 410 are operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600. In addition, if the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, and the operation button 410 are operated during the period when the game board performance display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board performance display device 1600, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, and the operation button 410 according to the setting mode screen. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to this converted value in response to the operation of the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, or the operation button 410. This adjusted volume is updated as a sub-volume value for tracks that incorporate sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and is reflected in adjusting the volume of the performance sounds, but is not reflected in adjusting the volume of the above-mentioned alert sounds and notification sounds.

In this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects: by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, or by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in response to the operation of the left performance selection button 331, the right performance selection button 332, or the operation button 410. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is implemented on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to always keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In this case, the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a can be rotated by the hall staff. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may be too low for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or may be too high for the player to hear the music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332 or the operation button 410 is operated within a specified time, or if the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332 or the operation button 410 is operated during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for entering the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332 or the operation button 410 in accordance with this setting mode screen. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can operate the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, or operation button 410 to increase the volume to the desired volume, or if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too high and the music and sound effects are too loud, the player can operate the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, or operation button 410 to decrease the volume to the desired volume.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played for a predetermined period of time and is in a waiting state for customers and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is cancelled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization is set to the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. As a result, if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was too low and that the music and sound effects were difficult to hear, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, and operation button 410; and if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was too high and that the music and sound effects were too loud, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, and operation button 410.

[8. Power Supply System]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 75 and 76. Figure 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a block diagram continuing from Figure 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, followed by the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is turned on. is supplied to the power supply board 931, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 is equipped with a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts AC (24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and the launch control unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launcher 680 and the ball delivery solenoid 255 of the ball delivery unit 250.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes ripples from the +37V supplied, smoothing the +37V and supplying it to the launch control circuit 953a and power supply circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispense control MPU 952a of the dispense control unit 952 in the dispense control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as the driving power source to adjust the drive current to be output to the launch solenoid 682 in order to launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 5a shown in FIG. 5 with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302, while outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250, so that the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and sends the received game ball to the ball launching device 680 side.

The power supply generating circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC +5V, hereafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC +24V, hereafter referred to as "+24V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and supplies these to the dispensing control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power supply line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power supply line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as described below. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. This +5V generating circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from the +12V from the dispensing control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control board 951 and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the dispensing control board 951. In other words, the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the current flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode PD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. In this way, the capacitor BC1 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows to the dispensing control board 951 and then returns from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as the dispensing VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a due to the diode PD0, and the dispensing control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying the dispensing VBB to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. In this way, the capacitor BC0 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and then from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing through the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the above diode MD0 and the above capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an overview of the voltages supplied to each control board, etc. will be provided, followed by an explanation of the voltages supplied primarily to the dispensing control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board.

The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three voltages, the two voltages, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are also supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals, and gradation lighting signals to the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the game board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates direct current 3.3V (DC +3.3V, hereafter referred to as "+3.3V") from the +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In response to this, the three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is equipped with a +9V generation circuit 194a that creates direct current +9V (DC +9V, hereafter referred to as "+9V") from the +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V created by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards, etc. of the door frame 3.

The +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is also supplied to the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x creates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V created by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components that make up the LCD module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, as well as to the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side performance display device 460. The voltage created by the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side performance display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a and the like of the payout control unit 952. The +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b and the like of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game shop (hall). The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used by the payout control board 951 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Fig. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 931 via the output control board 951, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +12V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control input circuit 1310b, etc., and the +24V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control board 951. The power failure warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b), and is also input to the door frame decoration board, etc. via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, and is therefore able to more accurately detect signs of a power failure or momentary interruption, etc., compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 will be described with reference to Figs. 77 to 79. Fig. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Fig. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and Fig. 79 is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Fig. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, various input/output signals to the main control MPU, and the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 is mainly composed of the main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, +5V creation circuit 1310g, and main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figs. 69 and 75, as well as peripheral circuits, as shown in Fig. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
The main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control three-terminal filter MIC0 as shown in Fig. 77. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has a first terminal to which +5V generated by a +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied, a second terminal to which is grounded (GND), and a third terminal to which +5V with noise components removed is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND), so that ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed and the voltage is smoothed.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are grounded to ground (GND), to further remove ripple and smooth the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through a resistor MR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. As a result, as described above, when the +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, since the current is prevented from flowing through the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0, the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, thereby retaining the memory contents.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in Fig. 77. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC5, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, with one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor MC6 removes ripples and smoothes them out. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is also grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in Fig. 77. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. By applying +5V to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, respectively, the main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input to it. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is a circuit to which detection signals from the vibration sensor 2405, general winning port sensor 4020, first start port sensor 4002, second start port sensor 4004, magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, and gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69 are input, as well as operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each switch are input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is operated when clearing the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or when an error is notified after power-on, it is operated to cancel the error, and has a function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on and a function of canceling the error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the dispensing control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, it is judged to be a RAM clear signal for clearing the main control built-in RAM and performs a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal with a logic LOW is input from the dispensing control board 951 to the main control board 1310, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal with a logic HI is input from the dispensing control board 951 (a detailed explanation of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the dispensing control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is electrically connected to one end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3, as shown in Fig. 77. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4, which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR5, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC10A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the dispensing control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and input with a logic LOW, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and input with a logic HI.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, a logically LOW operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a logically HI operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is not an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which has been pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954, which has a logic LOW, is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the dispensing control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may invade the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V, is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first starting hole sensor 4002, and the second starting hole sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are pulled up to the +5V side by pull-up resistors, while the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning hole sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are not directly input to the main control board 1310, and are therefore pulled up to the +12V side by pull-up resistors, just like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +24V, the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and +5V is applied to the REF terminal, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment) that serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 2, which is the negative terminal of MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 6, which is the negative terminal of MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC21, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is smoothed by the capacitor MC21 to remove ripples, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 compares the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +24V power supply. The 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 compares the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +12V power supply. The 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and to the other end of the resistor MR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and to the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power fails or is momentarily interrupted and the voltage starts to drop from +12V to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

Terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A described above. Therefore, one end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, in response to a change in edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and outputs this stored value (logic) from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and also outputs the inverted value of the stored value (logic) from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. When a signal with a logic LOW is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal with the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted, that is, a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. In addition, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latched state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with a logic LOW is input to the preset terminal PR terminal, so that the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a signal with a logic HI from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with the logic of the inverted signal output from 1Q is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured so that the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, are grounded to ground (GND), so that there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +24V, and a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V, at the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, and outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The power supply terminal Vcc terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC22, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the power supply terminal Vcc terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has ripples removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC22, the ground terminal GND terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later, and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic becoming LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the output control board 951 as a power outage warning signal, and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

As shown in Fig. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and to the other end of a resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and a power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a power failure warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in Fig. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor MR30 and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and to the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via a wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 70.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30, MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33, MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage and the preceding switch circuit also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage, is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage and the succeeding switch circuit also turns ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF and the succeeding switch circuit OFF.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the dispensing control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 in the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in FIG. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35 and the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to a +12V power line in a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning the transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 are While the logic is the same, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverted logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310, and between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 952a, and peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the master control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to Fig. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the master control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 69 as a dispensing master serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, transmit serial data to be sent to the dispensing control board 951 from the TXA terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb as a main payment serial data transmission signal, and transmit a main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the dispensing control board 951, and transmit serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 69 as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the TXB terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and transmit a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal), each input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives, for example, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951, which indicates that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main pay ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310 d to the start port solenoid 2107, and outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs drive signals to the various displays, and outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, etc.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75 via the output control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 has the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit is mainly composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 has a communication interface circuit mainly composed of a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (composed of a built-in infrared LED and photo IC).

The anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 is applied with +12V supplied from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)) whose negative terminal is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). As a result, if, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 can be continuously applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V for the main control MPU 1310a, in order to reduce the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. This increases the reliability of the signal.

In this embodiment, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when the main control serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb via the serial management unit 1310aec to the transmission shift register 41aea and transmits it as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 can transmit a main serial data transmission signal with a logic HI due to +12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and since one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data, a maximum of 10 packets of data can be stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). Resistor AR10 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal, which outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR50, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR50 via a resistor MR51. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR52, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, transistor MTR50 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

The anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the negative terminal of which is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, as well as to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 changes, and that signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of peripheral control MPU 1511a as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal.

As a result, as described above, if the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can continue to be applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, the +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 can complete transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being cut off or missing.

When the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR50 OFF and turning the photocoupler AIC10 OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main loop serial data transmission signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same logic as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this embodiment, measures are taken when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs on the +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied, causing the control reference voltage and communication voltage to drop. In other words, the +5V power line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, which uses the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel to the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, so that even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power line drops, the control reference voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power source, so that the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the control reference voltage is configured to be connected to the +5V power line by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is electrically connected in parallel with the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. Even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the communication voltage applied from the +12V power line through the diode MD50 drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, so that the communication voltage can be maintained. This makes it possible to prevent commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and also prevents them from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive commands being sent. This makes it possible to eliminate the loss of commands immediately after a power outage or during a momentary power outage.

In addition, the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF so that all of the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can be completely transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which is composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50 and functions as a communications interface circuit. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb can be completely transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as an interface circuit, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without interruption or loss.

[10. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Next, the circuit of the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70 will be described with reference to Figs. 80 to 85. Fig. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of the payout control unit, Fig. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, Fig. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 81, Fig. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the payout motor drive circuit, Fig. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and Fig. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal board 784. First, the payout control filter circuit 951a will be described, followed by the circuit of the payout control unit, and various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal board 784.

[10-1. Dispense control filter circuit]
The payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 as shown in Fig. 80. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC0, which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by first removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with noise components removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the capacitor PC1, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacity: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), so that the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. Note that, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by the capacitor PC3 to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of this dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the resistor PR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing the noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 through the diode PD0. As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the payout VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of the dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 is mainly composed of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) as peripheral circuits, in addition to a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as shown in Fig. 80. Here, we will first explain the payout control system reset, and then explain the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 as shown in FIG. 80. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor PC6 acts as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is also grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispatch control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in Figure 80. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to the OE terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b is a circuit to which a dispensing power failure notice signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the main frame opening switch 619, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 75, the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 70, and the full tank detection sensor 279 via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, etc. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input, and the circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, and rotation detection sensor 840 shown in Figure 70 have output terminals of the open collector output type, so the circuit configurations to which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input are almost identical, and therefore here we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input.

[10-2-3a. Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and is turned ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR23, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) of which one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line on the external terminal board 784. When transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 changes, and that signal is input to external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through resistor PR21, and is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through resistor PR24. It is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to resistor PR26 and to the other end of resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR20 and capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the door frame opening switch 618 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, the circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame opening signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR21 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI is input to external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning transistor PTR22 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20, turning the transistor PTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a door frame opening signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor PTR21 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR22 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3b. Circuit to which detection signal from main body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned ON (conductive) when the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR28, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR30, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC21, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR21, and is also electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29, and is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR24 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR28 and capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the main frame opening switch 619 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

When the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR24 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR24 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, or if both of these states occur, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the main frame door open signal, but it can be used to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open during normal play. Since an outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal board 784, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and although the hall computer cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, it can determine that a state that does not occur during normal play by the player, that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open, has occurred.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even if the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the door frame 3 will be opened from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main frame 4 will be opened from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even in the event of a short circuit, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

When the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame opening switch 618' and main frame opening switch 619'), the door frame opening switch 618' turns ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4. The main frame opening switch 619' turns ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 will be released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' and the main frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, even in the event of a disconnection, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3c. Circuit to which the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR40 that is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42 that is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a dispensing power failure warning signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR41 and PR42 and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the power supply control board 951 as a power failure warning via the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages, and when both conditions, that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply control board 951 via the wiring (harness) and the logic of the power failure warning signal becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the dispensing control board 951, and either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

When both conditions are met: the voltage of +24V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, that is, when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR40 OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the dispensing power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, turning the transistor PTR40 ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the dispensing power failure warning signal with the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 being LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, whereas when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, while when there is no sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, the power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the logic of the payout power outage warning signal input to the payout control MPU 952a due to a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3d. Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fall cover unit 270 is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type circuit in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR44a, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line, and to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor through resistor PR44b, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 through resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and to the other end of the capacitor PC40, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND). The capacitor PC40 plays the role of a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR47, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC40B) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it and outputs it). When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic HI is input to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic LOW is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes HI, and the signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning the transistor PTR41 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a full tank signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR47, and a full tank signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit consisting of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are input directly to each switch circuit without passing through a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the fault cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise compared to the bulb out detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main frame 4.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the storage space is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, it performs control to forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a may forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor even if the storage space is not full of stored game balls, or if the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled to rotate the payout rotor to continue paying out game balls even though the storage space is full of stored game balls, and the upstream side of the prize ball passage is filled with game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and an abnormal load is applied to the payout motor 834, the payout motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally heats up, or the mechanism that transmits the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational motion of the payout rotor may break down. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered out by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components.

[10-2-3e. Circuit to which operation signals from operation switches are input]
The first and second terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49 and to the other end of a resistor PR50, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48 and to the other end of a capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR54, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 changes when the front and rear transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON/OFF, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a RWMCLR signal.

In addition, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49, and are also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR44 via resistor PR55. The base terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to resistor PR55 and is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77. When transistor PTR44 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 changes, and this signal is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR48 and capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the operation switch 954 is pressed.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is the front-stage switch circuit, the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is the rear-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 is the switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to cancel an error when an error is notified after power-on. It has a function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and a function to cancel an error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, while it becomes an error cancellation signal in the function of clearing the error after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on).

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, turning the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage ON and the switch circuit in the previous stage ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR43 in the next stage OFF and the switch circuit in the next stage OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI during a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, it does not indicate that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from when the power is turned on), it determines that it does not indicate that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning the transistor PTR44 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as described above, the RAM clear signal with a logic LOW shown in FIG. 77 is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, turning off the transistor PTR42 in the front stage and turning off the switch circuit in the front stage, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage, is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, turning on the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage and turning on the switch circuit in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on, this indicates that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), this indicates that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to ground (GND) by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as described above, inputs the RAM clear signal with a logic HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 shown in FIG. 77, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive IC PIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded to the ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via a Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing motor 834.Based on a voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 has four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, terminals 6 and 7, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are each grounded to ground (GND), and terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, receive the dispensing motor drive signal via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 2, terminal 4, terminal 9, and terminal 11, correspond to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, and when a dispensing motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, a drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This dispensing motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, via resistors PR60 to PR63. These drive pulses are generated by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, causing the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. When the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged, so as a protection measure, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected in front of terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in Fig. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball loan request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 as described above, and is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 71. The payout control board 951 outputs an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is possible or impossible, via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The input/output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in) as shown in Fig. 84.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 through a resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 through a resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 through a resistor PR72. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor PR73, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 80 via the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a as the CR connection signal 1.

Meanwhile, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR76, the other end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the power supply board 931, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR71 and PR74 and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR70 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is now HI, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic LOW is input to the power supply board 931.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR71 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic HI is input to the power supply board 931.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 as well as to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 receives the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR78, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 receives the BRQ from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR80, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from CR unit 6.

The EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb via resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR82, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, whereas when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the EXS with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same logic as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

The PRDY signal, which indicates whether or not a payout operation for dispensing loaned balls is possible from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU 952a, is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR84. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR85, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, whereas when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the PRDY with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same logic as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU]
Next, we will explain the various input/output signals that are input/output from the input/output terminals of the various input/output ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data reception signal via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. On the other hand, the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, transmits the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and transmits the main dispensing serial data transmission signal from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

In addition to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), each input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives, for example, a main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the above-mentioned main dispensing serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and detection signals from the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da, and the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function In addition to outputting a dispensing motor drive signal from the circuit 952ca to the dispensing motor 834 via the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, for example, a payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the main control board 1310, and a drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the dispensing control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the dispensing control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board]
The dispensing control board 951 exchanges various input and output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 85(a), the dispensing control board 951 outputs the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 receives game information signals related to the game, such as the main prize ball number information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, and 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting hole winning information output signal, as well as payout power outage warning signals, from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, the payout motor 834 outputs a prize ball number information output signal every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, and the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a jackpot information output signal of a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal, and other game information signals to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784 from the payout control board 951: an outer end frame door opening information output signal, and a prize ball number information output signal, and eight signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310: a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, information output signal during time reduction, and a starting port winning information output signal.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in an amusement parlor (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the player's play, etc. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer calculates the number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 by adding up the number of jackpots with two rounds (the number of 2-round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of 15-round jackpots). Therefore, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots from the total number of jackpots, and therefore cannot determine whether the number of jackpots that have actually occurred in the pachinko machine 1 is 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is placed above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred, which is displayed on the data counter, to decide whether or not to play.

However, the number of times the jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter may actually be biased towards the number of times a 2-round jackpot has occurred, so that even when a player starts playing, there may be only 2-round jackpots occurring and no 15-round jackpots occurring for a while. In this way, although the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of hope, it may also stimulate the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

In this embodiment, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are output separately to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer can accurately grasp the number of 2-round jackpots and the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the jackpots that have actually occurred more frequently in the pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots, and the data counter can display the number of 15-round jackpots and the number of 2-round jackpots separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpots, as the number of jackpot game states, so that the player's gambling spirit is not unnecessarily stimulated.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from when the 2-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 2-round jackpot, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also output to the hall computer during the period from when the 15-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 15-round jackpot. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. Such a method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to a hall computer installed in an amusement facility (hall) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of a prize ball base that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the jackpot information output signal of the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special pattern display information output signal, the normal pattern display information output signal, the time-saving information output signal, and the starting port winning information output signal when they are input from the payout control board 951.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that informs the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open, a state that does not occur during normal play; the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 70 reaches 10; the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. 60 reaches 10; the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred; and the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. The signal indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, the probability fluctuation information output signal indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, the special pattern display information output signal indicates that the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has ended (stopped) the display of the special pattern fluctuations, the normal pattern display information output signal indicates that the normal pattern display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has ended (stopped) the display of the normal pattern fluctuations, the time-saving information output signal indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and the start hole winning information output signal indicates that each time a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 60,

As shown in FIG. 86, the external terminal board 784 has output terminals PT1 to PT10 arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the user that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 has paid out 10 game balls as prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of paid game balls to determine the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open, a state that does not occur during normal play, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open. When the outer frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can grasp that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are open while the outer frame door open information output signal is being input.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT3 for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 has ended (stopped). When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times this has happened to determine the total number of times the special symbol has been displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start port winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT4 for 0.128 seconds each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the start port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the start port winning information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to determine the total number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT5 while a 15-round jackpot is occurring. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 15-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT6 while a two-round jackpot is occurring. When the two-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a two-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the two-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has finished (stopped) the variable display of the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT7 is output for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 has finished (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can grasp that the variable display of the normal symbol has finished (stopped) in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times that this has happened to grasp the total number of times that the normal symbol has been displayed variable in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time-saving information output signal. As described above, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. When the time-saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a time-saving state is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the time-saving information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the time-saving information output signal is input to determine the total number of times the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input, and can count the number of times that the probability fluctuation information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the user that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 60 reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the pachinko machine 1 is planning to pay out 10 game balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls to be paid out and know the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. For example, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports, such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, and the large winning port 2005, reaches 20 or more, and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds so that it does not become one continuous signal for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2) seconds.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the dispensing control board 951 side, while output terminals PT3 to PT10 are arranged so that various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are output via (passing through) the dispensing control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting wiring having connectors colored the same to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to prevent other wiring from being electrically connected in error. In order to prevent the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side from being mixed with the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row from the left center of the external terminal board 784 to the right side. In this respect, it is possible to prevent the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer from being mistakenly electrically connected.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are each configured to be transmitted to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784. For example, in a state where game balls are no longer being supplied to the prize ball tank 802 from the pachinko island equipment due to some kind of trouble in the pachinko island equipment, if a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1 at the point when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 802 are running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 802 to pay out as prize balls will be insufficient, and therefore payout will not be possible (also, for example, if a ball jam or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). In this case, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side is a signal that notifies the fact that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 70 reaches 10, as described above. Therefore, when the game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 cannot output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls the hall staff. The hall staff, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 802 to identify the location of the ball jam (and also identifies the location of the ball jam or ball jam that occurred in the payout device 830, for example) and resolves it, thereby returning to the state where the game balls are paid out.

However, even when the hall staff is working, the game is still in progress using the main control board 1310. When the hall staff returns to a state where game balls are being paid out after the 15-round jackpot has ended, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid game balls one after another. Even though the 15-round jackpot has ended and no 15-round jackpots have occurred, the payout control board 951 will output a prize ball number information output signal that notifies the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. As a result, even though no 15-round jackpots have occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, which creates a problem in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out prize balls, that is, as a signal separate from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal as a signal to inform the hall computer via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 60 reaches 10 balls. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging or ball clogging in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in this game state can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out during that game state.

[12. Circuit of the performance display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the performance display drive board 4450 which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 will be described with reference to Fig. 87. As described above, the performance display drive board 4450 is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the dish unit 320, and is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460. Fig. 87 is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, as shown in Figure 87.

When serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. are transmitted as positive and negative signals from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V inputs these signals to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and this common mode choke coil SDL0 is able to separate noise from the positive and negative signals. The positive and negative signals from which noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) that prevents the positive and negative signals from reflecting at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, and prevents distortion of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronization signals, horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively (i.e., restores the parallel signals before being serialized). As mentioned above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits, but the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the red, green, and blue video signals are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

In addition to the signal from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V is also configured to receive two signals, which are serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and which are differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to connect the circuit to transmit these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, as described above, while connecting the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f transmits the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and are then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that this is a request to output a LOCKN signal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers. The LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e, but has a structure whose data format is completely different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned differential type serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the signal is not that output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and determines that the data is abnormal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the function of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 to output a LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal is used to forcibly output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described below, and LOCKN signal output request data having a data format structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby making it possible to check whether the device called the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x shown in Figure 76, and the GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND terminal, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuitry, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the digital circuitry, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the VDD terminal.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GNDO terminal, which serves as the ground for the TTL output, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDDO terminal.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between this terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the LVDS input, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between this terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the PLL circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the PLLVDD terminal.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation, but when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power down. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to one end of varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power line supplied via resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal is a terminal for specifying whether the transmission of various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal (described later) is a rising edge (logic transition from LOW to HIGH) or a falling edge (logic transition from HIGH to LOW). In this embodiment, as described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described below. In this embodiment, as described above, the OE terminal is grounded to enable output at all times. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, output is not permitted.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting the operating mode, and the operating mode can be selected by grounding both. There are two operating modes: normal mode and handshake mode. In normal mode, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals) consisting of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) consisting of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is the normal operating mode. In handshake mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver. This handshake mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, if the parallel signals that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, which are three video signals (18-bit video signals) of red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) of horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, are abnormal data for some reason and are difficult to display on the door frame side performance display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the handshake mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the satisfaction. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the connection between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 may be electrically connected directly via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are terminals that output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, that are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) that are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17 are valid or invalid, as described below. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built into the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals are data output terminals that output three video signals (18-bit video signals): a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. The D0 to D5 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0, which is a damping resistor. The D6 to D11 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1, which is a damping resistor. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA2, which is a damping resistor.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the performance display drive board 4450, and the door frame side performance display device 460 are electrically connected and share the same ground.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91. Figure 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, Figure 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, Figure 90 is a table showing a continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in Figure 89, and Figure 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by a description of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and a description of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board]
When detection signals are input from various winning switches such as the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in Fig. 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine 1 and drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are the storage trays) are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "CR machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(a), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents hexadecimal), with command 10H specifying one prize ball, command 11H specifying two prize balls, ..., and command 1EH specifying fifteen prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are the storage trays) are installed adjacent to each other in an amusement parlor (hall) and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "general machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(b), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 20H to 2EH, with command 20H specifying one prize ball, command 21H specifying two prize balls, ... and command 2EH specifying 15 prize balls. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), command 30H is provided as a common command for both CR machines and general machines, and this command 30H specifies a self-check. If an ACK signal output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after sending the command, the sending side sends command 30H and checks whether an ACK signal has been input to confirm the connection status. In the case of a CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection status with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 89 and 90, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating a variation of the presentation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, the various commands are categorized into those related to special chart 1 synchronization effects, those related to special chart 2 synchronization effects, those related to big wins, power-on, those related to regular chart synchronization effects, those related to regular electric role effects, notification displays, status displays, and others.

[13-2-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special symbol 1 synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 1 designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 1 synchronization performance, and the variable time state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. Note that the probability and time-saving state are composed of a low probability time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a time-saving state, a high probability time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a time-saving state, a low probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting a jackpot is set higher than that of the low probability state (normal game state), and the time-saving state is, for example, a state in which the time for variably displaying the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in FIG. 66 is shortened compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and the time-saving state stops and displays the normal lottery result in a normal lottery described later in a predetermined time, thereby increasing the number of times the normal lottery result is stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result in a predetermined time compared to the non-time-saving state, and further, opening the movable piece 2004a of the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. This is a state in which the period for which the closing operation is performed is longer than in the non-time-saving state (normal game state), thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 60, thereby providing an opportunity to win a special pattern without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time-saving state, there are more decisions to make as to whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2004a, and when the movable piece 2004a is opened and closed, the period for the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 2004a is longer, thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting opening 2004).

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance start command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation starts, the special pattern 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 1 synchronization performance starts, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance end command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when special pattern 1 is confirmed), and the fluctuation time state designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 2 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 2", and "End special symbol 2 synchronization performance" related to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 2 synchronization performance.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 2 synchronization performance start command is sent when the special symbol 2 starts to change, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 2 synchronization performance starts, and the special symbol 2 synchronization performance end command is sent when the special symbol 2 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
The "jackpot-related" category, as shown in Figure 89, is made up of commands named "jackpot opening", "Nth large prize slot 1 open display", "large prize slot 1 closed display", "large prize slot 1 count display", "jackpot ending", "jackpot pattern display", "small prize opening", "small prize open display", "small prize count display", and "small prize ending". These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display command for opening the jackpot 1 Nth time instructs the start of opening the 1st to 16th rounds of the jackpot 1 (the jackpot 2005 of the starter unit 2100 shown in FIG. 60 is opening or has started to open in the Nth round), the display command for closing the 1st closes ... open (the number of balls that entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69), the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the display command for the jackpot pattern instructs the display of the jackpot pattern information.

The small win opening command instructs the start of a small win opening, the small win opening display command instructs the start of a small win opening (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 is open or has started to open during a small win), the small win count display command instructs the large winning port winning presentation during a small win (the presentation when a game ball that has entered the large winning port 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a small win), and the small win ending command instructs the start of a small win ending.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, the Nth opening large prize opening command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened in the Nth round), the closing large prize opening 1 display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is closed (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 starts to close), the large prize opening 1 count display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large prize opening 1 (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the large prize opening is opened (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened).

The small win opening command is sent when the small win opening starts, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the ball enters the large winning port during a small win (when the game ball that entered the large winning port 2005 during a small win is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power On]
The power-on category consists of commands named "power-on state" and "power-on main control return destination," as shown in FIG. 89. These various commands include the status "D*H " and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1). (This was done).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state. The power-on state command is composed of information that indicates when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to perform RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that indicates which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type, specifies which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it is (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine)). In other words, the information of the model code of a pachinko machine is mainly composed of a series code that specifies which type it is, among the max type, middle type, and sweet type that indicate the model type, a copyright code that specifies the copyright of the work, and a game specification code that specifies the game specification (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (ST machine)).

The main control return destination command at power on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69.

The power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent when the main control board is powered on (including when the power is turned on and when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-5. General-purpose synchronous performance related]
The normal symbol synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start normal symbol synchronization performance", "Specify normal symbol", "End normal symbol synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization start command instructs the start of the normal pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified by the mode, the normal pattern designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal pattern synchronization end command instructs the end of the normal pattern synchronization performance, and the variable state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. As described above, the probability and time-saving state consists of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal pattern synchronization start command is sent when normal pattern 1 starts to change, the normal pattern designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern synchronization start, the normal pattern synchronization end command is sent when the normal pattern change time has elapsed (when the normal pattern is confirmed), and the change time state designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern win/lose information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related commands are related to the movable piece 2004a of the second starting hole 2004 shown in Fig. 60, which is opened and closed by the driving of the starting hole solenoid 2107 shown in Fig. 69, and are composed of commands named "normal winning opening", "normal power opening display", and "normal winning ending", as shown in Fig. 89. These various commands are assigned "F*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power opening display command instructs the start of normal power opening (when the movable piece 2004a is opened to the left and right by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107, or when it opens), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when the normal map opening starts, the normal power release display command is sent when the normal power is released (when the movable piece 2004a opens left and right by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107), and the normal map ending command is sent when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the notification display categories are made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, open/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command instructs the start of a winning abnormality notification when a ball enters the large winning port other than during a jackpot (when the condition device is operating) (when a game ball enters the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 and the count sensor 4005 detects the game ball even when there is no jackpot), the connection abnormality display command instructs the start of a connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, for example, the open circuit/short circuit abnormality display command instructs the start of a open circuit/short circuit abnormality display when there is an electrical connection break or short circuit between the main control board 1310 and the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc., for example, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of a magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. In addition, if an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command is sent to instruct the start of a vibration detection switch abnormality notification.

The door open command instructs a door open notification when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the door frame close command instructs the end of the door open notification when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. On the other hand, the main frame open command instructs a main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the main frame close command instructs the end of the main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a big prize is won in the big prize winning port other than during a big win (when the condition device is operating), the connection abnormality display command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is sent when any of the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. is disconnected or shorted, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. In addition, the door open command is sent when the door is opened (when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door frame close command is sent when the door is closed (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main frame open command is sent when the main frame is detected as open (when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619), and the main frame close command is sent when the main frame is detected as closed (when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the status display is made up of commands named Frame Status 1 Command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error Clear Navigation Command (corresponding to the error clear command), and Frame Status 2 Command. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command are each commands with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) sent from the dispensing control board 951, and a detailed description of these will be given later. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it sets "7*H" as the status as shown in FIG. 90, and sets the received command as the mode as is. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it adds the additional information "7*H" to these received commands, thereby forming them into commands with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted Frame State 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when error clear navigation is performed, the Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clear navigation is performed, and the Frame State 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted Frame State 1 command, Error Clear Navigation command, and Frame State 2 command are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test-related]
The test-related section is made up of various commands named "test" as shown in Fig. 90. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" represents a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, tests of various boards such as the peripheral control unit 1511, LCD display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72).

The test command is sent when the RAM is cleared when the main control board is powered on and at times other than when the RAM is cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, and the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on process described below is executed and the test command is sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
Other categories, as shown in Fig. 90, are made up of commands named "Starting hole winning", "Variation shortening operation end designation", "High probability end designation", "Special symbol 1 memory", "Special symbol 2 memory", "Normal symbol memory", "Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance", and "Special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance". These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start hole entry command instructs the start of the start hole entry presentation, and instructs the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, and the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, respectively. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, and is a high probability end designation. The fixed command instructs a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state, the special symbol 1 memory command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 1 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the first start hole 2002 shown in FIG. 60), and the special symbol 2 memory command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 60). The special symbol memory command conveys 0 to 4 reserved normal symbols (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 60), and the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command conveys the number of reserved special symbols 1 that have not yet been used to display the changing normal symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. This command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the first special pattern display 1403 based on the reserved special pattern 1 before it is used to display the changing patterns, and the special pattern 2 storage look-ahead performance command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special pattern display 1405 based on the reserved special pattern 2 before the reserved special pattern 2 is used to display the changing special patterns on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400.

Regarding the timing of sending these various commands, the start hole entry command is sent from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 when the ball enters the start hole (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) to notify the fact mainly by voice, the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is sent when the "high probability The special symbol 1 memory command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times in the case of "N times of probability" is consumed and the change is confirmed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation changes (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used for the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1403 and the reserved number decreases). The command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 activation changes (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special symbol variation on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when another game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special symbol variation on the second special symbol display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). The normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 activation changes (when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special symbol variation on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400, and when another game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special symbol variation on the second special symbol display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). When there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the normal pattern variations, and a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 to increase the reserved number, or when the reserved number is used to display the normal pattern variations on the normal pattern display 1402 and the reserved number is decreased), the special pattern 1 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 activation increases (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the reserved number increases), and the special pattern 2 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation increases (when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

As described above, the start hole entry command is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the player of the start hole entry (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) by voice, but how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the start hole entry command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to notifying the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the command is also used to monitor for the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. In contrast, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start hole entry command, and does not notify the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board]
Next, we will explain the various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the dispensing control board 951.

As shown in Figure 91, the classification of various commands from the dispensing control board 951 consists of commands named Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2, and the priority is set in the order of Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2.

The Frame Status 1 command (corresponding to the error command) has the following statuses: out of bulb, full, 50 or more bulbs in stock, connection abnormality, and CR not connected; for out of bulb, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to value 1, for full, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1, for 50 or more bulbs in stock, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, for connection abnormality, bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1, and for CR not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to value 1. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame Status 1 command have B5 set to value 1, B6 set to value 0, and B7 set to value 0.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) is prepared for ball detection, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. For ball detection, a value of 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), for payout detection sensor error, a value of 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and for retry error, a value of 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. "Retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been performed repeatedly by the retry operation. Bits (B0), (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command are set to 0 for B0, 0 for B1, 0 for B5, 1 for B6, and 0 for B7.

The Frame State 2 command has a "ball removed" status, during which a value of 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have the following settings: B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and B7 has a value of 0.

These various commands are sent with the following timing: Slot Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the slot status changes, and when error clearance navigation is performed; Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clearance navigation is performed; and Slot Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the slot status changes. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the command sending process of step S558 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 according to the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 92 to 94. Fig. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92, and Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
The various random numbers used for game control include a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, a reach determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (reach miss) when a jackpot game state is not generated, a variable display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display 1403 and the second special pattern display 1405 shown in FIG. 69, and a random number used to determine the first special pattern display when a jackpot game state is generated. The following random numbers are provided: a jackpot pattern random number for use in determining the jackpot pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405; a jackpot pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this jackpot pattern random number; a small win pattern random number for use in determining the small win pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405 when a small win game state is generated; and a small win pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this small win pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared a random number for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 shown in Figure 60, a random number for determining an initial value for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece 2004a, which is provided in ... and a random number for determining a variable display pattern of a normal pattern, which is used to determine the variable display pattern of a normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in Figure 69.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, the random numbers used to determine jackpots are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number for determining a jackpot is updated directly by hardware using the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Fig. 69. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Fig. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. This type of high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 in the main control side power-on processing described later does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), etc., the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is set by executing an initial value derivation process in which the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the retrieved ID code, the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit executes an ID code derivation process to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a, and the second security measure is that the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit judgment will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' equipped with other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', so even if momentary interruptions are generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece 2004a of the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 60 to generate a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. This stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Fig. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value for the main control built-in WDT 1310af, which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and timing is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and if a timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and starts timing, if a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timed time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af will be cleared and timing will be started again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af before the time set by the timer setting value is reached and then starting the timekeeping again, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clear process (step S14). In this power outage clear process, first, the power outage clear signal is output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. This power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between +24V and a reference voltage, or between +12V and a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. When no power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic of this comparison result becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power failure clear process, the power failure clear signal is first output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, which starts outputting the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Next, in the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, and a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage after power is turned on and stabilizes, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination of whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input is based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above, as the power failure warning signal.

If, after power-on, the voltage becomes greater than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes, but no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program stops outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Here, the power outage clear signal is input, with its logic set to HI from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to a latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and input to its preset terminal, the PR terminal, the D-type flip-flop outputs the power outage warning signal from the output terminal, the 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (game side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program performs this determination based on whether an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 is not operated, judging that it does not instruct to perform RAM clearing, whereas when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, the program determines that the operation switch 954 is operated, judging that it instructs to perform RAM clearing.

In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program makes the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit)) executable for a predetermined time from the time of power-on (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control MPU 1310a, and is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the program waits until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 starts up (boots up). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When the determination in step S24 indicates that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af cannot be cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs the main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be provided later.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 when game information is to be erased, and to 0 when game information is not to be erased. If the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 in step S26, that is, when game information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S28, the main control program judges whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S30). If they match, the main control program judges whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process has been normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process has not been normally completed. Note that the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after production for inspection in the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310 will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cut processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting reads the power recovery information from the ROM (main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and sets this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency from a fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of a fraudster's arm) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. to change as various subsequent processes are performed. Therefore, unless the main control power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control program clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing in response to the input of a detection signal accompanying the operation of the above-mentioned operation switch 954 (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clearing and game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 951 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and allow transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control program performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Fig. 69 (step S48). Here, the main control program performs settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to the game, by hardware, and sets the startup of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is started by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when this latch signal is input from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this acquired random number as the random number for determining a jackpot.

Following step S48, the main control program reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. A detailed explanation of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, that is, when the main control side main processing has begun, the main control program will regulate the execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt of an error clear navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to handle the detection signal input in association with the operation of the operation switch 954, and executes the RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the error clear navigation command for a predetermined time from power-on as described above (game control side power-on operation control means), and regulates the execution of the RAM clear processing even if the error clear navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (game control side normal operation control means), treating it as a release switch for releasing an error notification associated with an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error clearing section), which would normally be used to clear an error that occurs during the payout operation, can instead function as an operation section for executing a RAM clear process to start the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM (as the payout memory section)) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on, or as an operation section for clearing an error that occurs during the payout operation of the game balls after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

The main control program then determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern hit determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the program returns to step S54, where the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the program performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects game information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as the process in which the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S14. This allows the main control program to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program stops the drive signals output to the start port solenoid 2107, the attacca solenoid 2108, the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the normal pattern memory display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc., as shown in FIG. 69 (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets a prohibition on access to the RAM (step S68). This prohibition on access to the RAM makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit), thereby making it possible to prevent updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and performs main control power-on processing when power is subsequently restored.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, in an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, the wait time standby process of step S22 starts timing the standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, set to 2.5 seconds) until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72 starts (boots), and if an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before reaching that standby time, a charge of +5 V stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing. As a result, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on processing will begin again when power is restored.

If this is the case, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated in step S28 based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred, the checksum values will not match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, there is a problem that when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall staff member or the like, and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the hall staff member or the like to clear the RAM.

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above, so even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, so that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed and the game information can be prevented from being updated, and the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so the game information immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77, and the game information due to the progress of this game is maintained. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power failure process consisting of the process of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup process for storing information, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (i.e., the value calculated and stored for the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms determined by hardware, as before. That is, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process upon power recovery, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then step S24 immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 will be performed. In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and when a power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, and a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using such software, it is possible to prevent the progress to the step after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), thereby avoiding the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the system is divided into two parts: a software part that ensures that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all, and a hardware part that ensures that the main control's power cut processing is completed reliably and that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. By configuring the system in two ways, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored), a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (e.g., a jackpot game presentation screen) in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 shown in FIG. 60, and the main control board 1310 drives the attacca solenoid 2108 to open the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 by the opening/closing member 2005a, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and thus when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can restore based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state, but cannot display at all which round of the large prize game state (i.e., which round).

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member 2005a (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member 2005a to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In addition, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable piece 2004a is opened) on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004 and that the game is in a favorable game state, and the main control board 1310 is driving the starting hole solenoid 2107 to open the movable piece 2004a of the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. 60 to the left and right, if an instantaneous stop or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous stop or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and the driving of the starting hole solenoid 2107 is started, and the movable piece 2004a transitions from a state in which it is approximately vertically standing to a state in which it is opened to the left and right.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become advantageous to the player, in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. For this reason, a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which a game ball could be received into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which a game ball can be received into the second starting hole 2004, a screen instructing the game to be played (i.e., a screen instructing the game to put a game ball into the second starting hole 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

Thus, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem in that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the peripheral control board 1510 that the main control board 1310 will return to the destination by starting to drive the attacca solenoid 2108 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a to a state in which it is open. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen showing which round it is) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but can display a screen informing that it is a jackpot game state, that the attacca solenoid 2108 has started to be driven, and that the jackpot winning opening 2005 has been opened by the opening and closing member 2005a (for example, a screen saying "It's a jackpot. The jackpot winning opening is open. Play is being carried out so that the game ball will enter the jackpot winning opening"). Please go ahead and do so.") can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball is to be put into the large prize opening 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a game state in which game balls can be received into the second start opening 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 can return to the start opening 2005 as the destination for the return. The peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 informing the player that the opening solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces 2004a has been opened to the left and right (for example, a screen informing the player of the message "The movable pieces are being opened. Please play so that the game ball will enter the open starting hole.") to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball will enter the second starting hole 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored. Therefore, after power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout can be quickly restored. In other words, it is possible to prevent a player seated in front of the pachinko machine from mistaking the system of the pachinko machine for a malfunction, as appearing to be frozen when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-mentioned backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

As described above, the power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the user to clear the RAM when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that instructs which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, game specifications in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times (for example, 30 or 70 times) for the special pattern (so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed. In such a case, the workers on the manufacturing line may not know which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture for which work copyright, or may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F) even though the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture one of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D). For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, the workers on the manufacturing line cannot confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the manufacturing line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they cannot confirm which model type (max type, middle type, sweet type) and what game specifications (game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, or ST machine) are. As a result, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, and it will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that did not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. This resulted in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on status command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are created in step S50 and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the manufacturing line, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed (such as an ST machine), in addition to the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the copyright of the same work, it is possible to determine which model type (one of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) and what kind of game specification it is (such as a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine). As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, and can send the main control boards 1310 for each copyright of the work to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control program in the main control board 1310 switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control processing described later, the time during which the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control processing described later, as well as the time of the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs the payout control board 951 that various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) have been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. These various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program detects, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001 shown in FIG. 60, a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 60, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 60. The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 60, the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the fraudulent act using a magnet, the vibration sensor 2405 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the fraudulent act of giving vibration to the gaming machine, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69, which informs that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later, are read, and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Also, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, which detects the game ball that has entered the first start hole 2002, and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, which detects the game ball that has entered the second start hole 2004, are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as others shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the general winning port 2001, the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects the game ball that entered the big winning port 2005, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting port 2002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting port 2004, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that passed through the gate section 2003 are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read the second time is compared with the result read the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the third time, and the result read the third time is compared with the result read the second time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result read this time is compared with the result read the third time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the game.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program performs a total of two double readings of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, by performing a double reading that compares the detection signals from the first to third times, and then a double reading that compares the detection signals from the second to fourth times, thereby making it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and thus improving the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a random number update process (step S106). In this random number update process, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the small win symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol, which are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the random numbers for the small win symbol are random numbers related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), so the respective counters are counted up only each time this random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random numbers for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a jackpot has been determined is updated by this random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 is created for paying out game balls based on this input information. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a self-check command shown in FIG. 88 is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 60, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this, and the output information is stored in the output information memory area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951.If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a specified period of time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and is sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls, the excess number is added to the number of game balls that will be paid out as prize balls based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area in the next prize ball control process, and when the added number of game balls is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the user of this fact, and the information is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the dispensing control board 951, the dispensing control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 91. On the other hand, as described below, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, and outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954. In the above-mentioned frame command reception process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as the payer serial data, information to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 90 (the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command)) and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Note that the Frame Status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the Error Clear Navigation command corresponds to the first error clear command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the winning ball is confirmed. For example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), etc., a winning abnormality display command classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the random number for jackpot determination. Then, it is judged whether the random number for jackpot judgment (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a jackpot game state is generated (called a "special lottery").), or it is judged whether the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot symbols matches the probability hit judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of winning a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability fluctuation) that is set higher than normal (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) described above, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set for low probability and is read from the normal judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value 32767 is set for high probability and is read from the probability fluctuation judgment table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric device control process in step S114, when determining whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, this is done based on whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are due to the first start hole sensor 4002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created, whereas if the lottery result is due to the second start hole sensor 4004, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related commands shown in FIG. 89 (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth opening of large prize opening 1, command to display closing of large prize opening 1, command to display count of large prize opening 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 is set to open and close the opening/closing member 2005a of the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the large prize opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is determined. When the number of rounds is two, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a shown in FIG. 66 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 66, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is fifteen, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b shown in FIG. 66 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 66, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. The output of a lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set to light up the presence or absence of a probability fluctuation in a predetermined color, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric role control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric role control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol has been hit is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd sections (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. For example, if gate information is stored in 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 3rd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 3rd section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 2nd section of the gate information storage and the 3rd section of the gate information storage become an empty area. Here, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 3rd section of the gate information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is set based on the above-mentioned gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the RAM built in the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol wins from this read out gate information is extracted and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol win determination value previously stored in the ROM built in the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2004a. If the decision is made to open and close the movable piece 2004a, it will be in a state in which it is opened in the left and right directions, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The normal pattern variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal pattern variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal pattern synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the normal pattern display device 1402 is set so as to light up the normal pattern display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set to open and close the movable piece 2004a, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a light signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 is set to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been received normally, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2005a of the large winning opening 2005 when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece 2004a, and also outputs various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal, to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize opening count command based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the large prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as shown in FIG. 90, various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command), various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other are stored. The main circuit serial data is configured with 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 can at least transfer the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, so that the power-on state command is transmitted as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Note that in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may store various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information. In such a case, the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is first completed, and then the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a slot status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a slot status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the slot status 1 command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91 and which it has received from the payout control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a slot status 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error clear navigation command (first error clear command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits an error clear navigation command (second error clear command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame open command (first main frame open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame open command (second main frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame close command (first main frame close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame close command (second main frame close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 90.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door open command (second door frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91 and received from the dispensing control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door close command (first door close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door close command (second door close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output to the peripheral control board 1510 the main control return destination command at power on of Figure 89 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 93, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on in Figure 89 and a power-on main control return destination command, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing, to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.In the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 appears to be frozen, which can prevent the player from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from mistaking it for a malfunction.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent when the power is turned on is made in step S50 of the same process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on status command is transmitted as main peripheral serial data to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[15-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on process starts, the performance control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the performance control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, and a process of setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is able to receive various commands, such as commands regarding the control of game presentations and commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command receiving interrupt processing described below, as shown in Figures 89 and 90.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1ms) and Bank 2 (1ms) is compared. In the backup second area 1511cc, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) is compared. The performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank0 (1fr) and Bank1 (1fr) is compared, and if the compared contents match, the performance backup information (1fr) stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) for Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to perform a hot start, whereas if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used memory areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is compared with the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in its backup first area 1511db, and the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in its backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73, to perform a hot start, whereas when the compared contents do not match (i.e., when they are inconsistent), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1000, the performance control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and are set in the calendar information storage unit as the current calendar information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are set in the time information storage unit as the current time information. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and performs a process of adjusting and lighting the brightness of the backlight of the performance display device 1600 on the game board side so that it becomes the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 80% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Note that in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, no correction similar to the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600 described above is performed. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this LCD display device, preventing the LED brightness from being corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the LCD display device is executed.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it is possible to accept screen data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0. In addition, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to the value 1 (it is equal to the value 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1. By repeating such determinations, the program enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started to execute the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed, thereby initializing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the presentation control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the presentation control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is started, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 is created and set in the lamp data creation processing described later in the lamp data creation processing described later.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side light-emitting data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers and writes the data SL-DAT one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board then transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the one byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In addition, in the lamp data output process, the performance control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created and set in the lamp data creation process described below in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it transfers the remaining door side light emission data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

Following step S1012, the presentation control program performs a presentation operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a process to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410. The peripheral control RAM 1511c monitors whether the operation of the operation button 410 is performed and appropriately determines whether to reflect the operation state of the operation button 410 in the game presentation.

Following step S1014, the performance control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described below to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, this system prioritizes synchronization between the effects of the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 and the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3, as performed by the lamp data output process in step S1012, and the effects of music and sound effects that accompany the various effects, which are output from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 as performed by the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described below as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and outputs sound data of notification sounds and announcement sounds in addition to music and sound effects as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and transmits the left audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This allows music and sound effects to be played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 in accordance with various performances, as well as notification sounds and announcement sounds to be played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the performance control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be used as the light emission mode for each type of LED.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the sound command data that indicates sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data such as alarm sounds and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is updated in the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time the process itself is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process forces it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the performance control program extracts screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The performance control program analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command for identifying the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a pattern synchronization performance start command for instructing the start of a pattern synchronization performance, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, a large prize port 1 count display command (large prize port count command) output every time a game ball is received in the large prize port 2005, or a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) showing the content of full tank shown in Fig. 90 (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state is currently in. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the performance control program analyzes whether the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and in the reception command analysis processing, the performance control program analyzes the various commands stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac. The various commands include the various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89, the various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to big wins, the various commands classified as power-on, the various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, the various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, the above-mentioned door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, and main body frame close command, as well as the various commands classified as status display such as the error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), the various commands classified as test-related, and the various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above include various commands classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and automatically transitions to other remaining abnormality notifications after the abnormality is resolved. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred because another anomaly occurs after the first anomaly has occurred but before the first anomaly has been resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, if the command analyzed by the performance control program in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 90, such as the error reset navigation command (second error reset command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from the normal performance manner associated with the performance operation, for example, a visual warning is given to the outside using the game board side performance display device 1600 (performance device), the door frame side performance display device 460 (performance device), or a lamp (performance device), or an auditory warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error reset navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, which prevents fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit that were acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the time information stored in the time information storage unit, which is the hour, minute, and second, and updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is the year, month, and day, based on the updated time information.

Following step S1026, the presentation control program performs a look-ahead presentation control process (step S1027). The look-ahead presentation control process executes processing related to the look-ahead presentation based on the presentation command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special pattern 1 memory look-ahead presentation command or a special pattern 2 memory look-ahead presentation command (hereinafter, "look-ahead presentation command") is received, settings are made to execute the look-ahead presentation. Details of the look-ahead presentation control process will be described later.

The look-ahead performance command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004. In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the look-ahead performance command, a look-ahead performance execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the look-ahead performance control process, if the look-ahead performance execution flag is set, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance based on the contents of the look-ahead performance command. In other words, in this embodiment, even if a look-ahead performance command is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 decides whether or not to actually execute the look-ahead performance.

When a look-ahead performance is executed, the mode of the reserved display of the start memory displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is changed to the look-ahead performance (normal look-ahead performance). Also, after the normal look-ahead performance is executed, if a specified condition is met, a continuous look-ahead performance is executed in which the mode of the reserved display is changed each time a start memory for which a variable display is executed in advance is consumed. In the look-ahead performance control process, a process for executing the normal look-ahead performance is performed, and it is also determined whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead performance. The specified condition may be, for example, when the number of unconsumed start memories is equal to or greater than a certain number, or when there is a high expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory to be looked-ahead will be a jackpot.

The contents of the pre-reading effects may not only change the display mode of the pending display, but may also include display effects that change the character display or background image, display effects on the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission effects such as lamps, effects using audio output from speakers, and effects such as the movement of movable objects.

Following step S1027, the performance control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the performance control program extracts game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60 based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer, which is indicated by the light emission data arranged in chronological order and constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, after the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. The data is extracted and created, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the performance control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the sound command data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is started each time the sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a is converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, with board volume 0 being set to mute and board volume 6 being set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above, so that music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by a program. Unlike the board volume divided into seven stages described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall staff member or the like from being difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, the received command memory area 1511cac, and the RTC information acquisition record included in Bank 0 (1fr) that is the backup target are backed up for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the memory area 1511cad and the schedule data memory area 1511cae, to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as performance backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies it to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

In the backup process, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the backup target, to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as performance backup information (SRAM) for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and then the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM) to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the rear 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to a value of 0, and repeats the judgment of step S1008 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, in step S1008, the program waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038, and returns to step S1006 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

This peripheral control unit routine processing starts with the performance control program first setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing is being executed, then in step S1010, it executes the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, and in step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036, it finally completes in step S1038 when it sets the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit routine processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed in response to the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it can accept screen data. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, as shown in Fig. 72. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 judges whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 as shown in Fig. 96 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 95 is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to the value 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, In step S1009 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) of FIG. 95, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing is not completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 95, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in Fig. 97 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed every approximately 33.3 ms, so after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts occur in sequence.

When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the routine is terminated. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process as the interrupt process priority, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by a value of 1 (step S1102). By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, has been executed, is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive process, DMA serial continuous transmission process is performed to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and starts transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining door side motor drive data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

In addition, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing is performed to the motor drive board 4180. Here too, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the motors and solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining game board side motor drive data stored in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. The data SM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the motor drive board then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches, and set in the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, a production operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are being input from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, a drawing status information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing status information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The drawing status of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be obtained by obtaining the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition memory The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the area 1511cah and the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, as performance backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb, and then quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in succession, starting from the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, in a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the last address of Bank0 (1 ms) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are implemented. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a takes this as a trigger to capture 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a into a reception buffer, and when this capture is completed, an interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. The main serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 98. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a retrieves the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1202), and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been retrieved from the reception buffer, and when the first byte of the main serial data, the status, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 1, when the second byte of the main serial data, the mode, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the main serial data, the sum value, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to the value 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3 in step S1206, that is, if the status, which is the first byte of the main loop serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, a 1-byte receive period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the receive counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, the receive counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU 1511a to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

In step S1214, if the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already taken out of the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command memory area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer of the receive command memory area 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning and stores it. When storing the received main loop serial data in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status assigned as the first byte of the main loop serial data in association with the mode assigned as the second byte, and discards the sum value assigned as the third byte.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if, in step S1214, the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is terminated.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process shown in Fig. 75 will be described, which is executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1302). If it is determined that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has not been input, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, the timer started in step S1300 determines whether 2 microseconds have passed. If 2 microseconds have not passed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has not been input, the routine ends. However, if a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

When the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving process is performed (step S1306). This power saving process reduces the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 by sequentially turning off the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, turning off the excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, etc., thereby ensuring stable operation for the period of 20 milliseconds during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby processing, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the processing waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then copies the contents at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb is copied in order from the top address, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the top address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the top address of the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence, starting from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in order from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. In other words, the process continues to determine indefinitely whether the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a cannot output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal is interrupted to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, so that it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[15-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, a description will be given of the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 97. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 reads out LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. 100 (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, where "B" represents a bit), and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 is stored as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data and determines that a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) is being requested to be sent to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (it is normal data) and determines that there is no request to send a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 1 (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 0 (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or 0, making it possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0.

[15-1-7. Connection malfunction determination process]
Next, a connection failure determination process will be described which is executed as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87, it is determined whether or not a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 reads out the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing state information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Fig. 73 as shown in Fig. 101 (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)," with the upper four bits B7 to B4 having a value of 0 and the lower four bits B3 to B0 having a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is no malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, and this routine is then terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is judged that there is a problem between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times it has been judged that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in the judgment of step S1522 each time this routine is executed. In addition, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage, and is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power outage when power is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, whereas when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and whether a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage and is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored.

[15-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process will be described as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure judgment process shown in Fig. 101, and outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while notifying the fact that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 judges whether the screen generation schedule data is being started among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 (step S1540). In this judgment, in the scheduler update process, it is judged whether the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is being started, whereas when the performance is completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is not started. In addition, this judgment can be made based on the screen generation schedule data to determine whether or not the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, and if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, whereas if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600 (when the game machine is simply waiting for customers), the routine is ended as is.

When the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, whereas when the performance is completed according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540 and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not running, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, this communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times that it is determined that a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. In this determination, it is determined whether the number of times that it has been determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred at least once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the flag is set to 1, and when the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the flag is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546) and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, restoring the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a communication error display process is performed (step S1548) and this routine is terminated. In this communication error display process, in order to inform the player that there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a process of drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60 is performed. For example, a message saying "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store attendant" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers, in order to check whether or not a problem has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation check request for the door frame side performance display device 460, and outputs LOCKN signal output request data to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. CSDIC0 outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, and performs processing to display an alert image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store clerk.") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to that effect, and performs processing to repeatedly play an alert sound (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device.") from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to light up all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be explained using the timing chart in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, and the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 shown in FIG. 60, or the first special lottery result shown in FIG. 60, is executed by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69, or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 94, etc. If the result of the second special lottery drawn by the reception of a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is a "jackpot," the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 is repeated will be 15 rounds in total, from round 1 to round 15. In each round, when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), the round is completed, and each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

Based on a command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 to start the varying display of the left decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the middle decorative pattern in the center, and the right decorative pattern on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern is stopped, allowing the player to recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. At this time, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed from the first special pattern or the second special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66. When the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are semi-transparent to an extent that the background image can be seen, and the left decorative pattern is displayed in a variably manner from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the middle decorative pattern is displayed from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern is displayed from the upper right to the lower right of the display area, as if the reels were spinning, and when the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in an opaque state so that the background image at the positions corresponding to the stopped and displayed left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is difficult to see. In this way, the first special pattern or the second special pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops to be displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 is synchronized with the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops to be displayed on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 conveying the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, so that, as shown in FIG. 103, when the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 60 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in a column is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, so the schedule data for screen generation is running, and while the schedule data for screen generation is running, that is, during the time from when the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts to when they stop being displayed, in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is, as determined in step S1540 in this connection recovery process.

As a result, during the period from when the varying display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts to be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 until it stops, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined even once that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver), the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection between the transmitter and receiver is restored. The recovery process is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store staff member" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

When the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in a variable manner and stops (timing K1), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the performance is completed according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and all pointer updates are completed. In other words, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation is not yet activated. While the schedule data for screen generation is not yet activated, in the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, when the transmitter and the receiver If it has never been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, if there has been at least one determination that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, if the accumulated number of determinations that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the routine proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, where the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, if there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, where the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, if there is a malfunction occurring even once between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, then the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to ensure that the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is stable. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (i.e., a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed, for example, a message such as "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store employee" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user, and the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is enabled.

During the interval period in which the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts and stops displaying the varying left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern, and then starts displaying the varying left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern again, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is activated, and a malfunction has occurred even once between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative count that is determined to be a malfunction has not reached the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is always performed to restore the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver. On the other hand, when the cumulative count that is determined to be a malfunction has reached the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed to notify the user by displaying a message such as "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store employee" in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the schedule data for screen generation is running, during the period until the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output processing of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing does not perform the process to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and does not perform the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection restoration process. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store attendant" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, during the interval period from when the varying display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns starts and stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 until the varying display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns starts again, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is enabled, whereas during the interval from when the varying display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns starts and stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is disabled. This is because the combination results of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 are the information of most interest to the player, and the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state that will give the player a profit will occur. Therefore, when the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, even if the image of the performance displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 becomes distorted due to the influence of noise and cannot be displayed correctly until the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner, the performance is interrupted midway and a process is performed to restore it to a state where it can be displayed correctly, but rather, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, completing the display of the information that the player is most interested in.

In this respect, it is significantly different from the case where the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while waiting for customers. This LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. It is sent as a request to check the operation of the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the performance display drive board 4450 determines that the two signals it receives are LOCKN signal output request data, it determines that the LOCKN signal output request data is abnormal data because, as described above, the data format of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is different, and outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450, and controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the performance display device on the door frame side. Please call a store staff member.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the performance display device on the door frame side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, thereby playing the alert sound from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 sends the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so that the LOCKN signal output request data can be received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCK terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.Therefore, when a LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the door frame side performance display device 460, whereas when a LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can notify the hall staff, etc., of the malfunction by executing the notification process, so that the hall staff, etc. can check very easily whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before the player plays, and the check is not time-consuming. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be detected without much effort.

As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Since the LOCKN signal is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, when the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 can output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the received drawing data is abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input can eliminate the communication failure between the image communications by outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) will be started to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication failure during image communication at an early stage and instructing the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the malfunction. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side performance display device 460, is unable to properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, it is capable of outputting a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, which is the performance control microprocessor.The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to generate a message saying "A failure has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store staff member," which is an image that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage and notifying the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 so that the player can inform a hall staff member or directly notify a hall staff member who happens to be passing by the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall staff member can begin work to resolve the malfunction at an early stage after it occurs. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 at an early stage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is capable of repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, which indicates that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications will begin to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can continue to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing the progress of the game by starting and stopping the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405, thereby helping to resolve the communication problem.

Then, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the LOCKN signal and sends a connection confirmation signal to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 for eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to vary the first special pattern or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 and starts the game progress again, the connection confirmation signal is stopped from being output, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d stops transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and is able to output an image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can move in the direction of resolving the communication malfunction by repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction resolution signal, only during the period in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying and stops the first special symbol or second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and is not executing the game progress. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the display is stopped and the game is not being played, even if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying the first or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 and starts the game again, the distortion of the performance (image distortion) progressing on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be eliminated each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (each time the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2 occurs).

Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 951. The main control board 1310 is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on whether a game ball launched by the ball launcher 680 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, which are start areas provided in the game area 5a. The payout control board 951 is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball command output from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with a main control built-in RAM, which is capable of storing information related to the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control microprocessor, the payout control MPU 952a, is equipped with a payout control built-in RAM, which is capable of storing information related to payouts even after a power outage.

The pachinko machine 1 also has an operation switch 954. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal in Fig. 77 for erasing information related to the game stored in the main control built-in RAM to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within the period from when the power is turned on to when the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal in Fig. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control microprocessor. It also has a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, which is the game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830, when it is operated after the period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 has elapsed (or the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed), without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, as a RAM clear signal to erase the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; When operated after the period from power-on to when the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on to when the payout control unit power-on process is performed), the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is output to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred in the payout device 830, without being output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating a single operation switch 954, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

The following provides an overview of the control over game progress and presentation in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the game board side performance display device 1600 (display images such as decorative patterns, background images, letters, characters, etc.) and the display mode and operation mode of various components that contribute to the performance (performance operation unit 400, movable components, etc.).

The main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special symbol process processing, first, first and second start port winning processing is performed. In this first and second start port winning processing, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball has won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and when it is determined that a winning has occurred, a process is performed to increase the number of reserved balls on the corresponding special symbol side by 1.

When the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is "0", the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, the pending jackpot judgment is consumed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (whether it was a win or a loss, its type, etc.) is stored, and then the processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning process is completed, if the processing flag is "1", a variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (such as the variation time from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops) and the stop pattern (such as a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) of the special pattern (identification pattern) displayed on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 are determined and set based on the stored jackpot determination result and the current game state, and then the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is "2", a during-fluctuation processing is executed. In this during-fluctuation processing, a timer is used to monitor the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing, and when the timer times out, the variable display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 is stopped. After this, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3", and if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the fluctuation start processing.

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is "3", the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the jackpot game mode (e.g., the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, and the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2005a is controlled based on this. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the operation of the condition device is stopped, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, the game state flag is updated to indicate that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a special state, and then the processing flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the variable start processing.

Note that multiple types of fluctuation patterns are stored as fluctuation patterns. The fluctuation pattern determines the time from when the pattern fluctuation of the special pattern starts to when it ends, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, the type of performance pattern that appears on the game board side performance display device 1600 can be determined. In this embodiment, the multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a jackpot fluctuation pattern, a miss reach fluctuation pattern, and a miss fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and the game board side performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which, after a reach performance, the display of the decorative pattern fluctuation is developed so that the jackpot pattern is finally displayed as a confirmed stop. The miss reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss and it is determined that a reach will be performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the game board side performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the decorative pattern variation display is expanded to finally display the miss pattern after the reach performance. The miss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss and it is not determined that a reach will be performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the game board side performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the decorative pattern variation display is expanded to finally display the miss pattern without going through the reach performance. In addition, the variation pattern is specified so that it is possible to identify whether it is a variation pattern on the first special pattern side or the second special pattern side. It may also be configured so that a small win occurs as a result of the big win determination. In this case, a small win variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern, and a variation corresponding to the small win variation pattern is performed, and finally the small win pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop.

The peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the results of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to this, making it possible to execute a changing display of decorative symbols based on a changing pattern on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes control such as changing the mode of the performance display (background and reserved image) on the game board side performance display device 1600 based on the acquired game information to execute a display related to the expectation level, changing the mode (display mode and operation mode) in the performance operation unit 400, and operating movable members such as the back-down movable performance unit 3100.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can obtain operation information for the operation buttons 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the center device 2500, and can also execute control related to the presentation in accordance with this information.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail. Figure 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control process (Figure 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has transitioned to the special symbol and special electric device control processing (Figure 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start hole passing processing such as obtaining a first jackpot determination random number from the random number counter and storing this in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5232), provided that the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the on state (ball has entered the first start hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), as shown in Figure 104. In addition, if the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball has entered the second start hole 2004) (YES in step S5233), a second special random number for the second special symbol (random number for determining a second big win) is obtained from the random number counter and a second start hole passing process is executed, such as storing this in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether a jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised in a jackpot gaming state, is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops indicates either an "8R sure jackpot A" or an "8R normal jackpot", control is made to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and an opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a state suggesting a "16R guaranteed jackpot", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and then the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to enter a 16R jackpot game state.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates an "8R certain jackpot B", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and then the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to enter an 8R jackpot game state.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops indicates a mode suggesting a "2R normal jackpot", the game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short period of time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) and then closed, repeating an opening and closing pattern (round play) twice.

In this embodiment, the game area 5a is configured so that either a game ball that passes through the left side of the center device 2500 or a game ball that passes through the right side of the center device 2500 may enter the large prize opening 2005. Note that only game balls that pass through the left side of the center device 2500 may be allowed to enter the large prize opening 2005. Alternatively, only game balls that pass through the right side of the center device 2500 may be allowed to enter the large prize opening 2005.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in a situation where time-saving control is being executed, right-handed hits are more advantageous to the player than left-handed hits, and in a situation where time-saving control is not being executed, left-handed hits are more advantageous to the player than right-handed hits. In the left-handed hit state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special pattern in response to the reception of the game ball in the first starting port 2002, only a maximum of eight rounds of long-term open jackpot game state (approximately 1000 game balls can be won) will occur.

In contrast, in the right-hand hitting state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in response to the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, there is an approximately 50% probability (allocation rate of the winning type) of entering a long-open jackpot game state of 16 rounds (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). Since the expected number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is won is high, when the machine is controlled to transition to the right-hand hitting state, it is expected that a larger number of prize balls will be won than when it is in the left-hand hitting state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, when starting the opening control of the jackpot opening 2005, first, a process is performed to start the operation of the condition device, a process to reset the fluctuation count counter described below, etc.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, the process of setting the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is executed according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating that a high probability state is being established, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109 described below. It is set when the jackpot game state based on a jackpot controlled by a special probability (8R special probability jackpot A, 16R special probability jackpot, 8R special probability jackpot B) ends after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special pattern stop process shown in FIG. 114 described below or the second special pattern stop process not shown.

The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is being executed (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, it is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R special jackpot A, 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) that is time-saving controlled (high probability time-saving state) after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown. Alternatively, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are consumed 100 times without winning a jackpot after the low probability time-saving state occurs.

The change count counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the change count counter was reset, and is used in the first change pattern setting process (second change pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. It is updated (e.g., counted up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes, and is reset when a jackpot game state based on at least a specific type of jackpot (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) is started.

If the big win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5235), the next step S5236 is to determine whether the small win in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised to a small win gaming state, is set. If the small win in progress flag is set, a small win control process (step S5240b) is executed to control the small win gaming state. In the small win control process, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small win control process (step S5240b), unlike the big win control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big win opening 2005 is performed, the various set processes such as the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and time-saving count counter are not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a small win is not won in the big win determination.

In addition, if the small win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5236), on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second big win stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area, is "0" (step S5237), a first special pattern process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S5238).

In contrast, if the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area, is not "0" (step S5237), a second special symbol process is executed (step S5239), including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops. As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the reserved second special symbol does not run out (as long as the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0"), only the lottery for the random numbers for determining a second jackpot will be performed continuously without interruption, regardless of the reserved status of the lottery for the first special symbol (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can perform the lottery (determination process) for the second jackpot determination random number continuously and uninterruptedly by simply maintaining hitting the game ball to the right side of the center device 2500 (right hit) in the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state).

Note that the display of the second special pattern change is not limited to being executed with priority over the display of the first special pattern change, and for example, the display of the special patterns change may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and the stored data may be used to determine whether to start the display of the change using the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the processing of step S5231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and determines whether the reserved number of the first special symbol is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S5242). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5243 to S5245 is performed to set the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) to a new reserved state.

First, in step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241 is stored in a first special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control internal RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

Next, the first special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the first special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the first special pattern. In this first special pattern pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning or losing for pre-reading judgment, information on the pattern type for pre-reading judgment, information on the variable pattern number for pre-reading judgment, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the first special pattern itself, information on the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group of the variable pattern types, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is at its maximum value, the display of the changing first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the display of the changing first special symbol is not newly reserved.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S5233, the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol, random number for second variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and determines whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is its maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S5252). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5253 to S5255 is performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) to a new reserved state.

First, in step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control internal RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

Next, the second special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the second special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the second special pattern. In this second special pattern pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (win/lose information, pattern type, variable pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, and stores it in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the second special pattern itself, information regarding the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of big win game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group among the variable patterns, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5252 that the number of reserved second special symbols is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly placed on hold.

When the reserved number of first special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a command indicating the reserved number of first special symbols (first reserved number designation command 0-4) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the reserved number of second special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, a command indicating the reserved number of second special symbols (second reserved number designation command 0-4) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280) in which a random number for determining a jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and a lottery process is performed for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for determining a jackpot.

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which a process for determining the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped is performed based on the result of a process for determining the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped.

3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special pattern on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600.

4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the display of the first special symbol change on the first special symbol display 1403 stops (step S5283)

5. A first special pattern stop process (step S5284) that stops the display of the first special pattern so that the display mode of the first special pattern when the control of the first special pattern is stopped is displayed on the first special pattern display 1403 in the mode determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the control of the first special pattern is stopped.

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S5301. If it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for first jackpot symbol, the random number for first variable display pattern) is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in steps S5303 and S5304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot pattern, and the random number for the first variable display pattern) are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (first special symbol reserved memory area a to first special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the first start port 2002 are stored in the first (first) memory area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservation of the variable display of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first). Similarly, the second special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (second special symbol reserved memory area a to second special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the second start port 2004 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservation of the variable display of the second special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a process for determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated, based on the first jackpot determination random number read out above. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process transitions to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5312), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), it selects the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313) and compares the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number), there is a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the low probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the first jackpot determination random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately "1 in 321"). In contrast, in the low probability jackpot determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special pattern jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special pattern process executed in step S5239 of the special pattern and special electric device control process, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 321).

In addition, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value, and the 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In contrast, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric role control process, the 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In addition, the jackpot determination values (the number of jackpot determination values may be the same but the jackpot determination values are different (same jackpot probability), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (different jackpot probability)) set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number may be different, in which case it is sufficient to make the jackpot determination values of at least one of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table different (both may be different).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot flag indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination processing.

Also, if it is determined in step S5315 that the player has not won the jackpot, a determination is made as to whether the read random number for jackpot determination matches the small jackpot determination value indicating that the player has won a small jackpot based on the selected jackpot determination table (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) in this example, a random number for jackpot determination that matches the small jackpot determination value is not read out (small jackpot probability: 0 in 65,536), so in this step S5317, it is determined that the player has not won a small jackpot (determined to have missed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the result is a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table for a high probability non-time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state, a reach determination table for a high probability time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability time-saving state, and a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the game state is in a low probability state (low probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, one type of reach judgment random number matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach judgment random numbers are associated with reach judgment values indicating no reach. However, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers may match reach judgment values indicating no reach, and may not match reach judgment values indicating a reach.

In addition, in the reach judgment table for the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers, including the same reach judgment random numbers as those set in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, are associated with reach judgment values that indicate a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach judgment random numbers are associated with reach judgment values that indicate no reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach judgment value that indicates a reach will occur is higher than in the high probability time-saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the high probability non-time-saving state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables for the high probability time-saving state and the low probability state, are associated with reach determination values that indicate a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values that indicate no reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value that indicates a reach will occur is the same as in the low probability non-time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is missed (YES in step S5320) based on the comparison between the selected reach judgment table and the random number for reach judgment read in step S5302 (step S5319), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S5321).

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) described above. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the pattern determination table shown in FIG. 110(B) and compares the random number for the first jackpot pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the selected pattern determination table to determine the jackpot pattern as the state when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the pattern determination table on the first special pattern side stores random numbers for the first jackpot pattern (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the first jackpot pattern) in association with the judgment results (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). As shown in FIG. 110(C), the pattern determination table on the second special pattern side stores random numbers for the second jackpot pattern (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second jackpot pattern) in association with the judgment results (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the judgment result associated with the acquired random number for the jackpot pattern. In the pattern determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern are set to be different. More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the special jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is the same, but the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern is greater than the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern.

The specific gameplay and presentation for each type of jackpot can be summarized briefly as follows:

1. After the big win pattern combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the game to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2005, and after this 8R big win game state, the game is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) is performed in which a specific character wins, and the game is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the game board side performance display device 1600 to be relatively advantageous in the high probability time-saving state. 8R sure-win big win A

2. After the big win pattern combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the game to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2005, and after this 8R big win game state, the game is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variation display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the game board side performance display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable. 8R normal big win

3. After the big win symbol combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to control the game state to a 16R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2005, and after this 16R big win game state, the game state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (success performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since the control to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to one in which a relatively advantageous state is indicated on the game board side performance display device 1600. 16R sure-win

4. After the big win pattern combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the game to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2005, and after this 8R big win game state, the game is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (failure performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since being controlled to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to one in which the game board side performance display device 1600 indicates that the game is in a relatively advantageous state. 8R sure-win B

5. After the big win pattern combination appears on the game board side performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2005, and the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated twice to control the game to a 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the big win opening 2005. After this 2R big win game state, the game is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variable display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until 100 times are consumed), and during the execution period of the 2R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the game board side performance display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable. 2R normal big win

In addition, in the left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece 2004a that opens the second starting hole 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and only the variable display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display 1403 is executed except when there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern, and a jackpot related to the first special pattern (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) occurs. Similarly, in the right-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 2002. Therefore, in the right-hand hitting state, only the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 occurs, and unless there is a reserved ball with the first special pattern, only the variable display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display 1405 is executed, and a jackpot related to the second special pattern (16R sure-win jackpot, 8R sure-win jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occurs.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot associated with the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2005 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 8 times, and approximately 1000 game balls are paid out, whereas in the case of a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2005 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 16 times, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, if the first special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R special jackpot A, the jackpot symbol is determined to be an 8R regular jackpot, and if the first special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R regular jackpot. Also, although not shown, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is a 16R special jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be a 16R special jackpot, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is an 8R special jackpot B, the jackpot symbol is determined to be an 8R special jackpot B, and if the second special symbol setting process determines that the jackpot symbol is a 2R regular jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be a 2R regular jackpot.

If the big win flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small win flag is set in step S5333. If the small win flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small win symbol (unique symbol stop mode) is determined as the mode when the second special symbol stops changing (step S5334), and then the process proceeds to step S5337.

In addition, if the small win flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the pattern when the special pattern stops changing to a losing pattern (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337.

After the determination process for the stopping symbols has been performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the lottery results (type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss) are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S5337. Then, as the process of step S5338, the first special pattern process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), and this process is terminated. Note that a command may be set to indicate the state of the stopping symbol of the first special pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs control to display the decorative patterns on the game board side performance display device 1600 in a variable manner and then stop display based on the received judgment result notification command and variable pattern command. Specifically, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner and stopped display in the order of left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, and center decorative pattern. The left, center, and right decorative patterns may be displayed in a synchronous manner as the same pattern and stopped display at the same time. When a type other than a 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three decorative patterns of the left, center, and right. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is won, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of the decorative patterns of the left, center, and right is not the same as the other patterns) is determined. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different among the left, center, and right decorative patterns) is determined. The stopped pattern thus determined is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the change time specified from the change pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a display showing the winning effect (special display mode) before the jackpot game starts, and displays a display showing the jackpot game after the jackpot game starts.

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, if the big win flag is set (step S5341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big win corresponding to the type of big win determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342); if the small win flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small win is selected (step S5344); if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of the reach is selected (step S5346); if none of the big win flag, small win flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed), the variation pattern table at the time of the miss (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S5348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 is started (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this process is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol variation display device 1403 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the performance control is performed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In addition, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the random numbers for jackpot judgment (first jackpot judgment random number, second jackpot judgment random number) and the random numbers for jackpot patterns (first jackpot pattern random number, second jackpot pattern random number). In addition, multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is stored in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table in a form associated with each of the random numbers for the first variable display pattern. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment result based on the random numbers for jackpot judgment and the random numbers for jackpot patterns with the random numbers for the variable display pattern read out in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, and obtains the variation time information associated with the random numbers for the variable display pattern read out from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). This allows the process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, since a small win will not be won, the variation pattern table for a small win will not be used. In this example, a small win will not be won, but it may be possible to win a small win.

In addition, in the variable display pattern table during reach in this example, the type of reach performance to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with the random number for the variable display pattern. For example, in the non-time-saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of the 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach performances will be executed, 59 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach performances with low jackpot expectation will be executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach performances with high jackpot expectation will be executed.

The Super Reach effect (SP effect) has a higher chance of winning than the normal Reach effect, and for players hoping for a jackpot game state, the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state increases when the Super Reach effect is executed. In other words, such a Super Reach effect has the highest selection rate in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, which makes it possible to increase the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state even if a miss is ultimately displayed. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently increase the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state, it is necessary for a highly anticipated preview effect, which is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern, to appear (combined) during the period in which the Super Reach effect is being executed.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special pattern, a variation time of 12 seconds is set in common to the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the second jackpot determination random number and the second pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special pattern, a variation time of 0.1 to 12 seconds can be set for the time-saving state, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set for the non-time-saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special pattern is set to be the same during the time-saving state and during the non-time-saving state, and during the variation of the first special pattern in the time-saving state, the game ball is encouraged to enter the second start hole 2004 and time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second start hole 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected as the variable time when the second special symbol is a miss, it is possible to prevent each game ball that is shot into the game area 5a at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state) from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the game ball is received from this area by the gate section 2003 during the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state), a win as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, the probability of winning is 100%), and the movable piece 2004a related to the opening and closing of the second starting hole 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, even in a situation where balls can be continuously received by the second starting hole 2004 one after another (a time-saving state in which almost all game balls hit to the right side of the center role 2500 can be received by the second starting hole 2004), control can be executed so that the lottery on the second special pattern side can be consumed one after another with a high probability of winning (probability in a high probability state) of about "approximately 1 in 32" each time the game ball is received.

In this example, since the game balls are launched at 0.6 second intervals while the player is operating the handle 302, in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state), the second starting port 2004 often receives game balls at 0.6 second intervals. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table for the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state) can be set to an extremely short variation time of 0.1 seconds when the second special pattern is not obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004. In other words, in this case, when a miss is obtained, the pattern variation ends in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the launch interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls, so that even in a situation where game balls launched at 0.6 second intervals are received one after another by the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S5282) is set as the process of step S5371. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 despite having been decremented by 1 (step S5371), the above steps S5371 and S5372 will be executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time to stop the pattern is reached).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display device 1403 as the process of step S5381, and sets a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the game board side performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern (step S5382).

When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is to start (step S5387), and sets the waiting time until the jackpot game state starts (the time to display the jackpot game state to start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed, and resets the high probability flag if the high probability flag is set, and resets the time-saving flag if the time-saving flag is set (step S5389), and further resets the fluctuation counter, and updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), at which point this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the processing in step S5235 above will determine that the jackpot execution flag has been set, and the jackpot game state will be executed in the jackpot control processing described above (step S5240a).

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) corresponding to the type of jackpot specified by the jackpot start command is executed by the game board side performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S5386 that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a low-probability time-saving state (step S5390). Then, when the game is in a low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) (step S5391). In other words, when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state has been met, and the time-saving function is stopped and the game is switched to a normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time-saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether the small win flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating that the small win game state is started is set (step S5394), and the waiting time until the start of the small win game state (the time to display the fact that the small win game state is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that the small win game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and when the first special pattern process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special pattern normal processing, which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small win execution flag is set in the processing of the above step S5236, and the small win game state is executed in the above-mentioned small win control processing (step S5240b). Unlike when a big win is won, the game state does not change when this type of small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is determined to be a miss, and no processing related to the big win or small win is performed. The first special symbol process flag is updated to the initial value, which is the first special symbol normal processing, and this processing ends (step S5394). In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big win in progress flag or the small win in progress flag is not set (steps S5235, S5236), and processing related to the progress of a new game (lottery and symbol control) is performed according to the pending status (steps S5237 to S5239).

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing as the processing of step S5402, such as first obtaining a normal random number for the normal pattern from the random number counter and storing this in the normal pattern reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

Next, in the normal pattern process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal pattern process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Regular symbol change processing to wait until the regular symbol change display on the regular symbol display device 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S5406) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the variable control of the normal pattern is stopped indicates a state that suggests a "normal pattern hit", the movable piece 2004a is opened to execute a process to control the second starting hole 2004 to allow the reception of a game ball (step S5407).

The normal pattern process flag is set so that its initial value indicates that normal processing for normal patterns (step S5403) should be performed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate section passing processing (step S5402).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the processing of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the reserved number of normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

If it is determined in step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are carried out to put the variable display control of the normal symbols into a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S5412, the normal reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the normal pattern reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a that corresponds to the counter value of the normal reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. In other words, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly placed on hold.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter as the processing of step S5421. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5422, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers (normal random number, normal symbol variable random number) related to the display mode of the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the normal pattern reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservations of variable display control of normal symbols occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservations of variable display control are released in order starting from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Next, if the current game state is a time-saving state (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) (step S5425), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during time-saving (step S5426), and if the current game state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), it selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during non-time-saving (step S5427), and compares the selected normal winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal processing of the normal pattern (step S5428).

The normal winning judgment table is stored in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and includes a time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is in time-saving (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state), and a non-time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is not in time-saving (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state). In the time-saving normal winning judgment table referenced for comparison with the normal random number, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal winning judgment value indicating that a normal winning has been won, and do not match the normal losing judgment value indicating that a normal losing has been won. In this way, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal winning is always won, and the movable piece 2004a is opened to control the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004. Instead of all 255 types, more normal random numbers than in non-time-saving mode may match the normal win determination value, which indicates that a normal win has been won.

In addition, in the normal winning judgment table during non-time-saving, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers are associated with the normal winning judgment value, which indicates that a normal winning has been won, and the normal random numbers are each associated with a normal losing judgment value, which indicates that a normal losing has been won. In this way, during non-time-saving, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal winning will not be won, and the movable piece 2004a will not be in the open state to enable control of the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004. However, as mentioned above, it may be possible to make it possible to win with a normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the winning probability may be set to be lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and when the lottery result for a normal symbol is a winning one, the movable piece 2004a of the second starting hole 2004 may be opened for a shorter period of time than in the time-saving state, for example, 2 seconds, to allow the second starting hole 2004 to receive a game ball, and then the movable piece 2004a may be closed to prevent the second starting hole 2004 from receiving a game ball.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 judges that the normal symbol is a winning symbol as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing, the main control MPU 1310a sets a normal symbol winning flag indicating that the corresponding variation has won a normal symbol (step S5430), and then determines the normal symbol winning symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S5431). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 judges that the normal symbol is a losing symbol as a mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the normal symbol is a losing symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process ends.

While this control is being performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the various commands described above sent from the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the current game situation within the peripheral control unit's routine processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022)) and execute presentations according to the game situation.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether a start winning situation has occurred, and if so, controls the pending display and pre-reading effects according to the start winning situation. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, it executes one of the following processing: waiting for a change pattern specification command to be received, processing to start a change in the effect pattern, processing during a change in the effect pattern, processing to stop a change in the effect pattern, processing to display a big win, processing during a big win game, and processing to end a big win effect.

Waiting for reception of a fluctuation pattern specification command: Until a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, control is performed regarding the presentation (demo presentation, etc.) when the pattern is not in a fluctuation state and control regarding a jackpot is not being performed, and when a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the presentation pattern fluctuation start processing.

Performance pattern change start processing: Various performance contents (performance patterns, preview performances, etc.) during the pattern change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decorative pattern change is controlled to start based on the determined performance contents. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the performance pattern change processing.

Processing during pattern change: This performs control to start the various performance contents determined in the pattern change start processing at the respective timing during the pattern change period, and updates the value of the process flag to a value corresponding to the pattern change stop processing when the change time ends.

Performs control to stop the change in decorative patterns and derive and display the display result (stopped pattern) based on the reception of a command (pattern determination command) that instructs the user to stop all patterns. If the decorative pattern is to stop at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and if the decorative pattern is to stop at a losing pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for the reception of a change pattern specification command.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the presentation (such as the display presentation on the game board presentation display device 1600 that notifies the occurrence of a jackpot) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops on the jackpot pattern to when the jackpot game starts. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game processing.

Processing during jackpot play: Controls various effects during the jackpot play state. When the jackpot play state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

End of jackpot presentation processing: In the game board side presentation display device 1600, the presentation (such as a display presentation to inform the player that the jackpot play state has ended) during the period from the end of the jackpot play state to the transition to a change-permitted state is controlled. The value of the process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for reception of a change pattern specification command.

Here, we will explain the control of the pre-reading effect that is executed when the starting win occurs.

When a game ball enters a start winning hole (first start hole 2002, second start hole 2004), the main control board 1310 executes the first start hole passing process (Fig. 105) or the second start hole passing process (Fig. 106) according to the start hole through which the game ball entered, and extracts (obtains) a random number value as a start memory (steps S5241, S5251). Then, in the first special symbol pre-reading process (S5245) or the second special symbol pre-reading process (S5255), a special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command or a special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance command (see Fig. 90, hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol pre-reading performance command") is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value in the first special symbol pre-reading process (S5245) or the second special symbol pre-reading process (S5255).

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special chart pre-reading performance command, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (Figure 98). The received command is then analyzed by the received command analysis processing (S1022) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 95).

When the special chart pre-reading performance command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes pre-reading performance control processing in the received command analysis processing. In the pre-reading performance control processing, processing is executed to execute a normal pre-reading performance that changes the display mode of the pending display. Note that the pre-reading performance control processing may set a flag indicating that a pre-reading performance command has been received in the received command analysis processing, and may be called in the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 95).

In the process for executing the normal look-ahead performance that changes the reserved display, a lottery is held based on the special pattern look-ahead performance command, and the display mode of the reserved display after the change is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the display mode of the reserved display may be changed only when the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern look-ahead performance command transitions to a reach state. As an example of changing the display mode of the reserved display, it is good to change the color or shape of the reserved display. Then, a normal look-ahead performance setting process is executed to change the mode of the reserved memory display. In the normal look-ahead performance setting process, settings are made to change the display mode of the reserved display, and settings are made to output sound effects, turn on lamps, or move roles at the timing when the display mode of the reserved display is changed.

With reference to Figures 1 to 8, an embodiment has been shown in which a door frame 3 of a pachinko machine 1 is provided with a door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550, a door frame top unit 570, etc., but below is shown an embodiment in which a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) used for presentation or decoration is provided on the door frame 3 of a pachinko machine 1.

Figures 118(A) to 118(E) show an embodiment in which a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200, which imitate the ears of an animal (specifically, a rabbit), are provided as movable frame bodies on the door frame top unit 570 that constitutes the door frame 3. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can move in the vertical direction, and their specific structure and operating modes will be described later.

Figures 118(A) and 118(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 118(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 118(D) and 118(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 118(A), 118(C), and 118(D) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stored in the door frame top unit 570. Figures 118(B) and 118(E) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protruding upward from the door frame top unit 570. Figure 118(D) shows the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stored in the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided at the top of the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided at the center of the door frame 3, and through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located at the rear, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and various movable bodies within the game board can be seen. A tray unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided at the bottom of the door frame 3. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has an operation button 410, and can accept operation input by the player. Note that the upper tray 321, lower tray 322, ball loan button 328, return button 329, etc. are omitted from the illustration.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its top, right side, and left side are arranged to overlap, respectively, with the top, right side, and left side of the door frame base unit 100 that constitutes the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white, translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several mm, and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 has a right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit corresponding to the right ear frame movable body 7100 that can move in the vertical direction, and a left ear opening 7010 on the door frame top unit corresponding to the left ear frame movable body 7200 that can move in the vertical direction.

As shown in Figures 118(A) to 118(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side when viewed from the front. The specific structures and operating modes of these are shown below. Note that since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are basically identical in structure, the following explanation may only refer to the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 has a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration part 7112 made of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin on the inside, and a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration part 7114 made of a white semi-transparent synthetic resin on the outside. The surfaces other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are formed of the same white semi-transparent synthetic resin as the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration part 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is provided at a position overlapping with the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 in a front view. In addition, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 is provided at a position overlapping with the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114 in a front view. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is specifically composed of a printed circuit board with a white protective film applied to both sides, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on its surface. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode toward the front under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, and the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 can be illuminated and decorated by the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, and the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114 can be illuminated and decorated by the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be controlled by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to move from a state (first state) in which they are stored in a standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 118(A), 118(C), and 118(D) to a state (second state) in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 118(B) and 118(E). The top surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are formed flush with the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shaped to resemble an animal's ears, and can be decoratively expressed as an animal's ears moving by either being stored in the door frame top unit 570 or protruding vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, semi-transparent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several mm. Therefore, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 118(A), and the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7218 are illuminated in a predetermined manner, the front of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly illuminated, which can be visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are protruding from the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7218 are illuminated in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 and the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114 on the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110, and the left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7212 and the left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7214 on the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 can be directly viewed by the player in a predetermined light-emitting performance state.

In this way, as the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable bodies) move, a part of the frame movable body is positioned above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, which increases the area it occupies in the player's field of vision when he looks up, making it appear as if the volume of the housing has increased, providing the player with a surprise and amusement that was not possible before.

Next, referring to Figures 119 (A) to 120 (B), examples of performances that combine the specific operation modes of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, the display modes of the frame movable body simulation images that are images that mimic the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in accordance with the operation modes of the frame movable bodies, the operation reception modes of the player on the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit), and the light emission modes of the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting unit 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting unit 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting unit 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting unit 7218 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body light-emitting unit), etc. are shown.

Figures 119(A) to 120(B) are time charts showing the operation mode of the frame movable body, the display state of the frame movable body simulation image that is an image that imitates the frame movable body displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the light emission performance state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

In the time charts shown in Figures 119(A) to 120(B), the timing is expressed as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc., according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the performance. The time between each timing is one second. Furthermore, these points are not limited to this embodiment, but are also the same in other embodiments described below where similar notations are used.

Figure 119 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 119 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 120 (A) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 120 (B) shows an example of a presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the performance patterns shown in Figures 119 (A) to 120 (B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the display manner of the frame movable body simulation image, the timing at which the operation reception to the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display begins, and the timing at which the light-emitting unit of the frame movable body changes from a light-emitting performance state to an off state are all the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light-emitting unit of the frame movable body changes from an off state to a light-emitting performance state or a specific light-emitting performance state may differ depending on the performance pattern. Below, specific performance examples for each performance pattern are shown with reference to Figures 119 (A) to 120 (B).

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 119(A) to 120(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are initially stored in the door frame top unit 570 (before timing t0) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). In this state, when a reach presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t7 (for example, timing t4), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to rise simultaneously (timing t7).

At the same time, a frame movable body simulated image begins to be displayed in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600. Also, at the same time, a door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, also begins to be displayed. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed in such a manner that the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise in accordance with the rise of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulation images end the rise of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in accordance with the timing (timing t9) at which the rise of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 ends, and thereafter continue to be displayed in a manner indicating a stopped state (from timing t9 onwards). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 start to rise at timing t7, and at timing t9, two seconds later, they reach a state in which they have completed their rise (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state or the rise state).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, and the game board side performance display device 1600 starts displaying an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the operation instruction display). As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing the operation of the operation unit (for example, the character string "PUSH!!") may be displayed. The operation valid period continues until the operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time has elapsed (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, all frame movable body light emitting units change from a state in which they have performed a light emitting performance to an extinguished state.

Figures 119(A) and 119(B) show the presentation mode when an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after the period during which operation on the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9). In these presentation patterns, the display of the operation instructions ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes into a predetermined light-emitting presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result.

Figure 119 (A) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the light-emitting unit of the movable frame body changes from an off state to a specific light-emitting presentation state that is different from the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the light-emitting unit of the movable frame body changes to the specific light-emitting presentation state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, Figure 119 (B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes from an off state to a normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes to a normal light-emitting presentation state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a miss.

In the specific light-emitting performance state, it is preferable to adopt a light-emitting mode that is more stimulating to the player, such as faster flashing, stronger light, and more colors, compared to the light-emitting mode in the normal light-emitting performance state. In this way, the player is made to see a specific light-emitting mode that is different from the normal mode, and this indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, in the specific light-emitting performance state, the inner part of the movable frame body and the outer part of the movable frame body may be configured to be in a light-emitting performance state in different modes. For example, the inner part of the movable frame body may be configured to be visible in a light-emitting mode that is more stimulating than the outer part of the movable frame body. It is also possible to configure the specific light-emitting performance state and the normal light-emitting performance state to be applicable to other embodiments.

Figures 120(A) and 120(B) show the presentation mode when, after the period during which operation of the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the valid operation period, and the valid operation period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined specified time has elapsed. In these presentation patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting unit goes into a specified light-emitting presentation state according to the special lottery result.

Figure 120 (A) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and at the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18), the frame movable body light-emitting section goes into a specific light-emitting presentation state that is different from the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the frame movable body light-emitting section goes into the specific light-emitting presentation state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, Figure 120 (B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the effective operation period ends (timing t18), the light-emitting part of the movable frame goes into the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the light-emitting part goes into the normal light-emitting presentation state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in Fig. 119(A) to Fig. 120(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the effective operation period, the decorative symbols that have been changing are displayed stationary in a manner that corresponds to the special lottery result. For example, in the case of the presentation patterns shown in Fig. 119(A) and Fig. 120(A), the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a pattern of matching numbers (e.g., "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, and in the case of the presentation patterns shown in Fig. 119(B) and Fig. 120(B), the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a reach-miss pattern (e.g., "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a miss.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body starts to move from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state) while maintaining the light emission state of either the specific light emission performance state or the normal light emission performance state. At the same time, the frame movable body simulation image changes to a display state in which it descends in accordance with the descending movement of the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the frame movable body to the stored position is completed, the frame movable body simulation image changes to a display state in which it has completely finished descending in accordance with the descending movement of the real frame movable body, and the display ends.

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light-emitting state of the movable frame body may be configured to change from a specific light-emitting presentation state to a normal light-emitting presentation state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light-emitting presentation state continues, and the next decorative pattern begins to change.

Figures 121(A) to 121(C) are schematic diagrams showing the movement state of the frame movable body, the display state of the frame movable body simulation image, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the state of the operation instruction display, and the change in the light emission performance state of the frame movable body over time when the performance pattern shown in Figure 119(A) is executed. Note that, as mentioned above, the performance pattern shown in Figure 119(A) is the performance pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Figure 121 (A) shows the state at timing t5, where the decorative pattern is changing in a reach state, the frame movable body is in the stored position (first state) in the normal light-emitting performance state, the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation unit is in an operation disabled period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 121 (B) shows the state at timing t8, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in a reach state, the frame movable body is in a light-emitting performance state and is moving from the stored position (first state) to the raised position (second state), the frame movable body simulation image is a display simulating the state of moving from the stored position (first state) to the raised position (second state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 121 (C) shows the state at timing t11, where the decorative pattern is in a reach state and fluctuating, the movable frame body is turned off and in the raised position (second state), the movable frame body simulation image is a display simulating the movable frame body in the raised position (second state), the effective operation period has started in the operation unit, and an image simulating the operation unit is displayed as an operation instruction display.

Figure 122 (A) shows the state at timing t19, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in a reach state, the movable frame body is in a raised position (second state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the movable frame body simulation image is displayed simulating the raised position (second state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 122 (B) shows the state at timing t23, where the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in a sequence of numbers (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, the movable frame body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the movable frame body simulation image is displayed simulating the state of moving from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 122 (C) shows the state at timing t28, where the decorative symbols are displayed in a sequence of numbers (e.g., "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, the frame movable body is in the stored position (first state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulation image at the timing when the frame movable body starts to move, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player misses the operation of the frame movable body or the change in the light emission mode in response to the operation of the operation unit. Also, by having the frame movable body appear in an unprecedented position in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach effect), it is possible to give the player a great sense of surprise and amusement. Also, by having the light emission mode of the frame movable body light emitting part change in response to the player's operation of the operation unit, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he or she has decided the special lottery result.

When the frame movable body operates, it is preferable to select a presentation pattern so that the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern will be a jackpot is higher than when the frame movable body does not operate. For example, the expectation may be 3% when the frame movable body does not operate, and 20% when the frame movable body operates. With this configuration, when a simulated frame movable body image that mimics the frame movable body is displayed, a player who looks at the frame movable body and notices that it is operating will feel a sense of expectation for a jackpot.

This configuration makes it possible to further increase the player's interest in the movable frame body, and to expand the player's interest, which was previously limited to a specific range centered on the game board 5, further outward.

The volume of the variable effect sound may be configured to be changed from a normal state to a suppressed state in which the volume is reduced while the frame movable body is in operation.
The variable performance sound is a sound that is recognized by the player as background music, in which a predetermined piece of music is played in accordance with the variation of the decorative pattern. For example, a piece of music consisting of the voice of a predetermined singer and the sound of playing a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the decorative pattern varies (for example, when all the variation results of the decorative pattern are non-reach misses and the variation time is about 10 seconds on average). By outputting such a variable performance sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of such pieces of music in advance, and to start playing a different piece of music when the playback of a certain piece of music is completed to the end. Alternatively, it is also possible to fade out the music that has been played up until that point in the middle of playback in accordance with the change in the game state, and play another piece of music different from the music that has been played up until that point. In this embodiment, the volume of such a variable performance sound is suppressed in accordance with the timing of the operation of the frame movable body, thereby suppressing a state in which the performance becomes excessive.

In addition, a special sound that alerts the player that the frame movable body is moving or has moved may be played for a short time in accordance with the timing of the movement of the frame movable body. The special alert sound is not a sound that is recognized as a series of music played for a long time like the variable performance sound, but rather a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping pong") played for one second, a music piece that ends in a short period of time (for example, two seconds), or a sound like a drum being beaten continuously (for example, a sound such as "doko doko doko ...") may be played for several seconds. In addition, it is preferable that the sound that constitutes the special alert sound does not include the instrument sound used as part of the variable performance sound. In addition, the special alert sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the variable performance sound. For example, even in a normal state where the volume of the variable performance sound is not suppressed, and even in a suppressed state where the volume of the variable performance sound is suppressed, the special alert sound is output at a predetermined volume. In addition, the volume of the special alert sound may be larger than the volume of the variable performance sound in the suppressed state.

In this way, by reducing the volume of the variable effect sound in accordance with the movement of the frame movable body and generating a special warning sound, it is possible to prevent the effects provided to the player from becoming excessive. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged by coming into contact with the frame movable body.

Instead of informing the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring, which is advantageous to the player, by operating the movable frame body, the player may be informed of the probability of occurrence of other game content besides the probability of a jackpot occurring.

For example, even if a jackpot is confirmed, the content of the benefit that will be granted to the player during the jackpot may be notified. The content of the benefit may be, for example, the type of benefit or the amount of benefit.

Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the player of the type of benefit that will be granted to the player after a jackpot. For example, it may be configured to notify the player of the type of benefit that will be granted to the player after a jackpot, or it may be configured to notify the player of the amount of benefit that will be granted to the player after a jackpot.

In this way, the device may be configured to notify not only the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state) will occur, but also the degree of expectation regarding the amount of benefit given to the player in a state advantageous to the player (for example, the number of balls awarded to the player or the number of times the jackpot opening is opened), the degree of expectation that a new state advantageous to the player (for example, a special state or an electric chute support state) will occur after a state advantageous to the player ends, and the type (for example, a special state or an electric chute support state) and amount (for example, the number of times the special state will continue or the number of times the electric chute support will continue) of benefit given to the player in a new game that occurs after a state advantageous to the player ends.

By executing a predetermined presentation mode out of a plurality of different presentation modes, the player can be notified by the operation of the movable frame that there is a high expectation of a jackpot occurring, which is advantageous to the player.
The degree of expectation may be notified to the player in other ways that the player can perceive, not limited to the operation of the frame movable body. For example, the degree of expectation may be notified to the player in various ways that the player can perceive, such as the display mode in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the sound mode output from a specified speaker, the light emission mode based on the light output from a specified light source, the vibration mode of a specified vibration source, etc.

The expectation level may also be configured to include the certainty that a specific advantageous state will occur (100% certainty that a specific advantageous state will occur). For example, when a specific presentation mode is executed, the expectation level that a specific advantageous state will occur may be 10%, and when another presentation mode is executed, the expectation level that a specific advantageous state will occur may be 100%.

It is also advisable to configure the game so that the rate at which a presentation mode with a higher expectation of an advantageous state occurring is executed is lower. For example, the execution rate of a presentation mode may be set so that the ratio of the number of times a predetermined presentation mode with a low expectation of an advantageous state occurring to the number of times a predetermined presentation mode with a high expectation of an advantageous state occurring is executed is, for example, 90:10. With this configuration, when a predetermined presentation mode with a low probability of occurrence is executed, the player can experience both the joy of experiencing a presentation with a low probability of occurrence and the anticipation of an advantageous state, which makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

A known type of display effect that is performed in the display area of the display device is a look-ahead display effect that is performed over multiple variable displays of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the specific hold that caused the look-ahead display effect to occur is set to have a higher probability of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot, compared to a variable display of decorative symbols that does not have a look-ahead display effect. For this reason, when a look-ahead display effect is executed, the player feels a sense of anticipation that a jackpot will occur.

Meanwhile, in the display area of the effect display device, the decorative pattern is displayed in a changing manner, and multiple effect displays corresponding to the decorative pattern being displayed in a changing manner (for example, an effect display showing the expectation level in which the changing decorative pattern is displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot) are also displayed. This means that the player is forced to simultaneously view the look-ahead effect display that suggests the decorative pattern change display results several times in the future, as well as the change display mode of the currently changing decorative pattern and the display content of the effect display corresponding to the currently changing decorative pattern.

Although this situation can make the game more interesting, it can also cause problems in that the player cannot fully grasp what these display effects indicate. In particular, because the player is focused on the display of the currently changing decorative pattern and the various display effects corresponding to that display, the look-ahead display effect is relatively inconspicuous, and there is a problem that the player may not be aware that the look-ahead display effect is being executed or that the decorative pattern corresponding to the look-ahead display effect is about to start changing.

Below, we will explain an embodiment that allows the player to easily understand that a look-ahead display is being executed and that the timing is approaching when the display of the decorative pattern that corresponds to the look-ahead display will begin to change.

Below, with reference to FIG. 123, first, various images that are displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pre-reading performance display is executed will be described.
Specifically, examples of the effects in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the change in the display of the decorative symbols to the stop of the change when the result of the special lottery performed in response to the winning of the first starting port 2002 is a miss will be described with reference to Figs. 123(A) to 123(F). Also, examples of the effects in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the change in the display of the decorative symbols to the stop of the change when the result of the special lottery performed in response to the winning of the first starting port 2002 is a jackpot will be described with reference to Figs. 123(A) to 123(D), 123(G), and 123(H).
In this specification, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

Figure 123 (A) shows a state in which three decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. It also shows a state in which the reserved image corresponding to the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state is displayed. It also shows a state in which there are three reserved balls corresponding to the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002. Specifically, the state in which a decorative pattern with the number "3" is displayed as a left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "5" is displayed as a middle decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed as a right decorative pattern at equal intervals from the left in the approximately vertical center of the display area is shown. The decorative patterns are composed of a background area (white part in the figure) consisting of an image that is a vertically elongated rectangular shape and forms the outline of the decorative pattern, and a number area (black part in the figure) consisting of an image showing any one of the numbers "1" to "9". As shown in the figure, the number area is located in the center of the background area.

It is preferable that the decorative pattern be composed of an image in a color different from that of the background area and the number area. For example, the background area may be white and the number area may be black. Note that the outline of the rectangular shape that forms the outline of the background area may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the pending display area, the first pending display area, the second pending display area, the third pending display area, and the fourth pending display area are set, and in the figure, the pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and the first to third pending display areas are each shown displaying pending images. Note that the fourth pending display area is shown with a dotted line for the purpose of explanation, but the dotted line does not actually appear in the display area as a display state, and in the following drawings, such dotted lines are generally not used to indicate the intended position where the pending image will be displayed.

In FIG. 123(A), the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the decorative patterns of "3", "5", and "2" that are stopped and displayed. The reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image has ended. The reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area has ended. The reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area has ended.

Figure 123 (B) shows the display state at the time when the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area described with reference to Figure 123 (A) starts to change.
Specifically, the upper end of the previous decorative pattern is displayed below the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and the lower end of the next decorative pattern is displayed above the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Also, the display of the reserved display is terminated.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are always displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and basically white in color. In addition, the diameter of the circle of the reserved image is larger than that of the reserved image.

Figure 123 (C) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that scrolls downward within the display area.

Specifically, when a decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the lower side of the pattern is first displayed on the upper edge of the display area, then the decorative pattern moves downward so that the entire decorative pattern is displayed in the display area, then the bottom end of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom edge of the display area and only a portion of the upper side of the decorative pattern is displayed, and finally the top end of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom edge of the display area and the decorative pattern is no longer displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes its display state in a sequence that goes from not being displayed in the display area to being displayed in the display area, and then back to not being displayed in the display area.

The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are set in a display order. Specifically, a decorative pattern with a certain number (e.g., "1") is followed by a decorative pattern with the next number (e.g., "2"), which are displayed in order from the top of the display area. The order of numbers attached to the decorative patterns is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", and "9". After the decorative pattern with the number "9", a decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 123(C), a state is shown in which a left decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the lower side and a left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the upper side are displayed as left decorative patterns, but both left decorative patterns scroll downward, and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative pattern with the number "3" appearing from the top of the display area.

With reference to FIG. 123(B), it has been explained that the display of the reserved image that had been displayed in the reserved display area is terminated at the same time as the decorative pattern starts to change. At the same time as the display of the reserved image is terminated, the reserved image that was displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed moving to the left while expanding, and is displayed as the reserved image in the reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image that was displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed moving to the left, and is displayed as the reserved image in the first reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image that was displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed moving to the left, and is displayed as the reserved image in the first reserved display area. Such expansion of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left is performed over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.67 seconds). FIG. 123(C) shows the state of the reserved image after such movement.

Figure 123 (D) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Also, in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002, a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area.

Here, the temporary stop display will be explained. The temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it has stopped at the display position where the decorative pattern is finally stopped or in the vicinity thereof. Specifically, for example, the decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed so that the number attached to the decorative pattern moves up and down gently or sways to a degree that can be clearly seen, based on the display position where the decorative pattern is finally stopped, thereby performing the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, the display may be rotated within a range of a predetermined angle (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) with the vertical direction as an axis. In either case, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped continues to be displayed in the display area.
In this way, by performing the temporary stop display, the decorative symbols being displayed in a varying manner are visually recognized by the player as being stationary, and the player can confirm the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. Note that when the decorative symbols are finally displayed in a stopped state, the display of the decorative symbols moving up and down as described above is not performed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a completely stopped state.
Although the example given is the end of the variable display, a temporary stop display may be performed for a predetermined period of time at the start of the variable display.
In addition, in the middle of the changing display, at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped for a predetermined period of time, and then all of the decorative symbols may be changed again at high speed. This type of display mode is used, for example, in "pseudo consecutive performances."
The mode of the temporary stop display may be different depending on the timing at which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (such as the progress of the variable display) and the game state. For example, one or both of the period and amplitude of the vertical movement of the decorative pattern may be different. Also, the swinging direction may be a left-right direction or a diagonal direction instead of a vertical direction. Also, instead of displaying in a manner rotating around the vertical direction as an axis, a display may be displayed rotating within a range of a predetermined angle (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) around the left-right direction or a diagonal direction as an axis.
In addition, the fluctuating state in which the provisional stop display is being performed may be referred to as "sway fluctuation" in this specification.

The display may change so that the temporarily stopped decorative pattern becomes the final decorative pattern, or the temporarily stopped decorative pattern may be scrolled downwards again, changing to a decorative pattern with a different number attached, but more details will be given later.

In addition, in Figure 123 (D), arc-shaped lines are added to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached, which are lines indicating that the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached is in a temporarily stopped state. Also, in other drawings, such arc-shaped lines may be added to decorative patterns, and in this case too, it is indicated that the decorative pattern is in a temporarily stopped state.

Figure 123 (E) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped following the left decorative pattern, and the center decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "4" added as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped.

Figure 123 (F) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped. In accordance with the stop display of the center decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern that were temporarily stopped are also stopped. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "7" added to the center decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "4" added to the right decorative pattern are stopped in the figure, and the combination of decorative patterns displayed indicates that the special lottery result was a miss. In a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during the change or temporary stop will no longer be displayed. The stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then the change display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is newly started. The reserved image that was displayed in the reserved image will cease to be displayed at the same time that the new decorative pattern begins to change.

Figure 123 (G) shows a state in which, following the display state shown with reference to Figure 123 (D), the right decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, following the left decorative pattern, and the center decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the right decorative pattern are each displayed as a temporary stop, showing a display state in which a reach state has occurred.

Figure 123 (H) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the center decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern that were temporarily stopped are also stopped. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the center decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the right decorative pattern are each stopped and displayed, and the combination of decorative patterns displayed indicates that the special lottery result was a jackpot. In a state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns that were displayed above and below each decorative pattern during the fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is no longer displayed. After that, the big win game state starts, and when the big win game state ends, the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern resumes, and then the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area starts again.

In the above example, the pending image is displayed in the pending image display area until the timing when the new decorative pattern starts to change, but the display of the pending image may be ended at the same time as the display of the decorative pattern changes stops. Alternatively, the display of the pending image may be ended at a predetermined timing between the time when the display of the decorative pattern changes stops and the time when the display of the new decorative pattern changes starts.

In this way, in the example of the variable display of the decorative symbols described with reference to FIG. 123, in response to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol start to be displayed variable from a stopped state, and after a predetermined time, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped in that order, and then the center decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in accordance with the stopped display of the center decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are also simultaneously displayed in a stopped state. In addition, by stopping the decorative symbols with the same number as the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win. In addition, by stopping at least one decorative symbol with a different number among the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.
The period during which the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are all stopped and displayed is, for example, one second (see FIG. 124, etc., described later). This period may be called the "fixed stop period" (or the "fixed display period").

Note that one such variable display (from the start to the end of the variable display) may be referred to as a "game," and the number of times the variable display occurs may be referred to as the "number of games." For example, this is used in the following ways: "The number of time-saving games is 100," or "After the end of a game in which a special effect has been executed, the special effect will not be executed again within four games."

Although the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved images are displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas, in order to clearly distinguish between them, the reserved image may be referred to as a current reserved image and the reserved image as a standby reserved image. Also, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area may be referred to as a first standby reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area as a second standby reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area as a third standby reserved image, and the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area as a fourth standby reserved image.
In addition, the reserved image (or the lottery information corresponding to this reserved image) displayed in the first reserved display area may be referred to as "Reserved 1." Similarly, the reserved images (or the lottery information corresponding to this reserved image) displayed in the second reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be referred to as "Reserved 2" to "Reserved 4."

Below, an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 123 will be described with reference to the presentation examples shown in FIG. 124 and FIG. 125. FIG. 124 is a time chart for this presentation example, and FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the display state at a specified timing in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 in this presentation example. Note that in FIG. 125, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, and the display mode of the reserved image in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are the same as the display mode described with reference to FIG. 123 unless otherwise noted. Note that these points are also the same in other embodiments and presentation examples described below unless otherwise noted.

Figure 124 is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in this embodiment. Just before timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board presentation display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative patterns are stopped from changing. Figure 125 (A) is a diagram showing this state, showing the decorative patterns numbered "6", "4", and "5" from the left being displayed frozen. From this state, when timing t0 occurs, a new display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern begins. Figure 125 (B) is a diagram showing the display state at a specified timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of the display change, showing the state in which the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is being changed.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 124(A), the timing is indicated as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc., depending on the time, in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is one second. These points also apply to the other embodiments and effects examples described below, unless otherwise noted.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 124, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, generating a new reservation. This start entry triggers the start of the pre-reading performance display at timing t2. In response to the pre-reading performance display, a specific reservation image that resembles a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of a normal reservation image. The color of the specific reservation image is green. FIG. 125(C) shows the display state at a specified timing (for example, timing t3) after the pre-reading performance display is started at timing t2. Also, it shows a state in which a specific reservation image that resembles a pine branch with leaves is displayed in the third reservation display area instead of a normal circular reservation image.

In the look-ahead performance display, a look-ahead performance image is displayed in a frame-like shape that surrounds the display area and hides part of the decorative pattern that is displayed in a scrolling and moving manner downward. The look-ahead performance image is an image in which multiple shapes (specifically six) resembling pine branches with leaves are arranged so that they protrude toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead performance image is a slightly lighter green than the color of the specific reserved image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image is based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and the execution ratio of the effect is set so that the probability of a jackpot is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image are displayed compared to when only the normal reserved image, which is circular and white, is displayed. For example, when the normal reserved image is displayed, the probability of a jackpot is set to 0.3%, and when the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image are displayed, the probability of a jackpot is set to 10.0%.

By configuring it in this way, when a pre-reading performance image and a specific reserved image are displayed and a change in the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image is made, the player will have a sense of expectation that the decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopping manner that indicates that a jackpot will occur as a result of the change in the decorative pattern, compared to when a normal reserved image is displayed and a change in the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image is made.

From timing t2 to timing t4, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed while the look-ahead performance image is displayed, but while the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is being displayed, the look-ahead performance image is displayed closer to the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is displayed while a portion of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is hidden by the look-ahead performance image. Note that the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the specific reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area are displayed closer to the decorative pattern and the look-ahead performance image.

At timing t4, the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are all displayed frozen. Figure 125 (D) shows the display state where the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are all displayed frozen at timing t4. At the timing where the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are displayed frozen, the front-to-back relationship between the look-ahead performance image and the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the look-ahead performance image. Note that the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the specific reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area are displayed in front of the look-ahead performance image.

When the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the decorative patterns located above and below each decorative pattern are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 125(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed as the left decorative pattern, but until just before timing t4, the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed above the decorative pattern with the number "1", and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1". With this configuration, only the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed stand out and are visible to the player.

The decorative symbols are displayed stationary from time t4 to time t5. During this period, the display mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed closer to the player than the pre-reading performance image continues.

At timing t5, a new display of the decorative pattern begins. When the new display of the decorative pattern begins, the foreground image and the left and right decorative patterns switch positions again, and the foreground image is displayed in front of the left and right decorative patterns.

When the decorative patterns are stopped, the decorative patterns above and below each decorative pattern are no longer displayed, but when the new display of the decorative patterns starts, the display of the decorative patterns above and below each decorative pattern is resumed. For example, in FIG. 125(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed as the left decorative pattern, but at timing t5, the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed above the decorative pattern with the number "1", and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1", and then the downward movement of each decorative pattern is instantly started.

After that, the front-to-back relationship between the look-ahead performance image and the left to right decorative patterns will be swapped in accordance with the start and end of the display of the decorative patterns. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left to right decorative patterns are displayed closer to the front of the look-ahead performance image will continue, but in the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and the period from timing t14 to timing t15, the display mode in which the left to right decorative patterns are displayed closer to the front of the look-ahead performance image will also continue.

At timing t15, the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting winning that triggered the display of the look-ahead performance image and the specific reserved image begins to change. Figure 125 (E) shows a state in which, at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t16) after timing t15, the look-ahead performance image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and the specific reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area.

At timing t25, the left and right decorative patterns with the number "2" attached are displayed as temporary stops, creating a ready state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state where it scrolls downward and moves. Also, at timing t25, the display of the look-ahead performance image that had been displayed up until then ends, and the look-ahead performance image is no longer displayed. Figure 125 (F) shows the display state at a specified timing (e.g., timing t26) after the ready state occurs at timing t25 and the display of the look-ahead performance image ends.

At timing t33, the center decorative pattern that was being displayed in a variable manner according to the special lottery result is stopped. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a miss, a decorative pattern with a number other than "2" is displayed as the center decorative pattern. Also, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed as the center decorative pattern.

Figure 125 (G) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "3" added as the center decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Then, at timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area ends. Meanwhile, the stopped display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues until a new gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2002.

On the other hand, FIG. 125(H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added as the center decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Then, at timing t34, the display of the reserved image that was displayed in the reserved display area and the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern end, and the game transitions to a jackpot game state.

This embodiment is configured so that while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, the pre-reading performance image is displayed closer to the player than the decorative pattern, and while the decorative pattern is being displayed stationary, the decorative pattern is displayed closer to the player than the pre-reading performance image.

By adopting this configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, and can recognize that he or she is one step closer to the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image, without having to check the movement of the specific reserved image.

In addition, the area that the pre-reading performance image occupies in the display area is larger than the area that the specific reserved image occupies in the display area, and the pre-reading performance image is displayed in a position closer to the stopping position of the decorative pattern than the specific reserved image, so even if the player is concentrating on visually checking the changing state of the decorative pattern, it is possible for the player to recognize that he or she is one step closer to the changing display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image.

In addition, by displaying the decorative pattern and the look-ahead performance image in an overlapping position, it is possible to increase the size of both the decorative pattern and the look-ahead performance image, thereby improving the efficiency of use of the display area. Furthermore, by configuring the image displayed in the foreground to be switched between the decorative pattern and the look-ahead performance image depending on the conditions, the display can be optimized.

Specifically, while the decorative patterns are changing, the look-ahead performance image is displayed in front, creating a sense of anticipation in the player as the timing approaches for the changing display corresponding to the look-ahead performance image. On the other hand, while the decorative patterns are stopped from changing, the stopping mode of the decorative patterns is not obstructed by the look-ahead performance image, making it possible to clearly show the player the entire decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed.

It may be configured so that a performance mode can be executed in which only one of the preview performance image and the specific reserved image is displayed. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the expectation level is higher when both the preview performance image and the specific reserved image are displayed compared to when only one of the preview performance image and the specific reserved image is displayed.

Although an example has been shown in which a specific reserved image is displayed in a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves, the specific reserved image may be displayed in other manners.
For example, the normal reserved image may be a white circular shape, and the specific reserved image may be a red circular shape. Also, a plurality of specific reserved images may be provided. For example, the specific reserved images may be blue, green, red, and gold (yellow) reserved images that can be displayed, and the expectation level may increase in the order of blue, green, red, and gold (yellow).

In this embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted from the front into the obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Specifically, the obstacle nail 1201 is held in the panel board 1110 by the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c provided at the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 being engaged so as to bite into the panel board 1110. In addition, the panel board 1110 is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and it is possible to visually check the movable role and the illuminating decorative portion arranged behind the panel board 1110 through the panel board 1110. However, by engaging the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c with the panel board 1110, the panel board 1110 is scratched or cracked, and a cloudy portion (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the whitened portion HKB) is generated, and these portions become visible to the player, resulting in a problem that the aesthetics are deteriorated. The manufacturing method and structure of the gaming panel 1100 are explained below with reference to Figures 126 and 127.

Figure 126(a) is a side view showing the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110. Figure 126(b) is a cross-sectional view of the panel board 1110 and the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 viewed from the right. Figure 126(c) is a cross-sectional view of the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 viewed from the right. Figure 126(d) is a cross-sectional view of the part A where the whitened part HKB may occur around the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 viewed from the right. Figure 126(e) is a cross-sectional view of an example of a state in which the whitened part HKB actually occurs around the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 viewed from the right. Figure 127(a) shows the dimensions of each part that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201, and Figure 127(b) is a cross-sectional view showing the dimensions of each component shown in the glass plate 192, the obstacle nail 1201, and the panel plate 1110 when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel plate 1110. Note that some reference numerals have been omitted in the figure.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be described with reference to FIG. 126(a). The obstacle nail 1201 is entirely made of brass and has a certain degree of elasticity. In addition, the entire obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster in a white light irradiation environment. When viewed from the side, the obstacle nail 1201 is composed of an obstacle nail head 1201a, an obstacle nail first body 1201b, an obstacle nail spiral-shaped part 1201c, an obstacle nail second body 1201d, and an obstacle nail tip 1201e from the left. The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The obstacle nail head 1201a has a dome-shaped round head shape and a perfect circle shape when viewed from the front. The diameter L2 of the obstacle nail head 1201a when viewed from the front is 4 mm, and the thickness L3 when viewed from the side is 1 mm. The obstacle nail first body 1201b has a cylindrical shape. The length L4 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail is 2 mm. The shape of the helical portion of the obstacle nail is approximately cylindrical. The length L7 of the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail is 4 mm. The diameter of the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail. The shape of the second body 1201d of the obstacle nail is cylindrical. The length L8 of the second body 1201d of the obstacle nail is 1 mm. The diameter L6 of the second body 1201d of the obstacle nail is 2 mm, which is the same as the diameter L5 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail. The shape of the tip 1201e of the obstacle nail is conical. The length L9 of the tip 1201e of the obstacle nail is 1 mm.

Next, referring to FIG. 126(b) and FIG. 127(b), the structure of the panel plate 1110 before the obstacle nail 1201 is planted will be described. The panel plate 1110 is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material. The front and rear surfaces of the panel plate 1110 are formed smoothly, and it is possible to clearly see the members located at the rear through the panel plate 1110. The panel plate 1110 may be formed of a plate material made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin. The thickness L10 of the panel plate 1110 is 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 is provided with an obstacle nail through hole 1110a for planting the obstacle nail 1201. The obstacle nail through hole 1110a is cylindrical in shape, and its diameter L11 is 2 mm. The obstacle nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110. For this reason, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a appears slightly cloudy and is visible to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 126(c) and FIG. 127(b), a method of planting the obstacle nail 1201 into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 will be described. The obstacle nail tip 1201e of the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and a force is applied backward (to the right in the figure) until the obstacle nail spiral part 1201c, the obstacle nail second body part 1201d, and the obstacle nail tip part 1201e are all positioned in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and a part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b is positioned in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, thereby completing the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 into the panel board 1110. The obstacle nail 1201 is planted by a nail gun. The length L4 of the first body 1201b of the obstacle nail is 20 mm, of which the length L12 of the portion located within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is 3 mm, and the length L13 of the portion not located within the obstacle nail through hole 1110a and located in front of the front surface of the panel board 1110 is 17 mm. Figure 126 (c) shows the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 has been completely installed in the panel board 1110.

The distance L14 between the tip of the obstacle nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is 1 mm. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nail tip 1201e from injuring a gaming machine manufacturer or a gaming store employee if they inadvertently touch the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The shape of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is designed to penetrate the panel board 1110 in order to expel acrylic resin powder that is produced when the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is scraped away when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted into the panel board 1110 from the rear of the panel board 1110.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body 1201d are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c slightly deforms the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. When the obstacle nail 1201 has been pushed in, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the obstacle nail 1201 is firmly held against the panel board 1110.

The diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a may be configured to be slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b and the diameter L6 of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and slightly smaller than the diameter of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c. In this case, when the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, a small gap is generated between the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b or the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d and the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. In this configuration, when a game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is elastically deformed, the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed to elastically deform by the amount of this gap. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the obstacle nail 1201 breaks when the game ball repeatedly collides with the obstacle nail 1201.

However, during the process of planting the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c moves backward inside the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, causing scratches on the inside of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110, which can be seen as white.

The obstacle nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel board 1110, and has a shape that penetrates the panel board 1110. Because it is formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through hole is rough and appears white. In particular, since the obstacle nail tip 1201e is planted while remaining inside the panel board 1110, the obstacle nail through hole 1110a itself appears white at the rearmost part of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a.

In addition, when the installation of the obstacle nail 1201 is completed, the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is elastically deformed to maintain the engagement with the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c, but if the limit of elastic deformation is exceeded, cracks may occur from the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a with which the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c engages toward the outside.

In addition, when playing on a gaming machine installed in an amusement facility, the gaming ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 multiple times, and the kinetic energy of the gaming ball is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a via the part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b located inside the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, which may cause cracks to occur on the front side of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Also, cracks may occur around the part of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a where the obstacle nail spiral shaped part 1201c engages (inside the panel board 1110).

In addition, in a gaming machine installed in an amusement facility, there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as forcibly bending the obstacle nail 1201 in an attempt to change the winning rate of a certain winning slot to a situation favorable to the player, or an incident such as a store employee cleaning the front of the panel board 1110 with the door frame 3 in the open state and then accidentally pinching a cleaning tool between the door frame 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 when moving the door frame 3 in the closing direction to close the door frame 3. In such a case, a large force is applied to the obstacle nail 1201, and the force is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a through the part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b located inside the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and a crack may occur on the front side of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Also, a crack may occur around the part of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a where the obstacle nail spiral part 1201c engages (inside the panel board 1110).

In FIG. 126(d), A indicates a portion where the whitened portion HKB may occur due to collision of the game ball YGK. Also, FIG. 126(e) and FIG. 127(b) show an example of a state where the whitened portion HKB has actually occurred. In FIG. 126(e) and FIG. 127(b), the force applied to the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the whitened portion HKB is generated on the front surface of the panel board 1110. Also, the state where the whitened portion HKB is generated inside the panel board 1110 starting from the portion where the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c engages in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is shown. As shown in FIG. 127(b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Furthermore, the longer the operating period at the gaming establishment, the higher the possibility of whitened area HKB occurring on panel board 1110. In addition, once a whitened area HKB occurs, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitened area HKB weakens, and the whitened area HKB gradually expands from that point onwards, and when viewed from the front, the whitened area HKB may extend outwards from the obstructing nail 1201 as its center.

The shape of one whitened area HKB that occurs in this way is generally flat and its area is approximately 1-2 square mm, but multiple whitened areas HKB may occur radially from one obstructing nail 1201 when viewed from the front. Also, such whitened areas HKB may occur on multiple obstructing nails 1201.

Furthermore, the occurrence of such whitened portion HKB may weaken the strength of engagement between the obstacle nail through hole 1110a and the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c. In this case, the rebound behavior of the game ball when it hits the obstacle nail 1201 may be weaker than expected at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 1 (the game ball may not bounce much when it hits the nail, and the momentum may be absorbed), which may result in a situation where the winning rate into the winning slot changes.

When playing on a gaming machine installed in an amusement arcade, if the machine is operated for a long period of time at the amusement arcade, the obstacle nail 1201 may break. In this case, the entire gaming board 5' will need to be replaced.

In this way, when obstacle nails 1201 are planted in a panel board 1110 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the aesthetic appearance is improved by making the specified movable parts and specified illuminating decorative parts located behind the panel board 1110 visible, but there is a problem in that the area near the obstacle nail through hole 1110a where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted appears white, detracting from the aesthetic appearance. The following describes the means for solving these problems.

Figure 128 shows an embodiment in which the panel board 1110 has a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface. Figure 128 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Note that the obstacle nail head 1201a is omitted. Therefore, the circles showing the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 shown in the figure actually show the thickness of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232. It can also be said that this shows the thickness of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. These points are the same in each drawing that explains an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128.

Figure 128(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 128(a). Figure 128(b) shows a schematic cross-section of the area where the life nail 1230 is implanted, located on the left side when viewed from the front. This also applies to the other drawings that explain embodiments that are modifications of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128.

Figure 128 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection. The inclination angle in this cabinet diagram is 45 degrees. In the figure, the detailed structure of the obstacle nail 1201, such as the obstacle nail head 1201a, the obstacle nail spiral shaped portion 1201c, and the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e, is omitted, and the obstacle nail 1201 is shown as a single cylinder. In this cylinder, the part shown by the solid line indicates the obstacle nail head 1201a of the obstacle nail 1201 and the part of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b that is located in front of the panel board 1110. In addition, in this cylinder, the portion indicated by the dotted line indicates the portion of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail that is located inside the panel board 1110, the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail, the second body portion 1201d of the obstacle nail, the tip portion 1201e of the obstacle nail, and the rear end of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same in each of the drawings that explain the modified example that changes the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128.

In FIG. 128(a), the whitened portion HKB is omitted. In FIG. 128(c), the whitened portion HKB is also omitted, but the whitened portion HKB occurs around the portion of the obstructing nail 1201 indicated by the dotted line. In FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(c), the first starting hole 2002 is omitted. These points are also the same in each drawing that explains a modified version of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128.

The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 to a thickness of about 1 mm. The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be processed to have a lens cut or matte finish. When light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, light from lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or light from other game machines installed in the game parlor is incident on the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b formed in this way from the front or rear, the light is diffused by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and appears whitish.

As shown in Figures 128(a) and 128(c), the portion of the panel board 1110 where the obstacle nail through holes 1110a are provided will be seen by the player as overlapping with the panel board rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front or from diagonally above and to the left with respect to the panel board rough surface portion 1110b.

In this way, the bright-colored visible portion (rough surface portion 1110b of the rear of the panel board) is located behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are planted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 on the transparent board portion (panel board 1110). This makes it possible to make the whitened portion HKB near the planted site of the obstacle nail 1201 less noticeable by the bright-colored visible portion that is visible in white.

White refers to a color that is visible when a specific object uniformly (approximately 100-80%) reflects all wavelengths of visible light of natural light irradiated onto the specific object, regardless of the wavelength range. Light colors refer to colors that are visible as cream, light gray, light yellow, etc., when a specific object absorbs a portion of the light in a specific wavelength range of the natural light irradiated onto the specific object and generally diffusely reflects the remaining wavelength range. On the other hand, black refers to a color that is visible when the surface of a specific object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of the natural light irradiated onto the specific object and diffusely reflects a portion of the irradiated natural light (approximately 20-several percent). Dark colors refer to colors that are uniformly absorbed in most wavelength ranges of the natural light irradiated onto the specific object and diffusely reflect only a portion of the irradiated light (approximately 20-several percent), but in a specific wavelength range, the light absorption rate is different, so that the color is visible as a color close to black, for example, a dark blue color. These definitions may be adopted as the definitions of each color in the present specification. In the embodiments described in the present specification, a white portion may be configured to be a light color, and a light portion may be configured to be white. For example, instead of emitting white light from a specific light-emitting member, a light colored portion may be configured to be emitting light. Also, a black portion may be configured to be a dark color, and a dark portion may be configured to be black.

128(d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128(a). In the example shown in FIG. 128(d), a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110, and white light irradiated from the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is introduced to the panel board 1110, and the introduced white light is diffusely reflected at the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, the panel board rear rough surface portion 1110b is in a state where it is visible to the player as white light. The panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Also, a light emitting unit similar to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be provided on the side or above the panel board 1110, instead of the panel board 1110, or in addition to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, and the light emitting unit thus provided may be configured to emit light in the same way as the panel board lower light emitting board 2400.

With this configuration, even if the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed in the game arcade is weak, or the light of the game machines installed in the game arcade is weak (for example, a game machine that is not being played on may automatically go into power saving mode and emit less light, or a game machine that is being played on may be adjusted by the player to reduce the amount of light emitted by the game machine), the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visible as one unit, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB near the planting site of the obstructing nail 1201 less noticeable. In this state, the whitened portion HKB itself diffuses the introduced white light and is viewed as white, but the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is larger than the whitened portion HKB and diffuses more light behind the whitened portion HKB, preventing the whitened portion HKB from being noticeable.

Below, we will show several embodiments that are modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128, and the technical content shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical content shown in another embodiment.

Although an example has been shown in which white light is introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the side of the panel board 1110, it may be configured to introduce yellow light instead of white light. In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is seen as yellow by the player due to the introduced light. The whitened portion HKB is also seen as yellow by the introduced light. Incidentally, as mentioned above, the obstacle nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the color of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are seen as similar to the color of the obstacle nail 1201, making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. This is because the use of the obstacle nails 1201 in pachinko machines 1 has been going on for decades, so players are unlikely to feel uncomfortable with the color or shape of the parts of the obstacle nail 1201 located closer to the front of the panel board 1110 (the obstacle nail head 1201a and the part of the obstacle nail first body part 1201b that is not embedded in the panel board 1110).

Below, with reference to FIG. 129, we will explain an embodiment in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128 is modified to provide a panel board rear decorative member 2410 capable of diffusely reflecting light adjacent to the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

Figure 129(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 129(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 129(a). Figure 129(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by oblique projection. Figure 129(d) is a cross-sectional view showing an aspect in which a panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is disposed behind the panel board 1110. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 is 2 mm thick, and has a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by lens cutting or matte finishing on the front side. The panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a diffusely reflects ambient light and is visually recognized as a whitish color. The panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 because, compared to when it is provided on the rear surface, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a can be positioned closer to the whitened portion HKB, and can be visually recognized as more integrated with the whitened portion HKB.

The panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is configured to be located behind the obstacle nails 1201 that are planted as life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and left guide nails 1232 in the panel board 1110.

In this way, a decorative member (such as the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board) equipped with a diffuse reflection portion (such as the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board) is positioned behind the obstacle nails 1201 planted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 on the transparent plate portion (the panel board 1110), so that the diffuse reflection portion, which is visible in white, makes the whitened portion HKB near the planting site of the obstacle nail 1201 less noticeable. In addition, by providing a diffuse reflection portion on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the diffuse reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB can be made closer, so that the diffuse reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB can be more easily viewed as one unit. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the front surface of the diffuse reflection portion (such as the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear decorative member of the panel board) of the decorative member (such as the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board) may be metal-plated to form an uneven metallic gloss portion.

As shown in FIG. 129(d), the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be configured to irradiate the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light of a predetermined color (e.g., white or yellow), and the irradiated light may be reflected by the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. The light emitting mode shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 128(d) may also be adopted as the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even if the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a can be visually perceived as whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Below, with reference to FIG. 130, we will explain an embodiment in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 is modified to provide a panel board rear substrate 2420 capable of reflecting light adjacent to the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

Figure 130(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 130(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 using an oblique projection method. Figure 130(c) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 130(a). Figure 130(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board rear substrate 2420, which is made of a white printed circuit board, is configured to be directly visible through the panel board 1110. Even with this configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the panel board rear substrate 2420, which is visible in white. It is preferable to use a light-colored light-emitting diode mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420.

In this embodiment, a light-emitting diode that emits light to the side may be used as the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425. In this case, it is possible to emit light from the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425 all over the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420.

An embodiment that combines the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 129 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 131.

Figure 131(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 131(b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 131(a). Figure 131(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using oblique projection.

In this embodiment, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut treatment applied to the front surface is disposed behind the obstruction nail 1201, and further behind that is disposed a white panel board rear board 2420 having a panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425. With this configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable, especially when the panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 is turned off.

In this embodiment, the light irradiated from the rear panel board light emitting portion 2425 is reflected between the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, which is capable of diffusely reflecting light, and the panel board rear 2420, which is made of a white printed circuit board. This results in the light being irradiated uniformly over the entire panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, making it possible to increase the efficiency of use of the light irradiated from the panel board rear light emitting portion 2425.

Referring to Figures 129 to 131, an embodiment has been shown in which the whitened portion HKB is made less noticeable by arranging one or both of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 behind the panel board 1110, but one or both of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be moved or rotated as an effect. This movement effect may be configured to be executed by control of the peripheral control board 1510. This movement effect may also be configured to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. The drive mechanism for moving and rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

However, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are configured to be movable in this manner, there is a possibility that the whitened portion HKB, which was previously less noticeable due to the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 positioned in the standby position, will become noticeable when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move to the moving position. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming noticeable, the following embodiment may be adopted.

Figure 132 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 129. Figure 132 (a) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 129 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the standby position. Figure 132 (b) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 129 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. The panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves a predetermined distance (10 mm) upward on a surface parallel to the panel board 1110 by moving from the standby position to the first moving position, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned in a position where they overlap when viewed from the front. Figure 132 (c) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 129 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the second moving position, it moves a specified distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, when a decorative member having a diffuse reflection portion (e.g., the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board) moves from a standby position to a first moving position during a moving performance, the obstruction nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap the rear decorative member 2410 of the panel board when viewed from the front, thereby maintaining a state in which the whitened portion HKB is not easily noticeable.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the first moving position, it is desirable that all of the obstacle nails 1201 can be maintained in a state where they overlap with the panel board rear decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front, but even if only some of the obstacle nails 1201 are positioned so as to overlap with the panel board rear decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is not easily noticeable.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position, which is farther away than the first movement position, the impact on the player is greater due to the large amount of movement, but the obstacle nail 1201 shown in FIG. 132(c) and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 do not overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the frequency of the performance in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved from the standby position to the first movement position and then returned to the standby position without moving to the second movement position, and the frequency of the performance in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved from the standby position to the second movement position and then returned to the standby position to be higher. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the performance modes in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved, while reducing the frequency of occurrence of the situation in which the whitened portion HKB is noticeable.

When moving the rear panel decorative member 2410, it is advisable to move the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the lower panel light emitting board 2400 together. Alternatively, it is advisable to move the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the rear panel board 2420 together. Then, when the rear panel decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position or the second movement position, it is advisable to put the lower panel light emitting board 2400 or the rear panel board 2420 into a light emitting performance state.

In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position and when it is in the second movement position, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel board rear board 2420 may be configured to have different light emitting states, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be in a light emitting performance state in which it is visible in a different light emitting state. In addition, in the game board side performance display device 1600, a special performance image may be displayed at the same time in response to this light emitting performance state. In addition, different performance images may be displayed when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position and when it is in the second movement position. It may be configured to represent one character or a single performance, etc., by the outer shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located in the first movement position or the second movement position and the special performance image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, it may be configured to display a rainy or snowy appearance as a special performance image for the panel board rear decorative member 2410 representing a mountain range. Additionally, each of these different presentation modes may be configured to suggest a different probability of winning.

With this configuration, the player's attention is directed to the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the game board side performance display device 1600 located in the direction to which the rear panel decorative member 2410 has moved, so even if the rear panel decorative member 2410 has moved to the second movement position and the obstacle nail 1201 no longer overlaps with the rear panel decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front, it is possible to divert the player's attention from the whitened portion HKB.

Figure 133 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear base plate 2420 have been modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 131.

Figure 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 131 (a), showing the rear panel decorative member 2410 and rear panel substrate 2420 in the standby position.

Figure 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 131 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110. In this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear base plate 2420 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front.

Figure 133 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 131 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear substrate 2420 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear substrate 2420 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110. In this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 so that only one of them moves from the standby position to the moving position at a certain timing, and to prevent both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 from moving to the moving position at the same time. For example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be moved so as to appear and disappear alternately in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, even if a moving performance is performed in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 is moved to a moving position, the obstacle nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 that has not moved in a front view, so that the whitened portion HKB can be maintained in an inconspicuous state. Although an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position has been shown, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be provided instead of the panel board rear substrate 2420, and the two panel board rear decorative members 2410 that overlap in the front-to-rear direction may be moved in the same manner. Also, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be provided instead of the panel board rear substrate 2420, and the two panel board rear substrates 2420 that overlap in the front-to-rear direction may be moved in the same manner. In addition, the front-to-rear positions of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be reversed, with the panel board rear substrate 2420 located in the front and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located in the rear, and they may be moved in the same way. Also, multiple decorative units consisting of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be stacked and positioned, and they may be moved in the same way.

Figure 133 (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 131 (a), showing the state in which both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move from the standby position to the moving position, they move a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned so that they do not overlap with the obstruction nail 1201 when viewed from the front. In this case, there is a risk that the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the obstruction nail 1201 will be noticeable.

Therefore, when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position, the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be made to emit light in a specified light color, thereby putting the panel board rear decorative member 2410 into a light-emitting performance state. In addition, the game board side performance display device 1600 may simultaneously display a special performance image corresponding to this light-emitting performance state. A single character or the like may be represented by the outer shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located in the moving position and the special performance image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. Note that an aspect similar to that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 132 may be adopted.

With this configuration, the player's attention is directed to the rear panel decorative member 2410, the rear panel board 2420, and the game board side performance display device 1600 located in the direction in which the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the rear panel board 2420 have moved, so that even if the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the rear panel board 2420 have moved to a moving position such that the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap with the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the rear panel board 2420 when viewed from the front, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable.

A decorative member having a predetermined pattern or the like on the front surface and visible with a bright color or metallic luster may be provided behind the movable panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel board rear substrate 2420, at a position overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view, and this decorative member may be configured to be visible when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position. Note that a similar decorative means may be adopted even when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided. With this configuration, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is not easily noticeable even when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position.

Figure 134 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 129 has been modified to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. Figure 134 (a) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 129 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position. Figure 134 (b) is an A-A cross-sectional view in Figure 129 (a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. By rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the moving position, it rotates about 30 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so as to overlap when viewed from the front. Figure 134 (c) is a modified example of the cross-sectional view shown in Figure 134 (b), showing the state in which the game board side performance display device 1600 is located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410.

In this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be rotatable around the panel board rear decorative member rotation axis 2410c, and may be configured to be able to take a standby state parallel to the panel board 1110 and a moving state that is not parallel. In addition, it is preferable to configure the operation of moving to the moving state to be executable as a performance indicating a high probability of winning. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of rotation angles at the moving position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and to configure it so that the degree of the expectation of winning is suggested by the rotation angle. In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not parallel to the panel board 1110, it is preferable to configure it so that light from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is directly incident on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 as shown in FIG. 134 (c). In this case, the light irradiated from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is diffused by the panel board rear decorative member 2410, so that the existence of the whitened part HKB can be made less noticeable. Furthermore, if the display mode of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is to flash a specified image at a specified cycle, it is possible to make the presence of the whitened portion HKB even less noticeable.

In addition, the light may be emitted not only from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but also from another component capable of emitting light onto the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 rotated a predetermined angle.

In this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, which is originally tilted or has become tilted, may be configured to be directly illuminated with white light indicating a high probability of a jackpot by the game board side performance display device 1600 or other light-emitting decorative members. In this case, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated with white light, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable than when illuminated with another color. Note that illumination with yellow light may be used instead of white light.

By the way, gaming machines may be installed in gaming parlors for several years. On the other hand, the history of gaming boards formed by planting obstacle nails in a transparent panel board is shorter than the history of gaming boards formed by planting obstacle nails in a wooden panel board, and it has only been in the last 10 years or so that gaming machines with obstacle nails planted in a transparent panel board have been fully installed in gaming parlors. Furthermore, the playability of the gaming machine itself is constantly evolving. For this reason, the gauge configuration formed by driving obstacle nails and the devices installed on the gaming board change each time, and accordingly the number of obstacle nails planted in the transparent panel board, the position where the obstacle nails are planted, the interval between obstacle nails, etc. change. For this reason, it currently takes a certain number of years to verify whether such a variety of possible gauge configuration patterns are prone to the occurrence of whitened parts HKB or are less likely to occur whitened parts HKB.

In the past, examples of obstacle nails that receive impacts from collisions with game balls, especially immediately after launch, include the multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the game area 5a and certain obstacle nails 1201 among the multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted on the right side of the game area 5a. In addition, as obstacle nails 1201 on which game balls that flow and roll down the game area subsequently concentrate depending on the game state, for example, the multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted on the left side of the game area 5a with which game balls rolling from the upper left of the game area 5a collide with with a predetermined probability, which concentrate during normal play, the obstacle nails 1201 (jump nails 1231, life nails 1230, left guide nails 1232) provided in correspondence with the rolling path from the upper left of the game area 5a to the first starting hole 2002, and the obstacle nails 1201 provided close to the big winning hole 2005, which concentrate during big win play, etc., deterioration of the whitened part HKB has been suspected.

The following embodiment describes an embodiment that allows a gaming establishment's staff member to determine whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur with a gaming machine before such a problem occurs that could impede the progress of the game or the aesthetics perceived by the player during operation of the gaming machine at the gaming establishment.

In the example shown, a bright colored visible portion, a diffuse reflection portion, and a metallic gloss portion are provided behind the portion where the obstacle nails 1201 are planted in order to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable when the portion where the obstacle nails 1201 are planted is viewed from the front. However, in order to solve the above problem, a configuration may be adopted in which the whitened portion HKB is planted in a more noticeable position for certain obstacle nails 1201 among the obstacle nails 1201.

Specifically, among the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the left guide nail 1232, the first obstacle nail 1201 and the second obstacle nail 1201 from the left may be positioned so as to overlap a decorative member that is not a light color (preferably a dark color decorative member) when viewed from the front.

This configuration makes the whitened portion HKB less noticeable for many of the obstructing nails 1201, while for some specific obstructing nails 1201, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB is clearly visible, making it possible to easily estimate the cumulative operating time of the gaming machine and to use this as an indicator of whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur in the gaming machine.

As a dark colored decorative member, it is desirable to use a decorative member decorated with a black base color, for example, in order to make the whitened portion HKB more noticeable. Alternatively, it is advisable to use a liquid crystal display device, which is often used as a performance display device as a basic device that constitutes a gaming machine. For example, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the display area of the performance display device 1600 on the gaming board side is viewed as a black flat surface in front.

Figure 135 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 60. Figure 135 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a game board performance display device 1600 is provided behind a colorless and transparent panel board 1110, and some of the life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, left guide nails 1232, and other obstacle nails 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 are provided in a position that overlaps with the display area 1600a of the game board performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front of the display area 1600a is visible as a black flat surface.

In this way, if a specific obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a position that overlaps with a dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is visually recognized as a black surface when viewed from the front, or in a position that overlaps with a dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted a specific angle in a specific direction from the center position of the pachinko machine as described above, it becomes easy to check the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB in the specific obstacle nail 1201.

This configuration makes it easy to check the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB for the specific obstacle nail 1201 planted in a position that overlaps with the dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. Note that, instead of when viewed from the front, as described above, the dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be configured to be located in a position that overlaps with the specific obstacle nail 1201 when the line of sight is tilted a specific angle in a specific direction from the center position of the pachinko machine. This configuration may also be adopted for the obstacle nail 1201 in other embodiments to increase the visibility of the whitened portion HKB.

Figure 136 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to Figure 135. Figure 136 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a panel board back surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110. The life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and some of the left side guide nails 1232 planted in the panel board 1110 are provided in a position that overlaps with the panel board back surface portion 1110b, which is visible in a light color, when viewed from the front. On the other hand, some of the left side guide nails 1232 (the two obstacle nails 1201 at the upper left) and the other obstacle nails 1201 are provided so as not to overlap with the panel board back surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front, but to overlap with the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstructing nails 1201 less noticeable at all times, and for the other obstructing nails 1201, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by displaying a bright color or yellow effect image in the display area 1600a in the manner described above depending on the game status, and it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB more noticeable when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 136, the above-mentioned embodiment may be applied in place of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, so that the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable for some of the obstructing nails 1201. For example, at least one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be provided in place of or in addition to the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b. The shapes of these members in a front view may be configured to be the same as the shape of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b in a front view.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with operating means have been considered, but below we will explain a gaming machine that is equipped with multiple operating means and effectively utilizes the multiple operating means in the presentation. As shown in FIG. 137, the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a mission button 3700, an attack button 3710, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, and a defense button 3740 that can be operated by the player at the bottom of the door frame 3.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of performing an effect of displaying the player's tank by image display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 while the decorative pattern is being changed. In this effect, the player's tank moves along various routes and fights with enemy tanks while moving to the destination, and the result of the change in the decorative pattern is suggested by the result of the fight. In addition, while the player's tank is moving or fighting with the enemy tank, the player's operation of the operation means such as the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and defense button 3740 provided at the bottom of the door frame 3 can be accepted to change the effect content such as the suggestion of the change in the decorative pattern.
In this specification, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various ways in the presentation that displays the player's tank. The attack button 3710 is a button that can be used to attack enemy forces in the presentation that displays the player's tank. The defense button 3740 is a button that can be used to defend against attacks from enemy tanks in the presentation that displays the player's tank. Each button can be pressed a predetermined distance downward. The pachinko machine 1 detects the player's pressing of each button by a sensor (not shown), inputs the information to the peripheral control board 1510, and can be used in the presentation. When the player no longer presses each button, a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like moves the button upward.

The left lever 3720 is a rod-shaped operating means capable of inputting directions. The base of the left lever 3720 is supported on a shaft, and it can be tilted in any direction through 360 degrees. The maximum angle that it can be tilted is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 is structured so that it returns to a vertical state (a state in which it is not tilted in any direction) when the player releases the left lever 3720, due to a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like. The pachinko machine 1 detects the direction and angle in which the left lever 3720 is tilted using a sensor (not shown), and inputs this information to the peripheral control board 1510 for use in the presentation. The player can perform operation input by gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting it a specified angle in a specified direction.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibration is built into the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction below. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured with a stepping motor with an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft or a solenoid that moves back and forth. The left lever vibration source 3722 can generate vibration by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The vibration generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 is transmitted to the palm of the player holding the left lever 3720, so that the vibration can be used as a performance. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration mode in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720. The vibration mode may also be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of an event advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot.

A plurality of left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided within the left lever 3720. For example, a left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the upper half of the left lever 3720 and a left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the lower half of the left lever 3720. Then, only one of the vibration sources may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated simultaneously.

The left lever 3720 has a built-in left lever light source 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color at the upper and lower sides. The left lever 3720 is made of a milky white synthetic resin, and the entire left lever 3720 can be decorated with light by the color of light output from the left lever light source 3724. The left lever light source 3724 is specifically composed of multiple full-color LEDs and a drive circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the drive circuit with the peripheral control board 1510. The left lever light source 3724 can make mainly the upper half of the left lever 3720 illuminated and decorated, and the light emission color, flashing, lighting, and other light emission modes can be used as a performance. For example, the left lever 3720 may be illuminated in a predetermined light emission mode in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720. The light emission mode may also be configured to indicate the expectation level of an event advantageous to the player, such as a big win. The left lever 3720 may be formed of other materials as long as it can transmit light, and may be formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut, for example.

The right lever 3730 has the same structure and function as the left lever 3720. For example, the right lever 3730 can accept operational input. Also, like the left lever 3720, a right lever vibration source 3732 and a right lever light source 3734 are provided within the right lever 3730, and can be used for the same effects as the left lever 3720.

The layout of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 138 shows an embodiment in which the attack button 3710 is located at the top end of the left lever 3720, and the defense button 3740 is located at the top end of the right lever 3730. In this case, while gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting the left lever 3720, it is possible to press the attack button 3710 at the top end of the left lever 3720 with the thumb. Similarly, while gripping the right lever 3730 and tilting the right lever 3730, it is possible to press the defense button 3740 at the top end of the right lever 3730 with the thumb.

The attack button 3710 may be formed from a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light source 3724 may be set to a predetermined light-emitting state in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, thereby setting the attack button 3710 to a predetermined light-emitting state. Similarly, the defense button 3740 may be formed from a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light source 3734 may be set to a predetermined light-emitting state in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, thereby setting the defense button 3740 to a predetermined light-emitting state.

Rather than placing the attack button 3710 at the top end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 at the top end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 may be placed at the top end of the left lever 3720 in place of the attack button 3710. Alternatively, the mission button 3700 may be placed at the top end of the right lever 3730 in place of the defense button 3740. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which two or three of these buttons are placed at the top end of one lever.
With this configuration, the lever can be tilted and one or more buttons can be pressed with one hand.

Figure 139 shows an embodiment configured to execute a presentation displaying the player's tank as a reach presentation while the decorative symbols are changing. Figure 139(a) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed stationary. When a start winning occurs in the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, the left, center, and right decorative symbols start to change.

Figure 139 (b) shows the state where the left, center, and right decorative symbols appear from the top of the display area and are displayed in a fluctuating manner as they disappear downwards. The decorative symbols may be displayed as a symbol representing a miss without forming a reach state, as a symbol representing a miss that forms a reach state, or as a symbol representing a jackpot that forms a reach state.

Figure 139 (c) shows the state where the "3" symbols on the left and right are temporarily displayed and a reach state is formed. In this embodiment, as a reach effect, it is possible to execute a tank reach effect in which the player's tank is displayed in the display area and moves forward.

Figure 139 (d) shows the state where the display of the player's tank has begun as a tank reach effect. Specifically, the player's tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area.

Figure 139(e) shows a state in which the player's tank and an enemy tank are engaged in combat. Also, Figure 139(f) shows a state in which the player's tank has arrived at the destination. These function as effects suggesting the results of a special lottery. For example, an effect display is executed to show whether the player's tank can defeat the enemy tank shown in Figure 139(e) or whether the player's tank will be defeated by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the result of the special lottery. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 139(f), an effect display is executed to show whether the player's tank can reach the destination without being defeated by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the result of the special lottery.

Figure 139 (g) shows how the display of the decorative patterns stops changing when the result of the special lottery is a miss. Also, Figure 139 (h) shows how the display of the decorative patterns stops changing when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. Images of the player's tank, enemy tank, roads, etc. stop displaying just before the decorative patterns stop changing.

With reference to FIG. 139, an example of a presentation in which the player's tank is displayed in the display area as a reach presentation has been shown, but the presentation may be configured to be executed across multiple decorative pattern variations. For example, the presentation of the player's tank may be started by predicting the results of a special lottery for a reserve that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and may be executed across multiple pattern variations to suggest the result of the decorative pattern variation corresponding to the reserve that has been predicted. Alternatively, the presentation of the player's tank may be executed from the start to the end of a jackpot, or the presentation of the tank may be executed from the end of a jackpot until a predetermined number of decorative pattern variations (e.g., 10 times) are performed, thereby suggesting what kind of game state has changed at the end of the jackpot (for example, whether the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the special lottery is a high probability state or a low probability state). In this way, the subject suggested by the presentation of the player's tank is not limited to the result of a special lottery (e.g., the likelihood of a jackpot occurring), but may also suggest, for example, the game state.

Figure 140 shows a performance situation in which the player's tank is required to operate either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 with the left hand and to rotate the handlebars 302 with the right hand. During the performance in which the player's tank is displayed, the player's tank basically moves forward automatically. At this time, the player's tank can be changed in speed or moved left and right by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730. Specifically, as shown in Figure 140, the player's tank can be increased in speed by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as seen by the player. The player's tank can be decreased in speed by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen by the player. The player's tank can be moved to the right by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen by the player. Additionally, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as viewed by the player, the player's tank can be moved to the left.

In the embodiment shown, one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move the player's tank, but the configuration may be such that an effect can be executed in which the left lever 3720 is operated with the left hand and the right lever 3730 is operated with the right hand. Note that, since a reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the usual fluctuation of decorative patterns, is generated, the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, and can use both hands to operate various buttons such as the left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and mission button 3700, thereby making the effect more interesting.

During the performance in which the player's tank is displayed, the player's tank basically automatically moves forward. At this time, the speed of the tank can be changed or moved left and right by operating the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141, the speed of the tank can be increased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as seen by the player. The speed of the tank can be decreased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen by the player. The tank can be moved to the right by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen by the player. The tank can be moved to the left by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as seen by the player.

In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted forward as viewed by the player, it is possible to greatly increase the speed compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted backward as viewed by the player, it is possible to greatly decrease the speed compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the right as viewed by the player, it is possible to move the tank farther to the right compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the left as viewed by the player, it is possible to greatly move the tank farther to the left compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated.

In this way, when the tank moves forward, the direction of movement of the tank can be changed using the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, making it possible to perform effects such as avoiding attacks from enemy forces and moving forward while avoiding obstacles such as mines and rocks placed on the field.

The basic usage of the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, and defense button 3740 in a tank reach will be explained. Operating the mission button 3700 makes it possible to fire bullets forward from the machine gun mounted on the player's tank. Operating the attack button 3710 makes it possible to fire shells forward from the artillery turret mounted on the player's tank. Operating the defense button 3740 makes it possible to set up a defensive shield in front of the player's tank to defend against attacks from enemy tanks. Note that the functions assigned to each button may differ depending on the situation of the performance.

In this embodiment, a new condition is adopted as a condition for changing the game state. Below, the new condition for changing the game state is explained with reference to Figures 142 and 143.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, the first special symbol display 1403 displays the variation of the special symbol and displays the result of the first special lottery. Also, in the display area of the game board side performance display device, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the variation of the special symbol.
Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004, the second special symbol display 1405 displays the variation of the special symbol and displays the result of the second special lottery. Also, in the display area of the game board side performance display device, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the variation of the special symbol.
In addition, if the result of the normal lottery drawn when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 is a "win," the second starting port 2004 can change from a state in which it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball to a state in which it is possible to accept the game ball.

In this embodiment, the selection mode of the special pattern can be either a state in which the probability that the selection result of the special pattern will be a "jackpot" is low (probability: 1/300) or a state in which the probability that the selection result of the special pattern will be a "jackpot" is high (probability: 1/30).
In addition, with regard to the selection mode of the normal symbols, it is possible to have a state in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is long (average 30 seconds) and the probability that the normal symbol selection result will be a "win" lottery result is low (probability: 1/100), and a state in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is short (average 2.0 seconds) and the probability that the normal symbol selection result will be a "win" lottery result is high (probability: 1/1.2).
The following four game states can be achieved by combining these.
1: Normal state in which the probability that the special pattern lottery result will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the normal pattern fluctuation time is long, and the normal lottery result is a low probability of being a "win" lottery result.
2: A time-saving state in which the probability that the special pattern lottery result will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the time it takes for the normal patterns to change is short, and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "win" lottery result is high.
3: A non-time-saving special state in which the probability that the special symbol drawing result will be a "jackpot" is high, the normal symbol fluctuation time is long, and the probability that the normal symbol drawing result will be a "win" is low.
4: A special probability state in which the probability that the special pattern will result in a "jackpot" is high, the time for the normal patterns to fluctuate is short, and the probability that the normal pattern will result in a "win" is high.
In addition to these game states, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a "jackpot", the following state will occur.
5: A big win state in which the big win opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. During the big win state, the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.
FIG. 142 is a table showing these five game states.
In this embodiment, five game states are possible. When a certain condition is satisfied during a game, the game state changes from one of the game states to another. FIG. 143 shows the game state transition conditions.

The time-saving state transitions to the normal state on the condition that the number of occurrences of a special lottery result of a miss after the time-saving state has been entered reaches a predetermined number. For example, when the big win state ends and the time-saving state is entered, and the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving state reaches 100, the game state transitions to the normal state.
The non-time-saving probability variable state and probability variable state continue until a jackpot game state occurs.

In this embodiment, there are three special lottery results: "Miss", "Miss with time reduction", and "Big win".

If the special lottery result is a "lose," the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the large prize opening 2005 does not open or close in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. Also, the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "win" is increased, and a "time-saving state" in which the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short does not occur.

If the special lottery result is a "miss with time reduction," the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the large prize opening 2005 does not open or close in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and the game state transitions to a "time-saving state" in which the probability of the normal lottery result being a "win" is increased and the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short. Even if the special lottery result is a "miss with time reduction," if the game state is in the time-saving state, non-time-saving special probability state, or special probability state, the transition to the time-saving state is not made. Note that a "miss with time reduction" may occur with a predetermined probability. For example, the probability of a "jackpot" occurring among the special lottery results may be set to 1/300, the probability of a "miss" occurring to 298/300, and the probability of a "miss with time reduction" occurring to 1/300.

If the special lottery result is a "jackpot," the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and the big prize opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the jackpot state ends, the game state transitions to one of the following states based on the predetermined jackpot breakdown: normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving special probability state, or special probability state. The rate of transitions after a jackpot state can be set appropriately, and the number of game states that can be transitioned to after a jackpot may be less than four. For example, after a jackpot state, the rate of transition to special probability state may be 50%, the rate of transition to time-saving state may be 50%, and the rate of transition to normal state or non-time-saving special probability state may be 0%.

On the other hand, if the "miss with time-saving feature" is not adopted, the number of consecutive misses in the special lottery results in the normal state is counted, and when the number of consecutive misses in the special lottery results reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the game state transitions from the normal state to the time-saving state without opening or closing the large prize opening 2005.
In addition, even if the number of times the special lottery result is a miss during the time-saving state, non-time-saving special probability state, or special probability state reaches a predetermined specific number of times (for example, 500 times), a transition to the time-saving state will not occur.

The transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on a miss with time-saving and the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on the execution of a specific number of special lotteries may be either one or both.

By adopting a "miss with time-saving" as the special lottery result, it is possible to transition the game state from the normal state to the time-saving state without any balls being dispensed. Also, it is possible to receive the special lottery result in the time-saving state, where game balls are less likely to be consumed compared to the normal state.

In addition, by executing the special lottery a specific number of times, the game state will transition from the normal state to the time-saving state, so if the normal state continues for a certain period of time, it will be possible to receive the special lottery results in the time-saving state, where game balls are less likely to be lost than in the normal state.

The breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be the same as the breakdown of the jackpot when the second special lottery result is a jackpot.
Alternatively, the breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be different from the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a jackpot. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be 50% for a normal state jackpot and 50% for a time-saving state jackpot, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a jackpot may be 20% for a time-saving state jackpot and 80% for a probability variable state jackpot.

In the low probability non-time-saving state and high probability non-time-saving state, the player shoots the game ball to the left side of the game area in order to make the game ball enter the first starting hole 2002. This act of shooting the game ball toward the left side of the game area is called "hitting from the left." The probability that a game ball that flows into the left side of the game area will enter the first starting hole 2002 is approximately 1/10 to 1/15. Also, a game ball that flows into the left side of the game area will never enter the second starting hole 2004.

On the other hand, during a jackpot game state, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area to make the game ball enter the big prize hole 2005. Also, during a low probability time-saving state and a high probability time-saving state, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area to make the game ball enter the second start hole 2004. This act of shooting the game ball toward the right side of the game area is called a "right hit."
The probability that the game ball flowing into the right side of the game area will win the second starting hole 2004 varies depending on the game state. This is because the probability that the movable piece 2004a of the second starting hole 2004 will be in an open state and the duration of the open state differ between the non-time-saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) and the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). In the non-time-saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), the probability that the game ball flowing into the right side of the game area will win the second starting hole 2004 is extremely low, for example, about 1/200 to 1/300. In the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), the probability that the game ball flowing into the right side of the game area will win the second starting hole 2004 is extremely high, for example, about 1/2 to 1/3.
In addition, although a game ball that flows into the right side of the game area will not enter the first starting hole 2002, the game area may be configured so that it may enter the first starting hole 2002.

In the low-probability time-saving state, the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter on average than in the low-probability non-time-saving state.
In the high probability time-saving state, the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter on average than in the low probability non-time-saving state, and the probability that the stopping mode of the special symbols will be a mode indicating a jackpot result is higher than in the low probability non-time-saving state.
Therefore, compared to when hitting from the left (when in a low-probability non-time-saving state), when hitting from the right (when in a low-probability time-saving state or a high-probability time-saving state), the average time until the next jackpot game state occurs after the end of a jackpot game state is shorter, and from the player's perspective, it feels as if the next jackpot has occurred immediately, with no time having passed since the previous jackpot.

In the low-probability non-time-saving state, the first big win game state occurs, and after the end of this big win game state, the state changes to a low-probability time-saving state or a high-probability time-saving state, and the big win game state occurs again. This state is called a consecutive win state. The number of consecutive wins at this time is "2 times". If the low-probability time-saving state or the high-probability time-saving state occurs again after this big win game state, and the number of consecutive wins becomes "3 times". If the low-probability non-time-saving state occurs after the end of the big win game state, or if the low-probability time-saving state occurs after the end of the big win game state but the special lottery result is a miss a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the low-probability non-time-saving state occurs, the consecutive win state ends. While the consecutive win state continues, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area, and when the consecutive win state ends, the area from which the game ball is shot is changed to the left side of the game area.

142 and 143, it is shown that after the end of the big win state, the game moves to one of four predetermined game states (a combination of high probability or low probability, time-saving or non-time-saving). These game states may be referred to as follows in this specification.
Specifically, a jackpot that goes into a low-probability non-time-saving state after the jackpot state ends may be referred to as a low-probability non-time-saving jackpot. Also, a jackpot that goes into a low-probability time-saving state after the jackpot state ends may be referred to as a low-probability time-saving jackpot. Also, a jackpot that goes into a high-probability non-time-saving state after the jackpot state ends may be referred to as a high-probability non-time-saving jackpot. Also, a jackpot that goes into a high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot state ends may be referred to as a high-probability time-saving jackpot (note that this jackpot is generally referred to as a "probable jackpot").
In addition, the jackpot state may be referred to as a jackpot gaming state.

If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as a repeating number to indicate to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, if the type of jackpot is a high-probability non-time-saving jackpot or a high-probability time-saving jackpot, a decorative pattern with an odd number may be displayed as a repeating number, and if the type of jackpot is a low-probability non-time-saving jackpot or a low-probability time-saving jackpot, a decorative pattern with an even number may be displayed as a repeating number. For example, when the types of numbers attached to the decorative patterns are 1 to 7, if the combinations of numbers of the decorative patterns displayed are "222", "444", and "666", the game state after the jackpot state becomes a low-probability non-time-saving state or a low-probability time-saving state. Furthermore, if the combination of numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state is "111", "333", "555", or "777", the game state after the jackpot state will be a high probability non-time-saving state or a high probability time-saving state. Also, decorative symbols with the numbers "2", "4", and "6" are sometimes called "normal symbols", and decorative symbols with the numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" are sometimes called "probable variable symbols". In such an embodiment, the player can know the game state after the jackpot if a jackpot occurs at the timing when the reach state is formed, thereby increasing the interest.

In addition, the decorative symbols that constitute the reach state are sometimes called "reach symbols." In particular, they are used to indicate whether the number attached to the decorative symbol that forms the reach state is an even number or an odd number, that is, whether the reach state is formed by a "normal symbol" or a "probable chance symbol." For example, if you say "The reach symbol is '1'," it indicates that the reach state is formed by the decorative symbol with the number 1 attached.
In addition, the reach state formed by the "normal pattern" may be referred to as a normal reach, and the reach state formed by the "probability variable pattern" may be referred to as a "probability variable reach."

The type of symbol that creates the reach state may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, if the numbers attached to the decorative symbols are "1," "2," "4," or "5," the likelihood may be less than 5%, 20% for "6," 50% for "3," and 90% (or even 100%) for "7." This makes it possible to heighten the player's interest not only in whether the reach symbol is a normal symbol or a probability variable symbol (i.e., whether it is an even number or an odd number), but also in whether the number attached to the symbol is a "1" through "7."

The number of rounds that occur during the jackpot state may be added to these names to further classify the type of jackpot. For example, a 10-round jackpot that generates a high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot ends may be called a 10R high-probability time-saving jackpot. Similarly, if the number of rounds is 3 or 6, it may be called a 3R high-probability time-saving jackpot or a 6R high-probability time-saving jackpot. Also, if the probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot state ends is not important, it may be called a 3R jackpot or a 6R jackpot.

In this specification, the expectation of a jackpot may be simply referred to as the expectation.
Also, although an embodiment showing the degree of expectation of a jackpot by executing a predetermined performance or the like is shown, it may be modified to show the degree of expectation of a high probability time-saving jackpot or the degree of expectation of the occurrence of other predetermined events instead of the degree of expectation of a jackpot. The expectation degree can be calculated by the formula "probability of occurrence at the time of a jackpot/(probability of occurrence at the time of a jackpot+probability of occurrence at the time of a miss)". Also, the player will recognize the degree of expectation when a predetermined performance is executed based on his own gaming experience or articles in specialized magazines.

Below, we will explain an embodiment of the reach effect and the conditions for changing the game state that are executed using such an operation unit, along with the display content displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Conventionally, an effect has been performed in which an image of a character or the like is displayed on a display means to suggest the result of the change display of a decorative pattern (for example, JP 2016-179063 A, JP 2010-022544 A). For example, an image of a predetermined character is displayed before the change of the decorative pattern stops, thereby suggesting to the player that the probability that the change display result of the decorative pattern will be a jackpot is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%).
However, some players may not necessarily like to see such suggestive effects. For example, if a certain suggestive effect is displayed multiple times, but the results of the last multiple variable displays in which the suggestive effect was displayed are all display results indicating a miss, the player may feel distrustful of the suggestive effect, such as "I wonder if it will miss again...", or may feel that the suggestive effect is unlucky, and may not want to see the suggestive effect. This tendency is prominent in suggestive effects that require the player to operate a specified operating unit, and a display showing a specified expectation level is made based on the operation reception. In such cases, the player may lose interest if he or she is forced to view a suggestive effect that he or she does not want to see, even though he or she has taken the trouble to operate the operating means.

In addition, there are players who prefer to be clearly informed of the results of the variable display, rather than having the results suggested with an indeterminate degree of expectation. For such players, being shown a suggestive performance with a low degree of expectation (for example, 10%) may actually reduce their interest.

However, in the past, the presence of such players was not taken into consideration, and there was room for improvement in the manner in which suggestive effects were executed. In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment is described that takes into consideration the presence of such players and is configured to prevent a decline in interest.

Below, with reference to Figure 144 etc., we will explain the "Shield Bullet Reach" feature, in which a defensive shield is displayed by firing shield bullets from a newly developed player's tank capable of firing shield bullets during a battle scene between the player's tank and an enemy tank.

FIG. 144 is a time chart showing the progress of the "shield bullet reach" of this embodiment. In this time chart, when the execution of the performance pattern in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed for 34 seconds in response to one start winning is determined in the main control board 1310, the progress of the performance mode in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed for 34 seconds in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 by the control of the peripheral control board 1510 is shown. After the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is completed, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are executed for 1 second. In addition, in the display area, in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol, an image of the player's tank, an image of the enemy tank, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, a simulated image imitating the defense button 3740, etc. are displayed, but the details will be described later.
In addition, Figures 145 and 146 show the display state of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a specific timing of the time chart described with reference to Figure 144.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 144, the timing is indicated as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc., depending on the time elapsed, in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is one second. These points also apply to the other embodiments and effects examples described below, unless otherwise noted.

Furthermore, each of the embodiments shown in Figures 149 to 196 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 144 to 148. Therefore, for configurations that are not specifically mentioned in the explanation of each of the embodiments shown in Figures 149 to 196 (for example, the display mode when the decorative pattern starts to change, the display mode when it stops, etc.), the embodiments shown in Figures 144 to 148 can be applied.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 144, the display of the decorative symbols begins at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the display of the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right is performed as shown in FIG. 139(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(c), when the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are displayed as the same symbol (a symbol consisting of the number "3" in this embodiment) in a provisionally stopped state and a reach state occurs, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are reduced in size and displayed in the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the player's tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. In addition, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, the operation of the defense button 3740 is accepted.

Figure 145 (a) shows a state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. The display area shows the state in which each decorative pattern ("3", "↓", "3") that is in a reach state is displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of the player's tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, the image of the road along which the player's tank moves is displayed in the left-right center of the display area, the image of the horizon and sky is displayed in the upper part of the display area, the image of the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna", a character for the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image is displayed in the lower right of the display area, and the image of the dialogue of "Sergeant Might", a character for the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image is displayed in the lower left of the display area. The player himself is set as a lieutenant who operates the player's tank, and the performance is performed in which the player moves through the battlefield in his tank together with "Colonel Dyna", who is a higher rank than a lieutenant, and "Sergeant Might", who is a lower rank than a lieutenant. This configuration makes it possible to increase the sense of immersion in the virtual reality reach performance.

As shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 145(a), pressing and holding the defense button 3740 will cause an effect in which a shield image is displayed in front of the player's tank, but this will be described in more detail later.

At time t9, the image of a white enemy tank begins to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and moves to the left. Figure 145(b) shows the state at time t10 in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road.

At timing t11, the image of a white enemy tank that has been moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At this timing, the image of the white enemy tank may be replaced with an image of a red enemy tank. At the same time, acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, and an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might". The operation valid period of the attack button 3710 continues for three seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.
Two types of enemy tank images are prepared as images of enemy tanks to be displayed on the road: a white enemy tank image and a red enemy tank image, and the display ratio of the enemy tank images is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot when the red enemy tank image is displayed than when the white enemy tank image is displayed.
In addition, two types of simulated images that imitate the attack button 3710 are provided: a white simulated image and a red simulated image, and the display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot when the red simulated image is displayed than when the white simulated image is displayed.

The combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may indicate the likelihood of a big win.
For example, the appearance rate may be set so that the expected rate is 10% when the colors of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 are both white, the expected rate is 20% when one of the colors of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 is white and the other is red, and the expected rate is 30% when the colors of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 are both red.
The degree of expectation may be indicated by configuring only one of the enemy tank image and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 to change from white to red. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, a pattern may be prepared in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot is 100%, that is, the occurrence of a jackpot is confirmed when that combination is displayed.

Figure 145 (c) shows a state at timing t12 in which a white mock image of the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area.

On the other hand, FIG. 145(e) shows a state in which a red mock image of the attack button 3710 and an image of a red enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t11 to timing t12.

If the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 (timing t11 to timing t14), an image of a shell flying out of the player's tank's turret is displayed, and the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of it being destroyed. An image of an exploding shell is also displayed. The display of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 ends.

Fig. 144(b) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710. Also, Fig. 144(c) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710.

The display of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding continues for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t13, the display of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding continues until timing t16.

Two types of images of exploding shells are provided: an image of a medium shell explosion and an image of a large shell explosion. The display rate is set so that the greater the explosion, the higher the expectation of a big win. For example, the occurrence rate of the effect may be set so that when an image of a medium shell explosion is displayed, the expectation rate increases by +10%, and when an image of a large shell explosion is displayed, the expectation rate increases by +20%, compared to the expectation rate indicated by the enemy tank image and the image imitating the attack button 3710 that had been displayed up until that point.

Figure 145(d) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a moderately exploded shell are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, Figure 145(f) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a large shell explosion are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. Note that even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 145(e), in addition to the image of a destroyed red enemy tank, either an image of a medium shell explosion or an image of a large shell explosion is displayed on the road. In this way, the color of the moving tank image and the color of the destroyed tank image are the same.

FIG. 144(c) is a time chart showing the display contents in the display area when no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 within the valid operation period. When no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 within the valid operation period, at timing t14, which is the end timing of the valid operation period, an image effect of a shell flying out from the player's tank is displayed, and the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed tank. Also, either an image of a shell exploding to a moderate extent or an image of a shell exploding to a large extent is displayed. Also, the display of the destruction image continues for three seconds from timing t14 to timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In this way, the player will see the same display effects, except for the timing of the display and the left-right position of the enemy tank, regardless of whether or not the player operates the attack button 3710. The player will then recognize the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot based on the presentation mode of the displayed effect.

This display effect is performed from timing t9 to a maximum of timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), and then the same effect is performed again from timing t17 to a maximum of timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). The effect performed again also suggests the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot.

In the above example, the enemy tank moves and is destroyed from timing t9 to timing t17 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), and from timing t17 to timing t25 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). However, it is also possible to have a pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the former timing, or to have a pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the latter timing. It is also possible to have a pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed at two timings. In this case, the "shield bullet reach" effect ends without the player operating the attack button 3710.

It is advisable to set the occurrence rate of the presentation pattern so that the probability of a jackpot is higher for a presentation pattern in which an enemy tank is displayed than for a presentation pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed. It is also advisable to set the occurrence rate of the presentation pattern so that the probability of a jackpot is higher for a presentation pattern in which the enemy tank moves twice and is destroyed than for a presentation pattern in which the enemy tank moves only once and is destroyed. With this configuration, when this suggestion presentation is executed, the enemy tank may move and be destroyed 0 to 2 times, which increases the player's expectations for the appearance mode (color and number of times) of the enemy tank and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank. It is also possible to configure the presentation pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed three or more times to be executable.

Figure 144 (d) is a time chart showing the display contents when no operation is performed on the defense button 3740. As shown in Figure 144 (d), when no operation is performed on the defense button 3740, no effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is performed. Figures 145 (c) to 145 (f) show the display state in the display area when no effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is performed.

Next, we will explain the display state in the display area when the defense button 3740 is operated.

By pressing and holding the defense button 3740 during the operation valid period of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27), a shield image set to prevent attacks from enemy tanks is displayed between the image of the player's tank and the image of the enemy tank. Note that the condition for determining that a long press has started may be that the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed for 0.5 seconds. Also, as long as the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed, the display of the shield image continues.
In the figure, the shape of the shield image is a horizontally long oval, but the shape of the shield image may be configured to change dynamically during display. The shield image may be displayed intermittently. For example, when the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed, the shield image may gradually become smaller after the shield image starts to be displayed, and when the shield image is no longer displayed, a shield bullet is automatically fired and explodes, and a new shield image is displayed. Such a display mode may be repeatedly performed as the continuation of the display of the shield image.

Figure 144 (e) is a time chart showing the display state when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held during the effective operation period of the defense button 3740. As shown in this time chart, a shield image is displayed from timing t7 when it is determined that the player is pressing and holding the button for a long time, to timing t24 when the player releases the defense button 3740 and the long press ends. By displaying a shield image based on the player's operation of the defense button 3740 in this way, it is possible to hide the color of the image of the enemy tank, the color of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710, and the destruction state of the enemy tank.

For example, FIG. 146(a) shows the display state that is displayed when the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 during the period when the enemy tank image is not displayed (for example, from timing t6 to timing t9) after the display shown in FIG. 145(a) has been performed. As shown in the figure, a shield image is displayed based on the detection of a long press of the defense button 3740. In addition, a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" also corresponds to the display of the shield image.

Figure 146(b) shows a state in which a shield image is displayed at a specific timing (e.g., timing t9 to timing t11) while an image of an enemy tank is displayed and moving toward the road. In other words, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 145(b), the display state shown in Figure 146(b) will result.

Figures 146(c) and 146(e) show a display state in which a shield image is displayed when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road and a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed (for example, from timing t11 to timing t14). That is, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 145(c), the display state shown in Figure 146(c) will result. Similarly, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 145(e), the display state shown in Figure 146(e) will result.

At this time, the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 suggest the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot, but because these images are hidden by the shield image, it is difficult to recognize the likelihood of a jackpot.

Figures 146(d) and 146(f) show an example of a state in which a shield image is displayed when an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, from timing t12 to timing t15 when an operation is performed, and from timing t14 to timing t17 when no operation is performed). That is, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 145(d), the display state will be as shown in Figure 146(d). Similarly, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 145(f), the display state will be as shown in Figure 146(f).

At this time, the manner in which the shell explodes and the color of the image of the destroyed enemy tank suggest the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot, but these images are hidden by a shield image, making it difficult to recognize the likelihood of a jackpot.

To hide the image of the enemy tank, the mock image of the attack button 3710, or the explosion of a shell using a shield image, the display priority of the shield image may be set higher than the display priority of the image of the enemy tank, the mock image of the attack button 3710, or the image of a shell. Also, the display priority of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be set higher than the display priority of the shield image.

The operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is from timing t5, when the reach effect begins, to timing t27, after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Even if the defense button 3740 is pressed and held down, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the effective operation period for the defense button 3740 ends.

With this configuration, the display indicating the degree of expectation can be made difficult to see according to the player's preferences, making it possible to provide a stress-free gaming environment for players who do not want to know their degree of expectation.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area, as shown in FIG. 145(b), the player can make the image indicating the expectation level that is displayed thereafter difficult to see, depending on the player's preference or mood of the day.

Referring to Figs. 145(a) to 145(f) and Figs. 146(a) to 146(f), an embodiment has been shown in which the colors of the simulated images of the enemy tanks and the attack button 3710 are white or red, but in addition to these, a configuration may be made in which a performance pattern is executed in which a simulated image of the enemy tank or the attack button 3710 is displayed in gold, which has a 100% expectation rate. In particular, it is preferable to configure it to be displayed the first time in a pattern in which a simulated image of the enemy tank or the attack button 3710 is displayed twice. In this case, the player can enjoy the "shield bullet reach" performance in which the jackpot is confirmed to occur by ceasing the long press of the defense button 3740 for the second display of the enemy tank image, without the shield image being displayed.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a player may mistakenly operate the defense button 3740 instead of the attack button 3710. In this case, it may be difficult to visually recognize the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a moving enemy tank, the image of an enemy tank being destroyed, and the image of an exploding shell, which may actually reduce interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed not only when the defense button 3740 is simply pressed, but also when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held. With this configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, the shield image is not displayed immediately, which can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a player who wants to see a suggestive performance feels stressed.

In the embodiment shown, the display of the shield image ends when the long press on the defense button 3740 ends, but the display of the shield image may continue for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the long press ends.

The shield image may be configured so that when the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, the shield image becomes larger in a concentric manner, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image becomes smaller in a concentric manner. For example, the shield image may be configured so that it becomes larger in a concentric manner over two seconds, and the shield image becomes smaller in a concentric manner over two seconds. With this configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, the visibility of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the enemy tank image is restored by quickly releasing the defense button 3740, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a player who wants to see a suggestive performance feels stressed. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the expectation level may be changed from one of the display modes of a mode in which it is not hidden at all, a mode in which it is partially hidden, or a mode in which it is completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode.

Although an example has been given in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the player's operation, the display mode of the shield image being displayed may be configured to be changeable without the player's operation. For example, the size of the shield image may be configured to automatically increase or decrease, the shape of the shield image may change periodically, or the transparency of the shield image may change. These display modes may also be combined. By changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the expectation level (the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the enemy tank image) may be configured to change from one of the display modes of not being hidden at all, partially hidden, or completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode.

Instead of or in addition to pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time, a configuration may be made in which a shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds when it is detected that the defense button 3740 has been repeatedly pressed by the player. FIG. 144(f) is a time chart showing such a modified presentation mode. In this time chart, it is shown that a shield image is displayed in a period from timing t10 to timing t16 and a period from timing t18 to timing t24 based on the detection of the player's repeated pressing of the defense button 3740. Note that a condition for determining that a repeated press has been performed may be pressing the button four or more times in one second. Note that after the shield image is displayed, it is not necessary to continue the repeated pressing, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (six seconds).
Note that, instead of pressing and holding the defense button 3740 or tapping it repeatedly, when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery may be conducted so that a shield image is displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Also, the shield image may be configured to be displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed simultaneously. Alternatively, when the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 138 is used, the shield image may be configured to be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while tilting the right lever 3730 forward.

In this way, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when a specific condition related to the defense button 3740 is met based on the operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a shield image is immediately displayed even if the player accidentally operates the defense button 3740, and the visibility of the suggestive performance is not hindered.

It may be configured so that, when the result of the variable display in which the tank reach effect in which only the attack button 3710 is operated is a result showing a miss a predetermined number of times in succession (e.g., three or five times), the operation reception for the defense button 3740 is enabled, and a "shield bullet reach" in which a shield image is displayed can be executed. In addition, on the condition that the result of the variable display in which the "shield bullet reach" is executed is a result showing a jackpot, the operation reception for the defense button 3740 is disabled, and the display of the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated until the result of the variable display in which the tank reach effect in which only the attack button 3710 is operated is a result showing a miss a predetermined number of times in succession (e.g., three or five times). With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the special lottery results are consecutive misses, while disabling the erroneous operation of the defense button 3740.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to be longer than the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. For example, in this embodiment, the enemy tank's movement time before the operation valid period is set to 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed based on pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to 6 seconds. With this configuration, once the display of the shield image starts, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 can be kept hidden until the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 ends, reducing the operational burden on the player.

After the attack button 3710 is operated, or at the end of the effective period of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed, but the display time of the shield image may be determined so that these images are also hidden by the shield image. For example, in this embodiment, the display time of the image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to 6 seconds. With this configuration, the image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell can be hidden by the shield image.

In this embodiment, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed for a maximum of three seconds, and the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds, but the display time of the shield image may be longer than the total of these times (for example, 10 seconds). With this configuration, by displaying the shield image while the enemy tank is moving, it is possible to hide both the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding shell with the shield image.

The display of the shield image that has been displayed for a predetermined time may be configured so that the player can stop it. For example, the display of the shield image may be configured to end by pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 while the shield image is being displayed. With this configuration, a situation in which a visual representation of the representation suggesting the degree of expectation is being executed can be quickly provided to a player who notices that a representation indicating high expectation is actually being executed by visually recognizing part of the representation suggesting the degree of expectation. Alternatively, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when a suggestive representation indicating a degree of expectation above a predetermined level is started. For example, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when an image of a gold enemy tank with a degree of expectation of 100% or a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed.

On the other hand, if the display of the shield image is configured to be stopped when a simple condition such as pressing a button is satisfied, the player may mistakenly press a button, which could result in the presentation mode being easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable to stop the display of the shield image when a specific condition is satisfied based on pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt the same conditions as those for starting the display of the shield image as described above as the conditions for stopping the display of the shield image.

When a shield image is being displayed, a configuration may be made to display a method of operation for stopping the display of the shield image. For example, a line such as "You coward! Press the mission button to release the shield!" or "You coward! Press the defense button 3740 to release the shield!" may be displayed in the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna." With such a configuration, even if the player accidentally displays a shield image, it is possible to quickly end the display of the shield image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 144(e), the operation of the defense button 3740 can be accepted multiple times during the valid period, so that the shield image can be displayed multiple times. Also, as long as the defense button 3740 is pressed and held, the display time of the shield image is extended and it is displayed continuously. This makes it possible to make the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the image of an exploding shell all difficult to see.

The display effect may be configured to be executable such that the shield image cannot be displayed or the display of the currently displayed shield image is terminated. For example, the display of the shield image may be terminated at the timing when an image suggesting high expectation (e.g., a red or gold image) is displayed, and the player may not be able to display the shield image for a predetermined period during which the image suggesting high expectation is displayed, or until the display of the decorative pattern suggesting high expectation is terminated. Alternatively, during the display of the shield image, a start winning occurs in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the display of the shield image is terminated at the timing when it is determined that a high expectation performance is to be performed based on the pre-reading result of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball, and the "shield bullet reach" performance is continued for the period until the display of the decorative pattern that is the subject of the pre-reading is terminated, and the player may not be able to display the shield image. In addition, as the display effect in this case, an image of an enemy tank larger than the shield image may be displayed.
In this way, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Also, by displaying a predetermined image larger than the shield image, the expectation that a favorable state will occur for the player can be increased.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is started after the display of the decorative pattern changes starts, but the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 may be started simultaneously with the display of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 145(a) at timing t0.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is set to end before the display of the decorative pattern changes stops, but the operation acceptance of the defense button 3740 may be continued until the timing at which the display of the decorative pattern changes ends (timing t35). With this configuration, it is possible to make the stopping state of the decorative pattern indicating the special lottery result difficult to see by using the shield image according to the player's intention.

These embodiments may be combined to make it possible to display a shield image from the start of the decorative pattern change (timing t0) to the end of the changing display (timing t35).

In the embodiment shown, the shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 6 seconds) on the condition that the defense button 3740 is pressed repeatedly or a 1/3 lottery is held when the defense button 3740 is operated, but the predetermined time may be configured to be set by the player. For example, during a demo period when no decorative pattern variations are being displayed and no jackpot play is being played, the display time of the shield image may be configured to be between 5 and 60 seconds, for example, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to display the shield image in a manner that suits the player's mood.

The period during which the shield image can be displayed may be configured so that the player can set it based on the number of times the decorative pattern changes. For example, if the number of times the decorative pattern changes is set to 20, then the player will be able to operate the defense button 3740 to display a shield image during a tank reach performance that occurs during the period from when the player sets the period until the number of times the decorative pattern changes reaches 20 rotations. On the other hand, if the player does not set the period, the shield image will not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during a tank reach performance.

Even if the conditions for displaying a shield image again are met while a shield image is being displayed, a new shield image will not be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive effects from being executed. On the other hand, if the conditions for displaying a shield image again are met while a shield image is being displayed, the display time of the currently displayed shield image may be extended from the point in time when the conditions for displaying the shield image are met. With this configuration, it is possible to continue hiding suggestive effects with the shield image while suppressing excessive effects.

On the other hand, if the conditions for displaying a shield image again are met while a shield image is being displayed, a new shield image may be displayed immediately. In this case, the display of the currently displayed shield image may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or the new shield image may be displayed in addition to the currently displayed shield image. With this configuration, the time during which the shield image is not displayed can be shortened, and the time during which the shield image is displayed can be easily extended.

Also, it may be configured to output sound effects corresponding to the type of image of the enemy tank, the type of simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the type of image of an exploding shell. In this case, the degree of expectation is also indicated to the player by the output sound effects.
On the other hand, for players who do not want to know the expectation level, the output of such a special sound is not desirable. Therefore, when displaying a shield image, the output of a special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. The output of the special sound may be continued until the display of the shield image is finished.
In addition, when the special sound is output, the volume of the special sound may be suppressed. The suppression of the volume of the special sound may be continued until the display of the shield image ends. In addition, the volume of the special sound may be made larger than the volume of the special sound. Alternatively, both of these may be adopted.
With this configuration, the effect sound can be made hard to hear due to a drop in volume or due to a special sound, so that even if the effect sound suggests the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation indicated can be made difficult to understand.
It is also possible to configure the system so that a predetermined sound effect that does not indicate the degree of expectation is output when an enemy tank appears. In this case, a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation can display a shield image and start outputting a special sound by quickly operating the defense button 3740 when he hears the predetermined sound effect.

The suggestive effects may be made executable even in a game state that is favorable to the player, such as a time-saving state in which the decorative pattern changes over a short period of time, or a probability-changing state in which the probability of the special lottery resulting in a jackpot is increased. In this case, the configuration may be such that the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740 in a game state in which a jackpot is more likely to occur than usual, making it difficult to see the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, or the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and to prevent the player from missing a highly anticipated effect.

On the other hand, when the suggestive effects can be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state or a probability-varying state, a shield image may be configured to be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. By configuring in this way, the suggestive effects can be hidden even in a game state in which a jackpot is more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a game state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image may be made smaller and the display time of the shield image may be shortened compared to the normal state, thereby slightly increasing the visibility of the suggestive effects hidden by the shield image.

In addition, during a jackpot game state, a suggestive effect may be made executable. In this case, the suggestive effect may notify the player of the likelihood of another jackpot occurring after the jackpot game state ends by reading ahead on the reserve, or may notify the player of the likelihood of transitioning to a time-saving state or probability-varying state, which are more advantageous than the normal state, after the jackpot ends. For example, when a 10-round jackpot is being executed, such a suggestive effect may be performed from the third round to the fifth round. This configuration prevents the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740 at a timing when the game state that occurs after a jackpot can be known, making it difficult to see the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710, or the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

On the other hand, if suggestive effects can be executed during a jackpot, a shield image may be configured to be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. With this configuration, suggestive effects can be hidden even during a jackpot. This makes it difficult for players who do not want to know the game state after a jackpot to recognize the degree of expectation regarding the game state after a jackpot.

An effect similar to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the player's tank moves along a road may be executed across multiple changes in the decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect based on pending look-ahead in the normal state.
In this case, the display performance of the player's tank moving along the road may be configured to continue from the start of the multiple decorative pattern changes until the change stops. Also, during the decorative pattern changes, the expectation of a big win for the reserved ball that was the subject of the pre-reading may be indicated by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, or the like, as described above, or a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, making these images difficult to see. The display of the shield image may be configured to be displayed across multiple decorative pattern changes.
The pending image that is the subject of pre-reading may be configured to be hidden by a shield image.
In this way, by suggesting that the player's tank moves along the road across the variation of multiple decorative patterns, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the presentation.

When the game state is transitioned to the jackpot state by the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the player's tank moves on the road, if a jackpot occurs, the display effect of the player's tank moving may be continued during or after the jackpot state. After the jackpot game state occurs, the expectation of a jackpot occurring again after the jackpot game state ends may be notified by performing a reserved reading ahead, or the expectation of whether or not the game state will transition to a time-saving state or a probability-varying state, which are more advantageous than the normal state, after the jackpot ends may be notified by a suggestive effect in which the player's tank moves on the road. Furthermore, if the game state is transitioned to a time-saving state or a probability-varying state after a jackpot, the suggestive effect of the player's tank moving on the road may be continued until the time-saving state or the probability-varying state ends. In this case, the shield image displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 may be configured to make it difficult to see the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the explosion of a shell, etc.
In addition, the shield image may be configured to be displayed across the decorative pattern changing display state, the decorative pattern stationary display state, the big win game state, and the decorative pattern changing state after the big win game state.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the presentation.

Although an example has been given in which a portion of the image of the enemy tank is made invisible by the shield image, the shield image may be configured to make the entire image of the enemy tank invisible.
Fig. 147(a) shows a modified example of the performance example shown with reference to Fig. 146(e). In the performance example shown in Fig. 147(a), the entire image of the enemy tank and a part of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by a shield image.

An example has been shown in which a portion of the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 is made invisible by the shield image, but the shield image may be configured to make all of the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 invisible.
Fig. 147(b) shows a modified example of the performance example shown with reference to Fig. 146(e). In the performance example shown in Fig. 147(b), a part of the image of the enemy tank and the entire simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by a shield image.

An example has been given in which the shield image makes the image of the destroyed enemy tank and part of the explosion mode of the shell invisible, but the shield image may be configured to make all of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of the shell invisible.
Fig. 147(c) shows a modified example of the example shown in Fig. 146(d). In the example shown in Fig. 147(c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion of the shell are all hidden by a shield image.

In the above example, the shield image is opaque, and the image of the enemy tank, which has a lower display priority than the shield image, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion of the shell are made invisible by the shield image, but the shield image may be made semi-transparent so that these images, which have a lower display priority, can be seen through the shield image.

In this way, the entire simulated image imitating the first operating unit and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operating unit can be displayed in a hidden manner by the image displayed based on the operation on the second operating unit, so that the degree of expectation suggested by these images can be hidden.
Furthermore, since it is possible to display a simulated image that mimics the first operating unit and part of the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operating unit in a hidden manner by an image that is displayed based on the operation on the second operating unit, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the image while recognizing that an image indicating the degree of expectation is being displayed by these images.
Also, the degree of expectation may be indicated by only a portion of these images, and the portion indicating the degree of expectation may be partially or entirely hidden by a shield image.

In the above example, the degree of expectation is indicated by the color of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710, but instead of or in addition to the color of the simulated image, the shape and size of the simulated image itself may be different. The shape and size of the simulated image itself may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation. Here, it is preferable to configure the area that protrudes from the shield image to be larger when the degree of expectation is high. A similar configuration may also be adopted for the image of the enemy tank, the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion mode of the shell. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the image indicating the degree of expectation to be obscured by the shield image when the degree of expectation is high.

In a state where a shield image is displayed, a larger shield image may be displayed by performing a more difficult operation (for example, pressing and holding the defense button 3740 further or repeatedly tapping it, etc.). Also, this larger shield image may be configured to hide more of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion state of the shell, compared to a normal shield image.
With this configuration, the player can be involved in determining the proportion of images suggesting the degree of expectation that are hidden, which can further increase interest.

Fig. 148(a) to Fig. 148(d) show modified examples of the presentation example shown with reference to Fig. 145(c). Fig. 148(a) shows a presentation example in which a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710. Fig. 148(b) shows a presentation example in which a small-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images that imitate the attack button 3710. Fig. 148(c) shows a presentation example in which a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710. Fig. 148(d) shows a presentation example in which a large-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images that imitate the attack button 3710.
The device is configured so that the probability of winning is higher when a large-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed than when a small-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed.
With this configuration, when a simulated image with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image becomes larger, allowing the player to recognize that the degree of expectation is high.
In addition, the image is not limited to the mock image, and the image of the enemy tank or the image of a destroyed enemy tank may be configured to have different shapes and sizes to indicate the degree of expectation.

Examples have been shown in which the degree of expectation is indicated by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell, but an embodiment applied to one image may be applied to an embodiment for another image. Alternatively, an embodiment applied to a number of images may be applied to an embodiment for a number of other images.

Examples have been given in which the degree of expectation is suggested by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell, but the degree of expectation may also be suggested by the display manner of a portion of these images. In this case, it is preferable to configure the image so that at least this portion is hidden by a shield image. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the progress of the presentation, while making the degree of expectation unrecognizable or difficult to perceive.

In this way, according to the "shield bullet reach" of this embodiment, the predetermined image showing the expectation level related to the first operation unit is made difficult to see by the image displayed by operating the second operation unit, so that players who do not want to know the expectation level can be offered the option of hiding the expectation level, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with multiple operation units have been known (for example, JP 2011-087638 A). In addition, the effective period during which operations on the operation units can be accepted is limited to a part of the period during which the decorative pattern changes. Therefore, even if some players have a strong desire to operate the operation units, they may feel irritated that they cannot operate the operation units. In addition, if an operation is performed during the effective period, a display performance corresponding to the operation is always performed, which can cause players to feel a sense of monotony in operating the operation units. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, taking into consideration the existence of players who think like this, an operation means that can be operated for a long period of time during the decorative pattern changes is provided, and a special display change is not always given in response to an operation on the operation units, but is further configured to be given on the condition that a specific condition is met.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 144 etc. will be described below with reference to the time charts shown in Fig. 149 to Fig. 152 and the display examples shown in Fig. 153 and Fig. 154. In the "Special Machine Gun Reach" performance in this embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 144.
On the other hand, in the "Special Machine Gun Reach" performance, a performance pattern is executed in which operation acceptance is enabled for the mission button 3700, not the defense button 3740. The decorative pattern of the mission button 3700 becomes a reach state, and operation acceptance is enabled at the timing (timing t5) when the reach performance in which the player's tank moves begins. Operation acceptance ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank has been displayed twice.

The period during which the operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which the operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is valid (timing t11 to timing t14), and the period during which the operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 is valid includes the period during which the operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is valid. Also, as described above, the attack button 3710 is always given a display change in response to the operation acceptance during the valid operation period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, a display corresponding to the operation is not necessarily given, and a display change displayed in the display area is given with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/3). For example, each time the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery with a probability of 1/3 is held, and if a winning result is obtained, an image of a bullet fired from a special machine gun hitting an enemy tank and causing an explosion is displayed in the display area for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, a simulated image of the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period during which acceptance of operations of the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27), indicating that the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid.

The time chart in Figure 149 shows an example of the presentation when neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 149, the variable display of the decorative symbols starts at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the variable display of the left, center, and right decorative symbols is performed as shown in FIG. 139(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(c), when the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are the same symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol consisting of the number "3") and a reach state occurs, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are reduced in size and displayed in the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the player's tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. In addition, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, the operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 is enabled.

Figure 153 (a) shows a state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. The display area shows the state in which each of the decorative patterns ("3", "↓", "3") that are in a reach state is displayed in the upper left of the display area, an image of the player's tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, an image of the road along which the player's tank will move is displayed in the left-right center of the display area, an image of a horizon and sky is displayed in the upper right of the display area, a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", a character for the performance, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image is displayed in the lower left of the display area, and a mock image of the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left of the window image displaying the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna".

As shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 153(a), by operating the mission button 3700, bullets are fired from the special machine gun of the player's tank and displayed as moving bullets, which will be described in more detail later.

At time t9, the image of a white enemy tank begins to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and moves to the left. Figure 145(b) shows the state at time t10 in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road.

At timing t11, an image of a white enemy tank that has been moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At the same time, acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might." The effective operation period of the attack button 3710 continues for three seconds, from timing t11 to timing t14.

Figure 153(b) shows a state in which a white mock image that resembles the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t11. Also, Figure 153(c) shows a state in which a white mock image that resembles the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank reaches the left edge of the road. The effective period for operating the attack button 3710 ends. Figure 153 (d) shows the display state at timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves off-screen and is no longer displayed.

The valid operation period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 continue until timing t27. At timing t27, the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 end.

After that, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display state shown in FIG. 139(f) is displayed, and at timing t34, the decorative symbols are displayed stationary. If the special lottery result is a miss, the display state shown in FIG. 139(g) is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display state shown in FIG. 139(h) is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35.

Referring to the time chart in Figure 149, an example of the presentation when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 150, we will show an example of the presentation when the player operates the attack button 3710.

The time chart in FIG. 150 shows an example of a presentation when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t12. In this case, a display of a moving cannonball is displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 153(e) shows an example of a display of a moving cannonball. In addition, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12, which is the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Figure 153 (f) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 151, we will show an example of the presentation when the player operates the mission button 3700.

The time chart in Figure 151 shows an example of a performance when the mission button 3700 is operated at timing t12. Figure 151(a) is a time chart showing an example of a performance when the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. Also, Figure 151(b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance when the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 151(a), a bullet fired from the special machine gun is displayed moving from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 154(a) shows an example of the display in which the bullet is moving. Note that the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 151(a) is an example of a performance in which a lottery based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 154(b) is an example of a display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 151(b) is an example of a presentation in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a miss (selected with a 2/3 probability), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left. Also, an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed. FIG. 154(c) is an example of a display in a state (for example, timing t14) in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to an image of a destroyed enemy tank.

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 152, we will show an example of the presentation when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700.

The time chart in FIG. 152 shows an example of a presentation when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. FIG. 152(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 and an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. FIG. 152(b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 but an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 152(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving cannonball fired from a cannon turret and a moving bullet fired from a special machine gun are displayed. FIG. 154(d) shows an example of a display in which a cannonball and a bullet are moving. Also, at timing t12, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 152(a) is an example of a performance in which a lottery based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding shell, and the image of an exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 154(e) is an example of a display showing a state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding bullet, and the image of an exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, the example of the performance shown in FIG. 152(b) is an example of a performance in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is a losing draw (selected with a 2/3 probability), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 154(f) is an example of a display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

154(e), the size of the image of an exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Also, the image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is set to have a higher display priority than the image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, the image of an exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to have a higher display priority than the image of an exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
With this configuration, it is possible to make the display change that is not necessarily given based on the operation of the mission button 3700 stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to miss the display change given in this way.

When the player operates the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed in response to the operation. Thus, during the performance of moving the tank, the player can operate the attack button 3710 to display an explosion image and change the image of the enemy tank to a destroyed display mode, and then operate the mission button 3700 to add a further explosion image to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. On the other hand, the player can also change the image of the enemy tank to an image of a destroyed enemy tank by operating only the mission button 3700, without operating the attack button 3710.

It is preferable to configure the display mode (color, size, shape, etc.) of at least one of the images of a destroyed enemy tank, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an exploding shell, and the image of an exploding bullet to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a method similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 144, etc. (color, size, shape, etc. of each image). Note that it is not necessary for these images to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

With this configuration, by operating the mission button 3700 and meeting certain conditions (a 1/3 chance of winning), the image of the enemy tank can be changed to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploding bullet can be added to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. By adding such a display change, the player feels that his operation of the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and feels great joy at having gone to the trouble of causing the display change to appear, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The display priority of the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is higher than that of the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. This configuration ensures the visibility of the image that is displayed only when a specific condition (a 1/3 lottery win) is met in addition to the operation of the mission button 3700, and prevents the player from becoming dissatisfied because the visibility of the image displayed by the operation of the mission button 3700 is impaired.

A plurality of display change modes with different appearance rates may be displayed in the display area in response to the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700. For example, there are three destruction images of enemy tanks with different degrees of destruction, and the destruction images to be displayed may be selected so that the probability of a destruction image with a large degree of destruction being displayed is 10%, the probability of a destruction image with a medium degree of destruction being displayed is 30%, and the probability of a destruction image with a small degree of destruction being displayed is 60%. In addition, a destruction image of an enemy tank with a very large degree of destruction that is displayed with an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated may be provided. In this way, when a display change is made to appear with great difficulty, an even rarer display change is shown to the player. Instead of or in addition to the destruction image, a similar display may be shown in an explosion image.

If the player does not operate the attack button 3710, a shell may be automatically fired from the turret at the end of the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 (timing t14), and an image of the enemy tank being destroyed may be automatically displayed without the player having to operate the button. This configuration allows the player to concentrate on operating the mission button 3700.

In this embodiment, when no enemy tanks are displayed, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 to fire a bullet from the special machine gun of the player's tank, and display the bullet exploding when it hits the road. For example, by operating the mission button 3700 at timing t5, a display of a bullet moving from timing t5 to timing t6 is displayed. Furthermore, if the player wins the 1/3 lottery, an image of a bullet exploding when it hits the ground is displayed for three seconds from timing t6 to timing t9.
The operation timing at which an image of a moving enemy tank being destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the movement period of the enemy tank, or from timing t11 to timing t14, which is the effective operation period of the attack button 3710.

On the other hand, if the player operates the mission button 3700 before the attack button 3710 is operated and a 1/3 lottery is drawn, and a display of a bullet fired from the special machine gun of the player's tank hitting an enemy tank and exploding is performed, the display may be configured not to display an image of a moving shell or an exploding shell corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710. With such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect that makes the player feel as if he or she has defeated the enemy tank with his or her own strength, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the display of the image of an exploding bullet, which is an effect that has been produced with great effort. Also, by not displaying the image of an exploding shell, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the display of the image of an exploding bullet, which is an effect that has been produced with great effort by operating the mission button 3700.
When the mission button 3700 is operated in a state in which an image of an exploding shell corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed, an image of an exploding bullet may be additionally displayed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700. In this case, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction as if he or she had destroyed the enemy tank.

As in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 144 etc., the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color of the enemy tank or the manner of destruction of the enemy tank. In this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the color of the enemy tank or the manner of destruction of the enemy tank is visible by the image of an exploding bullet displayed by operating the mission button 3700. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the indicated degree of expectation can be ensured.
Furthermore, in the case of a suggestive performance with low expectation, by operating the mission button 3700 during a specified period of time after the suggestive performance has ended (for example, the period from timing t16 to timing t27), an image of an exploding bullet can be displayed once or multiple times, thereby restoring interest in the game that has waned due to the execution of a performance with low expectation.

Although an embodiment in which the mission button 3700 is operated has been shown, in addition to the mission button 3700, the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 may be operable, and the direction of the special machine gun may be changed left and right by the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720. When the special machine gun is facing the enemy tank, the probability of the lottery winning when the mission button 3700 is operated may be 1/2, which is a probability that is more likely to win than 1/3, and when the special machine gun is not facing the enemy tank, the probability of the lottery winning when the mission button 3700 is operated may be 1/10, which is a probability that is less likely to win than 1/3. Furthermore, when the operation mode of the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 is very appropriate, the probability of the lottery winning may be 100%. Conversely, when the operation mode of the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 is very inappropriate, the probability of the lottery winning may be 0%.
In this case, the player operates the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, aiming to display the enemy tank in a destroyed state, so that the player can feel more immersed in the game. Also, when an image of destroying the enemy tank is displayed, the player feels a great sense of accomplishment.

In addition, the game arcade may be configured so that the probability of winning the lottery can be changed when the mission button 3700 is operated. Alternatively, a real-time clock function may be used to change the probability of winning the lottery each week when the mission button 3700 is operated. With such a configuration, the appearance rate of the effects can be set according to the tendencies of the players who visit the arcade. For example, the probability of winning the lottery can be cyclically switched each day from 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, etc.

The mission button 3700 may be configured to have a situation in which an operation instruction is displayed and a situation in which an operation instruction is not displayed during the period in which operation reception is enabled. For example, a performance pattern in which a mock image that imitates the mission button 3700 is displayed and a performance pattern in which a mock image that imitates the mission button 3700 is not displayed may be executable.

The selection of such presentation patterns may be configured so that a staff member at the gaming establishment can select which presentation pattern is to be executed, or a real-time clock function may be used to change which presentation pattern is to be executed each month. For example, only presentation patterns that do not display operation instructions may be executed for one month after the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, and after one month has passed since the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, both presentation patterns that do not display operation instructions and presentation patterns that do display operation instructions may be executed. Alternatively, when a "special machine gun reach" is executed, either one of the presentation patterns that does not display operation instructions or the presentation pattern that displays operation instructions may be selected with a predetermined probability (e.g., a 50/50 probability).

By configuring in this way, in the case of a performance pattern in which no operation instructions are displayed, the display content in the display area can be simplified. It also prevents players who are not familiar with the game from becoming confused when multiple operation instructions are displayed. On the other hand, even in a situation in which no operation instructions are displayed, players who are familiar with the game can operate the mission button 3700 to fire bullets from the special machine gun of their tank, and display the appearance of the bullets exploding on impact.

An example has been shown in which a 1/3 lottery is held in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, but in this case, a player hoping for a display change will press the mission button 3700 repeatedly. On the other hand, there is a problem in that players may become bored if the operation of the mission button 3700 is simply by pressing it repeatedly. Therefore, it is also possible to configure the system so that a 1/3 lottery is held by another operation mode, for example, by pressing and holding the mission button 3700 for a long time. In this case, for example, it is recommended to configure the system so that one lottery is held each time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second.

In addition, when it becomes possible to accept an operation of the mission button 3700, it is advisable to instruct the player which operation is required for the presentation pattern. For example, if the presentation pattern requires repeated taps of the mission button 3700, the line "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed as "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", and if the presentation pattern requires a long press of the mission button 3700, the line "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed as "Press and hold the mission button 3700!".

With this configuration, the player does not operate the mission button 3700 randomly, but instead feels a sense of tension as to which presentation pattern will be executed and which operation instruction will be presented. Also, since the number of times a lottery can be entered is fewer when the button is pressed for a long time than when the button is pressed repeatedly (since repeated pressing can generally be performed several times per second), the player feels a greater sense of accomplishment when a presentation pattern that requires a long press results in an explosion of an enemy tank. In this way, by providing a plurality of presentation patterns with different levels of difficulty in displaying images, the interest in the game can be increased.
The appearance ratio of presentation patterns requiring rapid tapping and presentation patterns requiring a long press may be configured to be selectable by the arcade staff, or may be configured to be set using a real-time clock function.

Furthermore, when the player performs an operation mode different from the operation instruction mode for the mission button 3700, a presentation pattern may be configured to be executable in which a bullet is displayed as being fired from a special machine gun.

For example, in a presentation pattern that displays "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", if the mission button 3700 is pressed repeatedly in accordance with the operational instructions, no display will be displayed to fire the special machine gun, but if a long press is performed, which is an operation different from the operational instructions, a lottery will be held with a 1/2 probability of winning every time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second, and if the lottery is won, a display will be displayed to fire the special machine gun.

Conversely, in a presentation pattern that displays "Press and hold the mission button 3700," if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held in accordance with the operational instructions, no display will be displayed showing the special machine gun being fired, but if a rapid press is performed, which is an operation different from the operational instructions, a lottery will be held with a 1/2 probability of winning each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if the lottery is won, a display will be displayed showing the special machine gun being fired.

The device may be configured to display images of bullets exploding in different ways (preferably different colors or shapes) when the button is pressed and held and when it is pressed repeatedly.

Furthermore, a presentation pattern may be executed in which the line "To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button...what do I do...?" is displayed as the line of "Colonel Dyna". Internally, it is preferable to execute either a presentation pattern in which the mission button 3700 is requested to be pressed for a long time, or a presentation pattern in which the mission button 3700 is requested to be pressed repeatedly. Furthermore, if the operation mode performed by the player differs from the requested operation mode, a line such as "I remembered! To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button repeatedly!" or "I remembered! To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button for a long time!" may be displayed as the line of "Colonel Dyna" to prompt the player to perform the appropriate operation mode. In this way, if the operation performed by the player after estimating the operation mode is an appropriate operation mode, or if the operation performed by the player after estimating the operation mode is inappropriate and the appropriate operation mode is displayed as an operation instruction and then the player performs the appropriate operation mode, an image of a bullet exploding in a special manner different from the case where the operation mode instruction display has been performed beforehand may be displayed. Also, a different special sound effect may be output corresponding to each of the exploding images.

This configuration makes it possible to satisfy the rebellious spirit of a player who feels as if he or she is always being ordered around by the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to give a player a sense of surprise and satisfaction when they accidentally or intentionally perform an operation different from the instructions. In addition, since the player plays while guessing the operation mode of the operation unit, it is possible to increase the player's enthusiasm in participating in the game. Furthermore, the second operation unit may be displayed in a manner in which the operation instructions are not necessarily clearly displayed, in which case the player's sense of satisfaction with the operation he or she performed is further increased.

Although an example has been shown in which a lottery is held by pressing and holding the mission button 3700 long or repeatedly, and a specific condition is met, and a display is displayed of the special machine gun being fired, other methods may be used to achieve the specific condition. For example, in a performance pattern that requires the mission button 3700 to be pressed long, a display may be configured to display a bullet being fired from the special machine gun if the mission button 3700 is held down for 10 seconds. Alternatively, in a performance pattern that requires the mission button 3700 to be pressed repeatedly, a display may be configured to display a bullet being fired from the special machine gun if the mission button 3700 is pressed 16 or more times in one second.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation in the sense of being pressed. Therefore, instead of the mission button 3700, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated once clockwise or counterclockwise so that the lottery is performed and a display of a bullet being fired from the special machine gun is displayed with a probability of 1/3. Alternatively, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated multiple times (e.g., three times) clockwise or counterclockwise so that a display of a bullet being fired from the special machine gun is displayed.

The system may be configured to always accept an operation on the mission button 3700 while the decorative symbols are fluctuating. With this configuration, when a player feels anger that cannot be contained because the fluctuating display result is a miss despite the fact that the fluctuating display result was a highly anticipated reach, the player can relieve such anger by making the mission button 3700 operable. For example, the player can release his/her frustration by attacking the decorative symbols while the decorative symbols are being displayed and stopped as a miss.
It is also preferable to configure the display change that has been given not to end even when the next variable display of the variable display that has been lost starts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the display of the image of an exploding bullet, which was displayed to relieve stress, is forcibly interrupted, causing the player to feel even more dissatisfied. In addition, in this way, when it is determined that the display of the image of an exploding bullet crosses over the variation of the decorative pattern, it is also possible to configure the "Special Machine Gun Reach" to be executed again at timing t0, which is the start of the variation of the next decorative pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent an unnatural state in the presentation.

In addition, whether or not a bullet is fired by operating the mission button 3700 may also be determined by lottery. For example, the probability of a bullet being fired may be 1/2, and the probability of a bullet not being fired may be 1/2.

According to this embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and certain conditions are met, a change is made to the display content in the display area, so the player feels a sense of satisfaction at having gone to great lengths to achieve the display. Even if the display result resulting from an operation on the attack button 3710 is not what the player wanted and the player is dissatisfied with the display result, the player's dissatisfaction is alleviated by the display based on the operation on the mission button 3700. In particular, since the mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times, a display corresponding to the operation will eventually be displayed, which is effective in alleviating the player's dissatisfaction.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with multiple operation units have been known (for example, JP 2011-087638 A). Gaming machines are also known that output a sound effect indicating that an operation can be accepted or that an operation is available when an operation is made on the operation unit, or that output a sound effect indicating that an operation has been accepted when an operation is made. However, there is room for further improvement in presentation. Below is shown an embodiment in which a sound effect is not output even when operation acceptance on the operation unit is enabled or an operation is made on the operation unit, and an operation acceptance display is displayed and a special sound is output when certain conditions are met.

Below, an embodiment of the "Silent Machine Gun Reach" which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 etc. will be described with reference to FIG. 155 etc. Note that, apart from the output of sound effects such as voice, the display is almost the same as the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 etc. in the display area. Note that various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 etc. can be applied to this embodiment. Note that the "Silent Machine Gun" in this embodiment is an improvement over the "Special Machine Gun" in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 149 etc., and is set so that the firing sound when firing a bullet is extremely quiet.

The time chart in FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a situation where neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 155, in this embodiment, a sound effect of "preparing to fire a cannon" is output as a precursor sound indicating that the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled during a predetermined period (timing t9 to timing t11) immediately before the timing at which the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled. In addition, at timing t11 when the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled, output of a sound of "OK" is started as an effective sound indicating that the operation acceptance is enabled. The output of the sound of "OK" is performed from timing t11 to timing t12. The effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14. When the operation acceptance period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14, a sound of "stop preparing the cannon" is output as an end sound indicating that the operation acceptance period of the attack button 3710 has ended from timing t14 to timing t16.
On the other hand, for the mission button 3700, the valid operation period begins at timing t5 and ends at timing t27, but no sound effects are output in response to the start or end of the valid operation period.

FIG. 159(a) shows the state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5.
As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 159 (a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet will be fired from the silent machine gun equipped on your tank and displayed as moving, but this will be described in more detail later.

Figures 159 and 160 show examples of display in the display area, and the type of sound that will be output (or is being output) when that display state is reached is written in the upper right corner of the figure. For example, the character string "\OK/" is written in the upper right corner of the display example shown in Figure 159(c), which indicates that the sound "OK" will be output (or is being output) when the display example shown in Figure 159(c) is reached.

At time t9, an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. In addition, from time t9 to time t11, a sound saying "Prepare for cannon fire" is output. Figure 159(b) shows the state in which an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area at time t9.

At timing t11, an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 begins. In addition, a voice message saying "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 159 (c) shows the state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

Figure 159 (c) shows the display state at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank is displayed as having reached the left edge of the road. The effective period for operating the attack button 3710 also ends. From timing t14 to timing t16, a voice message saying "Stop preparing the cannon" is output. Figure 159 (d) shows the display state at timing t14.

The time chart in FIG. 156 shows an example of a performance in which the attack button 3710 is operated, and the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. As shown in FIG. 156, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this example) during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710, the sound effect "bang", which is the sound of a shell being fired from a cannon, is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), and then the sound effect "boom", which is the sound of the shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing t13 to timing t15).

From timing t12 to timing t13, a display of the moving cannonball is displayed. Figure 159 (f) shows an example of a display of a moving cannonball. Also, at timing t12, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, the sound effect of a shell exploding, "boom", is output from timing t13 to timing t15. Figure 159 (g) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

The time chart of FIG. 157 shows an example of a performance when the attack button 3710 is not operated and the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 157(a) shows an example of a performance when the enemy tank can be destroyed, and FIG. 157(b) shows an example of a performance when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. As described above, the probability of destroying the enemy tank is 1/3, and the probability of not destroying the enemy tank is 2/3. When the enemy tank can be destroyed, a sound effect of "boom" is output, which is the sound of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, at the same time as the image of the enemy tank being destroyed. On the other hand, when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect is output.
In the presentation example shown in FIG. 157, since no operation is performed on the attack button 3710, sound effects are output similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 155.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 157(a), a bullet fired from a silent machine gun is displayed moving from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 160(a) shows an example of the display in which the bullet is moving. Note that the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 157(a) is an example of a performance in which a lottery based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. An image of an exploding bullet is also displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound effect "boom", which is the sound of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 160(b) is an example of a display showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed (for example, at timing t14).

On the other hand, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 157(b) is an example of the effect in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is a miss (selected with a 2/3 probability), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and continues to move to the left. Furthermore, an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed. Furthermore, no sound corresponding to the firing of a bullet is output. FIG. 160(c) is an example of a display in a state (for example, timing t14) in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to an image of a destroyed enemy tank.

The time chart in FIG. 158 shows a situation where both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, sound effects are output similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 156. In addition, in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, sound effects are output similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 157.

The time chart in FIG. 158 shows an example of a presentation when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. FIG. 158(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 and an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. FIG. 158(b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which an operation is performed on the mission button 3700 but an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 158(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving cannonball fired from a cannon turret and a moving bullet fired from a silent machine gun are displayed. In addition, the sound effect of a "bang" that is the sound of a cannonball being fired from a cannon is output. FIG. 160(d) shows an example of a display in which the cannonball and bullet are moving. In addition, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12.

The example of the performance shown in FIG. 158(a) is an example of a performance in which a lottery based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a probability of 1/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding shell, and the image of an exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example of the performance, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound effect of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is output, which is a "boom" sound. At the same time, the sound effect of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is output, which is a "boom" sound. FIG. 160(e) is an example of a display showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which the image of a destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding bullet, and the image of an exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, the example of the performance shown in FIG. 158(b) is an example of a performance in which the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is a miss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. An image of an exploding shell is also displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example of the performance, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is output, that is, a "boom!" sound. FIG. 160(f) is an example of a display showing a state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed (for example, at timing t14).

The volume of the "BOOM" sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 should be made louder than the "BOOM" sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Note that in Figures 160(b) and 160(e), the fact that the volume of the "BOOM" sound effect is louder is indicated by making the font of the characters "\BOOM/" larger.
In addition, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) when the "boom" sound effect is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the volume of variable sound effects such as background music may be suppressed.
In addition, when the sound effect "BOOM" is output based on the operation of mission button 3700, the sound effect "BOOM" that would normally be output when attack button 3710 is operated may be made not to be output, or, if it is already being output, the output may be interrupted and output of the sound effect "BOOM" based on the operation of mission button 3700 may be started.
Also, the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output may be longer than the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output may be six seconds, which is three times the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is output. Also, the sound effect (the sound effect "boom") output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be output multiple times. For example, the sound effect "boom" may be output three times in six seconds. Also, an image of a bullet exploding may be displayed multiple times. For example, an image of a bullet exploding may be displayed three times in six seconds.
Furthermore, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be different from the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the sound effect "boom!" may be output based on the operation of the mission button 3700.
In addition, the display displayed and the sound effects output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 are seen and heard by the player once for each player operation that satisfies the conditions, but the display displayed and the sound effects output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be seen and heard by the player two or more times for each player operation that satisfies the conditions.

In this way, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect is output indicating that an operation can be accepted, a sound effect indicating that an operation can be accepted, and a sound effect indicating that an operation has been accepted.
On the other hand, no sound effect indicating that an operation can be accepted or that an operation can be accepted is output for the mission button 3700. Furthermore, even if an operation is performed, a sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) a predetermined time (1 second) after the operation is performed.
In this way, sound effects are not necessarily output when the mission button 3700 is operated, which can increase interest in the game.
Furthermore, sound effects that are output or explosion images that are displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be output or displayed multiple times, thereby making the game more interesting.
Furthermore, the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Also, as described above, it is desirable to make the sound effects output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 easier to hear than the sound effects output based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize sound effects and special displays associated with operating the mission button 3700, which is relatively difficult to make appear.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 is started after the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, but the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 may be started simultaneously with the display of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 159(a) at timing t0.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 is set to end before the display of the changing decorative patterns stops, but the operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 may continue until the timing at which the display of the changing decorative patterns ends (timing t35).

These embodiments may be combined to continue accepting operations of the mission button 3700 from the start of the decorative pattern change (timing t0) until the change display ends (timing t35). This configuration can increase the opportunities for the player to make sound effects and special displays appear that are relatively difficult to make appear when the mission button 3700 is operated.

When an image of a bullet exploding or a sound effect such as "boom" that is the sound of a bullet exploding is displayed once based on the operation of mission button 3700, it is preferable that the display of the image and the output of the sound effect be executed after these displays and output of the sound have ended.
157(a), for example, the output of the sound effect "boom" ends at timing t15, and the display of the image of a bullet exploding ends at timing t16. In this case, the period from timing t16 to timing t17 is a period during which the image of a bullet exploding and the sound effect "boom", which is the sound of a bullet exploding, are not displayed, and it is preferable to configure so that the display of these images and the output of the sound effect can be performed after timing t17.
Furthermore, even if operation of mission button 3700 between timings t15 and t16 satisfies the condition for outputting the sound effect "BOOM" or the condition for displaying an image of an exploding bullet, the sound may not be output or the image may not be displayed while these sounds and displays are being executed, and the output of the sound effect or the display of the image may be started again only when an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after timing t16 when these sounds and displays end.
With this configuration, the display of an image or the output of a sound effect can be more clearly recognized each time, thereby reducing the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to recognize the start of the display of an image or the output of a sound effect that he or she has worked so hard to achieve.

In the example of the performance shown with reference to FIG. 155 etc., the effective period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated occurs only once, from timing t11 to timing t14, but it may be configured to occur multiple times. For example, a similar display may be performed from timing t19 to timing t22. Also, it may be configured to determine the number of occurrences based on the result of a special lottery, and to suggest the degree of expectation based on the number of occurrences and the content of the performance each time. It is preferable to cause the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 to occur multiple times during the effective operation period of the mission button 3700.
In this way, the number of occurrences of the operation valid period related to the attack button 3710, i.e., the number of times an image of an exploding bullet is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710, can be determined based on the special lottery result. On the other hand, the display of an image of an exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect "boom" of an exploding bullet based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be executed multiple times during the operation valid period without being based on the special lottery result.
With this configuration, by operating the mission button 3700 multiple times, it is possible to successfully display an image of an exploding bullet, thereby enhancing the player's sense of accomplishment.

The tank may be configured to be equipped with an additional machine gun. In this case, a presentation mode intermediate between the shells fired from the turret in this embodiment and the bullets fired from the silent machine gun may be adopted. For example, the additional machine gun may basically have the same operation acceptance mode and presentation mode as the silent machine gun in this embodiment, but may be configured to always output an acceptance sound (for example, the sound of a bullet flying) indicating that the operation has been accepted when an operation is performed. In this case, the defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit. The size of the bullet explosion image may be intermediate between that of the shell explosion image and that of the silent machine gun explosion image.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), etc., the fact that operation of the mission button 3700 is valid is indicated by a simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dinah." However, the configuration may be such that the fact that operation of the mission button 3700 is valid is not notified.
For example, the configuration may be such that the operation of the mission button 3700 is not performed during the first half of the effective operation period of the mission button 3700, and the operation of the mission button 3700 is performed during the second half of the effective operation period of the mission button 3700. Note that it is preferable that an enemy tank moves from the right side of the display area during both the first and second half of the effective operation period of the mission button 3700, and the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective. In this case, when the enemy tank is displayed for the first time, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the attack button 3710, and when the enemy tank is displayed for the second time, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 in addition to the operation of the attack button 3710.
In this way, even if it is enabled to display based on the operation reception of the mission button 3700, it may be configured to provide cases where the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed and cases where it is not performed.
In addition, the special sound and the display contents based on the operation reception of the mission button 3700 may be different depending on whether or not the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed. For example, when the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is not performed, a louder special sound may be output or a larger explosion image may be displayed compared to when the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed. By adopting such a configuration, the interest felt by the player can be further increased.

The device may be configured to be able to switch between displaying and not displaying operational instructions using the above-mentioned real-time clock function or by operation by the player or store clerk.

Thus, according to the "Silent Machine Gun Reach" of this embodiment, an operation is performed on the second operation unit, and a special sound is output when certain conditions are met. With this configuration, even if the second operation unit is operated, there are cases where a special sound is output and cases where it is not, so players who are lucky enough to have a special sound output will feel great joy.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which operation instructions for the operation unit are displayed (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). In such gaming machines, the player simply follows the instructions, and there is room for improvement in terms of increasing interest. For example, if the operation instructions are not followed, a display similar to that in the case where the operation instructions are followed after a predetermined time has passed is generally displayed, and if no operation instructions are performed, no display is generally displayed, and the player's intention of not wanting to follow the operation instructions is not respected. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, an embodiment is shown in which a special display is displayed when an operation is performed on the operation unit in a manner contrary to the instructions.

Below, with reference to Figure 161 etc., we will explain the "bomb character reach" in which the player's tank and a bomb character engage in combat while accelerating or decelerating the player's tank.

Figure 161 is a table showing the presentation patterns that can be selected in the "Bomb Character Reach." Figures 162 to 164 are time charts showing examples of presentations when one of the presentation patterns is executed. Figures 165 to 170 show examples of display at specific timings in these time charts.

In the "Bomb Character Reach", the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 34 seconds, and are statically displayed for 1 second. While the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, at timing t5 the decorative symbols enter a reach state. In addition, during the period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first period") and the period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "second period"), a performance is performed in which bomb character A or bomb character B is displayed in addition to the player's tank that is currently being displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach," a bomb character appears on the road along which the player's tank is traveling, and the player is asked whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 to move the player's tank toward the bomb character.

The bomb characters displayed are bomb character A, which is a bomb character wearing sunglasses, and bomb character B, which has sunglasses facing upside down compared to bomb character A. If bomb character A is displayed, part of the player's tank will be destroyed if the player's tank crashes into it, but if bomb character B is displayed, the player's tank will not be destroyed and will be able to move forward even if it crashes into it.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the player's tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might") indicate whether the player should drive the player's tank into the bomb character or not. For example, "Colonel Dyna" may say, "It's obviously a fake! Move forward!", which instructs the player to push the left lever 3720 forward (towards the game machine, as below). "Sergeant Might" may say, "An enemy bomb has been spotted ahead! Please slow down!", which instructs the player to push the left lever 3720 backward (towards the player, as below). Note that instead of indirect expressions such as "move the left lever forward" or "move the left lever backward", more direct expressions such as "move the left lever forward" or "move the left lever backward" may be used.

Also, on the left side of the window in which "Colonel Dyna's" lines are displayed, a vertically long rectangular imitation image of the left lever 3720 and an image indicating how to operate the left lever 3720 (the words "Lean forward" and "Lean backward") are displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window in which "Sergeant Might's" lines are displayed, a vertically long rectangular imitation image of the left lever 3720 and an image indicating how to operate the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In the "Bomb Character Reach," if "Colonel Dyna" speaks a line giving an operation instruction, the instruction is basically 100% an incorrect operation instruction. Furthermore, the image indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is also an image indicating an incorrect operation mode. On the other hand, if "Sergeant Might" speaks a line giving an operation instruction, there is a 20% probability that a line giving an incorrect operation instruction will be displayed, and an 80% probability that a line giving a correct operation instruction will be displayed. Furthermore, the image indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is an image that matches the instruction content indicated by the line.
Therefore, the player need only operate the lever in the opposite direction to the lines and instructions for operating the left lever 3720 from "Colonel Dina," and pay some attention to the lines and instructions for operating the left lever 3720 from "Sergeant Might."
Once the player becomes accustomed to the game, he or she will be able to determine the type of bomb character from the shape of the sunglasses, and will be able to decide whether or not to crash his or her tank into the bomb character and operate the left lever 3720 appropriately.

When the bomb character A is displayed, the player's tank will be partially destroyed if it collides with the bomb character A. If the player's tank does not run into the bomb character A, only the bomb character A will explode before the player's tank collides, preventing the player's tank from being destroyed. When the bomb character A collides with the player's tank, the first collision results in the player's tank's gun turret being destroyed (the player's tank state shown in FIG. 166(c)). Furthermore, the second collision results in the player's tank's machine gun also being destroyed (the player's tank state shown in FIG. 166(f)).
On the other hand, when the bomb character B is displayed, even if the player's tank collides with the bomb character B, the tank will not be destroyed and can proceed forward. The bomb character B is actually a giant balloon disguised as a bomb, and the player's tank will not be destroyed even if it crashes into it.
As the player's tank advances, a giant bomb character appears and effects can be executed using the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700, but details will be given later.

The presentation patterns shown in the table in Figure 161 indicate whether a bomb character is displayed from timing t6 to timing t11 and timing t16 to timing t21 in the time charts shown in Figures 162 and 163, and, if a bomb character is displayed, whether the displayed bomb character is bomb character A or bomb character B. Also, the possible states of the image of the player's tank are shown at timing t26.

Presentation pattern 01, presentation pattern 03, presentation pattern 07, and presentation pattern 09 are presentation patterns in which the bomb character A does not appear. Therefore, at timing t26, the player's tank is in an undestroyed state.
The presentation pattern 02, presentation pattern 04, presentation pattern 06, and presentation pattern 08 are presentation patterns in which the bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at timing t26, the player's tank is either in an undestroyed state or the player's tank's turret is destroyed.
In the presentation pattern 05, the bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at the timing t26, the player's tank is in an undestroyed state, the player's tank's gun turret is destroyed, or the player's tank's gun turret and machine gun are destroyed.

Which of the presentation patterns from presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 09 will be executed is determined by the peripheral control board 1510. For example, it may be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

Next, the mode of presentation using the explosion character A will be described with reference to Figures 162, 165 and 166.
Figure 162(a) is a time chart showing the state of the varying display of decorative patterns executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of Figures 162(b) and 162(c).
162(b) is a time chart showing the execution state of a presentation pattern in which a bomb character A is displayed during the first period. The following describes the presentation state when presentation pattern 04, which is a presentation pattern in which a bomb character A is displayed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t15), is executed.
At timing t5, the "Bomb Character Reach" starts. Figure 165(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character A is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, as the lines of "Colonel Dyna", either "It's obviously a fake! Advance!" or "Hmm, mumble." is displayed. On the other hand, as the lines of "Sergeant Might", either "An enemy bomb has been spotted ahead! Slow down!", "That one's a fake. Advance!" or "Hmm, mumble." is displayed. If the lines indicate that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the lever with the word "forward tilt" is displayed together with the lines. If the lines indicate that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the word "backward tilt" is displayed together with the lines. If the lines do not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

Figures 165(b) to 165(g) show examples of display in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types of lines for "Sergeant Might", and by combining these there are a total of six possible combinations that can be displayed. These six combinations are shown in Figures 165(b) to 165(g).

For example, Figure 165 (b) is a display example showing a state in which an incorrect operation instruction, "It's obviously a fake! Move forward!" by "Colonel Dyna," is displayed, and a correct operation instruction, "Enemy bomb spotted ahead! Slow down!" by "Sergeant Might," is displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by performing an operation opposite to that instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dina" (tilting the left lever 3720 backward). Also, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by performing an operation in accordance with the operation instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 backward). Also, regardless of the instructions in the lines, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A and tilting the lever backward.

Moreover, Figure 165 (e) is an example of a display showing a state in which the line "Hmm, mumble mumble" from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed and the line "He's a fake. Move forward!" from "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operational instruction, is displayed.
In this case, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" do not instruct the operation mode. Also, performing an operation in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward) will result in a collision with bomb character A. On the other hand, if the player is not concerned with the instructions of the lines, but confirms that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A, and tilts the left lever 3720 backward, the collision with bomb character A can be avoided.

The operation input is determined to have been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted in a predetermined direction for a predetermined time within the period from timing t6 to timing t11. For example, it is determined that an operation has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9.

If the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, a visual effect is displayed in which the bomb character A collides with the player's tank from timing t11 to timing t15.
Specifically, an image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t12 showing a collision between the player's tank and the bomb character A. Figure 166(a) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image showing the gun turret of the player's tank being destroyed is displayed. Figure 166(c) is a display example from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backwards when the bomb character A is displayed, a display will be displayed in which the bomb character A explodes in front of the player's tank from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 166(b) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is recommended to display as shown in Figure 165(a).

Fig. 162(c) is a time chart showing the manner of execution of a presentation pattern in which a bomb character A is displayed during the second period. Fig. 162(c) shows an example of a presentation when presentation pattern 02, which is a presentation pattern in which a bomb character A is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of presentation, from timing t16 to timing t25, a presentation display similar to that shown with reference to FIG. 162(b) is performed.

When either bomb character A or bomb character B is displayed in both the first and second periods, as in presentation pattern 05, presentation pattern 06, presentation pattern 08, and presentation pattern 09, a presentation mode that combines the presentation mode from timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 162(b) or the presentation mode from timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 163(b) described later with the presentation mode from timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 162(c) or the presentation mode from timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 163(c) is executed.

For example, when presentation pattern 05 is selected, a presentation mode is executed that combines the presentation mode relating to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in Figure 162 (b) and the presentation mode relating to timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in Figure 162 (c).
In this case, there is a possibility that the player's tank will crash into the bomb character A in both the first period and the second period.
For example, in a first period, a player's tank will crash into a bomb character A, resulting in the tank's turret being destroyed, whereas in a second period, a player's tank with a destroyed turret will crash into a bomb character A, resulting in the tank's machine gun being destroyed.
Fig. 166(d) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the player's tank, whose turret has been destroyed, crashes into bomb character A during the second period. Also, from timing t22 to timing t25, the display example shown in Fig. 166(f) appears.
On the other hand, if the player's tank whose turret has been destroyed does not crash into the bomb character A during the second period, the display example shown in FIG. 166(e) will be displayed from timing t21 to timing t22.

Next, with reference to Figures 163, 167 and 168, a description will be given of the form of presentation using the explosion character B.
Figure 163(a) is a time chart showing the state of the variable display of decorative patterns executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of Figures 163(b) and 163(c).
163(b) is a time chart showing the execution state of a presentation pattern in which a bomb character B is displayed during the first period. The following describes the presentation state when presentation pattern 07, which is a presentation pattern in which a bomb character B is displayed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t11), is executed.
At timing t5, the "Bomb Character Reach" starts. Figure 167(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character B is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, as the lines of "Colonel Dyna", any one of "It's an enemy bomb! Slow down!" and "Hmm, mumble." is displayed. On the other hand, as the lines of "Sergeant Might", any one of "That guy is a fake. Advance!", "Enemy bomb found ahead! Slow down!" and "Hmm, mumble." is displayed. Also, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the word "forward tilt" is displayed together with the line. Also, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the word "backward tilt" is displayed together with the line. Also, when the line does not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

Figures 167(b) to 167(g) show examples of display in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types of lines for "Sergeant Might", and by combining these there are a total of six possible combinations that can be displayed. These six combinations are shown in Figures 167(b) to 167(g).

For example, Figure 167 (b) is a display example showing a state in which an incorrect operation instruction, "There's an enemy bomb! Slow down!" by "Colonel Dyna," is displayed, and a correct operation instruction, "He's a fake. Move forward!" by "Sergeant Might," is displayed.
In this case, the player can dive into bomb character B by performing an operation opposite to that instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dina" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward). Also, the player can dive into bomb character B by performing an operation in accordance with the operation instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward). Also, regardless of the instructions in the lines, the player can dive into bomb character B by confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character B and tilting the left lever 3720 forward.

Moreover, Figure 167 (e) is an example display showing a state in which the line "Hmm, mumble mumble" from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed and the line "Enemy bomb spotted ahead! Slow down!" from "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operating instruction, is displayed.
In this case, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" do not instruct the operation mode. Also, by performing an operation in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward), it becomes impossible to dive into bomb character B. On the other hand, if the player is not concerned with the instructions of the lines, confirms that the displayed bomb character is bomb character B, and performs an operation to tilt the left lever 3720 forward, it becomes possible to dive into bomb character B.

If the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, a visual effect of the player's tank crashing into the bomb character B is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the player's tank crashing into the bomb character B is displayed. Fig. 168(a) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is preferable to display as shown in Fig. 165(a).

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backwards when the bomb character B is displayed, the bomb character B located in front of the player's tank will be displayed as is from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 168(b) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is recommended to display as shown in Figure 165(a).

163(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the presentation pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period. Fig. 163(c) shows an example of presentation when presentation pattern 03, which is a presentation pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this presentation example, from timing t16 to timing t25, a presentation display similar to that shown with reference to FIG. 163(b) is performed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 164, the presentation modes from timing t26 to timing t35 when presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 09 are executed will be described.
As described above, based on the selected presentation pattern and the manner in which the player operates the left lever 3720, at timing t26, the player's tank is displayed in one of three states: undamaged, with its turret destroyed, or with its turret and machine gun destroyed.

164(a), at timing t26, the display of bomb character A or bomb character B begins. In addition, from timing t26 to timing t28, the operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 becomes valid.
The attack button 3710 is valid when the player's tank is undamaged. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 is valid when the player's tank's turret is destroyed. When the turret and machine gun are destroyed, neither the operation of the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is valid. The performance mode when the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is invalid will be described later.

At timing t26, operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid and at the same time, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area. Also, an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right corner of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might."
Figure 169 (a) is an example of a display from timing t26 until the attack button 3710 is operated (until t28 in Figure 164 (a)), or until the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends (until t29 in Figure 164 (a)).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, a display of the bomb character A exploding is shown for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 or from the timing when the valid operation period ends. Figure 169 (b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, a display of the bomb character A moving toward the player's tank is displayed for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 or the timing when the valid operation period ends. Figure 169 (c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the player's tank after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a loss. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a loss.
Depending on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the expiration of the valid operation period, a display effect is executed in which a shell is fired from the player's tank's cannon, as in the example shown with reference to FIG.

At timing t26, operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid and at the same time, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area. Also, an imitation image of the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left corner of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dinah."
Figure 169 (d) is an example of a display from timing t26 until the mission button 3700 is operated (until t28 in Figure 164 (a)), or until the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 ends (until t29 in Figure 164 (a)).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, a display of the bomb character A exploding is performed for three seconds from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 or from the timing when the valid operation period ends. Figure 169 (e) shows a display state in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, a display of the bomb character A moving toward the player's tank is performed for three seconds from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 or the timing when the valid operation period ends. Figure 169(f) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the player's tank after the mission button 3700 is operated or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a loss. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a loss.
In addition, based on the operation of the mission button 3700 or the expiration of the valid operation period, a display effect is executed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, as in the example shown with reference to FIG. 154.

When presentation pattern 05 is executed and the player's tank crashes into bomb character A in both the first and second periods, the player's tank with its turret and machine gun destroyed is displayed at timing t26.
FIG. 164(b) is a time chart showing the performance state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed in that position until timing t29. Figure 170(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, the bomb character A is displayed moving toward the player's tank for three seconds. Figure 170(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A is moving toward the player's tank. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a miss.
On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a big win, the bomb character B starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed in that position until timing t29. Figure 170(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, the bomb character B is displayed moving toward the player's tank for three seconds. Figure 170(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character B is moving toward the player's tank. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a big win.
In either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 will be enabled for operation.

In this way, by giving appropriate operation instructions without being misled by incorrect operation instructions for the left lever 3720, the player can operate the special operation parts (attack button 3710 and mission button 3700) as shown in Figures 169(a), (b), (d), and (e) and can see special images (an image of bomb character A exploding, an image of the sunglasses worn by bomb character A tilting, and the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might"). On the other hand, if the player simply follows the operation instructions, he or she will not be able to operate the special operation parts as shown in Figures 170(a) and (d), and will not be able to see the special images.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 169(a) and (d), or Figures 169(b) and (e), the player will be able to see special presentation displays depending on the manner in which his or her own tank is destroyed.

If the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the operation instruction indicated by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be automatically executed. At this time, the image that would be displayed if the player performed the operation instruction may be automatically displayed. If "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" does not perform an operation instruction and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either the forward tilt operation or the backward tilt operation may be automatically displayed by lottery. For example, the forward tilt operation may be selected with a 1/2 probability, and the backward tilt operation with a 1/2 probability, and a display corresponding to that operation may be displayed.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the player is required to perform an operation not following the operation instructions during at least one of the first period and the second period. Also, by performing an operation not following the operation instructions, it is possible to generate an effect state in which an operation to a specific operation unit becomes effective and a special image is displayed just before the decorative symbols stop.
In this way, the player is presented with operation instructions that are different from or contradictory to the operation instructions that should be performed, and so the player must estimate what the appropriate operation for the operation unit is and tilt the left lever 3720. If the player is able to perform an appropriate operation contrary to the operation instructions, the player will be able to operate a special operation unit or see a special image or effect display.
In addition to performing an operation contrary to the operating instructions, the special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, performing an operation contrary to the operating instructions multiple times successfully) is met. By configuring in this way, the special display can be made visible only to players who have performed the operation appropriately, rather than being accidentally displayed by a player who has operated the operating unit appropriately.

The player may be configured to operate the left lever 3720 left or right to allow the tank moving forward to avoid minefields set up on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield may be displayed on the right or left side of the road, and an effect may be executed in which the player operates the left lever 3720 left or right to avoid the minefield. If the player's tank enters the real minefield, the tank's turret and machine gun may be destroyed. The lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" may also be configured to give incorrect operating instructions regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720. Such effects may be configured to be executable in the first period or the second period.

In this way, by appropriately operating the left lever 3720, the player can move the tank left and right while avoiding the minefield, and even if the player successfully performs an operation contrary to the operating instructions, the player can operate a special operating section or view special images or special effects, just as in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 161 to 170, etc.

The presentation table shown in FIG. 161 has a first period and a second period, but it may be configured to have only the first period, and a table may be adopted in which a presentation pattern is selected during the first period from among a presentation pattern in which a bomb character does not appear, a presentation pattern in which bomb character A appears, and a presentation pattern in which bomb character B appears.
In this case, it is advisable to configure the game so that if the player's tank crashes into bomb character A, both the tank's turret and machine gun will be destroyed.

The presentation table shown in FIG. 161 has a first period and a second period, but the presentation may also be performed using a presentation table configured to provide three or more periods in which the bomb character can be displayed.
In addition, the reserve may be read in advance, and based on the read-ahead results, multiple periods may be set during which a bomb character may be displayed across multiple decorative pattern changes (one period may be set during each decorative pattern change, or a period may be set during which any number of bomb characters may be displayed during each decorative pattern change), and the display effect shown with reference to Figures 164, 169 and 170 may be executed just before the change display corresponding to the reserve that was the subject of the read-ahead stops.

In addition, although three stages are provided for the display mode of the player's tank, two stages or four or more stages may be provided. Also, while an example of a display mode change in which the destruction of the player's tank progresses in stages has been shown, it is also possible to configure the game so that a performance is possible in which the player's tank is repaired and the destruction stage of the tank returns to a relatively undestroyed stage.

Although examples have been shown in which, during the first or second period, the bomb character does not appear, the bomb character A appears, or the bomb character B appears, it is also possible to configure so that either the bomb character A or the bomb character B is always displayed during the first and second periods. For example, the table shown in FIG. 161 may be modified to adopt a table consisting of only presentation pattern 05, presentation pattern 06, presentation pattern 08, and presentation pattern 09. With such a configuration, one of the bomb characters is displayed during each period of the presentation pattern, which can increase the sense of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

Note that in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 165 to 170, display examples in which a bomb character is displayed are mainly illustrated, but in periods in which a bomb character is not displayed, it is preferable to display the player's tank character moving forward, as shown in Figure 165(a).

It may be configured so that the special image is displayed only when a certain condition is met. For example, the special display may be displayed only when an operation that does not follow the operating instructions is successfully performed multiple times. Also, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operating instructions, a predetermined lottery may be held and the special display may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). With such a configuration, the special image will not be displayed by chance simply by operating the operating unit, and the difficulty of displaying the special image can be increased, thereby making it possible to increase the surprise and joy felt by the player when the special image is displayed.

When a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, the volume of the variable effect sound may be reduced and suppressed at least during the period in which the special image is displayed.
In addition, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (e.g., a special explosion sound) may be output at least during the period during which the special image is displayed.
Furthermore, the variable effect sound may be suppressed and a special sound may be output at the same time.
In this way, by suppressing the variable performance sound and outputting the special sound in response to the display of the special image, the display of the special image is not disturbed by the variable performance sound, and the display of the special image can be made more prominent by the output of the special sound.

The variable performance sound is a sound that is recognized by the player as background music, in which a predetermined piece of music is played in accordance with the variation of the decorative symbols. For example, a piece of music consisting of the voice of a predetermined singer and the sound of playing a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the decorative symbols vary (for example, when all the variation results of the decorative symbols are non-reach misses and the variation time is about 10 seconds on average). By outputting such a variable performance sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It is also possible to configure the device to prepare a plurality of such pieces of music in advance, and to start playing a different piece of music when the playback of a certain piece of music is completed to the end. Alternatively, the device may be configured to fade out the music that has been played up until that point in the middle of playback in accordance with the change in the game state, and play another piece of music different from the music that has been played up until that point.
In addition, a predetermined light-emitting member provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 may be illuminated in a light-emitting manner that matches the melody of the variable effect sound. This can enhance the effect of the variable effect sound.

When the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately without being deceived by the operating instructions, a game state in which a special image is displayed is generated. The display period of the special image and the display period of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 can overlap, and an example of a presentation in which a special image (such as an image of an exploding bomb) and a simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 are displayed simultaneously is shown below.

Figures 171(a) to 171(c) show other display examples which can be displayed at the timing when the diagram shown in Figure 169(a) is displayed.
In each of the figures of FIG. 171(a) to FIG. 171(c), the display priority of the image of the diagonally inclined semi-transparent sunglasses is higher than the display priority of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna", the image of the line of "Colonel Dyna", the image of the player's tank, the image of the bomb character A, and the simulated image of the attack button 3710. Also, the image of the semi-transparent sunglasses may be displayed as one as shown in FIG. 171(a), as two as shown in FIG. 171(b), or as three as shown in FIG. 171(c). Then, whether or not to display the semi-transparent sunglasses image is determined so that the expectation of the big win is higher when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed compared to when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 169(a). Also, the display mode of the semi-transparent sunglasses image is determined so that the expectation of the big win is higher as the number of the semi-transparent sunglasses images increases.

For example, a translucent sunglasses image may be displayed so that the expected probability for the display state shown in FIG. 169(a) is 10%, the expected probability for the display state shown in FIG. 171(a) is 30%, the expected probability for the display state shown in FIG. 171(b) is 50%, and the expected probability for the display state shown in FIG. 171(c) is 80%.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image begins at timing t26 and continues until the attack button 3710 is operated or the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 ends. Note that if the bomb character A can be exploded (i.e., the special lottery result is a jackpot), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may continue until the display of the explosion image ends.

This configuration can achieve the same effect as the above-described embodiment. In addition, because the semi-transparent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed in front of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, it is possible to prevent the special image that could be easily seen from being obscured by the simulated image of the attack button 3710.

Fig. 171(d) is a modified example of the display shown in Fig. 171(c). As in this display example, a simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be displayed in front of a semi-transparent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in Fig. 171(c) and the display mode shown in Fig. 171(d) may be alternately displayed. For example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds from timing t26 to timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, both the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the translucent sunglasses image can be made to stand out.
Incidentally, the bomb character A before or after the explosion may be displayed in the same manner as the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710.

Note that the degree of expectation does not have to be indicated by an image of semi-transparent sunglasses. In this case, the appearance rate of the displayed image may be differentiated.

In the example shown with reference to Figures 164 and 169, the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated once between timing t26 and timing t29. Below, however, an embodiment modified so that the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times will be described with reference to Figure 172.

172(a) to 172(c) are display examples in the case where the attack button 3710 can be operated multiple times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, multiple simulated images (for example, five images) of the attack button 3710 are displayed according to the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. In addition, each time the attack button 3710 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed at the front side among the simulated images of the attack button 3710 ends. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an image of a bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, if the fifth operation is performed, an image of an explosion may be displayed with a 100% probability. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, the bomb character A is not hit by a shell and the image of an explosion is not displayed.
FIG. 172(a) shows an example of a display at timing t26.
FIG. 172(b) shows a state in which, when the attack button 3710 is operated a third time, a predetermined probability is met and an explosion image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 172 (c) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the attack button 3710 is operated five times or from the moment the valid operation period ends.
When the exploded image is displayed, if there are remaining times that the attack button 3710 can be operated, the remaining number of operations may be accepted, and the display mode of the exploded image may be configured to be displayed in an even more exploded manner in response to this operation.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the attack button 3710, so the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image. Fig. 172(b) shows a display example in which the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image.

172(d) to 172(f) are display examples in which the mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, multiple simulated images (for example, five images) of the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. In addition, each time the mission button 3700 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed at the front side among the simulated images of the mission button 3700 ends. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, an image of a bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the image of the explosion is not displayed.
FIG. 172(d) shows an example of display at timing t26.
FIG. 172(d) shows a state in which, when the mission button 3700 is operated a third time, a lottery with a predetermined probability is won and an exploded image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 172 (f) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the mission button 3700 is operated five times or from the moment the valid operation period ends.
When the exploded image is displayed, if there are remaining times that the mission button 3700 can be operated, the remaining number of operations may be accepted, and the display mode of the exploded image may be configured to be displayed in an even more exploded manner in response to this operation.
When an explosion image is displayed, an operation on the mission button 3700 is not necessarily required, so the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image. Fig. 172(e) shows a display example in which the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

In the example presentation shown with reference to Figures 172(d) to 172(f), Colonel Dyna's lines are "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!", which is an incorrect operation instruction. For this reason, the player needs to carefully observe the presentation situation and operate the mission button 3700. If the player can operate the mission button 3700, he or she will be able to see a special image of a bomb exploding.

Next, referring to FIG. 173, a description will be given of a performance example that combines the performance examples shown with reference to FIG. 172(a) to FIG. 172(c) and the performance examples shown with reference to FIG. 172(d) to FIG. 172(f). In this embodiment, when the player's tank's turret is not destroyed and timing t26 arrives, acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is enabled at the same time. At this time, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can each be operated a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times each). In addition, a predetermined number of simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are each displayed.

173(a) shows a display example in which five simulated images that imitate the attack button 3710 and five simulated images that imitate the mission button 3700 are displayed. As described above, the effective operation period may start from timing t26.
In this state, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, an exploded image will be displayed depending on whether the special lottery result is a jackpot or not and whether or not the lottery has a specified probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, 1/3 for the mission button 3700) as described above.

FIG. 173(b) shows a state where an exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the attack button 3710. FIG. 173(d) shows a state where an exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the mission button 3700. The display examples shown in FIG. 173(b) and FIG. 173(d) are each displayed when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Note that when the exploded image is displayed, if there are still remaining times that the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated, the remaining number of operations may be accepted, and the display mode of the exploded image in response to the operation may be displayed in a more exploded mode.
For example, in the display state shown in Fig. 173(b), if a predetermined lottery (1/3) is won based on an operation on the mission button 3700, the display state may be changed to an explosion state as shown in Fig. 173(d). Alternatively, in the display state shown in Fig. 173(d), if a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on an operation on the attack button 3710, the display state may be changed to an explosion state as shown in Fig. 173(b).
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, even if the mission button 3700 and the attack button 3710 are operated and the player continues to lose the specified lottery, when the operation is performed a total of 10 times, there is a 100% probability that an exploded image of the type corresponding to the last button operated will be displayed.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, so it is advisable to display the simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 with a lower display priority than an exploded image. Figures 173(b) and 173(d) show display examples in which the simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than an exploded image.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 173 (c) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the attack button 3710 is operated five times and the mission button 3700 is operated five times during the valid operation period, or from the moment the valid operation period ends.
In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 173(a), the words of "Colonel Dyna" are "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!", which is an incorrect operation instruction. Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the performance situation and operate the mission button 3700.

In the example of the presentation described with reference to Figure 169 (d), the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instruct the player to operate the mission button 3700, but instead of the line "Fire that special machine gun! Press the mission button!", it is also possible to configure the display to display an incorrect line such as "Fire that special machine gun! Press the defense button!"
In addition, in the examples of presentation described with reference to Figure 169(a), Figure 171(a), Figure 172(a), and Figure 173(a), the lines of "Sergeant Might" instruct the operation of the attack button 3710, but instead of the line "It's a big bomb! Attack with the attack button!", it is also possible to configure the display to display an incorrect line such as "It's a big bomb! Attack with the defense button!"
With this configuration, the player is required to carefully observe the presentation situation, which can further increase the interest in the game. The player can recognize the operation part to be operated by the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the simulated image of the attack button 3710.

In addition, the simulated images of the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 indicate the operation part that should be operated, but these may also be configured to display simulated images that indicate an operation part other than the operation part that should actually be operated, similar to the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" (when an incorrect instruction is given). In this case, when an appropriate operation is performed, a display of a shell or bullet being fired may be displayed to suggest to the player that an appropriate display has been performed.

Although the display examples show simulated images of the left lever 3720, attack button 3710, and mission button 3700, these do not have to be displayed. In this case, the player will need to operate the operation section in a manner that goes against or differs from the operation instructions based on the type of bomb character and the destruction status of the player's tank, etc., which increases the difficulty of performing appropriate operations and therefore increases the excitement felt when appropriate operations are performed.

Referring to Figures 172 and 173, an example of a presentation state is shown in which a special image (such as an explosion image or an image of tilted sunglasses) is displayed when the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instructions even during the period after timing t26. Even in such an embodiment, the same effect as the embodiment described above with reference to Figures 161 to 171 is achieved.

It is advisable to set the time during which the special image that contradicts the operational instructions is displayed longer than the time during which the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 is displayed. This configuration allows the player to fully enjoy the special image.

The special image displayed when an operation is performed in a manner contrary to or different from the operation instructions may be a larger image than the operation instructions. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 171, it is possible to display an image (an image of large translucent sunglasses as shown in FIG. 171(c)) that is larger than the image that gives the operation instructions (an image of a line instructing the player to operate the lever incorrectly). This configuration can increase the player's interest in the display of a more special image.

In this embodiment, operation instructions such as "tilt forward" and "tilt backward" are displayed as operation instructions for the left lever 3720, but even if no operation instruction is given (as in the display examples shown in Figs. 165(g) and 167(g)), the operation content can be inferred from the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only when the player is able to operate the left lever 3720 appropriately in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in Fig. 169(b), there may be cases where an image of tilted sunglasses is displayed and cases where it is not, and when no operation instruction is given for the attack button 3710, if the attack button 3710 is operated, an image of tilted sunglasses (special image) may be displayed with a predetermined probability (1/10).

In addition, when the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above are operated, an operation acceptance sound that directly corresponds to the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above may not be output, and a special sound corresponding to the operation may be output only when the special conditions described above are satisfied based on the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above and a special image is displayed. With such a configuration, the display of a special image will be perceived by the player as being even more special. A similar configuration may be adopted in the display of special images in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 171 to 173.

Note that, as examples of operations that go against operational instructions, the above examples include tilting the left lever 3720 in a different direction and operating a button other than the instructed button, but other modes are also possible. For example, when the player is instructed to press and hold the attack button 3710, repeatedly tapping the attack button 3710 may be used as an operation that goes against operational instructions. Alternatively, when the player is instructed to operate the attack button 3710, operating the defense button 3740 may be used as an operation that goes against operational instructions.

In the above example, a special display change is applied when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is performed. However, such a special display change may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Alternatively, the likelihood of a jackpot may not be indicated. Alternatively, among the above-mentioned special display changes, some of the display changes may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, and other display changes may not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the left lever 3720 is started after the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, but the operation acceptance period for the left lever 3720 may be started simultaneously with the display of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, at timing t0, the display shown in FIG. 165(b) may be performed to start the "bomb character reach."

Also, based on the reserved pre-reading, a similar effect to the "bomb character reach" shown with reference to FIG. 165 to FIG. 173 may be executed over multiple decorative pattern variations. In this case, a bomb character A or a bomb character B may be displayed once in the decorative pattern variation display executed before the decorative pattern variation display that is the subject of the pre-reading. Then, during the entire period during which the decorative pattern variation display is performed, an effect that accepts the operation of the left lever 3720 corresponding to the displayed bomb character may be executed, and during the entire period during which the decorative pattern variation is stopped, a display effect corresponding to the operation of the left lever 3720 may be executed. For example, the example of the effect performed from timing t6 to timing t11 in FIG. 162 and FIG. 163 may be executed during the decorative pattern variation display, and the example of the effect performed from timing t11 to timing t15 may be executed during the decorative pattern variation stop. Then, during the period from the start of the decorative pattern variation display that is the subject of the pre-reading to the end of the stopped display, an effect performed from timing t26 to timing t35 in FIG. 164 may be executed.

In addition, the game may be configured so that when the player's tank's turret is destroyed, the destroyed turret is restored by performing an operation that does not follow the displayed operating instructions.
In addition, the game may be configured so that when the player's tank's machine gun is destroyed, the destroyed machine gun is restored by performing an operation that does not follow the displayed operating instructions.
In addition, when the turret of the player's tank is not destroyed, the player's tank may be upgraded by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display. For example, the number of turrets may increase by one, the color of the turrets may change, or the turrets may change into extra-large turrets.
In this case, the bomb character can be made to appear five times, rather than twice, as shown in Fig. 161, to increase the number of times, thereby making the presentation more interesting. Also, the player can be made to see special presentation displays, such as the revival of a destroyed machine gun or an upgrade of the player's tank.

The display change may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a big win, or the display change may be configured to be merely for presentation purposes and not to indicate the likelihood of a big win.
For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets may be configured to suggest or notify the current game state or a game state that will occur.

The system may be configured so that bomb character A or bomb character B is always displayed during the first period, the second period, and the variable display during the look-ahead performance. By configuring it in this way, the operation instructions are always shown to the player, creating a sense of tension for the player and thus increasing the player's interest.

An example has been shown in which a special display change is imparted by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation content, but a configuration may be adopted in which a special display change is imparted by an operation that goes against the instructed operation content or an operation that is different from the instructed operation content.

An example was given in which both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" give operational instructions, but it is also possible to configure it so that only one character gives operational instructions during a series of "bomb character reaches." In this case, the other character may display a line such as "Hmm, mumble mumble."

In this way, in the "Bomb Character Reach" mode, if an operation is performed that does not follow the displayed operating instructions, a special display change is given, giving the player a special sense of satisfaction.

In the past, in order to suggest the result of a special lottery, a specific image was displayed based on the player's operation to suggest the result of the special lottery (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). However, the number of times such operations were accepted and the number of times the display was made in response to the acceptance of the operation were predetermined. Furthermore, the period during which the player could perform the operation was also limited to a predetermined period, and the display mode could not be freely changed by the player's free operation. Furthermore, the display time of the effects displayed in this way was fixed, and there was room for improvement in this respect as well. In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described that allows the acceptance of operations multiple times during the valid operation period, and allows the display time of the image displayed based on the operation to be set to a long or short time, making it possible to suggest the result of the special lottery depending on the length of the display time.

The following describes the "sudden tank effect" that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern with reference to Fig. 174. Whether or not to execute the "sudden tank effect" is determined based on the peripheral control board 1510 reading ahead the reserved contents.
Figure 174 is a table showing the types of presentation patterns that can be selected in the "Sudden Tank Presentation," the conditions under which the presentation pattern is selected, and the period during which the pre-reading presentation is executed (specifically, the number of times the decorative pattern changing display is spanned).

Look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 4 when the previous decorative symbol variable display ends and a new decorative symbol variable display begins. Look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank display" is executed in the variable display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the variable display. Note that look-ahead performance pattern 01 is not strictly a look-ahead performance because it is executed only during one variable display period, but for convenience, it will be referred to as a look-ahead performance.

Pre-reading performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 3 when the previous decorative symbol variable display ends and a new decorative symbol variable display starts. Pre-reading performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which an "instant tank performance" is executed in the variable display related to the reserved symbol and the variable display related to the first reserved symbol at the start of the variable display.

Pre-reading performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 2 when the previous decorative pattern variable display ends and a new decorative pattern variable display starts. Pre-reading performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern in which an "instant tank performance" is executed in the variable display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first reserved symbol, and the variable display related to the second reserved symbol.

Pre-reading performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 3 when the previous decorative symbol variable display ends and a new decorative symbol variable display starts. Pre-reading performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern in which an "instant tank performance" is executed in the variable display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first reserved symbol, the variable display related to the second reserved symbol, and the variable display related to the third reserved symbol.

In addition, in a performance pattern in which multiple variable displays are performed, such as pre-reading performance pattern 02 to pre-reading performance pattern 04, the result of the special lottery for the final variable display in which the ``sudden tank performance'' is performed can be either a jackpot or a miss, but if the results of the special lottery for the intermediate variable displays other than the final variable display in which the ``sudden tank performance'' is performed are all misses, a pre-reading performance based on pre-reading performance pattern 02 to pre-reading performance pattern 04 should be performed.

Figure 175 is a table showing the three display presentation patterns that are displayed in the "Sudden Tank Presentation." Also, Figure 176 is a time chart showing the presentation mode when pre-reading presentation pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), in the "Sudden Tank Presentation", the decorative symbols are displayed in a varying manner for 14 seconds from timing t0 to timing t14. The decorative symbols are displayed stationary for 1 second. At timing t0, the attack button 3710 is enabled for operation, and at timing t14, when the decorative symbols end their varying display, the attack button 3710 is disabled for operation. During the period when the attack button 3710 is enabled for operation (timing t0 to timing t14), a simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area. Below, with reference to FIG. 177, the presentation mode displayed in the display area based on the player's operation of the attack button 3710 will be described.

Figure 177 shows the display state in the display area at a specific timing in the time chart described with reference to Figure 176.

177(a) shows a state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t0. The display area shows a state in which each decorative pattern ("3", "↓", "3") in a reach state is displayed in the upper left of the display area, an image of the player's tank facing forward in the lower center of the display area, an image of an enemy tank facing left in the upper center of the display area, an image of a road along which the player's tank moves in the left-right center of the display area, an image of a horizon and sky in the upper part of the display area, a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", a character for presentation purposes, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image in the lower right of the display area, a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", a character for presentation purposes, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image in the lower left of the display area, and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the window image surrounding the dialogue image of Sergeant Might.
Thus, in the "sudden tank effect", at timing t0, an image of the player's tank and an image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed, and acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), if no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the image of the enemy tank continues to be displayed until timing t14. In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary at timing t14.

On the other hand, after the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed. FIG. 175 is a table showing the effect patterns executed based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
Also, Figures 176(b) to 176(d) are time charts showing the state in which a performance pattern corresponding to an operation is executed based on the acceptance of an operation on the attack button 3710 at timing t3.
In addition, Figures 176 (e) to 176 (g) are time charts showing the state in which a performance pattern corresponding to an operation is executed based on the acceptance of an operation on the attack button 3710 at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8.

FIG. 175 shows the presentation patterns that can be selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed for one second in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed for two seconds in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for three seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank for three seconds. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.

The appearance rate of smoke display pattern 01 to smoke display pattern 03 is determined in advance to indicate the likelihood that the variable display result will be a jackpot. When smoke display pattern 01 is executed, the likelihood is 30%, when smoke display pattern 02 is executed, the likelihood is 50%, and when smoke display pattern 03 is executed, the likelihood is 100%.

Figure 176 (b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 176 (c) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 176 (d) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on operation of the attack button 3710.

Figure 177(b) shows an example of the display in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the performance examples shown in Figures 176(b) to 176(d). Figure 177(b) shows a state in which a shell is fired at an enemy tank, and an image of the shell exploding and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 177(b) ends in less than one second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) appears. In this display state, the enemy tank's gun turret is destroyed, and a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the example shown in FIG. 176(b), smoke display pattern 01 is selected, and one second after the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is reached, the display state shown in FIG. 177(d) changes to one where no smoke image is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed in a different way, indicating that expectations are low.

In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 176(c), smoke display presentation pattern 02 is selected, and two seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is reached, the display state changes to one in which no smoke images are displayed (not shown). The line from "Colonel Dyna" that is displayed two seconds later is "The power of the new type of cannon seems decent...". Here, the line from "Colonel Dyna" indicates that the level of expectation is medium.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 176(d), by selecting smoke display performance pattern 03, the display state shown in FIG. 177(c) is followed three seconds later by the display state shown in FIG. 177(e) where no smoke image is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed in a different way, indicating high expectations.

In this way, the longer the time for which the smoke image is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot.
Therefore, the player will view the display area in the hope that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the words of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the smoke image finishes displaying correspond to each smoke display performance pattern. Therefore, the words of "Colonel Dyna" also suggest the expectation of a big win. Since the words of "Colonel Dyna" correspond to the display time of the smoke image, even if the player does not know the exact display time of the smoke image, the player can know the expectation. This makes it possible to make a player who has a low concentration on the game and does not bother to check the display time of the smoke image feel an interest in the game.

One second after the smoke image is no longer displayed, a new enemy tank image is displayed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 176(b), a new enemy tank image is displayed at timing t5. In the example shown in FIG. 176(c), a new enemy tank image is displayed at timing t6. In the example shown in FIG. 176(d), a new enemy tank image is displayed at timing t7. FIG. 177(f) is an example showing a new enemy tank image being displayed.

In the example presentation shown in Figures 176(b) to 176(d), no further operation is performed on the attack button 3710, and the display of the decorative pattern changes ends at timing t14.

Fig. 178(a) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the performance examples shown in Fig. 176(b) to Fig. 176(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown to be stopped and displayed as "333", which indicates that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies the player that the jackpot has been reached.
Fig. 178(b) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the performance examples shown in Fig. 176(b) to Fig. 176(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown to be stopped and displayed as "343", which indicates that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the display mode is such that the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also notified that the result is a loss.

Referring to Figures 176(b) to 176(d), an example of the effect when an operation is received on the attack button 3710 at timing t3 is shown, but it is possible to receive an operation from the player at any timing between timing t0 and timing t14 and execute one of the smoke display effect patterns.

In this way, by accepting the player's operation not just once but multiple times between timing t0 and timing t14, it is possible to execute the smoke display effect pattern multiple times.

Figures 176(e) to 176(g) show examples of effects when operation of the attack button 3710 is detected twice at timings t3 and t8.
Figure 176 (e) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3, and smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t8.
Figure 176 (f) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3, and smoke display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t8.
Figure 176 (g) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t3, and smoke display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t8.
In addition, even if the smoke display performance pattern is executed multiple times, each time the performance pattern is executed, a display similar to the performance example described with reference to Figures 176 (b) to 176 (d) is displayed.

In addition, if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain smoke display effect pattern is being executed, the display state shown in FIG. 177(f) may continue for one second after the end of the currently executed smoke display effect pattern, and then one of the smoke display effect patterns may be automatically executed, leading to the display state shown in FIG. 177(b) and subsequent patterns. For example, when an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times within a short period (e.g., one second), three smoke display effect patterns will be automatically executed.

An example has been shown in which pre-reading performance pattern 01 is selected and an "sudden tank performance" is executed in one variable display, but below we will explain how the "sudden tank performance" is executed when pre-reading performance pattern 02 to pre-reading performance pattern 04 are selected.
In the "Sudden Tank Performance," the performance is carried out over a maximum of four changing displays, with each changing display taking 14 seconds, and the change stop time being 1 second.

Hereinafter, with reference to Fig. 179 and Fig. 180, a description will be given of an example of a performance when the look-ahead performance pattern 02 is executed. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target for which the expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead performance is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second one is a miss. This point is the same for look-ahead performance pattern 03 and look-ahead performance pattern 04.
In addition, in the case of pre-reading performance patterns 02 to 04, when the display of smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks begins and ends during the changing display of the decorative pattern, a display similar to the performance examples described with reference to Figures 176 and 177 is displayed.

The following describes the manner in which smoke images and images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while decorative patterns are being statically displayed.
As shown in FIG. 179(a), if no operation is performed on the attack button 3710, the display state shown in FIG. 180(a) will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (b), when smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the performance using smoke display performance pattern 01 ends at timing t14, and the display state shown in Figure 180 (b) is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (c), when smoke display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a smoke image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 180 (c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (d), when smoke display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a smoke image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, resulting in the display state shown in Figure 180 (c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (e), when smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 180 (d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (f), when smoke display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 180 (e) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the display of new decorative symbols begins to change. The display of the decorative symbols at this time also begins in a display mode that creates a reach state, such as "3↓3."

With reference to FIG. 179, we have explained the display mode of the smoke image and the enemy tank destruction image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that is the target of the pre-reading performance stops. Below, with reference to FIG. 181, we will explain the display mode of the smoke image and the enemy tank destruction image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the target of the pre-reading performance stops.

All of Figures 181(b) to 181(f) show examples in which the execution period of the selected smoke display performance pattern overlaps with the stopped display period of the decorative pattern (timing t29 to timing t30). In the examples shown in Figures 181(b) to 181(f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display performance pattern, the currently executing smoke display performance pattern is stopped at timing t29 and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in Figure 178(a) or Figure 178(b) will be displayed based on the special lottery results.

On the other hand, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period only if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the jackpot game state starts from timing t30, but the opening state of the jackpot game is set from timing t30 to timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 is started from timing t35. Figures 182(b) to 182(f) show examples of effects in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative patterns are not changing or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, the smoke display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period only if the result of the special lottery is a miss. In this case, the next variable display starts from timing t30, but the tank effect may be continued in the next variable display, and the "tank effect" may be ended in the middle of the variable display.
Figures 182(b) to 182(f) show examples of presentations in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display starts.

In this way, in the "sudden tank effect" according to this embodiment, it is possible to accept an operation on the attack button 3710 (operation unit) at the same time as the start of the change in the decorative pattern, and the number of times that the display effect based on the operation on the operation unit is performed is not predetermined, and the display effect can be executed any number of times based on the player's will, so that the player can have a strong interest in the operation on the operation unit. In addition, it is necessary to pay attention not only to simply operating the operation unit but also to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) displayed in response to the operation (because the longer the display time, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is suggested), so that the interest can be further increased. Furthermore, since the change time of the decorative pattern is set to be short, it is possible to create a sense of tension about the operation on the operation unit and the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation. In addition, by configuring this display effect to be executable over the change in multiple decorative patterns as a look-ahead effect, it is possible to increase the player's interest in which decorative pattern change the expectation level indicated by the display time of the smoke image is the expectation level for.

Although three smoke display performance patterns are shown in FIG. 175, the "sudden tank performance" may be executed using a table in which only smoke display performance pattern 01 and smoke display performance pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, the "sudden tank performance" may be executed using a table in which only smoke display performance pattern 01 and smoke display performance pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only smoke display performance pattern 02 and smoke display performance pattern 03 are executed.

Furthermore, as smoke display presentation pattern 04, a presentation pattern in which a destruction image and a smoke image are displayed for four seconds, followed by one second of only the destruction image, with a jackpot expectation rate of 100%, or as smoke display presentation pattern 05, a presentation pattern in which a destruction image and a smoke image are displayed for five seconds, followed by one second of only the destruction image, with a jackpot expectation rate of 100%, may be adopted. In this way, by adopting a presentation pattern with a long presentation execution period, the player can almost certainly notice that the expectation rate is 100%, making it possible to increase interest.

With reference to Figs. 174 to 182, an embodiment has been shown in which the longer the display time of the smoke image (specific display), the higher the likelihood of the special lottery resulting in a jackpot. Below, with reference to Figs. 183 to 190, an embodiment modified so that the shorter the display time of the specific display (the image of a destroyed enemy tank in the embodiment shown below) the higher the likelihood of the special lottery resulting in a jackpot. Note that descriptions of processes and displays that are the same as those before the modification may be omitted.

FIG. 183 shows the presentation patterns that can be selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for three seconds. After that, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second on top of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.
When the white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. After that, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second on top of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.
When the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second on top of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

The appearance rate of white flag display pattern 01 to white flag display pattern 03 is predetermined to indicate the likelihood that the variable display result will be a jackpot. When white flag display pattern 01 is executed, the likelihood is 30%, when white flag display pattern 02 is executed, the likelihood is 50%, and when white flag display pattern 03 is executed, the likelihood is 100%.

Figure 184 (b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 184 (c) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 184 (d) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which white flag display performance pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on operation of the attack button 3710.

Figure 185(b) shows an example of the display in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the performance examples shown in Figures 184(b) to 184(d). Figure 185(b) shows a state in which a shell is fired at an enemy tank, and an image of the shell exploding and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 185(b) ends in less than one second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in FIG. 185(c) appears. In this display state, the enemy tank's gun turret is destroyed and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Note that at this stage, the white flag image has not yet been displayed.

In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 184(b), by selecting white flag display presentation pattern 01, the display state shown in FIG. 185(c) is followed three seconds later by the display state shown in FIG. 185(d) in which the white flag image is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are changed to indicate that the expectation level is low.

In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 184(c), by selecting white flag display presentation pattern 02, the display state shown in FIG. 185(c) is reached and then two seconds later a white flag image is displayed (not shown). The line from "Colonel Dyna" that is displayed two seconds later is "The enemy's morale seems to be decent...". Here, the line from "Colonel Dyna" indicates that the level of expectation is medium.

In the example shown in FIG. 184(d), by selecting white flag display pattern 03, the display state shown in FIG. 185(c) is followed one second later by the display state shown in FIG. 185(e) in which the white flag image is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" are changed to indicate high expectations.

In this way, the longer the time (1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds) during which no white flag image is displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.
Therefore, the player will view the display area hoping that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna", which are displayed when the white flag image starts to be displayed, are displayed in accordance with each white flag display performance pattern. Therefore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" also suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. Since the lines of "Colonel Dyna" correspond to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, even if the player does not know the exact time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, the player can know the degree of expectation. This makes it possible to make even players who have a low level of concentration in the game and do not bother to check the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed feel the interest of the game.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, the image of a new enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 184(b), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. In the example shown in FIG. 184(c), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the example shown in FIG. 184(d), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. FIG. 185(f) is an example showing the state in which the image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the example of the effects shown in Figures 184(b) to 184(d), no further operation is performed on the attack button 3710, and the display of the decorative pattern changes ends at timing t14.

Fig. 186(a) shows a display state displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the performance examples shown in Fig. 184(b) to Fig. 184(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state of "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies the player that the jackpot has been reached.
Fig. 186(b) shows a display state displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the performance examples shown in Fig. 184(b) to Fig. 184(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state of "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the display mode is such that the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also notified that the result is a loss.

Referring to Figures 184(b) to 184(d), an example of the effect when an operation is received on the attack button 3710 at timing t3 is shown, but it is possible to receive an operation from the player at any timing between timing t0 and timing t14 and execute one of the white flag display effect patterns.

In addition, by accepting the player's operation multiple times, rather than just once, between timing t0 and timing t14, it is possible to execute the white flag display effect pattern multiple times.

Figures 184(e) to 184(g) show examples of effects when operation of the attack button 3710 is detected twice, at timings t3 and t8.
Figure 184 (e) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t3, and white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t8.
Figure 184 (f) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t3, and white flag display presentation pattern 02 starts at timing t8.
Figure 184 (g) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t3, and white flag display presentation pattern 03 starts at timing t8.
Even if the white flag display performance pattern is executed multiple times, each time the performance pattern is executed, a display similar to the performance example described with reference to Figures 184(b) to 184(d) is displayed.

If it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain white flag display effect pattern is being executed, the display state shown in FIG. 185(f) may continue for one second after the execution of the white flag display effect pattern ends, and then one of the white flag display effect patterns is automatically executed, leading to the display state shown in FIG. 185(b) and subsequent patterns. For example, when an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times within a short period (e.g., one second), three white flag display effect patterns will be executed automatically.

An example has been shown in which pre-reading performance pattern 01 is selected and an "sudden tank performance" is executed in one variable display, but below we will explain how the "sudden tank performance" is executed when pre-reading performance pattern 02 to pre-reading performance pattern 04 are selected.
In the "Sudden Tank Performance," the performance is carried out over a maximum of four changing displays, with the time required for one changing display being 14 seconds, and the time required for the display to stop changing being 1 second.

187 and 188, a description will be given of an example of a performance when the look-ahead performance pattern 02 is executed. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target for which the expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead performance is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second one is a miss. This point is the same for look-ahead performance pattern 03 and look-ahead performance pattern 04.
In addition, in the case of pre-reading performance patterns 02 to 04, when the display of a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank begins and ends during the changing display of the decorative pattern, a display similar to the performance examples described with reference to Figures 184 and 185 is displayed.

The following describes the display mode of the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative pattern is being statically displayed.
As shown in FIG. 187(a), if no operation is performed on the attack button 3710, the display state shown in FIG. 188(a) will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187 (b), when white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the performance using white flag display pattern 03 ends at timing t14, and the display state shown in Figure 188 (b) is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187 (c), when white flag display performance pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 188 (c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187 (d), when white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 188 (c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187 (e), when white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a white flag image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 188 (d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187 (f), when white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a white flag image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, resulting in the display state shown in Figure 188 (e) from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the display of new decorative symbols begins to change. The display of the decorative symbols at this time also begins in a display mode that creates a reach state, such as "3↓3."

With reference to FIG. 187, we have explained the display mode of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading performance stops. Below, with reference to FIG. 189, we will explain the display mode of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading performance stops.

All of Figures 189(b) to 189(f) show examples in which the execution period of the selected white flag display performance pattern overlaps with the stopped display period of the decorative pattern (timing t29 to timing t30). In the examples shown in Figures 189(b) to 189(f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display performance pattern, the white flag display performance pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in Figure 186(a) or Figure 186(b) will be displayed based on the special lottery results.

On the other hand, the white flag display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period only if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the jackpot game state starts from timing t30, but the opening state of the jackpot game is set from timing t30 to timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 starts from timing t35. Figures 190(b) to 190(f) show examples of effects in which a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the decorative pattern is stopped changing or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the currently executing white flag display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and if the result of the special lottery is a big win, the currently executing white flag display effect pattern may be interrupted without being executed for the predetermined execution period. This is to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a player feels dissatisfied because the result of the special lottery is a loss even though a highly anticipated effect has been executed, if the display of the image of the enemy tank destruction is interrupted.
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a miss and there is one or more reserved items, the next variable display starts from timing t30, but the "sudden tank presentation" is continued in the next variable display, and the "sudden tank presentation" is preferably ended in the middle of the variable display. By adopting such a configuration, the "sudden tank presentation" can be ended in a natural way that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.
Figures 190(b) to 190(f) show examples of presentations in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display starts.

The embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 183 to 190 can achieve the same effect as the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 175 to 182. Note that in the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 183 to 190, the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player watches the display performance while hoping that the display time of the destroyed enemy tank will be short.

Referring to Figures 174 to 190, an embodiment of the "sudden tank effect" has been shown, but the following modified embodiments may be used. Note that an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a smoke image are displayed will be described as an example, but a similar modification may be applied to an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a white flag image are displayed.

As shown in Figures 175 and 183, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for either 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A specified sound effect may be output during the period in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, sound effects of 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds may be prepared in advance, and the output of the sound effect of the same number of seconds may begin simultaneously with the start of the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effect may be configured to begin and end at the same timing.

On the other hand, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank may be modified to differ from the output time of the sound effect. For example, only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds may be prepared, and this sound effect may be output regardless of whether the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is 2, 3, or 4 seconds. With such a configuration, the player will not know the level of expectation unless they pay close attention to the display mode of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, which can add tension to the game. Note that only sound effects with an output time of 3 seconds or only sound effects with an output time of 2 seconds may be used.

A predetermined sound effect may be looped to output the sound. For example, a one-second sound effect may be played multiple times (two, three, four times) to match the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, a one-second sound effect may be played four times in succession to output the sound effect for four seconds. In this case, as above, although the display times differ, by outputting the sound effect a fixed number of times (fixed time), the player will not know the level of expectation unless they pay close attention to the display state of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, which can add tension to the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 175, the expected rate when smoke display performance pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 183, the expected rate when white flag display performance pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

This embodiment is configured so that the effect pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank being destroyed can be executed multiple times by referring to each effect pattern shown in FIG. 175 or FIG. 183 based on the player's operation, but a limit may be placed on the number of times that a high expectation effect pattern is executed. For example, the number of times that a smoke display effect pattern 03 or a white flag display effect pattern 03, which have a jackpot expectation rate of 100%, is executed during one "sudden tank effect" may be limited to once. Similarly, the number of times that an effect pattern with an expectation rate of 0% as described above is executed may be limited to once. With this configuration, a sense of tension can be created in the game because the player carefully observes whether or not a high expectation (or low expectation) effect pattern is executed.

As shown in Fig. 177 and Fig. 185, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern (during variable display and static display), the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an undestroyed enemy tank, and the image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed relatively small in the display area, but at least one of these may be displayed larger. For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed variably at the size shown in Fig. 139(b) and Fig. 139(c). In this case, a display mode in which these images overlap may be adopted. In this case, the display priority may be set to the highest for the image of an undestroyed enemy tank and the image of a destroyed enemy tank, followed by the simulated image of the attack button 3710, and the decorative pattern (during variable display and static display). In addition, the display priority may be further lowered for the image of the player's tank, the dialogue image, and background images such as roads.

By configuring it in this way, even if the decorative patterns (during variable display and static display), the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the image of an undestroyed enemy tank or the image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed overlapping each other, the visibility of the images of the undestroyed enemy tank and the destroyed enemy tank is not obstructed by the decorative patterns or the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. Therefore, the timing of the start and end of the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank becomes clear, preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the player has a mistaken understanding of the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, i.e., the degree of expectation.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the image of the enemy tank is always destroyed and displayed by operating the attack button 3710, the difficulty level may be increased so that the image of the enemy tank is displayed in a destroyed state. In this case, the display conditions for the operation of the operation unit in the above-mentioned embodiment may be adopted. For example, a lottery may be held when the attack button 3710 is operated, and if a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/2) is obtained, the image of the enemy tank is destroyed and displayed. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when a specific condition is met, the difficulty level of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank can be increased, and the player can feel a sense of tension, as he or she does not know when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed, even if the attack button 3710 is operated.

In the above embodiment, an example of a performance in which an image of a destroyed tank is displayed for a different time than usual in the "sudden tank performance" when the expectation of a jackpot is 100%, that is, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (a performance example when smoke display performance pattern 03 or white flag display performance pattern 03 is selected) is shown, but other game values that are beneficial to the player may be similarly suggested in addition to suggesting a jackpot. For example, as described above, the "sudden tank performance" may be executed in a failure variation that triggers a switch from a normal game state to a time-saving game state in which time saving is granted, by winning a symbol that grants time saving, or by executing a predetermined number of failure variations from the time of power-on or the previous win. In this case, the various effects described in the above embodiment can be similarly achieved, since they are common in that a time-saving game state is granted instead of a win as a beneficial benefit to the player.

In the above embodiment, the "sudden tank effect" indicates the expectation of a jackpot, but the "sudden tank effect" may be configured to indicate the type of benefit to be given to the player. For example, the benefit to be given to the player may indicate whether a time-saving state or a high probability state will be given after the decorative pattern changes to a jackpot, or whether it is likely to be given (for example, what is the expected percentage of the high probability state). Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can transition to a time-saving state or a high probability state after the decorative pattern changes without going through a jackpot state, it may indicate whether a time-saving state or a high probability state will be given after the decorative pattern changes, or whether it is likely to be given (for example, what is the expected percentage of the high probability state).

In this way, the "sudden tank effect" can increase the excitement of the gaming machine.

In the past, there were effects that required the player to operate the operation unit (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). In such effects, a predetermined effect display is displayed whether the player operates the operation unit or not, so there was little sense of tension in operating the operation unit. In particular, even if a complex operation mode is required, it is ultimately just a pretense, and a predetermined effect is simply performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player on the operation unit, so there was a risk that executing such an effect would actually reduce the player's interest in the effect display. Thus, there was room for improvement in conventional gaming machines in terms of effectively using the operation on the operation unit to increase interest in the game. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, a gaming machine that can make the player feel tense about the operation mode performed by the player on the operation unit and thereby suppress a decrease in interest in the game will be described.

In the embodiment described below, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720, and depending on whether the player can tilt the left lever 3720 in a specified direction and angle and maintain that state, the special display will either not be impeded from being viewed or will be impeded from being viewed (cannot be viewed or will be difficult to view).

Below, an embodiment of a "full power breakthrough reach" in which the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 within a specified range will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 191 and the display examples shown in FIG. 192 and FIG. 193. Note that FIG. 192 shows a display example when appropriate operation is performed as shown in FIG. 191(a). Also, FIG. 193 shows a display example when appropriate operation is not performed as shown in FIG. 191(b).

At timing t5, a reach presentation state occurs. In a "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", a speed display window showing the speed of the player's tank is displayed above the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna". The display within the speed display window changes depending on the manner in which the player operates the left lever 3720. Images of decorative patterns, roads, and the player's tank are displayed in the same manner as in other embodiments. Figures 192(a) and 193(a) show examples of the display at timing t5 when the reach presentation state occurs.

At timing t5, the effective operation period of the left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 140, by operating the left lever 3720, it is possible to change the left-right position and speed of the player's tank. The effective operation period of the left lever 3720 continues until timing t34, which is the timing at which the decorative pattern stops changing.

At timing t7, a state is created in which a cannonball is coming from behind the player's tank. This state continues for four seconds until timing t11. During this period, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed to the left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna." The simulated image is also labeled "lean forward," which indicates the manner in which the left lever 3720 is operated.
Figures 192(b) and 193(b) show display examples at timing t7.

Below, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 191(a) and the display example shown in FIG. 192. Also, below, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 191(b) and the display example shown in FIG. 193.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player must tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a specified angle for a specified period of time. Specifically, the left lever 3720 must be held between 10 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for two seconds. By performing this operation, the player's tank is displayed accelerating and moving in the display area. Figure 192(c) shows an example of a display in which the player's tank has accelerated sufficiently at timing t9.

The time chart shown in FIG. 191(a) shows a state in which the player is able to tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At timing t11, the display of the operation instructions for the left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 192(d) shows an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t15 when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient or the angle at which it is operated is insufficient, a display will be displayed showing a shell fired from an enemy tank hitting the player's tank and exploding.

The time chart in FIG. 191(b) shows an example of a performance in which the left lever 3720 is operated for only one second, from timing t8 to timing t9, during the valid operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, the speed of the player's tank is not sufficient. Therefore, from timing t11, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, an image of smoke generated by an exploding shell begins to be displayed around the image of the player's tank.

The display state shown in FIG. 193(c) shows an example of a display when the speed of the player's tank is insufficient at timing t9. Also, FIG. 193(d) shows an example of a display in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15 because the speed of the player's tank is not sufficient.

In addition, in FIG. 192(c) and FIG. 192(d), the state in which the text "30 km/h" is displayed as the speed of the player's tank is shown. In addition, in FIG. 193(c) and FIG. 193(d), the state in which the text "20 km/h" is displayed as the speed of the player's tank is shown. In this way, if an appropriate operation is performed with the left lever 3720 while the operation instructions are displayed, the display in the speed display window is 30 km/h or more, and if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instructions are displayed, or if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instructions are displayed, the display in the speed display window is less than 30 km/h. Specifically, the time from when the left lever 3720 reaches the appropriate angle is measured, and the speed display of the player's tank is increased by 1 km/h every 0.1 seconds. With this configuration, the player can recognize whether the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is appropriate or whether the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately by looking at the display in the speed display window.

From timing t15 to timing t24, a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves forward. Even if a smoke image is displayed due to an explosion of a shell from an enemy force, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t15. Figures 192(e) and 193(e) show examples of a display effect in which the player's tank moves forward from timing t15 to timing t24. Note that the speed in the speed display window that has been changed in response to the operation of the left lever 3720 may be set to "10 km/h" at a predetermined timing between the timing when the display of the smoke image ends (timing t15) and the timing when the operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 is again given (timing t24).

In this embodiment, the speed of the tank can be changed in response to the operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from timing t5 to timing t34. Therefore, during the period when no operation instruction display is being shown, the player can practice changing the speed of the tank by operating the left lever 3720. In this case, it is recommended that the speed display window display be set to "10 km/h" when the speed instruction display starts.

At timing t24, images of multiple enemy tanks are displayed in the upper part of the display area. The images of multiple enemy tanks move leftward in the upper part of the display area and are displayed until timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed, and display of operating instructions for the left lever 3720 begins. Display of operating instructions for the left lever 3720 continues until timing t32.

Between timing t24 and timing t32, the player must tilt the left lever 3720 forward at a predetermined angle for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the left lever 3720 must be held at a position between 30 and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for four seconds. By performing this operation, the display area shows the player's tank accelerating and moving at a maximum speed of 50 km/h.

The time chart shown in FIG. 191(a) shows a state in which the player is able to tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At timing t32, the display of the operation instructions for the left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 192(g) shows an example display from timing t32 to timing t34 when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Figure 192 (h) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient, the angle of tilt is insufficient, or the direction of tilt is incorrect, a display will be displayed showing that the player's tank has collided with the enemy tank and the player's tank has exploded.

The time chart in FIG. 191(b) shows a state in which the left lever 3720 is tilted appropriately for only two seconds, from timing t25 to timing t27, during the effective operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, the speed of the player's tank is not sufficient. Therefore, from timing t32, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, an image of smoke generated by a collision with an enemy tank starts to be displayed around the image of the player's tank.

Figure 193(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the acceleration of the player's tank is insufficient. Also, Figure 193(h) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

The display examples shown in Figures 192 and 193 are for when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, but the same display is also made when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the numbers "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

Thus, according to the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" of this embodiment, if the player fails to operate the left lever 3720 in the appropriate operating manner, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative pattern is obstructed by the smoke image. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative pattern, and the player will be conscious of operating appropriately from the next time onwards. On the other hand, if the player operates the left lever 3720 in the appropriate operating manner, the player will be able to see the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative pattern without its visibility being obstructed, and will feel a sense of satisfaction for having completed the tense operation.

In this embodiment, operation instructions are displayed for the left lever 3720 twice, once from timing t7 to timing t11 and once from timing t24 to timing t32, and display effects are displayed according to the operation mode during both periods.
At this time, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 requires a longer operation time and has a narrower operating angle range at the later timings compared to the first timing, which provides the player with a more tense operation mode.

Fig. 191(c) shows an embodiment which is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 191(a) and Fig. 191(b). In this embodiment, the display time of the smoke image when it is displayed due to a shell from an enemy tank is extended so that the smoke image is displayed until the enemy tanks are displayed.
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed until timing t27. In such a configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) overlaps with a part of the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) during which the second operation instruction is displayed.
At this time, it is preferable that the smoke image hides a part or all of the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720. Similarly, it is preferable that the lines of "Colonel Dinah" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and the speed display window are hidden a part or all of the same.
With this configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) when the first operation instruction is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize the operating mode during the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) when the second operation instruction is displayed, thereby making it possible to further increase the sense of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

The length of time for which the smoke image is displayed when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately may also be determined by lottery. For example, the length of time for which the smoke image is displayed may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image will be displayed for a minimum of 4 seconds from timing t11 to timing t15, and for a maximum of 24 seconds from timing t11 to timing t35. In particular, when the maximum display period is selected, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the center of the display area will be rendered difficult or impossible to see by the smoke image, regardless of the manner in which the left lever 3720 is operated the second time.

The technical ideas related to the "Sudden Tank Effect" shown with reference to Figures 174 to 190 may be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach." For example, the display time of the smoke image in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" may be configured to differ depending on whether a jackpot state or a time-saving state occurs.

An example has been given in which a smoke image is displayed if the player fails to perform the appropriate operation while the operation instructions are displayed, but rather than always displaying these images, the system may be configured to display these images with a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/2 probability) if the player fails to perform the appropriate operation.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a miss, a smoke image may be displayed with a predetermined probability (e.g., a probability of 3/4), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a smoke image may not be displayed.
In addition, the color and shape of the smoke image may be provided in a plurality of patterns, and the display pattern of the displayed smoke image may indicate the expectation of the special lottery result.

Another embodiment, which is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 191 etc., will be described with reference to FIG. 194 and FIG. 195. FIG. 194 is a time chart in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 195 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, instead of displaying a group of tanks, a minefield is displayed on the road along which the player's tank is traveling from timing t24 to timing t29. Figure 195(a) shows an example of the display at timing t29, when the minefield display begins. From timing t24 to timing t29, the player's tank is displayed approaching the minefield.

At timing t26, acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid. The valid operation period of the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, it continues until timing t29. During the valid operation period of the mission button 3700, a mock image of the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dinah". Figure 195 (b) shows an example of the display at timing t26 when the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 194(c), if the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period (timing t28), a display of the player's tank jumping over an advancing minefield is displayed for three seconds. FIG. 195(c) shows an example of a display at the timing (e.g., timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period and the display of the player's tank jumping ends. This display continues until timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Figure 195 (d) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

Figure 194 (d) shows an example of the effect when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. In this case, from timing t29, which is the timing when the valid operation period ends, to timing t35, a smoke image with a higher display priority than the player's tank is displayed, and an effect is displayed in which the player's tank enters a minefield and is enveloped in smoke. Figure 195 (e) shows an example of the display from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is displayed as still. Figure 195(f) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed as still. At this time, the decorative pattern displayed as still in the center of the display area is hidden by the smoke image.

In this way, if the mission button 3700 is operated appropriately, the visibility of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is not impeded, but if the mission button 3700 is not operated appropriately, the visibility of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is impeded by the smoke image. This makes the player feel even more tense when operating the mission button 3700.

The modified example shown in FIG. 191(c) may also be applied to the embodiment shown in FIG. 195. In this case, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the player to operate the mission button 3700, and the display of the player's tank jumping are made difficult or impossible to see due to smoke images generated by shells from enemy tanks. This increases the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720.

Thus, according to the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" of this embodiment, depending on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within a predetermined operating range, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery (or the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700, or the performance display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image, which causes the player to operate the left lever 3720 with a sense of tension, creating a motivation to actively operate the left lever 3720 and increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above example, a smoke image is displayed with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability) when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately, but the probability of displaying a smoke image may be different depending on the operation content when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately. For example, if the tilt direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operation time is shorter than a predetermined time, the shorter the operation time, the more likely the smoke image is to be displayed. Also, if no operation is performed or an operation is performed in the opposite direction to the instructed operation, the smoke image may be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100%.

The visibility of the operation instruction image, decorative patterns, etc. may be made completely invisible by the smoke image, or may be made partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a semi-transparent image may be used as the smoke image, and the operation instruction image, decorative patterns, etc. may be configured to be vaguely visible through the semi-transparent smoke image. With such a configuration, the visibility of the operation instruction image and decorative patterns is guaranteed to a certain degree.

A display effect (such as displaying a specified character image) with a 100% expectation rate and a very low probability of appearing may be configured to be executable, and the timing at which this display effect is executed may be the timing at which a smoke image is displayed. Also, the display effect may be configured to be partially or entirely invisible or difficult to see due to the smoke image. In this case, there may be cases where the display effect is obscured by the smoke image, which is a very unfortunate gaming situation for the player. Such a configuration can maintain a greater sense of tension for the player in operating the operating means.

Although the smoke image impedes the visibility of the reach state of the decorative pattern, the display time of the smoke image may be set so that the display of the smoke image ends before the decorative pattern is stopped. For example, the display of the smoke image may be configured to end at timing t34, and not to display the smoke image during the period from timing t34 to timing t35. With this configuration, the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is not impeded by the smoke image, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the result of the special lottery for a loss when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed indicates a jackpot, or for a loss when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed indicates a jackpot.

Alternatively, even if a smoke image is displayed, the visibility of the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may or may not be hindered. For example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 may be executed, and the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may or may not be hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, if the time during which the left lever 3720 is tilted is less than half the required operation time, the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may remain hidden by the smoke image, and if the time during which the left lever 3720 is tilted is more than half the required operation time, the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t34). With such a configuration, the player will operate the left lever 3720 with more tension.

The display of the decorative pattern may be configured so that the display of the decorative pattern is made invisible or difficult to see over a number of times by using a smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be set to 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns. Alternatively, the above-mentioned lottery method for determining the display time of the smoke image may be modified so that the display time of the smoke image is determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds. In addition, it is preferable to configure the display of such a smoke image to be performed with a high probability (99/100 probability) when the operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 is ignored twice (timing t7 to timing t11, timing t24 to timing t32) and the left lever 3720 is not tilted.
In this case, during the period when the decorative pattern is displayed in a varying manner (timing t32 to timing t34) and during the period when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stationary manner (timing t34 to timing t35), the decorative pattern etc. will be hidden by the smoke image, hindering visibility, and further, the visibility of the decorative pattern varying display and the decorative pattern stationary display which commence after timing t35 may each be hindered by the smoke image multiple times.
In this case, in order to achieve consistency in the presentation, it is advisable to configure the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" to continue after timing t35. In this case, the player will be required to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Furthermore, in this manner, when the display of the smoke image spans the changing display of the decorative pattern, the operation of the left lever 3720 is not invalidated even while the decorative pattern is stopped changing or immediately after the changing display has started (between timing t0 and timing t5), but the valid operation period may be configured to continue across multiple changing displays 7, and a performance display (such as a change in the speed display in the speed display window) based on the acceptance of the operation of the left lever 3720 may be performed at any time.

In the figure, the speed of the player's tank is displayed in the display area, but the direction in which the left lever 3720 is tilted and the angle at which it is tilted may also be displayed. Alternatively, when an instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is being given, the display may be configured to display the elapsed time since the left lever 3720 was tilted at the required angle. With this configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is being operated within an appropriate range and how many seconds the left lever 3720 has been operated within the appropriate range.

Although examples have been shown in which a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed and an operation instruction is displayed by the lines of "Colonel Dyna," instead of or in addition to this presentation pattern, a presentation pattern may be configured to be executable in which the left lever 3720 is required to be tilted without clear operation instruction displayed by such an image. For example, an enemy tank approaching from behind may be displayed as if a shell is being fired from the rear, allowing the player to spontaneously tilt the left lever 3720 without an operation instruction being displayed. By configuring in this way so that more difficult game situations can occur, the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720 can be increased.

There are cases where the player cannot properly recognize whether the left lever 3720 is being properly maintained within a predetermined operation range. Therefore, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built into the left lever 3720. For example, when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is moved into the appropriate operation range by the operation by the player, the vibration source may be vibrated for 0.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be started when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is moved into the appropriate operation range, the vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued while the operation range of the left lever 3720 is located within the appropriate operation range, and the vibration of the vibration source may be terminated when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is outside the appropriate range.

In addition, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is being performed appropriately) is shown by the display content in the speed display window, but it may be configured so that the operation mode is displayed in some cases and the operation mode is displayed in other cases. For example, it may be configured so that the speed of the player's tank is hidden by a smoke image in the speed display window. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player will operate the left lever 3720 with a greater sense of tension.

Although an example of tilting the left lever 3720 forward has been shown, in order to increase the difficulty of the operation, the range in which the lever should be operated can be limited to only about 30 degrees forward (for example, a range of 25 degrees to 35 degrees), and when the lever is completely tilted forward 45 degrees, there is a certain probability (1/2 probability) that smoke will come out of the tank's engine, and a smoke image as shown in FIG. 193(d) or FIG. 193(g) will be displayed, and the image of the tank and the operation instruction display can be hidden by this smoke image. In this case, a more difficult operation is required of the player, and it is possible to further increase the sense of tension. Note that when such an embodiment is adopted, it is possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to an appropriate range at any time during the period in which the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 194 and 195, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, a smoke image is displayed, hindering the visibility of the operation instructions of the mission button 3700. Also, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the visibility of the performance display (the display mode in which the player's tank jumps) corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 is hindered by the smoke image. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720.

Furthermore, an operation-responsive image showing the expectation level of the special lottery result being a jackpot may be displayed depending on the type of display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the display mode of the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation mode of the mission button 3700, the type of the lines themselves, and the type of display mode of the player's tank jumping when the mission button 3700 is operated. With this configuration, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within an appropriate operation range, the visibility of the display showing the expectation level may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image. Therefore, a player who wants to know the expectation level will naturally operate the left lever 3720 with a sense of tension, which increases the interest.
144 to 148 may be applied to the display modes of the images of shells fired by enemy forces, the simulated images of the left lever 3720, the simulated images of the mission buttons 3700, the images of enemy tanks, and the images of minefields in the "full-power breakthrough reach". For example, the display modes of these images in the "full-power breakthrough reach" may be configured to indicate the expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot state or a time-saving state. Furthermore, the technical ideas related to the shield image in the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to the smoke image in the "full-power breakthrough reach".

After the operation of the left lever 3720 is completed, the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested. However, the operation of the mission button 3700 may be requested while the operation of the left lever 3720 is being requested. By configuring in this way, the difficulty of operating the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 increases, and the player's sense of tension can be further increased. When both operation instruction displays are performed simultaneously, it is preferable to display them in a manner that does not overlap each other. For example, it is preferable to display the simulated image of the left lever 3720 and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 in the display mode shown in FIG. 192(b) in a manner that does not overlap each other. When the area available for display in the display area is insufficient, it is preferable to display one of the simulated image of the left lever 3720 and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 in the display mode shown in FIG. 192(b) in such a manner that both are overlapped with each other, with one of them being displayed in the foreground and the other being displayed in the background, while allowing a part of the simulated image displayed in the background to be visible.

However, if the difficulty level is too high, players who are not good at complex operations may avoid playing. Therefore, an auto reception mode may be adopted in which the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation is executed even if the player does not perform any operation, and the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation is executed even if the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700 is not operated. In this case, the player only needs to concentrate on operating the operation unit that is not in the auto reception mode.
It is preferable to set the auto-acceptance mode to only the operation of the left lever 3720, to only the operation of the mission button 3700, or to set the auto-acceptance mode to both the operation of the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700.
In particular, when only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only needs to concentrate on skillfully operating the left lever 3720, which can prevent the occurrence of situations in which a player who is not accustomed to the "full-power breakthrough reach" becomes confused. Also, when both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 are set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only needs to concentrate on visually checking the effects without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700.

In addition to the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730 may also be configured to be operable. For example, in the operation of the right lever 3730, the condition for executing the performance mode may be that the right lever 3730 is tilted within a predetermined tilt range for a predetermined period of time, similar to the left lever 3720. For example, a performance display may be displayed in which dust comes out of the caterpillar, representing the state in which the player's tank is accelerating. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display so that an image (simulation image, etc.) instructing the operation of the right lever 3730 is not displayed.
In this way, the right lever 3730 may be set to a performance mode that makes the performance display based on the operation of the left lever 3720 look luxurious. For this reason, no operation instruction display is performed, and the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730 does not suggest the degree of expectation.
It is advisable to make the effective operation period of the right lever 3730 coincide with the effective operation period of the left lever 3720 .
This configuration allows a player who is tired of operating the left lever to maintain a higher sense of tension.

Furthermore, it is advisable to place the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 in positions that make it difficult to operate them simultaneously with one hand, that make it impossible to operate them (positions where operation is impossible), and that make it difficult to reach them. In other words, since one operation part is operated with one hand, the sense of tension in the game can be further increased.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the three operating parts, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700, can be operated simultaneously, and in such cases, a great sense of tension can be created in operating each operating part.
In the operation unit shown in Fig. 137, the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720 are spaced apart with the attack button 3710 provided between them, making it extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation units with one hand. On the other hand, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions of the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 may be interchanged. In this case, the defense button 3740 will be located between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, making it extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation units with one hand.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the left lever 3720 is used for a specific effect, the right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720. Both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be configured to be operable, and when an operation on either lever satisfies the above-mentioned conditions, the above-mentioned display effect or the like may be executed.

In this way, the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" in this embodiment can increase the sense of tension when operating the control unit.

Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known to produce an effect in which one operating unit is pressed. In this case, by providing multiple operating units and using the operating units for the effect, it is possible to increase interest in the game (for example, JP 2011-087638 A). Furthermore, if operations on multiple operating units are enabled simultaneously, it is possible to further increase interest in the game. On the other hand, for players who want a simple game, the requirement for such complex operating modes can be tedious and stressful, and there is a risk that this could lead to a decrease in interest. Below, we will explain a gaming machine that satisfies players with different preferences and does not decrease interest in any case.

In the "AI Tank Reach" of this embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may become active simultaneously at a specific timing during the display performance, but the player can set whether or not to display each of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, which indicates an instruction to operate the attack button 3710, and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, which indicates an instruction to operate the mission button 3700.
The player can select and set in advance one of four settings (presentation situations): a first setting (first presentation situation) in which both a simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 and a simulated image that mimics the mission button 3700 are displayed; a second setting (second presentation situation) in which only a simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 is displayed; a third setting (third presentation situation) in which only a simulated image that mimics the mission button 3700 is displayed; and a fourth setting (fourth presentation situation) in which neither a simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710 nor a simulated image that mimics the mission button 3700 is displayed.
The player can select the setting during the demo in which the decorative symbols are not changing by using the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, etc. When the power is turned on without the player making a selection, the first setting is selected by default.

When the effective operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 occurs during the changing display of the decorative pattern, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the setting selected by the player. For example, if the player selects the third setting, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

Below, with reference to Figures 196 to 201 etc., we will explain examples of the display of "AI Tank Reach" depending on whether the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated when the first to fourth settings are made.

FIG. 196(a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which a first setting (first performance situation) is made and a simulated image that resembles an attack button 3710 and a simulated image that resembles a mission button 3700 are displayed.
Figure 198 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 196 (a) and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating a mission button 3700 are displayed.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 196(a), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Fig. 198(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, lines from "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are displayed instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700. Also, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 start. Also, during the effective operation periods of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. FIG. 198(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 each continue for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is performed in which a shell is fired from the gun of the player's tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 198(c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 198(d) shows an example of a display in which an image of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are displayed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, a performance display is performed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 198(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 198(f) shows an example of a display in which an image of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the shells or bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards and disappear from the display area.
Incidentally, even after timing t23, the same display effect as that executed after timing t8 is performed.

Figure 196 (b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which a second setting (second performance situation) is made, and a simulated image imitating an attack button 3710 is displayed, but a simulated image imitating a mission button 3700 is not displayed.
Figure 199 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 196 (b), and shows a display state in which the second setting is made and a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed but a simulated image of the mission button 3700 is not displayed.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 196(b), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Fig. 199(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, a line from "Sergeant Might" is displayed instructing the player to operate the attack button 3710. Also, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 begin. Also, during the effective operation periods of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. FIG. 199(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is performed in which a shell is fired from the gun of the player's tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 199(c) shows an example display of a shell moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 199(d) shows an example display of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a performance display is performed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 199(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 199(f) shows an example of a performance display in which an image of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the shells or bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards and disappear from the display area.
Incidentally, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

Figure 197 (a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the third setting (third performance situation) is made, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
Figure 200 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 197 (a), and shows a display state in which the third setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 197(a), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Fig. 200(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, a line from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed instructing the player to operate the mission button 3700. Also, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 begin. Also, during the effective operation periods of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but the simulated image of the mission button 3700 is displayed. FIG. 200(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is performed in which a shell is fired from the gun of the player's tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 200(c) shows an example display of a shell moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 200(d) shows an example display of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, a performance display is performed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 200(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 200(f) shows an example of a performance display in which an image of the bullet exploding after hitting the enemy tank is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the shells or bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards and disappear from the display area.
Incidentally, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

Figure 197 (b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth performance situation) is made and neither the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
Figure 201 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 197 (b) and shows a display state in which the fourth setting has been made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

In the time chart shown in Fig. 197(b), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Fig. 201(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Additionally, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 begin. Additionally, during the effective operation periods of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), no simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is displayed. FIG. 201(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is performed in which a shell is fired from the gun of the player's tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 201(c) shows an example display of a shell moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 201(d) shows an example display of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding. The display of the movement of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a performance display is performed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes when it hits the enemy tank. Fig. 201(e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 201(f) shows an example of a performance display in which an image of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the shells or bullets will not be displayed moving or exploding, and the enemy tank will move backwards and disappear from the display area.
Incidentally, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

The effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the effective operation period of the mission button 3700 are the same. At this time, a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is displayed in accordance with the setting selected by the player. In response to the display of these simulated images, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" also change to indicate the mode of operation instructions. When an operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the effective operation period ends. For this reason, when an operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, no effect display corresponding to an operation of the other operation section is performed.

It is preferable to configure the display mode so that the expectation degree of the big win is suggested by the display mode such as the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the exploding shell, etc. In this case, it is preferable to apply the suggestion mode of various expectation degrees in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to Figures 144 to 148 to the display performance in this embodiment.
The display mode of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the image of an exploding bullet may be similar to the display mode of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the image of an exploding shell.

In this way, according to the "AI Tank Reach" of this embodiment, a presentation situation in which a simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed and a presentation situation in which a simulated image simulating the operation unit is not displayed are realized based on the player's will, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Although an example has been shown in which the player can select from the first to fourth settings, an operating section (such as a dip switch or button) that allows the setting to be selected may be provided on the rear of the door frame 3, allowing the setting to be changed by a staff member of the gaming establishment with the door of the door frame 3 open. With such a configuration, the settings can be changed as appropriate depending on the customer demographics of the gaming establishment, the location of the establishment, the number of days since installation, etc., to provide the player with an optimal gaming environment. Note that the settings made by the gaming establishment are only valid when the gaming machine is powered on, and the settings may be changed by the player thereafter.

The game may be configured so that the first setting, which does not restrict the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, and any one of the second setting to the fourth setting, which restrict the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, are alternately switched by the operation of a predetermined operation unit (e.g., the defense button 3740) that can be operated by the player, are switched. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, the game may be configured so that the game is switched to the first setting by operating the defense button 3740 once, and the game is configured so that the game is switched to the second setting again by operating the defense button 3740 once more. Note that if the player has selected the first setting, the first setting will remain selected even if the defense button 3740 is operated. For example, the game may be configured so that the game is switched when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t14) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, during the valid operation period (the period during which a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed), the setting may be configured not to be switched.
With this configuration, it becomes possible to quickly switch to a setting in which simulated images of both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed.

If the player can change the settings with a simple operation, a situation may arise where the player feels dissatisfied because the settings change when the player presses a button by mistake. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted that prevents the settings from being changed easily. For example, the configuration may be such that the settings are changed when certain conditions related to the operation are met, such as holding down the defense button 3740 for three seconds.

If a non-play state continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 minutes), and the setting is one of the second to fourth settings, the setting may be automatically changed to the first setting, which is the default setting. This configuration can prevent players who have started playing from feeling uncomfortable because the setting has changed.

Although an example has been shown in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated simultaneously and the valid operation period of the other button ends when either button is operated, it is also possible to configure so that the valid operation period of the other button does not end even when either button is operated. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, it is preferable to configure so that the performance display corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 (display of shell firing, movement, and explosion) starts, and then the performance display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (display of bullet firing, movement, and explosion) starts.

It may be configured so that there may be cases where only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid, and cases where only the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image of the button whose operation is valid based on the settings. Alternatively, it may be configured so that a simulated image of the operation means whose operation is valid is displayed, regardless of the settings. When there is only one operation means whose operation is valid, it is expected that the player will not have much difficulty operating the button, so it is beneficial to adopt such a method.

Rather than making the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 operable at the same time, for example, one operation part may be enabled when the other operation part is enabled. In this case as well, it is advisable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image that resembles the operation part based on the settings.

After the mission button 3700 becomes operable, the attack button 3710 may be made operable. Here, when an image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (an image of a moving bullet) is displayed, if the attack button 3710 is made operable, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may not be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an excessive amount of information, and reduce the stress that the player may feel.

Before or simultaneously with the occurrence of the valid operation period, a sound effect indicating that the valid operation period has started or is in the valid operation period may be output. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output at a timing before the valid operation period starts (from timing t7 to timing t8, or from timing t22 to timing t23). Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the valid operation period occurs (from timing t8 to timing t9, or from timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, if the setting is such that the simulated image of the operation unit is not displayed even when the valid operation period has occurred, it is preferable to configure the game so that the sound effect indicating that the valid operation period has occurred is not output for that operation unit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling confused. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure the game so that, when an operation is performed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being reduced.

Depending on the selected setting, a presentation state in which one simulated image of a button is displayed, or a presentation state in which two simulated images of buttons are displayed, may occur. In this case, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than when two simulated images are displayed.
By adopting such a configuration, the display area can be effectively utilized. Also, players who do not select the display of multiple simulated images may be elderly and may not even notice that a simulated image has been displayed. However, by displaying the simulated image in a large size like this, the players can notice that their operation has been effective, and this more appropriately prevents the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in a first presentation situation in which a third operation unit (defense button 3740) is used and both the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and the second operation unit (mission button 3700) are capable of accepting operations and both a simulated image of the first operation unit (display relating to operation of the first operation unit) and a simulated image of the second operation unit (display relating to operation of the second operation unit) are displayed, a special display may be made to appear based on the player operating the third operation unit, making it difficult to see both the displayed simulated image of the first operation unit and the simulated image of the second operation unit.
For a player who operates the third operation unit in a situation where the first operation unit or the second operation unit should be operated, this special display makes it possible to suggest to the player that the operation is incorrect. Note that, since a player who operates the third operation unit in a situation where the simulated images of the first operation unit and the second operation unit are clearly displayed is considered to be intentionally performing such an action, it is preferable that the condition for the appearance of the special display to be displayed to such an intentional player is not limited to the operation of the third operation unit, but that the special display is displayed when the third operation unit is operated and the operation time of the third operation unit satisfies a special condition of a predetermined number of seconds or more.

In this way, the "AI Tank Reach" in this embodiment can prevent players from becoming confused by the effects related to the display mode of the simulated image.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a special premonition before an operation on the operation unit becomes valid, suggesting that the operation will be valid, and then displays a simulated image of the operation unit that imitates the operation unit, indicating that the operation on the operation unit is valid during the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid, prompting the player to operate the operation unit, and suggests the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot based on the operation on the operation unit (for example, JP 2011-125549 A).

By performing such a special premonition effect, the player is informed that the operation on the operation unit may be effective.
However, for some players, the use of such premonition effects can distract them, and their attention may be distracted from the display of the operation section simulation image, which indicates that the operation of the operation section has been effective, or from the operation of the operation section itself, which can result in them not having enough time to deal with the display of the operation section simulation image or to operate the operation section.
For example, some experienced players prefer to concentrate on operating the control unit rather than visually checking the premonition effects and enjoying them as such. This is because, while the player merely visually checks the premonition effects, the player concentrates on operating the control unit with the hope of hitting the jackpot of his or her own will. However, there is a risk that such concentration will be disturbed by the premonition effects that are performed before the effective period begins.
On the other hand, players with little gaming experience may not be able to understand the meaning of various effects, including premonition effects, and may not notice that a simulated image of the control unit has been displayed, indicating that an operation on the control unit has been effective, and may not be able to operate the control unit, thereby missing an opportunity to intervene in the effect.

In this way, premonition effects that are relatively unimportant to the player may prevent the player from concentrating on operating the operation unit, which is relatively important to the player, or may cause the player to fail to notice the display of the operation unit simulation image, which indicates that the operation of the operation unit has been effective.
In the embodiment described below, the visibility of the premonition effects can be reduced at the player's own will, and an example is shown in which a simulated image of the operation section is displayed to indicate that the operation of the operation section has been effective, allowing the player to concentrate on operating the operation section.

Hereinafter, an embodiment that is a modification of the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIG. 144 etc. will be described with reference to FIGS. 202, 203, 204 etc.
Fig. 203 is a diagram showing a time chart in this embodiment. Fig. 202 and Fig. 204 are diagrams showing display examples in the display area.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set the display mode of the premonition effect during the demo. When a predetermined time (e.g., 3 minutes) has elapsed during which the decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 139(a) is not displayed in a variable manner, it is determined that no game is being played, and control is performed to transition to the display state shown in FIG. 202(a). FIG. 202(a) shows an example of display during a demo. In addition, when the attack button 3710 is pressed from the display state shown in FIG. 139 or the display state shown in FIG. 202(a), the display state changes to that shown in FIG. 202(b). As shown in FIGS. 202(a) to 202(c), in this case, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the upper left of the display area, smaller than when it is displayed in a variable manner.

Figure 202 (b) shows a display state in which the display mode of the premonition effects can be set. In this state, by operating the left lever 3720 left or right, one of the settings "normal display", "small display", or "not display" can be selected. The frame corresponding to the selected setting is displayed in a thicker color. The player is also shown how to select the setting by the lines displayed in the "Sergeant Might" lines window. Note that when the gaming machine is turned on, "normal display" is automatically selected.

Fig. 202(c) shows the display state in which "normal display" has been selected and "small display" has been selected by tilting the left lever 3720 to the right. In this state, operating the attack button 3710 again returns the display state shown in Fig. 202(a). At the same time, the setting selected by the player (in this case, the setting to display the premonition effects small) is stored in the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, the player can select one of the display settings which differ in the visibility of the premonition effects.
Even if the player selects "Do not display," the same display and the selected setting contents are stored.

Next, the display mode when the premonition effect is executed will be described with reference to Figures 203 and 204. Figure 203(a) shows the changing state of the decorative pattern and the operation acceptance state of the attack button 3710 (whether the operation acceptance is valid or invalid). Figures 203(b) and 203(c) show the display state of the cheering line image, attack button simulation image, enemy tank image, etc. when "normal display" is selected. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the cheering line image functions as the premonition effect. Figures 204(a) to 204(d) are display examples of the display area when "normal display" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 203, cheering line images are displayed for six seconds from timing t13 to timing t19. Four cheering line images are displayed: "<Get off~", "<Go for it~", "Get off~>", and "Go for it~". The two cheering line images, "<Get off~" and "<Go for it~", appear from the left edge of the display area, move horizontally to the right within the display area, and move out of the display area at the right edge of the display area. On the other hand, the two cheering line images, "Get off~>" and "Go for it~" appear from the right edge of the display area, move horizontally to the left within the display area, and move out of the display area at the left edge of the display area. Also, from timing t13, an image of an enemy tank is displayed moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display area.

Figure 204(a) shows a display example at timing t14, when the display of the cheering line image has just started. Figure 204(b) shows a display example at timing t16, when the display of the cheering line image is in the middle stage. Figure 204(c) shows a display example at timing t18, when the display of the cheering line image is in the final stage. As shown in the display examples, the cheering line image moves horizontally to the right or left.

At the same time that the display of the cheering image ends at timing t19, a simulated image of the operation section imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 204(d) shows a state in which the simulated image of the operation section imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area (for example, the display state at timing t20). After the display of the cheering image ends, the simulated image of the operation section imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the effective operation period begins, and a destruction image is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the end of the effective operation period, as in the embodiment shown for the "shield bullet reach", suggesting the probability of a big hit. FIG. 203(b) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t21. Also, FIG. 203(c) shows the display state when the effective operation period ends at timing t22.

Next, a display example when "Small display" is selected will be described. Fig. 203(d) is a time chart when "Small display" is selected. Fig. 204(e) to Fig. 204(g) are display examples when "Small display" is selected.
Fig. 204(e) shows the display state at timing t14, Fig. 204(f) shows the display state at timing t16, and Fig. 204(g) shows the display state at timing t18.
As shown in Figures 204(e) to 204(g), when "small display" is selected, the cheering message image is displayed smaller than when "normal display" is selected, making it difficult to see.

Next, a display example when "Do not display" is selected will be described. Fig. 203(e) is a time chart when "Do not display" is selected. When "Do not display" is selected, only the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the display area, and the cheering line image is not displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19.
When "Do not display" is selected in this way, the cheering message image is not displayed as in the case where "Normal display" or "Small display" is selected.

In this way, by allowing the player during the demo to set three states - a state in which the special premonition display (supportive dialogue image) is displayed, a state in which it is displayed small, or a state in which it is not displayed - it is possible to execute a presentation style that suits the player's preferences. For example, a player who does not want to see the special premonition display can make the special premonition display difficult or impossible to see, allowing them to focus their attention on the display of the operation section imitation image that mimics the first operation section (attack button 3710) and on operating the operation section.

In the above embodiment, the visual appearance of the premonition effect could only be changed during the demo. Therefore, when trying to change the visual appearance of the premonition effect, it was necessary to first reset the reserved number to 0 and put the decorative pattern into a state in which it was not changing. This could cause the player to feel it was troublesome to reset the reserved number to 0, or to lose the tempo of the game by resetting the reserved number to 0.

Therefore, we will explain an embodiment that has been modified so that the visual appearance of the premonition effect can be changed while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 205.

205(a) to 205(c) are time charts showing the same performance as in the embodiment shown in Fig. 203(a) to 203(c). That is, the display of the decorative pattern changes, the operation part simulating image of the attack button 3710, the destruction image of the enemy tank, and the operation valid period are the same.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 205(d), operation of the defense button 3740 is valid from t5, which is the timing when the reach effect starts, to t27, which is the timing after the display of the destruction image of the enemy tank ends. When a specific condition is satisfied with respect to the operation of the defense button 3740 (when a long press or a rapid tap operation is detected, as will be described in detail later), it is possible to change the cheering line image from the normal display to a state in which it is displayed small or to a state in which it is not displayed at all.

Figure 205(e) is a time chart when "Small display" is selected in the demo settings. After the cheering line image is displayed at timing t13, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and the cheering line image is displayed small if the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering line image is changed from the display state shown in Figure 204(a) to the display state shown in Figure 204(e) while the cheering line image is being displayed.

Figure 205 (f) is a time chart when "Do not display" is selected in the settings during the demo. After the cheering line image is displayed at timing t13, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and the cheering line image is hidden when the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering line image is changed from the normal display state shown in Figure 204 (a) to a state in which the cheering line image is not displayed while the line image is being displayed.

The display state in which the cheering line image is displayed small or the display state in which the cheering line image is not displayed is configured to continue as long as a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected.
Alternatively, once a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, even if the player releases the defense button 3740, the cheering line image may continue to be displayed in a small size or may not be displayed at all until timing t19, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering line image ends.

In addition, by pressing and holding the defense button 3740 in advance during the period from timing t5, when the effective operation period of the defense button 3740 begins, to timing t13, when the display of the cheering line image begins, it is possible to display the cheering line image in a small size or not at all from timing t13, when the display of the cheering line image begins.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the special premonition display (cheerful dialogue image) is set in advance during the demo, and when a reach effect occurs during the display of changing decorative symbols, and there is a possibility that a special premonition display (cheerful dialogue image) suggesting that the first operation unit (attack button 3710) will become operable is displayed, the player can operate the second operation unit (defense button 3740) at any timing to select the display mode of the special premonition display during the display of changing decorative symbols. For example, if the player does not want to see the special premonition display, the visibility of the special premonition display can be reduced to make it difficult or impossible to see, allowing the player to focus their attention on the display of the operation unit imitation image that mimics the first operation unit and on operating the operation unit.

In addition, instead of detecting a long press of the defense button 3740, the display mode of the cheering line image may be changed when repeated taps of the defense button 3740 are detected.

Instead of providing a function for setting the display mode of the cheering line image during the demo as shown in FIG. 202, the cheering line image may be configured to be displayed in a small size only when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected. Alternatively, the cheering line image may be configured not to be displayed.

Note that in the "Shield Bullet Reach" example shown in FIG. 144, etc., an embodiment was shown in which a shield image was displayed by operating the defense button 3740, but an embodiment modified so that the cheering message image is hidden by displaying such a shield image is shown below.

With reference to Figures 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g) to 205(h), and 206, an embodiment modified to display an image (first shield image) that conceals the special precursor display (cheerleading line image) will be described. In this embodiment, instead of displaying the cheerleading line image in a small size or hiding it based on the operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), an image (first shield image) that conceals the cheerleading line image is displayed to hide the cheerleading line image, thereby reducing the visibility of the cheerleading line image and making it difficult or impossible to see.

Figure 205 (g) is a time chart showing the display state of the first shield image when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a specified timing (timing t14 in this performance example). The display period of the first shield image is predetermined to be six seconds. In this performance example, it is displayed for six seconds, from timing t14 to timing t20. Also, it is not necessary to continue to press and hold the defense button 3740; after a long press is detected and the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image will continue to be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is released.

Figure 206(a) shows an example display at timing t14, when the display of the cheering line image has just started. Figure 206(b) shows an example display at timing t16, when the display of the cheering line image is in the middle stage. Figure 206(c) shows an example display at timing t18, when the display of the cheering line image is in the final stage. Figure 206(d) shows an example display from timing t19, when operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective, to timing t20.

FIG. 206(e) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14. FIG. 206(f) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t16. FIG. 206(g) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t18. FIG. 206(h) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 206(e) to FIG. 206(h), the size and display position of the first shield image do not change. Therefore, the premonition effect can be hidden without making the first shield image itself stand out, and the player can patiently wait for the timing when the operation unit simulating image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. The color of the first shield image may be an inconspicuous color such as gray. Also, the display mode of the first shield image may be configured so that the expectation level for the special lottery result is not indicated. As in the embodiment related to the "shield bullet reach", the expectation level may be indicated by the operation unit simulating image or the destruction image of the enemy tank. At this time, a plurality of different expectation levels may be indicated by the color of the operation unit simulating image or the destruction image of the enemy tank. Also, the display priority of the destruction image may be higher or lower than the display priority of the first shield image. When the display priority of the destruction image is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, even if a part or all of the destruction image overlaps with the first shield image, it is displayed in front of it. When the display priority of the destruction image is set lower than the display priority of the first shield image, a part or all of the destruction image may be displayed without being hidden by the first shield image.
These points for the first shield image may be adopted in the second shield image described below.

As shown in FIG. 206(h), between the first shield image and the operation section simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the operation section simulated image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the first shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulated image is not hindered, and in fact the visibility of the operation section simulated image is improved.

In this way, by displaying an image (first shield image) that conceals the special premonition display (cheerful line image) at the player's discretion, and configuring the special premonition display so that some or all of it is hidden, a player who does not want to see the special premonition display can reduce the visibility of the special premonition display, making it difficult or impossible to see, thereby allowing the player to focus their attention on the display of the operation unit simulative image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation unit.
Furthermore, the operation part simulation image that imitates the first operation part (attack button 3710) is not difficult or impossible to see, and therefore does not hinder the progress of the game using the first operation part.

With reference to FIG. 205(g), an embodiment in which the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 has been shown, but instead of pressing and holding the defense button 3740, the first shield image may be displayed based on repeated taps of the defense button 3740. FIG. 205(h) shows an example of a presentation in which repeated taps of the defense button 3740 are detected at timing t14, and the first shield image is displayed until timing t20. Note that in this case as well, the display examples shown in FIG. 206(e) to FIG. 206(h) will be the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment.

The size of the first shield image may be different. Figures 207(a) to 207(d) are display examples in an embodiment in which the size of the first shield image is modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g), 205(h), and 206(e) to 206(h). In this embodiment, the size of the first shield image is smaller. Also, the display position is slightly higher. Figures 207(a) to 207(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. In this embodiment, the cheering line images "<Get off~" and "Get off~" are made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image. On the other hand, the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are not made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image.

In this way, the visibility of a portion of the special precursor display (cheerleading line image) may be reduced by the first shield image, making it difficult or impossible to see, while the visibility of other portions of the special precursor display may be configured so as not to be reduced and made difficult or impossible to see.

A configuration may be made such that a plurality of shield images can be displayed. FIG. 205(i) and FIG. 207(e) to FIG. 207(h) are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment modified so that a plurality of shield images can be displayed in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 205(a) to FIG. 205(d), FIG. 205(g), FIG. 205(h), and FIG. 207(a) to FIG. 207(d). In this embodiment, a configuration is made such that a first shield image is displayed when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, and then a second shield image is displayed when a long press of the defense button is detected again. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.
In the figure, the first shield image is shaded diagonally downward to the right, and the second shield image is shaded diagonally upward to the right.

Figure 205(i) is a time chart showing the display state when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15, and shows the state in which the second shield image is displayed for six seconds until timing t21. Figures 207(e) to 207(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In Figure 207 (e), the cheering line images "<Get off~" and "Get off~" are made difficult to see by the first shield image, but the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In Figure 207 (f), in addition to the first shield image, a second shield image begins to be displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are made invisible by the second shield image.
In Figure 207 (g), a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be difficult to see due to the second shield image.
207(h) shows a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and an operation section simulative image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. As shown in FIG. 207(h), between the second shield image and the operation section simulative image simulating the attack button 3710, the display priority of the operation section simulative image is higher. Therefore, even when the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulative image is not impaired.

The second shield image is slightly wider than the first shield image. Similarly to the first shield image, the second shield image does not move. The color of the second shield image may be gray, similar to the first shield image. Furthermore, the colors of the first and second shield images may be gray of the same brightness, or may be gray of different brightnesses.

After the first shield image is displayed by pressing and holding the defense button 3740, the second shield image may be displayed if the defense button 3740 continues to be pressed for a predetermined period of time. With this configuration, it becomes possible to display both the first shield image and the second shield image by simply continuing to press the defense button 3740.
On the other hand, the second shield image may be displayed when the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 for a long time to display the first shield image, releases the defense button 3740 to release it from the pressed state, and then presses the defense button 3740 again for a predetermined period of time. This configuration increases the difficulty of displaying the second shield image, making it easier for the player to intentionally create either a state in which only the first shield image is displayed, or a state in which the first and second shield images are displayed.

In this way, by providing multiple images (first shield image, second shield image) that conceal the special premonition display (cheerleading line image) and displaying these in stages in response to operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), the special premonition display is not suddenly hidden, so even if the player accidentally operates the second operation unit, part of the special premonition display can remain easily visible. It is also possible to realize a display mode that suits the player's preferences.

Although an embodiment in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed by one operation unit (defense button 3740) has been shown, an embodiment modified so that a plurality of shield images (first shield image and second shield image) are displayed corresponding to a plurality of operation units (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700) will be described below. Figures 205(j), 205(k), and 207(e) to 207(h) are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g), 205(h), and 207(a) to 207(d).
In this embodiment, in the period from timing t5 to timing t27, in addition to the defense button 3740, the mission button 3700 is also enabled for operation reception. Furthermore, when a press operation of the mission button 3700 is detected, the second shield image is displayed. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, the same as the display time of the first shield image.

Figure 205 (j) is a time chart showing the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 and the display state when the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is not detected.
Fig. 205(k) shows a state in which pressing of the mission button 3700 is detected at timing t15, and the second shield image is displayed for six seconds until timing t21. Figs. 207(e) to 207(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing from t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In Figure 207 (e), the cheering line images "<Get off~" and "Get off~" are made difficult to see by the first shield image, but the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In Figure 207 (f), in addition to the first shield image, a second shield image begins to be displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are made invisible by the second shield image.
In Figure 207 (g), a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be difficult to see due to the second shield image.
207(h) shows a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and an operation section simulative image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. As shown in FIG. 207(h), between the second shield image and the operation section simulative image simulating the attack button 3710, the display priority of the operation section simulative image is higher. Therefore, even when the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulative image is not impaired.

In this way, by configuring the system so that multiple images (first shield image and second shield image) that conceal different positions in the special premonition display (cheerful line image) can be displayed in response to operations on multiple operation units, i.e., the second operation button and the third operation button (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700), the player can select to what extent the special premonition display is to be concealed and which positions of the special premonition display are to be concealed according to the player's preferences.
Furthermore, by displaying an operation unit imitation image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) in front of the second shield image, the operation unit imitation image is not difficult or impossible to see, and therefore does not hinder the progress of the game using the first operation unit.

With reference to Figures 205 to 207, etc., an embodiment in which the special premonition display (supporting dialogue image) can be hidden by a first shield image and a second shield image has been described. Below, with reference to Figures 208 and 209, an embodiment in which these images, etc. are modified will be described. Note that the behavior of the gaming machine other than these image displays is the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 205 to 207, etc.

208(a) to 208(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, the first shield image has a horizontally long rectangular shape with a hole in the center through which an image displayed at the rear can be seen, and the second shield image has a horizontally long donut shape.
208(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering message image is difficult or impossible to see due to the first shield image. Note that the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first shield image.
Figures 208(b) and 208(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the first shield image.
208(d) is a display example showing a state in which an operation valid period has occurred while the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation section imitation image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area.

Instead of making the second shield image doughnut-shaped, it may be modified to make it elliptical, so that the area behind the hole in the center of the first shield image is not visible. Figures 208(e) and 208(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in Figure 208(f), a simulated operation unit image that mimics the attack button 3710 is displayed in a position that overlaps with the second shield image.

209(a) to 209(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, each of the first shield image and the second shield image has a vertically long rectangular shape, and two first shield images and two second shield images are displayed.
209(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering message image is difficult or impossible to see due to the first shield image. Note that the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the shield image.
Figures 209(b) and 209(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the shield image.
209(d) is a display example showing a state in which a valid operation period has occurred while a shield image and a second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation section imitation image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in the area between the two second shield images.

Although a gap is provided between the two second shield images, it may be modified so that there is no gap. Figures 209(e) and 209(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in Figure 209(f), an operation section simulating image that resembles an attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the two second shield images.

In this manner, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 208 and 209, the first shield image is configured to be displayed at a relatively distant position relative to the operation section simulation image that mimics the attack button 3710, and the second shield image is configured to be displayed at a relatively closer position.
A player can display only the first shield image, only the second shield image, or both the first and second shield images according to his/her preference.

An embodiment has been shown in which a cheering message image is displayed as the image to be displayed as a special premonition display, but the following shows an embodiment modified to display an operation part imitation image shaped like the first operation part (attack button 3710) instead of the cheering message image.

Figure 210 is a time chart in this embodiment, specifically, a time chart modified from Figure 205. Note that, as a premonition effect, instead of displaying a cheering line image, a simulated image shaped like the attack button 3710 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "premonition simulated image") is displayed in a predetermined manner, but the operation timing, etc. are the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 205, etc.

211 to 213 are display examples of premonition effects in this embodiment, and specifically, are display examples which are modified versions of FIGS. 206 and 207.
Figures 211(a) to 211(d), Figures 212(a) to 212(d), and Figures 213(a) to 213(d) are display examples corresponding to the display examples at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in Figures 206(a) to 206(d), respectively.
Similarly, Figures 211(e) to 211(h), Figures 212(e) to 212(h), and Figures 213(e) to 213(h) are display examples corresponding to the display examples at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in Figures 206(e) to 206(h), respectively.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 211, first, a precursor simulation image that imitates the attack button 3710 is displayed in 5 rows and 5 columns (FIG. 211(a)). The precursor simulation image is opaque, and images located behind it (such as images of roads) cannot be seen. Some precursor simulation images are hidden by dialogue windows or images of the player's tank. Next, as shown in FIG. 211(b), a precursor simulation image is displayed in 3 rows and 3 columns. Next, as shown in FIG. 211(c), only one precursor simulation image is displayed. At the same time as the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 begins, the character "attack" is added to the precursor simulation image that was previously displayed as the only one, as shown in FIG. 211(d), and an operation section simulation image that imitates the attack button 3710 is displayed.

Figures 210(e) and 211(e) to 211(h) show a time chart and a display example when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t14 in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 211(a) to 211(d). In this case, the premonition simulation image is displayed semi-transparently from timing t14 to timing t19. At timing t19, when the effective operation period begins, the premonition simulation image becomes opaque, the character "attack" is added, and an operation section simulation image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 210(f), the premonition image resembling the attack button 3710 may be configured not to be displayed.

Figures 210(g) and 212 are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment in which, instead of displaying the premonition simulation image simulating the attack button 3710 semi-transparently in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 211, the premonition simulation image is modified so that it is hidden by a first shield image.

Figures 212(a), 212(b), 212(c), and 212(d) respectively show display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20 when the defense button 3740 is not operated and the first shield image is not displayed.

As shown in Figure 210(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this example), a first shield image is displayed in front of the premonition simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710, making part of the premonition simulation image difficult or impossible to see. Figure 212(e) shows an example of a display when the display of the first shield image begins at timing t14. Figures 212(f), 212(g), and 212(h) show examples of displays at timings t16, t18, and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

Instead of a long press of the defense button 3740, the first shield image may be modified so as to be displayed when repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected.
FIG. 210(h) shows an example of a presentation when repeated taps of the defense button 3740 are detected instead of a long press of the defense button 3740.

Figure 213 is a display example showing an embodiment in which the premonition simulating image shown in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 210(g), 210(h), and 212 is transformed into another premonition simulating image.

As shown in FIG. 213(a) to FIG. 213(c), nine precursor simulation images that mimic the attack button 3710 gradually gather slightly to the left of the center of the display area, and finally reach a display state in which they are gathered as shown in FIG. 213(d), and the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 becomes valid. FIG. 213(a) is a display example at timing t14. At this time, each precursor simulation image is displayed at a distance. FIG. 213(b) is a display example at timing t16, in which each precursor simulation image is gradually approaching. FIG. 213(c) is a display example at timing t18. At this time, each precursor simulation image is displayed overlapping on the right side of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might". Each precursor simulation image is displayed with three protrusions like afterimages indicating the direction of movement. At timing t19, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, the display of each protrusion ends, and the character "attack" is added to the precursor simulation image and displayed as an operation part simulation image. FIG. 213(d) shows a display example from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in Figure 210(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a specified timing (timing t14 in this example), a first shield image is displayed in front of the premonition simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710, making part of the premonition simulation image difficult or impossible to see. Figure 213(e) shows an example display when the display of the first shield image begins at timing t14. Figures 213(f), 213(g), and 213(h) show example displays at timings t16, t18, and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In this way, even if a premonition simulation image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is displayed as the special premonition display instead of a cheering line image, the visibility of the special premonition display can be reduced to make it difficult or impossible to see, thereby achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned embodiment.

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 205(i) and 207 (an embodiment capable of displaying a second shield image) is applied to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 210(a) to 210(h) and 211 to 213 (an embodiment in which a precursor simulation image is displayed) will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 210(i) and the display example shown in Figure 214.
In this embodiment, the premonition simulation image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the premonition effect is configured to be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.

214(a) to 214(d) show display examples in an embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 212(a) to 212(h) that has been modified so as to enable the second shield image to be displayed.
210(i) is a time chart showing a case where a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
Figures 214(a), 214(b), 214(c), and 214(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 214(e) to 214(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 213(a) to 213(h) has been modified so that the second shield image can be displayed.
210(i) is a time chart showing a case where a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
Figures 214(e), 214(f), 214(g), and 214(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 205(j), 205(k), and 207 (an embodiment in which a second shield image can be displayed in response to operation of mission button 3700) is applied to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 210(a) to 210(h) and 211 to 213 (an embodiment in which a precursor simulation image is displayed) will be described with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k) and the display example shown in Figure 214.
In this embodiment, the premonition simulation image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the premonition effect is configured to be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.
Moreover, the second shield image is configured to be displayed when pressing of the mission button 3700 is detected.

214(a) to 214(d) show display examples in an embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 212(a) to 212(h) that has been modified so as to enable the second shield image to be displayed.
As shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 214(a), 214(b), 214(c), and 214(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 214(e) to 214(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 213(a) to 213(h) has been modified so that the second shield image can be displayed.
As shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 214(e), 214(f), 214(g), and 214(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 211, 213, etc., in which a premonition simulation image is displayed as a premonition effect, the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 208 and 209 may be adopted.

The embodiments shown with reference to Figures 210(i) to 210(k) and 214 can also achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiments.

With reference to Figures 205 and 210, an embodiment has been shown in which the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed by operating the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700, respectively, and the effective operation period of the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700 is from timing t5 when the reach presentation state occurs to timing t27, which is the end of the reach presentation state.
During this period, the first shield image or the second shield image can be displayed at any timing triggered by the player's operation of the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700. Furthermore, the first shield image or the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds), but after the display of the first shield image or the second shield image has ended, the first shield image or the second shield image can be displayed again triggered by the player's operation.

For example, if a reach effect occurs at time t5, but the player does not want to see the premonition effect, the player can operate the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 at a predetermined time before time t13, when the premonition effect starts, to display the first shield image or the second shield image, thereby making the premonition effect difficult or impossible to see in advance.

Also, for example, from timing t16 to timing t22, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed simultaneously with an operation section simulation image that imitates the attack button 3710, which indicates that operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is valid.
In addition, it is possible to continue displaying the first shield image and the second shield image even after the operation of the attack button 3710 has been accepted or the operation valid period has ended. When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted or the operation valid period has ended, the expectation of the special lottery result is indicated by the state of the destruction image of the enemy tank, but the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image may be set to be higher than that of the destruction image, and a part or all of the destruction image may be hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image.
In this case, the player needs to pay attention to the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image and the timing of starting the display. For example, if the player operates the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 carelessly regardless of the progress of the presentation, a display state in which the visibility of the destruction image is hindered may occur as a penalty, so that the player will operate the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 seriously, and the decline in interest will be suppressed.

It is also possible to prepare multiple types of operation section simulation images according to the degree of expectation, and to keep them displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds) instead of making them disappear when the operation is accepted or when the valid operation period ends.
Since the display status of the operation part simulation image is important to a player who has made at least a part of the premonition display difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image and the second shield image in order to concentrate on operating the operation part, the player can be given a lingering impression of interest in the operation presentation by leaving this presentation status even after the operation.

The time for displaying the first shield image or the second shield image and the time for displaying the cheering line image or the premonition simulating image imitating the attack button 3710, which function as the special premonition display, are each set to 6 seconds, but the time for displaying the first shield image or the second shield image may be longer. For example, the first shield image or the second shield image may be configured to be displayed for 10 seconds. Alternatively, once the display of the first shield image or the second shield image has started, the display of the first shield image or the second shield image may be continued until the effective operation period starts or until the display of the destruction image starts (i.e., until the player operates the attack button 3710 or the effective operation period ends). With this configuration, the visibility of the special premonition display can be reduced with a small number of operations, and it can be maintained in a difficult to see or impossible to see state.

On the other hand, the time for which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed may be shorter than the time for which the special precursor display is displayed (for example, 3 seconds). In this case, a player who does not want to see the special precursor display will be required to perform multiple operations, but a player who accidentally displays the first shield image or the second shield image will be able to see the special precursor display without visibility being obstructed by the first shield image or the second shield image for at least a portion of the period during which the special precursor display is displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

If a condition for displaying the first shield image is satisfied as a result of the operation of defense button 3740 while the first shield image is being displayed, the display of the first shield image may be continued again from the timing at which the condition is satisfied. For example, if the condition for displaying the first shield image is satisfied when the first shield image has been displayed for four seconds, the first shield image may be displayed for an additional six seconds from that point on, for a total of ten seconds.
Similarly, with regard to the second shield image, when a condition for displaying the second shield image is satisfied as a trigger of the operation of mission button 3700, the display of the second shield image may be continued again from the timing at which the condition is satisfied. For example, when the condition for displaying the second shield image is satisfied when the second shield image has been displayed for four seconds, the second shield image may be displayed for an additional six seconds from that point on, so that the second shield image is displayed for a total of ten seconds.

During the effective period of the defense button 3740, if a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the first shield image was displayed and the display of the first shield image has ceased, and the conditions for displaying the first shield image again are met, the first shield image can be displayed again. The same applies to the second shield image.

With this configuration, a player who hesitates about whether to see the special premonition display and then decides not to see it can extend the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image. On the other hand, a player who wants to see the special premonition display may mistakenly operate the second operation unit (defense button 3740) or the third operation unit (mission button 3700), causing the visibility of the special premonition display to decrease and become difficult or impossible to see. However, if the player does not operate the second operation unit any further, the state in which the visibility of the special premonition display has decreased and become difficult or impossible to see will quickly end. In addition, since the first shield image or the second shield image can be displayed at any time (for example, before the start of the special premonition display or after the end of the operation valid period), it is possible to practice displaying the first shield image or the second shield image.

Figures 215(a) to 215(d) show display examples in an embodiment in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 214(a) to 214(d).
As shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 215(a), 215(b), 215(c), and 215(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 215(e) to 215(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 214(e) to 214(h).
As shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 215(e), 215(f), 215(g), and 215(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 215(a) to 215(d) and the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 215(e) to 215(h), the display priority of the first shield image is set higher than the display priority of the second shield image, and the first shield image is displayed in front of the second shield image. Moreover, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to the position where the operation unit simulation image is displayed, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the position. Moreover, the size of the first shield image (specifically, the area it occupies in the display region) is larger than the size of the second shield image.
Furthermore, as described above, a special operation (long press operation or rapid tap operation) on the defense button 3740 is required to display the first shield image, whereas the second shield image can be displayed by simply pressing the mission button 3700. That is, the second shield image is displayed at the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated (timing when the operation start is accepted), whereas the first shield image is not displayed at the timing when the defense button 3740 is operated (timing when the operation start is accepted).

According to such a configuration, the first shield image is displayed when the player operates the second operation section (defense button 3740) in a complex manner with a clear intention.
On the other hand, the second shield image is displayed when the player operates the third operation unit (mission button 3700) in a simple manner. Therefore, the second shield image is displayed not only when the player intentionally operates the third operation unit, but also when the player operates it unintentionally or by mistake.
In this way, in this embodiment, the difficulty of the operation required to display the first shield image is made relatively higher than the difficulty required to display the second shield image, but the first shield image is able to hinder the visibility of the special precursor display more than the second shield image.

In this way, by displaying the first shield image, which will not appear unless a clear intention is expressed when operating, the player can concentrate on the operation part simulation image that mimics the first operation part (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation part.
In addition, even when the second shield image that can be displayed by a simple operation is displayed, the player can concentrate on the operation unit simulating image and the operation unit. Meanwhile, by making the visibility of the special precursor display relatively higher when the second shield image is displayed compared to when the first shield image is displayed, even if the player mistakenly displays the second shield image, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest felt by the player who wanted to see the special precursor display.

Furthermore, the first shield image may be displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., two seconds) has elapsed after a special operation (long press operation or repeated tap operation) is detected on the defense button 3740. Moreover, the display time of the first shield image may be set longer than the display time of the second shield image.
Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

The size and display time of the first shield image, which is displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, may be different from that of the second shield image, which is displayed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 207 and Fig. 214, the size of the second shield image is made larger than the first shield image, making a wide area of the special sign display invisible.
Alternatively, the display time of the first shield image and the second shield image may be different. For example, the display time of the first shield image may be six seconds, and the display time of the second shield image may be nine seconds. Conversely, the display time of the first shield image may be nine seconds, and the display time of the second shield image may be six seconds.
By adopting such a configuration, the special sign display can be made to look like what the player likes.

The first shield image and the second shield image may be displayed dynamically instead of simply appearing at a predetermined position. When showing them as dynamic displays, for example, they may be displayed so as to dynamically appear from any of the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area in a so-called cut-in manner, or dynamic displays such as wipe-in, wipe-out, fade-in, and fade-out may be adopted.
The first shield image and the second shield image that have appeared while moving in this manner may continue to move and stop in the center of the display area, or the first shield image and the second shield image that have appeared while moving in this manner at one end of the display area may continue to move and move to the other end of the display area so as to disappear outside the display area.
This not only allows the first shield image and the second shield image to simply hide the special precursor display, but also allows for a dramatic presentation when the first shield image and the second shield image appear and disappear, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

The configuration may be such that operation of the defense button 3740 triggers a cheering line image or a precursor image for the attack button 3710 to be displayed semi-transparently, and operation of the mission button 3700 triggers a first shield image or a second shield image to be displayed, making the cheering line image or the precursor image for the attack button 3710 difficult or impossible to see.
In this way, by making it possible to make the special sign display invisible or difficult to see in different ways depending on the type of operating part, it is possible to provide a visibility mode that suits the player's preferences.

Also, there may be a plurality of display modes of the premonition simulation image imitating the attack button 3710, and the degree of expectation of the special lottery result may be indicated by the type of the displayed premonition simulation image. For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color or shape of the premonition simulation image. In this case, too, it is preferable to configure the special premonition display so that it can be made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image or the second shield image.
With this configuration, the player is not misled by the degree of expectation indicated by the premonition simulated image, and can concentrate on the display of the operation unit simulated image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation unit.

Even if the special premonition display (display of the cheering line image or premonition simulation image) ends while the first or second shield image is being displayed, it is advisable to keep the first or second shield image displayed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the display of the first or second shield image ends at the same time as the start of the valid operation period, a background image (such as a road) behind the first or second shield image will be displayed, causing a sense of discomfort to the player who wants to concentrate on the display of the operation section simulation image that mimics the attack button 3710. In this way, it is advisable to continue displaying the concealment image (first shield image, second shield image) even if the valid operation period has occurred.

In addition, the display priority of the operation section simulated image may be set higher than the display priority of the first shield image. For example, as shown in FIG. 206(h), the operation section simulated image may be displayed in front of the first shield image. This configuration allows the player to concentrate only on the displayed simulated image. If the first shield image were to be erased, the background image hidden by the first shield image would become visible, which would result in the player being unable to concentrate on the operation section simulated image.
It should be noted that the same configuration can be adopted not only for the first shield image but also for the second shield image.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 207(h) and Fig. 214(h), the operation section simulative image may be displayed so that a part of the operation section simulative image and a part of the second shield image overlap. In this case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the operation section simulative image higher than that of the second shield image. Alternatively, as shown in Fig. 212(h) and Fig. 213(h), the operation section simulative image may be displayed near the first shield image or the second shield image but not overlapping with the first shield image or the second shield image.
With this configuration, the player can concentrate solely on the displayed operation section simulation image.

In the embodiment shown, the display priority of the operation section simulation image is higher than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image, but the display priority of the operation section simulation image may be lower than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image. In this case, it is preferable to configure a part of the operation section simulation image so that it is visible to the player without overlapping with the first shield image and the second shield image.

In addition to displaying the premonition simulated image and the operation section simulated image, the display area may be configured to display the name and operation mode of the first operation section (attack button 3710) while the special premonition display is being displayed (while the premonition simulated image is being displayed) or during the operation valid period (while the operation section simulated image is being displayed). In this case, a player who is unfamiliar with the game will have a deeper understanding of the name and operation method of the first operation section, and will be able to operate the first operation section with confidence.
On the other hand, for a skilled player, such a display may not be necessary. Therefore, the name and operation mode of the attack button 3710 may be made difficult or impossible to see by displaying the first shield image and the second shield image. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure the operation unit simulation image so that it is not difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image and the second shield image.
The operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 may be displayed only before the valid operation period occurs, or only during the valid operation period, or may be displayed from before the valid operation period occurs throughout the valid operation period.
The embodiment shown with reference to Figures 208 and 209 is one example of such an embodiment. In Figures 208(d), 208(f), 209(d), and 209(f), the dialogue window for "Sergeant Might" displays the text "Second Lieutenant! Aim at the enemy tank with the attack button!", but the first shield image and second shield image are displayed, making the operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 invisible.
With this configuration, the player can concentrate solely on the displayed operation section simulation image.

Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the first shield image can be easily displayed, there is a risk that the player may mistakenly operate the defense button 3740, causing the first shield image to be unintentionally displayed while the premonition effect is being performed, thereby impairing the visibility of the premonition effect and ruining the interest provided by the premonition effect.
Therefore, the first shield image is configured to be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied as a trigger for operating the defense button 3740. Although the specific condition is exemplified by repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 (detection of a pressing operation a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time) or a long press (detection of a pressing operation continuously for a predetermined time or more) of the defense button 3740, other conditions that are satisfied as a trigger for operating the defense button 3740 may be adopted.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the second shield image is displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held or when the mission button 3700 is pressed, the second shield image may be displayed under other conditions. For example, the second shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed and then the mission button 3700 is pressed. Alternatively, the second shield image may be displayed when a long press or repeated taps of the mission button 3700 are detected.

In the embodiment shown, the second shield image is displayed regardless of whether the first shield image is displayed or not, but the second shield image may be configured to be displayed on the condition that the first shield image is being displayed.

The display priority of the first and second shield images is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display area. This ensures that the decorative pattern is not hidden by the first and second shield images, ensuring the visibility of the decorative pattern.

The effective operation period of the defense button 3740 is set to be from timing t5 to timing t27, but the effective operation period and the period during which the first shield image is displayed may be set to the entire period during which the decorative symbols are displayed or stopped from varying. By configuring in this way, it is possible to practice displaying the first shield image by operating the defense button 3740 at any timing.
Since it is not necessary to adopt such a configuration for the effective operation period of the mission button 3700, which is a trigger for displaying the second shield image, it is preferable to configure it so that the effective operation period is only during the display of the decorative pattern variations (for example, the period from timing t5 to timing t27) or the second shield image can be displayed. Alternatively, it is preferable to configure it so that the second shield image is not displayed at least while the decorative pattern variations are stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed from decreasing.

Although an embodiment has been configured in which multiple images are displayed to execute the special precursor display, the special precursor display may be performed using only one image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 204 etc., four cheering message images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. Also, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 213 etc., nine precursor simulation images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

A case may be provided in which operations on the first operation unit (attack button 3710) are not valid after the special premonition display is displayed. In this case, an operation unit imitation image that imitates the first operation unit is not displayed after the special premonition display is displayed, and no operation valid period occurs.
For a player who has hidden the premonition simulation image by the first shield image or the second shield image, it results in disappointment as the operation part simulation image is not displayed even though he has taken the trouble to make the premonition simulation image difficult or impossible to see, but by deliberately performing such a performance display, the player can be made to feel that he wants to operate the operation part next time.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which, in a game presentation instructing a player to operate an operating means, even if the player does not operate the operating means, the same presentation display as when the operating means is operated is displayed (for example, JP 2007-136096 A).
However, while the operational burden on the player is reduced by displaying the same effect when no operation is performed as when an operation is performed, there is a risk that the player will lose motivation to operate the operating means. In particular, in game presentations that require complex operating instructions for the operating means, if the same effect display is displayed when no operation is performed as when an operation is performed, there is a risk that the player will lose motivation to operate the operating means.
The following describes an embodiment of a gaming machine that solves such problems and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest by increasing the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

Below, with reference to Figures 216 to 218, an embodiment in which the "shield bullet reach" is modified will be described.
Fig. 216 shows a time chart in this embodiment, and Figs. 217 and 218 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 216(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t15. Next, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 occurs from timing t18 to timing t22. If a repeated tap or a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected during the effective operation period, the effective operation period ends. Next, a display according to the operation status of the attack button 3710 is performed, and then a decorative pattern is displayed stationary at timing t34.
Figures 216(b) to 216(d) show examples of effects that may occur depending on the operation status of the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period.

Figure 216 (b) shows an example of a presentation when a rapid tap operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this presentation example, at timing t15, an enemy tank appears from the right side of the display area and begins to move to the left. Next, at timing t18, the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 begins. The valid operation period ends when a rapid tap operation or a long press operation is detected. Furthermore, if a long press operation or rapid tap operation is detected, a presentation display according to the operation mode is performed. If a long press operation or rapid tap operation is not detected, the valid operation period ends at timing t22, four seconds after the start of the valid operation period.
FIG. 217(a) shows a display example at timing t19. As shown in the figure, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Furthermore, in the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", the character string "Second Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" is displayed, and the operation mode of the attack button 3710 is shown to the player. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", an operation section imitation image (circular image) that imitates the attack button 3710 is displayed. Furthermore, the character "attack" is displayed in the operation section imitation image.
In addition, the same display as this (display examples shown in Figures 218(a) and 218(d)) is also performed in the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 216(c) and 216(d) described below.

When a rapid tapping operation is detected at timing t21, a display of a shell being fired from the player's tank at the enemy tank is displayed, and then a smoke image, which is an image showing smoke generated by the shell exploding, is displayed in place of the image of the enemy tank. Fig. 217(b) shows an example of the display at timing t22. In this example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
At timing t23, two seconds after the start of the display of the smoke image, a bomb character image appears from behind the smoke image and moves to the left. The bomb character images displayed include bomb character image A and bomb character image B, and the type of bomb character image displayed indicates the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot.
Fig. 217(c) is an example of display at timing t25. In this example of display, a bomb character image A is displayed to the left of the smoke image. Fig. 217(d) is an example of display at timing t25. In this example of display, a bomb character image B is displayed to the left of the smoke image. The display of the bomb character image and the smoke image continues until timing t27 (6 seconds after the rapid tapping operation is detected).
In this way, the player's expectation of the special lottery result is shown to the player by performing an appropriate operation on the operation unit.

Figure 216 (c) shows an example of a presentation when a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this presentation example, the display state switches from the display example shown in FIG. 218(a) to the display examples shown in FIG. 218(b) and FIG. 218(c).
In this example, when a long press is detected at timing t21, a shell is displayed as being fired from the player's tank, and then a smoke image is displayed, which is an image showing smoke generated by the shell exploding. Figure 218(b) is a display example at timing t22. In this display example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
In this example, the bomb character image is not displayed, and only the smoke image is displayed. Figure 218 (c) is a display example at timing t25. The smoke image continues to be displayed until timing t27 (6 seconds after the long press is detected).
In this way, if the operation performed by the player on the operating means is not appropriate, a display corresponding to the operation is made, but the expectation of the special result (the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is not shown to the player.

Figure 216 (d) shows an example of a presentation when no rapid tapping or long press of the attack button 3710 is detected during the valid operation period from timing t18 to timing t22 (for example, when the button is pressed only once or when no operation is performed).
In this presentation example, the display state changes from that shown in FIG. 218(d) to that shown in FIG. 218(e) and FIG. 218(f).
In this example, when the operation valid period ends at time t22, the image of the enemy tank turns right at the top center of the display area and starts to move upward in the display area. Figure 218 (e) shows a display example at time t22. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the center of the display area.
Figure 218(f) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank has been moved upward and is displayed smaller than in the case shown in Figure 218(e).
In this way, if the player does not perform an appropriate operation on the operating means, the display corresponding to the operation will not be displayed, and the expectation of the special result (the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) will not be shown to the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the type of bomb character image is configured to indicate the degree of expectation for the special lottery result. Specifically, when bomb character image A is displayed, it is suggested that there is a higher degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot compared to when bomb character image B is displayed. Note that different colors of the bomb character image (red or green) may be configured to indicate different degrees of expectation. Also, it may be configured so that the bomb character may not be displayed even when the appropriate operation (repeated taps) is performed.

In this embodiment, a player who performs an appropriate operation on the operating means (attack button 3710) can see a specific effect (display of a bomb character image) along with a special game-related display (smoke image). In addition, the type of specific effect can tell the player the expected outcome of the special lottery. On the other hand, a player who does not perform an appropriate operation on the operating unit can see the special game-related display but cannot see the specific effect, or cannot see both the special game-related display and the specific effect. This configuration can increase the player's motivation and enthusiasm for operating the operating unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 216 etc., it is possible to execute an effect pattern in which the attack button 3710 is requested to be pressed repeatedly and an effect pattern in which the attack button 3710 is requested to be pressed and held down, and it is possible to modify the embodiment so that either of the effect patterns is executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might" to display a dialogue such as "Second Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" or "Second Lieutenant! Press and hold the attack button to attack the enemy tank!". In addition, when a player presses and holds down the button despite an instruction to press and hold down the button repeatedly, or when a player presses and holds down the button despite an instruction to press and hold down the button repeatedly, it is preferable to control the bomb character image so that it cannot be seen, as shown in FIG. 218(c).
With this configuration, the player is required to carefully visually check the contents of the operation instruction display (the characters displayed in the dialogue window), which increases the tension regarding the operation and improves the player's motivation and enthusiasm in operating the operation unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 216 to 218, the same smoke image was displayed in the same position when the attack button 3710 was pressed repeatedly and when it was pressed and held down (for example, Figures 217(b) and 218(b)). With this configuration, even if other players can see the display content in the display area, it is difficult for them to determine whether the operation content was appropriate or not, and the player can be prevented from being noticed by other players and feeling embarrassed.
In addition, smoke images that are partly different and partly common may be displayed depending on whether the operation is appropriate or inappropriate. Alternatively, images showing the same or similar concept may be displayed as smoke images.
In this way, even if a similar image is displayed instead of an identical smoke image, or a similar image that can be recognized as a similar motif (smoke in this embodiment) is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to determine whether or not the operation was appropriate.
A similar configuration may be adopted for the embodiment in which a smoke image and an explosion image are displayed, which will be described later. For example, images that the player recognizes as having a similar motif may be displayed. Also, similar smoke images may be displayed when the operation content is appropriate and when it is not, similar messages regarding the operation of the operation means may be displayed, or smoke images and explosion images similar to smoke images may be displayed. These similar images may also be displayed at a position that overlaps with the display position of the reserved image or near the center of the display area. The same effect can be obtained even when images that are slightly different on the display are displayed in this way.

A predetermined suggestive display showing the expected probability of a special lottery result may be executed over a predetermined period (e.g., timing t10 to timing t30) spanning the operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22), and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately during the operation valid period while the suggestive display is being executed, the suggestive display being executed may be terminated. For example, a suggestive display different from the display showing a bomb character may be executed over the period from timing t10 to timing t30, and if the attack button 3710 is operated appropriately, this suggestive display may be continued, and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, this suggestive display may be terminated.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the effective operation period (for example, from timing t22 to timing t34 when the display of the decorative pattern changes ends), a predetermined suggestive effect display showing the expected probability of the special lottery result may be executed, and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately during the effective operation period (timing t18 to timing t22), the execution of the suggestive effect display may be restricted during the predetermined period after the effective operation period. For example, during the period from timing t22 to timing t34, a suggestive effect display different from the effect displaying a bomb character may be executed, and if the attack button 3710 is operated appropriately, this suggestive effect display may be executed with a predetermined probability, and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, this suggestive effect display may not be executed.

In this way, if an operation is not performed appropriately, the currently running suggestive display can be terminated, or the suggestive display can be prevented from being executed until the display of the decorative pattern changes stops, thereby increasing the sense of tension regarding the operation and improving the player's willingness and enthusiasm to operate the operating means.

If the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately in a certain variable display, the execution of the suggestive performance may be restricted in a predetermined number of variable displays after that variable display. For example, the execution of the suggestive performance may be restricted until the decorative pattern variable display is performed 10 times.
With this configuration, depending on the manner in which the operating means is operated, a game situation may arise in which the execution of a specific effect (suggestive effect) is restricted across multiple display changes of decorative patterns, thereby increasing the sense of tension regarding the operation and further improving the player's motivation and enthusiasm in operating the operating means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 216 etc., an embodiment is shown in which if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, the expectation level is not indicated for the result of the ongoing change display. Below, however, with reference to FIG. 219 etc., an embodiment is described which is modified to restrict the execution of the look-ahead performance if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately.

Fig. 219 shows a time chart in this embodiment, and Figs. 220 to 222 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 219(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, an image of a minefield is displayed at timing t16. Next, an effective operation period for the attack button 3710 occurs from timing t18 to timing t22. Note that at the time when the effective operation period occurs, three reserved symbols are generated. Next, decorative symbols are displayed stationary from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, new variable display of decorative symbols is performed from timing t35 to timing t44, and decorative symbols are displayed stationary from timing t44 to timing t45.
Figures 219(b) to 219(d) each show a number of examples of effects corresponding to the manner in which the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period.

Figure 219 (b) shows an example of a presentation when a rapid tap operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and starts to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the effective period for operating the attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 220(a) shows a display example at timing t19. An image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", a character string "Second Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack those guys!" is displayed, and the operation mode of the attack button 3710 is shown to the player. In the upper right corner of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", an operation part simulation image (circular image) imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with the character "attack" attached. Furthermore, a reserved image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Specifically, from the left, reserved images corresponding to the reserved item, the first reserved item, the second reserved item, and the third reserved item are displayed. Of these, the reserved item, the first reserved item, and the third reserved item are displayed as white reserved images, which are normal reserved images. On the other hand, the second reserved item is displayed as a red reserved image, which indicates that the special lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot than the normal reserved item. It is possible to display a total of five reserved images, including one reserved item and four reserved items, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved items. In addition, in each of the reserved items from the reserved item to the fourth reserved item, it is possible to display the reserved item in a display mode that indicates that the special lottery result is expected to be a jackpot more than the normal reserved image. In addition, the reserved image basically continues to be displayed regardless of whether the decorative pattern is being displayed or not.
In addition, a display similar to this type is also produced in the presentation example shown with reference to Figure 219(c) and the presentation example shown with reference to Figure 219(d).

When a rapid-fire operation is detected at timing t21, a display of a shell being fired from the player's tank into the minefield is displayed, and then a smoke image, which is an image of the smoke produced by the shell exploding, is displayed in place of the image of the minefield. Figure 220(b) shows an example of the display at timing t22. In this example of the display, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area. Figure 220(c) shows an example of the display from timing t23 onwards. Note that the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of rapid-fire detection. For example, if rapid-fire detection is early, the smoke image is displayed relatively at the top of the display area, and if rapid-fire detection is late, the smoke image is displayed relatively at the bottom of the display area. Furthermore, the position of the displayed smoke image does not change and continues to be displayed in the same position.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative pattern changes to the end. FIG. 220(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the reserved item is erased. Next, from timing t35, a new display of the decorative pattern changes to the end. At this time, the reserved item that was the first reserved item moves to the left and becomes larger, becoming the reserved item. Also, the reserved item that was the second reserved item moves to the left and becomes the first reserved item. Similarly, the reserved item that was the third reserved item moves to the left and becomes the second reserved item. Also, in this example, when the third reserved item moves to the left and becomes the second reserved item, it changes from a normal reserved item (white reserved item image) to a reserved item with a higher expectation (green reserved item image). FIG. 220(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 220(f) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45, when the display of the change to the end is completed.

In this way, by the player performing an appropriate operation on the operating means, the state in which the expectation level for the special result (the expectation level that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is indicated to the player is maintained.

Figure 219 (c) shows an example of a presentation when a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and starts to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the effective period for operating the attack button 3710 starts.
Fig. 221(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to Fig. 220(a).

Even if a long press operation is detected at timing t21, there is no display of shells being fired from the player's tank into the minefield. Instead, the minefield continues to be displayed approaching the player's tank. Figure 221(b) shows an example of the display from timing t22 to timing t23, when the operation valid period ends. Next, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the player's tank, causing the minefield to explode, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the image of the minefield. At the same time, the second reservation, which had previously been displayed in red, changes to a white reservation image. Figure 221(c) shows an example of the display at timing t24.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative pattern is terminated. FIG. 221(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the reserved image is erased. Next, from timing t35, a new display of the decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the reserved image that was the first reserved image moves leftward and becomes larger, becoming the reserved image. Also, the reserved image that was the second reserved image moves leftward and becomes the first reserved image. Similarly, the reserved image that was the third reserved image moves leftward and becomes the second reserved image. FIG. 221(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 221(f) shows a display example at timing t44 to timing t45, when the display of the decorative pattern is terminated. In this embodiment, a smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal reserved image can be displayed, and the reserved image (red reserved image) that was previously displayed and indicates high expectation is replaced with a normal reserved image (white reserved image). Furthermore, while the smoke image is displayed, no special display is performed to change the normal reserved image to another reserved image (e.g., a green reserved image) indicating high expectations.
The display of the smoke image continues until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved item that existed when the smoke image started to be displayed ends. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal reserved item image is displayed.
In addition, in this presentation example, an example is shown in which the hold image (red hold image) indicating high expectation is replaced with a normal hold image (white hold image) for the second hold, but if there is a hold other than the second hold that indicates high expectation, it will be replaced with a normal hold image, as with the second hold.

In this way, if the player does not perform the appropriate operation, a state will occur in which the expectation of a special result (the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is not indicated to the player, and this state will be maintained for a specified period of time.

FIG. 219(d) shows an example of a presentation in which no rapid tapping or long press of the attack button 3710 is detected during the valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22).
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and starts to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the effective period for operating the attack button 3710 starts.
Fig. 222(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to Fig. 220(a).

In this example, as in the other examples, a minefield is displayed approaching the player's tank. Figure 222(b) shows an example display from timing t22 to timing t23, when the effective operation period ends. Next, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the player's tank and explodes, and an explosion image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the minefield image. The explosion image is set to a higher display priority than the player's tank image and the reserved image, making it difficult to see the player's tank image and impossible to see the reserved image. Figure 222(c) shows an example display at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed. FIG. 222(d) shows a display example at timing t34 to timing t35. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the decorative pattern, and the explosion image makes the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern difficult to see. The reserved image also remains in an unrecognizable state. Next, a new variable display of the decorative pattern starts at timing t35. FIG. 222(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 222(f) shows a display example during the period from timing t44 to timing t45 when the variable display is completed. In this embodiment, the explosion image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image and the decorative pattern. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and the decorative pattern, and the reserved image and the decorative pattern are displayed hidden by the explosion image. Therefore, the reserved image becomes unrecognizable, and the decorative pattern also becomes difficult to see.
The display of the explosion image continues until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image that existed when the explosion image started to be displayed ends. Also, as described above, while the explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible and the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see.

In this way, if the player does not perform the appropriate operation, a state will occur in which the player is not shown the number of reserved balls in addition to the expectation of the special result (expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.), and this state will be maintained for a specified period of time.

In this way, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 219 etc., the display of the smoke image or explosion image continues even after the changing display in which the smoke image or explosion image is displayed has ended and the next changing display has begun, and the visible state of the reserved image and decorative pattern is changed according to the operation mode of the player.

In this way, when a specific condition is met (when the operation of the operation means (attack button 3710) is appropriate), a special game-related display (smoke image) is displayed across multiple display changes, and a specific effect (changed pending image) suggesting the expectation of a special result (expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is displayed; when a specific condition is met (when the operation of the operation means is not appropriate), a special game-related display is displayed across multiple display changes, and the specific effect suggesting the expectation of a special result is not displayed, thereby further increasing the player's motivation to operate the operation means. Also, by imposing graded penalties depending on the manner in which the operation means is operated, the motivation to perform more appropriate operations can be increased.

During the valid operation period, if a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected and then a successive hit is detected, an effect similar to the example of the effect shown with reference to Fig. 219(b) is performed from the timing when the successive hit was detected. In order to perform such processing, the timing when the display corresponding to the long press is executed is set to the end of the valid operation period, not the timing when the long press is detected.
With this configuration, even if an incorrect operation is made on the operating means, if the correct operation is quickly performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the display showing the expectation level becomes invisible, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

An example has been given in which the change in the display mode of the pending image is restricted or the pending image is made invisible until the variable display corresponding to the pending image that existed at the time the display of the smoke image or explosion image began ends, but it is also possible to restrict the change in the display mode of the pending image or make the pending image invisible until the variable display has been performed a number of times corresponding to the maximum number of items that can be reserved (in this embodiment, the maximum number of items that can be reserved for the first starting port 2002, which is four).
In this way, by predetermining the number of times the display changes to limit pending changes and the number of times the display changes to make the pending image invisible, the display control of smoke images and explosion images on the peripheral control board 1510 can be simplified.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 219 etc., it may be configured so that there are cases where an effect pattern is executed in which rapid tapping is required as an operational instruction for the attack button 3710, and cases where an effect pattern is executed in which a long press is required. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that, as the lines of "Sergeant Might", in the effect pattern in which rapid tapping is required, the lines of "Sergeant Might" are "Second Lieutenant! Rapid tapping of the attack button to attack those guys!" are displayed, and in the effect pattern in which a long press is required, the lines of "Second Lieutenant! Long press of the attack button to attack those guys!" are displayed.
If an appropriate operation has been performed, the same display as the display examples shown in Figures 220(b) to 220(f) may be displayed.
On the other hand, if a player presses and holds a button despite an instruction to press repeatedly, or if a player presses and holds a button despite an instruction to press and hold a button, it is advisable to display the same as the display examples shown in Figures 221(b) to 221(f).
Also, if neither repeated tapping nor long pressing is performed, it is preferable to display the same as the display examples shown in Figures 222(b) to 222(f).
Such a configuration requires the player to carefully check the contents of the operating instructions, which increases the sense of tension regarding the operation and improves the player's motivation and enthusiasm in operating the operating means.

Referring to FIG. 221, a presentation example in which a reserved image is displayed in front of a smoke image has been shown, but a modified embodiment in which a smoke image is displayed in front of a reserved image may also be used. FIG. 219(e) is a time chart showing a presentation example in this embodiment. FIG. 223 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In this example, at time t23, the minefield comes into contact with the player's tank, causing the minefield to explode, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the minefield image; however, the smoke image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and decorative patterns. Figure 223(a) is an example of the display at time t24. As shown in the figure, the reserved image is hidden by the smoke image, making it invisible.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative patterns has ended. Figure 223(b) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, a new display of the decorative patterns begins at timing t35. Figure 223(c) shows a display example at timing t36. Figure 223(d) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45, when this display of the decorative patterns has ended. In this embodiment, the smoke image is displayed in a position that overlaps with the display area of the reserved image, so the reserved image becomes invisible. Also, part of the decorative patterns that are changing becomes invisible. Meanwhile, the visibility of the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed is not impeded.

In each of the performance examples shown in FIG. 220, FIG. 221, FIG. 222, and FIG. 223, the smoke image or explosion image is displayed until the change display corresponding to all the reserved images that existed at the time of starting the display of the smoke image or explosion image is finished, but the display of these images may be finished at a predetermined timing before the change display corresponding to all the reserved images is finished. For example, at the timing (timing t35) when the change display in which the smoke image or explosion image is displayed is finished and a new change display is started, the display of the smoke image or explosion image may be finished and the reserved image may be made visible. Note that the reserved image displayed at this time may be only the normal reserved image, and the reserved image with high expectation (for example, the red reserved image) may not be displayed. Note that the period during which only the normal reserved image is displayed may be set to a condition that a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the smoke image or explosion image was finished, without being limited to the number of remaining changes.
In this way, by ending the special game-related display (display of smoke images and explosion images) in a short period of time, while prohibiting specific effects (preview effects) for a predetermined period of time and displaying only normal reserved images for a predetermined period of time, the player can only see the normal reserved images for reserved items, and cannot see the reserved images with high expectations, but can know the number of reserved items. Also, it is possible to prevent the embarrassment of other players finding out that the smoke images and explosion images were displayed for a long period of time and the player was unable to operate the operating means well.

The gaming machine may also be provided with a new operating means that can be operated when a special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image is displayed to end the special game-related display before the display end period arrives. Although this operating means may be designed to end the display early with a simple operation, it is preferable in terms of preventing erroneous operation to require a special operation such as multiple operations, since the display ends early as a result of an operation with a clear intention to end the display. Furthermore, even if the operating means is operated to end a special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image, it is preferable to configure the game machine so that the execution of a look-ahead performance is prohibited for a predetermined period of time in the game that proceeds after the special operation of the operating means is performed. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the game machine so that only a normal reserved image is displayed during this predetermined period of time.

When a long press is performed, the display may be in the manner shown in Figures 219(d) and 222 (an explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern is difficult to see), and when an operation that does not amount to repeated pressing or a long press is performed or when no operation is performed, the display may be in the manner shown in Figures 219(c) and 221 (a smoke image is displayed and the reserved image is normally reserved).
In this case, if a player dares to perform an operation different from the operating instructions, an explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative patterns are also difficult to see, resulting in a gaming situation in which a severe penalty is imposed compared to if no operation was performed.
On the other hand, if an operation that is not repeated tapping or long pressing is performed or if no operation is performed, a smoke image is displayed and only a normal reserved image is displayed, but the number of reserved items can be recognized. This is because it would be cruel to give a large penalty for a situation in which the player cannot perform an operation (for example, when purchasing a drink from a store clerk).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 219, restrictions were imposed on the display content based on the operation mode during one valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22). However, restrictions may also be imposed on the display content if the presentation as shown with reference to FIG. 219 is executed multiple times, and an operation that is not a rapid tap or long press is performed by the player during the valid operation period, or if no operation is performed multiple times (a predetermined number of times, being two or more times).
In this case, in the performance up to the specified number of times, it is possible to display a specific reserved image indicating high expectations by not displaying smoke images or explosion images regardless of the operation content, and in the performance when the specified number of times is reached, a smoke image may be displayed and only normal reserved images may be displayed as the reserved image, or an explosion image may be displayed to make the reserved image invisible.

Alternatively, if the player performs an operation that does not amount to rapid tapping or a long press, or if no operation occurs multiple times (two or more times, a predetermined number of times), a special effect may be executed in the next and subsequent changes in the decorative pattern, so that only a normal reserved image is displayed as the reserved image, or the reserved image becomes invisible.
As a special effect, for example, the effect examples shown with reference to Figures 221(a) to 221(f), 222(a) to 222(f), and 222(a) to 223(d) may be modified to execute an effect in which the player cannot intervene without generating an effective operation period in these effect examples (and without displaying a simulated operation section image), so that smoke images or explosion images are automatically displayed.
The special performance may be performed in the next variable display after the variable display in which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed, or in the variable display after a predetermined number of randomly selected times (e.g., after 2 to 10 rotations) from the variable display in which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed, or may be started after a randomly selected period of time has elapsed (e.g., after 10 seconds to 120 seconds) from the timing when the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed.

With this configuration, a penalty is imposed only if an inappropriate operation is performed multiple times, thereby preventing a situation in which a player is suddenly penalized.
In addition, since the same effects as those that were operable are automatically executed in an inoperable state, it is possible to impose restrictions on the display that suggests the degree of expectation in a natural way as an effect.
If the player continues to ignore the operation instructions, the display of the pending indication indicating high expectation will not be displayed, so the player can concentrate only on the display of the currently changing decorative pattern. In other words, it can be said that the player can change the presentation mode to suit his/her preference.

In this embodiment, the execution of a specific effect (display of a highly anticipated reserved image based on a read-ahead reserve) is restricted for reserves that existed at the time when the operation was not performed appropriately, and the execution of a specific effect is not restricted for reserves that occurred after the time when the operation was not performed appropriately. For example, the execution of a specific effect may be restricted for a predetermined number of fluctuations (number of reserved items), but in this case, it becomes possible for a player to perform an inappropriate operation on the gaming machine they were playing on, leave the store, and then cause the next player to play on that gaming machine to start playing in a state where the execution of effects is restricted, thereby committing a nuisance act against other players. Therefore, by not restricting the execution of a specific effect (read-ahead effect) for reserves that occurred after the time when the operation was not performed appropriately, it is possible to prevent a player from committing a nuisance act against other players.

Instead of continuously displaying the smoke image, the smoke image may be alternately displayed and not displayed, for example, every 0.5 seconds.
Such a configuration makes it possible to highlight specific effects (preview effects such as a bomb character image, a reserved image, etc.) that may be displayed together with a special game-related display (smoke image).

The explosion image and the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 223 may be alternately displayed and undisplayed. For example, the explosion image may be alternately displayed and undisplayed every 0.5 seconds. When the explosion image and the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 223 are hidden, the reserved image hidden by the explosion image or the smoke image becomes visible, but the reserved image displayed at this time should be only the normal reserved image (white reserved image).
By adopting such a configuration, it becomes impossible to recognize the degree of expectation regarding the reservation and it becomes difficult to recognize the number of reservations, making it possible to give an appropriate penalty to the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of the detection of the repeated taps. For example, if the detection of the repeated taps is early, the smoke image is displayed relatively at the upper part of the display area, and if the detection of the repeated taps is late, the smoke image is displayed relatively at the lower part of the display area. In other words, the later the detection of the repeated taps is, the closer the smoke image is to the display position of the smoke image displayed when a long press is detected. In addition, the smoke image displayed by the repeated tap operation and the smoke image displayed by the long press operation are the same image. Therefore, if a player performs a repeated tap just before the effective operation period ends, it is difficult to distinguish from a case where the player performs a long press operation by mistake. This makes it difficult for other players to tell whether the player performed the operation properly or incorrectly, even if they see the situation where the smoke image is being displayed, and prevents the player from being embarrassed by being noticed by other players even if the player makes a mistake in the operation mode.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 221, all of the reserved items through the fourth reserved items are displayed as normal reserved items, but the first through fourth reserved items may be displayed only with normal reserved images, but the reserved items may continue to be displayed with a reserved image that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reserved items. For example, if the reserved item is a reserved item that indicates a higher expectation, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the reserved item even if the display of a smoke image begins. Also, while the smoke image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the reserved item from a normal reserved image to a reserved image that indicates a higher expectation (for example, a red reserved image).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 222 and 223, the first through fourth reserves may be hidden by a smoke image or an explosion image, and the reserve in question may not be hidden. Furthermore, if the reserve in question is a reserve image indicating high expectations, it is preferable that the display mode of the reserve in question is not changed to a normal reserve image even if a smoke image or an explosion image starts to be displayed. Furthermore, while a smoke image or an explosion image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the reserve in question from a normal reserve image to a reserve image indicating higher expectations (for example, a red reserve image).

By configuring it in this way, the expectation level for the first through fourth reserves is not shown to the player, but the expectation level for the outcome of the currently changing decorative pattern is shown to the player by the display mode of that reserve, preventing the penalty given to the player from becoming excessive.

In the performance examples shown in Figs. 220 to 223, instead of the smoke image or explosion image, a dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed at the display position of the smoke image or explosion image. In this case, as for the reserved image, as described above, only the normal reserved image may be displayed, or the visibility of the reserved image may be restricted by the dialogue window displayed instead of the smoke image or explosion image. Also, a character string such as "Check the operation content and operate carefully!" may be displayed in the dialogue window. Alternatively, when the rapid-fire stroke is performed appropriately, "You performed the rapid-fire stroke well!" may be displayed, and when the rapid-fire stroke is not performed appropriately, "You should have performed the rapid-fire stroke." Alternatively, a character string such as "Don't confuse rapid-fire strokes with long presses!" may be displayed to indicate that there are multiple operation modes.
In this way, by displaying messages regarding the operation of the operating means, a player who is not familiar with how to operate the operating means can learn how to operate the operating means after the expiration of the effective operation period, and can operate the operating means well from the next time onwards.

In the above example, a hold image indicating high expectations is displayed instead of a normal hold image by looking ahead, but it is also possible to indicate that expectations for a specific hold are high by using other display modes other than hold images.

The display mode of the reserved image indicates the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, but the display mode of the reserved image may also indicate the likelihood that other events will occur. For example, it may indicate the likelihood of a guaranteed jackpot, or the likelihood of a miss with time reduction.

With reference to Figures 137 to 223, we have described embodiments that further increase the interest of the effects that use the operation unit. Below, we will explain embodiments that can be applied to these embodiments.

Although an example in which the operation unit is provided at the bottom of the door frame has been shown, other operation units may be used. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor may be provided on the game board, and the glass plate may be equally divided into multiple areas, for example, four areas in a cross shape: the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, and operations may be accepted when the hand approaches each of these areas. With such a configuration, the player will move his/her hand significantly upward, and will feel more like he/she is participating in the game. In this regard, sensors may be provided on the movable parts of the movable body provided on the frame (such as parts resembling rabbit ears) to detect the movement by the player, and these movable parts may have the function of accepting operation inputs by the player. In this case, the feeling of participating in the game will be further enhanced.

In the various operation instructions in each embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 137 to 223, a special display may be displayed when a specific operation that does not comply with the operation instructions (for example, operating in a different operation mode from that instructed, operating an operation unit other than that instructed, etc.) is performed. For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that would normally be displayed when an operation is performed in compliance with the operation instructions is displayed when a specific operation that does not comply with the operation instructions is performed.

On the other hand, there are players who may not like such operation inputs that require large body movements, such as tired players and elderly players. Therefore, one or more sensors may be provided in a predetermined area in the game area, and the detection of a game ball launched by a player into the game area by this sensor may be used as a substitute for the operation of the various operation units described above. In this case, the player can operate the operation unit only with his right hand, so that even tired or elderly players can perform operation inputs while launching game balls. It is also possible to accept both the operation of the operation unit and the input of the sensor provided in the predetermined area, and to display a performance corresponding to the operation input when an operation input is made to either one of them. Alternatively, the game may be configured so that the player or a store clerk can select whether the operation input is to be accepted by the operation input to the operation unit or the sensor provided in the predetermined area. Alternatively, the game may be configured so that the operation input is only performed by the game ball being launched. The predetermined area may be a dedicated performance sensor that can detect the passage or approach of a game ball on the board, or an operation input may be accepted based on the entry (detection by a sensor) of a game ball into an existing winning hole (for example, a general winning hole, a first starting hole, a gate, a large winning hole, etc.). In addition, a function as a sensor may be added to an existing predetermined member instead of a predetermined area. For example, a backflow prevention member at the top end of the rail or a collision stopper at the upper right of the game board may be provided with a sensor, and an operation input may be accepted when a game ball launched based on an operation by a player has passed or collided with the game ball. In addition, in order to correspond to a directional input of a lever, a directional input may be simulated by two or more sensors provided at different positions. In addition, the operation time may be simulated according to the number of detections per unit time. In this way, the player may adjust the launch strength of the game ball so that a predetermined sensor or the like detects the game ball, thereby realizing the acceptance of the operation input. This allows for a greater variety of effects by reducing the number of controls and enabling additional effects to be displayed based on the operation received from the controls.

With reference to Figs. 144 to 148, an embodiment capable of displaying a predetermined image hidden by a shield image has been shown, but in the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 144 to 148, simulated images simulating a plurality of operation units may be displayed, and these may be configured to be hidden by a shield image. Also, operation instruction displays may be displayed corresponding to the plurality of operation units, and these may be configured to be hidden by a shield image. Also, operation corresponding displays may be displayed corresponding to the operations on the plurality of operation units, and these may be configured to be hidden by a shield image. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who has little interest in operating the operation units to see the displays related to the plurality of operation units.
Similarly, the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 149 to 223 may be configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of operation units and a shield image.
The display of the shield image may be configured to be performed by operating a predetermined operation unit (such as the defense button 3740).

Referring to Figures 137 to 223, we have shown various effects such as "Shield bullet reach", "Special machine gun reach", "Silent machine gun reach", "Bomb character reach", "Sudden tank effect", "Full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach", but it is possible to adopt a specific technical idea in one effect as the technical idea in another effect. Also, it is possible to adopt multiple technical ideas in multiple effects as multiple technical ideas in one effect.

For example, the display of a shield image related to the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to each of the effects of the "special machine gun reach,""silent machine gun reach,""bomb character reach,""sudden tank effect,""full-power breakthrough reach," and "AI tank reach." In this case, the degree of expectation may be suggested by a method related to the "shield bullet reach" in a predetermined image (an enemy tank image, a bomb character image, a simulated image of a predetermined button, an image of an exploding shell, an image of an exploding bullet, a smoke image, a white flag image, or other image used in each effect) displayed in each effect. Also, the degree of expectation indicated in this way may be configured to be hidden by the shield image.
In addition, the predictive aspects of the "Sudden Tank Performance", the execution aspects of the predictive performance, and the technical concepts thereof may be applied to the "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach", and the "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach" may be executed over multiple variable displays.
For example, a presentation mode or technical idea using an image of a destroyed enemy tank in a "sudden tank presentation" may be applied to a presentation mode using a shield image in a "shield bullet reach" or a smoke image in a "full-power breakthrough reach."
Also, the shield image or smoke image may be configured so that the player can display it multiple times, or the shield image or smoke image may be configured to be displayed across the variable display. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the image suggesting the expectation level corresponding to the variable display that is the pre-read target (in the "sudden tank performance", the image of the destroyed enemy tank) is hidden by the shield image or smoke image.
Also, for example, in the "special machine gun reach" and "silent machine gun reach," images of shells fired from a cannon, bullets fired from a machine gun, and exploding shells and bullets may be displayed across the variable display.
Also, for example, in the "bomb character reach", a collision scene between the bomb character and the player's tank can occur not only during the change of the decorative pattern but also immediately before the change of the decorative pattern stops, and the player's tank can be configured to explode (part of the player's tank is destroyed) across the stopped display of the decorative pattern, and to cross the stopped display of the decorative pattern without exploding.In addition, immediately before the change of the change display that is the subject of the pre-reading stops, it is advisable to execute a performance that displays a large bomb character as shown in Figures 164, 169, 170, etc.
In addition, in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", it may be configured so that the player may be attacked by enemy shells multiple times during one display of the decorative pattern. Also, it may be configured so that a smoke image is displayed across the display of the decorative pattern. After performing the performance display based on the look-ahead multiple times in this way, it is preferable to display a group of enemy tanks at the final timing of the display that was the subject of the look-ahead.
Also, in the "AI tank reach", a display across multiple variable displays may be performed based on the foresight. In this case, it may be configured so that an encounter with an enemy tank occurs once or multiple times in each variable display. At least, it may be configured so that an encounter with an enemy tank occurs immediately before the display of the stop of the variation of the decorative pattern, and an image of a shell or bullet being destroyed is displayed across the variable display of the decorative pattern. Also, when the left lever 3720, which is not normally operated, is operated, a tank may fall off a cliff on the left side of the road as a performance, and a smoke image may be displayed on the screen. In this case, the display of the smoke image may be performed across multiple variable displays of the decorative pattern until the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the foresight performance display stops.
In each of the effects of "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", "Sudden Tank Effect", "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", and "AI Tank Reach", the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the defense button 3740, etc., are operable. However, for some or all of the operation parts in each effect example, the effective period may be configured to be executable during the display of the decorative pattern variation, or across multiple decorative pattern variation displays when a pre-reading effect is performed. In addition, the effective number of operations may be configured to be executable multiple times during the display of one decorative pattern variation. In addition, the display corresponding to the operation reception of the operation part may be configured to be displayed multiple times. In addition, the display corresponding to such an operation reception may be configured to be displayed across the display of the decorative pattern variation.
With this configuration, some kind of display reaction occurs in response to the player's operation on the operation unit, so it is possible to satisfy the player. Furthermore, by executing the performance display based on the operation across the variable display without being interrupted by the stopped display of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the executed performance.

Conventionally, gaming machines capable of executing a display effect in which effect images are switched according to the game situation have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340037).
However, if the display effect of switching the effect images is something that the player feels is strange, there is a risk that interest will decrease, and there is a need for a more appropriate display method for the display effect of switching the effect images. Also, by realizing a more appropriate display method, it is possible to increase interest.
Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, a gaming machine will be described that is unlikely to make the player feel uncomfortable with the display presentation that switches presentation images, and that can prevent a decline in interest and increase interest.

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 123 to 125, 137 to 148, etc. will be described with reference to Figs. 224 to 236, etc. Figs. 224 to 228 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or the modification). Fig. 229 shows the display priority of these images. Figs. 230 and 233 show time charts in this embodiment. Figs. 231, 232, and 234 to 236 show display examples in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, in special reach effects such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach," a special reach background image is displayed instead of the normal background image.

224 to 226 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, background images (normal background image A, normal background image B, special reach background image A, special reach background image B, normal background image C displayed during right hitting), images of various decorative patterns, images of the player's tank and enemy tank, belt-shaped pre-reading performance image, the reserved image, the first reserved image to the fourth reserved image, a character image for revival performance, the fourth pattern, a reserved number display image, and an error notification image are shown.
Data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modified examples is stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.
As for images other than the background image, horizontally long rectangles are shown in the figures as shown in Figures 225 and 226, and in this case the horizontally long rectangles indicate the display area. This makes it possible to clearly show the size and position of images other than the background image when they are displayed in the display area. Note that there may be cases where an explanation of an image displayed in the display area is given in figures other than Figures 225 and 226, and the same applies in these cases.

224(a) shows a normal background image A. Normal background image A is an image showing a state in which multiple tanks have gathered near a destroyed building.
224(b) shows a normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing a tank parked in a hangar.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images that are displayed when the gaming state is the normal state.

224(c) shows a special reach background image A that is displayed when the special reach effect, the "giant tank reach" effect, is executed. The special reach background image A is an image that represents the sky, the desert, and an unpaved road.
224(d) shows a special reach background image B that is displayed when the special reach effect, "enemy tank destruction reach," is executed. The special reach background image B is an image that depicts the sky, grassland, and road.

Figure 224 (e) shows a normal background image C that is displayed when the player is in a chance bonus state or time-saving state that is advantageous to the player and may occur after the end of a jackpot game state. The normal background image C is an image that indicates to the player to hit to the right.

The size (number of pixels) of the background image is the same as the size of the display area. The background image is also opaque. Therefore, no image is displayed behind the background image and is not visible to the player.

Figure 225 shows an example of decorative patterns that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. Each decorative pattern consists of a left decorative pattern, a center decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern. These are switched and displayed as appropriate depending on the progress of the presentation and the game situation.

225(a) shows a normal decorative pattern. In this figure, an example of a normal decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is shown, but each normal decorative pattern can be scrolled in a predetermined direction (for example, downward) and displayed, or can be temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position.
The display mode of the normal decorative symbols is determined according to the result of the special lottery, and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the symbols are displayed as a sequence of numbers (e.g., "222"), and if the result of the special lottery is not a jackpot, the symbols are displayed as a sequence of numbers that are not a sequence (e.g., "352"). Figure 225(a) shows an example of the normal decorative symbols being displayed as "352".
A typical decorative pattern is composed of a vertically long rectangular background area and numbers and characters arranged in front of the background area. The numbers and characters have a one-to-one correspondence.

Figure 225 (b) shows a special reach decorative pattern that is displayed when the special reach effects such as the "giant tank reach" effect and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect are executed.
The special reach decoration symbol is displayed in a smaller size than the normal decoration symbol near the center of the display area, which makes it easier for the player to see the effects that suggest the special lottery results that are executed during the "Giant Tank Reach" effect or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect.
225(c) is a modified example of the special reach decoration symbol. In this way, the special reach decoration symbol in which the numbers are displayed more emphasized may be adopted.
In addition, Figures 225 (b) and 225 (c) show a state in which the special reach decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
During the reach performance, only the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed, and the center decorative pattern may not be displayed.

Figure 225 (d) shows the right-hit decorative pattern that is displayed during a right-hit. The right-hit decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed in a game state that requires the player to hit the right, such as a probability-variant state or a time-saving state. Figure 225 (d) shows the state in which the right-hit decorative pattern is displayed stopped at "352."

As shown in FIG. 225, normal decorative patterns, special reach decorative patterns, and right-hit decorative patterns can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters, the size of the numbers, etc. This makes it easy to understand the presentation situation and game status by visually checking the decorative patterns.

226(a) shows an image of the player's tank, an image of an enemy tank, a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna", and a simulated image of a mission button 3700, which are displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" performance is executed. The display manner of these images suggests the result of the special lottery.
226(b) shows an image of the player's tank, an image of the enemy tank, an image of a line from "Sergeant Might", an image of a line from "Colonel Dyna", and a simulated image of the attack button 3710, which are displayed when the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance is executed. The display manner of these images suggests the result of the special lottery.
The specific manner in which the special lottery results are indicated will be described later with reference to Figure 233 etc.

FIG. 226(d) shows a reserved image. At the bottom of the display area, the reserved display area, the first reserved display area, the second reserved display area, the third reserved display area, and the fourth reserved display area are set from the left. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and are basically white in color. In addition, the diameter of the circle of the reserved image is larger than that of the reserved image.
The figure shows an example in which the pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and pending images are displayed in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area.
When a game ball wins the first starting hole 2002, the reserved image or reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. For example, when the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area and reserved images are displayed in the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area (i.e., when there are two reserved images), if a game ball wins the first starting hole 2002, the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area.

As shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125, based on the prediction of the reserved items, a specific reserved item image or a specific reserved item image with a different display mode (color or shape) from a normal reserved item image or a normal reserved item image (circular in white) may be displayed, and the display mode may indicate that there is a high expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the reserved item will be a jackpot.

For example, instead of the usual white reserved image, a reserved image of a specified color (e.g., red) may be displayed to indicate that there is a high expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot.
More specifically, for example, the expectation of a big win may be increased in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. Also, the probability of being displayed may be decreased in this order. In other words, the lower the expectation, the higher the probability of appearing, and the higher the expectation, the lower the probability of appearing. Note that the expectation for rainbow colors may be set to 100%. Note that, generally, it is good to make the expectation lower as the expectation increases.

Strictly speaking, there is no single color called gold, but by combining pixels that emit yellow, ochre, and white light in a specific display area in a specific manner as part of the display process, it is possible to realize a display mode that the player recognizes as gold, a color with a metallic luster.

Although strictly speaking there is no single color called the rainbow, a display process can be implemented in which pixels are illuminated in stripes in a specific display area (e.g., a specific character image) in the order of blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, green, etc., to create a display pattern that the player perceives as the rainbow. Furthermore, within this specific display area, each area illuminated in stripes may be moved in a certain direction (e.g., a direction perpendicular to the direction of the stripes).

When displaying the colors of the rainbow, it is desirable that the area in which the six colors that make up the rainbow are displayed can be simultaneously viewed within a specified display area. Depending on the size of the specified display area, some of the six colors that make up the rainbow may not be displayed. In this case, more than half of the six colors (i.e., four or more colors) are displayed, and the parts painted with each color are moved in a certain direction so that each color is displayed in sequence, allowing the player to recognize that the colors of the rainbow are being displayed.
The relationship between the expectation level and the display probability (proportion to the number of variable display times) can be configured, for example, so that the probability that the reserved image or reserved image displayed at the time of the initial winning is a white reserved image or reserved image is the highest, and the probability that the reserved image or reserved image is a rainbow reserved image or reserved image is the lowest.
In addition, it is preferable to configure the reserved image last displayed at the timing when the decorative pattern change ends so that the probability that it is a white reserved image is the highest and the probability that it is a rainbow-colored reserved image is the lowest.

In addition, the reserved image or reserved image may be displayed in green, red, or gold at the time of the initial winning, or the reserved image or reserved image that is white at the time of the initial winning may be changed to the reserved image or reserved image in green, red, or gold at a predetermined timing before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

In addition, such a change at a predetermined timing from a presentation mode indicating a predetermined expectation level to a presentation mode indicating a higher expectation level is sometimes referred to as "promotion."
Conversely, changing the presentation mode indicating a predetermined degree of expectation to a mode indicating a lower degree of expectation at a predetermined timing may be referred to as "demotion."

It is desirable to set the probability of "promotion" or "demotion" to a low value (for example, the probability of "promotion" or "demotion" being executed is about 5-10% in total when the expectation level is suggested by a specific color). This makes it possible to increase or decrease the indicated expectation level while maintaining a rough correspondence between expectation level and color. Note that promotion is a desirable event for players, but demotion is not desirable for players. Therefore, in order to prevent a decline in interest, promotion may be allowed but demotion may not be executed.

Note that the execution of a specific effect may or may not result in promotion, and effects that do not result in promotion are sometimes called "fakes." Also, when a highly anticipated effect is executed, but the variable display results in a miss, this is sometimes called a "fake."

The above shows an example in which the terms "promotion" and "demotion" are used to indicate a change in the expectation of a jackpot. However, when suggesting a gaming profit to be given to a player, a change in the gaming profit to be favorable to the player or an increase in the amount of profit given to the player may be referred to as "promotion". Conversely, when suggesting a gaming profit to be given to a player, a change in the gaming profit to be unfavorable to the player or a decrease in the amount of profit given to the player may be referred to as "promotion". For example, when a ready state formed by a "normal pattern" changes to a ready state formed by a "probable variable pattern", it may be referred to as "promotion". In addition, as an effect at the start of a jackpot game to notify the number of rounds (the number of balls dispensed per round is assumed to be constant), an effect may be executed to notify that 4 rounds will be announced at the start of the jackpot game, and that the jackpot game will continue until 8 rounds at a specified round before the 4th round. In this case, the number of rounds is referred to as being "promoted".

The reserved image and reserved image are given as examples, but the color of the image can also suggest the degree of expectation for images used in other effects, just like the reserved image and reserved image.

In addition, it has been shown that the expectation of a big win increases in the order of the reserved image colors: white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow, but it is also possible to adopt some of these colors in other performance images instead of adopting all of these colors. Even in that case, it is preferable that the order of expectation and the order of appearance probability do not change basically. For example, when three colors, white, red, and gold, are adopted as the colors of the predetermined performance images, it is preferable that the red performance image has a higher expectation but a lower appearance probability than the white performance image, and the gold performance image has a higher expectation but a lower appearance probability than the red performance image.
In addition, when three colors, blue, green, and red, are adopted as the colors of the other performance images, it is preferable to make the green performance image more promising but less likely to appear than the blue performance image, and the red performance image more promising but less likely to appear than the green performance image.
In this way, even if the indication of expectation level using specified colors is made in a different presentation, the relationship between the order of the colors and the expectation level and appearance probability does not change, so the player can recognize the rough expectation level.

Although images (such as the reserved image) have been given as an example, the degree of expectation can also be indicated for decorative members equipped with light-emitting members by the light color of the light-emitting member, in the same way as for reserved images. For example, multiple light-emitting members such as LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light may be mounted on decorative members visible to the player, and each may be made to emit light in a specified color. For gold, multiple light-emitting members may be appropriately made to emit light in yellow, white, and ochre. Similarly, for rainbow colors, multiple light-emitting members may be appropriately made to emit light in stripes in the following order: blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, green, etc. The light-emitting state of the light-emitting members may also be changed cyclically so that each color is perceived as if it is moving.

In addition, a performance with a 100% expectation of a big win and a low occurrence rate (for example, a 5% probability of being executed in a variable display that results in a big win) may be called a premium performance (or may be abbreviated to simply "premium" or "premium"). Since the expectation of a premium performance is 100%, it is not executed when the variable display result is a miss. As the premium performance, a special image (for example, a special character image, a special reserved image to a special fourth reserved image, a special icon image, or a special background image) is displayed, a special video is displayed, a special sound or special BGM is output, a special operation unit simulating image is displayed at a timing when a button operation is effective, a special reach performance is performed, and light emission control is performed to light up or blink the light-emitting decoration means in a special manner.
In addition, the present invention is not limited to these, and any of the predetermined presentation modes described in this specification may be adopted as the premium presentation. These images or videos may be displayed in rainbow colors, or rainbow colors may be adopted as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting decoration means. In addition, among these presentations, multiple presentations (two or more) may be executed in one variable display.
In addition, when describing various images displayed in these premium effects, the word "premium" (or "premier") may be added before the name of the image. For example, it is used in the form of premium image, premium character (image), premium hold (image), premium icon, premium background (image), and premium reach (effect). Similarly, sound may also be called "premium sound." When these images are displayed, reach effects are executed, or sounds are output, a big win will definitely occur.

If the premium effect is executed in 5% of the variable displays that result in a jackpot, and the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, then the probability of the premium effect being executed is 1/6000. On the other hand, compared to the premium effect, other effects have a relatively low expectation and a high execution probability. For example, the probability that the blue reserved image, which has a relatively low expectation, will be displayed is higher than the execution probability of the premium effect (e.g., 1/15). Similarly, the probability of a normal reach, which has a relatively low expectation, occurring is higher than the execution probability of the premium effect (e.g., 1/10).

When a premium effect is executed, a player who is accustomed to playing the game will instantly recognize that a jackpot will occur, and will feel great excitement not only because the occurrence of a jackpot has been confirmed, but also because a premium effect with a low probability of execution has been executed. Meanwhile, a player who is inexperienced at playing the game will gradually come to recognize that a jackpot will occur as he or she gains more gaming experience, by experiencing the flow of events in which an unfamiliar special effect is being executed and ultimately results in a jackpot.

Although it has been mentioned above that the execution of the premium effect indicates that a jackpot will occur, it may also be possible to have the premium effect indicate that a specific jackpot will occur. For example, the premium effect may be executed only when the jackpot with the highest value occurs among multiple types of jackpots with different values. For example, in the case where there are three types of jackpots, 3R jackpots, 6R jackpots, and 10R jackpots (note that the maximum amount of balls dispensed per R is the same for each jackpot), the premium effect may be executed only when the 10R jackpot, which has the most rounds, occurs. Alternatively, in the case where there are two types of jackpots, a low probability time-saving jackpot and a high probability time-saving jackpot (note that the number of rounds and the maximum amount of balls dispensed per R are the same for both jackpots), the premium effect may be executed only when the high probability time-saving jackpot occurs.

The reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2002 is displayed in the reserved display area and the first to fourth reserved display areas, but for example, in response to the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 2004 during right-handed play, the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 2004 may be displayed in a similar manner in the reserved display area and the first to fourth reserved display areas.

Alternatively, the reserved image or reserved picture corresponding to the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be displayed in the same position as the reserved image or reserved picture corresponding to the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002, but in a different display manner. For example, the reserved image or reserved picture may be represented as a hexagon rather than a circle, or by superimposing the letters "electric chute" on each circular image.

In addition, the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be displayed in the same display format as the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002, but in a different position (for example, the lower left part of the display area).
In addition, these may be combined to display the reserved image or reserved images corresponding to the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 in different positions and in different display formats.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can understand which starting port the reserved ball corresponds to.

Figure 226 (e) shows the revival performance character and its words that may be displayed when the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a reach miss state. Details of the performance using the revival performance character will be described later.

Figure 226(f) shows the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol that indicates whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, and is displayed, for example, in the upper right corner of the display area, smaller than the decorative symbols shown in Figures 225(a) to 225(d). The fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the variable display of the special symbol, and is displayed stationary according to the stationary display of the special symbol. Like the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in the form of a sequence of numbers if the special lottery result is a jackpot, and is displayed in a form other than a sequence of numbers if the special lottery result is a loss. Figure 226(f) shows the number "352" displayed stationary as the fourth symbol.

Although the fourth symbol is composed of three numbers in the embodiment shown, the result of the special lottery may be shown by only two symbols, a symbol "○" indicating a big win and a symbol "×" indicating a loss, as the type of symbol displayed as the fourth symbol. During the variable display of the special symbol, the "○" and the "×" may be displayed alternately for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds).
According to this configuration, while the decorative patterns are being displayed in a varying manner, the fourth pattern is alternately displayed as "○" and "X", and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the decorative patterns are displayed in a sequence of numbers and the fourth pattern is displayed as a "○", and if the special lottery result is a miss, the decorative patterns are displayed in a sequence other than numbers and the fourth pattern is displayed as an "X".
In this case, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped can be displayed in different ways for each variable display, but the symbols that are stopped and displayed as the fourth symbol are only two types: "○" and "×".

In this embodiment, since the change display of the first special pattern display 1403 and the change display of the second special pattern display 1405 are not performed simultaneously, the fourth pattern indicates the change status of both the first special pattern display 1403 and the second special pattern display 1405, but the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern display 1403 and the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern display 1405 may be provided separately. For example, the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern display 1403 may be displayed above the reserved number display image, and the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern display 1405 may be displayed below the reserved number display image.

Figure 226 (g) shows a hold number display image. The hold number display image consists of an image displaying the hold number corresponding to the first starting port 2002 on the upper side, and an image displaying the hold number corresponding to the second starting port 2004 on the lower side. Figure 224 (h) shows an example display where the hold number corresponding to the first starting port 2002 is 3, and the hold number corresponding to the second starting port 2004 is 0. In this way, the hold number can be confirmed not only by the hold number display image shown in Figure 226 (g), but also by the hold image and the hold image shown in Figure 226 (d).

Figure 226 (h) shows an error notification image that is displayed when some kind of abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when fraudulent behavior against the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The figure shows an example of a message that reads "Error has occurred. Please call a store attendant." The error notification image may also show specific details of the abnormality that occurred in the gaming machine or the fraudulent behavior committed by the player. In this case, the error notification image is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the fourth symbol or the image displaying the number of reserved balls.

Note that a hitting instruction image that instructs the user to operate the handle 302 may be displayed using a display method similar to that of the error notification image. For example, a hitting instruction image may display a message such as "Please hit to the right" or "Please return to hitting to the left." The display priority of the hitting instruction image should be higher than the display priority of the fourth symbol and the reserved number display image, and lower than the display priority of the error notification image.

It is also possible to place objects within a virtual space, create a moving image in which a virtual camera is moved in a predetermined manner, and display the moving image as a normal background image, thereby making the normal background image dynamically visible.
227(a) to 227(c) show examples of displaying normal background moving image A at a predetermined timing, which is generated by tracking a group of tanks entering an enemy position in a virtual space with a virtual camera. By generating and repeatedly playing back such normal background moving image A, it is possible to repeatedly display a dynamic background image in a loop.
Specifically, Figure 227(a) shows an example of a display when the group of tanks departs, Figure 227(b) shows an example of a display when the group of tanks is entering enemy territory, and Figure 227(c) shows an example of a display when the group of tanks has further entered enemy territory.

Although an example of displaying a moving image of a group of tanks advancing into enemy territory has been shown with reference to Figures 227(a) to 227(c), other types of moving images may also be displayed.
Below is an example of a normal background moving image B created by moving the virtual camera from the initial position to the right and then to the left in the virtual space. In this normal background moving image B, each tank stops in the hangar. When the virtual camera finishes moving, it returns to the position where it started moving. The direction of the virtual camera is adjusted so that it faces the direction of the tank. FIG. 227(d) shows a display example when the virtual camera is in the initial position. FIG. 227(e) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves to the right and in front of the hangar. FIG. 227(f) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves to the rightmost position. The virtual camera then moves to the left and finally returns to the initial position. The player will view the moving images of the tanks and the hangar displayed in the order of FIG. 227(d), FIG. 227(e), FIG. 227(f), FIG. 227(e), and FIG. 227(d).
When normal background moving image B is displayed in a loop, after the displays are Fig. 227(d), Fig. 227(e), Fig. 227(f), Fig. 227(e), normal background moving image B is displayed again from Fig. 227(d).

The length (playback time) of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B should be set to about 30 to 120 seconds. In this case, it is possible to display the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B in a loop with a period of about 30 to 120 seconds.
In addition, a plurality of normal background moving images, such as normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B, may be generated and displayed in a predetermined order, including normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B.
In addition, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B can also be displayed across multiple variable displays, just like normal background image A and normal background image B.

In addition, as in the embodiment described below, if the execution of a special reach effect such as a "giant tank reach" effect or an "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is started while the normal background video image A is being displayed, the background image is changed to a background image or background video image specifically for the special reach effect.
Thereafter, in accordance with the end of the special reach performance, the normal background moving image A that was displayed before the special reach performance is performed may be displayed in place of the background image or background moving image dedicated to the special reach. At this time, the normal background moving image A may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (display state shown in FIG. 227(a)), or the playback of the normal background image A may be continued even during the special reach performance, and the normal background image A that has been progressed may be displayed in accordance with the end of the special reach performance.
Although normal background moving image A has been taken as an example, normal background moving image B may also be displayed in a similar manner.

Instead of the statically displayed normal background image A and normal background image B, an example has been shown in which dynamically displayed normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B are displayed, but the special reach background image A, special reach background image B, the reserved image, and the reserved image may also be displayed as still images or dynamically using moving images. When displayed dynamically, the images may be displayed by looping at a predetermined cycle. For example, the special reach background image may be displayed by looping at a cycle of about 10 to 60 seconds. Also, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed by looping at a cycle of about 1 to 2 seconds.

228(a) to 228(c) show examples of background concealment images.
The background concealment image is an image that is displayed when switching between the normal background image A or normal background image B and the special reach background image that is displayed when the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" performance is executed. The background concealment images shown in Fig. 228(a) to Fig. 228(c) are made of black images. The background concealment image can reduce the visibility of images that have a lower display priority than the background concealment image.
A plurality of background concealment images (specifically, three) with different degrees of visibility reduction are prepared for the background concealment image. In this embodiment, each background concealment image is black, but has different transparency. Specifically, three background concealment images are prepared: a background concealment image A (FIG. 228(a)) with high transparency and low degree of visibility reduction, a background concealment image B (FIG. 228(b)) with medium transparency and medium degree of visibility reduction, and a background concealment image C (FIG. 228(c)) with low transparency and high degree of visibility reduction, which are switched and displayed in a predetermined order. Although details will be described later, by displaying each background concealment image in sequence, the switching of the background images is visually recognized by the player in a natural way. Although three background concealment images with different degrees of transparency are shown, two or four or more background concealment images may be used, or a moving image consisting of more images may be used. In this case, the switching of the background is visually recognized by the player in a more natural way.
Also, instead of preparing multiple background concealment images with different degrees of transparency, the visibility of the background image may be changed by gradually changing the transparency of one black background concealment image using the function of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. With this configuration, it is possible to smoothly change the visibility of the background image while reducing the capacity used to store the background concealment images.
Figures 228(d) to 228(f) show other examples of background concealment images. These are examples in which an image of a bomb character (specifically, bomb character A shown in the above-mentioned embodiment) is used as the background concealment image. As will be described in more detail later, a white background concealment image may also be used instead of black.

A display priority is set for each image shown with reference to Figures 224 to 228. Figure 229 is a table showing the display priority, the name of the layer in which the image is arranged, and the type of image that can be arranged in each layer. For example, a background image is arranged in layer L90, an image of the player's tank, an image of an enemy tank, and an operation instruction image are arranged in layers L75 to L80, and a decorative pattern is arranged in layer L70, and they are displayed superimposed based on the display priority set for each layer.
As shown in the table in Figure 229, the display priority is increased in the following order: background image (normal background image, special reach background image), various images displayed during a special reach (image of the player's tank, image of the enemy tank, lines from Sergeant Might, lines from Colonel Dyna, operation instruction images imitating the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700, etc.), decorative patterns (normal decorative patterns, special reach decorative patterns, etc.), pseudo consecutive count display image, strip-shaped pre-reading performance image, first hold image to fourth hold image, the hold image, line preview image described later with reference to Figure 269 etc., background concealment image, game result image described later with reference to Figure 256 etc., revival performance image (revival performance character and its lines), fourth pattern, hold number display image, and error notification image.
Specifically, the display priority of the various images, decorative patterns, reserved images, etc. displayed during a special reach is higher than the display priority of the background image, and the various images, decorative patterns, reserved images, etc. displayed during a special reach are displayed in front of the background image.
On the other hand, the display priority of the background concealment image is higher than the display priority of the background image, various images displayed during a special reach, decorative patterns, the reserved image, etc., and by displaying the background concealment image in front of these images, these images are hidden and their visibility is reduced.

Although an example in which the reserved image is arranged on layer L40 and the reserved image is arranged on layer L45 has been shown, the reserved image may be arranged on layer L26 and the reserved image may be arranged on layer L27. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background concealment image arranged on layer L30.
In addition, the reserved image may be arranged on layer L21, and the reserved image may be arranged on layer L22. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background concealment image arranged on layer L30 or the game result image arranged on layer L25.

The decorative pattern may also be placed on layer L26. In this case, the decorative pattern will not be hidden by the background concealment image placed on layer L30.

The various presentation modes in this embodiment and various modified examples are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery and the game status, etc., determined by the main control board 1310, and are executed at predetermined timing by the peripheral control board 1510.
For example, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the decorative symbols in a non-missed state (e.g., "352") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, or displays them in a reach state (e.g., "2↓2") and then finally displays them in a missed reach state (e.g., "232"). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state ("2↓2") and then finally displays them in a repeat number (e.g., "222").
In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 also decides whether or not to execute the special reach effects ("giant tank reach", "enemy tank destruction reach") or other effects described below.

First, a presentation example in which the decorative pattern does not reach a winning state and the background image does not change will be described with reference to Fig. 230(a) and Fig. 231. Fig. 230(a) shows a time chart for this presentation example, and Fig. 231 shows a display example at a specified timing for this presentation example.

Just before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative pattern stops changing. FIG. 231(a) shows a state in which the display of the decorative pattern is stopped changing. The number of reserved symbols at this time is 3. As the decorative pattern, a normal decorative pattern is displayed. In addition, as a background image, a normal background image A is displayed behind the decorative pattern.
From this state, at the timing t0, a new variable display of the decorative pattern starts. Figure 231 (b) shows the display state immediately after the variable display starts.
After that, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a manner that scrolls downward. FIG. 231(c) shows the display state at that time.
After that, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, and then at timing t5, the left decorative image is temporarily stopped and displayed. Figure 231 (d) shows the display state at that time.

Next, at timing t10, the right decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped. Figure 231 (e) shows the display state at that time. Next, at timing t15, the middle decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped. Next, at timing t16, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed temporarily stopped. At the same time, the display of the reserved image ends. Figure 231 (f) shows the display state from timing t16 to timing t17. In this state, it is shown that the special lottery result is a miss. From timing t17 onwards, a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next reserved is performed.

Next, a presentation example in the case where the decorative symbol is in a reach state but the background image is not switched will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Fig. 230(b) and the display example shown in Fig. 232. Note that during the period from timing t0 to timing t10, the same display as the presentation example shown with reference to Fig. 230(a) is performed.
In this example, at timing t10, the right decorative symbol is displayed as a provisional stop at the same number "2" as the left decorative symbol, and a reach state occurs. Figure 232 (a) shows the display state at that time. After that, at timing t20, the middle decorative symbol is displayed as a provisional stop, and at timing t21, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed as a suspended stop, and the player is informed of whether the special lottery result is a miss or a jackpot.
232(b) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a miss. In the figure, the decorative symbol "232" is displayed in a stopped state.
232(c) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a jackpot. In the figure, the decorative symbols are displayed in the sequence of "222".
After timing t22, if the special lottery result is a miss, a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the next hold is executed, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to a jackpot background image exclusively used during a jackpot, and a jackpot game state is executed.

Compared to the example of a performance that does not result in a reach state shown with reference to FIG. 230(a), the example of a performance that results in a reach state shown with reference to FIG. 230(b) has a longer display time for the decorative pattern variations. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation that the special lottery result may be a jackpot for a long period of time.

In the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 230(a) and 231 and the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 230(b) and 232, during the display of the changing decorative patterns, only the normal background image A continues to be displayed, and the special reach background image A and the special reach background image B are not displayed. Also, the background concealment image is not displayed.

In the time chart of FIG. 230(a), a performance example is shown in which the normal background image A is continuously displayed during the change of the decorative pattern (timing t0 to timing t16), during the stop of the decorative pattern (timing t16 to timing t17), and during the change of the decorative pattern from the next time onward (timing t17 onward), but the normal background image A is displayed even when the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the decorative pattern is not changing. FIG. 232(d) shows a display example after the number of reserved symbols is 0 and "253" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss is displayed in the display of the most recent change of the decorative pattern. If no winning ball is won at the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004), this display state is maintained.
In addition, the normal background moving image is maintained in a display state when the decorative pattern is not changing, similar to the normal background image. Specifically, even after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal background moving image that was displayed during the changing display of the decorative pattern continues to be played. In addition, after the normal background moving image is played to the end, it is preferable to play the moving image again from the beginning, so that the moving image is played in a loop.
Thus, the normal background image or normal background moving image is an image or moving image displayed as a background image when the decorative symbols are not displayed in a varying manner and when the game is not in a jackpot game state.

If the number of reserved items remains at zero for a predetermined period of time (if no changing display has been performed for a predetermined period of time), the decorative pattern may not be displayed.
Specifically, when the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved symbols is zero, the decorative symbols shown in Fig. 232(d) may be displayed stationary for one second, and then the decorative symbols may be displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., three seconds) until the lapse of the predetermined time, after which the decorative symbols may not be displayed. Fig. 232(e) shows an example of a display in which the decorative symbols are not displayed stationary.
This display state may be continued until a winning ball enters the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004).

In this way, when the decorative pattern determination stop period ends without any pending symbols, the period from the end of the determination stop period to the start of a new display of changing decorative symbols may be referred to as the demo period.
Alternatively, when the decorative pattern determination stop period ends with no pending symbols and a predetermined time has elapsed, the demo period may be the period from when the predetermined time has elapsed until when a new display of changing decorative symbols begins.
Alternatively, when the decorative pattern confirmation stop period has ended with no pending, and a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed during which no contact with the handle 302 is detected by the handle touch sensor 310, the demo period may be the period from when the predetermined time has elapsed until a new display of the changing decorative pattern begins.

In addition, a specific effect display that is only executed during the demo period may be started at the timing when the demo period starts or at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the demo period.
For example, the display of the decorative pattern may be interrupted when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the demo period. In this case, the background image being displayed (e.g., normal background image A) may be continued to be displayed as is as the background image. Alternatively, the background image being displayed may be made non-displayed, and a video introducing the gaming machine or the gaming machine manufacturer may be played. After the video is played for a predetermined time (e.g., several minutes), the original decorative pattern and background image may be displayed again. Also, the original decorative pattern and background image may be displayed repeatedly with the video being played.

Also, the character that appears during the reach effect may be displayed during the demo period. In this case, the character's behavior may be different from that during the reach effect, thereby preventing the player from misunderstanding that the reach effect has occurred.
Also, during the demo period, it may be assumed that no player is seated (no player is playing), and text such as "please sit" may be displayed in the display area. This can appeal to players who are looking for a gaming machine to play, and contribute to increasing the operation of the gaming facility.
Also, the display area may be shifted to a demo image display state in which a demo image is displayed to introduce the pachinko machine 1. In the demo image display state, a demo image may be displayed in front of the stopped decorative pattern, or a demo image may be displayed without displaying the decorative pattern.
These displays may be realized by playing still images or video data that has been created in advance.

In this way, even when the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then changes to a state where the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner (demo period), the normal background image A continues to be displayed.
In addition, the normal background image A continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern is not being changed, when the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004) is zero, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004) and the decorative pattern starts to be changed.

In addition, when the decorative pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved symbols is 0, and after the decorative pattern has been displayed stationary for one second, if the touch of the player to the handle 302 is not detected by the handle touch sensor 310 for a predetermined period of time, the decorative pattern may not be displayed.
Also, when the touch of the player on the handle 302 is newly detected by the handle touch sensor 310, or when a winning ball enters the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004), the display of the decorative pattern may be resumed. At the same time, the demo period may be ended, and the display of the various images displayed during the demo period may be ended. In this case, it is preferable that the normal background image A continues to be displayed regardless of whether the decorative pattern is displayed or not.

Normal background image A has been given as an example, but normal background image B and normal background image C can also be used in the same way as normal background image A, and can be displayed as background images when the decorative pattern is changing or not changing.

In addition, the normal background image may be switched from one of normal background image A and normal background image B to the other when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a predetermined number of variable displays have been performed, when a predetermined lottery has been won, when a special reach effect that is a high expectation reach effect has ended in a miss, etc.).
In addition, in the most recent decorative pattern change display that starts after a specified condition is satisfied (for example, the change display executed next to the change display in which a special reach effect was performed resulting in a miss), it is advisable to execute an effect of switching the normal background image.
In addition, the normal background images that can be displayed in a gaming state (normal state) other than a gaming state in which right-hand hitting is performed have been described as normal background image A and normal background image B, but they are not limited to two types and may be three or more types. In that case, the normal background images may be switched based on a predetermined rule, such as being displayed in a predetermined order. Alternatively, the normal background images may be switched irregularly, such as being displayed in a random order.
Also, when a game state where right-hand play is performed (probability bonus state or time-saving state) is entered as a result of a jackpot game state, the normal background image C is displayed as the background image during right-hand play. In this way, the normal background image displayed may be changed as a result of a change in the game state. Note that there may be multiple background images other than the normal background image C as the background image during right-hand play. In this case, too, the background image may be switched in the same manner as the normal background image is displayed during the normal state.

In the performance examples shown with reference to Fig. 230(a), Fig. 230(b), Fig. 231, and Fig. 232, the background image is not switched during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the normal background image is displayed continuously, but below, the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance in which the normal background image is switched to a special reach background image during the variable display of the decorative pattern will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Fig. 230(c) and Fig. 233(a), and the display examples shown in Fig. 234 to Fig. 236. Note that in the time chart shown in Fig. 230(c), a performance example from timing t0 to timing t10 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance is shown, and in the time chart shown in Fig. 233(a), a performance example from timing t10 to timing t45 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance is shown.
In addition, during the period from timing t0 to timing t13, the variable display is performed in the same manner as the performance example shown with reference to Fig. 230(b). Fig. 234(a) is a display example of a predetermined timing during a predetermined period (timing t10 to timing t13) before the background concealment image is displayed.

In this example, from timing t13 to timing t19, background concealment image A, background concealment image B, and background concealment image C are displayed in a predetermined order. In addition, at timing t16 when background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is switched from normal background image A to special reach background image B.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 233(a), background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t14 (one second). Fig. 234(b) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t14 to timing t15 (one second), background concealed image B is displayed. Fig. 234(c) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t15 to timing t17 (2 seconds), background concealed image C is displayed. Fig. 234(d) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t17 to timing t18 (one second), background concealed image B is displayed. Fig. 234(e) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t18 to timing t19 (one second), background concealed image A is displayed. Fig. 234(f) shows an example of the display during this period.

At timing t16 when the background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B, and the decorative pattern is changed to a special reach decorative pattern which is smaller than the normal decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 225 (b). However, since the background concealment image C is displayed in front of the background image and decorative pattern, it is not until timing t17 when the background concealment image B is displayed that it becomes possible to recognize that these images have been changed.
The special reach decoration symbols are displayed during the period when the special reach background image is displayed (timing t16 to timing t39). The left decoration symbols and the right decoration symbols are not scrolled downward, and are displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

From timing t30 to timing t33, there occurs a valid operation period during which acceptance of operations on the attack button 3710 is valid. Fig. 234(g) shows an example of a display during this period. Simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period, a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed, along with a line instructing the player to operate the attack button 3710.
When an appropriate operation mode is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends, a mode suggesting the special lottery result (whether or not an indication that the enemy tank has been destroyed) is displayed.

Figure 235 shows an example of the display when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a jackpot, an image of an enemy tank being destroyed is displayed. In addition, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a repeat pattern ("222") at timing t34, which is a predetermined time after the end of the effective operation period of the attack button 3710. Figure 235(a) shows this state.

On the other hand, Figure 236 shows an example of the display when the special lottery result is a miss. If the special lottery result is a miss, an image of an enemy tank passing by without being destroyed is displayed. In addition, at timing t34, which is a predetermined time after the end of the effective operation period of the attack button 3710, the special reach decoration pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a reach miss mode ("232"). Figure 236(a) shows this state.

Next, in the period from timing t36 to timing t42, the background concealed image is displayed.
Specifically, background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t36 to timing t37 (one second). Figures 235(b) and 236(b) show examples of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t37 to timing t38 (one second), background concealed image B is displayed. Figures 235(c) and 236(c) show examples of displays during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t38 to timing t40 (two seconds), background concealed image C is displayed. Figures 235(d) and 236(d) show examples of display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t40 to timing t41 (one second), background concealed image B is displayed. Figures 235(e) and 236(e) show examples of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t41 to timing t42 (one second), background concealed image A is displayed. Figures 235(f) and 236(f) show examples of display during this period.

At timing t39 when background concealment image C is displayed, the background image changes from special reach background image B to normal background image A, and the decorative pattern changes from special reach decorative pattern B to normal decorative pattern A; however, because background concealment image C is displayed in front of the background image and decorative pattern, it is not until timing t40, when background concealment image B is displayed, that it becomes apparent that these images have been changed.

During the period from timing t34 to timing t44, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a temporarily stopped state. During the period from timing t42 to timing t44, the background concealment image A is not displayed, and the visibility of the normal decorative pattern A during the temporarily stopped state is not obstructed by the background concealment image. Figures 235(g) and 236(g) show the display state at this time.

At timing t44, the decorative symbols are displayed in a static manner, and the special lottery results are shown to the player. Figures 235(h) and 236(h) show the display state during the period from timing t44 to timing t45.

Between a reach in which the background image does not change as shown in FIG. 230(b) and FIG. 232, and a special reach in which the background image changes as shown in FIG. 230(c) and FIG. 233 to FIG. 236 ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the latter has a higher probability of the special lottery result being a jackpot. For example, the former may be configured to have a probability of 3%, while the latter may have a probability of 10%.

In addition, a configuration may be made in which multiple special reaches with different expectations of a big win can be executed, and any of the special reaches can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to make the special reach background image, the image of the player's tank, the image of the enemy tank, the operation unit that requires operation, etc. different depending on the type of special reach. In this way, by visually checking the displayed special reach background image, the image of the player's tank and the enemy tank, and the operation instruction image of the operation unit, the player can know whether the expectation of a big win is high or low.
In addition, a form suggesting the degree of expectation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 145 etc. or its modified example may be adopted.

An example of a presentation in which the background image is switched at timing t16 has been shown, but since the change to the special reach background image B or a small special reach decorative pattern becomes recognizable from timing t17 onwards, the change to the special reach background image B or a small special reach decorative pattern may also be made at timing t15 or timing t17.
An example of a presentation in which the background image is switched at timing t39 is shown, but since the change to the normal background image A or the small normal decorative pattern becomes recognizable from timing t40 onwards, the change to the normal background image A or the normal decorative pattern may also be made at timing t38 or timing t40.

In this manner, in this example of effect, at timing t16, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B. Similarly, at timing t39, the background image is switched from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A.
At timing t16 and timing t39, since the background concealment image C is displayed, the player does not recognize that the background image has been switched.

The background image switching performance in this embodiment includes a period during which background concealment image A and background concealment image B are displayed in sequence, the visibility of the background image decreases, and the background image before the switch gradually becomes difficult to see (hereinafter may be referred to as a "first period"), a period during which background concealment image C is displayed and the background images before and after the switch are not visible (hereinafter may be referred to as a "second period"), and a period during which background concealment image B and background concealment image A are displayed in sequence, the visibility of the background image increases, and the background image after the switch gradually becomes easier to see (hereinafter may be referred to as a "third period").
After the end of the third period, during the period until the decorative patterns stop changing (the period from timing t42 to timing t44), the background image remains easily visible (hereinafter, this period may be referred to as the "fourth period").

With this configuration, the change in background image is perceived by the player in a natural way, and loss of interest can be prevented.
In addition, at the start of a special reach, the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image while the background concealment image is being displayed, so that the start of the special reach is perceived by the player in a natural way, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.
Similarly, when the special reach ends, the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image while the background concealment image is being displayed, so that the end of the special reach is perceived by the player in a natural way, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In such a background image switching presentation, the background image is switched during the period (second period) when the background is most difficult to see (note that the background image may be switched simultaneously with the start of the third period). This allows the background to be switched smoothly, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the presentation.
In addition, by displaying a black background concealment image over the entire display area, the luminance of the display area is reduced, and the visibility of the decorative patterns is reduced, resulting in less image movement within the display area. Therefore, a player who is less aware of the contents displayed in the display area due to operating a smartphone, etc., can be made to recognize that an opportunity has come to pay attention to the display area.
In addition, when the special reach ends, a black background concealment image is displayed and the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image, so that the display content in the display area is simplified for a certain period of time. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine, since even if the special reach display result shows the player that the result of the special lottery is a miss, the player's excitement due to the expectation of a big win calms down and he or she continues playing without losing interest in the variable display thereafter.

A display example when the special lottery result is a jackpot is shown with reference to Fig. 235, but the background concealment image is displayed only when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the special lottery result is a jackpot, the background concealment image is not displayed, and the display mode shown in Fig. 235(a) may be continued until timing t44, and the special reach decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed. Also, although the background concealment image is displayed, at timing t39, the special reach background image B may not be switched to the normal background image A, but may be switched to the jackpot background image.
With this configuration, the excitement caused by the occurrence of a big win can be maintained until the big win game starts.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 235 and 236, the result of the special lottery was indicated by the display mode of the enemy tank and the temporary stop display mode of the special reach decorative pattern, but a large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 225 (c) may also be adopted as the special reach decorative pattern indicating the special lottery result.
For example, at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t33) or at the timing when a predetermined time (one second) has elapsed since the end of the valid operation period and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed (timing t34), the decorative pattern may be changed from the small special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 225(b) to the large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 225(c).
The display of the large special reach decorative pattern continues until timing t39 during the second period, and after timing t39, the normal decorative pattern is displayed.
When the special lottery result is a jackpot and the background concealment image is not displayed, the display of the large special reach decoration pattern may be continued until timing t45.

The reserved image or reserved image may be configured not to be hidden by the background concealing image. For example, if the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236 etc. is modified to display the reserved image or reserved image in front of the background concealing image, each display example shown in Figures 236(a) to 236(h) will be displayed as each display example shown in Figures 237(a) to 237(h). Such a display can be realized by setting the display priority of the reserved image and reserved image higher than the display priority of the background concealing image. Note that the reserved image or reserved image may be configured not to be hidden by the background concealing image not only at the end of the special reach, but also at the start of the special reach.

With this configuration, the reserved image or the visibility of the reserved image is not reduced, so the player can check the number of reserved balls and can operate the handle 302 to make a decision as to whether or not to place the game ball in the first starting hole 2002.
Specifically, the background concealment image is displayed at the start of a special reach, which has a relatively long variable display time compared to a reach in which only a normal background image is displayed, or immediately after a reach-time decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also, from a state in which a reach-time decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, one reserved symbol is reduced and the next variable display is started, or a big win game state is generated and the opening and closing of the big prize winning port 2005 is started.
Therefore, if it is possible to check the number of reserved balls at the start of a special reach, it will be possible to determine whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls during a special reach when the expectation of a jackpot is high and there is not necessarily a high need to increase the number of reserved balls.
Furthermore, if it is possible to check the number of reserved balls at the end of a special reach, a player who has stopped firing game balls during the special reach can accurately decide whether or not to fire game balls again.

With reference to Figures 124 and 125, an embodiment has been shown in which a look-ahead performance display is performed over multiple variable displays based on the look-ahead results, but the method in this embodiment may be applied to modify the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236, etc., so as to perform a look-ahead performance display.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236 etc., if a pre-reading display is configured, the display examples shown in Figures 236(a) to 236(h) will be displayed as in the display examples shown in Figures 238(a) to 238(h), respectively.
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 238, a strip-shaped look-ahead performance image with a character string "Enemy tank approaching!" is displayed at the top right and top left of the display area as a look-ahead performance display in a special reach. In addition, the background concealed image A and background concealed image B are displayed to create a first period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is difficult to see, and the background concealed image C is displayed to create a second period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is not visible. Thereafter, the background concealed image B and background concealed image A are displayed to create a third period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image gradually becomes easier to see, and the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image goes from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. Such a display mode can be realized by setting the display priority of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image lower than the display priority of the background concealed image.

The display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image ends at timing t45 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern ends. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may end during the period from timing t36 to timing t42 (see FIG. 233), during which the background concealed image is displayed. In this case, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may end during any of the first to third periods. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may end during the fourth period, during which the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may end at timing t44 when the decorative pattern is stopped. In this way, the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image can also be displayed in a manner similar to that of other images such as reserved images, making it difficult or impossible to see by the background concealed image.

By displaying the strip-like look-ahead performance image even during the first and third periods during which the background concealment image is being displayed, the player can recognize under what degree of expectation the variable display of the decorative pattern has been performed.
On the other hand, by ending the display of the strip-like read-ahead performance image in the first to third periods (particularly the second period), it is possible to end the display of the strip-like read-ahead performance image in a natural manner.
Furthermore, by terminating the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is not impeded.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 238, the reserved image or the reserved image and the preview performance image are made difficult to see or impossible to see by a background concealing image.
On the other hand, the look-ahead performance image in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 238 may be displayed in front of the background concealed image, similar to the reserved image and the reserved image in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 237. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image and the look-ahead performance image are displayed in front of the background concealed image, so that these images are easily visible.
On the other hand, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed in front of the background concealing image to make them easy to see, and the preview performance image may be displayed behind the background concealing image to make them difficult or impossible to see.
Alternatively, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed behind a background concealing image to make them difficult or impossible to see, and the preview performance image may be displayed in front of the background concealing image to make them easily visible.
In addition, the superimposition of these images can be performed by appropriately setting display priority for each image and using a layer function.

If the reserved image or both the reserved image and the look-ahead performance image are not visible, the player will be more likely to recognize that the scene has been changed.
When the reserved image or both the reserved image and the preview performance image are visible, the player will find it difficult to recognize that the scene has changed, but the player can recognize the degree of expectation indicated by these images.
When only the reserved image or only one of the reserved image and the look-ahead performance image is visible, the feeling of scene change is somewhat diminished, but the player can recognize the general degree of expectation.

Furthermore, if the reserved image is displayed in a special manner that is different from the normal manner (for example, the reserved image is green or red) that indicates a high probability of winning a jackpot, the player can recognize that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot.
For example, if the reserved image is visible at the start of a special reach, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation under which the special reach is taking place.
In addition, if the reserved image is visible at the end of the special reach, it is possible to confirm under what degree of expectation the decorative pattern at the time of the reach stopped in a pattern indicating a jackpot, or in a non-pattern indicating a miss. For example, when the result is a miss under a high expectation condition, or a jackpot under a low expectation condition, the result is presented in a way that betrays the player's expectations, making the player feel a sense of surprise. Then, in the subsequent game, when the same reserved image is displayed, the player can enjoy the performance of the special reach with a sense of tension, considering that the result of the special reach will be a miss even when a low expectation condition is indicated, without losing the expectation that the result of the special reach will be a jackpot, and that the result of the special reach will be a miss even when a high expectation condition is indicated.
In addition, the display of the reserved image or reserved image can prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the gaming machine is broken.

A white background concealing image may be adopted as the background concealing image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236, etc., when a white background concealing image is modified to be displayed, the display examples shown in Figures 236(a) to 236(h) will be displayed as in the display examples shown in Figures 239(a) to 239(h), respectively.
Similar to the black background concealment image, white background concealment images A to C with different degrees of transparency are prepared, and first, the white background concealment images A and B are displayed, and the transparency is gradually decreased to gradually decrease the visibility of the image located behind the white background concealment image (Fig. 239(b), Fig. 239(c)). Next, the white background concealment image C is displayed to make the image located behind the white background concealment image invisible (Fig. 239(d)). Next, the white background concealment images B and A are displayed, and the transparency is gradually increased to gradually improve the visibility of the image located behind the white background concealment image (Fig. 239(e), Fig. 239(f)). After that, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then stopped (Fig. 239(g), Fig. 239(h)).

A predetermined character or the like may be displayed as the background concealment image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236 etc., when a plurality of bomb characters are modified to be displayed, the display examples shown in Figures 236(a) to 236(h) will be displayed as in the display examples shown in Figures 240(a) to 240(h), respectively.
In the first period in this modified embodiment, an image of a bomb character and a triangular-shaped background area begins to be displayed from the upper left and lower right of the display area as background concealment image A (Figure 240 (b)), and then background concealment image B is displayed (Figure 240 (c)).
During the second period, an image of a bomb character and two trapezoidal background areas is displayed as background concealment image C (Figure 240 (d)).
In the third period, background concealment image B is displayed (FIG. 240(e)), and then background concealment image A is displayed (FIG. 240(f)). After that, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then stopped (FIG. 240(g), FIG. 240(h)).
In this manner, in this embodiment, the background concealment image is composed of an image of the bomb character and the background region (the triangular or trapezoidal portion).
The background region may be a single color (white or black). The bomb character itself may be a still image, or may be dynamically displayed, such as by moving its hands and feet. Instead of or in addition to the bomb character, at least one of the following may be displayed as part of the background concealment image in front of the background region: a character other than the bomb character, a predetermined picture, the model name of the pachinko machine 1, or the name of a special reach that is being or has been executed.
With this configuration, the player's attention can be switched to the next varying display of the decorative symbols.

With reference to Figures 234 to 236, an example is shown in which a black background concealing image is displayed and the background image is switched at both the start and end of a special reach.
Furthermore, as the background concealment image, instead of a black background concealment image, an embodiment in which a white background concealment image is displayed with reference to FIG. 239, and an embodiment in which a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed with reference to FIG. 240 have been shown, but rather than displaying the same background concealment image at the start and end of a special reach, different background concealment images may be displayed at the start and end of a special reach.
For example, the background concealment image at the start of a special reach may be any of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc., and the background concealment image at the end of the special reach may be any of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc.,.
Specifically, a white background concealment image may be displayed as the background concealment image at the start of a special reach, and a black background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be displayed as the background concealment image at the end of the special reach.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 233(a), the first period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible, the second period during which the background image is not visible, and the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible are all the same length (specifically, 2 seconds). According to this embodiment, it is possible to simplify the display process of the background concealing image and reduce the amount of work required to develop the image presentation.

On the other hand, the lengths of the periods may be different instead of being the same. Figures 233(b) and 233(c) show modified examples (modified examples 01 to 12) in which the lengths of the first to third periods at the start and end of a special reach are different. For example, in modified example 08, the length of the first period is the longest at 3 seconds, the length of the second period is the shortest at 1 second, and the length of the third period is the middle length at 2 seconds.
In each modified example, the length of the fourth period may also differ from that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch and display the background image within a limited time without unnecessarily lengthening the time required to display the background concealing image.

The basic effects at the start of special reaches for variants 01 to 12 are shown below.

According to variant 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "third period > first period = second period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image is fully recognized is lengthened), allowing the player to enjoy seeing which of the multiple reach effects is being displayed.

According to variant 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period = second period > third period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image is completely recognized is shortened), so that the special reach performance being executed can be recognized early.

According to variant example 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach is set to "second period > first period = third period" (i.e., the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed is lengthened), thereby ensuring more time to enjoy seeing which of the multiple reach effects will be executed.

According to variant 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period = third period > second period" (i.e., the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed is shortened), allowing the special reach performance to be enjoyed for a long time.

According to variant 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (i.e., the time until the normal background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened), so that the joy of progressing to the special reach performance can be provided for a long time.

According to variant example 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach is set to "second period = third period > first period" (i.e., the time it takes for the normal background image to become completely unrecognizable is shortened), so that the background concealment image C is displayed early, allowing the player to prepare for the special reach performance early.

According to variant 07, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach "first period > second period > third period", the time until the normal background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened, and the joy of the development into a special reach performance can be provided for a long period of time, while allowing the player to recognize the special reach performance being executed early.

According to variant 08, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach "first period > third period > second period", the time until the normal background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened, and the joy of progressing to the special reach performance can be provided for a long time, and by shortening the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed, the special reach performance can be enjoyed for a long time.

According to variant example 09, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach as "second period > first period > third period", it is possible to secure more time to enjoy which of the multiple reach effects will be executed, and to make it possible to recognize early on which special reach effect will be executed.

According to variant example 10, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach equal to "second period > third period > first period," the background concealment image C is displayed early, allowing the player to prepare for the special reach performance early and ensuring more time to enjoy finding out which of the multiple reach performances will be executed.

According to variant example 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "third period > first period > second period", allowing the player to enjoy the special reach performance for a long time and to enjoy which of the multiple reach performances is being displayed.

According to variant example 12, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of a special reach the following relationship: "third period > second period > first period", the background concealment image C is displayed early, allowing the player to prepare for the special reach performance early and to enjoy finding out which of the multiple reach performances is being displayed.

The basic effects at the end of special reaches for variants 01 to 12 are shown below.

According to variant 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, the second period, and the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period > first period = second period" (i.e., the time it takes for the normal background image to be fully recognized is lengthened), allowing the player time to change their mindset for the next change.

According to variant 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is "first period = second period > third period" (i.e., shortening the time it takes for the normal background image to be completely recognized), which makes it possible to end the sense of anticipation for the current change early and create anticipation for the next change (enabling a quicker change of mood).

According to variant example 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period > first period = third period" (i.e., the period during which the background concealing image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed is lengthened), making the time during which the background concealing image C is displayed feel longer and creating anticipation that the normal background image will not be displayed.

According to variant example 04, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "first period = third period > second period" (i.e. shortening the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed), it is possible to make the normal background image, although less visible, recognized early, ending anticipation for the change early and creating anticipation for the next change (enabling a quicker change of mood).

According to variant 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, second period and third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened), allowing the player to enjoy the afterglow of missing the fluctuation.

According to variant 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period = third period > first period" (i.e., the time it takes for the special reach background image to become completely unrecognizable is shortened), which makes it possible to end the sense of anticipation for the current change early and create anticipation for the next change (enabling the player to quickly change their mood).

According to variant 07, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first to third periods at the end of the special reach "first period > second period > third period", it is possible to enjoy the afterglow of the missed fluctuation, and also to end the expectation for the fluctuation early and create anticipation for the next fluctuation (enabling the player to quickly change their mood).

According to variant 08, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "first period > third period > second period", it is possible to enjoy the afterglow of the missed fluctuation, and also to end the expectation for the fluctuation early by making the normal background image, although it is less visible, recognized early, and to create anticipation for the next fluctuation (enabling a quicker change of mood).

According to variant example 09, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "second period > first period > third period", the time during which the background concealment image C is displayed can be made to feel longer, creating anticipation that the normal background image may not be displayed, and by making the player recognize the normal background image early when it is displayed, anticipation for the next change can be created (enabling the player to quickly change their mood).

According to variant example 10, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "second period > third period > first period," the time until the special reach background image becomes completely unrecognizable is shortened, and the background concealment image C is displayed for a long time when the expectation for the change was thought to have ended early, creating a new expectation.

According to variant example 11, by making the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach "third period > first period > second period", the normal background image is recognized early, although it is less visible, and the sense of anticipation for the change is ended early, and by lengthening the time until the normal background image is completely recognized, it is possible to take time to change one's feelings for the next change.

According to variant example 12, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, second period and first period at the end of the special reach is "third period > second period > first period", which ends the sense of expectation for that change early and lengthens the time until the normal background image is completely recognized, allowing time for the player to change their feelings for the next change.

In addition, the display mode of the background concealed image at the start of a special reach in the embodiment shown in Figure 233(a) and each of the modified examples shown in Figure 233(b) and Figure 233(c) may be appropriately combined with the display mode of the background concealed image at the end of a special reach in the embodiment shown in Figure 233(a) and each of the modified examples shown in Figure 233(b) and Figure 233(c). For example, at the start of a special reach, each background concealed image may be displayed in the mode of modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, each background concealed image may be displayed in the mode of modified example 02.
According to this configuration, the background image can be switched in a more appropriate manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 233(a), the number of seconds for each of the first to third periods was 2 seconds, and the total number of seconds was 6. In the embodiments shown with reference to Fig. 233(b) and Fig. 233(c), the number of seconds for each of the first to third periods was 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds was 5 to 7 seconds, but these are merely examples.
For example, the first to third periods may each be set appropriately within a range of about 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds may also be set appropriately within a range of about 3 to 9 seconds. Note that the number of seconds for each period may be made shorter or longer as long as an effect is observed.

As shown in Modifications 04, 05, 08, and 11 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the first period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 01, 04, 08, 11, and 12 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the third period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 04, 08, and 11 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the first and third periods.

During the first and third periods, the transparency of the background concealing image changes dynamically and is visible, and although the visibility of the decorative patterns and background image is reduced, they are not invisible. On the other hand, during the second period, the decorative patterns and background image become invisible and appear to have stopped being displayed, which may lead some players to mistakenly believe that the gaming machine has broken down (or that a freeze effect has occurred, indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery will result in a jackpot); however, by making the second period relatively shorter than the first and third periods, it is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

In addition, when a black background concealment image is displayed, the player's own face or light from the light-emitting means of a gaming machine located behind the gaming machine may be reflected in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and be visible to the player, which may reduce the player's sense of immersion in the game. This tendency is more pronounced when a glossy (glare) type display device is used as the liquid crystal display device that constitutes the game board side performance display device 1600. However, the occurrence of such a situation can be prevented by making the second period shorter than the first and third periods.

It is also possible to execute the third period after executing the first period without providing the second period. In this case, the background image may be switched at the timing of switching from the first period to the third period. The same effect can be obtained with such a configuration.
In the embodiment and modification shown in Fig. 233, when the second period is not provided, the start timing of the first period may not be changed and the third period may be executed after the end of the first period. Alternatively, the end timing of the third period may not be changed and the end timing of the first period may be modified to coincide with the start timing of the third period.

As shown in Modifications 03, 06, 09, 10, and 12 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the first period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 02, 03, 07, 09, and 10 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the third period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 03, 09, and 10 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the first period and the third period.

With this configuration, the background image and decorative patterns are hidden by the background concealment image for a longer period of time, making them invisible, so that the display content in the display area is simplified and the player's attention can be shifted to the presentation and game situation after the background image has been changed.
For example, when a special reach begins, the player's attention can be focused on the content of the performance that will be performed during the special reach. In this case, multiple special reach performances with different expectations can be performed as special reach performances, and one of the special reach performances can be performed (the "giant tank reach" performance described later is one example). In this case, the player can be teased as to which special reach will develop, which can increase the interest.
On the other hand, when the special reach ends, the player can switch his/her attention to the next pattern change or big win game.

Furthermore, when a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed as the background concealment image, the player can take time to carefully observe the displayed background concealment image during the second period, which allows the player to change his/her mind. The background concealment image may be dynamically displayed, such as a character moving around on the screen. In this case, the player's mind can be changed to the next pattern change or big win game.
On the other hand, black or white background concealment images only change transparency and the image itself does not move, so the player is not given unnecessary information, the division of the performance can be made clearer, and the player can change his/her mood.

As shown in variants 02, 05, 07, 08, and 09 of FIG. 233, the first period may be longer than the third period.

This configuration allows the player to fully perceive that the background image has started to change, preventing the player from being unable to understand how the presentation has changed. If the first period is shorter than the third period, the player may not be able to understand how the presentation has changed.

As shown in variants 01, 06, 10, 11, and 12 of FIG. 233, the third period may be longer than the first period.

According to this configuration, the special reach background image is gradually displayed at the start of the special reach, so the player feels teased and the expectation of the special reach increases. In this case, it is possible to configure the special reach performance to be a plurality of special reach performances with different expectation levels, and to perform any one of the special reach performances (the "giant tank reach" performance described later is one example). In this case, the player is interested in which special reach performance will be performed, and by lengthening the third period, the player can feel even stronger interest.
In addition, the visibility of the special reach background image can be quickly reduced when the special reach ends, allowing the player to switch his/her attention to the next pattern change or big win game. This is particularly effective when the result of the special lottery is a miss.

The embodiments shown in Figures 233(a) to 233(c) may be modified so as not to provide the first period. In this case, the background concealing image may be hidden during the period that would have been the first period, and the second period may be configured to start at the timing shown in the figures.
Even in the case where the first period is not provided in this way, the same effect as that described above can be achieved.

The embodiments shown in Figures 233(a) to 233(c) may be modified so that the third period is not provided. In this case, the background concealing image may be hidden during the period that would have been the third period, and the second period may end at the timing shown in the figures.
Even in the case where the third period is not provided in this manner, the same effect as that described above can be achieved.

The type of background concealment image displayed at the start of a special reach may also be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the likelihood of a jackpot may be higher when a white background concealment image is displayed than when a black background concealment image is displayed.

The display mode of the background concealment image may be configured not to indicate the probability of a big win. For example, even when a special reach with a different probability of a big win is executed, the same background concealment image may be displayed.
With this configuration, the player waits for the end of the background concealment image display while feeling a sense of anticipation about what kind of special reach will occur. Also, when the special reach ends, the player can calmly face the next and subsequent decorative pattern changes and big win games.

In the middle of a special reach effect, the effect content may be switched to a special reach effect with a higher expectation level. In this case, any of the above-mentioned modes may be adopted to display a background concealment image. In this case, the special reach effect after the switch may be configured to display one of a number of special reach background images with different jackpot expectation levels.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the background image is made invisible by the background concealing image, it is also possible to make it difficult to see, instead of making it invisible.
For example, even in the second period in which the visibility of the background image is most reduced by the background concealing image, the background image may be configured to be visible through the background concealing image rather than being invisible. For example, when a black background concealing image is used, the background image may be configured to be visible in the second period in a display state intermediate between the display state shown in FIG. 234(c) and the display state shown in FIG. 234(d).
Alternatively, the size of the background concealing image may be set to a size capable of concealing most of the background image (at least 70% or more, and preferably 90% or more), rather than a size capable of concealing the entire background image, and this background concealing image may be displayed during the second period.
These aspects may also be combined.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change in background image.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a black background concealing image, a white background concealing image, a background concealing image made up of a bomb character, etc., are displayed as the background concealing image, these background concealing images may be displayed simultaneously.
For example, the display area may be divided and a different background concealment image may be displayed for each divided area. For example, a black background concealment image may be displayed on the right half of the display area, and a white background concealment image may be displayed on the left half of the display area.
Moreover, a display priority may be set for the background concealing images, and the background concealing images may be displayed in an overlapping manner.
For example, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like and a black background concealment image may be displayed, and the display priority of the background concealment image consisting of the bomb character or the like may be set higher than the display priority of the black background concealment image. In this case, the background concealment image consisting of the bomb character or the like narrows the area in which the background image is visible from the left and right, and is perceived by the player in such a manner that the visibility of the background image is reduced even within the area in which the background image is visible. Note that a white background concealment image may be displayed instead of a black background concealment image.
The display times (lengths of the first to third periods) of the multiple background concealed images displayed in this manner may be any one of the embodiments or modifications thereof shown in Fig. 233. Alternatively, a different display time (a different one of the embodiments or modifications thereof shown in Fig. 233) may be used for each background concealed image.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change in background image.

At the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a losing state, the background image itself is darkened, and the background image is switched using a background concealment image that is brighter than the background image (for example, a white background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc.).
This allows the player to clearly see that the background concealment image has been displayed, and the player can recognize that the presentation content has changed, allowing the player to switch his or her attention to the next pattern change.

On the other hand, at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed as a miss, the background image itself may be darkened and the background image may be switched using a black background concealment image. In this case, the visual difference between the background image and the background concealment image becomes smaller, making it less noticeable that the background image has been switched.

In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 224 to 240, display effects were performed using the display area, but these embodiments may be modified so that in addition to these display effects, effects using decorative members provided in the vicinity of the display area may be performed simultaneously.
Referring to Figure 241 etc., the following describes the tank device 3770 which lights up and moves during a special reach, thereby adding excitement to the special reach.

The tank device 3770 is a three-dimensional device that mimics the shape of a tank when viewed from behind, and is provided on the game board 5. When viewed from the front, the tank device 3770 is provided at the bottom, in front of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Figure 241 shows the positional relationship between the display area and the tank device 3770 when viewed from the front.

The tank role 3770 has a tank role light-emitting part (not shown). The tank role light-emitting part is equipped with a full-color LED, and can be in a non-emitting state or a emitting state of a predetermined color. As a specific light-emitting mode, for example, the tank role light-emitting part can be lit up or flashed in white, green, red, or yellow.
In addition, the tank role 3770 has a function of moving vertically between a lower standby position and an upper moving position by driving a tank role drive mechanism (not shown). Also, it is possible to stop at any position between the standby position and the moving position.

Figure 241 (a) shows the tank part 3770 in a non-illuminated standby position.
Figure 241 (b) shows the tank part 3770 emitting light in a predetermined color (e.g., red) and positioned in a standby position.
241(c) shows a state in which the tank role object 3770 is not emitting light and is located at a moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank role object 3770 overlap and are visually recognized by the player.
241(d) shows a state in which the tank role object 3770 is emitting light in a predetermined color (e.g., red) and is located at a moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank role object 3770 overlap and are visually recognized by the player.

241(b) and 241(d) show an example in which the reserved image display area is displayed in red, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the usual reserved image, instead of the usual white reserved image. Also, the tank role object 3770 is positioned at the standby position or the moving position, and the tank role object 3770 is illuminated in the same red color as the reserved image.
Although red is given as an example of the color of the reserved image, the color is not limited to red and may be green or gold.

The tank feature 3770 may be configured to move from a standby position to a moving position when a special reach begins.

The lighting and movement of the tank feature 3770 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery.

Below, an embodiment that is a variation of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 233(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 242(a). Note that aspects other than the tank prop 3770 and the reserved image are basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a) etc., so a description of these will be omitted.

Figure 242 (a) is a time chart showing an example of the presentation in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the tank device 3770 does not move from its standby position, but emits light in the same color as the reserved image, red, to indicate a high expectation of a jackpot. The reserved image may be turned red when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and the reserved image is displayed, when the variable display begins (timing t0), or at a specified timing during the variable display (for example, a specified timing during the period from timing t1 to timing t33).

In the embodiment shown in Fig. 242(a), the reserved image is displayed in red as the reserved image until timing t45 when the variable display ends and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed for one second. Note that the reserved image is difficult to see or cannot be seen during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 when the background concealment image is displayed and during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
On the other hand, the tank character 3770 remains in the standby position without moving during the period from timing t0 when the variable display begins to timing t45.
The tank device 3770 begins to emit red light when the pending image is displayed in red (as described above, at the timing of the initial winning, at the timing when the changing display begins, at a specified timing during the changing display, etc.), and continues to emit red light until timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(b).
242(b) is a time chart showing modified example 01. In modified example 01, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t36, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank character object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(c).
242(c) is a time chart showing modified example 02. In modified example 02, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t38, which is the timing when the display of the background concealment image C starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(d).
242(d) is a time chart showing modified example 03. In modified example 03, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of the background concealment image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(e).
242(e) is a time chart showing modified example 04. In modified example 04, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t42, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(f).
242(f) is a time chart showing modified example 05. In modified example 05, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t36, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(g).
242(g) is a time chart showing modified example 06. In modified example 06, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t38, which is the timing when the display of the background concealment image C starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(h).
242(h) is a time chart showing modified example 07. In modified example 07, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of the background concealment image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(i).
242(i) is a time chart showing modified example 08. In modified example 08, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

Next, another modified example will be shown with reference to FIG. 243. Note that FIG. 243(a) is the same as FIG. 242(a).

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(b).
243(b) is a time chart showing modified example 09. In modified example 09, the display mode of the reserved image remains red until timing t45. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in luminance from timing t40 to timing t42, and emits red light at the original luminance from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(c).
243(c) is a time chart showing modified example 10. In modified example 10, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t39, the luminance increases from timing t39 to timing t42, and the tank role object 3770 emits red light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(d).
Fig. 243(d) is a time chart showing modified example 11. In modified example 11, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t38, the light is turned off from timing t38 to timing t40, the luminance increases with the white light emission color from timing t40 to timing t42, and the white light is emitted from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(e).
243(e) is a time chart showing modified example 12. In modified example 12, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t39, the light emission color changes from red to white at timing t39, the luminance increases with the white light emission color from timing t39 to timing t42, and the white light is emitted from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(f).
243(f) is a time chart showing modified example 13. In modified example 13, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t38 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(g).
243(g) is a time chart showing modified example 14. In modified example 14, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t39, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(h).
243(h) is a time chart showing modified example 15. In modified example 15, the display mode of the reserved image remains red until timing t45. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

In these embodiments, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation by making the illuminating decorative component (tank device 3770) glow in the same color as the reserved image.
In addition to displaying the background concealing image, when switching the background image, it is possible to switch the display mode of the reserved image or to end the display of the reserved image.
At this time, the brightness of the light emitted from the luminous decorative member is gradually decreased as the visibility of the background image decreases, or the brightness of the light emitted from the luminous decorative member is gradually increased as the visibility of the background image increases, thereby making the luminous decorative member look natural.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the reserved image is displayed until timing t45, the display of the reserved image may be ended at timing t44, which is the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, at the same time as the display of the reserved image is ended, the luminous color of the tank role object 3770 may be changed from the luminous color of the reserved image to the normal luminous color, white.

In variant example 15 of Figure 243, the pending image is displayed in red and the tank character 3770 is turned off at timing t38, but instead of being turned off, it may be illuminated in white.
In variants 11 to 13 of Figure 243, at timing t39, the red reserved image is changed to a white reserved image or the reserved image is made invisible, but at this time the red illumination state of the tank feature 3770 may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern begins or timing t45 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern ends).

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the light emission state of the tank role object 3770 is changed to white or turned off, it is also possible to modify the state so that, at the timing when the light emission state of the tank role object 3770 is changed to white or turned off, the light emission state of the tank role object 3770 is stopped from matching with the light emission state of the pending display and a state in which it is simply illuminated as a decoration is started. In this case, the degree of expectation may not be indicated by the light emission state, or a light emission state that matches the type of normal background image being displayed may be adopted.

It may be possible to implement a performance in which, during the varying display of the decorative pattern, the reserved image or reserved image is changed to another reserved image or reserved image that indicates a higher degree of expectation.
For example, at timing t25 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a), the reserved image in red may be changed to the reserved image in gold. This allows the player to know that the expectation is higher.
During the first to third periods in which the background concealment image is displayed, it is preferable not to change the pending image or the pending image to another display mode indicating a different degree of expectation.
With this configuration, the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is guaranteed at the time when the expectation level changes, preventing the player from missing the reserved image or the change in the display mode of the reserved image.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 242(a) will be described below with reference to Fig. 244(a). Note that, other than the movement of the tank role object 3770, the performance is basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 242(a) and the like, so the description of these will be omitted.
In this embodiment, when a special reach is executed, the tank role object 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position, and then moves from the moving position back to the standby position.
As described above, Fig. 241(a) and Fig. 241(b) show the state where the tank role object 3770 is in the standby position. Also, Fig. 241(c) and Fig. 241(d) show the state where the tank role object 3770 is in the moving position.

In this embodiment, the tank role object 3770 is located in a standby position from timing t0 to timing t21. After that, it moves upward from the standby position to the moving position from timing t21 to timing t24. It is located in the moving position from timing t24 to timing t36. It moves downward from the moving position to the standby position from timing t36 to timing t42. It is located in the standby position from timing t42 to timing t45. It is recommended that these movements of the tank role object 3770 be performed at a constant speed.

In addition, the tank device 3770 will begin to emit red light when the pending image is displayed in red (such as the timing of the initial winning or the timing of the start of the variable display, as described above), and will continue to emit red light until timing t45.
In this manner, in this embodiment, the downward movement of the tank character 3770 begins at the same time as the display of the background concealment image begins, and the downward movement of the tank character 3770 ends at the same time as the display of the background concealment image ends.

It is advisable to configure the tank device 3770 so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when it moves upward than when it does not.

This configuration makes it possible to make the action of moving the movable decorative member (chassis 3770) from the moving position to the standby position less noticeable. Therefore, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the joy of the player who is happy about winning the jackpot from diminishing. It is also possible to make it less likely for a player who loses to feel disappointed that their hopes were high but the result was a loss.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 244(a), the tank role object 3770 is moved downward during the period from timing t36 to timing t42. Below, an embodiment in which the timing for moving the tank role object 3770 downward is modified will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 244(b).

Variation example 01 is an example in which the tank role object 3770 is moved from the moving position to the standby position between timing t34 and timing t36.
Similarly, in Modifications 02 to 14, the tank part 3770 moves from the moving position to the standby position at each of the timings shown in FIG. 244(b).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 244(a) and 244(b), the movement of the tank part 3770 starts and ends simultaneously with the start and end of the period before the visibility of the background image decreases, the period when the background image becomes gradually less visible (first period), the period when the background image is not visible (second period), the period when the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image has returned to normal (fourth period). However, these embodiments may be modified so that the downward movement of the tank part 3770 starts in the middle of a certain period, or the downward movement of the tank part 3770 ends in the middle of a certain period.
For example, the downward movement may start at timing t37 in the middle of the first period and end at timing t39 in the middle of the second period. Also, for example, the downward movement may start and end within the second period.

In this way, by moving the movable decorative member (tank character 3770) from the moving position to the standby position near the time when the background concealment image is displayed and the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases, the movement of the movable decorative member returning to the standby position can be made less noticeable.

Each embodiment of the movement mode of the tank character 3770 shown with reference to Figures 244(a) and 244(b) may be combined with each embodiment of the display mode of the pending image and the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 shown with reference to Figures 242(a) to 242(i) and 243(a) to 243(h).
For example, the embodiments described in Figure 244 may be combined with the embodiments described in Figure 242 or Figure 243 at the timing shown in the figures to move and illuminate the tank character 3770 and display the reserved image.
Alternatively, the light emission pattern or change in the pending image shown in Figures 242 and 243 may begin at the timing when the period in which the tank character 3770 shown in Figure 244 moves downward begins or ends.
Alternatively, the lighting pattern and the change in the reserved image shown in Figures 242 and 243 may begin exactly in the middle of the period during which the tank character 3770 shown in Figure 244 moves downward.

With this configuration, the light emission pattern of the tank part 3770 can be made more or less noticeable.
Even if a background concealment image is displayed in the display area, reducing the visibility of the display area, the movable decorative member (chariot part 3770) is illuminated, allowing the player to know the degree of expectation of a hit or miss result.
Alternatively, when a background concealment image is displayed in the display area, reducing the visibility of the display area, the movable decorative member (tank character 3770) can be turned off, making the movement of the movable decorative member less noticeable.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 233 to 236, the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern is reduced simultaneously, but an embodiment modified to vary the timing of these will be described with reference to Figures 245 and 246.

Note that Figure 245(a) shows a presentation pattern that is basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233(a) etc., except for the addition of an explanation of the visual appearance of the decorative pattern, so explanation of this will be omitted.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 245(a), during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42, the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern gradually decreases until the background image and decorative pattern become invisible, and then the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern gradually increases.

Figure 245(b) shows an embodiment in which the embodiment shown in Figure 245(a) is modified so that the visibility of the background image and the visibility of the decorative pattern may not match.

In variant example 01, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t14 to timing t15, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t15 to timing t17, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t17 to timing t18.
In addition, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t37 to timing t38, the decorative pattern becomes unnoticeable from timing t38 to timing t40, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t40 to timing t41.

Similarly, in variants 02 to 08, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases, the decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases at the respective times shown in FIG. 245(b).

Fig. 246 shows a display example corresponding to Modification 03 of Fig. 245(b). Also, Fig. 246(a) to Fig. 246(h) show display states corresponding to the respective display states shown with reference to Fig. 236(a) to Fig. 236(h).
Fig. 246(b) shows a display example from timing t37 to timing t38 in modified example 03 of Fig. 245(b). This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is not reduced. In order not to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern, it is preferable to temporarily set the display priority of the decorative pattern higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.
Fig. 246(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t43. This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is not reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced. In order to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern when the background concealment image is not displayed, it is preferable to display a black semi-transparent image in front of the decorative pattern.
As Figures 246(a), 246(c) to 246(f), and 246(h) are similar to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 236(a), 236(c) to 236(f), and 236(h), explanations thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the special reach in the embodiment shown in Fig. 245(a) and each modified example shown in Fig. 245(b) may be appropriately combined with the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbols at the end of the special reach in the embodiment shown in Fig. 245(a) and each modified example shown in Fig. 245(b). For example, at the start of the special reach, the decorative symbols may be displayed in the form of modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, the decorative symbols may be displayed in the form of modified example 02.
With this configuration, the background image can be appropriately switched according to the content of the presentation.

Referring to FIG. 246, an embodiment in which a black background concealment image is displayed has been shown, but instead of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be displayed.

According to the embodiments of variant example 01, variant example 02, variant example 03, variant example 04, and variant example 06, the time during which the decorative pattern is visible can be extended when the background image is switched, thereby preventing the player from being unable to understand the game content.
According to the embodiments of Modification 03, Modification 05, Modification 06, Modification 07, and Modification 08, the time during which the decorative symbols are difficult to see can be lengthened when the background image is switched. This allows the player to focus on the display contents other than the decorative symbols when the special reach begins, and improves interest. In addition, when the special reach ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner indicating a reach failure or a jackpot, and in the case of a reach failure, the player's disappointment can be alleviated. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, the player's interest can be improved by teasing him.

During the special reach, a special decorative pattern with a different design from that during the variation of the normal decorative pattern is displayed. Specifically, during the normal reach, a large normal decorative pattern with a character as shown in FIG. 225(a) is displayed, and during the special reach, a small special reach decorative pattern without a character as shown in FIG. 225(b) is displayed. Note that although the design of the decorative pattern is different, the numbers indicated by the decorative pattern are the same before and after the background concealment image is displayed.
At the end of the special reach, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the first period, the special reach decorative pattern is changed to a normal decorative pattern in the second period, and the normal decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the third period.
During the temporary stop display, the displayed decorative pattern is not changed to another decorative pattern with a different number, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that the decorative pattern periodically swings, and the swinging manner may be the same or different in the first period and the third period. For example, the manner of the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern in the first period and the third period may be one of a swinging manner in the up-down direction, a swinging manner in the left-right direction, and a swinging manner that rotates around the up-down direction as an axis.
In addition, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be the same as the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be one second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be set to 2 seconds, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 1 second, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 2 seconds.

In this way, by making the display mode different between the normal decorative pattern and the special reach decorative pattern when temporarily stopped, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special reach decorative pattern.

The oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. Similarly, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 3 seconds, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 1 second, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 3 seconds.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. Similarly, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 3 seconds.

In this way, by making the display mode different between the normal decorative pattern and the special reach decorative pattern when temporarily stopped, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special reach decorative pattern.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a), the length of the third period, which is the period during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see, is set to 2 seconds, and the length of the fourth period, which is the period after the visibility of the background image returns to the original state, is set to 2 seconds, but the fourth period may not be provided and the change of the decorative pattern may be stopped at the end timing of the third period. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 233(a), the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the timing t42 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 233(b), the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the timing t43 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modified examples 02 to 12, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the third period ends.
The fourth period may be shorter than the third period. For example, if the third period is 2 seconds, the fourth period may be shorter than 2 seconds.

With this configuration, the decorative pattern can be definitively displayed promptly after the end of the third period.

Referring to Figure 233 (a), in the embodiment, the display of the reserved image was terminated at timing t44 when the decorative pattern was displayed in a stopped state, but a dynamic display in which the reserved image is erased may be performed for a short period of time from timing t44.
At this time, rather than simply terminating the display of the reserved image, a concealed image that conceals at least a part of the reserved image may be displayed in front of the reserved image simultaneously with the stopped display of the decorative pattern, and then the display of the reserved image and the concealed image may be terminated after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds have elapsed.
Alternatively, the reserved image itself may be dynamically erased and displayed in the same manner. For example, the size of the reserved image may be gradually reduced, and after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds, the size of the reserved image may be set to 0, and the display of the reserved image may be terminated.

With this configuration, the player can accept the result of the special lottery without being bound by the expectation level shown during the varying display.
In addition, the display of the reserved image can be ended in a natural manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 233 to 236, the decorative symbols provisionally displayed at timing t34 indicate whether the result of the special lottery is a miss or a jackpot. However, an embodiment in which this embodiment is modified so that the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a display mode indicating a miss, and then change to a display mode indicating a jackpot, will be described below with reference to Figures 247 to 251. Note that after the decorative symbols are provisionally displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, the decorative symbols do not change to a display mode indicating a miss.

In this embodiment, at timing t34 during a special reach, the left, center, and right special reach decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (for example, "232"), and then a revival effect is executed after the temporary stop miss. After the revival effect is executed after the temporary stop miss, the normal decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss, or the normal decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot.

247 to 249 are time charts showing examples of effects in this embodiment. Figures 250 and 251 are diagrams showing examples of displays in this embodiment.
In addition, as for the presentation modes other than the revival presentation after a temporary stop miss, they are basically the same as those in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233 (a) etc., so explanations of these will be omitted.

Figures 247(b), 248(b), and 249(b) show the display time of the decorative patterns when the revival performance after the temporary stop is unsuccessful and the display time of the decorative patterns when the revival performance after the temporary stop is unsuccessful.
Figures 247(c) to 247(g), 248(c) to 248(f), and 249(c) to 249(h) show examples of presentation in the display area when the revival performance after a temporary stop misses fails, and examples of presentation in the display area when the revival performance after a temporary stop misses is successful.
FIG. 250 shows an example of the display in the display area when the revival performance after a temporary stop misses fails, and FIG. 251 shows an example of the display in the display area when the revival performance after a temporary stop misses is successful.

Of these examples, the revival effect after a missed temporary stop will be explained with reference to the time chart (variation 06) shown in Figure 248 (d) and the display examples shown in Figures 250 and 251.

In the modified example 06, at the timing t34, the reach-time decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss. Fig. 250(a) and Fig. 251(a) show a state in which the reach-time decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss.
Next, from timing t36 to timing t37, a bomb character and an image of the dialogue "You still have a chance!" are displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Figures 250(b) and 251(b) show the display state from timing t36 to timing t37. Figures 250(c) and 251(c) show the display state from timing t37 to timing t38.
Next, from timing t38 to timing t39, the bomb character and the dialogue image move from the upper right corner of the display area to the center of the lower part of the display area.
From timing t39 to timing t40, together with the bomb character, either an image with the dialogue "There's nothing I can do..." indicating that the revival performance after the temporary stop miss has failed, or an image with the dialogue "A feeling of victory!" indicating that the revival performance after the temporary stop miss has succeeded is displayed. Fig. 250(d) shows a display example when the revival performance after the temporary stop miss has failed, and Fig. 251(d) shows a display example when the revival performance after the temporary stop miss has succeeded.

If the revival performance after the provisional stop is unsuccessful, the bomb character and the dialogue image are no longer displayed at timing t40, and the same display as that in the case where the revival performance after the provisional stop is not performed is performed from timing t40 to timing t45.
Figure 250(e) shows an example of a display from timing t40 to timing t41, Figure 250(f) shows an example of a display from timing t41 to timing t42, Figure 250(g) shows an example of a display from timing t42 to timing t44, and Figure 250(h) shows an example of a display from timing t44 to timing t45.

If the revival performance after a missed temporary stop is successful, at timing t40, the decorative patterns are displayed temporarily stopped in a pattern of a sequence indicating a jackpot, the display of the decorative patterns stops at timing t49, and the decorative patterns are displayed stationary from timing t49 to timing t50. Also, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image continues from timing t40 to timing t50. In other words, the display time of the decorative patterns when the revival performance after a missed temporary stop is successful is longer than the display time of the decorative patterns when the revival performance after a missed temporary stop is unsuccessful.

Figure 251(e) shows a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, Figure 251(f) shows a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, Figure 251(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t49, and Figure 251(h) shows a display example from timing t49 to timing t50. As is clear from the figures, if the revival performance after a temporary stop miss is successful (if the special lottery result is a jackpot), the display of the bomb character and dialogue image continues until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Variant example 06 has been described as a representative example, but in other variant examples, the timing at which the revival effect begins after a missed temporary stop, the number of seconds that the bomb character is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, the timing at which the bomb character moves to display whether it was a failure or success, and the length of time that the bomb character is displayed in the lower center of the display area when the revival effect is successful will differ, but in other aspects, the display will be similar to variant example 06.
For example, in the embodiments shown in Figures 247(c) to 247(g) and in variants 01 to 04, the display of the bomb character begins at timing t34, but the timing at which the bomb character moves and the display of the dialogue image indicating the result of the special lottery begins is timing t37 in variant 01, timing t39 in variant 02, timing t41 in variant 03, and timing t43 in variant 04.
Similarly, FIG. 248 shows a modified example in which the display of a bomb character begins at timing t36, and FIG. 249 shows modified examples in which the display of a bomb character begins at timing t38, timing t40, and timing t42.

If the revival effect after the provisional stop miss is successful, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop state may be changed from a display mode indicating a miss to a display mode indicating a jackpot at the timing when the image with the line "A feeling of victory!" is displayed. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to a display mode indicating a jackpot a predetermined number of seconds later (e.g., one second later) after the image with the line "A feeling of victory!" is displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 247 to 251, after the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a miss, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image begins at the start of the period until the visibility of the background image begins to decrease, the period when the background image gradually becomes less visible (first period), the period when the background image is not visible (second period), the period when the background image gradually becomes more visible (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image has returned to normal (fourth period), or the display of the dialogue image begins during these periods, and at the end of these periods, an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been reached is made using the dialogue image (when the revival performance fails). However, these embodiments may be modified so that the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image begins in the middle of a certain period, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image begins at the end of a certain period, and an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been reached using the dialogue image is made in the middle of a certain period.
For example, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started at timing t37 in the middle of the first period, and the notification of whether or not a jackpot has been reached may be made by the dialogue image at timing t38 which is the start timing of the second period. Also, for example, during the second period, the display of the bomb character may be started, and the notification of whether or not a jackpot has been reached may be made by the movement of the bomb character and the display of the dialogue image.

The display priority of the bomb character and dialogue image is higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. On the other hand, the display priority of the bomb character and dialogue image is lower than the display priority of the fourth pattern and the reserved number display image.

If the result of the revival performance after the temporary stop miss is a failure, the revival performance after the temporary stop miss may be executed again. For example, if the execution mode shown in FIG. 247(c) fails, the revival performance may be executed again in any of the modes shown in FIG. 248(c) to FIG. 248(f) or FIG. 249(c) to FIG. 249(h). Similarly, even if the mode shown in FIG. 248(c) fails, the revival performance after the temporary stop miss may be executed again in the modes shown in FIG. 249(c) to FIG. 249(h).
In this way, the revival performance after a temporary stop miss may be configured to be executable multiple times so that after a failed result is displayed once in the revival performance after a temporary stop miss, the revival performance after a temporary stop miss may finally be successful and the player may be shown that the result of the special lottery is a win.

In this way, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss, a revival effect after the temporary stop miss may be executed when the background image is switched, resulting in a big win, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for a big win until the final stage of the variable display.
In particular, since the display content in the display area is simplified by displaying a background concealment image, the player can be given a great sense of surprise and joy when a revival effect is executed after a temporary stop miss in this state, or when the player is notified that the result of the revival effect after a temporary stop miss has been successful and a jackpot has occurred.

In a period (first period) when the visibility of the special reach background image gradually decreases, when a revival performance is performed after a provisional stop failure, the player is not left feeling disappointed that the decorative pattern is provisionally stopped in a manner indicating a failure, and the player can be made to feel an expectation for a big win.
When a revival performance after a temporary stop miss is performed during a period (second period) when the special reach background image is not visible, the visibility of the revival performance after a temporary stop miss is high, so that a player can easily notice that the revival performance after a temporary stop miss has been performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the revival performance after a temporary stop miss is being performed.
When a revival performance is performed after a temporary stop miss during a period (third period) when the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see or during a period (fourth period) when the normal background image is easily visible, the normal background image can be seen, making the player think that the result of the special lottery is a miss, but it may turn out to be a big win, exciting the player.
As shown with reference to FIG. 233(b), by lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods, these effects can be made more effective.
In addition, by lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods, the revival effect may be executed multiple times after the provisional stop is missed during a certain period.

An embodiment of the revival effect after a temporary stop miss has been shown with reference to Figures 247 to 251, but it may be combined with the other embodiments described above.

Referring to Figures 224 to 251, an embodiment and its modified examples of the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect are shown, but the embodiment and its modified forms of the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect may be applied to other embodiments described in this specification (for example, the "giant tank reach" effect described later).

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 224 to 236 etc. will be described below. In the "giant tank reach" which is a special reach performance in this embodiment, special reach background image A is displayed instead of special reach background image B. Also, operation of mission button 3700 is valid instead of attack button 3710. Also, during the period when the special reach background image is displayed, the reserved image is not displayed.
Fig. 252(a) is a time chart showing an example of the performance from timing t10 to timing t45 in this embodiment. Note that, apart from the reserved image, the display mode of the reserved image, and the performance mode during the special reach (such as the background image and the enemy tank), the performance mode is basically the same as that of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 233(a) and the like, so a description of these will be omitted.

Fig. 253 shows a display example at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect. The display examples shown in Fig. 253(a) to Fig. 253(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 234(a) to Fig. 234(g), respectively, and the display timing, etc. are the same as the effect examples shown with reference to Fig. 234(a) to Fig. 234(g).
Fig. 254 shows a display example at the end of the "Giant Tank Reach" (at the time of the big win). The display examples shown in Fig. 254(a) to Fig. 254(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 235(a) to Fig. 235(g), respectively, and the display timing, etc. are the same as the presentation examples shown with reference to Fig. 235(a) to Fig. 235(g).
Fig. 255 shows a display example at the end of the "Giant Tank Reach" (when you miss). The display examples shown in Fig. 255(a) to Fig. 255(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 236(a) to Fig. 236(g), respectively, and the display timing, etc. are the same as the performance examples shown with reference to Fig. 236(a) to Fig. 236(g).

As shown in Figures 252 to 255, in the "Giant Tank Reach" of this embodiment, the image of the enemy tank displayed is different from that in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach." In addition, special reach background image A is displayed as the background image. In addition, operation of mission button 3700 is effective, not attack button 3710. In addition, the reserved image or reserved image is not displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach."

In this embodiment, the "Giant Tank Reach" has a higher probability of winning when the reach effect is executed than the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figures 233 to 236. For example, the probability of winning the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is 10%, and the probability of winning the "Giant Tank Reach" is 50%.

As shown with reference to Figures 254 and 255, the reserved image and the reserved image are not displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach", but it is also possible to display the reserved image and not display the reserved image.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can recognize the expectation level indicated by the reserved image even during the "Giant Tank Reach". Also, during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" which has a very high expectation level, the player basically does not consider increasing the number of reserved items or the expectation level of the variable display that will be performed after the current variable display (for example, even if a green reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, the player is more concerned about the result of the "Giant Tank Reach"). Therefore, by not displaying the reserved image, the display content of the display area can be simplified, and the player can be focused on the "Giant Tank Reach".

Referring to Figures 233 and 252, an example has been shown in which a "giant tank reach" and an "enemy tank destruction reach" occur at the same time, but when a "giant tank reach" occurs, the time for which the normal background image is displayed may be longer than when an "enemy tank destruction reach" occurs. For example, the time for which the normal background image is displayed may be extended by 5 seconds, a reach state occurs at timing t15, and at timing t21, the normal background image A is switched to the special reach background image A, starting the "giant tank reach".

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 233 and 252, the length for which the reach performance is executed is the same for the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach", but the length for which the reach performance is executed may be different. For example, the "giant tank reach" may take longer than the "enemy tank destruction reach", and the reach performance may end in a shorter time for the "giant tank reach" than for the "enemy tank destruction reach".

When the reserved image indicating that the expectation level is above a predetermined level (e.g., a red reserved image or a gold reserved image) is displayed, the "giant tank reach" may always occur. On the other hand, when the reserved image indicating that the expectation level is below a predetermined level (e.g., a white reserved image or a green reserved image) is displayed, the presentation may be such that the "giant tank reach" occurs, the "enemy tank destruction reach" occurs, or neither reach occurs.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach," it has been shown that any one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be used. In the "giant tank reach," it is also possible to use any one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc.
For example, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be used in the "giant tank reach" and a black background concealment image may be used in the "enemy tank destruction reach" so that the background concealment images are different. Alternatively, the same background concealment image (for example, a black background concealment image for both) may be used in the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach".

Figures 252(b) and 252(c) show several embodiments (Modification 01 to Modification 12) that are modifications of the embodiment shown in Figure 252(a) so that the lengths of the first period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible, the second period during which the background image is not visible, and the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible (specifically, 2 seconds) are different rather than being the same. Note that these embodiments may also achieve the same effects as the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 233(b) and 233(c).

In this way, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image is not displayed while the special reach background image is displayed. On the other hand, in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the reserved image is displayed while the special reach background image is displayed. In this way, by providing cases where the reserved image is not displayed and cases where it is displayed depending on the type of reach, the display content can be diversified.
For example, by not displaying the reserved image, the player can focus on the tank-based presentation. On the other hand, by displaying the reserved image, the player can decide whether or not to operate the handle 302. Also, when the reserved image is displayed, the player can know the degree of expectation of a big win.

As the visual recognition mode of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach", the embodiment shown in Fig. 252(a) and the modified embodiments shown in Fig. 252(b) and Fig. 252(c) may be adopted. Note that the contents shown in the time chart are the same as those shown with reference to Fig. 233, with some exceptions.
In addition, the visual appearance of the background image in the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be the embodiment shown in Figure 233(a) or the modified embodiment shown in Figure 233(b) or Figure 233(c).
In addition, it may be configured so that a "giant tank reach" employing any of the embodiments or modified examples shown in FIG. 252 and an "enemy tank destruction reach" employing any of the embodiments or modified examples shown in FIG. 233 can be executed.
For example, in the "giant tank reach", variant 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) may be adopted, and in the "enemy tank destruction reach", variant 02 shown in FIG. 233(b) may be adopted.

The embodiment and modified example shown with reference to FIG. 252 can achieve the same effects as the embodiment and modified example shown with reference to FIG. 233.

As shown in variant example 01 shown in Figure 252(b) and variant example 02 shown in Figure 233(b), in the "giant tank reach", the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made longer than the third period (1 second) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
According to such a configuration, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that has not been displayed until then is displayed more slowly at the end of the reach performance than in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

As shown in variant example 01 in Figure 252(b) and variant example 01 in Figure 233(b), in the "giant tank reach", the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made the same length as the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
With this configuration, the display process can be simplified.

As shown in variant example 02 shown in Figure 252(b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 233(b), in the "giant tank reach", the third period (1 second) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made shorter than the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
According to such a configuration, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that had not been displayed until then becomes rapidly visible in a short period of time at the end of the reach performance, compared to the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

By making the third period during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see longer when the background image changes at the end of the first reach performance ("giant tank reach") than when the background image changes at the end of the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the player's eyes are drawn to the reserved image that has been displayed for the first time in a long time, and the player's awareness of the number of reserved balls can be increased. This enables the player to decide whether or not to launch a game ball.
In particular, in the first reach performance, since a longer time has passed since the start of the variable display and the expectation of a big win is high, the player tends to lose consciousness of the reserved number, but by adopting this display method, it is possible to regain consciousness of the reserved number and to increase consciousness of the launch of game balls, which was paused during the reach performance.

As shown in variant example 02 shown in Figure 252(b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 233(b), in a "giant tank reach", the fourth period (3 seconds) following the end of the third period in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made longer than the fourth period (1 second) following the end of the third period in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" in an "enemy tank destruction reach".
According to this configuration, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that was invisible or difficult to see until then is displayed clearly for a relatively long period of time at the end of the reach performance compared to the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), so the player can remember to launch the game ball. Also, although there is a risk that the result of the special lottery will be a loss and the player will be shocked, the player can have time to change his/her mind to the next and subsequent variable display of the decorative pattern.

As in variant example 01 shown in Figure 252(b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 233(b), in the "giant tank reach", the fourth period (1 second) following the end of the third period in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made the same length as the fourth period (1 second) following the end of the third period in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from that in the "giant tank reach", in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
With this configuration, the display process can be simplified.

As shown in variant example 01 shown in Figure 252(b) and variant example 02 shown in Figure 233(b), in a "giant tank reach", the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is made may be shorter than the fourth period (3 seconds) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach" is made in an "enemy tank destruction reach".
According to such a configuration, the time for which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the end of the first reach performance ("giant tank reach") can be made shorter than that of the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

In addition, as a method for making the length of the fourth period different or the same for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", this can also be achieved by changing the timing at which the decorative pattern stops changing from timing t44 to timing t43 or timing t45 in the embodiments and modified examples shown in Figures 252 and 233.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 233 etc., the display priority of the decorative pattern may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. For example, in the period from timing t10 to timing t44, the display priority of the decorative pattern may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealment image.
With this configuration, the decorative pattern is always visible during a period when the background image becomes gradually less visible (first period), a period when the background image is not visible (second period), and a period when the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period).
In addition, it is advisable to switch between the reach decorative pattern and the normal decorative pattern at an appropriate timing, such as at the start of the next variable display.
In this way, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the decorative patterns may be made invisible during the second period, and in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the decorative patterns may be made visible during the second period.

In the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), which has a relatively high expectation, even if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a losing state, the decorative symbols become invisible in the second period, so that the shock felt by the player due to the losing result can be mitigated.
On the other hand, in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach") which has a relatively low expectation, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped in a missing state, and even if the decorative symbols are visible in the second period, the player does not feel that much of a shock; rather, since the decorative symbols continue to be visible, the player can smoothly switch his/her mind to the change in the next decorative symbol, and the tempo of the change in the decorative symbol is not hindered.

An embodiment has been shown in which the normal decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same position and at the same size during the third period of the ``Giant Tank Reach'', in which a background concealment image consisting of, for example, a bomb character is displayed, and during the third period of the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'', in which a black background concealment image different from that of the ``Giant Tank Reach'' is displayed, but other modes may be adopted as the temporary stop display mode of the normal decorative pattern during the third period of the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach''.
For example, during the third period, the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed at the same position may be changed to a smaller size. Alternatively, during the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed to keep the size of the normal decorative pattern the same. Alternatively, during the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed and the size of the normal decorative pattern may be changed to a smaller size.
In addition, strictly speaking, the same position may mean the average position of the normal decorative pattern that is displayed while swaying at a predetermined cycle.

After the reach performance ends for both the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (the end of the special reach background image for each reach), the same normal decorative pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern from the third period. The temporary stopping position of the normal decorative pattern is also the same. Note that during the third period of the "Giant Tank Reach", a display employing a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is performed, and during the third period of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", a display employing a black background concealment image different from that of the "Giant Tank Reach" is performed.
With this configuration, after the end of the first reach and the second reach, which have different contents and expectations of the presentation display, the normal decorative pattern is viewed by the player in the same presentation form, so that the player can focus his/her attention on the changes from the next time onwards.

Referring to Figure 238, an example is shown in which a strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is displayed when an "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, but a strip-shaped look-ahead performance image may also be displayed in a similar manner when a "giant tank reach" is executed.
Also, the display mode of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image when the background concealed image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238 is displayed can be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image in the "giant tank reach". For example, the display priority may be higher than the background concealed image so that the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image is not affected even in the first period to the third period, or the display priority may be lower than the background concealed image so that the visibility of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and improved in the third period. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image may be stopped during the display of the background concealed image (the visibility of the strip-shaped pre-reading performance image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and made invisible in the third and fourth periods).

Three display modes have been shown for the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image: a mode in which the display priority is higher than the background concealment image so that the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is not affected even in the first period to the third period; a mode in which the display priority is lower than the background concealment image so that the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and improved in the third period; and a mode in which the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is stopped while the background concealment image is displayed (the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and also invisible in the third and fourth periods). However, any one of these display modes may be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image in the "giant tank reach," and any one of these display modes may be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image in the "enemy tank destruction reach."

In this way, even if the types of reaches are different, by adopting the same display mode as the display mode of the look-ahead performance image, the performance processing is standardized, and the display processing and development man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, by adopting different display modes as the display mode of the pre-reading performance image depending on the type of reach, it is possible to diversify the performance modes.

With reference to Figures 241 to 244, in the "enemy tank destruction reach", embodiments and variations thereof have been shown in which the tank role 3770 is made to emit light in a predetermined light color and is moved between a waiting position and a moving position; however, in the "giant tank reach", the embodiments and variations thereof in the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be adopted to make the tank role 3770 emit light in a predetermined light color and is moved between a waiting position and a moving position.
That is, as the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 in the "giant tank reach", any of the light emission modes shown in Fig. 242 and Fig. 243 may be adopted. Similarly, as the operation mode of the tank role object 3770, any of the operation modes shown in Fig. 244 may be adopted.

Even if the types of reaches are different, by adopting the same lighting and movement patterns for the movable decorative parts (tank parts 3770), the presentation processing can be standardized, simplifying the display processing and development labor.
On the other hand, by adopting different lighting patterns and movement patterns for the movable decorative member (chariot part 3770) depending on the type of reach, the presentation patterns can be diversified.

Although the tank role object 3770 is shown as an example of a movable decorative member, one or more other movable decorative members having similar functions may be provided on the game board 5. For example, a total of three movable decorative members may be provided, with the upper, right, and left sides of the display area as standby positions and the vicinity of the center of the display area as a moving position. When multiple movable decorative members are provided, they may be illuminated or moved at the same timing as the tank role object 3770, or may be illuminated or moved at a different timing from the tank role object 3770. In other words, any of the illumination modes or operation modes shown in Figures 242 to 244 may be adopted for other movable decorative members.
In addition, the lighting patterns and movement patterns of other movable decorative parts may be different for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and in this case, any of the lighting patterns and movement patterns shown in Figures 242 to 244 can be adopted for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

Although the tank role object 3770 is shown as an example of a light-emitting decorative member, a light-emitting decorative member may be provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5. The decorative means (e.g., the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550) provided on the door frame 3 or the decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be illuminated at the same timing as the tank role object 3770, or may be illuminated at a different timing from the tank role object 3770. In other words, the light-emitting decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the light-emitting decorative members provided on the game board 5 may adopt any of the light-emitting modes shown in FIGS. 242 to 244.
In addition, the lighting patterns of the decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be different for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and any of the lighting patterns shown in Figures 242 to 244 can be adopted for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

Referring to Figures 242 to 243, embodiments and variations thereof have been shown regarding the display mode of the pending image in the "enemy tank destruction reach", but in the "giant tank reach", any of the display modes of the pending image in the embodiments and variations thereof in the "enemy tank destruction reach" may also be adopted to display the pending image.

For example, in the "giant tank reach", variant example 01 shown in FIG. 242(b) may be adopted, and in the "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a) may be adopted.
In the case of the "Giant Tank Reach" which has a relatively high expectation level, the reserved image can be quickly returned to its normal state once it is determined that the special lottery result is a loss, thereby easing the shock of the player who had high expectations but ended up with a loss.
On the other hand, in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," which has a relatively low degree of expectation, by displaying the pending image in red even if it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a miss, the player can be impressed with the degree of expectation under which the variable display was generated, and can use this as a reference for the next time a similar performance situation occurs in the variable display onwards.

Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a) may be adopted in the "giant tank reach", and variant example 01 shown in FIG. 242(b) may be adopted in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
In the "enemy tank destruction reach" where the expectation level is relatively high, even if it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a miss, the reserved image is displayed in red, making the player clearly aware of the fact that the result of the special lottery was a miss despite the high expectation level, and it is possible to motivate the player for the next and subsequent variable display.
On the other hand, in the "enemy tank destruction reach" which has a relatively low expectancy, the reserved image is quickly returned to its normal state at the stage when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a miss, allowing the player to smoothly switch his or her attention from the reach presentation, which originally had a relatively low expectancy and was unlikely to result in a jackpot, to the next variable display.

Regarding the display mode of the reserved image, whether to adopt the embodiment in the "giant tank reach" or the embodiment in the "enemy tank destruction reach" or a modified embodiment, it is advisable to adopt an appropriate combination, taking into consideration the priority of such effects.

The expected jackpot probability of the "Giant Tank Reach" in this embodiment may be lower than the expected jackpot probability of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figures 233 to 236, etc.

Not limited to the above examples, the modified example applied to the embodiment of the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 233 etc. may be applied to the embodiment of the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 252 etc. to form a new embodiment.

In this way, during the third period of the first reach performance ("Giant Tank Reach"), a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display A").
During the third period of the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), a display is made in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display B").

As shown in Figures 142 and 143, when a jackpot occurs in the normal state, the game state after that may be a time-saving state, a non-time-saving probability variable state, or a probability variable state with time-saving (probability variable time-saving state), which are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. The advantageous states shown below refer to the time-saving state and the probability variable time-saving state among the above states.
As shown with reference to Figures 142 and 143, the configuration may be such that a time-saving state is generated when a "miss with time-saving" occurs as a special lottery result, or when a missing special lottery result occurs a predetermined number of times in succession.
When in an advantageous state, the player rotates the handle 302 widely to hit the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "right hit"), causing the game ball to enter a starting hole (e.g., second starting hole 2004) located on the right side of the game area.
In addition, if a jackpot occurs during an advantageous state and the advantageous state continues afterwards, the number of balls dispensed from the jackpot and small jackpots during that period are added up and stored in the peripheral control board 1510.
In addition, when the player is in an advantageous state, a normal background image C, which indicates that the player is in an advantageous state, is displayed in place of the normal background images A and B.
Such an advantageous state ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, after the advantageous state starts, the decorative pattern does not become a jackpot and a predetermined number of misses are displayed in succession (the special lottery results are a predetermined number of misses in succession). For example, in the probability time-saving state, the probability time-saving state ends when there are 100 consecutive misses. The time-saving state may also end when there are a predetermined number of misses (for example, 100). In addition, in a so-called falling type in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to end the probability time-saving state at the start of fluctuation in each game, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the lottery to end the probability time-saving state is won.
In this way, the advantageous state ends when the specified conditions are satisfied, and at the timing when the advantageous state ends (specifically, during the 100th fluctuation if the advantageous state ends after a specified number of misses (e.g. 100 times), or during the fluctuation when the fall-down lottery is won in the case of a fall-down type), the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A or normal background image B, and the total number of game balls paid out to the player during the jackpot or advantageous state is displayed.

Fig. 256 shows images displayed at the end of a right hit. Fig. 256(a) shows background concealment image A at the end of a right hit, Fig. 256(b) shows background concealment image B at the end of a right hit, and Fig. 256(c) shows background concealment image C at the end of a right hit. These images are based on the sunglasses worn by the bomb character.
Figure 256 (d) shows a game result image indicating that "Dynamite Time" in the right-hit state has ended, the number of consecutive wins (13), and the number of game balls paid out to the player (14,125 balls).

The presentation mode at the end of a right hit will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 257 and the display example shown in Figure 259.
In FIG. 257(a), from timing t0 to timing t7, the 99th decorative pattern variation display is performed in the advantageous variable time-saving state. Note that the decorative pattern displayed during the variable time-saving state is the right-hit decorative pattern.
After that, from timing t8 to timing t24, the 100th decorative symbol display is performed in the probability variable time-saving state. Note that this time chart shows an example of a performance in which the 100th decorative symbol display results in a miss.
259(a) shows a display example from timing t14 to timing t16. It shows a display state in which a right-hit decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in front of the normal background image C.

From timing t16 to timing t17, a background concealment image A at the end of a right hit is displayed. Fig. 259(b) shows a state in which the background concealment image A at the end of a right hit is displayed.
From timing t17 to timing t18, the background concealment image B at the end of right hitting is displayed. Fig. 259(c) shows the state in which the background concealment image B at the end of right hitting is displayed.
From timing t18 to timing t20, the background concealment image C at the end of right hitting is displayed. Fig. 259(d) shows the state in which the background concealment image C at the end of right hitting is displayed.

From timing t18 to timing t20, game result images showing game results during right-hand play, such as "Dynamite time ended,""13 balls defeated," and "14,125 obtained," are displayed. The display of "Dynamite time ended" indicates that the time-saving probability bonus state will end. The display of "13 balls defeated" indicates that the number of consecutive wins was 13. The display of "14,125 obtained" indicates to the player that a game ball entered the large winning port 2005 during right-hand play and the number of game balls paid out was 14,125.
In addition, at timing t19 during the second period in which the background concealment image C is displayed at the end of right hitting and the background image is not visible, the background image is switched from the normal background image C to the normal background image A. The background image may be switched at timing t18 or timing t20.

From timing t20 to timing t21, the background concealment image B at the end of right hitting is displayed. FIG. 259(e) shows the state in which the background concealment image B at the end of right hitting is displayed. At this time, the background image has been changed to the normal background image A. Also, the decorative pattern has been changed to the normal decorative pattern.
From timing t21 to timing t22, a background concealment image A at the end of a right hit is displayed. Fig. 259(f) shows a state in which the background concealment image A at the end of a right hit is displayed.
From timing t22 to timing t24, the normal decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 259(g) shows a state where the background concealment image A is no longer displayed when right-hand play ends.
After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed from timing t24 to timing t25. Fig. 259(h) shows a state in which the normal decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

From timing t25, a new display of the decorative symbols begins to change, but at this time the background image has changed to the normal background image A, and the decorative symbols have changed to the normal decorative symbols. In addition, because the game state has changed from the special time-saving state to the normal state, the probability of a jackpot being determined has also changed from 1/30 to 1/300 (see Figures 142 and 143).

In this way, when the background concealment image is displayed at the end of a right hit, there is a period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible (first period), a period during which the background image is not visible (second period), a period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period), and a period after which the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

In addition, if the result of the 100th variable display in the probability variable state is a big win, the background concealment image is not displayed at the end of the right hit, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.
At this time, a "giant tank reach" effect or an "enemy tank destruction reach" effect may be executed.

Figures 257(b), 257(c), and 257(d) each show an embodiment in which the timing for displaying the background concealment image at the end of a right hit is modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 257(a).
For example, in the time chart shown in Figure 257 (c), at timing t24, the display of background concealment image A ends when right-hand hit is completed, and the varying display of decorative patterns stops simultaneously.

Figures 258(b) and 258(c) show examples (Variation 01 to Variation 12) of modified display times and display timings of background concealed image A at the end of a right hit, background concealed image B at the end of a right hit, and background concealed image C at the end of a right hit.

By displaying in this manner, the player can know the number of consecutive wins (the number of consecutive jackpots) and the number of game balls acquired at the end of the right-hand hitting state.
In addition, when normal background images A to C are not displayed, the display area showing the number of consecutive wins and the number of acquired game balls can be photographed using a portable terminal such as a smartphone or digital camera.
In addition, while such a display is being performed, the background image and decorative patterns can be smoothly switched from those in the special time-saving state or the time-saving state to those in the normal state.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of a right hit may be the same length as the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible during the ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach.''
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of the right hit may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach". The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of the right hit may be more than half the fluctuation time of the fluctuation (i.e., the final fluctuation at which the advantageous state ends). This period of more than half the fluctuation time may be longer than the shortest time of all the fluctuation patterns.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the ``giant tank reach'' and ``enemy tank destruction reach.''
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit and the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the ``giant tank reach'' and ``enemy tank destruction reach'' may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be the same length as the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' or ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

In the example shown, the background image displayed at the end of a right hit and the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends in a miss are both normal background image A, but the background image displayed at the end of a right hit and the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends in a miss may be different.
For example, normal background image B may be displayed at the end of a right hit, and after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in a miss, normal background image A may be displayed. Alternatively, normal background image A may be displayed at the end of a right hit, and after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in a miss, normal background image B may be displayed.

Although an example has been shown in which normal background image A is displayed instead of normal background image C when right-hand hitting is completed, either normal background image A or normal background image B may be displayed randomly instead of normal background image C.
Furthermore, with regard to the background image during right-hit, in addition to the normal background image C, a background image of a different type other than the normal background image C (for example, a background image having a different type of bomb character or dialogue) may be displayed randomly as the background image during right-hit.

In addition, in response to the end of right-hand hitting, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed instead of the normal background image C. In this case, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (the display state shown in FIG. 227(a) or FIG. 227(d)).
In addition, during right-hitting, a background moving image specifically for right-hitting may be displayed.

Referring to FIG. 256, an example of a background concealment image at the end of a right hit is shown, but a background concealment image of another display mode may be used as the background concealment image at the end of a right hit. For example, one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a bomb character, or the like, may be used as the background concealment image exclusively for the end of a right hit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 259, an example is shown in which the game result image is displayed in the second period (from timing t18 to timing t20), but the game result image may also be displayed in the first or third period. In this case, the game result image may be made to appear in the display area or to disappear from the display area by moving the game result image from the left and right of the display area in accordance with the movement of the background concealment image at the end of right hitting.

When the decorative symbols change display at the end of a right hit, regardless of whether or not a reach state occurs, if the special lottery result is a miss, a background concealment image is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of a "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", a background concealment image is displayed when a reach state occurs.

With reference to Figure 242 etc., it has been shown that before and after displaying the background concealment image when the "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, the display mode of the reserved image may be maintained (for example, the red reserved image may remain red) or the display mode may be changed (for example, the red reserved image may be changed to a normal reserved image (white reserved image) and displayed) (note that a similar display may also be performed in the "giant tank reach").
On the other hand, when the right-hit state ends and the normal state is restored by executing the varying display of the decorative pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a background concealment image at the end of the right hit is displayed. At this time, the reserved image displayed after the background concealment image at the end of the right hit ends should preferably be a normal reserved image (a white reserved image).
In addition, with regard to the reserved image that will be displayed after the right hit is completed, it is preferable to display it as a normal reserved image (a white reserved image), and not to display a reserved image that indicates a higher expectation than a normal reserved image (a red reserved image or a gold reserved image).

At the end of the right-hit state, a right-hit end background concealment image is displayed so that the reserved image is not changed to another reserved image during the period (third period) in which the normal background image A and the normal background image B gradually become easier to see.
Similarly, when a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, a background concealment image may be displayed so that the reserved image is not changed to another type of reserved image during the period (third period) when the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see.
This configuration can prevent the player from overlooking a change in the appearance of the reserved image and the change in the level of expectation shown.

With reference to Figure 238 etc., it is shown that the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image may be maintained before and after the background concealment image is displayed when the ``enemy tank destruction reach'' is executed, or the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image may be ended without being maintained (note that a similar display may also be performed in the ``giant tank reach'').
On the other hand, when the right-hit state ends and the normal state is entered by executing the variable display of the decorative pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the background concealment image at the end of the right hit is displayed, but at this time, it is preferable that the belt-shaped pre-reading performance image is not displayed after the background concealment image at the end of the right hit ends. Alternatively, the belt-shaped pre-reading performance image may not be displayed in the variable display at the end of the right hit state.
Whether or not the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image is executed is determined by the look-ahead process at the time of the start winning, but for the start winning that occurs after the start of the variable display a predetermined number of times before the end of the advantageous state, it is preferable not to start displaying the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image. For example, for the hold that occurs when the 96th to 100th variable display is being performed, it is preferable not to start displaying the strip-shaped look-ahead performance image.

When the decorative pattern changes for the last time (100th time) in the right-hit state, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot announcement image announcing the occurrence of a jackpot may be displayed during the period when a background concealment image consisting of sunglasses or the like is displayed (first period to third period) or during the period after the background concealment image is displayed (fourth period).

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 257 is modified so as to display a jackpot notification image to notify the occurrence of a jackpot will be described with reference to Figure 260.
Figure 260 (a) shows an embodiment in which a jackpot announcement image is displayed during the period from timing t14, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t16, when the first period begins.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 260(a), modified examples (Modification 01 to Modification 14) in which the period during which the jackpot notification image is displayed is modified are described below with reference to FIG. 260(b).

In the modified example 01, the big win notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t18, when the first period ends.
In variant example 02, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 03, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 04, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 05, the big win notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, to timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period.
In variant example 06, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 07, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 08, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 09, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 10, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 11, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 12, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 13, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant 14, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

The timings for starting to display the jackpot announcement image are shown as timing t14, which is the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, and timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, but a specified timing within these periods may also be used as the timing for starting to display the jackpot announcement image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timings for starting to display the jackpot notification image.

In addition, the timings for ending the display of the jackpot announcement image are shown as timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period, timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period, timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period, and timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period, but a specified timing within these periods may also be used as the timing for ending the display of the jackpot announcement image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timings for ending the display of the jackpot announcement image.

In this way, the timing to start displaying the jackpot notification image can be any time between timing t14 and timing t23, and the timing to end displaying the jackpot notification image can be any time between timing t15 and timing t24.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 260, the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A at timing t19, but if the display of the jackpot notification image has started before timing t19, the display of the normal background image C may continue after timing t19, and the normal background image C may be changed to the jackpot background image at timing t25.

The display priority of the jackpot announcement image may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealment image and the game result image. The jackpot announcement image may be displayed in a position where it overlaps with the game result image. The jackpot announcement image may be a moving image, and the jackpot announcement may be made by displaying the moving image.

The period from the start of the variable display to the display of the background concealment image at the end of right-hand hit should be shorter than the period from the start of the variable display to the display of the special reach background concealment image in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach."
For example, in the presentation example shown in Figure 257 (a), the display of the background concealment image begins at timing t16, 8 seconds after timing t8 when the variable display began, at the end of right-hand hit.
On the other hand, in the "Giant Tank Reach" shown with reference to Figure 252(a) and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figure 233(a), the display of the special reach background concealment image begins at timing t36, 36 seconds after the start of the variable display.
In addition, when the right hit ends (if the result of the 100th variable display is a miss), the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is not executed, and the special reach background concealment image is not displayed.

This configuration allows for a suitable presentation.

In this way, during the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display C").

When the first reach performance ("giant tank reach") is executed, a background concealing image such as a bomb character is displayed, so that even if the first reach performance results in a miss, the player can see a special performance in which a character appears, thereby easing the player's disappointment.
In addition, when comparing the special display A in the first reach performance with the special display C at the end of right hitting, the background concealment image used for the special display A is different from the background concealment image used for the special display C. This makes it possible to prevent the player from confusing the game state.

When the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach") is executed, a black background concealing image is displayed, so that the player can ease his/her disappointment even if the second reach performance ends in failure.
In addition, when comparing the special display B in the second reach performance with the special display C at the end of right hitting, the background concealment image used for the special display B is different from the background concealment image used for the special display C. This makes it possible to prevent the player from confusing the game state.

Next, referring to Figure 261 etc., an embodiment of a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative pattern appears to stop for a moment and then changes and is displayed again will be shown.
Specifically, as shown in the time charts of Fig. 261 and Fig. 262, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with different numbers, and then a special decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the center symbol, causing each temporarily stopped decorative symbol to scroll downward again and change. Also, when each decorative symbol temporarily stops and then starts scrolling downward again, an image of "x2" is displayed in the display area. Hereinafter, this type of effect is called a pseudo consecutive effect.

When the image "x2" is displayed, the left and right decorative symbols may temporarily stop with decorative symbols of different numbers, and a special symbol may be displayed in the center symbol, causing the temporarily stopped decorative symbols to scroll downwards again and change. In this case, an image "x3" is displayed in place of the image "x2". Hereinafter, these images "x2" and "x3" are referred to as pseudo consecutive number display images. Figures 261(b) and 262(b) are time charts showing an example of a performance in which the image "x2" is displayed, followed by the image "x3".

A specific example of the effect will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in Fig. 261(b) and the display example shown in Fig. 263. At timing t0, the variable display of the decorative symbols starts.
At timing t4, the left decorative pattern temporarily stops. At timing t6, the right decorative pattern temporarily stops. Figure 263(a) shows the display state at this time. At timing t8, the center decorative pattern temporarily stops. A decorative pattern with the kanji character "continue", which is a special decorative pattern, is displayed on the center decorative pattern. Figure 263(b) shows the display state at this time. At timing t10, the left to right decorative patterns are scrolled downward again and displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the pseudo consecutive number display image "x2" is displayed in the upper left of the display area. Figure 263(c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t14, the left decorative pattern temporarily stops. At timing t16, the right decorative pattern temporarily stops. Figure 263 (d) shows the display state at this time. As shown in this figure, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. At timing t18, the middle decorative pattern temporarily stops. A decorative pattern with the kanji character "continue", which is a special decorative pattern, is displayed as the middle decorative pattern. Figure 263 (e) shows the display state at this time. At timing t20, the left to right decorative patterns are scrolled downward again and displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the "x3" of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. Figure 263 (f) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t25, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At timing t30, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the same number as the left decorative pattern (the number "2"), and a reach state occurs. Figure 263 (g) shows the display state at this time. From timing t37 to timing t39, the "x3" in the pseudo consecutive number display image gradually becomes semi-transparent and difficult to see. Figure 263 (h) shows the display state at this time. At timing t40, the center decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. The display state of the decorative pattern at the time of the temporary stop indicates whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or a miss. At timing t41, the left to right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and this state is maintained until timing t42. After timing t42, the next or subsequent variable display is executed, or the jackpot game state is executed.

The pseudo consecutive performance has been explained using Figure 261 (b) as an example, but similar displays are also shown in other time charts.

In the example of the presentation shown in the time chart of Fig. 261(a), after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image finally displays "x2", it does not progress to "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and at timing t31, the decorative pattern is displayed in a state indicating a reach miss or a big win. The pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
In addition, since the pseudo consecutive win count display image has a higher display priority than the normal background image, and therefore the pseudo consecutive win count display image makes part of the normal background image difficult or impossible to see, the gradual disappearance of the pseudo consecutive win count display image in the time chart of Figure 261 (a) is synonymous with the normal background image gradually becoming visible.

In the example of the performance shown in the time chart of FIG. 262(a), after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image finally shows "x2", it progresses to a "giant tank reach" performance or an "enemy tank destruction reach" performance. After the reach occurs at timing t20, the reach performance is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 252(a) or FIG. 233(a).

In the example of the performance shown in the time chart of FIG. 262(b), after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image finally shows "x3", it develops into a "Giant Tank Reach" performance or an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance. After the reach occurs at timing t30, the reach performance is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 252(a) or FIG. 233(a).

In the example performances shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b), the pseudo consecutive number of times display image becomes difficult or impossible to see due to the background concealment image displayed at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" performance or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance, and the display ends in this state. For example, it is advisable to end the display at a predetermined timing in the period from timing t13 to timing t19 shown in Figures 252(a) and 233(a).

As described above, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, and is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. In FIG. 263, it is shown that the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern.
Furthermore, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is lower than the display priority of the background concealing image, and the pseudo consecutive win count display image is displayed behind the background concealing image.

As shown in FIG. 261(a), from timing t27 to timing t29, the pseudo consecutive number of times display image ("x2") is gradually erased.
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 261(b), from timing t37 to timing t39, the pseudo consecutive number display image ("x3") is gradually erased.
During these periods, the pseudo consecutive number display image may be gradually changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state over a period of 2 seconds, and the display may be terminated when the image finally becomes transparent, thereby improving the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern. Figure 263(h) shows the pseudo consecutive number display image thus displayed in a semi-transparent state.
It should be noted that, rather than gradually making the entire pseudo consecutive win count display image transparent, the pseudo consecutive win count display image may be made transparent from the edges, and finally the central portion may be made transparent to terminate the display of the pseudo consecutive win count display image.
Other display modes may be adopted as long as the pseudo consecutive win count display image is displayed in a manner that gradually reduces its visibility.

The display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, and the image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. However, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image may be temporarily lowered than the priority of the decorative pattern, so that at least a part of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is hidden by the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped.

As shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b), when a background concealment image is displayed to switch the background image to a special reach background image, the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image may be terminated at a predetermined timing during the period in which the background concealment image is displayed. For example, the display may be terminated when background concealment image A or background concealment image B is displayed, or when background concealment image C is displayed.

When the pseudo consecutive play performance is executed and the pseudo consecutive play count display image ("x2", "x3") is displayed, it is preferable that the stop display mode of the decorative pattern does not become a non-reach miss.
In other words, when a pseudo-consecutive performance is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern stop with decorative patterns of the same number, resulting in a reach state, and then, as shown in Figures 261(a) and 261(b), the middle decorative pattern stops without developing into a special reach, indicating the result of the special lottery, or, as shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b), it is preferable that the middle decorative pattern stops after developing into a special reach, indicating the result of the special lottery.
Alternatively, when "x3" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern may not be a non-reach miss. Also, when "x2" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive number of times display image but "x3" is not displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern may be a non-reach miss.

When the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, the latter has a higher expectation of a big win than when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and a pseudo consecutive performance number display image of "x2" is displayed.
In addition, when a pseudo consecutive play effect is performed and a pseudo consecutive play count display image "x2" is displayed, and then a pseudo consecutive play count display image "x3" is not displayed, compared with when a pseudo consecutive play effect is performed and a pseudo consecutive play count display image "x2" is displayed, and then a pseudo consecutive play count display image "x3" is displayed, the latter has a higher probability of winning.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern in the pseudo consecutive performance is not limited to the display example shown in Figure 263, and other temporary stop modes may be used.
For example, only one of the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, and a special symbol such as "NEXT", "Ren", "Pseudo-Ren" or "Next" may be stopped as the center decorative symbol.
Alternatively, such a special symbol may stop on one of the left and right decorative symbols, not limited to the central decorative symbol.
In addition, each of the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right may be temporarily stopped in a special combination (such as the numbers "1, 3, 5" or the numbers "6, 7, 7").
In this way, in the pseudo consecutive presentation, some or all of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are viewed as if they were stopped and displayed, and then these patterns are displayed moving again so that they can be viewed by the player.
In addition, the decorative pattern itself may not be temporarily stopped, but an effect image in which a predetermined character's reminiscence story progresses step by step may be displayed in front of the decorative pattern, hiding part or all of the decorative pattern, so that the player can visually recognize it as a division of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this case, the first effect image and the second effect image will be displayed showing different stories.

In the example of the performance shown in Fig. 261(a) and Fig. 261(b), the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, so that the player can understand the expectation level more easily. Also, the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends at a timing (timing t29 or timing t39) before the timing (timing t30 or timing t40) when a part of the decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the visibility of the decorative pattern is guaranteed, and the player can easily recognize the special lottery result.
In the examples of presentation shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b), the display of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is ended during the period in which the background concealment image is displayed, so that the pseudo consecutive win count display image is not displayed during the special reach, allowing the player to focus their attention on the outcome of the battle between tanks during the execution of the special reach.

In the example shown in Fig. 261(a), the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased from timing t27 to timing t29, but it may be erased at other timings. Fig. 264(b) shows an embodiment in which the manner of erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image is modified in the example shown in Fig. 261(a).
As shown in Fig. 264(b) in modified examples 01 to 11, the timing to start erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the timing to end erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, and the period from the end of erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed may be determined. Note that Fig. 264(a) is the same as Fig. 261(a). Note that in modified example 01 and the like, for convenience of drawing, the part that should be written as "gradually erased" is written as "gradually".

In order to simplify comparison with other inventions, the period from when the pseudo consecutive number of times display image starts to when it starts to be erased (timing t10 to timing t27 in FIG. 264(a)) may be referred to as the "second period" for convenience. Similarly, the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number of times display image (timing t27 to timing t29 in FIG. 264(a)) may be referred to as the "third period" for convenience. Similarly, the period from when the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is erased to when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed may be referred to as the "fourth period" (timing t29 to timing t30 in FIG. 264(a)). In addition, a first period (timing t10 to timing t12 in FIG. 264(a)) in which the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state and gradually becomes opaque may be provided.

Variation example 01 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t27.
Modification example 02 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t28.
Modification example 03 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t29.
Variation example 04 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t28.
In addition, an example of a presentation in which the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29 has already been shown in Figure 261 (a).
Variation example 05 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t30.
Variation example 06 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t29.
Variation example 07 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t30.
Variation example 08 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t31.
Variation example 09 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t30.
Modification example 10 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t31.
Variation example 11 shows that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t30 to timing t31.
In these examples, the time for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image is set to one to three seconds, and the time for the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed after the pseudo consecutive number display image is completely erased is set to one to four seconds.

Referring to FIG. 264(b), an embodiment and modified example for erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x2" is shown, but the method described in FIG. 264(b) can also be applied when erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x3" in the performance example shown with reference to K30(b).

The decorative symbols displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects differ in design and size from the decorative symbols displayed during the reach effects shown in Figures 261(a) and 261(b). Specifically, the decorative symbols displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects consist only of numbers and a square frame and are small in size, whereas the decorative symbols displayed during the reach effects shown in Figures 261(a) and 261(b) consist of numbers, a rectangular frame and a bomb character and are large in size.

The period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 264 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS.

The period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image may be the same length as the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 264 is the same as the length of the third period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 264 is longer than the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive count display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern in variant example 05 shown in Figure 264 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in variant example 02 shown in Figures 252 and 233.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern may be the same length as the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' returns to normal.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive count display image in variant example 05 shown in Figure 264 to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern is the same as the length of the fourth period in variant example 01 shown in Figures 252 and 233.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive win count display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive count display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern in variant example 01 shown in Figure 264 is longer than the length of the fourth period in variant example 01 shown in Figures 252 and 233.
In the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", the size of the decorative symbols is small, but in the reach presentation shown with reference to Fig. 261(a) and Fig. 261(b), the size of the decorative symbols is large and is displayed overlapping with the pseudo consecutive number display image. Therefore, by lengthening the period from when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased to when the decorative symbols are stopped, the player can easily visually recognize the stopping state of the decorative symbols.

In the reach effects shown with reference to Figures 261(a) and 261(b) and the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" effects, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, but after the background concealment image or the pseudo consecutive number display image ends, the normal background image A may be displayed again. Alternatively, the normal background image B may be displayed instead of the normal background image A at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed or the timing when the pseudo consecutive number display image ends. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
In addition, the background image may be switched to another normal background image only when the pseudo consecutive number of times display image shown with reference to Figures 261 (a) and 261 (b) has ended, or only when the ``Giant Tank Reach'' effect or the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' effect has ended.

In this way, by configuring it so that the normal background image that was displayed while the pseudo consecutive number of times display image was being displayed or before the special reach performance can be switched to another normal background image after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image has ended or after the special reach performance, it is possible to change the feelings of a player who is disappointed when the special lottery results in a loss.

Instead of normal background image A and normal background image B, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B may be displayed.
At the timing when the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, when the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in a situation where the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is displayed and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B decreases, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is increased during the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased, even when the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased arrives, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed from the beginning, and even when the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased ends, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed from the beginning.

The examples of performance shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b) will transition to a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach," but the display mode of the reserved image or the reserved image in the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" at this time may adopt the display mode in the embodiments described above with reference to Figures 233 to 244, etc.
As shown in Figures 230(b), 261(a) and 261(b), after the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same decorative pattern and enter a reach state, the decorative pattern or background image is not switched, and the middle decorative pattern, for example, scrolls or moves frame by frame at a slow speed, and after a predetermined time has passed, the middle decorative pattern stops at the same decorative pattern as the left and right decorative patterns (in the case of a jackpot) or a different decorative pattern (in the case of a miss), which is called a normal reach.
On the other hand, as shown in Figures 230(c), 262(a), and 262(b), after the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop with the same decorative symbol and enter a reach state, the decorative symbols are switched to special decorative symbols (often made smaller than the decorative symbols before the temporary stop) and the background image is switched to a special background image, and a performance display is performed in which characters fight each other and the winner is decided, and the result of this performance display essentially shows the result of a special lottery. This is called SP reach (short for special reach or super reach). Note that, in response to the result of this performance display, the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win (a symbol with the same number as the left and right decorative symbols) or in a manner indicating a loss (a symbol with a different number from the left and right decorative symbols).

In this specification, SP reaches are referred to as "special reaches" or "special reach effects", and examples of SP reaches include the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach". In addition, SP reaches are sometimes referred to as battle reaches (effects), as they involve the display of effects such as characters fighting each other.

In addition, between normal reach and SP reach, the expectation is higher for SP reach. Therefore, the player will pay attention to whether or not the game will move to SP reach after the decorative symbols on the left and right have temporarily stopped with the same decorative symbol and the game has entered a reach state, and will watch the changing display.
It should be noted that multiple types of SP reaches (for example, "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach") may be made executable, and the degree of expectation may vary depending on the type of SP reach. In this case, an SP reach with a relatively high expectation (or an expectation higher than a predetermined probability) may be called a strong SP (reach), and an SP reach with a relatively low expectation (or an expectation lower than a predetermined probability) may be called a weak SP (reach).

Whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or not may be expressed as a win or loss, or a win or loss result. For example, if it is said that the win or loss result is determined by the outcome of a battle between characters, this means that the outcome of the battle between characters determines whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or not.

On the other hand, while the pseudo consecutive number display image is being erased, it is preferable not to change the reserved image or the display mode of the reserved image to a display mode indicating another expectation level.
For example, if at timing t27 in Figure 261 (a) the reserved image is a green reserved image, it is preferable to display the green reserved image from timing t27 to timing t29, during which the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased.

When a pseudo consecutive performance is executed while a strip-shaped pre-reading performance image is displayed based on the pre-reading of reserved items, a special reach such as the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 252 etc. or the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 233 etc. may be ensured to occur from timing t20 onwards in the performance example shown in FIG. 262(a) or from timing t30 onwards in the performance example shown in FIG. 262(b).

In this way, while the pseudo consecutive win count display image is being erased, a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display D").

When the display of the decorative pattern begins, the normal background image may be switched to another normal background image. Below, an embodiment of a normal background image switching effect in which a special background concealment image is displayed and the normal background image is switched to another normal background image is described.

First, the background concealment image displayed in the normal background image switching performance in this embodiment will be described.
265(a) shows a giant bomb character as seen from the front left diagonally. The rest of the image other than the bomb character is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image A.
265(b) shows the bomb character as seen from slightly front and diagonally to the left. The rest of the image is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image B.
265(c) shows the bomb character as seen from the front. The rest of the image is opaque blue. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image C.
265(d) shows the bomb character as seen from slightly front and diagonally to the right. The rest of the image is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image D.
265(e) shows the bomb character as seen from the diagonal front right. The rest of the image other than the bomb character is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background concealment image E.
In addition, the image of the giant bomb character has an opaque black outline and other parts (within the area enclosed by the outline) are opaque white.
In this embodiment, while a background concealing image made up of such a giant bomb character or the like is being displayed, the normal background image is switched to.

In a background concealment image consisting of a giant bomb character, etc., the blue semi-transparent parts of background concealment images A and E are more transparent than the blue semi-transparent parts of background concealment images B and D, and the image located behind them is more visible. Note that the blue parts of background concealment image C are opaque, so the image located behind it is not visible. Note that the bomb character may be displayed large in background concealment image C so that only the bomb character is visible.

Below, referring to the time chart shown in Figure 266 (a) and the display example shown in Figure 267, an example of a normal background image switching effect in which the normal background image being displayed is switched to another normal background image will be explained.
First, a new variable display of the decorative pattern starts from timing t0. FIG. 267(a) shows a display example from timing t0 to timing t1. Note that at the time of timing t0, the normal background image A is already displayed. The normal background image A is displayed, for example, over a plurality of variable displays.
Next, in the period from timing t1 to timing t2, background concealed image A is displayed. Fig. 267(b) shows an example of the display in the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Next, during the period from timing t2 to timing t3, background concealed image B is displayed. Fig. 267(c) shows an example of the display during the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Next, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5, background concealed image C is displayed. Furthermore, at timing t4, the background image is switched from normal background image A to normal background image B. Fig. 267(d) shows an example of the display during the period from timing t3 to timing t5.
Next, in the period from timing t5 to timing t6, the background concealed image D is displayed. Fig. 267(e) shows an example of the display in the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Next, in the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the background concealed image E is displayed. Fig. 267(f) shows an example of the display in the period from timing t6 to timing t7. In this manner, the normal background image switching effect is executed in the period from timing t1 to timing t7.
After timing t7, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner without displaying the background concealment image. Fig. 267(g) shows a display example after timing t7.
In this manner, in this embodiment, the normal background image A is displayed from timing t0 to timing t4, and the normal background image B is displayed from timing t4 to timing t32. Note that in the next and subsequent variable display, the normal background image B is displayed.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a period in which the normal background image becomes gradually difficult to see (first period), a period in which the normal background image is not visible (second period), a period in which the normal background image becomes gradually easier to see (third period), and a period until the visibility of the normal background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops (fourth period). Note that the normal background image in the first period is different from the normal background image in the third and fourth periods. This allows the normal background image to be switched without any discomfort.
In addition, the background concealment image is displayed immediately after the start of the varying display of the decorative symbols, and the normal background image is switched, thereby changing the player's mood.

In this embodiment, the background concealment image is different from the background concealment image used when starting a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach", the background concealment image used when ending a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach", and the background concealment image used when ending an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player thinks that an advantageous reach performance has occurred.
In this way, after switching the normal background image, it is possible to execute the pseudo consecutive performance described above, such as the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach", depending on the results of the special lottery.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 266, the display of the background concealment image was started immediately after the start of the display of the decorative pattern changes, and the normal background image was changed, but the normal background image may also be changed in the middle or end of the display of the decorative pattern changes.
In addition, it is preferable that the normal background image can be changed only once during one change of the decorative pattern.
In addition, the change of the normal background image should be performed in a state where none of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. For example, in the example shown in Fig. 266(a), the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at timing t20, which is the timing after timing t7 when the display of the background concealment image is finished.

The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern may be changed at high speed before the display of the background concealment image ends (before timing t7 in FIG. 266(a)). Specifically, the downward scroll speed of the decorative patterns may be changed at the fastest speed before the display of the background concealment image ends (note that the scroll speed immediately after the start of the decorative pattern change and the scroll speed immediately before the temporary stop are slower than this scroll speed).
Alternatively, at least one of the decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed in the previous variable display may be visible even after the display of the background concealment image has ended. For example, a predetermined decorative symbol that started to be variable displayed at timing t0 in FIG. 266(a) may be made visible after timing t7 by not moving or moving slowly.

The background may be concealed as shown in Modifications 01 to 12 in Fig. 266. In these modifications, the lengths of the first to fourth periods are from 1 second to 3 seconds, and the lengths of the first, second, and third periods are compared.
For example, as in the modified example 01, the first period and the second period have the same length, but the third period is longer than the first period and the second period. This has the effect of creating the fun of wondering which normal background image will be displayed as the new normal background image. In the modified example 02, the first period and the second period have the same length, but the third period is shorter than the first period and the second period. This has the effect of displaying the new normal background image early, and taking time for so-called preview effects such as comment previews (for example, preview effects using dialogue preview images, which will be described later). In the modified example 03, the first period and the third period have the same length, but the second period is longer than the first period and the third period. This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy the display of the background concealment image itself. It goes without saying that the other modified examples also have the same effect for each modified example.
In addition, various modified examples may be applied to each of multiple types of normal background image switching performances, such as switching the normal background image in the manner of modified example 01 in the first normal background image switching performance, and switching the normal background image in the manner of modified example 02 in the second normal background image switching performance.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 266 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in a normal background image switching performance and the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in a ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach'' may be the same length.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 266 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach".
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually easier to see may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the ``giant tank reach'' and ``enemy tank destruction reach'' becomes gradually easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 266 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image in a normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible and the period (third period) during which the background image in a ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach'' becomes gradually more visible may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 266 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually easier to see may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" becomes gradually easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach".

The period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal during the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" (fourth period).

The period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the ``giant tank reach'' and ``enemy tank destruction reach.''
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the fourth period in the modified examples 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

As mentioned above, when the special reach ends, the high expectation reserved image that was displayed in the reserved image display area may be displayed as is, or it may be reverted to a white reserved image.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the reserved image may be moved while the background concealed images A to E are being displayed (at least one of the first, second, and third periods; the same applies below). Also, while the background concealed images A to E are being displayed, it may be possible to change the state of the reserved image or the reserved image to a reserved image with a higher expectation. When the state of the reserved image or the reserved image is changed to a reserved image with a higher expectation while the background concealed images A to E are being displayed, the state of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change can be recognized in any of the first to fourth periods if the change starts in the first period, in any of the second to fourth periods if the change starts in the second period, in any of the third to fourth periods if the change starts in the third period, and in the fourth period if the change starts in the fourth period. For example, if the reserved image or the state of the reserved image after the change starts in the first period and the state of the reserved image after the change can be recognized in the first period, the effect is that a sense of anticipation can be provided early on, or if the reserved image or the state of the reserved image after the change starts in the first period and the state of the reserved image after the change can be recognized in the fourth period, a sense of anticipation can be provided as to what state it will change to. If the change starts in the fourth period, even in the first to third periods where no change occurs, a sense of anticipation that it may change can be provided, and it goes without saying that each pattern has its own effect. Alternatively, the reserved image or the reserved image may be prohibited from being changed while the background concealment images A to E are being displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 266 etc., a production example is shown in which the visibility of the reserved image or the reserved image is reduced by the background concealing image, but it may be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image or the reserved image is not reduced, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 237. For example, the display priority of the reserved image or the reserved image may be set higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.

When the display of the decorative pattern begins, the reserved images that had been displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are displayed moving to the reserved display areas to the third reserved display areas. FIG. 268(a) shows that the movement of the reserved images begins and ends during the period from timing t0, when the display of the change begins, to timing t1. The movement of the reserved images may begin and end during this period. This is also true for modified examples 01 to 07 shown in FIG. 268(b).
Figure 267 (a) shows the state in which the movement of the reserved image from the first reserved display area to the reserved display area has been completed before the display of background concealment image A begins.

FIG. 268(b) shows a modified example of the period during which the movement of the reserved image takes place.
Variation example 01 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Variation example 02 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Variation example 03 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
Variation example 04 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends in the period from timing t4 to timing t5.
Variation example 05 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends in the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Variation example 06 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends in the period from timing t6 to timing t7.
Variation example 07 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends in the period from timing t7 to timing t8.

In Modifications 01 to 07, it is shown that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends over one second during the period from timing t1 to timing t8, but the movement of the reserved image may start at a predetermined timing during the period from timing t1 to timing t8, and may end at a predetermined timing. Also, the time required for the movement of the reserved image is not limited to one second, and may be shorter or longer than one second.
For example, the movement of the reserved image may start at timing t1 and end at timing t7, or the movement of the reserved image may start at timing t6 and end at timing t8.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to move the reserved image while the normal background image switching performance is being executed. On the other hand, the reserved image is not moved while the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" performance is being executed, and the position of the reserved image does not change before and after the reach performance.

In this embodiment, an embodiment that displays a strip-shaped preview performance image as shown in FIG. 238 may be adopted.
For example, after the normal background image switching performance is executed, the display of a strip-like look-ahead performance image may be started based on the look-ahead result. Alternatively, while the strip-like look-ahead performance image is being displayed, the normal background image switching performance may be executed to change the normal background image.
On the other hand, when the strip-like pre-reading effect image is already displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed, thereby preventing a player whose expectation for a big win is heightened by the display of the strip-like pre-reading effect image from viewing an excessive effect.
Similarly, when a reserve image with a higher expectation level (for example, a green or red reserve image) than the normal white reserve image is displayed in the reserve display area or the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area, the normal background image switching performance may not be executed, and the same effect can be achieved in this case.

The time from when the display of the decorative patterns begins to change to when the normal background image begins to change (for example, the time from when the display of the background concealment image begins) should be shorter than the time from when the display of the decorative patterns begins to change to when a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") begins.
In addition, the time from when the display of the decorative pattern begins to change to when the change in the normal background image ends (for example, the time from when the display of the background concealment image ends) should be shorter than the time from when the display of the decorative pattern begins to change to when a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") begins.
In addition, it is preferable to configure the device so that after the switching of the normal background image has finished and the display of the background concealment image has ended, the display of the background concealment image at the start of a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") can begin after a predetermined time has elapsed.
This configuration can prevent the player from confusing the change in the normal background image with the change in the background image during a special reach.

In the embodiment shown, a background concealment image consisting of a giant bomb character or the like is displayed in the normal background image switching performance, but a plurality of performance patterns may be executed as the normal background image switching performance, and any one of the performance patterns may be executed. For example, instead of the giant bomb character, a giant tank may be displayed to switch the normal background image.
In addition, the execution of the normal background image switching performance may not indicate the expectation of the special lottery result. That is, the normal background image switching performance may be executed regardless of the special lottery result during the variable display. Specifically, in the next variable display after the special reach is a miss, the normal background image switching performance may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3 probability). In addition, in the variable display after the non-reach miss shown in FIG. 230(a) or the variable display after the reach miss (no background switching) shown in FIG. 230(b), the normal background image switching performance may be executed with a predetermined probability. In this case, in the next variable display after the special reach is a miss, the normal background image switching performance may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/30 probability) lower than the probability of executing the normal background image switching performance (for example, 1/3 probability).
On the other hand, the execution of the normal background image switching performance may indicate the jackpot expectation for the decorative pattern during the change. For example, when another normal background image is displayed instead of the normal background image A or the normal background image B, the expectation may be set higher than when the normal background image A or the normal background image B is displayed. In this case, the expectation indicated by the switching of the normal background image may be set lower than the expectation indicated by the occurrence of a special reach.

A plurality of presentation patterns of the normal background image switching presentation may be provided. For example, a plurality of types and colors of the characters to be displayed may be provided. Also, a different expectation of a big win may be indicated for each presentation pattern. Also, for each presentation pattern, any one of the modified examples shown in FIG. 266 may be appropriately adopted to make the first to third periods different.
For example, the length of the third period in the normal background image switching effect may be different depending on the type or color of the displayed character. In addition, in this case, different expectations may be indicated depending on the type or color of the displayed character.

In the examples of the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects shown with reference to Fig. 252 and Fig. 233, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, and the normal background image A is displayed again after the background concealment image ends, but the normal background image B may be displayed instead of the normal background image A at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the background image switching performance shown with reference to Fig. 266 and Fig. 267, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the change, and at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed, a normal background image different from the normal background image A (in this embodiment, the normal background image B) is displayed. Note that, after the background concealment image ends, the normal background image A may continue to be displayed. In this case, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the background image switching performance.

Instead of normal background image A and normal background image B, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B may be displayed.
At the timing when the display of the background concealing image C ends, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, when the background concealing image is displayed in a situation where the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is displayed and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B decreases, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is increased during the period in which the background concealing image is erased, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without displaying the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealing image is erased arrives, and the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without displaying the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealing image is erased ends.

In this way, in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display E") is performed during the third period.

Below, the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 256 etc. is compared with the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 265 etc. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 256 etc., a background concealment image is displayed at the end of a right hit, and the background image is switched. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 265 etc., the background image is switched when the decorative pattern starts to change.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in a normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit and the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in a normal background image switching performance may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in a normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit (fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modification 01 shown in FIG.

In the example of the performance at the end of a right hit shown with reference to FIG. 257 etc., the normal background image C is displayed during the right hit, and the normal background image A is displayed after the display of the background concealment image is finished, but there may be cases where the normal background image C is displayed. For example, the normal background image A may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and the normal background image C may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Fig. 266 and Fig. 267, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, and at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed, a normal background image different from the normal background image A (normal background image B in this embodiment) is displayed. Note that even after the background concealment image ends, the normal background image A may be displayed in some cases. In this case, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the background image switching performance.

Instead of normal background image A and normal background image B, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B may be displayed.
In addition, instead of the normal background image C, a normal background moving image C that is displayed as a moving image similar to the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
At the end of right-hand hit or at the end of display of the background concealed image C in the normal background image switching performance, the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, when the background concealed image is displayed in a situation where the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C are displayed and the visibility of the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C decreases, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C is increased during the period in which the background concealed image is erased, the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be continuously displayed without displaying the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealed image is erased arrives, and the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be continuously displayed without displaying the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealed image is erased ends.

When the right-hit state ends and returns to the normal state, a right-hit end background concealment image is displayed, but at this time, the reserved image displayed after the right-hit end background concealment image ends should preferably be a normal reserved image (white reserved image).
In addition, at the end of the right-hit state, a right-hit end background concealment image may be displayed so that the reserved image is not changed to another reserved image during the period (third period) in which normal background image A and normal background image B gradually become easier to see.

On the other hand, for the reserved image in the normal background image switching performance, the reserved image may be moved while the background concealed images A to E are displayed (first period to third period). Also, while the background concealed images A to E are displayed, it may be possible to change the reserved image or the state of the reserved image to a reserved image with higher expectations. Alternatively, while the background concealed images A to E are displayed, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image.

In this way, during the third period when the advantageous state ends, a display is made in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases ("special display C"). Also, during the third period in the performance in which the normal background image is switched, a display is made in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases ("special display E").

While the decorative pattern is changing, a performance may be executed that indicates the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. Below, an embodiment is described that is capable of executing a dialogue preview performance that displays a dialogue preview image.

First, the dialogue preview image displayed in the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 269 shows dialogue preview images A to E displayed in the dialogue preview performance of this embodiment.
The display priorities of the dialogue preview images A to E are higher than those of the decorative pattern and the reserved image, and the dialogue preview images A to E are displayed in front of these images.
The dialogue preview image consists of a bomb character (white image) located in the center, dialogue consisting of four kanji characters "Bomb Boy" (white image), and other areas (green background image). Note that the background image referred to here is merely called the background image for convenience in comparison with the image of the bomb character and the dialogue image.
The green background regions of the dialogue preview images A and E have high transparency, the green background regions of the dialogue preview images B and D have low transparency, and the green region of the dialogue preview image C has the lowest transparency, making the background image invisible.
The dialogue preview image A has the kanji character "baku" written on it, the dialogue preview image B has the kanji character "bomb" written on it, and the dialogue preview images C to E have the kanji character "bomb boy" written on it.

Figure 270 shows a time chart illustrating an example of a dialogue preview effect. Also, Figure 271 shows a display example in which a dialogue preview image is displayed at a specified timing.

As shown in the time chart of Fig. 270(a), the display of the decorative symbols starts at timing t0. Fig. 271(a) shows the state in which the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image.
Next, during the period from timing t10 to timing t11, dialogue preview image A is displayed. Figure 271 (b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t11 to timing t12, dialogue preview image B is displayed. Figure 271 (c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t12 to timing t14, a dialogue preview image C is displayed. Figure 271(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t14 to timing t15, a dialogue preview image D is displayed. Figure 271 (e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t15 to timing t16, a dialogue preview image E is displayed. Figure 271(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t16, the series of display of the dialogue preview image ends. FIG. 271(g) shows the display state at a predetermined timing during the period from timing t16 to timing t20 (the period until the left decorative pattern temporarily stops).
At timing t20, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t25, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t30, the center decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
At timing t31, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of the special lottery is shown to be a jackpot or not.

In this way, even in the dialogue preview performance, there is a period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible due to the display of the dialogue preview image (first period), a period during which the background image is not visible (second period), a period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period), and a period until the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops (fourth period). In other words, the dialogue preview image also functions like a background concealment image.

In this way, when a dialogue preview effect in which a series of dialogue preview images are displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the dialogue preview effect is not executed. Whether or not to execute the dialogue preview effect is determined based on the result of a special lottery.
In addition, in some situations while the dialogue preview performance is being performed, the normal background image becomes invisible, but the normal background image is not changed to another normal background image before or after the execution of the dialogue preview performance, and the same normal background image is displayed.

A plurality of dialogue preview effects with different display modes may be executed, and any of the dialogue preview effects may be executed. For example, dialogue preview images with different dialogue contents, character types, background area colors, etc. may be used. Also, the same degree of expectation may be suggested depending on the type of dialogue preview effect, or different degrees of expectation may be suggested.
For example, if the color of the background area is red, the expectation may be higher than if the color is green.

Although examples of displaying dialogue and characters have been given, these are merely examples, and the preview performance may be executed without displaying either the dialogue or the character. Alternatively, the preview performance may be executed by displaying another image instead of the dialogue or the character.

Although it has been shown that the dialogue preview performance is performed by displaying dialogue preview images A through E, the dialogue preview performance may also be performed by displaying a moving image. For example, the character or dialogue may be moved, or the transparency may be changed smoothly.

When comparing the normal background image switching performance in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 265 etc. with the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment, it is preferable to make the time for executing the dialogue preview performance longer compared to the normal background image switching performance.
For example, compared to variant example 02 of the normal background image switching effect, variant example 01 of the dialogue preview effect has a longer execution time.
This prevents the player from overlooking the probability of winning the big win indicated by the dialogue preview effect. On the other hand, the probability of winning the big win is not generally indicated by the execution of the normal background image switching effect. Therefore, even if the time for executing the effect is relatively short, the impact of the player overlooking the probability of winning the big win can be reduced.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance and the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be the same length.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 270 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 270 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible and the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 270 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

The period after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) may be longer than the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

It is also possible to configure the display so that both the dialogue preview effect shown in FIG. 270 and the normal background image switching effect shown in FIG. 266 can be executed during one change in the decorative pattern.
For example, a normal background image switching effect may be executed in the period from timing t1 to timing t7, and a dialogue preview effect may be executed in the period from timing t10 to timing t16. Also, modified examples of both embodiments may be appropriately combined and executed.
It is preferable that the dialogue preview performance is not executed before the normal background image switching performance, but rather that the dialogue preview performance is executed after the normal background image switching performance. Also, it is preferable that the normal background image switching performance is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the dialogue preview performance.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 270 etc., an example of a performance in which the visibility of the reserved image or reserved image is reduced during the dialogue preview performance is shown, but it may be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image or reserved image is not reduced, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 237. For example, the display priority of the reserved image or reserved image may be set higher than the display priority of the dialogue preview image.

In both the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 270 etc., and the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 266, the reserved image or reserved images may be made difficult to see or impossible to see while the performance is being executed.
Alternatively, in both the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 270 etc., and the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 266, the reserved image or images may be maintained in an easily visible state, just as before the performance was executed, without becoming difficult or impossible to see even while the performance is being executed.

Alternatively, in the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 270 etc., the reserved image or reserved image may be made difficult or impossible to see while the performance is being executed, and in the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 266, the reserved image or reserved image may not be made difficult or impossible to see even while the performance is being executed, but may remain easily visible, just as it was before the performance was executed.
Conversely, in the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 270 etc., the reserved image or reserved image does not become difficult or impossible to see even while the performance is being executed, but remains easily visible, just as it was before the performance was executed, and in the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 266, the reserved image or reserved image may become difficult or impossible to see while the performance is being executed.

Even when the strip-shaped preview performance image shown in FIG. 238 is being displayed, it is preferable to configure the dialogue preview performance to be executable.
On the other hand, when a strip-shaped preview performance image is being displayed, it is preferable to configure the device so that the normal background image switching performance is not executed.
This configuration can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes confused about his or her level of expectation due to the execution of a normal background image switching effect that does not necessarily indicate the level of expectation.

When only the dialogue preview performance is executed, the expectation level may be higher than when only the normal background image switching performance is executed.
Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be the same when both the dialogue preview effect and the normal background image switching effect are executed as when only the dialogue preview effect is executed.

Since the normal background image is not changed before and after the execution of the dialogue preview performance, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if the first period or the third period of the dialogue preview performance is shortened or the second period is lengthened.
Also, since the background image is not usually changed, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if there is only a short time left until the decorative pattern changes.

The dialogue preview performance may be executed as a look-ahead performance based on a look-ahead of the reserved image. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 271(a), the number of reserved images is 2, and a reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area, but a look-ahead of the reserved image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area may be performed, and a dialogue preview image may be displayed in each of the three variable displays until the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area becomes the reserved image in question. In this way, the dialogue preview performance may be displayed over multiple variable displays. Also, it is preferable that a predetermined degree of expectation is indicated by the display mode of the dialogue preview image.

On the other hand, the normal background image switching effect is not executed based on the look-ahead effect. Also, as described above, it may be executed in the next variable display that results in a miss.
When the variable display resulting from a miss is stopped and displayed, if there is a hold, a normal background image switching performance is executed with a predetermined probability, and if there is no hold, the normal background image switching performance may not be executed even if a start winning occurs and the next variable display is started.
Alternatively, a specific reach effect (such as the aforementioned "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" in which a special reach background image is displayed instead of a normal background image) is executed, and on the condition that the result is a miss, the execution of the normal background image switching effect in the next variable display may be determined internally with a predetermined probability (including 100% execution of the normal background image switching effect) and stored, and the normal background image switching effect may be executed based on the determined content when the next variable display is executed. Note that, as a specific implementation mode, this can be realized by turning on or off a normal background image switching effect execution flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. According to this configuration, even if the number of reserved items is 0, by turning on the normal background image switching effect execution flag, a start winning occurs and the next variable display is performed, the normal background image switching effect can be executed. Note that the normal background image switching effect execution flag should be maintained in the on state until the next variable display is started.
In addition, even if it has been decided that the normal background image switching performance should be performed, the decision may be changed (the normal background image switching performance execution flag may be turned off) so that the normal background image switching performance will not be performed in the next variable display, provided that no start winning occurs for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds). In addition, the display may transition to a demo image display state in which the pachinko machine 1 is introduced in the display area at the same time as the predetermined period has elapsed. Even when transitioning to the demo image display state, the normal background image switching performance execution flag may be kept on, and when a start winning occurs in the demo image display state and a variable display is performed, the normal background image switching performance may be executed, and the normal background image switching performance execution flag may be turned off.

In this way, while the dialogue preview image is being erased, a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display F").

Although multiple embodiments and modified examples of these embodiments have been described with reference to Figures 224 to 271, all of the multiple described embodiments and modified examples may be executable in a single pachinko machine 1. Alternatively, some of the multiple described embodiments and modified examples may be executable in a single pachinko machine 1.

Also, a player or a staff member of a game establishment may be allowed to select in advance before the start of a game which of the multiple aspects in the embodiment and modified examples shown with reference to Figures 224 to 271 is to be executed. For example, a player may be allowed to set the lengths of the first to fourth periods in each of the effects shown with reference to Figures 224 to 271 on a customization screen or the like.
With this configuration, players can set the game presentation to be executed in a manner that suits their preferences. Also, the staff of the gaming establishment can set the game presentation to be executed in a manner that suits the customer base of the gaming establishment. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In each of the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 224 to 271, there is a first period during which the visibility of the background image decreases as the display of the image that hides the background image begins, a second period during which the visibility of the background image is at its lowest, and a third period during which the visibility of the background image increases. In addition, after the end of each performance, there is a fourth period during which the display of the image that hides the background image ends, the visibility of the background image returns to normal, and the decorative pattern stops.

An example has been shown in which the display of the background concealing image makes the entire background image invisible during the second period, but rather than making it completely invisible, it may be made more difficult to see than when the background concealing image is not displayed.
In this case, it is preferable that the transparency of the background concealing image is set to the lowest during the second period.
Alternatively, the size of the background concealing image may be smaller than the display area, instead of being the same as the display area, so that even when the background concealing image is displayed, part of the background image can be seen. In this case, it is desirable for the ratio of the background concealing image to the display area to be 50% or more, or ⅔ or more.
The dialogue preview image can also be modified in a similar manner.
On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive number display image and the revival performance image (the revival performance character and its lines) are originally smaller than the display area. It is desirable that the ratio of these images to the display area is less than 50%.

It has been shown that there are first to fourth periods in the background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, the pseudo consecutive effect, the normal background image switching effect, and the dialogue preview effect which is part of the preview effect, but the length of at least one of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each effect may be longer or shorter than the length of each state described below.

The special reach decorative pattern swings up and down in a predetermined cycle during the special reach, but each of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of the special reach, background image switching performance at the end of the special reach, background image switching performance at the end of the right hit, pseudo consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, and dialogue preview performance) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. Or, even if it is longer, it is good to make it less than two cycles.
For example, by making the length of the first period in the background image switching performance at the start of a special reach longer than the specified cycle of the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed at a specified cycle during the special reach, since the specified cycle of the special reach decorative pattern during a special reach is relatively long (if it were shorter it would look hectic and it would be difficult to concentrate on the reach performance), by setting the first period in the background image switching performance at the start of a special reach to be longer than that, it has the effect of providing the joy of developing into a special reach for a long period of time.
In addition, for example, by making the length of the third period in the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the specified cycle of the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed at a specified cycle during the special reach, it is possible to end the sense of anticipation for the change in question early and create anticipation for the next change (enabling players to change their mood more quickly).
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

The reserved image or the reserved image may be a moving image and repeatedly displayed at a predetermined cycle. At this time, each of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, and dialogue preview performance) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. Or, even if it is longer, it is preferable that it is less than two cycles.
For example, by making the length of the third period in the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach in which the reserved image or reserved image is not displayed during the special reach longer than the specified cycle of the reserved image or reserved image displayed as a moving image, the reserved image or reserved image is displayed for more than one cycle during the third period, thereby impressing the player with the presence of the reserved image and having the effect of reminding the player to operate the handle 302.
For example, by making the length of the second period in a normal background image switching performance or a dialogue preview performance shorter than the reserved image or the specified period of the reserved image displayed as a moving image, the effect is that a certain degree of visibility of the reserved image or the dynamic performance display of the reserved image is ensured.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

142 and 143, there are four game states (normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving probability variable state, probability variable state) other than the big win state. In these four game states, it is possible to variably display special symbols. It is also possible to variably display decorative symbols at the same time as the special symbols.
In the normal state, the variable display is performed in a number of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to change display to when it stops displaying), but compared to the shortest variable display time among these, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.
In the time-saving state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to change display to when it stops displaying), and compared to the shortest variable display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.
In the non-time-saving special state, the display is performed in a plurality of different presentation patterns with different display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to display and when it stops), and compared to the shortest display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.
In the special bonus state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to display variable to when it stops displaying), and compared to the shortest variable display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.

The shortest time of the variable display time may be different depending on the reserved number at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. For example, the more the reserved number, the shorter the shortest time of the variable display time may be, and the less the reserved number, the longer the shortest time of the variable display time may be.
At this time, compared to the shortest variable display time among the variable display times of the presentation patterns that can occur corresponding to each reserved number, each period (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this length.

The presentation pattern of the decorative patterns and the time period during which the decorative patterns change are also determined according to the game status and the number of reserved balls, but compared to the shortest time among the time periods during which the pachinko machine 1 can take on a change, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the fourth period (the fourth period is the period immediately after the display of a different type of decorative pattern than those that have been displayed up until then) of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the end of a right hit is made shorter than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns, which has the effect of preventing the player from misunderstanding that a new variable display has begun and then stopped.
For example, by making the length of the fourth period of a normal background image switching effect or a dialogue preview effect longer than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns, there is an effect that there is enough time to develop the effect (for example, to develop into a special reach or pseudo consecutive effect) after the normal background image switching effect or the dialogue preview effect is executed.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

With reference to Figures 261 to 264, an embodiment of the pseudo-consecutive performance is shown, but compared to the time taken to display the information to make the player aware that a pseudo-consecutive performance has occurred (display of a special pattern such as "Continue" as shown in Figure 263 (b)), each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a right hit, pseudo-consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, dialogue preview performance) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit shorter than the display that makes the player recognize that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred, the second period is quickly transitioned to, making it possible to clearly distinguish the effect from the pseudo consecutive effect, and it has the effect of making it difficult for the player to mistake that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred (since the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are all displayed in a temporary stop state, the player may have difficulty recognizing which effect has occurred).
For example, by making the length of the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit longer than the display that makes the player aware that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred, the combination of decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped will be displayed as they are (in the case of a pseudo consecutive effect, a re-changing display will always be performed after the temporary stop, but in the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, the decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped will be displayed as they are, except in the case that a revival effect is executed and the result is successful), this has the effect of making the player clearly aware that this will cause them to give up on the changing display.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

In comparison with the shortest interval between launches of game balls into the game area, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than the shortest interval. For example, when 100 game balls can be launched in 60 seconds, the shortest interval between launches of game balls is 0.6 seconds.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest interval between launches of the game ball, the following effects can be achieved.
When a special reach with a high expectation of a big win (for example, a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") starts, some experienced players stop firing the game balls. When the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach starts, such experienced players guess that the result of the special lottery is a miss and operate the handle 302 to resume firing the game balls. In this case, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made shorter than the shortest interval between firing the game balls, so that when the second game ball is fired, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is completely unrecognizable, so that the player learns the certainty that the result of the special lottery has become a miss due to his/her guess that it is a miss, and can concentrate on the direction of the game balls (whether or not they will win the starting prize) from the second game ball. In other words, the number of game balls that the player cannot concentrate on can be minimized while smoothly changing the background.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest interval between launches of the game ball, the following effects can be achieved.
As described above, when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach begins, an experienced player guesses that the result of the special lottery is a miss and operates the handle 302 to resume the launch of the game ball. At this time, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is displayed in the display area and is recognizable by the player, so the player is concerned about both the direction of the shot game ball and the special reach background image. In particular, even an experienced player will be concerned about the special reach background image that he has been looking at for a long time in hope of a big win, and looking at it under a situation where a miss is guessed. Due to these circumstances, it is expected that even an experienced player will be distracted and upset by the display content of the display area, making it difficult to accurately launch the game ball. Therefore, the probability that the game ball launched in the first period will start winning is lower than when the player accurately launches the game ball. In this way, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest interval between launching game balls, the player's state in which the probability of winning the initial prize is reduced can be prolonged, thereby contributing to sales at the game arcade.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

When the display of the decorative pattern changes without a reserved ball, and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the display area may transition to a demo image display state in which an image introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. At this time, the respective periods (first to fourth periods) in each performance (background image switching performance at the start of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, background image switching performance at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive performance, normal background image switching performance, and dialogue preview performance) may be longer or shorter than the predetermined waiting time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the specified waiting time before transitioning to the demo image display state, the following effects can be achieved.
Even players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may stop shooting game balls during a special reach. However, when a player who does not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience executes a special reach and strongly expects it to result in a big win, but ends up with a miss, he or she may be shocked and think, "Seriously?", and may not be able to recover for a while, and may not be able to resume shooting game balls (note that the more experienced and advanced the player is, the more quickly they can switch their mind to a calm state). In this way, if a screen change (transition to a demo performance state) is executed when a player is in a situation where they cannot recover for a while, there is a risk that the player who does not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may think that it is a performance that has been dealt a final blow (a performance that exaggerates the fact that they have lost) (this tendency is noticeable in pachinko machines that employ a revival performance). Therefore, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach shorter than the predetermined waiting time for the transition to the demo image display state, it is possible to care for the mind of such a player who does not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach longer than a specified waiting time, the following effects can be achieved.
When a player who is not necessarily very experienced in gaming loses the special lottery, he or she is often shocked and cannot recover for a while, thinking, "Seriously?" In such a situation of shock, by quickly switching to the demo image display state and causing a change in the screen, the player can feel, "Oh, a revival performance may have occurred!?" (This tendency is prominent in pachinko machines that employ a revival performance. Note that experienced players remain calm in such a situation.) In this way, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined waiting time for switching to the demo image display state, it is possible to give a feeling of elation to a player who is not necessarily very experienced in gaming, and motivate him or her to resume firing game balls.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

In addition, when the payout motor 834 is driven and game balls successively enter winning ports such as the start port or the large winning port from which payouts are made when a win is made, the payout corresponding to the first winning ball is made and then the payout corresponding to the second winning ball is made. However, after making the payout corresponding to the first winning ball, it takes a predetermined time (for example, one second) before making the payout corresponding to the second winning ball. However, compared to this predetermined time, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the specified time until a new payout is made, the following effects can be achieved.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, there is a possibility that the revival effect will be executed, so if the game balls are paid out multiple times in the third period, the player may be distracted by events caused by the payout (such as the collision sound generated when the game balls collide with the upper tray 321 and the management of the number of game balls in the upper tray 321), and the player's desire for the revival effect to be executed, ``Revive!'', may be hindered, and the player's concentration on the game may decrease. However, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the specified time until a new payout is made, such a situation in which the player's concentration is broken can be prevented. The reason why the payout is made once is because the player may feel suspicious if the payout is not made immediately when a predetermined winning hole (such as the general winning hole 2001 or the first starting hole 2002) is won in the third period.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach longer than the specified time until a new payout is made, the following effects can be achieved.
The experienced player as described above assumes that the result of the special lottery is a miss when the first period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach begins, so naturally, in the third period, the player launches the game ball. Therefore, it is conceivable that a situation will occur in which a plurality of game balls enter a predetermined winning port (such as the general winning port 2001 or the first starting port 2002) in the third period that comes after the first period. Experienced players understand that when a game ball enters a predetermined winning port (such as the starting port or the general winning port), the game ball will be paid out immediately, and if the ball is not paid out immediately, the player may feel distrustful (this tendency is noticeable when the player is able to pay out a certain amount of attention to the payout by suppressing the output of the variable performance sound or simplifying the display area in the background image switching performance). However, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made, such distrustfulness can be prevented.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

When the result of the normal lottery is a winning result, the movable piece 2004a is driven and moved to open the second starting hole 2004, making it possible for the game ball rolling in the play area 5a to enter, and after a predetermined time has passed, the movable piece 2004a is returned to its original position to close the second starting hole 2004, making it impossible for the game ball rolling in the play area 5a to enter. A plurality of different times may be set as the time from when the second starting hole 2004 is opened by the movement of the movable piece 2004a to when it is closed (opening time), and the game ball may be allowed to enter the second starting hole 2004 at any of the opening times, or the second starting hole 2004 may be allowed to enter the game ball multiple times for one winning normal lottery (this is achieved by driving and moving the movable piece 2004a multiple times). At this time, compared to the shortest time during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state in which a ball can be entered (if there is only one pattern for the opening time of the second starting port 2004, the opening time for that pattern), each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo-consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second starting hole 2004, the following effects can be achieved.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, a normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach, so that players who are not necessarily experienced in games are often shocked by the normal background image being visible in the third period, and are unable to recover for a while, thinking, "Seriously?" In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, if the start of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the timing when the second start port 2004 becomes available for ball entry are the same, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach can be ended before the second start port 2004 becomes unavailable for ball entry. When the second starting hole 2004 is in a state where a ball can be entered, a lottery for a special pattern is held when the game ball can be entered into the second starting hole 2004, so that a player who is not necessarily experienced at games can operate the handle 302 to try to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 2004, thereby increasing the player's interest again. When the second starting hole 2004 ends its open state, the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach has also ended, so that the player can forget that the special reach has occurred and that the result was a miss, and can switch his or her attention to the change in the new decorative pattern.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second starting hole 2004, the following effects can be achieved.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, a normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach, so that players who are not necessarily experienced in games are often shocked by the normal background image being visible in the third period, and are unable to recover for a while, thinking, "Seriously?" In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, if the start of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the timing when the second start port 2004 becomes available for ball entry are the same, the second start port 2004 can be made unavailable for ball entry before the end of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. When the second starting hole 2004 is in a state where a ball can be entered, a lottery for a special pattern is held when the game ball can be entered into the second starting hole 2004. Therefore, a player who is not necessarily experienced at games can operate the handle 302 to try to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 2004, thereby increasing interest again. Even if the player is unable to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 2004, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach continues, so the player can expect a revival effect to be executed, thereby mitigating the shock received by the player as a whole.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 233 and 252, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 was three seconds (there is only one type of effective operation period), but as other operation presentation patterns, it is also possible to configure the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 to be able to execute presentation patterns that are longer or shorter than the effective operation period of three seconds.
For example, a presentation pattern A may be adopted in which the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, two seconds, and a presentation pattern B may be adopted in which the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, four seconds. In this manner, a plurality of operation valid periods may be provided.
At this time, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and line preview effect) may be longer than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. Also, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and line preview effect) may be longer than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and shorter than the effective operation period of effect pattern B. In addition, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be shorter than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, an effect in which the operation unit can be operated (effect pattern A or effect pattern B) may be executed, in which case the effects described below can be expected. Also, if an effect in which the operation unit can be operated is executed in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, the operation valid period may not extend into the fourth period or after the variable display has stopped (i.e., the operation valid period ends within the third period), or the fourth period may be deleted, in which case the effects described below can be expected.

For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach is longer than the shortest of the multiple effective operation times, which has the effect of making the player look forward to an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") being displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach is set to be longer than the longest of the multiple effective operation times, which has the effect of making the player look forward to an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") being displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest of the multiple effective operation times, it is possible to make the player recognize that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will not be displayed as a revival performance during the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, which has the effect of allowing the player to quickly switch their mind to anticipation for the next changing display.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach has multiple effective operation times, and by making the length longer than the effective operation time of one of the multiple effective operation times but shorter than the effective operation time of the other one, it has the effect of making the player look forward to an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") being displayed as a revival presentation during the third period of the background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach is longer than the effective operation time of one operation valid time (there is only one operation valid time), which has the effect of making the player expect that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will be displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach has an effective operation time of 1 (there is only one effective operation time), and by making it shorter than that effective operation time, it is possible to make the player recognize that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will not be displayed as a revival performance during the third period of the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach, which has the effect of allowing the player to quickly switch their mind to anticipation for the next changing display.
It goes without saying that the other modifications also have their own respective effects.

The degree of expectation for a big win may be different by displaying the special display A to the special display F. In addition, in the relationship between any one of the special displays A to F and any one of the special displays A to F, the degree of expectation for one may be higher, the degree of expectation for both may be the same, or the degree of expectation for one may be lowered.
Similarly, in the case of three or more special displays, the expectation level of a certain special display may be increased, the expectation levels of multiple special displays may be the same, or the expectation level of a certain special display may be decreased.

For example, the degree of expectation may be higher when special display A is displayed than when special display E is displayed than when special display B or special display D is displayed. Also, the degree of expectation may be higher when special display A is displayed than when special display E is displayed, or the degree of expectation may be higher when special display B is displayed.
In addition, the expectation level when the special display C is displayed may be lower than that of the special display A and the special display E, and higher than that of the special display B and the special display D. Alternatively, the expectation level may be lower than that of the special display A, the special display B, the special display D, and the special display E.

The illuminating decorative means provided on the door frame 3 (e.g., the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550) may be illuminated when the special display is executed.
For example, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may be illuminated with illumination patterns A to F corresponding to the special displays A to F. The illumination patterns may be different or the same in relation to any one of the special displays A to F and any one of the special displays A to F.
For example, for displays with high expectations such as special display A, and displays indicating a change in game status such as special display C, unique lighting patterns may be adopted, while the same lighting pattern may be adopted for special displays B, C, and E.
In this way, by making the lighting pattern different for each special display, even if the player is looking away and not at the display area, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. will come into view, allowing the player to recognize which special display has been executed.
As a method for making the light emission pattern different for each special display, a method of turning on or blinking, making the light emission color or duration different, or the like may be adopted.

A lighting pattern corresponding to the color of the image used for the special display may be adopted. For example, when a black background concealment image is displayed, the brightness of the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be reduced or turned off. When a white background concealment image is displayed, the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be made to emit white light. When other background concealment images are displayed, the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be made to emit light in the color of the displayed character, or in the color of the background area of the displayed background concealment image.

The lighting pattern corresponding to each special display may end earlier than the special display, may end simultaneously with the special display, or may end later than the special display.
After the lighting pattern corresponding to each special display has ended, the display may be turned off or may be illuminated in a manner that matches the background music.

Although an embodiment of the "giant tank reach" has been shown with reference to FIG. 252 etc., multiple types of "giant tank reach" with different enemy tank display modes and operation units may be configured to be executable. Furthermore, the expectation level of the "giant tank reach" may differ depending on the enemy tank display mode and the operation unit. Even in this case, the expectation level of the "giant tank reach" may be higher than the expectation level of the "enemy tank destruction reach". Furthermore, for such different types of "giant tank reach", the background image may be switched in the same manner. For example, in multiple "giant tank reaches", a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be displayed and the background image may be switched in the same manner.

Although an embodiment of the "enemy tank destruction reach" has been shown with reference to FIG. 233 etc., multiple types of "enemy tank destruction reach" that differ in the display mode of the enemy tank and the operation unit to be operated may be configured to be executable. Furthermore, the expectation level of the "enemy tank destruction reach" may differ depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit to be operated. Note that even in this case, the expectation level may be lower than that of the "giant tank reach". Furthermore, background images may be switched and displayed in the same manner for such different types of "enemy tank destruction reach". For example, in multiple "giant tank reaches", a black background concealment image may be displayed and background images may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233, a simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed during the valid operation period to suggest the special lottery result, but during the execution of the background image switching performance at the end of the special reach, it is not considered to be a valid operation period, and no simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed.
Similarly, for each of the other effects (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effects, normal background image switching effect, and dialogue preview effect), the first to third periods should not be considered as valid operation periods, and it is advisable not to display simulated images that mimic the operating parts (i.e., simulated images that mimic the operating parts should never be displayed).
In this way, the first to third periods in all reach performances are not valid operation periods, and it is preferable not to display a simulated image that imitates the operation unit (i.e., a simulated image that imitates the operation unit is not necessarily displayed).
Note that the first to third periods are merely examples of periods that are not considered to be valid operation periods and in which a simulated image simulating the operation unit is not displayed (i.e., a simulated image simulating the operation unit is never displayed), and may include the fourth period, or may be any one of the first to fourth periods, or any multiple of these periods.
With this configuration, the display content in the display area is simplified, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player does not realize that the operation reception of the operation unit is enabled and is unable to operate the operation unit.

During the varying display of the decorative pattern, a varying effect sound is output, but in special displays A to F, the output of the varying effect sound may be suppressed.
Hereinafter, a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 252 etc. will be described with reference to Fig. 272(a). Similarly, a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 270 will be described with reference to Fig. 272(b).
In the example of the effect shown in Fig. 272 (a), the variable effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 when the background concealment image is displayed. Also, the variable effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
In the presentation example shown in Figure 272 (b), even during the period from timing t10 to timing t16 when the background concealment image is displayed, the variable presentation sound is not suppressed, and output in the normal state is maintained.
Thus, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 272 (a), the output state of the variable effect sound was in a suppressed state for the first period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible, the second period during which the background image is not visible, and the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible.
On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 272 (b), even in the first to third periods, the output state of the variable performance sound was not suppressed but maintained in the normal state.
When the background image is switched in this manner, the output state of the variable effect sound may be suppressed, and when the background image is not switched, the output state of the variable effect sound may be maintained in the normal state.

An example has been given in which the first to third periods are in a suppressed state, but the variable effect sound may be in a suppressed state during at least one of the first to third periods and the fourth period, which is the period until the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. Note that the suppressed state may be maintained even during the period after the fourth period in which the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, and the normal state may be restored when the next variable display starts.

The suppressed state may be a state in which the volume of the variable performance sound is output at a lower volume than in the normal state. Alternatively, it may be a state in which the variable performance sound is not output. In this case, although the variable performance sound is played internally, the output volume may be set to 0 internally (muted) to prevent the variable performance sound from being output from the speaker. Alternatively, the playback of the variable performance sound itself may be ended or interrupted to prevent the variable performance sound from being output from the speaker.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 272(a), the normal state is from timing t19 to timing t36, but during this period, a special variable effect sound corresponding to the type of special reach may be output. In this case, it is advisable to start outputting the special variable effect sound from timing t16 during the suppression state or timing t19 at the end of the suppression state. It is also advisable to end outputting the special variable effect sound at timing t36 at the start of the suppression state or timing t39 during the suppression state.

Not limited to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 252 etc., the same aspect may be adopted to suppress the variable effect sound in the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect shown with reference to FIG. 233 etc., the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit shown with reference to FIG. 257 etc., the pseudo consecutive effect shown with reference to FIG. 261 etc., and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. 266 etc.

Below, with reference to Figs. 273 to 281, etc., we will explain the "reserve change chance effect", which is a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 123 to 272, etc. Figs. 273 to 275 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or a modification), etc. Fig. 280 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Fig. 281 shows an example of display in the display area.

273 to 275 show an example of an image displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 273 shows a background image, FIG. 274 shows a decorative pattern, and FIG. 275 shows a background concealment image.
Data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modified examples is stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.

273(a) shows a normal background image A. Normal background image A is an image showing the scenery inside a recording studio, a microphone stand, and a female singer character.
273(b) shows a normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing the scenery inside the female singer character's own room, including the furniture installed therein.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images that are displayed when the gaming state is the normal state.

273(c) shows a special reach background image A that is displayed when the special reach effect "Year-end singing contest reach effect" is executed. The special reach background image A is an image that shows the stage, the audience seats, and the reach name.
273(d) shows a special reach background image B that is displayed when the special reach effect "The Countdown Reach Effect" is executed. The special reach background image B is an image that shows the stage, the audience seats, the reach name, and the expectation that the variable result will be a jackpot.
The degree of expectation when the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" is executed is set to be higher than the degree of expectation when the "The Countdown Reach Performance" is executed. For example, the degree of expectation when the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" is executed may be 50%, and the degree of expectation when the "The Countdown Reach Performance" is executed may be 15%.
In addition, the ``Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance'' and ``The Countdown Reach Performance'' are similar to the ``Giant Tank Reach Performance'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach Performance'' shown with reference to Figures 224 to 272, etc., and various embodiments of the ``Giant Tank Reach Performance'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach Performance'' (performances when the background image changes, pseudo consecutive performances, dialogue preview performances, performances that operate various operating parts, etc.) may be adopted in the ``Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance'' and ``The Countdown Reach Performance.''

Figure 273 (e) shows a normal background image C that is displayed in a high probability time-saving state or low probability time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. The normal background image C is an image that indicates to the player the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive jackpots), the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive jackpot state, and the right hand shot. The number part of the image "LIVE x 15" indicates the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive jackpots), and in this example, the number of consecutive jackpots is 15. The number part of the image "Number of spectators: Over 12,000" indicates the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive jackpot, and in this example, more than 12,000 game balls are paid out. The normal background image C is specifically displayed during the display of the changing or stopping of the decorative pattern in the high probability time-saving state or low probability time-saving state, and during the jackpot that occurs in the high probability time-saving state or low probability time-saving state.

Figure 274 shows an example of decorative patterns that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. Each decorative pattern consists of a left decorative pattern, a center decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern. These decorative patterns are switched and displayed as appropriate depending on the progress of the performance and the game situation.

274(a) shows a normal decorative pattern. In this figure, an example of a normal decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is shown, but each normal decorative pattern can be displayed by scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, downward) or displayed in a state where it is temporarily stopped at a predetermined position.
The display mode of the normal decorative symbols is determined according to the special lottery result, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the symbols are displayed as a sequence of numbers (e.g., "222"), and if the special lottery result is not a jackpot, the symbols are displayed as a sequence of numbers that are not a sequence (e.g., "352"). Figure 274(a) shows an example of the normal decorative symbols being displayed as "538".
A typical decorative pattern is composed of a vertically long rectangular background area and numbers and characters (or letters) arranged in front of the background area. The numbers and characters (or letters) have a one-to-one correspondence.

Figure 274 (b) shows a special reach decorative pattern that is displayed when the special reach effects such as the "Year-end Singing Contest Reach Effect" and "The Countdown Reach Effect" are executed.
The special reach decoration symbol is displayed smaller than the normal decoration symbol in a predetermined position of the display area (near the center in the figure). This makes it easier for the player to see the effects that suggest the special lottery results that are executed during the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effects" and "The Countdown Reach Effects."
274(c) is a modified example of the special reach decoration pattern. In this way, a special reach decoration pattern in which the numbers are displayed more emphasized may be adopted. It is displayed during the execution of the special reach performance (especially at the end).
In addition, Figures 274 (b) and 274 (c) show a state in which the special reach decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
During the execution of a special reach performance (especially in the middle stage), only the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the center decorative pattern may not be displayed.

Figure 274 (d) shows the right-hit decorative pattern that is displayed during a right hit. The right-hit decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed in a game state that requires the player to hit to the right, such as a low-probability time-saving state or a high-probability time-saving state. Figure 274 (d) shows the state in which the right-hit decorative pattern is displayed stopped at "538."

Special reach decorative patterns and right-hit decorative patterns do not have characters or letters like normal decorative patterns, but only numbers. This makes it possible to simplify the visual appearance of the patterns.

The decorative symbols scroll slowly for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) after the variable display starts, a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped when a reach state occurs, and a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) before the variable display ends, so that the player can clearly see the decorative symbols. Note that such a variable state is sometimes called a slow variable.
On the other hand, outside of these periods, the decorative symbols are displayed semi-transparently and the scrolling speed is also high, so that although the player can recognize that the decorative symbols are being displayed in a changing manner, it is impossible or difficult to recognize the numbers, characters, etc., that the decorative symbols have. This type of changing state is sometimes called high-speed changing.
In addition, when starting to display the decorative pattern changes, the display may start suddenly with high speed changes without first displaying the decorative pattern at low speed changes.
Figure 274 (e) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of a decorative pattern during rapid fluctuation with a downward arrow, and in the embodiment described below, a decorative pattern during rapid fluctuation is shown diagrammatically with an arrow.

When the symbols are scrolled slowly, for example, two symbols per second may be scrolled. Note that the speed is not limited to two symbols per second, and any speed within the range of one to three symbols may be selected. By scrolling the symbols slowly in this way, it becomes easier to identify the type of symbol.
In addition, multiple (two or more) variation modes with different variation speeds may be provided as the mode of low-speed variation. For example, a low-speed variation in which the pattern scrolls by one pattern per second, a low-speed variation in which the pattern scrolls by two patterns per second, or a low-speed variation in which the pattern scrolls by three patterns per second may be provided. In addition, when displaying the variation, the low-speed variation may be performed in any of these modes.
In addition, a changing display in which the patterns scroll by one pattern per second may be referred to as ultra-slow changing, and a changing display in which the patterns scroll by three patterns per second may simply be referred to as slow changing.

Also, when the symbols are scrolled at high speed, it is advisable to scroll and display 10 symbols per second. Note that the speed is not limited to 10 symbols per second, and any speed within the range of 8 to 12 symbols can be selected. By scrolling the symbols at high speed in this way, it becomes difficult or impossible to identify the type of symbol.
In addition, multiple (two or more) high-speed fluctuation modes with different fluctuation speeds may be provided as the high-speed fluctuation mode. For example, high-speed fluctuations in which the patterns scroll by 8 patterns per second, high-speed fluctuations in which the patterns scroll by 10 patterns per second, and high-speed fluctuations in which the patterns scroll by 12 patterns per second may be provided. In addition, when displaying the fluctuations, the high-speed fluctuation may be performed in any of these modes.
In addition, a changing display in which 12 symbols scroll per second may be called ultra-high speed changing, and a changing display in which 10 symbols scroll per second may simply be called high speed changing.

As shown with reference to FIG. 274, the normal decorative pattern, the special reach decorative pattern, and the right-hit decorative pattern can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters or letters, the size of the numbers, etc. The numbers constituting the decorative patterns are not limited to being written in Arabic numerals, and may be written in Chinese numerals or Roman numerals.
With this configuration, the player can recognize the presentation situation and game state based on the type of decorative pattern, the number, etc.

275(a) to 275(c) show examples of background concealment images. The background concealment images in this embodiment have the same functions as those shown with reference to Figs. 228, 229, etc.
The background concealment image in this embodiment is displayed when switching between the normal background image A or the normal background image B and the special reach background image displayed when executing the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" or "The Countdown Reach Performance." The background concealment image shown in Fig. 275(a) to Fig. 275(c) is made of a white image imitating a curtain, and is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the display area, and then from the bottom to the top of the display area, during which the background image and decorative pattern are changed.
Figures 275(d) to 275(f) show other examples of background concealment images. These background concealment images are images obtained by removing the bomb character from the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 228 etc., and are displayed so as to move left and right in the same manner as the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 228 etc.

Below, we will explain the outline of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" with reference to Figure 276. Also, we will explain the outline of "The Countdown Reach Performance" with reference to Figure 277.

First, the left and right normal decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol, and a reach state is established. Figure 276 (a) and Figure 277 (a) show the display state at this time.
Next, the background concealed images are displayed in the order of background concealed image A, background concealed image B, background concealed image C, background concealed image B, and background concealed image A. Note that the background concealed images are displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 224 to 272 etc.

Next, in the case of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance", a special reach background image A is displayed, and in the case of the "The Countdown Reach Performance", a special reach background image B is displayed. The titles of these reach performances are also displayed. Figures 276(b) and 277(b) show the display state at this time. The displayed title will cease to be displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed.
The color of the letters indicating the title of the reach performance is displayed in one of white, red, or gold, and it is set so that the red letters have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the white letters, and the gold letters have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the red letters.

Next, an image of a female singer character and a microphone is displayed. In addition, in the case of the "Year-end singing contest reach performance", an image of an evil princess character is displayed, and in the case of the "The countdown reach performance", an image of a small fish princess character is displayed. Figures 276(c) and 277(c) show the display state at this time.

Next, a performance display is performed in which the female singer character and the evil princess character or the small fish princess character compete for the microphone for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the result of the performance display suggests the result of the special lottery. Specifically, if the female singer character can hold the microphone, the special reach decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a double-digit pattern, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. Figures 276(d) and 277(d) show the display state at this time. After that, the background concealment image is displayed again, and the normal decoration pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in a double-digit pattern and the normal background image are displayed. Figures 276(e) and 277(e) show the display state at this time.
On the other hand, if the microphone is taken away by the evil princess character or the small fish princess character, the special reach decoration pattern is displayed temporarily stopped in a reach miss mode, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a miss. Figures 276(f) and 277(f) show the display state at this time. After that, the background concealment image is displayed again, and the normal decoration pattern temporarily stopped in a reach miss mode and the normal background image are displayed. Figures 276(g) and 277(g) show the display state at this time.
After the state in which the normal decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, one second), the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the game state is changed to a big win game state or the next variable display is started.
During the special reach effect, a predetermined song may be output from the speaker. Also, different songs may be output for the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" and the "Countdown Reach Effect."

The evil princess character or the small fish princess character may appear twice during one special reach performance. In this case, for example, if the female singer character can hold the microphone twice in succession during the special reach performance, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a big win mode, and if the female singer character cannot hold the microphone even once, or if she can hold the microphone the first time but cannot hold it the second time, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a losing mode.
In this case, after the display shown in Figures 276(d) and 277(d) has been made, the evil princess character or the small fish princess character may be made to appear again as shown in Figures 276(c) and 277(c) to display whether or not the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone.
In this way, the special reach performance can be divided into two parts, a first half and a second half, and a specified display (in this case, holding the microphone) can be made in each part to indicate to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.
Incidentally, the evil princess character or the minor princess character may appear three or more times, not limited to twice in the first and second halves.

After the display state shown in Fig. 276(d), Fig. 276(f), Fig. 277(d), Fig. 277(f), the background concealment image may not be displayed, and the temporarily stopped special reach decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed while the special reach background image and characters (female singer character, evil princess character, small fish princess character) are still displayed. At this time, the small special reach decoration pattern may be changed to the large special reach decoration pattern shown in Fig. 274(c) and stopped and displayed.

During the execution of the special reach performance, a predetermined character may be displayed, and the color of the character may indicate the expectation of a big win. For example, a line "Don't let go of the microphone!" may be displayed as the line of a female singer character. FIG. 278(a) shows a state in which an evil princess character appears during the "Year-end singing contest reach performance" and the character "Don't let go of the microphone!" is displayed as the line of a female singer character. The line image is displayed while the evil princess character and the small fish princess character appear and are fighting over the microphone, and after the display of the line image ends, a display is made as to whether the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone.
The color of the dialogue is displayed in one of white, red, and gold, and it is preferable to set it so that red characters have a higher expectation of a jackpot than white characters, and gold characters have a higher expectation of a jackpot than red characters.

Similarly, a cut-in image may be displayed during the execution of the special reach performance to indicate the degree of expectation. Fig. 278(b) shows an example in which a window image, an image of the lines "I'll sing until the end!!", and an image of a female singer character are displayed as the cut-in image. The cut-in image is displayed while the evil princess character and the small fish princess character appear and are fighting over the microphone, and after the display of the cut-in image ends, a display is made as to whether the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone.
The color of the image displayed as the cut-in image (at least one of the entire window image, a part of the window image (e.g., a frame part), a dialogue image, and an image of a female singer character) is displayed in any one of green, red, and gold, and it is preferable to set it so that the red image has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the green image, and the gold image has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the red image.

In addition, during the special reach effect, a predetermined effect may be generated in response to the operation of a button (for example, the operation button 401 or the attack button 3710) to indicate the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot.
For example, a cheering message image showing the cheers from the spectators may be displayed in response to a button operation, and the degree of expectation may be indicated in accordance with the amount of cheering indicated by the cheering message image.
Fig. 279(a) shows the display state when the Akuhime character is displayed. In this state, acceptance of button operations is valid for a specified period of time, and an image resembling a button is displayed to instruct button operation. Fig. 279(b) shows the display state at this time. Note that a gauge indicating the valid operation period is displayed below the image instructing button operation.
When the player presses the button or when the valid period for button operation ends, cheering message images cheering on the female singer character are displayed. The number of cheering message images displayed indicates the expectation of a big win. The more cheering message images there are, the higher the expectation can be set.
Fig. 279(c) shows a state where two cheering message images are displayed. Fig. 279(d) shows a state where four cheering message images are displayed. In this case, the latter display state where four cheering message images are displayed has a higher expectation of a big win.
In addition, when an effect instructing a button operation is performed, it is advisable to set the expectation level higher than when an effect instructing a button operation is not performed (i.e., when a cheering message image is not displayed).
The display of the cheering message image will end after a predetermined time, after which a display will be displayed indicating whether or not the female singer character will be able to continue holding the microphone (either the display shown in Figure 276 (d) or Figure 276 (f)).
Although the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710 have been given as examples of button operations, button operations for the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 may also be required.

This configuration creates a sense of anticipation in the player that an image instructing them to operate the buttons will be displayed during the special reach performance, and when an image instructing them to operate the buttons is displayed, the player will expect more cheering message images to be displayed.

Instead of button operation, a display based on operation of a lever (left lever 3720 or right lever 3730 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 137, etc.) may be performed. In that case, a predetermined number of penlight images (for example, 4 to 8) may be displayed instead of the cheering message image, and the more penlight images displayed, the higher the expectation level may be set.
Fig. 279(e) shows a display state in which an image instructing a lever operation is displayed, and Fig. 279(f) shows a display state in which six penlight images are displayed after the lever operation (or after the valid period of the lever operation has ended).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 276 and 277, the reserved image and all of the reserved images in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area were displayed during the special reach performance, but only the reserved image may be displayed during the special reach performance. Alternatively, all reserved images, including the reserved image, may not be displayed during the special reach performance.
In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which a background concealment image is displayed at the end of the special reach performance, and the special reach background image is switched to a normal background image, but after this switching timing, the normal background image, the normal decorative pattern, the reserved image, and the reserved images in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area gradually become visible. Note that although the reserved images are displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, the reserved images may not be displayed.

The "Hold Change Chance Presentation" will be described below with reference to Figures 280 and 281. Figure 280 shows a time chart illustrating an embodiment of the "Hold Change Chance Presentation". Also, Figure 281 shows an example of the display in the display area when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" is executed.

First, referring to Fig. 280(a), the presentation mode when the "reserved change chance presentation" is not performed will be described. Note that the decorative symbols displayed in the figures shown in Figs. 281 to 284 are normal decorative symbols.
The variable display starts at timing t0, and after one second has elapsed, the decorative pattern is in a display state in which it is rapidly variable. FIG. 281(a) shows the display state in which the decorative pattern is rapidly variable, and a normal background image A is displayed as the background image. The number of reserved items is two, and a normal reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area, and normal reserved images are displayed in the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area. Details of the reserved display area, the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area are as described above with reference to FIG. 123.
In this presentation example, the visual appearance of the reserved image does not change until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at timing t31.
From timing t31 to timing t32, the decorative pattern is displayed in a static manner. The display of the reserved image ends at timing t31. After timing t32, the next and subsequent variable display and big win games start. At the timing (timing t32) when the next variable display starts, the display of a new reserved image starts.

Next, for performance example 01 to performance example 04 shown in FIG. 280(b), the performance mode when the "reserved change chance performance" is executed will be described. In the "reserved change chance performance", a reserved concealment image indicating whether the currently displayed reserved image will change to another reserved image is displayed in front of the reserved image. The reserved concealment images are a first reserved concealment image with the kanji character "歌" arranged in an octagonal area, a second reserved concealment image with the kanji character "姫" arranged in an octagonal area, a third reserved concealment image with the kanji character "伝" arranged in an octagonal area, a fourth reserved concealment image with the kanji character "論" arranged in an octagonal area, and a roughly circular reserved concealment effect image with a radially shaped circumference (note that for simplicity, it is written as "circular" in the figure).

Performance example 01 shows a performance example in which a first reserved concealment image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image (white reserved image) from timing t2 to timing t3. Figure 281 (b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3.

Presentation example 02 shows a presentation example in which a first reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t2 to timing t3, and a second reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t3 to timing t4.
Fig. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3, and Fig. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4.

Presentation example 03 shows a presentation example in which a first reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t2 to timing t3, a second reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t3 to timing t4, and a third reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t4 to timing t5.
Fig. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3, Fig. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4, and Fig. 281(d) is a display example from timing t4 to timing t5.

The performance example 04 shows a performance example in which a first reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t2 to timing t3, a second reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t3 to timing t4, a third reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t4 to timing t5, a fourth reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t5 to timing t6, and a reserved concealment effect image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t6 to timing t7. In this performance example, the changed reserved image is displayed after timing t7.
Fig. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3. Fig. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4. Fig. 281(d) is a display example from timing t4 to timing t5. Fig. 281(e) is a display example from timing t5 to timing t6. Fig. 281(f) is a display example from timing t6 to timing t7. Fig. 281(g) is a display example from timing t7 onwards.
It is confirmed that when the fourth reserved concealment image is displayed at timing t5, the reserved image will change to another reserved image. However, in this embodiment, by displaying a reserved concealment effect image, the timing of displaying the changed reserved image is delayed, making it possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation for a long period of time.

In the performance examples 01 to 03, at the timings t2 to t4, the display of the reserved concealed image is ended, and the reserved image that was displayed before the reserved concealed image is displayed is displayed. Figure 281 (h) shows the display state at this time.
When the display of the reserved concealed image is terminated, the display of the reserved concealed image may be terminated instantly or gradually. In the case of gradual termination, the reserved image becomes gradually visible.
On the other hand, in the performance example 04, after displaying the fourth reserved concealment image and the reserved concealment effect image, the display of the reserved concealment effect image ends at the timing t7, and the reserved image is displayed in a color (in this case, blue) indicating a high expectation of a big win compared to the normal reserved image that was displayed before the reserved concealment image was displayed. Figure 281 (g) shows the display mode at this time.
In this way, the display presentation progresses in stages, with the characters "Uta,""Hime,""Tradition," and "Setsu" (or just the character "Setsu") being displayed, a reserved concealment effect image being displayed, and then the reserved image being displayed. Ultimately, the display mode of the reserved image suggests the likelihood of a jackpot, which can heighten the player's sense of anticipation compared to when the display mode of the reserved image changes suddenly.

In addition, although the example of the presentation in which the reserved image is displayed in blue when the display of the reserved concealment effect image is finished has been shown, the reserved image may be configured to be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green, red, or gold, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot. With such a configuration, the player waits with anticipation as to which reserved image will be displayed when the fourth reserved concealment image is displayed.
In each example, the reserved image is invisible during the period when the reserved hidden image is displayed, but a part of the reserved image may be made visible. In this case, it is possible to recognize the color of the reserved image being displayed as the reserved image.

When a reserved image other than the normal reserved image is displayed, the "reserved change chance performance" may be executed. Below, referring to FIG. 280(c), a performance example in which the "reserved change chance performance" is executed when the reserved image in blue is displayed is shown.
The performance example 05 shows a performance example in which only the first reserved concealed image is displayed when the reserved image in blue is displayed. In this performance example, the reserved image in blue is displayed even after the timing t2 when the display of the first reserved concealed image ends. Note that even if only the second reserved concealed image or the third reserved concealed image is displayed, the reserved image in blue is displayed after the display of these reserved concealed images ends.

Example 06 shows a presentation example in which the reserved image is displayed in blue and the reserved concealment effect image is also displayed. In this presentation example, at time t7 when the display of the reserved concealment effect image ends, the display of the reserved image in colors such as green, red, and gold, which have a higher expectation than the blue reserved image, begins.

In the example of the presentation shown with reference to Figures 280(a) and 280(b), the decorative symbols are sequentially temporarily stopped and displayed after timing t10, and all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t21. However, the timing at which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed may be delayed further, and in the period up to that point, other presentations described in this specification, such as a pseudo consecutive presentation, a "Year-end singing contest reach presentation," or a "The Countdown reach presentation," may be executed.

In this way, in the "reserved change chance performance", the reserved concealed images are displayed in a predetermined order in stages, and when the reserved concealed image of the final stage is displayed (when the fourth reserved concealed image is displayed), the reserved image is changed to the reserved image indicating a higher expectation and displayed. On the other hand, when the display of the reserved concealed image does not reach the final stage (when only the first reserved concealed image to the third reserved concealed image are displayed), the reserved image does not change, and the reserved image displayed before the display of the reserved concealed image begins is displayed as it is.
With this configuration, the player will be very interested in whether the display of the reserved hidden image will progress to the final "theory," making it possible to provide the player with a new amusement.

With reference to FIG. 280(b), an example is shown in which a maximum of four reserved concealed images (first reserved concealed image to fourth reserved concealed image) are displayed, but the number of reserved concealed images may be greater or less than this. For example, in the performance example shown with reference to FIG. 280(f), the seventh reserved concealed image may be displayed, but details will be given later.

Although the above shows an example in which the reserved concealed image is instantly switched at a predetermined timing (timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, timing t6, etc.), the reserved concealed image before the switch may be displayed to be gradually switched to the reserved concealed image after the switch when the switch is made. For example, the reserved concealed image may be dynamically switched by displaying the kanji character "uta" (song) moving to the left side within an octagonal area while the kanji character "hime" (princess) appears from the right side. Figure 282(a) shows the display mode of the reserved concealed image during the switch. Note that it is desirable to execute such a switch display in a period of about 0.1 to 0.3 seconds.

Although examples of the case where the reserved concealed image is only partially displayed have been shown with reference to performance example 01 to performance example 03, in this case, the reserved concealed image may be gradually erased over a predetermined period (for example, one second) rather than being instantly erased to make the original reserved image visible. For example, the transparency may be gradually increased so that the reserved image becomes visible.
282(b) shows a state in which the first reserved concealed image is displayed semi-transparently. In this state, the kanji characters added to the reserved concealed image and the shape and color of the reserved image can be recognized.

Although an example of a presentation in which a reserved concealed image is suddenly displayed at a position overlapping the reserved image has been shown, the reserved concealed image may also be displayed at a position not overlapping the reserved image and then moved toward the reserved image so as to overlap it with the reserved image.
Figures 282(c) to 282(e) show display examples in which a large first reserved concealed image is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and then the size of the first reserved concealed image is gradually reduced while being moved toward the reserved image, and finally the first reserved concealed image is displayed overlapping in front of the reserved image.

The reserved concealment image may be displayed within the reserved image. Figures 283(a) to 283(d) show examples of displaying the first reserved concealment image to the fourth reserved concealment image superimposed on the foreground within the reserved image. It is also advisable to display the reserved concealment effect image superimposed on the foreground within the reserved image. It is also possible for the first reserved concealment image to the fourth reserved concealment image to be composed of text only.

Note that the first through fourth reserved concealment images and reserved concealment effect images displayed in the "reserved change chance performance" are images that are displayed temporarily, and do not continue to be displayed in front of the reserved image. In other words, the display of the first through fourth reserved concealment images and reserved concealment effect images ends at a predetermined timing during the display of the decorative pattern changes, and the performance is executed so that the reserved image in a predetermined form (white, blue, etc.) is visible at least immediately before the decorative pattern stops changing. For example, in performance example 01 to performance example 04, the display of the first through fourth reserved concealment images and reserved concealment effect images ends by timing t7 at the latest.

Other display modes may be adopted as the display modes of the first reserved concealed image to the fourth reserved concealed image. FIG. 283(e) is an example in which a square (tilted at 45 degrees) is used. FIG. 283(f) is an example in which the size of the kanji displayed in the octagonal area is increased. FIG. 283(g) is an example in which the color in the octagonal area is green. In addition, the color of the characters may be green, not limited to the color in the area. In addition, reserved concealed images in a mode that combines these may be adopted.
In addition, these display modes may indicate the likelihood of the characters being executed to completion in the "hold change chance presentation" or the likelihood of a jackpot.
Specifically, the expectation of characters being executed to completion and the expectation of a jackpot may be higher when a reserved concealment image in the manner shown in FIG. 283 is displayed compared to when a reserved concealment image in the manner shown in FIG. 281(b) to FIG. 281(e) is displayed.
In addition, a reserved concealed image showing a 100% expectancy of characters being executed to the end or a 100% expectancy of a jackpot may be displayed in any of the first reserved concealed image to the fourth reserved concealed image.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the reserved concealed image will be displayed to the end, and the likelihood of a big win if the reserved concealed image is displayed to the end.

Referring to Figures 281 (f) and 281 (g), an example has been shown in which the reserved image is changed and displayed at the timing (timing t7) when the display of the reserved concealment effect image is ended, but it is also possible to display a performance image in front of the reserved image at the timing when the display of the reserved concealment effect image is ended, which suggests or warns of the occurrence of a specified event.
284(a) and 284(b) are effect images including the words "Chance" and "Super Hot." Each of these shows a display example in which an effect image indicating the expectation that the variable display result will be a jackpot is displayed. Note that the latter effect image has a higher expectation.
Fig. 284(c) shows a display example in which a performance image including the word "Waiting" is displayed, indicating that some performance will be performed before the variable display ends. When the performance is performed, the display of this performance image ends, and the reserved image becomes visible.
FIG. 284(d) shows a display example in which a performance image including the characters "Live Reach" is displayed, which notifies the occurrence of a "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" or "The Countdown Reach Performance". Note that a performance image including the characters "Year-end Song Battle" or "The Countdown" may be displayed more clearly to indicate the type of reach performance that will occur. Note that when the reach performance starts, the display of this performance image ends, and the reserved image becomes visible.
In addition, the presentation image including the words "Diva Legend" shown in Figure 284 (e) is also a presentation image indicating that a decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state indicative of a jackpot.

As for the effect images shown in Fig. 284(c) and Fig. 284(d), the display is terminated in the middle of the change of the decorative pattern, and the reserved image becomes visible, but as for the effect images shown in Fig. 284(a), Fig. 284(b), and Fig. 284(e), the display may be terminated in the middle of the change of the decorative pattern, and the reserved image may become visible, or the display may be continued until the decorative pattern stops, and the reserved image may not become visible after the display of the effect image. In this case, the effect image will substantially perform the same function as the reserved image.
Although an example has been given in which text is used to suggest or predict the occurrence of a specified event, the occurrence of a specified event may be suggested or predicted by a display mode other than text (color, shape, icon, etc., or a combination thereof).

Although an example has been shown in which the "hold change chance presentation" is started immediately after the decorative pattern changing display becomes a display state in which it changes at high speed, the "hold change chance presentation" may be started at other timing.
For example, a "hold change chance effect" may be started at the start of a pseudo-consecutive performance (for pseudo-consecutive performances, see the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 262, 263, etc.), during a pseudo-consecutive performance, at the start of special reach performances such as the "Year-end Singing Contest Reach Performance" or "The Countdown Reach Performance" (the time when the special reach background image becomes visible), when the title of the special reach performance is displayed (the timing shown in Figures 276(b) and 277(b)), or during a special reach performance (the timing shown in Figures 276(c) and 277(c)).
In these cases, the end timing of the "hold change chance effect" will be during the pseudo consecutive effect or during the special reach effect.

The "hold change chance performance" may be performed one or more times, and may be performed at any of these times. For example, it may be performed two or more times during the high-speed fluctuation before the decorative pattern reaches a reach state. Alternatively, the first "hold change chance performance" may be performed during a pseudo consecutive performance, and the second "hold change chance performance" may be performed during a special reach performance.

Next, other examples of presentation will be described.
280(d) shows a modified example in which the first reserved concealed image to the third reserved concealed image are the same, but a plurality of types of the fourth reserved concealed image are provided, and any one of the fourth reserved concealed images is displayed. In this modified example, depending on the type of the fourth reserved concealed image, there are cases where the reserved image changes with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) and cases where the reserved image always changes.

First, referring to presentation example 07 and presentation example 08, the presentation mode when a fourth reserved concealed image of a type in which the reserved image changes with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) is displayed will be described.
In performance example 07 and performance example 08, "Hold", "Reserve", "Up", and "And" are displayed in that order from timing t2 to timing t6, but in performance example 07, the reserved image is not promoted at timing t7. On the other hand, in performance example 08, the reserved image is promoted at timing t7. In this way, when "And" is displayed as the fourth reserved concealment image, a display is made to promote the reserved image with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

Next, referring to presentation example 09, we will explain the presentation mode when a fourth reserved concealment image of a type in which the reserved image always changes is displayed.
In performance example 09, "Hold", "Reserve", "Up", and "Ascend" are displayed in this order from timing t2 to timing t6. Then, at timing t8, a display is made to promote the reserved image. In this way, when "Ascend" is displayed as the fourth reserved concealment image, a display is made to promote the reserved image with a 100% probability.

Although an example in which four characters, "uta", "hime", "den" and "setsu", are displayed, three characters or five or more characters may be displayed.
In addition, kanji characters (such as "uta,""hime,""den," and "setsu," as well as "ho,""ryu,""jo," and "sho") have been shown as examples of characters contained in the reserved concealment image, but hiragana (such as "u,""ta,""hi," and "me"), katakana (such as "u,""ta,""hi," and "me"), and English alphabetic notation (such as "D,""I,""V," and "A") may also be used as characters contained in the reserved concealment image.
In addition, although an example was shown in which the letters included in the reserved concealed image were the same until halfway through and then different from halfway through ("Hold", "Reserve", "Up", "We" and "Hold", "Reserve", "Up", "Rise"), it is also possible to make some of the English spellings of the letters included in the reserved concealed image the same and some different ("C" and "G"), such as "C", "H", "A", "N", "C", "E" and "C", "H", "A", "N", "G", "E". Note that if the displayed character string is "CHANCE", the reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%), similar to "Reserved Up", and if the displayed character string is "CHANGE", the reserved image may be promoted with a 100% probability, similar to "Reserved Up".

After the reserved concealment effect image is displayed, the reserved image may not be changed immediately, but may be elevated after waiting for a predetermined time. During the waiting period, it is preferable to display a "waiting" effect image as shown in FIG. 284(c).
In the example 10, a "waiting" image is displayed from the timing t7 to the timing t22, and the reserved image is promoted at the timing t22. In the example 10, the reserved image is promoted in a state where the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In the example 11, a "Waiting" image is displayed from time t7 to time t27, and the reserved image is promoted at time t27. In the example 11, the reserved image is promoted in a state where the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

While the example of displaying the effect image "Waiting" while the reserved image is waiting to be promoted has been shown, other effect images may be displayed. For example, effect images such as "Waiting for reserved change" or "Reserved change" may be displayed.
Alternatively, a presentation image including all of the letters displayed as the first reserve concealment image to the fourth reserve concealment image, such as "Reserve excellent" or "Reserve rising", may be displayed.

The promotion of the reserved image may be performed at other times.
For example, the pending image may be promoted at the start of a pseudo-consecutive performance (for pseudo-consecutive performances, see the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 262, 263, etc.), during a pseudo-consecutive performance, at the start of special reach performances such as the ``Year-end Singing Contest Reach Performance'' and ``The Countdown Reach Performance'' (the timing when the special reach background image becomes visible), when the title of the special reach performance is displayed (the timing shown in Figures 276(b) and 277(b)), and during a special reach performance (the timing shown in Figures 276(c) and 277(c)).

An example has been shown in which, on the condition that the "hold change chance presentation" progresses to a specified stage (display of the fourth hold concealed image), the hold image is upgraded or a presentation image suggesting that a special presentation will be performed is displayed, but it is also possible that a presentation mode may be implemented in which a hold concealed image is further displayed after the presentation progresses to the specified stage.
The performance example 12 shown in Fig. 280 (f) shows a pattern in which reserved concealed images with the characters "ho", "ho", "hen", and "ka" are displayed as the first reserved concealed image to the fourth reserved concealed image. Also, the performance example 13 shows a pattern in which the characters "ho", "ho", "hen", "ka", "geki", "a", and "tsu" are displayed as the first reserved concealed image to the seventh reserved concealed image.
When the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" of presentation example 12 is executed, and when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" of presentation example 13 is executed, the latter may be made more likely to result in promotion to the reserved image with a higher expectation.
In addition, when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" of presentation example 12 is executed, the reserved image will be promoted to any of blue to red, but will not be promoted to a gold reserved image, and when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" of presentation example 13 is executed, the reserved image will not be promoted to a blue reserved image, but will be promoted to any of green to gold.
Presentation example 14 shows a pattern in which the first to seventh reserved concealment images are displayed as "hold", "reserved", "change", "change", "wait", "machine", and "on". In this case, a presentation image of "waiting" is displayed after the display of the reserved concealment effect image, and the reserved image is promoted after a predetermined time has passed. Presentation example 14 may also be configured to be promoted to a reserved image with a higher expectation than in presentation example 12 in the same manner as when presentation example 13 is executed.

Although an example of executing the "reserved change chance performance" for the reserved image has been shown, the "reserved change chance performance" may be executed for any of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. In this case, whether or not to execute the "reserved change chance performance" is determined based on the reserved read-ahead. Also, the reserved concealed image is displayed in a manner overlapping the front side of the reserved image corresponding to the reserved image that is the subject of the read-ahead. Also, the "reserved change chance performance" may be executed within one display of the decorative pattern change, or may be executed across multiple displays of the decorative pattern change. Also, when the display spans multiple displays of the decorative pattern change, the reserved image moves leftward, but it is preferable that the reserved concealed image also moves leftward together with the reserved image.
For example, the "hold change chance presentation" may be performed during the period in which a hold image corresponding to a certain hold is displayed in the second hold display area. Alternatively, the "hold change chance presentation" may be started during the period in which it is displayed in the second hold display area, and the "hold change chance presentation" may end during the period in which it is displayed in the first hold display area. Alternatively, the "hold change chance presentation" may be started during the period in which it is displayed in the second hold display area, and the "hold change chance presentation" may end during the period in which it is displayed in the hold display area.

When the alphabets "Z,""O,""N," and "E" are displayed as the first reserved concealed image to the fourth reserved concealed image, a pre-reading performance image (green) as shown in reference to Figures 123 to 125, etc. may be displayed.
In addition, when the alphabetical characters "Z,""O,""N,""E,""G,""O,""L," and "D" are displayed as the first reserved concealed image to the eighth reserved concealed image, a pre-reading performance image (gold) as shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125, etc. may be displayed.
In addition, there may be cases where the eighth reserved concealed image is not displayed, and only the fifth reserved concealed image to the seventh reserved concealed image are displayed, in which case a preview performance image (green) will be displayed.
In addition, the degree of expectation when a gold look-ahead performance image is displayed may be set to be higher than the degree of expectation when a green look-ahead performance image is displayed.
According to this embodiment, when "Z", "O", "N", and "E" are displayed as the first to fourth reserved concealed images, the player can recognize that a green look-ahead performance image will be displayed. Furthermore, "G", "O", "L", and "D" are displayed as the fifth to eighth reserved concealed images, and the player can visually confirm the performance mode while expecting whether a gold look-ahead performance image will be displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125, the pre-reading performance image was displayed across multiple decorative pattern changes, but it may be displayed only during one change corresponding to the hold.

It is also possible to display the reserved concealed image only up to "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", "Change", or "Intense", or up to "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", "Change", or up to "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", "Change", or up to "Wait", or up to "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", "Change", or up to "Machine", in which case it is advisable to promote the reserved image in the same manner as when "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", or "Change" are displayed. A similar presentation manner may be adopted for "Z", "O", "N", "E", "G", "O", "L", and "D".

The characters may be displayed in the order of "Setsu," "Den," "Hime," and "Uta," and when the final character, "Uta," is displayed, a special reach effect, such as a "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" or "The Countdown Reach Effect," may be executed. In this example, the last character displayed suggests that a reach effect with a song motif will be executed, so the player will be more eager to see the character "Uta" displayed.

In the example presentation shown with reference to Figure 280 (b), the display times for the first reserved concealment image to the fourth reserved concealment image and the reserved concealment effect image are each 1 second, but they may also be 0.5 seconds or 2 seconds each.
In addition, the display time of the reserved concealed images may be different from each other. In the performance example 01 shown in FIG. 285(b), the display time of the first reserved concealed image to the fourth reserved concealed image is the same, but the performance examples 02 to 09 include those in which the display time of the first reserved concealed image to the fourth reserved concealed image is different.
Regarding the display time, taking into consideration the effect to be achieved, the relationship between any two of the first reserved concealed image to the fourth reserved concealed image can be such that the display times are the same, one display time is longer, or the other display time is shorter.

For example, as in performance example 01, by making the display times of the first reserved concealed image through the fourth reserved concealed image the same, the amount of labor involved in creating the performance can be reduced.
In addition, by lengthening the display time of the first reserve concealment image, as in presentation example 02, it becomes easier for the player to notice that a "reserve change chance presentation" has occurred, and the player is less likely to overlook the progress of the presentation thereafter.
In addition, by lengthening the display time of the second and third reserved concealed images, as in presentation example 03 and presentation example 04, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for a long period of time as to whether or not the fourth reserved concealed image will be displayed as the stage for displaying the fourth reserved concealed image approaches.
In addition, by lengthening the display time of the fourth reserved concealment image, as in presentation example 05, the "reserved change chance presentation" has reached the final stage, and the player can be made to feel a sense of satisfaction for a long period of time that the reserved image has been confirmed to be promoted.
It goes without saying that each of the examples 06 to 09 and other variations also produces the same effects.

With reference to Figs. 280 to 285, an embodiment has been shown in which a reserved hidden image is displayed in stages, and when the reserved hidden image is displayed to the final stage, the reserved image is promoted. Below, with reference to Figs. 286 to 288, other embodiments of the "reserved change chance presentation" will be described.

Figure 286 (a) shows a state where the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed as temporary stops with the same number, resulting in a reach state, and the middle decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed. As the background image, a normal background image A that depicts the scenery inside a recording studio is displayed. Also, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first starting port 2002 is four.

Next, the speed of the change of the central decorative symbols slows down, and the central decorative symbols become easily visible. FIG. 286(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, an image imitating a lightning bolt is displayed moving toward the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. FIG. 286(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the display of the image imitating a lightning bolt ends, and a window image with the words "Diva Legend Hold Change Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display area. Figure 286(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, circular images are gradually displayed in the two partitioned areas set on the left and right of the display area. Figures 286(e), 286(f), and 287(a) show the state in which the circular images indicating the partitioned areas are gradually displayed.
Next, a pseudo reserved image for effect purposes having the same size as the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed at the position of the reserved image. The pseudo reserved image for effect purposes moves toward the partition area on the left side while gradually becoming larger.
Similarly, a pseudo reserved image for effect, the same size as the reserved image, is displayed at the position of the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area. The pseudo reserved image for effect moves toward the right partition area while gradually becoming larger.
The color of the pseudo reserved image for effect is the same color as the reserved image displayed at the source of the movement, and is white in this example. Figure 287 (b) shows the state in which two pseudo reserved images for effect are moving.
In addition, the arrows in the figure are drawn to show the movement of the pseudo reserved image for performance, and are not actually displayed. Such notation may also be used in other drawings (Figures 288 to 292, etc.).
Next, the pseudo reserved image for effect that started moving from the first reserved display area is moved to the left partition area. At the same time, the pseudo reserved image for effect that started moving from the third reserved display area is moved to the right partition area. Figure 287 (c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the kanji character "uta" is added to the pseudo reserved image for effect in the left and right partition areas and displayed. Figure 287 (d) shows the display state at this time. In the left and right partition areas, an effect is executed to see whether or not the final character will be displayed, such as "uta", "hime", "den", and "setsu", in the same manner as the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 280, etc. Note that the characters in the pseudo reserved image for effect in the left partition area are large, and the characters in the pseudo reserved image for effect in the left partition area are small. In this embodiment, the larger the characters, the higher the probability that the final character will be displayed, and the player hopes that larger characters will be displayed. Note that the degree of probability that the final character will be displayed may be indicated by the color of the kanji rather than the size of the kanji.

In the left-hand section, the display will go all the way up to "story." Meanwhile, in the right-hand section, only the first song is displayed, with a semi-transparent pseudo-reserved image for presentation purposes. Figures 287(e) and 287(f) show the display state at this time.

Next, in the partition area on the left, after the word "THEORY" is displayed, a green pseudo-hold image for effect purposes is displayed. In addition, the message "CHANGE?!" is displayed. Figure 287 (g) shows the display state at this time. Note that the word "CHANGE?!" may be displayed in a manner that overlaps with the pseudo-hold image for effect purposes.

Next, the green pseudo-hold image for effects displayed in the left partition area starts to move toward the hold image display area. At the same time, the display of the semi-transparent pseudo-hold image for effects displayed in the right partition area ends. Figure 288 (a) shows the display state at this time.

When the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed up to the last "setsu" in a predetermined color, either an effect is performed in which the image collides with the temporarily stopped central decorative pattern and is bounced back, causing the decorative pattern to be displayed in a manner indicating a reach miss, or an effect is performed in which the image collides with the central decorative pattern, causing the central decorative pattern to move, changing the color of the reserved image to the color of the pseudo reserved image for effect, thereby executing a reach effect.
Figures 288(b) to 288(d) show the display mode in the former case. Specifically, the pseudo reserved image for performance collides with the center decorative pattern, but is bounced back, moves toward the left side of the display area, and finally moves off the screen. After that, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of "3", "7", and "3", and then stopped and displayed.
Figure 288 (e) to Figure 288 (g) show the display mode in the latter case. Specifically, the pseudo reserved image for performance collides with the middle decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern is knocked away, and is displayed as the reserved image in the reserved display area. In addition, after the middle decorative pattern becomes in a state of high-speed fluctuation, a special reach performance (the figure shows an example of "The Countdown Reach Performance") is executed.

In this way, if the pseudo reserved image for the effect is displayed to the end and the decorative pattern can be knocked away, the reserved image changes to a state indicating high expectations, a special reach effect is executed, and a jackpot state is reached with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, if the pseudo reserved image for performance is displayed to the end and the decorative pattern cannot be flicked away, the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss.

With reference to Figures 286 to 288, an example has been shown in which the display of a pseudo hold image for effect purposes starts from a position where a normal hold image (a white hold image) is displayed. However, with reference to Figure 289, an embodiment will be described in which the display of a pseudo hold image for effect purposes starts from a position where a different hold image from the normal one (a hold image in blue, green, or the like) is displayed.

Normal hold images are displayed in the first hold display area, the second hold display area, and the fourth hold display area, but a blue hold image is displayed in the third hold display area. Figure 289 (a) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the display and movement of the pseudo hold image for effect begins. A blue hold image is displayed in the third hold display area, and the pseudo hold image for effect also becomes a blue hold image. Figure 289 (b) shows the display state while the pseudo hold image for effect is moving. Also, Figure 289 (c) shows the display state when the movement of the pseudo hold image for effect is completed.

Next, text display of the pseudo-hold image for performance begins. In the left-hand partition area, the word "Song" is displayed in small letters on a white pseudo-hold image for performance, and in the right-hand partition area, the word "Song" is displayed in large letters on a blue pseudo-hold image for performance. Figure 289 (d) shows the display state at this time.

In this embodiment, the probability of displaying the final character is higher when the pseudo reserved image for performance is blue or green, compared to when the pseudo reserved image for performance is white. Also, when the final character is displayed, the color of the pseudo reserved image for performance may change to a pseudo reserved image for performance of a color with a higher expectation.
For example, if the color of the pseudo reserved image for effect is blue, the reserved image may be changed to blue or to a green reserved image which is a color with a higher expectation than blue. Also, if the color of the pseudo reserved image for effect is red, the reserved image may be changed to a red reserved image or to a gold reserved image which is a color with a higher expectation than red.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player very interested in which reserved image will move and become the pseudo reserved image for the purpose of the effect.

With reference to Figures 286 to 288, an embodiment in which the text display of pseudo-reserved images for performance is performed in parallel has been shown, but with reference to Figures 290 and 291, an embodiment in which the text display of pseudo-reserved images for performance is performed one by one in sequence will be described.

In this embodiment, pseudo hold images for presentation purposes are also displayed in the first hold display area and the third hold display area, and move to the left and right partition areas. Figures 290(a) to 290(c) show the display state from the display of the partition areas to the completion of the movement of the pseudo hold images for presentation purposes.

Next, a large "song" is displayed in the left partition area, and a smaller "song" is displayed in the right partition area. The size of the letters indicates the likelihood that the last letter will be displayed. In this embodiment, the letters are displayed in order, starting from the left partition area. A radial image is displayed as a marker in the partition area where a display is being performed. Figures 290(d) to 290(f) show the display state at this time. As shown in the figures, the pseudo-reserved image for performance on the left side displays up to "explanation," but the pseudo-reserved image for performance on the right side is in a standby state with "song" displayed.

The pseudo-hold image for effects on the left side displays up to "Theory" and then changes to green. It also displays "Change?!" Figure 290 (g) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the display state of the pseudo-reserved image for effects on the right side changes, starting from "Song". Figures 291(a) to 291(c) show the display state when "Song" through "Explanation" are displayed. At this time, the pseudo-reserved image for effects on the left side remains in a standby state, changing to green.

The pseudo-hold image for effects on the right side will display "Theory" and then turn blue. It will also display "Change?!" Figure 291(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the word "Change?!" and the radial image displayed on the right side are erased. Figure 291(e) shows the display state at this point.
In this way, by changing the display mode of the pseudo hold image for presentation in sequence in multiple divided areas (the divided area on the left side and the divided area on the right side), the visibility of the change mode is improved.

Next, the pseudo reserved image for the effect on the left side moves toward the reserved image, but is bounced off the temporarily stopped central decorative pattern and moves toward the bottom left. Figure 291 (f) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the pseudo reserved image for the effect on the right side moves toward the reserved image, tilting the temporarily stopped central decorative pattern and moving it so that it overlaps with the display position of the reserved image. Figure 291 (g) shows the display state at this time.

Finally, the pseudo reserved image for the right-hand effect is erased when it overlaps with the reserved image. At the same time, the reserved image changes from the normal reserved image to the blue color that was the color of the pseudo reserved image for the right-hand effect and is displayed. At the same time, the high-speed fluctuation of the middle decorative pattern is resumed. Figure 291 (h) shows the display state at this time. After that, special reach effects such as the "Year-end Singing Contest Reach Effect" and "The Countdown Reach Effect" are executed.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 286 to FIG. 291, the divided areas are the same size, but divided areas of different sizes may be displayed. For example, divided areas of three sizes, large, medium, and small, may be displayed.
292(a) to 292(d) show examples in which a large partitioned area is displayed as the left partitioned area, a medium-sized partitioned area is displayed as the right partitioned area, and the reserved image moves toward the left and right partitioned areas to display a pseudo reserved image for performance. Note that the size of the pseudo reserved image for performance is displayed at the same size as the displayed partitioned area.
It is also advisable to set it so that the larger the partition area is, the higher the probability that the last character will be displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 286 to 291, an example was shown in which two defined areas are displayed, but the number of defined areas to be displayed may be determined by lottery from one to four. Figure 292(e) is a display example in which one defined area is displayed. Figure 292(f) is a display example in which three defined areas are displayed. Figure 292(g) is a display example in which four defined areas are displayed.
In the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the hold images in the first hold display area and the third hold display area are displayed in a moving manner, but this is only one example, and it is possible that a pseudo hold image for presentation purposes may be displayed in any of the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area.
It is advisable to prevent the display of a number of partitioned areas that is greater than the number of reserved balls. For example, if the number of reserved balls is three, a lottery may be held to display one to three partitioned areas. Also, if the number of reserved balls is zero, the "reserved ball change chance presentation" may not be performed. This configuration makes the player conscious of maintaining a large number of reserved balls, and it is possible to increase the operation of the gaming machine.

When multiple partition areas (2 to 4) are displayed, it is possible to execute one of the following performance patterns: a performance pattern in which all partition areas are displayed up to the last character, a performance pattern in which only part of the characters are displayed in some partition areas and the last character is displayed in other partition areas (multiple successes and one failure, one success and multiple failures, etc.), or a performance pattern in which no characters are displayed up to the last character in all partition areas, and the performance pattern to be executed is determined based on the results of a special lottery.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 286 to 291, an example is shown in which the "Pending Change Chance Presentation" progresses automatically, but it is also possible to have part of the "Pending Change Chance Presentation" presentation progress in response to a player's operation.
For example, the display of the pseudo reserved image for effect moving toward the partitioned area is automatically performed, but the character display may not progress unless the player repeatedly or long-presses a button (for example, the operation button 401 or the attack button 3710, etc.). For example, in a state where the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed (Fig. 293(a)), the display of characters may be started (Fig. 293(b)) on the condition that the player continues to repeatedly or long-press the button, and then a predetermined character may be displayed. If the player stops the repeated pressing or long pressing midway, the display will stop or end at, for example, "Hime" or "Den". If the player resumes the repeated pressing or long pressing, the display of new characters will also resume. In addition, an image of "push" may be displayed in the lower left of the display area to suggest the operation of the button to the player. Alternatively, "push" may be replaced with "repeated pressing" or "long pressing" to indicate the operation mode.
Figure 293 (c) shows an example of a display in which the first divided area from the left and the fourth divided area from the left display up to the last "explanation," while the second divided area from the left and the third divided area from the left do not display up to the last "explanation."

Also, when the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed moving into the partitioned area (as shown in FIG. 293(a)), the player may press a button to start displaying the characters. The characters may then be displayed automatically, preferably up to a predetermined state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 293(c)).

In the display examples shown in Figures 293(a) to 293(c), circular operation section simulated images are displayed that imitate the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710, but if the operation of another button is required, an operation section simulated image that imitates the shape of that button may be displayed.
293(d) shows an example of a simulated image of the operation section of the mission button 3700 that is displayed when an operation of the mission button 3700 is requested. Note that the simulated image of the operation section may be displayed in a position other than the lower left of the display area, and in the figure, an example is shown in the upper center of the display area.
In addition to the operation section simulation image, a gauge indicating the operation valid period of the operation section may be displayed. Fig. 293(d) shows an example in which a gauge image indicating the operation valid period is displayed below the operation section simulation image. Note that the black part in the figure gradually becomes shorter as the operation valid period elapses, and the display is performed with the boundary part moving to the right. In the figure, the state in which 1/3 of the operation valid period has elapsed is shown.

In addition, if such a button is not operated, after a specified time has elapsed, a pseudo-hold image for the purpose of presentation may be displayed in a predetermined manner (the same manner as when the button is operated), and a display presentation may be performed in which the hold image is changed.
Alternatively, if such a button is not operated, the display of the pseudo reserved image for the performance may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed without progressing the text display, and the central decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the special lottery result.

Each character may be displayed periodically in the order of "Uta → Hime → Den → Setsu → Uta → Hime → Den → Setsu → ...", and one of the characters may be displayed depending on the player's operation of the button. FIG. 293(e) shows the state in which each character is displayed periodically. In this case, too, if "Uta", "Hime", or "Den" is displayed, it is deemed a failure, and if "Setsu" is displayed, it is deemed a success, and the color of the pseudo reserved image for presentation may be changed. Note that each character may be displayed at a speed at which it can be recognized (for example, the time for displaying one character may be about 0.1 to 0.4 seconds).
When multiple defined areas are displayed, the display of the multiple defined areas may be determined simultaneously by a single button operation by the player.
Alternatively, the display of each partition area may be determined one by one in response to one operation of the button by the player. For example, as shown in FIG. 293(f), an operation section simulation image may be displayed for each pseudo reserve image for performance. In this case, it is preferable that the pseudo reserve images for performance stop one by one from the left in response to one button operation.
Although an example has been shown in which the operation section simulation image is displayed overlapping each pseudo hold image for presentation purposes, the display position of the operation section simulation image may be moved slightly downward so that the pseudo hold image for presentation purposes and the operation section simulation image do not overlap.

The operation instruction image that instructs the operation of the operation unit may overlap a part or all of the pseudo-reserved image for performance. Fig. 293 (g) shows a display state in which the operation instruction image and the pseudo-reserved image for performance overlap in part. Fig. 293 (h) shows a display state in which the operation instruction image and the pseudo-reserved image for performance overlap in their entirety.
Also, Figure 294 (a) shows a display state in which the operation unit simulation image and the pseudo reserved image for performance are all overlapped. In the example of this figure, the pseudo reserved images for performance are arranged in an arc shape. Specifically, from a predetermined position on the left side of the operation unit simulation image, the pseudo reserved images for performance corresponding to the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are displayed clockwise.
In addition, the operation manner for stopping the pseudo hold image for effect can be the operation manner in the above-mentioned embodiment.

Depending on the display mode of the operation section simulant image or the operation instruction image, either the expectation of a big win or the expectation of the "theory" being displayed, or both, may be indicated. For example, it is preferable to provide cases in which the operation section simulant image or the operation instruction image is displayed in white, red, gold, etc., and to set the expectation higher when it is displayed in red than white, and in gold than red.
In addition, it is desirable to display the operation section simulation image and the operation instruction image after the time when at least all of the characters that can be ultimately displayed, such as "Song → Princess → Legend → Theory," have been displayed in the pseudo-reserved image for performance.

The presentation pattern shows that each character is displayed periodically as "song → princess → den → setsu → song → princess → den → setsu → ..." and then one of the characters is displayed in a stopped state. In this presentation pattern, the color of each character "song", "hime", "den", and "setsu" is usually white, but by making any one or all of the characters "song", "hime", "den", and "setsu" a color other than white, the expectation that "setsu" will be displayed may be suggested. For example, by making the character "song" blue, it may be suggested that the expectation that "setsu" will be displayed is higher than when the character "song" is white. Note that when "setsu" is displayed, the reserved image changes to a reserved image in a mode indicating a higher expectation (for example, the normal reserved image changes to the reserved image in blue), so when the color of the characters is a color other than white, the expectation of a jackpot is substantially higher than when the character is white.
Although white and blue are given as examples of the colors of the characters, colors other than blue may be used as the color other than white. For example, the characters may be displayed in any of the three colors blue, green, and red. In this case, the probability of "setsu" being displayed may be increased in the order of blue, green, and red. In this case, the order of blue, green, and red is also the order of the degree of expectation of a jackpot. By making the degree of expectation different according to the multiple display modes in this way, the player can also be interested in the presentation mode itself in which the characters are displayed periodically in the order of "song → princess → legend → legend → song → princess → legend → legend → ...".
The expectation that "theory" will be displayed may be indicated by other display modes other than color. For example, star-shaped marks may be added to the characters, and the more the number of such marks, the higher the expectation that "theory" will be displayed.
In addition, before starting to display the characters (for example, during the period from timing t1 to timing t2), a pending concealment effect image may be displayed in a predetermined color (white, blue, green, red), and the display mode may indicate the expectation that "explanation" will be displayed (increasing order from white, blue, green, red), after which the display of the characters may be started.

We have shown a presentation pattern in which each letter is displayed cyclically as "Song → Princess → Legend → Theory → Song → Princess → Legend → Theory → ..." (hereinafter referred to as the "first presentation pattern"), but this presentation pattern can also be modified to provide a presentation pattern in which the letter "?" is displayed cyclically by scrolling within a pseudo-hold image for presentation as "? → ? → ? → ? → ..." (hereinafter referred to as the "second presentation pattern").
Figure 294 (b) shows an example of a display when the second presentation pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo hold image for presentation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 292 (g).
Also, Figure 294 (c) shows a display example when the second presentation pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo hold image for presentation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 293 (g).
Furthermore, Figure 294 (d) shows a display example when the second presentation pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo hold image for presentation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 293 (a).

In the second presentation pattern, the trigger for the stopped display of the characters should be the same as in the first presentation pattern, and in response to the passage of a predetermined time or a button operation, one of the characters ``Uta,''``Hime,''``Den,'' or ``Setsu'' will be displayed stopped, and if ``Setsu'' is displayed, a display will be made to promote the reserved image with a predetermined probability.
In addition to the four characters "uta", "hime", "den" and "setsu" that are displayed in a stopped state, other characters may be displayed. For example, characters such as "aka" and "gold" may be displayed in a stopped state to display a red or gold pseudo reserve image for performance. Alternatively, the character "ascend" may be displayed to indicate that the reserved item is being promoted. In this case, a pseudo reserve image for performance of a predetermined color may be displayed to display that the reserved item is being promoted to the reserved item of the color of the pseudo reserve image for performance.
Alternatively, the character "Oto" may be displayed in a stopped state to indicate that a big win has occurred. In this case, a pseudo reserved image for performance in a special mode (for example, a mode including the character "Oto") may be displayed, and the reserved image may be upgraded to the reserved image in the special mode.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 280 or FIG. 285, the "reserved change chance performance" is performed only once during one display change of the decorative pattern, but it may be performed multiple times. In that case, it is preferable to start the execution of the next "reserved change chance performance" after a certain "reserved change chance performance" is completed.
For example, during one display of the decorative pattern, the first effect pattern may be executed two or more times. Similarly, the second effect pattern may be executed two or more times.
Alternatively, the first presentation pattern may be executed first and then the second presentation pattern, or the second presentation pattern may be executed first and then the first presentation pattern.
In addition, the first presentation pattern, the second presentation pattern, and the first presentation pattern may be executed in that order, or the second presentation pattern, the first presentation pattern, and the second presentation pattern may be executed in that order.
By configuring in this way, there is a possibility that the reserved image is promoted two or more times during one change, and even if the promotion fails in the first "reserved change chance presentation", the player can have hope that the second "reserved change chance presentation" will occur. Also, if the promotion is successful in the first "reserved change chance presentation", the player can have hope that the second "reserved change chance presentation" will occur and the image will be promoted further.

The effective button operation period may be the same length for the first presentation pattern and the second presentation pattern.
Alternatively, the length of the operation valid period in the first presentation pattern and the length of the operation valid period in the second presentation pattern may be different. For example, the length of the operation valid period in the first presentation pattern may be longer than the length of the operation valid period in the second presentation pattern. Alternatively, the length of the operation valid period in the second presentation pattern may be longer than the length of the operation valid period in the first presentation pattern.

In this way, the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed, and the display mode of the reserved image is changed to show that there is a high expectation that the result of the changing decorative pattern indicates a jackpot, which can excite the player. In addition, the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed in a stopped state by operating the operation unit, which can increase the player's motivation to operate.

Below, the "prediction effect when a reach is missed", which is a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 123 to 272, etc., will be explained with reference to Figs. 273 to 275, 295 to 297, etc. Note that Fig. 295 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Also, Figs. 296(a) to 297(g) show the display contents in the display area.

The outline of the performance mode shown in the time chart shown in Fig. 295(a) will be explained. In this performance mode, the display mode of the characters, etc. indicates that a special reach performance ("The Countdown Reach Performance") will result in a miss, and when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss, a performance display based on the reserved pre-read result is performed.
Specifically, the effect display is as follows: a microphone icon image is displayed at the position where the middle decorative pattern is displayed, and then a small microphone icon image is displayed at the bottom left of the display area. After that, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that was the subject of the pre-reading is displayed in a variable manner, the microphone icon image is displayed again at the position where the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, suggesting that a special reach effect will occur (in response to the stock of microphone icons, a "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" or "The Countdown Reach Effect", which are effects related to microphones, will occur). In this example of effect, the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" is executed.

Specific aspects of the presentation examples are described in detail below.
Before timing t4 in FIG. 295(a), the microphone is snatched by the small fish princess character in "The Countdown Reach Presentation", suggesting to the player that the special lottery result is a loss. Note that the number of reserved balls at this time is four. FIG. 296(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t4, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. FIG. 296(b) shows the display state at this time.
From timing t6 to timing t12, a background concealed image is displayed, and the background image is switched from special reach background image B to normal background image A. Fig. 296(c) shows a display state in which background concealed image A is displayed from timing t6 to timing t7. Fig. 296(d) shows a display state in which background concealed image C is displayed from timing t8 to timing t10. Fig. 296(e) shows a display state in which background concealed image A is displayed from timing t11 to timing t12. Details of the display mode of the background concealed image are as shown with reference to Figs. 224 to 236 etc.

At timing t12, the display of background concealment image A ends. Figure 296 (f) shows the display state from timing t12 to timing t13. Note that from timing t12 to timing t17, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are in a state of being temporarily stopped.

At timing t13, a microphone icon image is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern. After that, the microphone icon image is displayed large and the word "Got it!" is displayed until timing t15. Figure 296 (g) shows the display state from timing t13 to timing t14. Figure 296 (h) shows the display state from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the microphone icon image is displayed moving and becoming smaller at the bottom left of the display area. Figure 297(a) shows the display state after the movement. At timing t17, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed stationary. Figure 297(b) shows the display state at this time.

The next variable display is performed from timing t18 to timing t28, and the stationary display is performed from timing t28 to timing t29. The result of this variable display is a miss.

At timing t29, the next variable display starts. Fig. 297(c) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is rapidly changing after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed since the variable display.
At timing t34, the microphone icon image displayed at the bottom left of the display area becomes larger and moves to the center of the display area. The words "Microphone activated!" are also displayed. The microphone icon image and the words "Microphone activated!" are displayed in front of the middle decoration pattern. Figure 297(d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t36, the display of the microphone icon image and the text "Microphone activated!" ends.
At timing t37, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped, resulting in a ready-to-win state. FIG. 297(e) shows the display state at this time.
From timing t38 to timing t45, a background concealment image is displayed, the background image is changed from a normal background image A to a special reach background image A, and a special reach performance (in this case, a "year-end singing contest reach performance") is started.
FIG. 297(f) shows a display state in which background concealed image C is displayed from timing t41 to timing t43.
FIG. 297(g) shows the display state during execution of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" at a predetermined timing after timing t45.
In Figure 295 (a), the presentation mode from timing t51 onwards is similar to that described above for the ``Year-end Song Battle Reach Presentation'', and the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped manner indicating the result of a jackpot or miss.

As shown in this embodiment, displaying a microphone icon image displayed in a predetermined position (for example, near the center) of the display area in a predetermined location of the display area (in the embodiment, it is displayed small on the left side) may be referred to as ``acquisition'' in this specification.
Furthermore, the state in which the microphone icon image is displayed in a predetermined location in the display area may be expressed as "standby."
In addition, in this specification, the term "activation" may refer to the process of enlarging the microphone icon image, which was previously displayed small as in this embodiment, and executing the effect suggested by the microphone icon image.
Although the microphone icon image is given as an example, in the embodiment described below, an embodiment is shown in which an image other than the microphone icon image is obtained, waited for, or activated. Therefore, these may be collectively referred to as suggestion images.

In addition, the acquisition and activation of various suggestive images such as a microphone icon image is a performance that is executed based on foresight. Therefore, if there is no reserve at the timing when the special reach is missed (timing t13 in FIG. 295(a)), the display of acquiring various suggestive images such as a microphone icon image is not performed.
In addition, the timing of the activation is determined within the gaming machine, but is unknown to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while looking forward to finding out which of the reserved symbols that existed at the time when the suggestive image was acquired will activate.

In this way, by displaying a look-ahead display related to the next and subsequent variable displays at the timing when a special reach performance has been executed but the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a missed reach, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment caused by the heightened expectation created by the execution of the special reach performance, and to focus the player's attention on the next and subsequent variable displays, thereby making it possible to prevent a decline in the operation of the gaming machine.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295(a), a microphone icon image is activated when the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed to notify the occurrence of a special reach effect, but the microphone icon image may be activated at other times.

For example, in the first half of the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance," when a female singer character and an evil princess character are fighting over a microphone, the microphone icon image may be enlarged and then collide with the evil princess character, causing the evil princess character to run away to the left of the display area, thereby confirming that the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance" will progress to the second half.
Alternatively, in the first half of the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance," after a display of the evil princess character taking away the microphone, the microphone icon image may be enlarged and the microphone may be handed over to a female singer character, confirming that the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance" will progress to the second half.

Similarly, in the latter half of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance," when the female singer character and the evil princess character are fighting over the microphone, the microphone icon image is enlarged and then collided with the evil princess character, causing the evil princess character to run away to the left of the display area, creating a performance that suggests that a jackpot has been confirmed in the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance."
Similarly, in the latter half of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance", after the microphone is shown being taken away by the evil princess character, the microphone icon image may be enlarged and the microphone may be handed over to the female singer character, suggesting that a jackpot has been confirmed to have occurred in the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance".

Note that it is unclear to the player when the displayed microphone icon image will be activated. Therefore, if the "Year-end Singing Contest Reach" occurs while the microphone icon image is displayed, but the microphone icon image does not activate and the decorative pattern is displayed in a state indicating a miss, the player will continue playing in the hope that the microphone icon image will be activated in the next or subsequent variable display.

In order to clearly show which hold corresponds to which performance is performed, the microphone icon image may be displayed in a manner overlapping the front side of the hold image and moved in the left-right direction. In this case, the microphone icon image may be activated for the hold image overlapping with the microphone icon image. FIG. 298(a) shows that the microphone icon image may be activated in any of the first hold to the third hold. FIG. 298(b) shows a display example after the stop display of the decorative pattern is performed twice. In this example, the microphone icon image is moved in a manner overlapping with the hold and the first hold.
In addition, instead of displaying the microphone icon image superimposed on the pending image, it is also possible to display "Activate within 〇 change" together with the microphone icon image displayed in a specified position.
By displaying in this manner, the player can understand which reserved positions have the possibility of being activated, and even if a start winning occurs after obtaining the microphone icon image and the number of reserved positions increases, the player can distinguish between reserved positions that have the possibility of being activated by the microphone icon image and those that do not.

Although an embodiment in which one microphone icon image can be acquired has been described, a plurality of microphone icon images may be acquired.
In this case, a plurality of microphone icon images may be activated during one variable display, or the microphone icon images may be activated separately in different variable displays.
FIG. 298(c) shows a display state in which two microphone icon images are acquired (display state from timing t15 to timing t17).
298(d), the number of microphone icon images acquired may be indicated by adding the character "x2." Depending on the number of microphone icon images acquired, "x3,""x4," etc. may be displayed.

For example, when the "Year-end singing contest reach effect" is started, the first microphone icon image may be activated in the first half of the reach effect, and the second microphone icon image may be activated in the second half of the reach effect.
Alternatively, when the microphone icon image is acquired, the microphone icon image may be activated in the variable display corresponding to the first hold and the variable display corresponding to the third hold, to start the "Year-end singing contest reach performance."

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 295 (a), the microphone icon image can only be acquired during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a reach miss state (timing t13 to timing t15), but it may be configured so that a microphone icon image may be added in the subsequent period.
For example, when one microphone icon image is acquired, one or more microphone icon images may be acquired. For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 295(a), a performance may be executed in which a microphone icon image is acquired additionally during the period from timing t26 to timing t28. In this case, it is preferable to suggest that the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a losing result at least at timing t26. For example, at timing t25, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed temporarily stopped with decorative patterns of different numbers, and the central decorative pattern may be scrolled at a slower speed from a state of being rapidly variable. According to such a performance mode, the period when the player feels disappointed because a losing result is about to be displayed can be effectively utilized.
As a display mode when a microphone icon image is added, the display modes shown with reference to Figures 298(c) and 298(d) can be adopted.

A plurality of types of microphone icon images may be provided for display.
FIG. 298(e) shows an example in which a microphone icon image in a different color (red) from the normal (white) microphone icon image has been acquired.
A microphone icon image of a different color may be set to have a higher expectation of a big win in the performance (for example, a special reach performance) executed when the microphone icon is activated, compared with a normal microphone icon image. For example, a microphone icon image of a different color may be set to have a higher expectation of a big win in the case where a normal microphone icon image is activated to produce a "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" than in the case where a microphone icon image of a different color is activated to produce a "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance."
Alternatively, the probability of a highly anticipated performance resulting in a big win may be increased when the microphone icon image is activated. For example, when a normal microphone icon image is activated, the probability of "The Countdown Reach Performance" occurring is 70%, and the probability of "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" occurring is 30%, and when a microphone icon image of a different color is activated, the probability of "The Countdown Reach Performance" occurring is 30%, and the probability of "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" occurring is 70%.
Although red is given as an example of a different color for the microphone icon image from the usual one, any color can be used to distinguish the colors, and for example, in addition to white, blue, green, and red microphone icon images may be displayed. Also, the order of white, blue, green, and red may be set to increase the expectation of a big win, or the probability of a performance advantageous to the player being executed may be set to increase.

Although multiple types of microphone icon images are provided by differentiating the colors, the microphone icon images may be different in other ways. For example, multiple sizes of microphone icon images may be provided, and the larger the size of the microphone icon image, the higher the expectation of a big win or the higher the probability of a performance advantageous to the player being executed.
In this way, the display mode (color, size, etc.) of the microphone icon image may be used to increase the expectation of a big win or to increase the probability of a more advantageous performance being executed for the player.
Note that the microphone icon image may be displayed in any other manner other than in terms of color and size, as long as the microphone icon image is visually recognized differently.

Although an example of a microphone icon image that is always activated has been shown, a microphone icon image that may not be activated may also be provided. For example, a microphone icon image that is activated with a probability of 30% and not activated with a probability of 70% may be used. FIG. 298(f) shows a display example of such a microphone icon image that may not be activated. As shown in the figure, a "?" is added to the microphone icon image to indicate that it may not be activated.
With this configuration, it is possible to increase the acquisition rate and number of microphone icon images acquired while keeping the probability of the microphone icon being activated low.

An example has been shown in which the display of a microphone icon image suggests that a microphone or song-related effect will be performed (an example of an effect in which a special song-related reach effect occurs or a battle can be won during a special reach effect, as shown with reference to Fig. 295(a), Fig. 296 to Fig. 297), but the embodiment may be modified so that other suggestive images can be obtained instead of the microphone icon image. Below, an embodiment in which the display form of the suggestive image is mainly modified in terms of functions, etc., is shown, but the display form of the non-modified parts is similar to the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 295(a), Fig. 296 and Fig. 297.

Figure 299 (a) shows a state in which a promotion suggestion image is displayed, indicating that the presentation mode will be promoted.
In the performance example 01 of Fig. 295(b), the promotion suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the promotion suggestion image can be acquired. Fig. 299(a) shows the display state during the period from timing t15 to timing t17.
At timing t42, a special reach background image B is displayed and execution of "The Countdown Reach Performance" is started, but during the period from timing t46 to timing t48, a promotion suggestion image is displayed and a more promising "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" is executed in place of the currently executing "The Countdown Reach Performance".
When the promotion suggestion image is activated in this manner, a display is performed that changes a predetermined presentation mode to a presentation mode with a higher expectation.
Below, examples of performances in which performance aspects other than special reach performances are promoted are shown.

For example, the display mode of the look-ahead performance image shown with reference to Figures 124, 125, etc. may be upgraded to a display mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot by activating the promotion suggestion image. Note that the timing for upgrading the look-ahead performance image may be before the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead performance starts, or during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead performance.
In addition, the promotion suggestion image may be obtained at a predetermined timing after the display of the look-ahead performance image has started, or the display of the look-ahead performance image may be started at a predetermined timing after the promotion suggestion image has been obtained.

With reference to FIG. 278(a), an example is shown in which a line is displayed during a special reach performance to indicate the degree of expectation, but a promotion suggestion image may be activated while the line is being displayed, and the line may be displayed in a color indicating a higher degree of expectation.

Also, referring to FIG. 278(b), an example has been shown in which a cut-in image is displayed during a special reach performance to indicate the degree of expectation, but a promotion suggestion image may be activated while the cut-in image is displayed, and the cut-in image may be displayed in a color indicating a higher degree of expectation.

Figure 299 (b) shows a state in which a hold change suggestion image is displayed, indicating that the hold will be promoted.
In the example 02 of FIG. 295(b), a reserved change suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the reserved change suggestion image can be acquired. FIG. 299(b) shows the display state during the period from timing t15 to timing t17.
From timing t26 to timing t27, the reserved change suggestion image is activated, and at timing t27, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area changes to a reserved image of blue or green with a higher expectation. From timing t29, a variable display corresponding to the reserved image of blue or green is performed.
In this way, at the end of the change display prior to the change display corresponding to the hold that was the target of the pre-read (in this example, the previous change display), a hold change suggestion image is activated and the hold image displayed in the first hold display area changes from a normal hold image to a more promising blue or green hold image.

In the presentation example 03 of Figure 295 (b), a hold change suggestion image is activated from timing t30 to timing t32, and at timing t32 the normal hold image displayed in the hold display area changes to a blue or green hold image which has a higher expectation.
In this way, immediately after the decorative pattern begins to change, a pending change suggestion image is activated and the pending image displayed in the pending display area changes from the normal pending image to a more promising pending image in blue or green, thereby increasing anticipation for the result of the changing display immediately after the changing display begins.

299(c) and 299(d) show a state in which a button operation suggestion image is displayed, indicating that a button operation is enabled. Note that the button operation suggestion image shown in Fig. 299(d) has a shape that imitates the shape of a button.
In the performance example 04 of FIG. 295(b), a button operation suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the button operation suggestion image can be obtained. FIG. 299(c) and FIG. 299(d) show the display state during the period from timing t15 to timing t17. During the period from timing t30 to timing t32, the button operation suggestion image is activated, and during the period from timing t32 to timing t35, a performance requesting a button operation is executed, and acceptance of the button operation is enabled. Note that for the performance requesting a button operation, a configuration similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145 etc. can be adopted, and a predetermined expectation level can be displayed.
In addition, the buttons whose operations are enabled may be the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, and the defense button 3740 in the embodiment shown in reference to Fig. 137. Also, instead of the buttons, the operations of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be enabled.

Regarding button operations, in addition to pressing the button once, operations such as a long press (pressing and holding for about 2 to 3 seconds) or rapid tapping (requiring pressing multiple times during the valid operation period) may be required, and the button operation suggestion image may be displayed to indicate which operation is required.
FIG. 299( e ) shows a state in which a button operation suggestion image is displayed, suggesting that a long press of the square-shaped mission button 3700 in a planar view is required.
In addition, the operation of left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 may be required to be performed by pulling left lever 3720 or right lever 3730, pulling it for a long time, or pushing it for a long time.

When the operation valid period occurs, an operation instruction image instructing a button operation is displayed, and the operation instruction image may be provided with a plurality of display modes with different expectation levels. For example, a white operation instruction image and a red operation instruction image may be provided, and the expectation level may be set higher when the red operation instruction image is displayed. Note that the mode of the operation instruction image may be the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145, etc.
In addition, a white button operation suggestion image and a red button operation suggestion image may be provided, and when the white button operation suggestion image is activated, a white operation instruction image may be displayed, and when the red button operation suggestion image is activated, a red operation instruction image may be displayed.

A button operation suggestion image may be activated during the valid button operation period, changing the state of the displayed operation instruction image to one with higher expectations. For example, if a red button operation suggestion image is activated when a white operation instruction image is being displayed, the operation instruction image may change to red. This may also increase the level of expectation. Note that operation instruction images may be gradually displayed before the start of the valid operation period, and at this time, a red button operation suggestion image may be activated so that the operation instruction image has changed to red at the start of the valid operation period.

When a button operation suggestion image is activated during the valid button operation period to change the state of the displayed operation instruction image to one with a higher expectation, a low expectation performance result may not be displayed. For example, if a performance image of any of white, red, and gold is displayed as a performance display corresponding to a button operation, and the expectation of the red performance image is higher than that of the white, and the expectation of the gold performance image is higher than that of the red, the white performance image with a low expectation may not be displayed, and the red or gold performance image may be displayed.
A button operation suggestion image may be activated when a button operation is performed. In this case, it is also preferable to prevent a low expectation effect image from being displayed.

FIG. 299(f) shows a state in which a pseudo-consecutive suggestion image is displayed, suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive will occur.
In the performance example 05 of Fig. 295 (b), a pseudo consecutive suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the pseudo consecutive suggestion image can be obtained. Fig. 299 (f) shows the display state during the period from timing t15 to timing t17.
A pseudo consecutive suggestion image is activated from timing t30 to timing t32, and in the period from timing t32 to timing t35, a pseudo consecutive performance is performed in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a predetermined manner, and then the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again displayed variably at high speed.
In addition, for the pseudo consecutive performance, a configuration similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 261 etc. can be adopted, and it can be configured so that a predetermined expectation level is indicated.

Referring to Figures 298(a) and 298(b), an example is shown in which a microphone icon image is displayed in front of the first to third holds when the microphone icon image is acquired, but the invention may be modified to similarly display suggestive images other than the microphone icon image (promotion suggestive image, hold change suggestive image, button operation suggestive image).
Figure 300 (a) is an example of a display from timing t13 to timing t15, in which a window with the word "promotion" is displayed across the first through third holds, indicating that some kind of promotion effect will be performed on one of the first through third holds.
Figure 300 (b) is an example of a display from timing t13 to timing t15, in which a window with the words "Hold Change" is displayed across the first hold to the third hold, indicating that a hold change will occur between the first hold to the third hold.
As the pending orders are cleared, the positions and horizontal lengths of these windows are displayed shifting to the left and becoming shorter.

Although an embodiment in which only one type of image can be acquired has been shown with reference to FIG. 299, it may be modified so that multiple suggestion images can be acquired simultaneously.
FIG. 300(c) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, and shows an example in which a microphone icon image, a promotion suggestion image, a hold change suggestion image, and a button operation suggestion image are acquired. In this case, in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, a performance corresponding to each of the acquired suggestion images is executed.

Figure 300 (d) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, showing an example in which a microphone icon image, a promotion suggestion image, a hold change suggestion image, and a button operation suggestion image have been acquired. In this example, as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 298 (f), the acquired suggestion image is marked with a "?". The effect corresponding to the acquired suggestion image is not necessarily executed. In other words, in any of the first to fourth holds, the effect corresponding to each acquired image is executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 30%).

Although an embodiment in which a plurality of microphone icon images can be acquired has been shown with reference to Figures 298 (c) and 298 (d), a plurality of other suggestion images may also be acquired.
Figures 300(e) and 300(f) are display examples from timing t13 to timing t15, showing a state in which two pending change suggestion images and two button operation suggestion images have been acquired.
In addition, if multiple promotion suggestion images are obtained, a performance in which multiple promotion suggestion images are activated is executed. The same applies to the reserved change suggestion image and the button operation suggestion image. The activation timing may be multiple times within one variable display, or may be separately activated within different variable displays.

298(e) shows an example of a performance in which a microphone icon image of a different color (red) from the normal (white) microphone icon image can be obtained, but the promotion suggestion image, the reserve change suggestion image, and the button operation suggestion image may also be displayed in different colors. Also, the color of the suggestion image may indicate the probability of a big win or the probability of a display with a high expectation being displayed in the performance executed in response to the suggestion image.
In addition, the expectation of a jackpot may be different depending on the type of suggestive image (microphone icon image, promotion suggestive image, reserved change suggestive image, button operation suggestive image). For example, the expectation may be higher when a microphone icon image is acquired than when a reserved change suggestive image is acquired. In other words, the expectation may be higher when a certain suggestive image is acquired compared to when another suggestive image is acquired among the four suggestive images.

An embodiment may be created by combining the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 298 to 300.

An embodiment capable of acquiring multiple microphone icon images has been shown with reference to Figures 298(c) and 298(d), but a more detailed embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 301.
First, a large microphone icon image and the text "Obtained x?" are displayed. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped. Figure 301 (a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a horizontally long window is displayed in the display area, a normal microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of the window, and rapidly varying numbers (for example, "1" to "3") are displayed on the right side of the window. Figure 301(b) shows the display state at this time. The time for the varying display should be about 1 to 2 seconds.
Next, the numbers that had been changing rapidly on the right side of the window stop and the number "2" is displayed. Figure 301(c) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" or "3" may also be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, microphone icon images are displayed in a number (any of 1 to 3) corresponding to the displayed number. Figure 301(d) shows the display state at this time.
After that, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. FIG. 301(e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many microphone icon images the player can obtain, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

With reference to FIG. 301, an embodiment capable of acquiring multiple microphone icon images has been shown, but now, with reference to FIG. 302, another embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, the same display is performed up to a certain point as in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 301. Figs. 302(a) to 302(c) show the same display states as Figs. 301(a) to 301(c), respectively.
Next, a red microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of the horizontally long window, and rapidly varying numbers (for example, "1" to "3") are displayed on the right side of the window. Figure 302(d) shows the display state at this time. The acquired normal microphone icon image is also displayed on the left side of the display area. The varying display time should be set to about 1 to 2 seconds.
Next, the numbers that had been changing rapidly on the right side of the window stop and "1" is displayed. Figure 302(e) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" and "3" may also be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, red microphone icon images are displayed in a number (any of 1 to 3) corresponding to the displayed number. Figure 302(f) shows the display state at this time.
After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 302(g) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many of each microphone icon image can be acquired, the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened.

As shown with reference to FIG. 302, when multiple suggestion images are acquired, they may be displayed from bottom to top in the order in which they were acquired.
In addition, when the acquired suggestion image is activated, the suggestion images displayed above the activated suggestion image may be moved downward and displayed.

With reference to FIG. 301, an embodiment capable of acquiring multiple microphone icon images has been shown, but now, with reference to FIG. 303, another embodiment will be described.
First, the word "Obtained x?" is displayed. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped. Figure 303(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a horizontally long window is displayed in the display area, and on the left side of this window, microphone icon images (for example, a normal microphone icon image and a red microphone icon image) that are displayed in a rapidly varying manner are displayed, and on the right side of the window, numbers (for example, "1" to "3") that are displayed in a rapidly varying manner are displayed. Figure 303(b) shows the display state at this time. It is advisable to set the time for which the microphone icon image is displayed in a varying manner to about 1 to 2 seconds, and to further extend the time for which the numbers are displayed in a varying manner to about 1 to 2 seconds.
Next, a normal microphone icon image is displayed. Figure 303(c) shows the display state at this time. Note that a red microphone icon image may also be displayed.
Next, the numbers that had been changing rapidly on the right side of the window stop and the number "2" is displayed. Figure 303(d) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" or "3" may also be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, microphone icon images are displayed in a number (any of 1 to 3) corresponding to the displayed number. Fig. 303(e) shows a display state in which two white microphone icon images are displayed on the left side of the display area. Note that the microphone icon images are displayed in either white or red.
After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 303(f) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many of each microphone icon image can be acquired, the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 301 to 303, an example was given in which at least one microphone icon image could be acquired, but a "0" may be added to the variably displayed number so that when a "0" is displayed, no microphone icon image can be acquired.

Note that, although two examples of microphone icon images have been given, a white microphone icon image and a red microphone icon image, three or more may be used. For example, a gold microphone icon image, which has a higher expectation than a red microphone icon image, may be used.

An example was shown in which one or more suggestive images can be acquired when the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in a reach miss mode, but additional suggestive images may be acquired at other times.

Simultaneously with activation of a given suggestive image, a suggestive image of the same or a different type may be acquired.
For example, a reserved change suggestion image may be acquired when the microphone icon image is activated. In this case, it is preferable to display "Reserved change acquired" together with the display "Microphone activated!"
In this way, by making it possible to obtain a suggestive image at the timing when the display is such that the number of suggestive images is reduced, it is possible to reduce disappointment felt due to the reduction in the number of times a specified effect is executed.

Alternatively, during the period in which a specific suggested image is acquired and is on standby, a new suggested image of the same type or a different type may be acquired. In this case, too, it is preferable to display the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 296(g) and 296(h).

Alternatively, a new suggestive image may be obtained during the performance being performed based on the activation of the suggestive image. For example, when a special reach performance is performed based on the activation of a microphone icon image, a microphone icon image or another suggestive image may be obtained again during the performance of the special reach performance. Also, by activating a microphone icon image during the performance of a special reach performance, a display may be displayed in which the female singer character wins the fight for the microphone with the diva or the minnow princess and can continue to hold the microphone, or a display may be displayed in which the microphone is delivered to the female singer character even if the female singer character loses the fight for the microphone, so that the female singer character can finally hold the microphone in the first half or second half of the special reach performance.
In this case, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation that a suggestive image will be added until the final stage of the varying display.

Referring to Figures 296 (h) to 297 (c), in the embodiment, an example is shown in which when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a provisionally stopped state in a reach miss mode, the suggestive image moves to the left side of the display area, but the timing for moving the suggestive image may be different.
For example, the movement of the suggestion image may be executed while the decorative pattern is being displayed stationary or when the next varying display of the decorative pattern starts.

When a special reach effect in which a microphone icon image is activated is executed, it may be possible to obtain an additional microphone icon image before the special effect begins. Note that there are cases in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed 0 times, 1 time, or 2 times, and the performance form will be explained by dividing the cases according to the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects are executed.

First, when a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, it may be possible to make it possible to acquire additional microphone icon images during one or more of the following periods: the period from when the variable display starts until the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern reach a reach state, and the period from when the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern reach a reach state until the special reach performance starts.

In addition, when a pseudo consecutive performance is performed once, the microphone icon image may be additionally acquired during one or more of the following periods: the period from when the variable display begins until the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a pseudo consecutive performance, the period from when the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed until the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern reach a reach state, and the period from when the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern reach a reach state until a special reach performance begins.

For example, it may be possible to allow additional microphone icon images to be acquired during one or more of the following periods: the period from when the varying display begins until the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a pseudo consecutive performance, the period after that from when the varying display of the decorative patterns is resumed until the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped again in a manner indicating a pseudo consecutive performance, the period after that from when the varying display of the decorative patterns is resumed until the left decorative patterns and the right decorative patterns reach a reach state, and the period after the left decorative patterns and the right decorative patterns reach a reach state until a special reach performance begins.

In this way, the more times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the more microphone icon images can be acquired, so players hope that the pseudo consecutive performance will be performed.

When a microphone icon image is activated and a special reach effect begins, the color indicating the title of the reach effect (for details, see the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 276 (b) and 277 (b)) may be displayed in the same color as the activated microphone icon image. For example, if the color of the activated microphone icon image is red, the title of the reach effect may be displayed in red, and if the color of the activated microphone icon image is gold, the title of the reach effect may be displayed in gold.

Below, we will explain the specific execution modes of special reach effects, etc. First, we will explain the premise. The probability that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is 1/300, and the probability that the special lottery result will be a miss is 299/300. In the case of a jackpot, the probability of a reach state is 1/1. On the other hand, in the case of a miss, the probability of a reach state is 30/299. The occurrence rate of a miss reach is 299/300 x 30/299, which is 1/10.

FIG. 304(a) shows the allocation of reach effects.
In the event of a jackpot, the occurrence ratio of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect,""The Countdown Reach Effect," and "Other Reach (Effects)" is 70:20:10.
On the other hand, in the case of a miss, the occurrence ratio of the "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance,""The Countdown Reach Performance," and "Other Reach Performance" is 2:4:94.
In this case, the expected probability of a "Year-end Song Contest Reach Performance" is approximately 54%, the expected probability of a "The Countdown Reach Performance" is approximately 14%, and the expected probability of "Other Reaches (Performances)" is approximately 0.4%.
The occurrence rate in the figure indicates the ratio to the total variation display of the decorative pattern. In about 0.4% of the variation display, the "Year-end Song Battle Reach" occurs, in about 0.5% of the variation display, the "The Countdown Reach" occurs, and in about 9.4% of the variation display, other reaches occur (after the decorative pattern is in a reach state, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a big win or miss mode, or after the reach state, other reach effects may be executed and the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a big win or miss mode). In the remaining about 89.7% of the variation display, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a non-reach miss mode.

Fig. 304(b) shows a table for selecting how many microphone icon images are acquired when the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Production" is executed. In both the case of a big win and a miss, the denominator is 100, and the number of microphone icon images acquired is set at a predetermined ratio.
As shown in the table, the ratio of the number of microphone icon acquisition images is set so that the greater the number of microphone icon acquisition images, the higher the expectation of a big win.
The occurrence rate in the figure indicates the ratio to the total variation display of the decorative pattern. As mentioned above, the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" occurs in about 0.4% of the total variation display of the decorative pattern, but the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" with 0 microphone icon images occurs at a probability of about 0.230%, the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" with 1 microphone icon image occurs at a probability of about 0.078%, the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" with 2 microphone icon images occurs at a probability of about 0.051%, the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" with 3 microphone icon images occurs at a probability of about 0.039%, and the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" with 4 microphone icon images occurs at a probability of about 0.035% (the sum of these values is the occurrence probability of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" at about 0.4%).

Fig. 304(c) shows a selection table of the presentation pattern when the number of winnings is "0". In both the case of a big win and a miss, the denominator is 100, and the selection probability of the presentation pattern is set at a predetermined ratio.
Similarly, Figure 304(d) shows a selection table of presentation patterns when the number of acquisitions is "1", Figure 304(e) shows a selection table of presentation patterns when the number of acquisitions is "2", Figure 304(f) shows a selection table of presentation patterns when the number of acquisitions is "3", and Figure 304(g) shows a selection table of presentation patterns when the number of acquisitions is "4".

Figure 305 is a table showing the acquisition ratio of microphone icon images (the acquisition ratio of gold microphones to normal microphones) in each performance pattern.
FIG. 305(a) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "1".
FIG. 305(b) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "2".
FIG. 305(c) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "3".
FIG. 305(d) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "4".

In this embodiment, if the player wins the fight for the microphone with the Evil Princess four times in the "Year-end Singing Contest Reach Performance" (sometimes referred to as a "battle" in the embodiment; the fight for the microphone with the Small Princess may also be referred to as a "battle"), a jackpot result is displayed. On the other hand, if the player loses the first three battles, a losing result is displayed. Note that, as described below, after a display that makes it appear as if the battle has been lost, a microphone icon image may be activated and a display that the battle has been won may be displayed.

306 is a table showing the results of the first through fourth battles in each presentation pattern. "O" indicates a mode in which a display is made indicating that the battle has been won, "X" indicates a mode in which a display is made indicating that the battle has been lost, and "X → O" indicates a mode in which a microphone icon image is activated and a display is made indicating that the battle has been won after a display that makes it appear as if the battle has been lost.
FIG. 306(a) shows the presentation mode when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "0".
FIG. 306(b) shows the presentation mode when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "1".
FIG. 306(c) shows the presentation mode when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "2".
FIG. 306(d) shows the presentation mode when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "3".
FIG. 306(e) shows the presentation mode when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "4".

As shown in FIG. 306(a), when the number of acquisitions is "0", the microphone icon image is not activated.
On the other hand, when the acquired number is "1" as shown in FIG. 306(b), the microphone icon image (either a gold microphone icon image or a normal microphone icon image) will be activated a maximum of once.
In effect patterns "PTN06" to "PTN11," the microphone icon image is activated in any of the first to third battles, but the player will lose any battles thereafter.
The presentation pattern "PTN12" is a presentation pattern in which four battles are won without the microphone icon image being activated.
The presentation pattern "PTN13" is a presentation pattern in which the fourth battle occurs without the microphone icon image being activated, and although the fourth battle is lost, the microphone icon image is activated and the fourth battle is won.
In effect patterns "PTN14" to "PTN16," a microphone icon image is activated in any of the first to third battles, and the battles thereafter are won.

As shown in FIG. 306(c), when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "2", the microphone icon image (either the gold microphone icon image or the normal microphone icon image, or both) will be activated a maximum of two times.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in FIG. 305(b).
If two gold microphone icon images or two regular microphone icon images are acquired, the microphone icon images will be activated at the timing shown for each performance pattern in Figure 306 (c).

When one golden microphone icon image and one normal microphone icon image are acquired, the order in which they are activated is determined with a predetermined probability.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN17", in the second battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN18", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN19", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN20", in the first battle, there is a 50% chance that the gold microphone icon image will be activated, and a 50% chance that the regular microphone icon image will be activated. In the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.

In the case of the performance pattern "PTN21", the microphone icon image is not activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN22," in the fourth battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN23," in the third battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN24," in the second battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN25," in the first battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN26", in the third battle, there is a 50% chance that the gold microphone icon image will be activated, and a 50% chance that the regular microphone icon image will be activated. In the fourth battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN27", in the second battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN28", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN29", in the second battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN30", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN31", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.

As shown in FIG. 306(d), when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "3", the microphone icon image (either a gold microphone icon image or a normal microphone icon image, or both) will be activated a maximum of three times.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in FIG. 305(c).
When three golden microphone icon images are acquired or when three regular microphone icon images are acquired, the microphone icon images are activated at the timing shown for each performance pattern in Figure 306 (d).

If two golden microphone icon images and one regular microphone icon image are obtained, and if one golden microphone icon image and two regular microphone icon images are obtained, the order of activation will be determined as follows:
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN32", in the first battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the second battle, if there is a gold microphone icon image on standby, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN33", the microphone icon image is not activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN34," in the fourth battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN35," in the third battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN36," in the second battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN37," in the first battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN38", in the third battle, there is a 50% chance that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% chance that a regular microphone icon image will be displayed. In the fourth battle, if there is a gold microphone icon image on standby, the gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and if there is no gold microphone icon image on standby, the regular microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN39", in the second battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, if there is a gold microphone icon image on standby, the gold microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no gold microphone icon image on standby, the normal microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN40", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, if there is a gold microphone icon image on standby, the gold microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no gold microphone icon image on standby, the normal microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN41", in the second battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed is 20%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed is 80%. In the third battle, if there is a gold microphone icon image on standby, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed is 80%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed is 20%.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN42," in the first battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed is 20%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed is 80%. In the third battle, if there is a gold microphone icon image on standby, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed is 80%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed is 20%.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN43," in the first battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed is 20%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed is 80%. In the second battle, if there is a gold microphone icon image on standby, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed is 80%, and the probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed is 20%.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN44", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, if there is a normal microphone icon image on standby, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the third battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN45", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, if there is a normal microphone icon image waiting, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN46", in the first battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, if there is a normal microphone icon image on standby, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN47", in the second battle, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, if there is a normal microphone icon image on standby, the probability that the gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that the normal microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.

As shown in FIG. 306(e), when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "4", the microphone icon image (either a gold microphone icon image or a normal microphone icon image, or both) will be activated a maximum of four times.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in FIG. 305(d).
When four golden microphone icon images are acquired or when four regular microphone icon images are acquired, the microphone icon images are activated at the timing shown for each performance pattern in Figure 306 (e).

If three gold microphone icon images and one regular microphone icon image are obtained, if two gold microphone icon images and two regular microphone icon images are obtained, or if one gold microphone icon image and three regular microphone icon images are obtained, the order of activation will be determined as follows:
In the case of the performance pattern "PTN48", after losing all four battles, the microphone icon image is activated and the player is revived. In other words, the four microphone icon images acquired are activated in all four battles. The order of activation is as follows: after all the normal microphone icon images (1 to 3) are activated, the gold microphone icon image (3 to 1) is activated.

In addition, in battles after the golden microphone icon image is activated, the probability of the golden microphone icon image being activated is set so that it is easier to win the battle compared to battles after the normal microphone icon image is activated.
The microphone icon image displayed large due to activation may be displayed as being held by the female singer character until she loses the battle, allowing the player to recognize the color of the microphone icon image most recently activated.

If there is no microphone icon image on standby and you lose the battle with the evil princess or the small fish princess, the display of the decorative symbols will end in a state of showing a losing result, but after displaying that you have lost the battle, the female singer character may take out a microphone hidden in her costume, and display an image of you turning the tide and winning the battle, and the next battle onwards may take place. If it is the fourth battle, if such a display is made, the decorative symbols will stop and be displayed in the form of a big win.
According to this embodiment, even if there is no waiting microphone icon image and the player loses the battle with the evil princess or the small fry princess, the player can expect a big win.

In this way, if you win four battles, you will get a jackpot. The more microphone icon images you have (or the more you have waiting) at the start of the special reach effect, the higher the chance of a jackpot occurring, so players can enjoy the effect display while hoping to get as many microphone icon images as possible.

The timing for activating the waiting suggestion images may be in the order in which the suggestion images were acquired. Alternatively, the suggestion images may be activated in order of the highest expected value indicated by the suggestion images, or in order of the lowest expected value indicated by the suggestion images.

Although the effect patterns in which a normal microphone icon image and a gold microphone icon image are displayed as the microphone icon image have been shown, microphone icon images in other forms may also be displayed.
For example, one to four suggestive images labeled "Special Move" may be acquired, and when the suggestive image is activated, the player is guaranteed to win the battle against the Evil Princess or the Small Princess. It is preferable to limit the number of times the player can win a battle to one. If the player acquires four suggestive images, the player is guaranteed to win four battles, which means that a big win is guaranteed to occur.

It may also be possible to acquire a suggestive image containing the words "jackpot," "V," "national tour," etc. Then, when the suggestive image of "jackpot" or "V" is displayed, a jackpot will definitely occur without losing the battle. Also, when the suggestive image of "national tour" is displayed, a jackpot will occur without losing the battle, and after the jackpot, a transition to a high probability time-saving state may also be made.

The timing at which the obtained suggestive image is activated may be different.
For example, when one microphone icon image has been acquired, there may be a battle in which the microphone icon image is activated in the first battle but cannot be activated in the second to fourth battles, a battle in which the microphone icon image is activated in the second battle but cannot be activated in the third to fourth battles, and a battle in which the microphone icon image is activated in the fourth battle.
In this case, if the microphone icon image is displayed up to the fourth battle, the player will hope that the microphone icon image will be activated in the final battle, resulting in a big win.

In addition, when one promotion suggestion image has been obtained, the promotion suggestion image may be activated when the reach title is displayed, promoting the reach title (white becomes red or gold), or it may not be activated when the reach title is displayed, but may be activated when a cut-in image is displayed, promoting the cut-in image (green becomes red or gold).
In this case, the later the activation, the higher the expectation of a big win may be.

For example, the suggestive image may move slightly from the left side of the display area to the center and then return to the left side.
Such a configuration can heighten the player's sense of anticipation as to when the suggestive image will be activated.
In addition, if the expectation of a big win is set to be higher when the bonus is activated later, the player will hope that the bonus will be activated as late as possible.

The timing at which the suggestive image is activated may be made recognizable to the player.
For example, it may be indicated that it will be activated when the decorative pattern starts to change, when a special reach performance starts, when a battle ends, when the final battle (the fourth battle) ends, etc.
Specifically, it is a good idea to display text such as "Activate when the fluctuation begins" or "Activate when the reach performance begins!" to the right of the suggestive image to indicate the timing.

Alternatively, the player may be informed that the action will occur before a certain timing, or that the action will occur after a certain timing.
For example, it may indicate that it will be activated before the decorative pattern starts to change, the special reach performance starts, the battle ends, or the final battle (the fourth battle).
Alternatively, it may indicate that it will be activated after the timing at which the decorative pattern starts to change, the timing at which a special reach performance starts, the timing at which a battle ends, or the timing at which the final battle (the fourth battle) ends.
Specifically, it is a good idea to display text such as "Activate before the fluctuation starts,""Activate after the fluctuation starts,""Activate before the reach performance starts!" or "Activate after the reach performance starts!" to the right of the suggested image to indicate the timing.

Although an example in which the same or different types of suggestion images can be acquired has been shown with reference to Figs. 300 and 302, the timing at which these are activated may be different or the same. Also, the suggestion images may be activated in an order based on a predetermined priority for each suggestion image. Alternatively, the suggestion images may be activated in the order in which they are acquired.
For example, between a pending change suggestion image and a button operation suggestion image, the pending change suggestion image may be always activated before the button operation suggestion image. Alternatively, the button operation suggestion image may be always activated before the pending change suggestion image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 300(d), only the character "?" may be displayed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, it may be possible to know which of the suggested images is which. For example, a timer may be displayed next to the character "?" to count down (for example, displaying from "20" to "0" over 20 seconds), and when "0" is displayed, one of the suggested images may be displayed.
Alternatively, the words "Pending change? Button?" may be displayed. In this case, a pending change suggestion image or a button operation suggestion image is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed.
In this way, by not knowing which suggestive image will be displayed until a specific timing arrives, the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened.

A timer may be displayed next to the character "?" to count down, and when "0" is displayed, a normal microphone icon image may be displayed.
Also, after the normal microphone icon image is displayed, the timer may be displayed again, and when the timer reaches "0", the normal microphone icon image may change to a gold microphone icon image. Note that the probability that the normal microphone icon image changes to a gold microphone icon image may be 100%, or may be a predetermined probability less than that (for example, 50%).

The decorative symbols may be displayed in a manner that indicates a missed chance, and after the background image is restored to the normal image, the decorative symbols may be displayed in a manner that indicates a big win. With such a display mode, the player is initially disappointed, and then a display is made indicating that a big win will occur, which makes the player feel very excited.
In this manner, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the suggestive image is not acquired, and it is preferable that the suggestive image can be acquired only if the result of the special lottery is a loss.

When the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed as a reach miss, after a specified teasing effect is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed as a big win without acquiring a suggestive image, or a suggestive image may be acquired, but the decorative pattern may also be displayed as a miss. In this case, the player will recognize that either a big win or the acquisition of a suggestive image will occur at the time the specified teasing effect is displayed.

In this way, by displaying a visual effect based on foresight at the time when the highly anticipated result of a variable display is displayed in a manner that indicates a miss, the disappointed player's feelings can be quickly shifted to the next or subsequent variable display.

Below, the "History display step-up effect", which is a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 123 to 272, etc., will be described with reference to Figs. 273 to 275, 307 to 315, etc. Note that Figs. 307 to 312 are tables showing the effect patterns of the "History display step-up effect" in this embodiment. Also, Fig. 313 is a time chart showing the effect mode of the "History display step-up effect". Also, Fig. 314 is a diagram showing the display content in the display area.

The presentation patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004" shown in FIG. 307 indicate presentation patterns in which only the first step-up image is displayed.
As shown in the figure, step-up images A to D are displayed in effect patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004", respectively.

The presentation patterns "PTN-2-001" to "PTN-2-016" shown in FIG. 307 indicate presentation patterns in which a first-stage step-up image is displayed, and then a second-stage step-up image is displayed.
For example, the effect pattern "PTN-2-002" is an effect pattern in which a step-up image A is displayed, and then a step-up image B is displayed.

The presentation patterns "PTN-3-001" to "PTN-3-064" shown in Figure 308 indicate presentation patterns in which a first-stage step-up image is displayed, followed by a second-stage step-up image, and then a second-stage step-up image is displayed, followed by a third-stage step-up image.
For example, the effect pattern "PTN-3-007" is an effect pattern in which a step-up image A is displayed, then a step-up image B is displayed, and then a step-up image C is displayed.

Presentation patterns "PTN-4-001" to "PTN-4-256" shown in Figures 309 to 312 indicate presentation patterns in which a first-stage step-up image is displayed, then a second-stage step-up image is displayed, then a second-stage step-up image is displayed, then a third-stage step-up image is displayed, then a third-stage step-up image is displayed, and then a fourth-stage step-up image is displayed.
For example, the presentation pattern "PTN-4-028" is a presentation pattern in which a step-up image A is displayed, then a step-up image B is displayed, then a step-up image B is displayed, then a step-up image C is displayed, and then a step-up image C is displayed, then a step-up image D is displayed.

According to the presentation patterns shown in Fig. 307 to Fig. 312, step-up images are displayed from the first stage to a maximum of the fourth stage. Also, at each stage, one of step-up images A to D is displayed.
Whether or not to execute the "history display step-up effect" and which effect pattern to execute is determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of a special lottery, etc. Also, the "history display step-up effect" is executed based on the control by the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, the presentation patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004" may be collectively referred to as the presentation pattern "PTN-1."
Similarly, the presentation patterns "PTN-2-001" to "PTN-2-016" may be collectively referred to as the presentation pattern "PTN-2."
Similarly, effect patterns "PTN-3-001" to "PTN-3-064" may be collectively referred to as effect pattern "PTN-3."
Similarly, the presentation patterns "PTN-4-001" to "PTN-4-256" may be collectively referred to as presentation pattern "PTN-4."

Fig. 313 is a time chart showing the performance mode of the "history display step-up performance". Fig. 313(a) shows, for comparison, the performance mode when the "history display step-up performance" is not performed.
Figures 313(b) to 313(g) show the presentation mode when the "history display step-up presentation" is performed.
First, an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-4-028" is executed will be described with reference to Figures 313(b), 314, and 315.

First, the display of the decorative patterns begins to change at time t0, and one second later at time t1, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern change at high speed. Figure 314(a) shows the display state at this time.

Next, at timing t1, the "history display step-up performance" starts, and the step-up performance display window is displayed. During the period up to timing t2, the step-up image is not yet displayed, and only the step-up performance display window is displayed. FIG. 314(b) shows the display state while the "history display step-up performance" is being executed. A step-up image is displayed in the rectangular step-up performance display window shown in the center (the specific display mode within the window is omitted in the figure). In this embodiment, the step-up performance display window and the step-up image are the same size.
The figures shown in Figures 314(d) to 315(f) show the display modes of the step-up performance display window. The display modes of the step-up performance display window will be described below with reference to Figures 314(d) to 315(f).

314(d) shows the state before the step-up image is displayed. At the bottom of the step-up performance display window, a history display area is provided that shows the order in which the step-up images have been displayed.
The history display area is made up of four display areas arranged horizontally, and the first step-up image is reduced and displayed in the leftmost display area. Similarly, the second to fourth step-up images are also reduced and displayed in order from the left.

Next, from timing t2 to timing t4, a first step-up image is displayed.
Fig. 314(e) shows a state in which step-up image A is displayed as the first step-up image, while Fig. 314(f) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image A is reduced and displayed in the leftmost display area.

As shown in Figures 314(d) to 314(f), before the step-up image is displayed, "?" is displayed in the history display area. After the step-up image is displayed, a reduced version of the step-up image is displayed in the history display area.
The display priority of the step-up performance display window is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, and the step-up performance display window is displayed in front of the decorative pattern.
In addition, the display priority of the step-up image is higher than the display priority of the step-up performance display window, and the step-up image is displayed in front of the step-up performance display window.
Furthermore, the display priority of the image (reduced step-up image) displayed in the history display area is higher than the display priority of the step-up image, and the image displayed in the history display area is displayed in front of the step-up image.
The size of the step-up image may be one size smaller than the step-up effect display window.

Next, the second step-up image is displayed from timing t4 to timing t6. Figure 315(a) shows a state in which step-up image B is displayed in the step-up performance display window as the second step-up image. Also, Figure 315(b) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image B is reduced and displayed in the second display area from the left.

Next, from timing t6 to timing t8, a third-stage step-up image is displayed. Figure 315(c) shows a state in which step-up image C is displayed in the step-up performance display window as the third-stage step-up image. Also, Figure 315(d) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image C is reduced and displayed in the third display area from the left.

Next, from timing t8 to timing t10, the fourth step-up image is displayed. Figure 315(e) shows a state in which step-up image D is displayed in the step-up performance display window as the fourth step-up image. Also, Figure 315(f) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image D is reduced and displayed in the fourth display area from the left.

At timing t10, the display of the step-up image ends. Figure 314 (c) shows the display state after the history display step-up performance has ended.

As shown in Figures 314(d) to 315(f), a star-shaped mark is added to the top right of the letter A in step-up image A. Furthermore, the letter "protect" is added to the top right of the letter B in step-up image B. Furthermore, the letter "control" is added to the top right of the letter C in step-up image C. Note that no mark or letter is added to the top right of the letter D in step-up image D.
When each step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area, these marks and characters are also reduced and displayed, but it is also possible to display them without these marks and characters.

As shown in Figures 314(d) to 315(f), step-up image A to step-up image D have different background portions. Step-up image A has a background portion including two horizontal lines. Step-up image B has a background portion including two diagonal lines slanting downward to the left. Step-up image C has a background portion including two diagonal lines slanting downward to the right. Step-up image D has a background portion including four diagonal lines. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the type of step-up image.
When the step-up image is displayed in a reduced size in the history display area, the lines in the background are also displayed in a reduced size, but the lines may be omitted or displayed in a simplified manner. For example, only any one of the letters "A" to "D" may be displayed in the history display area.
Instead of lines, the background of each step-up image may be formed by colors, patterns, etc. In this case, when displayed in the history display area, the colors and patterns may be displayed as they are in a reduced size, or the colors and patterns may be omitted or displayed in a simplified manner.

When the same step-up image is displayed consecutively, such as in presentation pattern "PTN-3-022"("B","B","B") or presentation pattern "PTN-4-001"("A","A","A","A"), there is a risk that the player will not recognize that a new step-up image has been displayed. However, in this embodiment, a period is provided in which a large step-up image is not displayed within the step-up presentation display window (resulting in the display state shown in Figures 314(f), 315(b), 315(d), and 315(f)), thereby preventing the player from failing to recognize that a new step-up image has been displayed.
The length of the period during which the large step-up image is not displayed in the step-up effect display window may be shorter than the period during which the large step-up image is displayed, and may be, for example, about 0.2 to 0.4 seconds.

The history display area is smaller than the step-up effect display window, so if the step-up image were simply reduced in size and displayed in the history display area, it may be difficult for the player to recognize what was displayed as the step-up image. However, when the step-up image is reduced in size and displayed in the history display area in this way, part of the step-up image is omitted or simplified to display something similar to the original step-up image, making it easier for the player to recognize which step-up image was displayed.

In this embodiment, when the performance pattern "PTN-3" or the performance pattern "PTN-4" is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern always temporarily stop at the decorative pattern of the same number, resulting in a reach state.
When the performance pattern "PTN-1" or the performance pattern "PTN-2" is executed, the ready state is not reached, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss.
Alternatively, it may be possible for a reach state to occur even when presentation pattern "PTN-1" or presentation pattern "PTN-2" is executed, although this is a lower probability compared to when presentation pattern "PTN-3" or presentation pattern "PTN-4" is executed.
For example, it is advisable to set the probability of reaching a reach state (i.e., the probability of ultimately hitting a jackpot) to be higher in the order of presentation pattern "PTN-1", presentation pattern "PTN-2", presentation pattern "PTN-3", and presentation pattern "PTN-4".
With this configuration, the player will be greatly interested in how many levels of the step-up image will be displayed.

In this embodiment, each presentation pattern shown with reference to Figures 307 to 312 is configured to suggest or notify the occurrence of some event related to the game.

When a plurality of step-up images A (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, the greater the number of step-up images A displayed, the higher the expectation.
Specifically, the expectation level is higher when three step-up images A are displayed than when two step-up images A are displayed, and the expectation level is higher when four step-up images A are displayed than when three step-up images A are displayed.
For example, the expectation rate may be set to 10% when two step-up images A are displayed, 20% when three are displayed, and 60% when four are displayed.
FIG. 313(c) shows an example of a presentation when the presentation pattern "PTN-2-001" is executed and two step-up images A are displayed.

In addition, when multiple step-up images B (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, after the end of the "history display step-up performance", a reserved image change performance is executed in which the reserved image changes at a predetermined timing. Note that the more step-up images B are displayed, the more the reserved image changes to one with a higher expectation.
Specifically, when two step-up images B are displayed, the reserved image changes to a green state at a predetermined timing. Fig. 313(d) shows an example of a performance when the performance pattern "PTN-3-006" is executed and two step-up images B are displayed.
Also, when three step-up images B are displayed, the reserved image changes to a red color at a predetermined timing. Fig. 313(e) shows an example of a performance when the performance pattern "PTN-3-022" is executed and two step-up images B are displayed. Also, when four step-up images B are displayed (performance pattern "PTN-4-086"), the reserved image changes to a gold color at a predetermined timing.
The expected probability of the reserved image is highest for white, followed by green, red, and gold.

When two step-up images B are displayed, the reserved image may be changed to either green, red, or gold. Also, when three step-up images B are displayed, the reserved image may be changed to either red or gold. In this way, the player can have a sense of expectation that a highly anticipated reserved image change performance will be executed even when only a small number of step-up images B are displayed.

In addition, when multiple step-up images C (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, a button operation effect is executed at a predetermined timing after the end of the "history display step-up effect." Note that the more step-up images C are displayed, the more likely the operation effect will be executed.
Specifically, when two step-up images C are displayed, the button operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing, and the light source provided in the button emits white light, so that the button appears to be emitting white light. Fig. 313(f) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-3-041" is executed and two step-up images C are displayed.
Furthermore, when three step-up images C are displayed, the button operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing, and a light source provided in the button emits red light, so that an operation effect is executed in which the button is visually perceived as emitting red light.
Furthermore, when four step-up images C are displayed (when the performance pattern "PTN-4-171" is executed), an operation performance is executed in which a lever operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing.
In addition, the expectation level is higher when the operation performance is performed than when it is not. The expectation level of the operation performance is highest for button operation (white light emission), followed by button operation (red light emission), and lever operation.

When two step-up images C are displayed, any one of the following operation effects may be executed: a button operation (light emitted in white), a button operation (light emitted in red), or a lever operation. Also, when three step-up images C are displayed, any one of the following operation effects may be executed: a button operation (light emitted in red) or a lever operation. In this way, the player can have a sense of expectation that a highly anticipated operation effect will be executed even when only a small number of step-up images C are displayed.
In addition, in the button operations in the operation presentation, operation acceptance is enabled for the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, etc. In addition, in the lever operations, operation acceptance is enabled for the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, etc. In addition, as various aspects related to operation acceptance, various aspects in other embodiments can be adopted.

Regardless of the number of step-up images D displayed, they do not have the function of executing effects that suggest or notify of any events.

In the embodiment shown, when the effect pattern "PTN-2" is executed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss, without entering a reach state. However, when the step-up image is displayed as "A" "A" (effect pattern "PTN-2-001"), "B" "B" (effect pattern "PTN-2-006"), or "C" "C" (effect pattern "PTN-2-011"), it is preferable to at least enter a reach state, and in some cases result in a jackpot. This makes it possible to prevent a miss from always occurring despite the effect being executed, and to leave the player with a sense of anticipation for a jackpot.

An example has been given in which the degree of expectation is indicated by a predetermined presentation mode based on the number of step-up images, but the predetermined presentation mode may also be executed based on the step-up images being displayed in a predetermined order.
Specifically, when step-up images are displayed in a special order (displayed in the order of "A", "B", "C", "D" or "D", "C", "B", "A"), such as in performance pattern "PTN-4-028" or performance pattern "PTN-4-217", after the "History Display Step-Up Performance" ends, a special reach performance, a "Year-End Song Battle Reach Performance" or "The Countdown Reach Performance", is executed at a predetermined timing.

As described above, when the presentation pattern "PTN-3" or the presentation pattern "PTN-4" is executed, the decorative symbols always enter a reach state.
Here, by checking the step-up images displayed in the history display area, the player can recognize that if the step-up images are displayed as "A,""B,""C," or "D," a special reach will occur. Similarly, the number of step-up images A allows the player to recognize the likelihood of a jackpot occurring. Similarly, the number of step-up images B allows the player to recognize what type of reserved change presentation will occur. Similarly, the number of step-up images C allows the player to recognize what type of operation presentation will occur.

On the other hand, even if the "History Display Step-Up Presentation" is executed, if the history of the displayed step-up images does not satisfy the above-mentioned conditions, such as "D", "B", "D", or "C" (presentation pattern "PTN-4-223"), there is no indication that the expectation level, the pending change presentation, or the operation presentation will be executed.

When the step-up images are displayed as "B", "B", "C", and "C" (presentation pattern "PTN-4-091"), the player is informed that the decorative symbols are in a reach state, and that both the reserved change presentation and the operation presentation will occur. Figure 313 (g) shows an example presentation when presentation pattern "PTN-4-091" is executed and two step-up images B and two step-up images C are displayed.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to know up to what stage the history display step-up presentation has been displayed, the player can also recognize the degree of expectation and what type of presentation will occur by referring to the history of the displayed step-up images.
The player visually recognizes the presentation by paying attention to both how many stages the history display step-up presentation will continue and how the history display step-up presentation is continuing, and feels a new interest.

After the "history display step-up effect" ends, the hold change effect or operation effect may be executed immediately (for example, after one second).
Also, a special reach effect may be started immediately (for example, one second) after the end of the "history display step-up effect."

The occurrence of the reserved change effect, the operation effect, or the special reach effect may be displayed in the display area until the effect is executed. For example, the display method in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295 etc. may be adopted.
For example, the reserved change effect may be displayed in text such as "reserved (green)", "reserved (red)", or "reserved (gold)". Alternatively, a circular green (or red or gold) image may be displayed as an icon to indicate the color the reserved change to.
The operation effects may be displayed in text such as "button (white)", "button (red)", or "lever". Alternatively, a white (or red) image resembling a button or an image resembling a lever may be displayed as an icon to indicate what operation effects will be performed.
In addition, for special reach effects, the name of the reach effect may be displayed in text, such as "Year-end singing contest" or "The countdown."
The degree of expectation may also be displayed numerically or the like to indicate the degree of expectation.

For example, when the effect pattern "PTN-4-086"("B","B","B") is executed, some kind of big win may be guaranteed to occur.
In addition, when the presentation pattern "PTN-4-001"("A","A","A","A") is executed, a high probability time-saving jackpot (a jackpot that results in a high probability time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state) may be set to occur without fail.
In this way, some kind of jackpot or a high probability time-saving jackpot may occur based on the combination of step-up images displayed up to the fourth stage.

In addition, among some of the presentation patterns that are displayed only up to the second or third stage, a presentation pattern that results in some kind of jackpot or a high probability time-saving jackpot may be provided.
For example, when the presentation pattern "PTN-3-020"("B","A","D") is executed, some kind of big win may always occur.
In addition, when the presentation pattern "PTN-2-014"("D" or "B") is executed, a high probability time-saving jackpot (a jackpot that results in a high probability time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state) may be set to occur without fail.

Although four types of step-up images, step-up image A to step-up image D, have been shown, step-up images of other types may also be displayed.
In addition, an example has been given in which, when the history of displayed step-up images results in a specific combination, a degree of expectation is indicated and a specified effect (a hold change effect or an operation effect) is executed, but it may also be possible to indicate that a specified degree of expectation or a specified effect will be executed in response to a special step-up image being displayed once.
For example, a step-up image of "Hold" may be displayed at any one of the first to fourth stages to indicate that the hold change performance will be executed.
In addition, a step-up image of "Operation" may be displayed at any one of the first to fourth stages to indicate that an operation presentation is being performed.
Also, a step-up image such as "V" or "Win" may be displayed at any of the first to fourth stages to indicate that some kind of big win will occur.
In addition, a step-up image saying "sure" may be displayed at any one of the first to fourth stages to indicate that a high probability time-saving jackpot will occur.

With reference to FIG. 314, an example of the "history display step-up performance" is shown, but it is also possible to make it so that the "history display step-up performance" does not start even though a display is made as if the "history display step-up performance" is started. For example, it is also possible to make it so that first, only a semi-transparent step-up performance display window is displayed, and then the step-up performance display window is displayed in an opaque state, resulting in the display state shown in FIG. 314(d), and the "history display step-up performance" starts, or that only a semi-transparent step-up performance display window is displayed, and then the display of the semi-transparent step-up performance display window ends, and the "history display step-up performance" does not start. It is preferable to make such a display from timing t1 to timing t2.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the "history display step-up effect" will start.

In the "history display step-up performance," an embodiment has been shown in which the step-up image is displayed in a range of 1 to 4 times, but the step-up image may be displayed in a range of 1 to 3 times or in a predetermined range of 1 to 5 or more times.

In the "history display step-up effect", if the player does not notice that the step-up images are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player's interest may be reduced. Therefore, a display may be provided to notify the player that a predetermined combination has been displayed.
Fig. 316(a) to Fig. 316(d) show examples of display in the step-up effect display window from the first stage to the fourth stage when the effect pattern "PTN-4-091" is executed. In Fig. 316(b), two step-up images B displayed in a reduced size are displayed in a frame. Similarly, in Fig. 316(d), two step-up images C displayed in a reduced size are displayed in a frame.
By displaying the information in this manner, it becomes easier for the player to notice that a predetermined combination has been achieved.

In addition, when the performance pattern "PTN-4-103" is executed, multiple step-up images are displayed, such as "B", "C", "B", and "C", but they may not be displayed consecutively. In such a case, instead of enclosing the reduced step-up image in a frame, the reduced step-up image may be moved in a predetermined manner. For example, step-up image B may be displayed so as to vibrate vertically when two step-up images are displayed, and step-up image C may be displayed so as to vibrate horizontally when two step-up images are displayed. Figure 316(e) shows an example of such a display when performance pattern "PTN-4-103" is executed up to the fourth stage. Note that the arrows in the figure are a schematic representation of the manner in which the images vibrate and move (the direction in which they move), and do not indicate that the arrow images are actually displayed.

The frame may be displayed in a different manner depending on the number of step-up images that are complete. For example, when three step-up images B are displayed, such as when the performance pattern "PTN-4-087"("B","B","B","C") is executed, the frame may be thickened. FIG. 316(f) shows an example of such a display when the performance pattern "PTN-4-087" is executed up to the fourth stage. When four step-up images B are displayed, the frame may be thickened even further. By adopting such an embodiment, the frame becomes gradually thicker as the number of displayed step-up images B increases, so that it is possible to more effectively appeal to the player that a predetermined combination has occurred.
Although the example of changing the display mode of the frame has been given, the reduced step-up image displayed may be vibrated in a different manner. For example, the amplitude of the vibrating step-up image may be increased or the period may be decreased as the number of displayed step-up images increases. When changing the amplitude or period, it is preferable to change the amplitude or period to a degree that allows the player to recognize the difference.

By implementing this type of embodiment, the player can recognize that the step-up image is displayed in a specific combination. It also makes it easier for the player to notice when a highly anticipated combination occurs.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 313 to 314, etc., while the "history display step-up presentation" is being executed, the player can only watch the presentation displayed in the display area and cannot actively participate in the presentation.
The following describes a modified embodiment in which the player can participate in the "history display step-up effect" by operating a button. Note that the button required is the attack button 3710.

The condition for the "history display step-up presentation" to proceed to the next stage may be that the player operates a button, and if the player does not operate the button, the "history display step-up presentation" may not proceed to the next stage.
For example, a step-up effect display window and an image instructing a button operation may be displayed first, and the "history display step-up effect" may be started on the condition that the button operation is performed. FIG. 317(a) shows a state in which the step-up effect display window and an image instructing a button operation are displayed. Specifically, it shows a state in which an image of an imitation of the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center with the character "press" indicating the operation mode. Note that "?" is displayed in each history display area.
On the other hand, if no operation is performed on the button for a specified period of time, the step-up image is not displayed, the display of the step-up performance display window and images instructing button operation is terminated, and the display mode shown in Figure 314 (c) is displayed.
It should be noted that the configuration of the buttons operated by the player (such as the type of button and the display mode) may be appropriately adapted from the configurations in other embodiments.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 313(b) etc., the step-up image of each stage was displayed for two seconds, but a predetermined time (e.g., two seconds) may be added to the period during which button operation is valid, so that the display time of the step-up image of a certain stage is four seconds in total. For example, if a button operation is performed one second into the valid operation period, the step-up image may be displayed for the remaining three seconds.

Also, the display of the first step-up image is performed automatically, but if a button is operated at that timing, the display of the second and subsequent step-up images may be performed automatically. Fig. 317(b) shows a state in which a step-up image B is displayed as the first step-up image, and then an image instructing a button operation is displayed.
On the other hand, if no operation is performed on the button for a specified period of time, the step-up image from the second stage onwards is not displayed, and the display of the step-up performance display window and images instructing button operation is terminated, and the display mode shown in Figure 314 (c) is displayed.
According to such an embodiment, after recognizing the initially displayed step-up image, the player can select whether or not to display the next step-up image, and the player can decide for himself or herself whether or not to proceed with the presentation, which will result in a presentation that suits the player's preferences.

Also, the display of step-up images up to the second stage is performed automatically, but when the second stage step-up image is displayed, an image instructing a button operation is displayed, and if an operation is performed at this time, step-up images from the third stage onwards may be displayed. Fig. 317(c) shows a display mode in which the image instructing a button operation is displayed at this time.
Similarly, the display of step-up images up to the third step is performed automatically, but when the third step-up image is displayed, an image instructing a button operation is displayed, and if an operation is performed at this time, a fourth step-up image is displayed. Fig. 317(d) shows a display mode in which the image instructing a button operation is displayed at this time.
In addition, if no operation is performed on the button for a specified period of time, the step-up image will not be displayed, and the display of the step-up performance display window and images instructing button operation will be terminated, and the display mode shown in Figure 314 (c) will be displayed.
According to such an embodiment, as the stage progresses and multiple step-up images are displayed, the player can operate the game to display the next step-up image at his/her own initiative, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The button operation may be required at all of the above-mentioned timings, or the button operation may be required at a plurality of timings among the above-mentioned timings, and may not be required at some of the timings.
According to such an embodiment, the number of times the button is operated increases, which can satisfy players who are highly motivated to play.

If an operation is requested but not performed, a step-up image may be displayed in the same manner as if an operation had been performed. By displaying a step-up image even if no operation has been performed, the player can be made to visually recognize the effects even if the player happens to lose interest in operating the game or is unable to operate the buttons because he or she is operating a smartphone, for example.
On the other hand, if no operation is performed, the step-up image for that stage is not displayed, the display in the history display area remains showing "?", and the next step-up image (or a display instructing a button operation) may be displayed. Instead of displaying the "?", the words "No operation!" may be displayed in the history display area. By not displaying the step-up image when no operation is performed in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in button operation.

The button operation mode may not be limited to a simple single press, and may require the player to perform other operation modes.
For example, the next step-up image may be displayed on the condition that the button is pressed repeatedly (e.g., 10 or more times within 2 seconds), or on the condition that the button is held down for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) or more.
In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 317(a) to 317(d), the word "press" indicating the operation mode is added to the center of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, but the words "repeated hit" or "long press" may be displayed instead of "press" to indicate the operation mode to the player. Figures 317(e) and 317(f) show the display states where "repeated hit" and "long press" are displayed, respectively.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 317(a) and the like, it is shown that the operation of the attack button 3710 is required, but it is also possible to request the operation of other operating means, not limited to the attack button 3710. As other operating means, the mission button 3700, the defense button 3740, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the like can be adopted.

As an example of an operating means that requires operation, an embodiment has been shown in which only one type of operating means (attack button 3710) is required to be operated, but it is also possible for one of a plurality of operating means to be selected with a predetermined probability, and for that operating means to be required.
For example, in one "history display step-up presentation," operation of the attack button 3710 may be required at each stage, and in another "history display step-up presentation," operation of the mission button 3700 may be required at each stage.
Alternatively, in a certain "history display step-up effect," operation of the attack button 3710 may be required at one stage, and operation of the mission button 3700 may be required at another stage.
In this way, instead of being required to operate a fixed button every time, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming boring by making it possible to request the operation of a different button in some cases.

An example has been given in which if the player does not operate a button, the subsequent step-up image is not displayed, but if a predetermined time (the effective time of each button operation assigned as a step-up effect) has elapsed without the player operating a button, a step-up image may be displayed in accordance with a predetermined effect pattern.
According to such an embodiment, a player who wishes to operate a button can do so, and a player who does not wish to operate a button can do so without having to operate it, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

If a lottery is used to determine whether or not to display a step-up image when a button operation is performed, it may be possible to ensure that the step-up image is not displayed if no operation is performed by the player.

It is also possible to allow the player to select which of these presentation modes to select. For example, during a demo display, it may be possible to customize whether or not a button operation is required in the "history display step-up presentation", and if so, in what form the button operation is required.
The customization content may be such that only one of these modes selected by the player is executed in the "history display step-up presentation", or multiple modes selected by the player from these modes may be executed in the "history display step-up presentation", each with a predetermined probability.

In the embodiment shown, the "history display step-up effect" is started or the next step-up image is displayed in response to a button operation, but the embodiment may be modified so that the "history display step-up effect" is started or the next step-up image is displayed on the condition that the game ball enters or passes through a specific winning hole (general winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002, gate section 2003, second starting hole 2004, etc.) provided in the game area instead of by a button operation.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the step-up image is displayed under the conditions of the passage of a predetermined time (2 seconds), button operation, and the entry or passage of a game ball into a predetermined winning slot, but a "history display step-up performance" may be executed that combines these conditions. For example, a "history display step-up performance" may be executed by applying a predetermined condition out of these conditions to each of the display of the first step-up image, the display of the second step-up image, the display of the third step-up image, and the display of the fourth step-up image.

For example, the display of the first step-up image may be switched to the display of the second step-up image upon button operation, the display of the second step-up image may be switched to the display of the third step-up image upon the game ball entering or passing through a specified winning slot, and the display of the third step-up image may be switched to the display of the fourth step-up image upon the passage of a specified time.

Alternatively, the display of the first step-up image may be switched to the display of the second step-up image on the condition that the game ball enters or passes through a specified winning slot, the display of the second step-up image may be switched to the display of the third step-up image on the condition that a specified time has passed, and the display of the third step-up image may be switched to the display of the fourth step-up image on the condition that a specified time has passed.

Two examples have been given, but the present invention is not limited to these examples. Any of the above-mentioned conditions may be adopted as the condition for displaying the step-up image at each stage, and a "history display step-up effect" may be executed that combines the conditions adopted appropriately at each stage. Note that, as described above, the player may be allowed to customize the conditions at each stage.

According to such an embodiment, there may be cases where a button operation is not required, cases where a button operation is required, and cases where a state where the game ball is constantly being released is required. By providing cases where a button operation is not required and cases where a button operation is required, it is possible to add variety to the pace of the game. Furthermore, by requiring a state where the game ball is being released, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the game machine and improve sales at the game arcade.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the next step-up image is displayed after a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed, the predetermined time may be different depending on the display stage of the step-up image.
For example, the first-stage step-up image may be displayed for one second, followed by a second-stage step-up image, the second-stage step-up image may be displayed for two seconds, followed by a third-stage step-up image, the third-stage step-up image may be displayed for three seconds, followed by a fourth-stage step-up image, and finally the fourth-stage step-up image may be displayed for four seconds, after which the "history display step-up performance" may end.
Also, the "history display step-up performance" may be ended by displaying a first-stage step-up image for two seconds, followed by a second-stage step-up image, a second-stage step-up image for two seconds, followed by a third-stage step-up image, a third-stage step-up image for three seconds, followed by a fourth-stage step-up image, and finally a fourth-stage step-up image for three seconds.
In this way, by lengthening the display time of each step-up image toward the latter half of the "history display step-up presentation" and lengthening the time until the next step-up image is displayed, it is possible to ensure that the player has sufficient time to wait for whether or not a predetermined combination will be displayed.

Also, the "history display step-up performance" may end by displaying a first-stage step-up image for four seconds, followed by a second-stage step-up image, a second-stage step-up image for three seconds, followed by a third-stage step-up image, a third-stage step-up image for two seconds, followed by a fourth-stage step-up image, and finally a fourth-stage step-up image for one second.
Also, the "history display step-up performance" may be ended by displaying a first-stage step-up image for three seconds, followed by a second-stage step-up image, a second-stage step-up image for three seconds, followed by a third-stage step-up image, a third-stage step-up image for two seconds, followed by a fourth-stage step-up image, and finally a fourth-stage step-up image for two seconds.
In this way, the display time of each step-up image is shortened toward the latter half of the "history display step-up performance", and the time until the next step-up image is displayed is shortened, so that a predetermined combination is displayed as if it has been suddenly decided, which gives the player great interest.

In Fig. 314(d), an example is shown in which one star-shaped mark is attached to the step-up image A, but a step-up image A on which a plurality of star-shaped marks are displayed may be displayed. Also, a predetermined event may be suggested or notified depending on the number of star-shaped marks displayed.
FIG. 318(a) shows a state in which step-up image A with one star mark is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(b) shows a state in which step-up image A with two star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(c) shows a state in which step-up image A with three star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(d) shows a state in which step-up image A with four star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.

The more star-shaped marks there are, the higher the chance of winning. By doing this, even if the step-up image combination is such that there is no hope of a jackpot, or if the step-up image is only displayed up to the first or second stage where there is no hope of a jackpot, the number of star-shaped marks can be used to maintain the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, after the step-up image starts to be displayed, the star-shaped marks may be displayed after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed. By using such a display mode, even if the expectation level indicated by the display of the step-up image is low, the expectation of a big win can be maintained depending on the number of star-shaped marks displayed.

The predetermined lottery process for determining the number of star-shaped marks to be displayed may be performed independently of the predetermined lottery process for determining the effect pattern to be executed ("PTN-1-001" to "PTN-4-0256").
For example, in the case of a jackpot, a lottery may be held in which one star is displayed with a probability of 10%, two stars with a probability of 20%, three stars with a probability of 30%, and four stars with a probability of 40%, and in the case of a loss, a lottery may be held in which one star is displayed with a probability of 40%, two stars with a probability of 30%, three stars with a probability of 20%, and four stars with a probability of 10%.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the number of performance patterns from becoming enormous.

Although step-up image A has been shown as an example, the same aspect may be adopted for step-up image B or step-up image C.
For example, step-up image B may be displayed with any number of the kanji characters " 護 " added thereto. Fig. 318(e) shows a state in which step-up image B with four kanji characters " 護 " added thereto is displayed as the first step-up image.
Also, a step-up image C with any number of the kanji characters "操作" added thereto may be displayed. Fig. 318(f) shows a state in which a step-up image C with four kanji characters "操作" added thereto is displayed as a step-up image of the first stage.
In these cases, it is advisable to set the expectation level higher as the number of "ho" or "management" characters increases.

The total number of marks or kanji characters displayed may indicate the expectation of the effect to be executed.
For example, when presentation pattern PTN-2-001 is executed and "A" and "A" are displayed, the total number of star-shaped marks displayed will be between 2 and 8, but the more marks displayed, the higher the expectation.
In addition, the degree of expectation when two step-up images A are displayed and eight star-shaped marks are displayed may be set lower than the degree of expectation when three step-up images A are displayed and three star-shaped marks are displayed.

Similarly, when "B" "B" or "C" "C" is displayed, the total number of "Ho" and "Mission" displayed will be between 2 and 8, but in this case too, the same format as for "A" "A" may be adopted. For example, the higher the total number of "Ho" and "Mission" displayed, the higher the expectation level may be.

Although the step-up images A to D include the alphabets "A" to "D" as an example, other types of images may be used as long as they can be distinguished. For example, instead of these four alphabets, four character images of a female singer character in different costumes and poses may be displayed.
In the embodiment shown, the degree of expectation is indicated by the total number of star-shaped marks or letters displayed. However, the same effect can be obtained by indicating the degree of expectation by adding letters such as "GOOD" or "EXCELLENT!" instead.

In addition, in each step-up image, a combination of predetermined straight lines is used as the background portion, but a form other than straight lines may be used. For example, any one of a daytime landscape image showing a daytime landscape, an evening landscape image showing an evening landscape, and a nighttime landscape image showing a nighttime landscape may be displayed. Also, the expectation level may be higher when an evening landscape image is displayed than when a daytime landscape image is displayed. Furthermore, the expectation level may be higher when a nighttime landscape image is displayed than when an evening landscape image is displayed.
These display modes may be combined.

Referring to Figures 307 to 314, an embodiment has been shown in which the displayed step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area, but another embodiment that is a variation of this embodiment will be described below.

In this embodiment, a reduced version of the step-up image is displayed in advance in the history display area. The system is configured to notify the player of the degree of expectation based on whether the step-up image displayed at each stage matches the reduced version of the step-up image displayed in the history display area.

This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 319 and 320. Note that each of the figures shown in Figures 319 and 320 is a diagram showing the display mode within the step-up performance display window. In addition, the performance mode will be described using an example in which performance pattern "PTN-4-030" ("A", "B", "D", "B") is executed.

First, when the step-up performance display window starts to be displayed, a reduced image of the step-up image is displayed in the history display area. A reduced image of step-up image A is displayed in the first history display area, a reduced image of step-up image C is displayed in the second history display area, a reduced image of step-up image D is displayed in the third history display area, and a reduced image of step-up image B is displayed in the fourth history display area. The background of each history display area is displayed in gray. Figure 319(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, step-up image A is displayed as the first step-up image. Figure 319(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the first history display area is displayed in white, and the word "EXCELLENT!" is displayed near the center of the step-up performance display window. Figure 319(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the display of the characters "EXCELLENT!" has finished (FIG. 319(d)), step-up image B is displayed as the second step-up image. FIG. 319(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, an image in the shape of the letter "X" is displayed in the entire second history display area, and the word "Not so good..." is displayed near the center of the step-up performance display window. Figure 319(f) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the display of the characters "Not so good..." has finished (FIG. 320(a)), step-up image D is displayed as the third step-up image. FIG. 320(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the third history display area is displayed in white, and the word "EXCELLENT!" is displayed near the center of the step-up performance display window. Figure 320(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the display of the characters "EXCELLENT!" has finished (Fig. 320(d)), step-up image B is displayed as the fourth step-up image. Fig. 320(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the fourth history display area is displayed in white, and the word "EXCELLENT!" is displayed near the center of the step-up performance display window. Figure 320(f) shows the display state at this time.

In this way, when a step-up image that is the same as a step-up image that was previously displayed in the history display area is displayed (first stage, third stage, fourth stage), the background is white.
On the other hand, when a step-up image different from the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area is displayed (second stage), the background remains gray, and an image in the shape of the letter "X" is displayed in front of the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area.
The more times (three times in this example) the same step-up image as the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area is displayed, the higher the expectation level is set. The player can recognize the expectation level from the number of areas displayed with a white background in the history display area.

When the matching step-up image satisfies various conditions shown with reference to Figures 307 to 314, etc., an effect corresponding to each condition may be executed. For example, when the matching step-up image contains two "C's," an operation effect may be executed. Similarly, for "A" and "B," the expectation level may be shown in a manner corresponding to the number of matches, and the corresponding pending change effect may be executed.

In the above example, the background color is different depending on whether the step-up images match or not. However, if there is a match, the color of the frame of the step-up image displayed in a reduced size in the history display area may be changed from black to red, and if there is no match, it may remain black.

In the example of the performance shown with reference to Figures 319 and 320, the step-up image of the second stage does not match, but if all stages from the first to the fourth stage match, a special display may be performed. For example, the history display area may be surrounded by a frame, or the word "PERFECT!" may be displayed near the center of the step-up performance display window. Figure 321(a) shows the display mode when such a display is performed.
The number of matches may also be displayed. Figure 321(b) shows a display state when the text "3 matches!" is displayed.
Also, whether or not there is a match may be displayed by "o" or "x" in correspondence with each history display area. Fig. 321(c) shows a display mode when such a display is performed.
Note that these displays are examples of displays performed within the step-up performance display window, but displays such as "PERFECT!" and "Match three!" may also be performed outside the step-up performance display window, or in a manner that spans both inside and outside the step-up performance display window.

As shown with reference to Figures 319(c), 319(f), 320(c), and 320(f), when displaying the characters indicating whether or not there is a match ("EXCELLENT!" or "Not so good..."), the history display area continues to be displayed as is, but during the period when these characters are displayed, the display of the history display area may be erased, or if they are displayed, they may be displayed in a smaller size.
With this configuration, the player can more clearly recognize whether or not there is a match.

In the embodiment shown in Fig. 319 and Fig. 320, no operation by the player is required, but a mode in which step-up images are displayed in response to button operations by the player may be adopted. Note that the above-mentioned modes may be appropriately adopted for the implementation and display modes of various effects related to button operations by the player.
It is preferable to display the next operation instruction at the timing when the display of whether or not there is a match is erased. For example, it is preferable to display the operation instruction in the display states shown in Figs. 319(a), 319(d), 320(a), and 320(d).
Also, "?" may be displayed as the history display when no operation has been performed. Fig. 321(d) shows an example of a display when no operation has been performed in the third stage display.

Referring to Figures 319 and 320, an embodiment has been shown in which "Not quite..." is displayed when there is no match, and "EXCELLENT!" is displayed when there is a match, but other display modes may be adopted.
For example, if there is no match, one of "Not so good...", "EXCELLENT!" or "WONDERFUL" may be displayed, and if there is a match, one of "EXCELLENT!" or "WONDERFUL" may be displayed.
Specifically, if there is no match, "Not so good..." may be displayed with a 95% probability, "EXCELLENT!" with a 3% probability, and "WONDERFUL" with a 2% probability, whereas if there is a match, "EXCELLENT!" may be displayed with a 70% probability, and "WONDERFUL" with a 30% probability.
Also, in the case of a miss, there may be an 80% probability of no match and a 20% probability of a match, and in the case of a win, there may be a 10% probability of no match and a 90% probability of a match.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which text is displayed to indicate whether or not the step-up image matches ("EXCELLENT!", "Not so good..."), the time for which the text is displayed may be different depending on whether or not there is a match.
For example, by displaying the text that matches ("EXCELLENT!") for a longer period of time, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction.
On the other hand, by displaying the text ("Not quite...") for a longer period of time when the match does not occur, the player can be stimulated and motivated to operate the button again the next time.

Alternatively, the time for which the text is displayed may be different depending on whether a specific button operation is performed or not. For example, the display time may be longer when a button operation is performed, allowing the player to view the text that was displayed as a result of their own action for a longer period of time, thereby providing compensation for performing the operation.

As mentioned above, text may be displayed to indicate whether or not there is a match ("EXCELLENT!", "Not quite...") both when a specified button operation is performed and when a specified button operation is not performed. However, when a specified button operation is performed, the time for which the text is displayed may be longer than the display time (valid button operation period) of a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the text display has ended.
On the other hand, when a specified button operation is not performed, the time for which the text is displayed should be shorter than the display time (valid button operation period) of a new operation instruction image that instructs the user to operate the button after the text display ends.

When a predetermined button operation is performed, the time for which the text is displayed may be shorter than the time for which a new operation instruction image instructing the user to operate the button that is to be performed after the text display has ended.
On the other hand, if a specified button operation is not performed, the time for which the text is displayed may be set to be longer than the time for which a new operation instruction image that instructs the user to operate the button after the text display ends.

As mentioned above, the display in the history display area may be erased when the text indicating whether or not there is a match (such as "EXCELLENT!" or "Not so good...") is displayed, but the time from when the display in the history display area is resumed until it is erased again may be shortened, provided that certain conditions are met.

For example, when the display of the history display area is resumed, whether or not to shorten the time may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, the time may be shortened when a button is operated. Alternatively, the time may be shortened when a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined winning hole within a predetermined time.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 314 to 320, etc., the "history display step-up performance" was executed immediately after the decorative pattern changing display began and reached a state of rapid changing, but the "history display step-up performance" may also be executed at other times.
For example, the "history display step-up effect" may be executed while the "end of the year singing contest reach effect" or the "countdown reach effect" is being executed.

In addition, rather than completing the execution of the "history display step-up performance" during one display of a changing decorative pattern, the "history display step-up performance" may be executed across multiple displays of changing decorative patterns.
For example, the "history display step-up effect" may be executed as a look-ahead effect. Specifically, when there are four reserved items, a step-up image may be displayed one step at a time in each of the four variable displays, and in the variable display corresponding to the fourth reserved item, a fourth step-up image may be displayed to indicate the expectation level corresponding to the fourth reserved item.

In addition, if there are less than four reserved items, step-up images are displayed one step at a time until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved item that is the subject of the pre-reading is changed, and step-up images are displayed multiple times in the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved item that is the subject of the pre-reading.
For example, when there are three pending items, in the first changing display corresponding to the first pending item, a first step-up image is displayed, in the second changing display corresponding to the second pending item, a second step-up image is displayed, and in the third changing display corresponding to the third pending item, third and fourth step-up images are displayed to indicate the degree of expectation corresponding to the third pending item.

Another embodiment for performing display in the history display area will be described.
First, the premise of this embodiment will be described.
When a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, a special lottery is held and a variably displayed decorative pattern is displayed. The probability that the special lottery will result in a big win is 1/300.
If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the jackpot winning hole 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times. After the jackpot game ends, the game enters a time-saving state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 2004. Up to this point, the game progresses in the same manner as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 142 and FIG. 143.
In this embodiment, the jackpot based on winning at the first starting port 2002 and the jackpot based on winning at the second starting port 2004 are only 10R low-probability time-saving jackpots.
The number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot based on a win in the first starting hole 2002 is 1. On the other hand, the number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot based on a win in the second starting hole 2004 is 10.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004, a small win occurs with a high probability (1/7) as a special lottery result, and when a small win occurs, a decorative pattern corresponding to the small win is displayed and the second large winning opening (not shown) is opened. The second large winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area. A specific area is provided in the second large winning opening, and when a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening passes through the specific area, a big win game is started in which the large winning opening 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times. In addition, since the position of the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening or the position of the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening is configured to always (or with a high probability) pass through the specific area, it is practically determined that the next big win game will start at the time when a small win occurs, except in exceptional circumstances such as the player not firing the game ball. The probability that the special lottery for the second starting hole 2004 will result in a big win is the same (1/300) as the special lottery held when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002, but as mentioned above, small wins occur with a high probability (1/7), so most big wins for the second starting hole 2004 occur via small wins. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, the probability of a small win occurring is 0%.

The number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot game generated based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002 is 1, while the number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot game generated based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004 is 10. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 2002 and the maximum number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 2004 are both 4.
Therefore, after a jackpot game that occurs based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting port 2002, the player can participate in up to five special lotteries for the second starting port 2004, and if the player gets a small win (which occurs with a 1/7 probability) during a total of five special lotteries, including the upper limit on the number of reserved balls for the second starting port 2004, it is virtually certain that the next jackpot state will occur.
On the other hand, after a jackpot game that occurs based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting port 2002, the player can participate in up to 14 lotteries, and if the player gets a small jackpot (which occurs with a 1/7 probability) during a total of 14 special lotteries, including the upper limit on the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 2004, it is virtually certain that the next jackpot state will occur.

According to such game specifications, the player first hits the ball from the left side to make the ball enter the first starting hole 2002, aiming to generate a jackpot result as a result of a special lottery.
Next, when a big win game is started, the player hits the right side, and continues hitting the right side even after the big win ends, causing five game balls to enter the second starting hole 2004, which has been driven and opened by the movable piece 2004a, thereby obtaining the results of up to five special lotteries. The time for which the movable piece 2004a is kept open is set to a time (e.g., one minute) sufficient for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second starting hole 2004 to reach the maximum.

A small win occurs with a probability of 1/7 in response to a ball entering the second starting hole 2004. The player expects the occurrence of a small win (which is essentially the occurrence of a big win as described above) during the five variable displays.
If no small win occurs during the five fluctuation displays, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 2004 (even if there is remaining time on the movable piece 2004a which is set to be open for one minute, it will be closed when it is controlled to the normal state), and therefore it is not possible to display more than five fluctuation displays, so the player will hit the left hand again in an attempt to generate a big win.

On the other hand, if a small win occurs during the five varying displays, the second large prize opening will be opened, and a large prize state will occur in which the large prize opening 2005 opens and closes, provided that the game ball passes through a specific area within the second large prize opening.
When this big win state ends, 10 time reductions are given, so that the movable piece 2004a is driven to drive the second starting hole 2004 into an open state, and the player can obtain the results of up to 14 special lotteries. In this case, if the player continues hitting the right hand without interrupting the launch of the game ball, the player can obtain the results of up to 14 special lotteries, and if a small win occurs, which occurs with a probability of 1/7 during the 14 variable displays, the second big winning hole opens and closes again, and a big win state occurs on the condition that the player passes through a specific area. In this way, if a small win occurs during the 14 variable displays, the game will essentially transition to a big win game state, so this game state will repeatedly loop, and from the player's perspective, a consecutive win state will occur. Even if a small win occurs during the time reduction, 10 time reductions will not be given again unless the player passes through a specific area.

In this way, the player will play the game while being aware of which of the three states with different degrees of advantage he is in: a left-hitting state, a first right-hitting state (a state in which one time-saving count has been granted), or a second right-hitting state (a state in which ten time-saving counts have been granted).

In this embodiment, when the player is hitting from the left, the aforementioned "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" and "The Countdown Reach Performance" are performed in common, and the story is about a female singer character who is the protagonist and is displayed in the Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance, etc., aiming to perform a live concert around the world.

In this embodiment, in order to allow the player to recognize how far he has progressed among the three states of the left-hand hit state, the first right-hand hit state (where one time-saving count has been granted), and the second right-hand hit state (where ten time-saving counts have been granted), for example, "Aim for a local live performance," "Aim for a national live performance," and "Aim for a global live performance" are displayed from the left at the top of the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 (not shown). Note that this display is always displayed, but may be hidden in special states (for example, during the opening and ending of a jackpot, and during a special error).

When in the left-hand hitting state, all of "Aim for a Local Live", "Aim for a National Live", and "Aim for a World Live" are displayed normally, when in the first right-hand hitting state (when one time of time saving has been granted), a special display is displayed to indicate that only "Aim for a Local Live" has been completed, and when in the second right-hand hitting state (when ten times of time saving have been granted), a special display is displayed to indicate that out of "Aim for a Local Live", "Aim for a National Live", and "Aim for a World Live", only "Aim for a Local Live" and "Aim for a National Live" have been completed, and when in the second right-hand hitting state (when ten times of time saving have been granted), when a small hit that actually results in a big hit is won and a specific area is passed (or when a big hit is won), a special display is displayed to indicate that all lives have been completed. In addition, when a small jackpot that actually generates a big jackpot is won in the second right-hit state (a state in which 10 time-saving times have been granted) and a specific area is passed, a special display is displayed to indicate that all lives have been completed. This is because it is possible that a small jackpot was won in the first right-hit state but not in the second right-hit state (a so-called single pass), and therefore the ultimate goal of completing the "Aim for the World Live" is achieved when a single pass is avoided. This is because displaying that all lives have been completed when there is a possibility of a single pass that would cause the player to feel uncomfortable could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

A special display that indicates that "Aim for a Local Live" has been completed could, for example, slightly dim the "Aim for a Local Live" display, display an effect around the "Aim for a Local Live" display, or overlay a message such as "CLEAR!" on "Aim for a Local Live".

In addition, in the first right-hand hit state and the second right-hand hit state in this embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped manner indicating that a big hit or a small hit has occurred only if the decorative pattern has the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped manner indicating that a big hit has occurred in the left-hand hit state.

Specifically, for example, when there are eight types of decorative symbols from "1 to 8" in the left-hand hitting state, if a big hit occurs with "333" in the left-hand hitting state, the decorative symbol "333" is always displayed when a big hit or small hit occurs in the first right-hand hitting state or the second right-hand hitting state. The decorative symbols displayed in the first right-hand hitting state and the second right-hand hitting state are eight types from "1 to 8" as in the left-hand hitting state, but the designs are different depending on the left-hand hitting state, the first right-hand hitting state, and the second right-hand hitting state. For example, if the decorative symbol in the left-hand hitting state is a basic design (e.g., a number symbol with a character), in the first right-hand hitting state, a design with a halo is pointed at the number symbol with a character, and in the second right-hand hitting state, a halo is pointed at the number symbol with a character, and the number is drawn in gold. In this way, the more advantageous the state, the more luxurious the design, which increases the player's sense of excitement.

In this way, most gaming machines in which an advantageous state ends when a predetermined number of variable displays are completed are primarily intended to entertain the player as to whether or not a reach state will occur, but the gaming machine of this embodiment indicates a miss when the left decorative pattern does not stop on a specific pattern (for example, if a jackpot is hit with "333" while playing from the left, the specific pattern will be "3"), which increases interest in the stopping of the left decorative pattern, and even if the left decorative pattern does not stop on a specific pattern, when the right decorative pattern stops, for example, the left decorative pattern can be made to stop on a specific pattern by changing the left decorative pattern again from a provisionally stopped state, providing more opportunities to increase interest.

In addition, there have been conventional techniques that increase the expectation of a win when the left decorative pattern stops, for example when the number "7" approaches, in order to increase interest in the stopping of the left decorative pattern. However, since the number "7" approaches is generally rare, it has not been possible to increase interest in the stopping of the left decorative pattern. However, in this embodiment, since only specific patterns can be hit, it is possible to make the specific pattern stop on the left decorative pattern with a probability higher than that of a small win, and it is possible to create a reach state with specific patterns on the left and right decorative patterns with a probability higher than that of a small win.

The special display indicating that the game has been completed may be displayed as a decorative pattern that has been won in a left-handed play state. By doing this, for example, if a big win occurs with "333" in a left-handed play state, "333" is displayed superimposed on the display position of "Aim for Local Live", and when the game transitions from the first right-handed play state to the second right-handed play state (i.e., a small win is won in the first right-handed play state and "333" is displayed), and the game is controlled to the second right-handed play state, "333" is displayed superimposed on the display position of "Aim for Local Live", and "333" is also displayed superimposed on the display position of "Aim for National Live", and when a small win is won in the second right-handed play state that has been transitioned to for the first time and the game passes through the specific area (i.e., a small win is won in the second right-handed play state and "333" is displayed), "333" is displayed superimposed on the display positions of "Aim for Local Live" and "Aim for National Live", and "333" is also displayed superimposed on the display position of "Aim for World Live", resulting in an impactful display.

The "Aim for a Local Live", "Aim for a National Live", and "Aim for a World Live" displayed in order from the top left of the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 are not intended to encourage the player to expect a win, but merely to indicate the player's status. Therefore, it is recommended that they be displayed in, for example, less than half the size of the display area of the game board performance display device 1600. This is because it is easier for players to recognize the main performance that takes place in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 if it is based on the lottery results.

In this case, "Aim for a local live", "Aim for a national live", and "Aim for a world live", which are displayed in order from the left at the top of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, are displayed smaller than the preview and reach effects based on the results of the special lottery, so the player can recognize the special display indicating completion by slightly darkening the display, displaying effects around the "Aim for a local live" display, or displaying a message such as "CLEAR!", but if three decorative patterns (for example, "333") are displayed as special displays, the player may have difficulty recognizing which pattern is being displayed, so it is better to display one decorative pattern instead of three, for example. By displaying one decorative pattern, when all the lives are completed, "3", "3", and "3" are displayed at the top of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, giving the player the illusion that he or she has won even though he or she has not won.

Also, a specific live (e.g., "Aim for a local live" and "Aim for a national live") may be displayed as completed with three decorative symbols, and a live other than the specific live (e.g., "Aim for a world live") may be displayed as completed with one decorative symbol. In this case, the biggest challenge in the specifications of this embodiment is to win a big or small win in the first right-hit state, so only the completion display of "Aim for a national live" (a display indicating that a big or small win has been won in the first right-hit state) may be displayed with three decorative symbols, and the remaining "Aim for a local live" and "Aim for a world live" may be displayed with one decorative symbol, or only the completion display of "Aim for a national live" (a display indicating that a big or small win has been won in the first right-hit state) may be displayed with one decorative symbol, and the remaining "Aim for a local live" and "Aim for a world live" may be displayed with three decorative symbols.

Also, when "CLEAR" is displayed, it may be displayed in different ways, such as red letters for "Aim for Local Live", gold letters for "Aim for National Live", and rainbow letters for "Aim for World Live". As mentioned above, the biggest challenge in the specifications of this embodiment is to win a big or small win in the first right-hit state, so rainbow letters may be displayed when "Aim for National Live" is completed (when a big or small win is won in the first right-hit state).
Strictly speaking, there is no single color that can be called rainbow, but in this specification, the term rainbow refers to a display pattern that is perceived by the player as a rainbow by illuminating the pixels that make up the display means in a striped pattern in the following order within a specified area (in this embodiment, the part containing the characters): blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, etc.

When the decorative pattern is displayed at the top of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, since the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 itself is small, the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display displayed approximately in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be displayed in a reduced size, or data for a small-sized decorative pattern may be prepared in advance and this data may be displayed. In addition, for "CLEAR", the "CLEAR" displayed in the reach performance, etc. may be displayed in a reduced size, or data for a small-sized "CLEAR" may be prepared in advance and this data may be displayed.

In the above explanation, "Aim for Local Live", "Aim for National Live" and "Aim for World Live" are all displayed at the top of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but it is also possible to display only "Aim for Local Live" when playing left-handed, only "Aim for National Live" in the first right-handed state and only "Aim for World Live" in the second right-handed state, to show which state the game is in.

In addition, while it has been explained that "Aim for a Local Live", "Aim for a National Live", and "Aim for a World Live" are always displayed except in special situations (for example, during the opening and ending of a jackpot, and during special errors), they may be erased after a specified period of time has passed.

Specifically, when all of "Aim for a Local Live", "Aim for a National Live", and "Aim for a World Live" are displayed, when the state transitions to the first right-hit state (a state in which one time-saving count has been granted), "Aim for a Local Live" is displayed as completed and "Aim for a National Live" and "Aim for a World Live" are displayed as incomplete, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, a time close to the average fluctuation time of one time, such as about 10 seconds, a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, a time longer than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state but shorter than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, or a time longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state), they are hidden (including being displayed but not recognizable).

Similarly, in the case where all of "Aim for a Local Live", "Aim for a National Live", and "Aim for a World Live" are displayed, when the second right-hit state (a state in which 10 time-saving plays have been granted) is entered, "Aim for a Local Live" and "Aim for a National Live" are displayed as completed and "Aim for a World Live" is displayed as incomplete, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, a time close to the average fluctuation time of one time of about 10 seconds, a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, a time longer than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state but shorter than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, or a time longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state), they are hidden (including being displayed but not recognizable).

Similarly, when all of "Aim for Local Live", "Aim for National Live", and "Aim for World Live" are to be displayed, when the player transitions to the second right-hit state (a state in which 10 time-saving times have been granted) and wins a small jackpot in that state and passes through a specific area (or when the player wins a big jackpot), a display will be displayed indicating that "Aim for Local Live", "Aim for National Live", and "Aim for World Live" are complete, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, a time close to the average fluctuation time of one time, about 10 seconds, a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, a time longer than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state but shorter than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, or a time longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, etc.), the display will be made non-displayed (including being displayed but not recognizable).

The time for which the display when only "Aim for a local live" is hidden (first hour), the time for which the display when only "Aim for a local live" and "Aim for a national live" are hidden (second hour), and the time for which the display when "Aim for a local live", "Aim for a national live", and "Aim for a global live" are hidden (third hour) can be set to appropriate times according to each purpose, but the first to third hours can all be the same time, or the first and second hours can all be the same but the third hour can be longer or shorter than the first and second hours, or the first to third hours can all be different times but the second hour can be longer than the first hour and the third hour can be longer than the second hour, etc. Each combination pattern of the first to third hours has its own purpose and effect, so it is desirable to set them according to the purpose.

Here, we will describe the effects of typical combination patterns. As a typical example, if the pattern is such that the first through third times are all the same, the display will be hidden for a uniform period of time regardless of the state it is controlled to, which has the effect of allowing you to focus on effects based on the results of the lottery, such as reach effects and advance notice effects.

In addition, if the pattern is such that the second time is longer than the first time, and furthermore the third time is longer than the second time, the display time will become longer as the game moves to a more advantageous state (situation), which can give players a sense of satisfaction and is also expected to have the effect of increasing operation by appealing to players who are not playing.

In addition, since the greatest challenge in the specifications of this embodiment is to hit a big or small jackpot in the first right-hit state as described above, the second time may be the longest, followed by the third time and the first time (the first and third times may be reversed or may be the same). By displaying for a long time that the greatest challenge has been overcome, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, and it is also expected to have the effect of improving operation by appealing to players who are not playing.

Also, since some players feel more joy in avoiding a single pass in the second right-hand hitting state than in overcoming the biggest obstacle in the specifications of this embodiment, the third time may be the longest time, followed by the second time and the first time (the first and second times may be reversed or may be the same). Also, if the third time is the longest time, customers who are not playing will look at the machine with eager eyes wondering "how much will come out of that machine?" and the players who receive this will feel pressured, so the display of the third time may be shortened. The display that all is complete is made when the machine transitions to the second right-hand hitting state (a state in which 10 time-saving times are granted) and a small win is won in this state and the ball passes through a specific area (or a big win is won), so for example, if one game ball passes through the specific area, the time may be shortened, and if two or more game balls pass through the specific area, the time may not be shortened. In this way, it is possible to meet the expectations of both players who feel pressure and players who do not feel pressure. Also, the machine may be configured so that the ball does not pass through the specific area in the case of a big win, and the time may be shortened when the ball passes through the specific area.

In addition, when the second right-hit state (a state in which 10 time-saving times have been granted) is entered, "Aim for a Local Live" and "Aim for a National Live" are displayed as completed, and "Aim for a World Live" is displayed as incomplete. However, it may also be displayed when the first right-hit state (a state in which 1 time-saving time has been granted) is entered and a small win is won in that state and the player passes through a specific area (or when a big win is won). In this case, the second time may or may not be shortened depending on the number of game balls that have passed through the specific area, in order to meet the expectations of both parties mentioned above.

So far, this embodiment has been explained in the form of a story in which the player aims to perform a world live show and show how far the player has advanced. However, instead of this, for example, it is also possible to display which reach effect was won in each state (left-hitting state, first right-hitting state, second right-hitting state). In this case, for example, instead of displaying "Aim for a local live show," it is better to display "the reach effect displayed when you win (not a dynamic image of all the reach effects, but a display that shows that you won with that reach effect)."

In addition, a prediction may be made regarding the reserve corresponding to the second starting port 2004, and a prediction effect may be used to suggest or notify whether a small hit or a big hit will occur.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 etc. will be described below with reference to FIGS. 322 to 324 etc.
In the "hourglass reserve change presentation," which is a special presentation in the embodiment described below, an hourglass image resembling an hourglass is displayed in a predetermined area (position) of the display area of the presentation display means (e.g., the game board side presentation display device 1600) at a position overlapping with the reserved image, which is displayed in a predetermined manner (predetermined color), and by moving sand of a specific color within the hourglass, a presentation is created in which sand of the specific color falls within the hourglass, and the reserved image of the specific color is gradually hidden by the sand, while at the same time the falling sand image gradually displays the reserved image of a specific color different from the predetermined color.
If not all the sand falls and the performance ends midway, no display is made to change the reserved image, and the reserved image of a predetermined color before the hourglass reserved change performance is executed continues to be displayed.
On the other hand, if all the sand falls and the reserved image is hidden by the fallen sand, the reserved image changes to a reserved image of a specific color. For example, when the reserved image is blue, the reserved image of green is gradually displayed as the green sand falls, and finally only the reserved image of green is displayed. In this way, when the "hourglass reserved change performance" is executed to the end, the reserved image with a higher expectation is displayed.

The detailed presentation of the "hourglass reserved change presentation" will be described below with reference to Fig. 322 to Fig. 324. Fig. 322 shows a time chart for the "hourglass reserved change presentation". Fig. 323 and Fig. 324 show the display form in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 on the game board side.
In addition, a predetermined background image can be displayed in the display area as shown in other embodiments, but this is not shown in the present embodiment.

The "hourglass reserve change performance" is executed immediately after the start of the variable display, when each decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Note that the decorative symbols temporarily stopped may be the same as the previous variable display, or another combination of decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped.
FIG. 323(a) shows the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and the variable display is about to start. In this example, the color of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed in blue due to the pre-reading effect.
The presentation pattern 01 shown in FIG. 322(a) is a presentation pattern in which the "hourglass reserved change presentation" is not executed, but is shown for comparison with other presentation patterns in which the "hourglass reserved change presentation" is executed. The variable display starts at timing t0, and is temporarily stopped during the period from timing t0 to timing t1. FIG. 323(b) shows the state in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. Next, the state changes at high speed from timing t1, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped at timing t30, and all the symbols are displayed in a stopped state at timing t31. After being displayed in a stopped state until timing t32, depending on the result of the special lottery indicated by the stopping state of the decorative symbols, if it is a miss, the next variable display starts, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot game starts.

The pending image is erased at the time when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but during the period when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the pending image is gradually reduced or reduced all at once (hidden) by gradually making it semi-transparent or shrinking or by overlaying a specified effect display, and the display of the pending image is terminated at a specified time before the end of the stopped display period of the decorative pattern or at the end of the stopped display period of the decorative pattern.
For example, when the decorative pattern is stopped for one second, the display of the reserved image may be terminated when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern was stopped. When a special reach performance is executed, the display of the reserved image may be terminated at the timing when the special reach performance is started.

The performance pattern 02 shown in FIG. 322(b) is a performance pattern in which only a part of the hourglass image is displayed, but not all of it, and no display of falling sand is performed. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t3, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state with the pattern at the start of the variable display. Also, from timing t2 to timing t3, the hourglass image is gradually displayed from the bottom in a manner that overlaps with the reserved image in the reserved display area, but the display ends without being completely displayed. FIG. 323(c) shows a state in which the lower half of the hourglass image is displayed at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. In performance pattern 02, the display of the hourglass image that was displayed halfway at timing t3 ends and the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern begins. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Also, FIG. 324(b) shows the display state in which the decorative pattern then becomes in a high-speed variable state. Note that from timing t2 to timing t3, the time chart describes the visual appearance of the reserved image as the appearance of an hourglass, but as shown in FIG. 323(c), the reserved image is visible when the hourglass is displayed.

In presentation patterns 03 to 05 shown in Figures 322(c) to 322(e), the entire hourglass image is displayed at timing t3. Figure 323(d) shows the display state at this timing. Immediately after this, a sand image of a specified color (green in this example) is displayed above the hourglass image. Figure 323(e) shows the display state at this timing. After that, the sand image is displayed falling downwards.

The presentation pattern 03 shown in FIG. 322(c) is a presentation pattern in which the "hourglass reserve change presentation" is executed halfway. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t5, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state with the patterns at the start of the changing display. Also, from timing t3 to timing t5, a display of sand falling from top to bottom is performed. FIG. 323(f) shows the display state at timing t5. In presentation pattern 03, the display of the hourglass image ends at this timing, and the decorative patterns that were in a temporarily stopped state are now in a state of rapid change. FIG. 324(a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Also, FIG. 324(b) shows the display state after that in which the decorative patterns enter a state of rapid change.

Presentation pattern 04 shown in Figure 322 (d) is a presentation pattern in which the "hourglass hold change presentation" is executed halfway. In presentation pattern 04, the sand falls for an additional 2 seconds compared to presentation pattern 03, but not all of the sand falls. Figure 323 (g) shows the display state at timing t7. In presentation pattern 04, the display of the hourglass image ends at this timing, and the decorative pattern, which was in a temporarily stopped state, enters a state of rapid change. Figure 324 (a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Also, Figure 324 (b) shows the display state after that, where the decorative pattern enters a state of rapid change.

The presentation pattern 05 shown in Fig. 322(e) is a presentation pattern in which the "hourglass reserved change presentation" is executed to the end. The sand falls for an additional 2 seconds longer than in presentation pattern 04, and all the sand falls. At timing t9, the entire display area occupied by the blue reserved image is covered by the sand. Fig. 323(h) shows the display state at timing t9.
Immediately after that, the display of the hourglass image ends. Fig. 324(c) shows the state where the display of the hourglass image ends. As shown in the figure, the color of the reserved image is displayed in a state where it has changed to the color of the sand in the falling hourglass image (in this case, green). Also, immediately after that, the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern begins. Fig. 324(d) shows the display state where the decorative pattern is in a high-speed fluctuation state.
In this embodiment, the probability that all the sand will fall and the reserved image will be promoted is set to 30%, and the probability that all the sand will not fall and the reserved image will not be promoted is set to 70%, but the probability of promotion may be set appropriately, for example, to about 30% to 70%.
In this presentation pattern, all of the sand images fall over a total of six seconds, but the time required for all of the sand images to fall can be set appropriately and may be, for example, around three to ten seconds.

In presentation pattern 02, the "hourglass reserve change presentation" ends without the sand image obscuring the display area occupied by the reserved image. In presentation pattern 03 and presentation pattern 04, the "hourglass reserve change presentation" ends with only a portion of the display area occupied by the reserved image obscured by the sand image, so the reserved image is not changed and is displayed in its original form. Figure 324(a) shows the display state at the time when the display of the hourglass image ends in presentation pattern 02 to presentation pattern 04. As shown in the figure, the color of the reserved image is displayed in the same color as the color of the reserved image before the "hourglass reserve change presentation" was executed.

In addition, when a failed presentation pattern (a presentation pattern in which the reserved image does not change) is selected, it is preferable to make presentation pattern 04, which is a presentation pattern that ends when 2/3 of the sand has fallen, more likely to be selected than presentation pattern 03, which is a presentation pattern that ends when 1/3 of the sand has fallen. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation until the latter half of the presentation.
Conversely, it may be possible to make it more difficult to select presentation pattern 04, which is a presentation pattern that ends when 2/3 of the sand has fallen, than presentation pattern 03, which is a presentation pattern that ends when 1/3 of the sand has fallen. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel great expectations when the presentation progresses to the latter half. Also, some players are averse to presentations that drag on, so it is possible to make the presentation less likely to make such players feel averse.
In addition, although multiple failure timings are provided (in this example, three timings are provided at timings t3, t5, and t7), failure timings may be limited to only one of these. For example, performance pattern 02 and performance pattern 03 may be made unfeasible, and whether the display mode of the reserved image changes or not may be determined depending on whether the sand finishes falling at timing t7. By adopting such a mode, it is only necessary to pay attention to a certain timing during the performance, and therefore it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which excessive concentration on the performance is required.

As shown in performance pattern 05, the color of the sand in the hourglass image indicates the color that the reserved image will change to when the sand falls to the end of the ``hourglass reserved change performance.''
The presentation patterns shown in presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 05 are whether or not the blue reserved image changes to a green reserved image, but other colors may be used as the color of the reserved image before the change and the color of the sand image (i.e., the color of the reserved image after the change).
For example, the colors of the pending image at the start of the performance can be white, blue, green, red, or gold.
In addition, the sand image can be displayed in any of a variety of colors including blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, but only sand images of a color with a higher expectation than the color of the reserved image when the "hourglass reserved change effect" is executed will be displayed.
For example, if the reserved image is red, a gold or rainbow colored sand image will be displayed, but blue or green sand images will not be displayed. This is because players do not like effects that lower their expectations.

The reserved image is based on the motif of a colorless, transparent or milky white crystal ball, and the color of the crystal ball appears to change as the sand falls through the hourglass.
When the new reserved image overlaps in front of the original reserved image, part of the original reserved image becomes unrecognizable. In this case, the display priority of the new reserved image may be set higher than that of the original reserved image, so that although the lower part of the original reserved image is displayed as part of the display process, it is obscured by the new reserved image which has the higher display priority and becomes unrecognizable.
Alternatively, the shape of the original reserved image and the shape of the new reserved image may be changed as the performance progresses (for example, the bottom edge that constitutes part of the outer shape of the original reserved image and the top edge that constitutes part of the outer shape of the new reserved image may be adjacent), and the two images may be displayed without overlapping as a display process.
In the display example in Fig. 323, an example of displaying a two-dimensional image is shown, but the display in the "hourglass reserve change performance" may be realized by image processing using a three-dimensional model. For example, the reserved image may be composed of a spherical, colorless, transparent or milky white 3D object imitating a crystal ball, and a minute 3D object of a specific color may be displayed falling from the top of the hourglass toward the periphery of the crystal ball, and image processing may be adopted in which the spherical 3D object is gradually hidden by the minute object of the specific color from the bottom and is visually changed to the specific color.
In addition, instead of causing the decorative pattern to change at high speed simultaneously with the end of the display of the hourglass image, the decorative pattern may be scrolled slowly for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one second) from the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends, and then the decorative pattern may be changed at high speed.

In effect patterns 02 to 04, the sand in the hourglass image does not fall, or falls but some of it remains, and the display of the hourglass image ends. At this time, the hourglass may be blown away by the wind to display the hourglass moving off the screen, or the hourglass may be broken and the sand scattered so that the sand and the reserved image cannot overlap, and then a display process may be performed to make the broken hourglass and the scattered sand semi-transparent, so that the broken hourglass and the scattered sand are not displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, the reserved image can be returned to its original color in a natural manner.

In this way, in the "hourglass reserve change effect," an hourglass image is displayed in a position overlapping with the reserved image, and as time passes, an image of sand of a specific color different from the color of the original reserved image is dropped, thereby displaying the original reserved image as gradually being eroded by the new reserved image and gradually being hidden, and depending on whether the original reserved image is completely eroded and hidden by the sand image, it is displayed whether the color of the reserved image will change or not.
As a result, the player will watch the progress of the "hourglass reserve change presentation" with a sense of anticipation as to which of the reserved images with different display modes (colors) that are simultaneously displayed in the area in which the reserved images are displayed will be the one that is ultimately displayed.

By using this type of presentation, when the display mode of the reserved image is changed, the color of the original reserved image that was displayed in the area where the reserved image is displayed appears to gradually change to the color of the new reserved image in the area where the reserved image is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what color the reserved image may change to as he or she only has to look at the area where the reserved image is displayed, and also makes the player look forward to the change in color of the reserved image.
In addition, since both the color of the reserved image before it changes (the color before the hourglass reserve change performance is performed) and the color that may change due to the hourglass reserve change performance can be recognized simultaneously within the area in which the reserved image is displayed, it is easy for the player to understand how the expectation level is changing from one to another.
In addition, since the "hourglass hold change presentation" is executed using the display area in which the hold image is displayed, the display area used for the "hourglass hold change presentation" can be made smaller, thereby securing display area for executing other presentations.
In addition, since the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped when the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed, the player can focus his/her attention on the "hourglass reserve change effect."

Furthermore, in this hold change presentation, while the presentation is being performed, the pre-change hold image, which has a low expectation, gradually becomes unrecognizable and is gradually replaced by the new hold image, which has a high expectation color. Therefore, compared to a case in which the pre-change hold image is changed to the post-change hold image at the final timing of the hold change presentation, the player's expectation for the hold image to change can be gradually increased from an early stage in the presentation.
Furthermore, since the reserved image with low expectation has a higher probability of being displayed compared to the reserved image with high expectation, the player may become bored of viewing the reserved image with low expectation in a sense, but by the reserved image with low expectation disappearing partway through the performance, the player's mind is refreshed and the player's attention can be directed to the reserved image with high expectation being displayed.
In addition, by providing a false presentation pattern (for example, a presentation pattern in which the pending image does not change and the suggested degree of expectation does not change, such as the presentation patterns shown in presentation pattern 02 to presentation pattern 04 in Figure 322), the player can be made to see only a portion of the pending image with high expectation, thereby increasing the sense of excitement.

In addition, because the performance begins immediately after the change display begins, the results of the previous change display are forgotten, and anticipation for the current change display is rapidly built up.

In the display examples shown with reference to Figures 323(a) to 323(h) and Figures 324(a) to 324(d), in the area where the original reserved image is eroded by the sand image and the new reserved image is displayed, the circular outline of the reserved image is left visible. The outline color may be the color of the original reserved image. Alternatively, a common color (e.g., black) may be used regardless of the color of the reserved image. Note that it is preferable to use a color different from the color used as the color of the reserved image and the color used as the color of the falling sand as the common color.

It is also possible to choose not to display such contours. In this case, the contours of the original reserved image are also eroded by the sand image, so that only the upper part (uneroded area) of the original reserved image is visible, and the lower part (eroded area) of the original reserved image is not visible. Furthermore, the new reserved image is displayed as a polygon (square or hexagon) rather than a circle. Figure 324(e) shows the state where 2/3 of the sand has fallen at time t7, and Figure 324(f) shows the state where all the sand has fallen at time t9. Note that after the hourglass image is erased, the shape of the reserved image may remain hexagonal, or may be circular as shown in Figure 324(c).

The size of the reserved image may be made to coincide with the size of the bottom of the hourglass image.
Figures 324 (g) and 324 (h) show display examples for the "hourglass hold change effect" in which the size and shape of the hold image match the size and shape of the bottom of the hourglass image.
Fig. 324(g) shows the state before the sand falls at timing t3 when the hourglass image and sand image are displayed. Fig. 324(h) shows the state after half of the sand has fallen at timing t6, three seconds after the sand falls. When all the sand has fallen, the original reserved image is completely replaced by the new reserved image.
With this type of display mode, the falling sand itself only affects the area in which the new reserved image is displayed, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the reserved image itself is changing, thereby increasing anticipation for the color of the reserved image to change.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may also be executed when the decorative pattern is rapidly changing or scrolling at a slow speed (a speed at which the player can clearly see the moving decorative pattern).
It is advisable not to change the display state of the decorative pattern during the execution of the "hourglass reserve change performance". For example, if the execution of the "hourglass reserve change performance" is started while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped state of the decorative pattern should be maintained until the execution of the "hourglass reserve change performance" is completed. Similarly, in the case of high-speed change or low-speed scrolling, if the execution of the "hourglass reserve change performance" is started, the high-speed change or low-speed scrolling state should be maintained until the execution of the "hourglass reserve change performance" is completed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the "hourglass reserve change effect."

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 322 and 323, it is preferable to make the amount of sand falling within the hourglass per unit time constant (i.e., the sand falling is displayed in the same way as in a real hourglass).
Below, referring to Fig. 325, another embodiment of the amount of sand falling per unit time in an hourglass is shown. Fig. 325(a) to Fig. 325(c) respectively show the display state of the hourglass image and the reserved image (colored white) at a predetermined timing (timings t3 to t9). The color of the sand is green. The dotted lines shown at the bottom of the hourglass indicate the top edge of the sand at a predetermined timing (timings t4 to t8).
FIG. 325(a) shows an example in which the reserved image has a circular shape and the height of the sand increases uniformly per unit time. In other words, in this case, the falling sand is displayed in a different way from a real hourglass. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 325(a), in a 6-division (6-level) with the same height, for example, a display is performed in which 1/6 of the sand is filled in every second. When displaying 1/6 of the sand filling in every second, the amount of sand falling may be changed to gradually fill 1/6 of the area by the time 1 second has passed, but the sand is displayed falling but the area is not filled, and 1/6 of the area is filled in a flash with sand after 1 second has passed. Although it may seem a little strange that the falling sand is displayed in a different way from a real hourglass, the sand height increases evenly (for example, the area does not increase evenly, such as filling 1/6 of the height in 6 times), making it easier for the player to understand how the sand falls completely and to keep up with the tempo, so that the player can instantly feel excited about the reserved change performance at the timing (t8 in Figure 325(a)) just before the sand falls completely (for example, if 1/6 of the height is filled in 6 times, it is 5/6). As is clear from Figure 325(a), when the reserved image (white) is gradually eroded by the sand of the hourglass (green sand in this case), the eroded area gradually increases, and the eroded area is displayed to gradually decrease from the middle of the erosion.

On the other hand, FIG. 325(b) shows an example in which the shape of the reserved portion is circular and the amount of sand falling per unit time is uniform (i.e., the sand is displayed falling in the same way as in a real hourglass). In the example shown in FIG. 325(b), the time during which the sand height increases is short at the beginning and end of the performance, and the time during which the sand height increases is longer as the performance approaches the middle stage (i.e., the sand height increases slowly), so the player can fully enjoy the performance of whether or not the color of the reserved image changes. The time during which the sand height increases near the middle stage of the hourglass is longer than the time during which the sand height increases at the beginning and end stages of the hourglass, so this time can be made to correspond to the time period known as the "tame" or "ma" in a pachinko game machine, which can increase interest in the reserved change performance.

Figure 325 (c) shows an example in which the shape of the reserved image is a square. In this case, if the amount of sand falling per unit time is made uniform, the sand will fill in evenly from the bottom as the performance progresses. Note that the shape of the reserved image is not limited to a square, and may be a vertically or horizontally long rectangle.

Figures 325(d) and 325(e) show other examples of the hourglass image and the reserved image (white). Note that the sand image is not shown in the figures.
Fig. 325(d) shows an example of the reserved image and the hourglass image when the reserved image is a square tilted at 45 degrees. In this case, as in the example shown in Fig. 325(b), if the amount of sand falling per unit time is made uniform, the time during which the sand height is high is short at the beginning and end of the performance, and the time during which the sand height is high is longer closer to the middle stage of the performance.
Fig. 325(e) shows an example of the reserved image and the hourglass image when a triangular reserved image is used. In this case, if the amount of falling sand per unit time is made uniform, the height of the sand will slowly increase in the beginning of the performance, so that the player can recognize what color of sand is falling. In addition, as the performance progresses, the time during which the height of the sand increases will become shorter, so that the player will visually recognize that the height of the sand has increased suddenly at the end of the performance, making the performance dynamic.
In these examples, the height of the sand may be increased uniformly per unit time.

In Figures 325(a) to 325(c) (including Figures 325(d) and 325(e)), examples have been described in which the process starts at timing t3 and ends at timing t9, but it goes without saying that the time from start to end is not limited to this.
Also, for example, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, it may be possible to execute an "hourglass hold change effect" in any of a plurality of presentation stages (such as a first presentation stage in which a first background image and a first character are displayed, a second presentation stage in which a second background image different from the first background image and a second character different from the first character are displayed, etc. Note that a certain presentation stage continues over a plurality of (e.g., 10 to 30) changing displays, and is changed to another presentation stage based on a predetermined trigger, such as a special reach effect resulting in a miss).
In addition, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executable in all or some of these performance stages. In this case, the appearance (display mode) of the reserved image may be the same or different for each performance stage. If it is different, for example, the shape of the reserved image may be a shape corresponding to the motif of the performance stage. Note that even if the performance stages are different, the expectation level suggested by the color of the reserved image and the relationship between the color and the order of expectation level may be the same.
In all performance stages, the falling sand effect may, for example, start at timing t3 and end at timing t9, or in the first performance stage, the falling sand effect may start at timing t3 and end at timing t9, while in the second performance stage, the falling sand effect may start at timing t3 and end at timing t7, and so on, so that it differs from performance stage to performance stage (the start timing may be the same, the end timing may be the same, or both the start and end timings may be different depending on the performance stage, or for each performance stage).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 322, any one of presentation patterns 02 to 04 is executed, but it is also possible to have only presentation pattern 04 executed. In this case, since it is confirmed that the color of the reserved image will be promoted to a color with a high expectation at the timing when the display of the hourglass image begins, the player will have great anticipation as to what color of sand image will be displayed. In addition, after the sand image is displayed, the player will be able to watch with satisfaction as the reserved image changes to the color of the sand image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 322, the "hourglass reserve change presentation" is executed immediately after the start of the changing display, but the "hourglass reserve change presentation" may also be executed at other times.
For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed after the start of the variable display, before the pseudo consecutive performance (a so-called general pseudo consecutive change performance in which decorative symbols are changed again at high speed after a predetermined symbol or a predetermined symbol combination is displayed), during the pseudo consecutive performance, during the formation of a reach state, during a special reach performance, etc. Alternatively, the execution of this performance may be started during one of these periods, and the execution of this performance may be ended during the other period.
Alternatively, the special reach effect may be displayed in a manner suggesting a loss, and the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss, and the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be executed. In this case, the stopping state of the decorative pattern (the result of the special lottery) may be displayed depending on whether the reserved change effect is successful or not. That is, if the sand falls to the end and the reserved image changes, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after changing to a state indicating a big win, and if the sand does not fall to the end and the reserved image does not change, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed while remaining in a state temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 322, presentation patterns 03 to 05 have been shown in which the sand images continue to fall, but below, with reference to Figure 326, we will explain a modified presentation pattern in which the falling of the sand images may be interrupted.
In the performance pattern 01 shown in Fig. 326, the falling of the sand is stopped during the period from timing t5 to timing t7, and the display of the sand falling again is performed during the period from timing t7 to timing t9. Note that the display state at timing t9 is the state where 2/3 of the sand has fallen, as shown in Fig. 323(g).
After that, the display of the hourglass image is terminated and the reserved image is displayed in its original form. Figure 324 (a) shows the display form at this time.
On the other hand, in the performance pattern 02 shown in Fig. 326, the falling of the sand is interrupted during the period from timing t5 to timing t7, and the display of the sand falling again is performed during the period from timing t7 to timing t11. Note that the display state at timing t11 is a state in which all the sand has fallen, as shown in Fig. 323(h). After that, the display of the hourglass image ends, and the reserved image is displayed in the color of the falling sand. Fig. 324(c) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by allowing the falling of the sand to be interrupted (the erosion of the sand in the hourglass to be temporarily halted), the player has to wait and see whether the sand has fallen to the end and the pending image will change, which gives the player a sense of teasing, increasing the player's anticipation of the sand falling again and making it possible to increase the interest.

A plurality of interruption times may be provided, and the interruption times may be different. The presentation pattern 02 shown in FIG. 326(b) shows a presentation pattern in which the sand falls to the end after the sand is interrupted for two seconds from timing t5 to timing t7. The presentation pattern 03 shown in FIG. 326(c) shows a presentation pattern in which the sand does not fall to the end after the sand is interrupted for four seconds from timing t5 to timing t9 (the sand falls to the end at timing t11). The presentation pattern 04 shown in FIG. 326(d) shows a presentation pattern in which the sand falls to the end after the sand is interrupted for four seconds from timing t5 to timing t9 (all the sand falls at timing t13). By providing a plurality of interruption times in this way, the player can be made to wait for when the sand will resume falling.
The length of the interruption time is not limited to four seconds, but may be one second or three seconds.

The number of interruptions is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Presentation pattern 05 shown in FIG. 326(e) shows a presentation pattern in which the sand is stopped falling twice, for two seconds from timing t5 to timing t7 and for two seconds from timing t9 to timing t11, and then the sand falls to the end. Note that in presentation pattern 05, the first and second interruption times are the same, two seconds, but the interruption times may be different for each interruption. For example, the first interruption time may be one second, and the second interruption time may be three seconds. By providing multiple interruptions in this way, the sand falling can be interrupted again after it has resumed, further teasing the player.

The expectation that the sand will fall to the end (i.e., the expectation that the reserved item will be promoted) may be suggested by either the length of the interruption time or the number of interruptions, or both. For example, the longer the interruption time or the more interruptions there are, the higher the expectation that the sand will fall to the end. In this case, the player will watch the presentation in the hope that the interruption time or the number of interruptions will be longer.
On the other hand, the longer the interruption time or the more interruptions there are, the lower the expectation that the sand will fall to the end. In this case, the player will watch the presentation in the hope that the sand will resume falling as soon as possible or that the sand will not be interrupted.

The falling of the sand may be interrupted by the player's operation. For example, the falling of the sand may be interrupted by pressing a button once, and the falling of the sand may be resumed by pressing the button again. With this configuration, the performance can be interrupted at the player's will, so that the player can take a picture of the performance with his/her smartphone or operate the ball lending button 328 at his/her leisure. In addition, the player can enjoy the performance at his/her leisure after the completion of these tasks.
In this case, a button-like image may be displayed to encourage button operation, or the button-like image may not be displayed (button operation itself is enabled) in a hidden button effect. In addition, when the button-like image is displayed, it may be displayed at any of the following times: before the hourglass hold change effect starts, before the sand is displayed and starts falling, or while the sand is falling.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 323, when all the sand has fallen, the reserved image is displayed to be promoted, but when all the sand has fallen (for example, timing t9 in performance pattern 05 shown in Fig. 322(e) or timing t11 in performance pattern 02 shown in Fig. 326(b)), the hourglass image may be erased and immediately thereafter an hourglass image with sand of a more promising color may be displayed, so that the reserved image may be further promoted. For example, after all the green sand has fallen and the reserved image of blue has changed to the reserved image of green, the "hourglass reserved change performance" may be executed again, and a performance in which a red sand image falls within the hourglass image may be executed.
In addition, when changing from blue to green, the sand image may be dropped in the manner shown in FIG. 325(a). On the other hand, when changing from green to red, the sand image may be dropped in the manner shown in FIG. 325(b). In addition, the time required for all the sand to fall in the manner shown in FIG. 325(a) should be longer than that in the manner shown in FIG. 325(b). According to such a manner, the performance of the latter manner, which creates a greater sense of expectation, can be extended.

Although an example has been shown in which the "hourglass reserve change performance" may be executed again immediately after the end of the "hourglass reserve change performance," the "hourglass reserve change performance" may also be executed two or more times in succession.
Furthermore, instead of ending the display of the hourglass image at the end of the "hourglass reserve change presentation," the hourglass may be flipped 180 degrees and a sand image of a more promising color may be displayed, thereby starting a second "hourglass reserve change presentation."
Also, the "hourglass reserve change performance" may be executed two or more times without succession. For example, the "hourglass reserve change performance" may be executed a total of two or more times in situations such as after the start of the variable display and before the pseudo consecutive performance starts, during the pseudo consecutive performance, during the formation of the reach state, during a special reach performance, etc. Also, between the execution of the "hourglass reserve change performance" and the "hourglass reserve change performance", other performances suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed. Alternatively, the execution of this performance may be started in one of these periods (after the start of the variable display and before the pseudo consecutive performance starts, during the pseudo consecutive performance, during the formation of the reach state, during a special reach performance, etc.) and the execution of this performance may be ended in the other period.
Alternatively, the special reach effect may end in a manner suggesting a loss, and the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed in a state where the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss. In this case, as described above, it is preferable that the decorative symbols change to a manner indicating a big win when all the sand has fallen.
In this way, by making it possible for the "hourglass hold change effect" to be executed multiple times, even if not all the sand falls and the effect ends in failure, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the effect will start a second time or later.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 322 and Fig. 323, if the sand does not fall to the end and the performance ends (for example, performance pattern 02 to performance pattern 04 in Fig. 322), the reserved image in the original color (in the example of performance pattern 02 to performance pattern 04 in Fig. 322, the reserved image in blue) is displayed so that the expectation level is not lowered, but if the performance ends without the sand falling to the end, a display that lowers the expectation level (demotion) may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). For example, at timing t3 of performance pattern 02, timing t5 of performance pattern 03, and timing t7 of performance pattern 04, the reserved image in blue may be changed to the normal white reserved image with a predetermined probability.
In addition, in order to clearly inform the player that the sand has not fallen to the end, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed from timing t3 of presentation pattern 02, timing t5 of presentation pattern 03, and timing t7 of presentation pattern 04, the reserved image in blue may be changed to the reserved image in normal white with a predetermined probability. Note that during this one second, the hourglass display may be continued without being terminated. Note that the timing for terminating the display of the hourglass may be the timing when a display is made to demote the reserved image, or may be one second after the display is made to demote the reserved image.
In addition, the reserved image may be changed to any reserved image that indicates a lower expectation level than the reserved image before the start of the performance. For example, if the reserved image before the start of the performance is a green reserved image, the reserved image may be changed to blue or normal white.
Alternatively, regardless of the reserved image before the start of the performance, it may be changed to a normal reserved image that indicates the lowest expectation. For example, if the reserved image before the start of the performance is a green reserved image or a red reserved image, it may be changed to a normal white reserved image. In other words, in this case, the reserved image is displayed in green and red in the area where the reserved image is displayed, and the reserved image is displayed in white in the area where the reserved image is displayed afterwards.
The predetermined probability is not limited to 50%, and may be 10% or 100%. A probability of about 10% is unlikely to cause anxiety to the player. In addition, if the probability is set to 100%, a great sense of tension is given to the player, which increases the joy given to the player when all the sand falls and the reserved image is promoted.
This type of effect can make the player feel tense. Also, the number of times the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed can be increased.

In addition, if the "hourglass reserve change presentation" has ended without having progressed to a predetermined stage, the display of the lowering of the expectation level may be made, but only when the "hourglass reserve change presentation" has progressed to a predetermined stage, the display of the lowering of the expectation level may be made. An example of the predetermined stage is the stage t7 (stage 4/6) in the case of FIG. 325(a), but it is more tense to make the display of the lowering of the expectation level only when a certain number of stages have progressed, so the predetermined stage may be set arbitrarily, but it is more preferable not to make the display of the lowering of the expectation level when half of the stages have not been reached.
This type of presentation can prevent the player from feeling unreasonable or uncomfortable when a display that lowers the expectation of the reserved image is suddenly displayed.

A sand image of a color with a lower expectation than the color of the reserved image may be displayed, and when all the sand images have fallen, the reserved image may change to the reserved image of a color with a lower expectation. For example, a "hourglass reserved change effect" may be executed in which blue sand falls while a green reserved image is displayed, and when all the sand has fallen, the reserved image may be demoted to a blue reserved image. In this way, the appearance rate of the reserved image with a high expectation can be increased.

Although it has been shown that the reserved image may be demoted as a result of the execution of the "hourglass reserved change effect", in that situation, another reserved change effect may be executed or the hourglass reserved change effect may be executed again to promote the reserved image again. Also, after the image is promoted again, the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be executed. In this case, when the reserved image is promoted by another reserved change effect or when the reserved image is promoted by the "hourglass reserved change effect" again, the result of the change display of the decorative pattern may be displayed in a state indicating a jackpot, and a jackpot game state may be generated.
For example, when the reserved image displayed in blue is demoted by displaying green sand, which has a higher expectation than blue, by the "hourglass reserved change effect", not all the sand falls and the normal reserved image in white is displayed (the area in which the reserved image is displayed changes from a situation in which blue and green are displayed to a situation in which white is displayed), another reserved change effect or another hourglass reserved change effect is executed, and the reserved image becomes blue again, and in that state, the "hourglass reserved change effect" occurs again, and the display of green sand, which has a higher expectation than blue, falling is performed again (blue and green are displayed again in the area in which the reserved image is displayed), the reserved image in blue may be changed to the reserved image in green and a jackpot game state may be always generated. In addition, the jackpot game state is always generated when it is performed again, but it may be set to the case where it is performed three or more times. In the case where it is performed three times, a display corresponding to demotion (blue/green followed by white display) is performed twice (multiple times) with one change. Also, although it has been described that the big win game state always occurs, it may be possible to make the big win game state not always occur, but it is preferable to set the expectation rate of the big win game state occurring to about 50% so that the impression of demotion is not perceived as a bad impression. Also, when the reserved image becomes blue again after demotion and the "hourglass reserved change effect" occurs again in that state, the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be generated in a color different from the color of the one that failed the first time. Specifically, for example, the color of the sand in the second "hourglass reserved change effect" may be red or gold, etc., with an expectation rate of green or higher.

In this way, even if a player is demoted, depending on the progress of the presentation, a favorable result may occur for the player, so the player's motivation to play can be maintained. Also, if other players only see the latter part of such a series of presentations, for example, only the presentation promoted to a green reserved image, the decorative symbols will be displayed in a manner indicating that a jackpot game state will occur under the circumstances in which the green reserved image is displayed, so that the player will change his/her perception of the reserved image (in this case, the green reserved image) that is perceived as having a relatively low expectation level to actually have a fairly high expectation level, and as a result, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine.

An embodiment has been shown in which the display mode of the reserved image changes due to the "hourglass reserve change effect", but the reserved images displayed in the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area (see Figures 123 to 125 for the reserve display areas) may also be modified so that the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed. In this case, it is advisable to execute the "hourglass reserve change effect" based on the look-ahead process.

For the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, when executing the "hourglass reserved change effect", it is preferable to complete the execution of the effect during the execution of one change display. With this configuration, it is not necessary to move the reserved images during the execution of the "hourglass reserved change effect", so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused about the effect content and to simplify the display process.
The "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed at the timing when the reserved image moves to the adjacent reserved display area at the start of the variable display. For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed immediately after the blue reserved image moves from the third reserved display area to the second reserved display area at the start of the variable display.

Although an example has been given in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed within one change display, it may be executed across two or more change displays. For example, the execution of the effect may be started when a certain hold image is displayed in the third hold display area, and the execution of the effect may be ended when that hold image is displayed in the first hold display area. Alternatively, the execution of the effect may be started when a certain hold image is displayed in the fourth hold display area, and the execution of the effect may be ended when that hold image is displayed in that hold display area.

Based on the look-ahead process, it may be notified in advance before the variable display is started that the "hourglass reserve change performance" will be executed. For example, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the preceding variable display, the look-ahead process is performed, and when it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started and the "hourglass reserve change performance" is executed for the reserved image, an hourglass icon image in the shape of an hourglass may be displayed at a predetermined location in the display area to notify that the "hourglass reserve change performance" will be executed. Note that the icon image may be displayed at a predetermined location on the left side of the display area, as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 295 to 297. Also, when the hourglass icon image is acquired, it may be displayed in the same manner as the microphone icon image.
The hourglass icon image thus obtained may be moved to the position of the reserved image (or a predetermined reserved image) while being enlarged at the start of the variable display, so that it functions as an hourglass image. In this case, a sand image of a predetermined color (for example, green or red) may be displayed in advance in the hourglass icon image. In this case, the player waits for the start of the variable display while expecting which color it will change to from the start of the winning, so that a sense of expectation for a big win can be provided for a long period of time. In this way, when it is suggested that the "hourglass reserved change performance" will be performed on the reserved image before the variable display corresponding to the reserved image is performed, it may be made to always change without performing the so-called false display as shown in Figures 322(a) to 322(d).

An example has been shown in which the ``hourglass hold change effect'' is executed in the hold image or in the hold images displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area, but the ``hourglass hold change effect'' may be modified so that it can be executed in the hold images displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area at the same time as the ``hourglass hold change effect'' is executed in the hold image.
For example, the reserved image may be displayed in the form of the performance pattern 03 shown in Fig. 322(c), and the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area may be displayed in the form of the performance pattern 05 shown in Fig. 322(e). In this case, the color of the reserved image does not change, but the color of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area changes.
According to this configuration, even if the color does not change in one effect, the color may change in the other effect, so that the disappointment felt by the player who viewed one effect can be reduced. In addition, when the reserved image and the "hourglass reserved change effect" in the reserved image are executed simultaneously, a pattern may be set in which all changes, some changes, or none changes. When all changes, the player can feel an unparalleled sense of pleasure, when some changes, a sense of relief, and by providing a case where none changes, a sense of tension can be provided to the player.
In addition, an example of executing the "hourglass reserve change performance" on the reserved image and one reserved image has been shown, but the "hourglass reserve change performance" may be executed on multiple reserved images (maximum four) instead of only one of the reserved images displayed in the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area. In this case, a maximum of five "hourglass reserve change performances" will be executed in parallel. However, when the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserve display area, it is when up to the third reserve is stored, and when it is stored in the fourth reserve (when the starting hole is won), the fluctuating remaining time may be long or short, so a maximum of four "hourglass reserve change performances" (reserved images displayed in the fourth reserve display area to the reserved images displayed in the third reserve display area) excluding the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserve display area may be executed in parallel.

The "hourglass reserve change effect" of the reserved image and the "hourglass reserve change effect" of the reserved image may be executed in a predetermined order.
For example, after the "hourglass hold change effect" of the reserved image is executed, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed simultaneously on the reserved images displayed in the first reserve display area through the fourth reserve display area.
Alternatively, the ``hourglass hold change performance'' may be executed in the following order: the hold image, the hold image displayed in the first hold display area, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area, and the hold image shown in the fourth hold display area.
Alternatively, the ``hourglass hold change performance'' may be executed in the following order: the hold image, the hold image displayed in the fourth hold display area, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area, and the hold image shown in the first hold display area.

Alternatively, an "hourglass hold change presentation" may be executed simultaneously on the hold images displayed in the first hold display area through the hold images shown in the fourth hold display area, and then an "hourglass hold change presentation" may be executed on the hold image.
Alternatively, the ``hourglass hold change performance'' may be executed in the following order: the hold image displayed in the first hold display area, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area, and the hold image shown in the fourth hold display area.
Alternatively, the ``hourglass hold change performance'' may be executed in the following order: the hold image displayed in the fourth hold display area, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area, the hold image shown in the first hold display area.

Note that, although an example was given of the case where the number of reserved items is the maximum, if the number of reserved items is not the maximum, an effect may be executed on each reserved item image corresponding to an existing reserved item. For example, if there are two reserved items, an "hourglass reserved item change effect" may be executed in a specified order on the reserved item image, the reserved item image displayed in the first reserved item display area, and the reserved item image displayed in the second reserved item display area.

In these examples, a subsequent "hourglass hold change presentation" may be started while a previously started "hourglass hold change presentation" is being executed, so that multiple "hourglass hold change presentations" are executed simultaneously.
Alternatively, the subsequent "hourglass reserve change presentation" may be started immediately after the execution of the previously started "hourglass reserve change presentation" is completed or after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed.

In this way, when the "hourglass reserve change effects" are executed simultaneously, there is a possibility that one of the reserved images will be promoted, which reduces the disappointment felt by the player. Also, when the "hourglass reserve change effects" are executed in sequence, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the results of the effect.

The "explosive reserve change effect", which is another reserve change effect with a different presentation style from the "hourglass reserve change effect", will be described with reference to Figures 327, 328, etc. Note that the "explosive reserve change effect", like the "hourglass reserve change effect", is a modified version of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 123 to 321, etc.

Figure 327 shows a time chart for the "Explosion Reserve Change Presentation." Also, Figure 328 shows an example of the display when the "Explosion Reserve Change Presentation" is executed.

FIG. 328(a) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and is about to be displayed. In this example, the color of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is blue.
The presentation pattern 01 shown in FIG. 327(a) is a presentation pattern in which the "explosion reserve change presentation" is not executed, but is shown for comparison with the presentation pattern in which the "explosion reserve change presentation" is executed. The variable display starts at timing t0, and is temporarily stopped during the period from timing t0 to timing t1. FIG. 328(b) shows the state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Next, the state of high-speed variation starts from timing t1, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped at timing t30, and all the patterns are stopped and displayed at timing t31. After being displayed in a stopped state until timing t32, depending on the result of the special lottery indicated by the stopping state of the decorative pattern, if it is a miss, the next variable display starts, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot game starts.

The performance pattern 02 shown in FIG. 327(b) is a performance pattern in which a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area and moves toward the right side of the reserved image, but turns back halfway. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t3, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state with the pattern at the start of the variable display. Also, from timing t2 to timing t3, a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area and moves toward the right side of the reserved image, but turns back halfway. FIG. 328(c) shows a state in which a bomb character image is displayed on the lower part of the display area at a specified timing between timing t2 and timing t3. In performance pattern 02, at timing t3, the bomb character image moves from the lower left side of the display area off the screen and becomes invisible, and the high-speed variable of the decorative pattern begins. FIG. 328(f) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the bomb character image ends.

The performance pattern 03 shown in FIG. 327(c) and the performance pattern 04 shown in FIG. 327(d) are performance patterns in which a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area, moves toward the right side of the reserved image, overlaps with the reserved image, and explodes. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t4, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state with the pattern at the start of the variable display. Also, from timing t2 to timing t3, a bomb character image is displayed on the lower left side of the display area and moves toward the right side of the reserved image. FIG. 328(c) shows a state in which a bomb character image is displayed on the lower side of the display area at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. FIG. 328(d) shows a state in which a bomb character image is displayed overlapping the front side of the reserved image at timing t3. In the performance pattern 03 and the performance pattern 04, the bomb character image explodes immediately after being displayed overlapping the front side of the reserved image at timing t3, and an explosion image is displayed, and this state continues until timing t4. FIG. 328(e) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed. The display of the explosion image ends at timing t4.
As shown in Figures 328(d) and 328(e), the reserved image becomes invisible during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
The color of the explosion image is composed of colors such as gray and black, which are not displayed as the color of the reserved image before or after the change.

In the case of effect pattern 03 shown in Figure 327 (c), after the display of the explosion image has finished, the reserved image becomes visible in blue, which is the color before the "explosion reserved change effect" is executed. Figure 328 (f) shows the display state at this time.

In the case of effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 327(d), after the display of the explosion image has finished, the reserved image becomes visible in green, which is different from the color before the "explosion reserved change effect" is executed. FIG. 328(g) shows the display state at this time.

The reserved image is not limited to being green, but may be changed to a reserved image with a higher expectation (red, gold, rainbow). Note that, in the "hourglass reserved change effect", an embodiment was shown in which the reserved image may be changed to a reserved image with a lower expectation, but in the "explosion reserved change effect", the reserved image will not be changed to a reserved image with a lower expectation.

In the "Explosion pending change effect," the time required from the appearance of the bomb character to the display of the pending image after the explosion is set to 2 seconds (timing t2 to timing t4), but it is not limited to 2 seconds and can be set to around 1 to 3 seconds.

In this way, in the "explosion reserved change effect", a predetermined reserved image changes to a reserved image with a higher expectation, but does not change to a reserved image with a lower expectation. By making it possible to implement both the "hourglass reserved change effect" and the "explosion reserved change effect", it is possible to increase the variety of effects that change the reserved image.
In addition, since the "explosion reserve change effect" changes the reserved image in a short time (2 seconds) compared to the "hourglass reserve change effect" in which the reserved image changes when sand falls over 6 seconds, if the reserved image is suddenly displayed as being demoted, the player may feel unreasonable and lose interest, so demotion is prevented.
On the other hand, in the "hourglass reserved change effect", the effect time is longer than the "explosion reserved change effect", and if all the sand falls during the effect, the reserved image is promoted, so the player can feel a long-lasting sense of suspense as to whether the reserved image will be promoted or not, which can increase interest. In some modified examples, the reserved image may be demoted, but in this case, it is possible to make the player feel a more suspenseful sense of suspense.

In addition, various embodiments and variations of the "hourglass reserve change effect" can be applied to the "explosion reserve change effect" as appropriate. For example, when the "explosion reserve change effect" is applied to the reserve images displayed in the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area, it is possible to change the reserve image to one with higher expectations.

The rate at which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed should be higher than the rate at which the "explosion reserve change effect" is executed. For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 4:1. With this configuration, the "hourglass reserve change effect", which has a relatively long execution time, is executed more frequently, which can make the player feel more interested.

On the other hand, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed at the same ratio. For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 1:1.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed may be lower than the rate at which the "explosion reserve change effect" is executed. For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 1:4.

The probability that the reserved image is promoted in the "hourglass reserved change effect" should be higher than the probability that the reserved image is promoted in the "explosion reserved change effect." This can increase the interest of players over a long period of time.

On the other hand, the reserved image may be promoted at the same rate when the "hourglass reserved change effect" is executed and when the "explosion reserved change effect" is executed.
Alternatively, the probability that the reserved image is promoted in the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be lower than the probability that the reserved image is promoted in the "explosion reserved change effect".

In the "hourglass reserve change effect," it takes a minimum of six seconds from when the sand starts to fall until all the sand has fallen and the reserved image changes (for example, the period from timing t3 to timing t9 in effect pattern 05 of FIG. 322(e)). On the other hand, in the "explosion reserve change effect," it takes two seconds from when the bomb character starts to be displayed until the reserved image changes. This makes the "hourglass reserve change effect" even more interesting.

The time from when the sand starts falling in the ``hourglass reserve change effect'' to when all the sand has fallen and the reserved image changes, and the time from when the bomb character starts to be displayed to when the reserved image changes in the ``explosion reserve change effect'', may be the same (for example, 4 seconds).
Alternatively, the time from when the sand starts falling in the "hourglass reserve change effect" until all the sand falls and the reserved image changes (e.g., 3 seconds) may be shorter than the time from when the bomb character starts to be displayed until the reserved image changes in the "explosion reserve change effect" (e.g., 6 seconds). In this way, for example, when the "hourglass reserve change effect" is performed on the reserved image, the reserved display after the change is a display that gradually erodes the area of the reserved image, whereas the "explosion reserve change effect" displays the area of the reserved image in one go, so that the display mode when the reserve changes can be varied, increasing interest.

When executing the "hourglass reserve change effect" or the "explosion reserve change effect," a specific sound may be output that matches the effect (the specific sound here refers to a sound that is output in accordance with the progress of the reserve change effect, and is not a sound that indicates that the reserve has changed). In this case, the sound output may be the same sound or different sounds. Also, the specific sound may be output only for one effect, and not for the other effect.
If the same sound is output as the specific sound for the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect," there is an effect that neither effect will be missed, and if different sounds are output, there is an effect that the player can tell which hold change effect is occurring just by the sound without looking at the display area, and if only one effect is performed, there is a risk of missing the effect, so there is an effect that the player can focus their attention on the LCD.
The timing for outputting the specific sound may be the start of the performance or a predetermined timing during the performance. Also, a special sound different from the specific sound (the special sound here is not a sound output in accordance with the progress of the reserve change performance, but a sound indicating that the reserve has changed) may be output in the "hourglass reserve change performance" and the "explosion reserve change performance". However, for the "explosion reserve change performance", the reserve display after the change is suddenly displayed (Fig. 328 (e), Fig. 328 (f)), so it is better to make sure that the sound indicating that the reserve has changed or the sound indicating which reserve has changed to is output, but for the "hourglass reserve change performance", when the reserve changes, the player already recognizes which reserve display will change to during the process of the hourglass reserve change performance, so the special sound does not need to be output.

In one change display, both the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed. For example, the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed after the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect", or the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed after the execution of the "explosion reserve change effect".
With this configuration, if the result of the first hold change performance is unfavorable to the player (such as no change in the hold or being demoted), a hold change performance different from that hold change performance will be executed, so that the player can view the performance with a changed mindset compared to when the first hold change performance is executed again.
Furthermore, if the same reserve change effect is executed again, the player may be reminded of the unfavorable result in the most recent effect and feel unpleasant; however, the above configuration can prevent such unpleasant feelings.

The "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed simultaneously with other effects that can indicate the degree of expectation.
For example, while the "hourglass reserve change effect" is being executed, the execution of another effect may be started. Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the execution of another effect may be started simultaneously. Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be started while the other effect is being executed.
Also, the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be terminated while the other effect is being executed. Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the other effect may be terminated simultaneously. Alternatively, the execution of the other effect may be terminated while the "hourglass reserve change effect" is being executed.

Other examples of effects that can be adopted include the pseudo consecutive effects shown with reference to Figure 261, etc., the special reach effects shown with reference to Figures 276, 277, etc., title images showing the titles of the reach effects shown with reference to Figures 276, 277, etc., preview image (dialogue image or cut-in image) display effects shown with reference to Figure 278, etc., and step-up effects shown with reference to Figure 313, etc.
In addition, the hourglass image in the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be displayed overlapping a predetermined image displayed in another effect. In this case, it is preferable to display the hourglass image in front of the predetermined image.
Alternatively, a specified image that is displayed in another effect may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the hourglass image in the "hourglass hold change effect."

With this configuration, even if a sand image of a low expectancy color is displayed during the "hourglass reserve change effect," other effects can be used to maintain the expectation of a big win.

From the viewpoint of drawing the player's attention to the "hourglass reserved change effect", it is advisable to not execute any one or all of the other effects simultaneously with the "hourglass reserved change effect". In this case, the hourglass image and the image used to execute the other effect are not displayed at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the "hourglass reserved change effect".
In addition, the predetermined other effects with a 100% expectation rate may not be executed simultaneously with the "hourglass reserve change effect." In this case, the player can be directed to the predetermined other effects that are more favorable to the player.

A predetermined image displayed in another presentation may be displayed in a number of different colors, and the color of the image may indicate the degree of expectation.
The colors used at this time may be white, red, and gold, which are some of the colors used as the colors of the reserved image in the "hourglass reserved change effect." It is also preferable to make the degree of expectation increase in this order of colors (white, red, gold). Specifically, if the other effect is a step-up effect as shown with reference to FIG. 313, etc., and the degree of expectation is indicated by the color of the frame of the image displayed as this step-up effect, the colors of this frame should be white, red, and gold.
In this way, by making the color used to suggest the degree of expectation in the "hourglass reserve change effect" also suggest the degree of expectation in other effects, there will be cases where the color used in other effects is the same as the color of the falling sand in the "hourglass reserve change effect." This provides the player with a sense of security that the reserved image will change to a reserved image of a different color in the "hourglass reserve change effect."

On the other hand, colors not used in the "hourglass hold change effect" may be used as the image colors in the other effects. For example, brown, orange, and purple may be used as the image colors. The expectation level may increase in this order (brown, orange, purple). It is advisable to suggest the expectation level in some of the other effects by using colors used in the "hourglass hold change effect", and to suggest the expectation level in the remaining other effects by using colors not used in the "hourglass hold change effect".
In this way, by suggesting the degree of expectation with a color that is not used in the "hourglass hold change effect," the player can be made to feel a sense of expectation that the effect may be a special color.
In addition, in a specific effect among the other effects, a plurality of display modes with different expectancies may be provided depending on the color used in the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the color not used in the "hourglass reserve change effect". Specifically, for example, when the specific effect is a step-up effect, if the expectancy of the step-up effect varies depending on the color of the frame, the frame colors are white, purple, red, and gold, and the expectancy increases in this order. In this case, the color not used in the "hourglass reserve change effect" is purple, and when a purple frame is displayed, the player is made to think that the expectancy is higher or lower than that of the red frame, and that perhaps it is a premium effect, which gives a sense of excitement.

After the "hourglass reserved change effect" ends and the reserved image is completely replaced with the reserved image of another color, the execution of another effect may be started. Conversely, the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be started after the execution of the other effect is finished.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can focus his/her attention on each of the effects.

In the "hourglass hold change effect," it has been shown that the time from when the sand starts to fall to when it ends is 6 seconds (effect pattern 05 shown in Figure 322 (e)), but in other effects, it is better to make the time for which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed shorter than this time.
With this configuration, the "hourglass reserve change effect" in which the indicated expectation level changes or not can be executed more effectively.

In addition, for all of the other effects, the time for which the image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed may be shorter than the time from when the sand starts to fall in the ``hourglass hold change effect'' to when it ends (from when the erosion of the area in which the hold image is displayed starts to when the erosion ends).
Alternatively, for some of the other effects, the time for which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed may be shorter than the time from when the sand in the ``hourglass hold change effect'' starts to fall until it ends (from when the erosion of the area in which the hold image is displayed starts to when the erosion ends), and for other of the other effects (excluding some effects), the time for which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed may be longer than the time from when the sand in the ``hourglass hold change effect'' starts to fall until it ends (from when the erosion of the area in which the hold image is displayed starts to when the erosion ends).
Alternatively, for all of the other effects, the time for which the image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed may be longer than the time from when the sand starts to fall in the ``hourglass hold change effect'' to when it ends (from when the erosion of the area in which the hold image is displayed starts to when the erosion ends).

A specific BGM (here, the specific BGM is a sound different from the specific sound described above) may be output from the start of the "hourglass pending change performance" or the start of the sand falling. If the pending image is successfully changed, the output of the specific BGM may be continued even after the "hourglass pending change performance" ends. On the other hand, if the pending image is unsuccessful in changing, the output of the specific BGM may be terminated at the time of failure (the time when the display of the sand image ends).
In this way, the fact that the reserved image has been promoted can be recognized for a certain period of time by the specific BGM even after the reserved image has been promoted, so that the satisfaction of being promoted can be enhanced. Also, the fact that the reserved image has been promoted can be notified to other players.
The timing to start outputting the specific BGM may be a predetermined timing before the start of the "hourglass reserve change performance". In this case, the output of the specific BGM also functions as a notice of the start of the "hourglass reserve change performance". Even if the output timing of the specific BGM is determined to be, for example, the start timing of the "hourglass reserve change performance", when a special condition is established, the output timing of the specific BGM may be delayed from the start timing of the "hourglass reserve change performance", or the output timing may be the same but the timing at which it is made audible may be delayed. If it is made audible later than the normal timing, the expectation level may be increased to increase the interest. The special condition here corresponds to a case where a delay is determined based on the result of a win, a case where a customization setting is determined by the player's operation, or a case where a change before the change at which the "hourglass reserve change performance" as the reserved image is performed satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, a non-reach change pattern or a change pattern at which a specific SP reach is performed), etc.

The timing for ending the output of the specific BGM may be a predetermined timing before the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, or may be the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends.
For example, when a reach state (a state in which the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed as the same symbol and the center decorative symbol is scrolling or fluctuating at high speed) occurs, the output of a specific BGM may be terminated. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the reach state may be output.
In addition, when the reach state does not occur and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a non-reach state, the output of the specific background music is continued until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the output of the specific background music is terminated at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Alternatively, if a special reach effect occurs, the BGM corresponding to the special reach effect is output and the output of the specific BGM is terminated, and if a special reach effect does not occur, the output of the specific BGM may continue until the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

The background music may be music by a specific singer or the melody of a specific song. Also, audio of specific lines may be used instead of background music.

In the "hourglass reserved change performance", a light-emitting decorative member having a plurality of light-emitting members (for example, full-color LEDs) may be illuminated in the same or similar color as the reserved image or the sand image. As the light-emitting decorative member, the door frame left side unit 530 and door frame right side unit 550 shown with reference to Figs. 47 to 55, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown with reference to Figs. 118 to 122, the panel board rear board 2420 shown with reference to Figs. 130 and 131, etc. may be adopted. In the "hourglass reserved change performance", some or all of these light-emitting decorative members may be illuminated.
Specifically, at the same time as the "hourglass reserve change performance" starts or the display of the sand image starts, the entirety of one or more illuminating decorative members can be made to glow in the same color as the reserved image that was displayed before the "hourglass reserve change performance" started, and as the sand image falls, the lower part of the illuminating decorative member can be made to glow in the same color as the fallen sand image.
For example, in the case of the performance pattern 05 shown in FIG. 322(e), at timing t2 or t3, the entire luminous decorative member is made to emit light in blue, which is the same color as the reserved image. Next, the luminous decorative member is gradually changed from emitting blue light from below to emitting green light as the sand falls. At timing t6, exactly half of the sand has fallen, and at this time, the luminous decorative member emits light in blue light in the upper half and green light in the lower half. When the sand falls to the end at timing t9, the entire luminous decorative member emits light in green light. It is also preferable to keep the entire luminous decorative member emitting light in green light after timing t9. In addition, in order to make the color change more clear from timing t9 to timing t10, a flashing display may be performed in which the color after the change is alternately turned off and on.
When the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated in this manner, the entire gaming machine can alert those around for a long period of time that the "hourglass reserve change performance" is being executed and that the color of the reserved image has changed.

If the sand falls midway, the light-emitting decorative member should be returned to its original color. For example, in the case of performance pattern 04 in FIG. 322(d), at timing t7, the display of the sand image ends and only the blue pending image is displayed. At the same time, the light-emitting decorative member should be returned to its entire blue illumination.

The panel board rear substrate 2420 provided on the game board 5 can also be illuminated in a similar manner. The shape of the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be the same circular shape as the reserved image. The panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided near the first starting hole 2002, but may be provided in another location. For example, it may be provided near the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 or near a movable decorative member provided on the game board 5.

The timing at which the light turns green, which is the same or similar color as after the pending image changes due to the ``hourglass pending change effect,'' may be a predetermined timing before the display of the decorative pattern changes, or it may be the timing at which the display of the decorative pattern changes.
For example, when a reach state (a state in which the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as the same symbol and the center decorative symbol is scrolling or fluctuating at high speed) occurs, the green light may be terminated. Also, at this time, light may be started in a color corresponding to the reach state.
In addition, if the reach state does not occur and the decorative pattern is displayed in a non-reach state, the green light should continue to be emitted until the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, and the green light should end at the time the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

Alternatively, if a special reach effect occurs, the light may be emitted in a manner corresponding to the special reach effect and the green light emission may end, and if no special reach effect occurs, the green light emission may continue until the decorative pattern is displayed.

At the same time as the start of the "hourglass reserve change performance" or the start of the display of the sand image, the entire illuminating decorative member may be made to emit light in the same color as the sand image (i.e., before the area in which the reserved image is displayed in the "hourglass reserve change performance" begins to be eroded by the new sand color, the entire or part of the illuminating decorative member may be made to emit light in the same color as the new sand color). In that case, all of the sand images of that color may fall without fail. In this manner, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the display mode of the reserved image will change. Although the example in which the reserved image is displayed in blue and the reserved image changes to green due to the "hourglass reserve change performance" has been described, other patterns (for example, the reserved image is displayed in green and the reserved image changes to red due to the "hourglass reserve change performance") can also be applied under the same technical concept. In the case of a pattern in which the player is made aware in advance, the flashing display described above may not be performed (because the player is informed in advance).

The speed at which the sand falls may be changed in response to a predetermined button operation by the player. For example, the speed at which the sand falls may be made faster or slower in response to a predetermined button operation during the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect." The predetermined button operation may be any of a single button press, repeated button presses, long button presses, etc., as appropriate.
The effective operation period of the button operation may be from the start to the end of the "hourglass reserve change effect." Alternatively, it may be from the time the sand image is displayed to the end of the "hourglass reserve change effect."

The buttons may be any of the various buttons described in this specification, or may be configured to respond to the operation of another operating unit such as a lever instead of a button.
In addition, in this specification, when operational input from a player, such as a button (operation unit) or button operation (operation of the operation unit), is accepted, such an embodiment can be appropriately adopted.
In addition, during the effective operation period of the operation unit, a simulated image that imitates the operation unit may be displayed in the display area, and may be called a simulated image instead of a simulated image. In this case, the meaning is the same, that is, an image that imitates the operation unit.

For example, the player may press a button once to increase the speed at which the sand falls, so that all the sand falls in as little as three seconds, or the player may press a button once to slow down the speed at which the sand falls, so that all the sand falls in as long as nine seconds.
Also, if the player presses the button repeatedly, the sand may fall faster, so that all the sand falls in as little as three seconds, or if the player holds down the button, the sand may fall slower, so that all the sand falls in as long as nine seconds.
If the player starts or stops pressing a button during the "hourglass hold change effect," the sand will fall at a speed longer than three seconds or shorter than nine seconds.

The effective operation period may start at the same time as the start of the "hourglass reserve change effect" or the start of the display of the sand image, and a simulated image that mimics the shape of a button may be displayed during the effective operation period. Also, the operation mode (single press, rapid press, long press, etc.) and the effect obtained by the operation ("the sand will fall faster", "the sand will fall slower", etc.) may be displayed at the same time. Also, to let the player know in advance, the imitation image may be displayed before the effective operation period begins, or, to provide a sense of surprise, the imitation image may be displayed after the sand image starts falling (when it is falling and erosion is occurring).

In this way, by changing the speed at which the sand falls and changing the timing at which the display result is obtained depending on the operation mode, it is possible to make the presentation progress quickly or slowly. For example, when green sand, which has a relatively low expectation, is displayed, the presentation can progress quickly, and when gold sand, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed, the presentation can progress slowly, allowing the presentation to be tailored to the player's preferences.

In the "hourglass reserve change performance", at the timing when all the sand has fallen (at this time, the display state shown in FIG. 323(h) is reached), the hourglass image is not erased, and button operation is enabled for a predetermined period (for example, the operation valid period is set to 2 seconds), or the operation valid period is continued as is, and a simulated image imitating the operation unit is displayed at the timing when all the sand has fallen or at a timing after the timing when all the sand has fallen, and at the timing when an operation is performed or when the operation valid period ends without an operation, the hourglass image is erased, or a new hourglass image is displayed at the same time as the hourglass image is erased. In the former case, the "hourglass reserve change performance" ends as it is. In the latter case, a display of new falling sand is performed based on the newly displayed hourglass image and sand image. It is preferable that the newly displayed sand image is a sand image of a color with a higher expectation.
For example, after the blue reserved image is changed to a green reserved image, a new hourglass image and a red sand image are displayed in response to operation of the operating unit, and the red sand is shown falling.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the reserved image will change further even immediately after all the sand has fallen.

When erasing the hourglass image when an operation is performed or when the effective operation period ends without any operation, a plurality of display modes for erasing the hourglass image may be provided, and the degree of expectation may be indicated depending on the display mode.
For example, a display mode may be adopted in which the hourglass image is erased as it is, the hourglass image is broken and scattered around the reserved image and then erased, or the hourglass image is broken and scattered across the entire display area and then erased. The expectation level may increase in this order. Also, an effect unrelated to the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be selected. For example, an hourglass image erasure pattern may be selected at 1/3, and an effect unrelated to the "hourglass reserved change effect" (e.g., an effect that does not affect the reserved change effect such as a comment preview) may be selected at 2/3.

On the other hand, during the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect", the operation validity period of the button operation may not be set, and the simulated image resembling the shape of the button may not be displayed. This allows the player to concentrate on watching the effect.

It is also possible to start displaying a simulated image simulating the shape of a button just before all the sand images have fallen (for example, at timing t8 in FIG. 325(a)), and start the effective operation period after all the sand images have finished falling. Even in this case, the player can concentrate on watching the presentation. It is also possible to start displaying an effect that is displayed just before all the sand images have fallen (for example, at timing t8 in FIG. 325(a)), before the simulated image simulating the shape of a button is displayed, and start displaying the simulated image simulating the shape of a button after all the sand images have finished falling.

As movable members for performance having a decorative function, the frame movable members (right ear frame movable member 7100, left ear frame movable member 7200, etc.) shown with reference to Figs. 118 to 122, etc., and the movable members for performance (panel board rear decorative member 2410, panel board rear substrate 2420, etc.) shown with reference to Figs. 133, 134, etc., may be operated in a predetermined manner in association with the execution of the "hourglass reserve change performance". For example, the decorative members for performance may be moved from the standby position to the moving position during the execution of the "hourglass reserve change performance" (at the start of the "hourglass reserve change performance", when the reserved image is being eroded by the falling of the sand image, or at any timing between when all the sand images have finished falling and when the hourglass image display is erased).
The shape of the decorative components for presentation may be any appropriate shape.
In addition, the operating modes of the decorative elements for performance are not limited to simple movement modes such as moving from a standby position to a moving position, but can include operation modes such as continuous back and forth movement within a specified area, vibrating operation modes, and rotational or rotary movement around a specified axis.

The degree of expectation may be suggested by the type or operation mode of the decorative member for performance. For example, a different degree of expectation may be set for each decorative member for performance, and the degree of expectation may be suggested when the decorative member for performance is operated.
Alternatively, the decorative member for performance may be capable of taking different movement patterns, and when the decorative member for performance moves, different degrees of expectation may be suggested depending on the movement pattern.

Only one of the above-mentioned decorative elements for performance may be operated during the execution of the "hourglass reserved change performance" (at any of the following times: at the start of the "hourglass reserved change performance", when the reserved image is being eroded by the falling sand image, and from the time when all the sand images have finished falling until the image display of the hourglass is erased). Alternatively, multiple of the above-mentioned decorative elements for performance may be operated during the execution of the "hourglass reserved change performance" (at any of the following times: at the start of the "hourglass reserved change performance", when the reserved image is being eroded by the falling sand image, and from the time when all the sand images have finished falling until the image display of the hourglass is erased). In addition, multiple decorative elements for performance may be operated simultaneously or in a predetermined order. In addition, when multiple decorative elements for performance are operated in a predetermined order, for example, the first decorative element for performance may be operated when the reserved image is being eroded by the falling sand image, and the next decorative element for performance may be operated after the erosion is completed, or multiple decorative elements for performance may be operated when the reserved image is being eroded by the falling sand image, or multiple decorative elements for performance may be operated after the erosion is completed.
In addition, the operation of the decorative member for the performance may be started before the execution of the "hourglass reserved change performance" so that the operation may be performed during the execution of the "hourglass reserved change performance". This suggests to the player that the "hourglass reserved change performance" will start.

If the decorative element for the performance is operating while the "hourglass reserved change performance" is being performed (at least while the sand image is falling and encroaching on the area of the reserved image), the operation of the decorative element for the performance may be terminated after the execution of the "hourglass reserved change performance" has finished. Conversely, it is preferable for the decorative element for the performance to be in an operating state (not in its normal position) when the "hourglass reserved change performance" is being performed (at least while the sand image is falling and encroaching on the area of the reserved image). In this way, even if the reserved image does not change due to the "hourglass reserved change performance", the decrease in interest can be suppressed by the decorative element for the performance being in operation.

In this embodiment, the reserved image is displayed in a specified area near the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the ``hourglass reserve change performance'' is also carried out in an area that includes this area, but a decorative component for the performance may be provided that can be moved to the front side of the specified area where the reserved image is displayed.
However, while the "hourglass reserve change performance" is being executed, it is advisable to prevent the decorative members for the performance from moving to the front side of the designated area in which the reserved image is displayed. The decorative members for the performance may not be operated when the reserved image is being eroded by the falling sand image, but may be operated when the erosion ends and a performance such as the hourglass breaking is being performed.

On the other hand, during the execution of the "hourglass reserved change performance" (while the sand image is falling and eroding the area of the reserved image), the performance decoration member may move to the front side of the area where the hourglass image or the reserved image is displayed. For example, the performance decoration member may be moved left and right in front of the area where the hourglass image or the reserved image is displayed, so that the hourglass image or the reserved image is hidden or not hidden.
Alternatively, the decorative member for the performance may be moved to the front side of the area displaying the hourglass image or the reserved image, and stopped temporarily (for example, for about one second) or for the entire duration of the performance. In this case, the hourglass image or the reserved image may not be completely invisible, but a part of the hourglass image or the reserved image may be invisible and a part of the image may be visible. Also, when viewed from the front, the entire hourglass image or the reserved image may be invisible, but when the viewpoint is changed to look in from the left or right, a part or all of the hourglass image or the reserved image may be visible.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes difficult to immediately recognize how much sand has fallen, and the occasional glimpse of the hourglass image and the reserved image stimulates the imagination about the unseen parts (expands the imagination), thereby increasing interest.

It is also possible to prevent any of the decorative elements from moving during the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect." It is also possible to position all of the decorative elements at their standby positions, or to prevent the decorative elements that are at their standby positions before the start of the effect from moving to their standby positions.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can concentrate on the "hourglass reserve change presentation."

The rate at which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed may be, for example, once in every 10 total change displays.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "hourglass reserved change effect" is executed may be different depending on the game status. For example, the rate at which the "hourglass reserved change effect" is executed may be different depending on the number of reserved balls.

Below, we will explain an embodiment in which, when the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 2004 is 0 and a changing display corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002 is performed, the ratio at which the ``hourglass reserved change presentation'' is executed varies depending on the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 2002.
When the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4, it is recommended to execute it once in 5 times, and when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 0, it is recommended to execute it once in 8 times (setting balance 1).
The probability of the reach state occurring is set to 1 in 10. The reach state occurrence probability is set to 1/10. If the reach state does not occur, a jackpot will not occur and the reach performance will not occur, so the player first hopes for the reach state to occur, but if the reach state occurrence probability is extremely high (e.g. 1/2), the expectation of a jackpot will be extremely low even if the reach state occurs, and if the reach state occurrence probability is extremely low (e.g. 1/200), the reach state will not occur at all. Therefore, the probability of the reach state occurrence is set to 1/10 in this embodiment because a setting balance is required that allows the expectation of a jackpot when the reach state occurs and causes the reach state to occur moderately.
In the case of such a setting balance 1, the "hourglass reserve change effect" is performed at a rate higher than the probability of a reach state occurring regardless of the number of reserved balls, so the "hourglass reserve change effect" can be made to function as an effect to increase interest in a situation where a reach state does not occur and non-reach misses are occurring consecutively, and it is possible to wait for the reach state to occur while suppressing a decrease in interest during the period until the reach state occurs. The same effect can be obtained by making the "hourglass reserve change effect" occur once in eight times when the number of reserved balls is 1 to 4, and once in five times when the number of reserved balls is 0.

Alternatively, when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4, it may be executed once in 5 times, and when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 0, it may be executed once in 20 times (setting balance 2).
In this case, the probability of the reach state occurring is 1/10.
In the case of such a setting balance 2, if there is a reserved number, the "hourglass reserved change effect" can be made to function as an effect to improve interest in a situation where a reach state does not occur and non-reach misses are continuous, as in the case of setting balance 1, and it is possible to wait for the occurrence of the reach state while suppressing a decrease in interest during the period until the reach state occurs. On the other hand, if there is no reserved number, when the current variable display ends, the variable display will be interrupted unless there is a new start winning. In such a situation, if the "hourglass reserved change effect" is made to function as an effect to improve interest in a situation where a reach state does not occur and non-reach misses are continuous, it may be the opposite and may rub the player the wrong way. Therefore, in such a situation where the variable display is interrupted (a situation where there is no reserved number), it is more preferable to set the probability that the "hourglass reserved change effect" is displayed so that the player thinks that it is hot (a probability lower than the probability of the reach state occurring), rather than making the "hourglass reserved change effect" function as an effect to improve interest in a situation where a reach state does not occur and non-reach misses are continuous.

Alternatively, when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is between 1 and 4, it may be executed once in 20 times, and when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 0, it may be executed once in 5 times (setting balance 3).
In this case, the probability of the reach state occurring is 1/10.
In the case of this type of setting balance 3, when the number of reserved balls is 0, the "hourglass reserve change effect" functions as an effect to increase interest in a situation where a reach state does not occur and non-reach misses occur consecutively, and when the number of reserved balls is 1 to 4, the "hourglass reserve change effect" is unlikely to appear, so that when the player continues playing, the reserve balls accumulate and the "hourglass reserve change effect" does not appear very often, but if the player tries to stop playing, the "hourglass reserve change effect" becomes more likely to appear, so it is possible to stop the player who was about to stop playing.

In these examples, the execution ratio is different when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4 compared to when it is 0, but this is not limited to the above. The above embodiments may be modified so that the execution ratio is different when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 2 or more compared to 1 or less, when it is 3 or more compared to 2 or less, or when it is 4 compared to 3 or less, if the same effect is obtained.

In addition, execution may be performed at a predetermined rate, not limited to the number reserved at the first starting port 2002.
In this case, the probability of the reach state occurring is 1/10.
In this way, if the "hourglass hold change effect" is made to appear at a rate higher than the probability of the reach state occurring, for example, 1 in 5, regardless of the number of reserved balls, an effect similar to setting balance 1 can be expected, and if the "hourglass hold change effect" is made to appear at a rate lower than the probability of the reach state occurring, regardless of the number of reserved balls, for example, 1 in 20, a sense of excitement can be provided because the mere appearance of the "hourglass hold change effect" itself is exciting.

An effect suggesting that the "hourglass reserved change effect" will be executed may be executed. For example, an hourglass image may be displayed at the top center in the horizontal direction of the display area (this hourglass image is a suggestion image), and the hourglass image may be displayed at the top center in the horizontal direction, and then slowly scroll down and stop at a position where it overlaps with the reserved image, and the execution of the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be started. In addition, the time required for scrolling (the time from when the hourglass image (suggestion image) starts moving to when it stops at a position where it overlaps with the reserved image) may be the same as the execution time of the "hourglass reserved change effect" (7 seconds in the performance pattern 05 of FIG. 322 (e)), or may be longer (for example, 20 seconds), or may be shorter (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, it is preferable that the time from when the hourglass image (suggestion image) starts moving to when it first reaches the overlapping position of the area where the reserved image is displayed (this time is A), which is a part of the time required for scrolling, is longer than the time from when the hourglass image (suggestion image) first reaches the overlapping position of the area where the reserved image is displayed to when it reaches the position where it completely overlaps with the area where the reserved image is displayed (this time is B). This is because the player will be able to know in advance that the "hourglass reserve change effect" will be performed. Even if the time B is made longer than the time A, there is no problem in making the time B longer than the time A, as long as the effect display allows the player to know in advance that the "hourglass reserve change effect" will be performed.
In addition, rather than being limited to scrolling the hourglass image, the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" may be suggested by displaying a dialogue image (such as "Hold change?").
By adopting such a mode, the player can prepare in advance for the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect." Note that this suggestive effect may be executed not only for the reserved item in question, but also for the first to fourth reserved items.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 322 and 323, the color of the reserved image and the color of the sand in the hourglass image were different colors, but below, with reference to Figs. 329 to 331, an embodiment of an "hourglass reserved change presentation" in which the color of the sand image is changed to the same color as the reserved image (for example, both are green) will be described.

Presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 05 in Figure 329 correspond to presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 05 in Figure 322, respectively, but in presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 05 in Figure 329, the color of the reserved image and the color of the sand in the hourglass image are the same color.
Moreover, the display examples shown in Figures 330(a) to 330(h) are display examples corresponding to the display examples shown in Figures 323(a) to 323(h), respectively.
As shown in each figure, the display mode differs in that the colors of the reserved image and the sand image are different or the same, but other aspects (such as the display timing and display mode of various images) are basically the same between the two embodiments, so specific explanations will be omitted.

Below, with reference to presentation pattern 05 in Figure 329, Figures 330 and 331, we will explain the presentation mode after all the sand has fallen.
As shown in the performance pattern 05 of Figure 329, at the timing t9, the falling of the green sand is completed. Figure 330(h) shows an example of the display at this time.
Next, a martial artist character appears from the left side of the display area with a hammer, and is displayed hitting the hourglass image. Next, the hourglass image is rotated 180 degrees by being hit by the hammer, and the reserved image and the sand image are now positioned at the top of the hourglass. These displays are performed from timing t9 to timing t10. Note that the martial artist character remains displayed on the left side of the display area thereafter. Figures 331(a) and 331(b) show the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t10 to timing t16, the sand falls downward. In this case, too, the sand is displayed falling from the top of the hourglass to the bottom over a total of six seconds. Specifically, at timing t12, 1/3 of the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(c)), at timing t14, 2/3 of the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(d)), and at timing t16, all of the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(e)).
Here, the pending image that becomes newly visible as the sand falls is not the green pending image that was displayed when the performance started, but a more promising pending image, for example, red.

Next, the martial artist character moves to the right and approaches the hourglass, destroying it. After that, the display of the destroyed hourglass image ends, and the red reserved image moves downward. The martial artist character also moves to the left, moving off the edge of the display area. These displays are performed from timing t16 to timing t17. Figures 331(f) and 331(g) show the display state at this time.
At timing t17, the movement of the reserved image is completed. Figure 331 (h) shows the display state at this time.

In this manner, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331, a presentation is presented in which the reserved image of a predetermined colour (e.g., green) is displayed as to whether or not it is hidden by a sand image of the same predetermined colour as the reserved image, and if it is hidden, the reserved image of a more promising colour (e.g., red) is displayed as gradually appearing from among the sand image of the predetermined colour.
The color before and after the change of the reserved image may be appropriately selected from the above-mentioned colors. For example, a pattern in which the reserved image in blue changes to the reserved image in red, or a pattern in which the reserved image in red changes to the reserved image in rainbow colors may be executed.

Although it has been explained in relation to the pending image (Figures 331(c) to 331(f)) that the sand falls and gradually becomes visible, it is also possible to make an image different from the pending image, which suggests the expectation of a win, gradually visible. Examples of images different from the pending image are as shown below. When an image different from the pending image is to be displayed, it will be displayed in place of the pending image in red which is displayed above the hourglass in Figures 331(c) to 331(f).
For example, when a text image saying "Pending change!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that the pending image will definitely be promoted at a predetermined timing before the changing display ends.
For example, when a text image saying "Pending change?" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that the pending image may be promoted at a predetermined timing before the changing display ends.
For example, when a text image saying "Pseudo consecutive wins!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that a pseudo consecutive win performance will definitely be performed at a predetermined timing before the variable display ends.
For example, when a text image saying "Pseudo consecutive?" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that there is a possibility that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed at a predetermined timing before the variable display ends.
For example, when a text image saying "Super Hot!" is displayed in place of the reserved image, it suggests that there is an extremely high expectation of a winning combination for that variation.
For example, when a text image saying "Chance!" is displayed in place of the reserved image, it suggests that there is a high expectation of winning the corresponding variation.
For example, if a text image saying "XX reach!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that a XX reach will occur in that variation.
For example, if a text image saying "Congratulations!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that a jackpot will occur in that variation.
It should be noted that the images do not have to be limited to those shown above, and may be modified as appropriate as long as the display is capable of conveying the suggested content to the player, for example by changing "Pseudo-Ren!" to "Ren!".
In addition, when the above image is displayed in place of the reserved image, the image displayed in place of the reserved image is displayed at the position where the red reserved image is displayed in Figure 331 (f), and when the sand image below the hourglass in Figure 331 (f) and the hourglass are erased, the reserved image is displayed in the display mode of the reserved image before the performance was performed.
Needless to say, it is possible to execute both the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "hourglass effect other than the hourglass reserve change effect" as the "hourglass effect".

In addition, multiple speeds at which the sand falls (the time it takes for all the sand to fall) may be provided, and the slower the speed at which the sand falls (the longer it takes for all the sand to fall), the more promising the pending image that is displayed. Alternatively, a display performance that is more promising may be performed.

The specific embodiments and modifications shown with reference to Figures 322 to 328 may be applied to the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331.

The "hourglass reserved image change effect" shown with reference to Figs. 322 to 328 and the "hourglass reserved image change effect" shown with reference to Figs. 329 to 331 may both be implemented. In this case, in the state shown in Figs. 323 and 330, when a reserved image of a specific color is displayed, a display is made in which a sand image of a different color than the reserved image falls, or a sand image of the same color falls. In the case of sand images of different colors, the player can enjoy the effect while anticipating what color the reserved image will change to, and in the case of sand images of the same color, the player can be entertained in two stages, first by wondering whether all the sand will fall or not, and then by wondering what color the reserved image will appear from the sand image.

After executing the "hourglass reserve change presentation" shown with reference to Figures 322 to 328, the "hourglass reserve change presentation" shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331 may be executed.
Alternatively, after executing the "hourglass reserve change presentation" shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331, the "hourglass reserve change presentation" shown with reference to Figures 322 to 328 may be executed.

This type of "hourglass reserve change effect" can provide new excitement to players.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 123 to 321 etc. is shown below with reference to Figures 332 to 334 etc. In this embodiment, a "double roulette effect" is configured to be executable as a special effect. The "double roulette effect" consists of two effects: an "expectation roulette effect" and a "reserve change roulette effect".

The detailed presentation of the "double roulette presentation" will be described below with reference to Figs. 332 to 334. Fig. 332 shows a time chart for the "double roulette presentation". Figs. 333 and 334 show display examples for the "double roulette presentation".
332(a) shows the first half of one variable display, and FIG. 332(b) shows the second half of one variable display. Specifically, FIG. 332(a) shows the presentation mode from timing t0 when the variable display starts to timing t40 when the special reach presentation starts, and FIG. 332(b) shows the presentation mode from timing t40 when the special reach presentation starts to timing t80 when the stop display of the decorative pattern ends.
In addition, a predetermined background image can be displayed in the display area as shown in other embodiments, but this is not shown in the present embodiment.

At timing t0, the display of the decorative pattern begins to change. At the same time as the display begins to change, a fan-shaped expectation roulette image is displayed at the bottom left of the display area, and a fan-shaped reserved change roulette image is displayed at the bottom right of the display area. The kanji character "期" is displayed in the expectation roulette image. Also, the kanji character "護" is displayed in the reserved change roulette image. In addition, in the display where the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image are displayed, the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are changed slightly to the left compared to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125. Also, a normal (white) reserved image is displayed as the reserved image.
Fig. 333(a) shows a display state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state before the variable display is started. Fig. 333(b) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image is displayed in the lower left of the display area and the reserved change roulette image is displayed in the lower right of the display area immediately after the variable display is started. Note that the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a provisionally stopped state.
At timing t1, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol start to change at high speed. Fig. 333(c) shows the display state when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol start to change at high speed.

At timing t5, a convex rotation suggestion image is displayed outside the expectation roulette image. The rotation suggestion image is displayed until the rotation of the expectation roulette image ends. Fig. 333(d) shows a display state in which the rotation suggestion image is displayed.
Next, at timing t6, the expectation roulette image starts to rotate clockwise. Fig. 333(e) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image rotates clockwise. Note that the arrow in the figure indicates the direction of rotation, and does not indicate that the arrow is actually displayed as an image (the same applies to Fig. 334(c) described later).

The expectation roulette image rotates at high speed for two seconds from timing t6 to timing t8, and then is stopped and displayed at timing t8, where the number "30" is displayed as the expectation image. Fig. 333(f) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image is stopped and the number "30" is displayed as the expectation image.
Five types of expectation images are prepared for display: "10", "30", "50", "70", and "99". After the expectation roulette image stops, one of the expectation images is displayed. The number displayed as the expectation image indicates the expectation of a hit for the variation being displayed. For example, the number "30" indicates that the expectation is about 30%.
In this way, the expectation roulette image rotates and one of the multiple expectation images is displayed stationary, allowing the player to recognize the level of expectation.

Next, at timing t40, a special reach effect occurs. In the special reach effect in this embodiment, a martial artist character and a bomb character are displayed in the display area, and a dynamic display of the martial artist character and the bomb character fighting is performed, and if the martial artist character wins, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a big win, and if the bomb character wins, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a loss.
At the start of the special reach effect, a reach title image such as "Fighter VS Bomb" may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds from timing t40 to timing t42). In addition, it is preferable to start the "reserved change roulette effect" at a predetermined timing after the display of the reach title image ends. Alternatively, as shown with reference to Figs. 224 to 272, etc., a special image may be displayed (such as a display that hides the background) at the start of the special reach effect. In addition, the "expectation degree roulette effect" is executable before these images are displayed, and the "reserved change roulette effect" is executable after these images are displayed. In this way, the type of executable effect is switched at the start of the special reach effect, so that the execution timing of both effects becomes different, and the player's attention can be focused on the effect being executed.
334(a) shows the display state when a special reach effect occurs. During the special reach effect, as shown in the figure, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number (in this case, the number "5") is displayed in a temporarily stopped reach state.

Next, at timing t50, a convex rotation suggestion image is displayed outside the reserved change roulette image. The rotation suggestion image is displayed until the rotation of the reserved change roulette image ends. FIG. 334(b) shows the display state in which the rotation suggestion image is displayed.
Next, at timing t51, the reserved change roulette image starts to rotate counterclockwise. Fig. 334(c) shows a display state in which the reserved change roulette image is rotating counterclockwise.

The reserved change roulette image spins at high speed for two seconds from timing t51 to timing t53, and then stops at timing t52, displaying the word "red." Figure 334(d) shows a display state in which the reserved change roulette image stops and displays the word "red."
During the rotation of the reserved change roulette image, five kinds of characters "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are displayed in a cyclical manner in this order. Note that after the rotation of the reserved change roulette image starts and the character "ho" moves from the bottom of the display area to the outside of the screen, the character "ho" is no longer displayed, and the characters "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are displayed in a rotating manner.
After the reserved change roulette image rotates, one of five letters, "blue,""green,""red,""gold," and "rainbow," is displayed as a probability image. The displayed letter indicates the change state of the reserved image, and when "blue" is displayed, the reserved image changes to a blue reserved image, and when "red" is displayed, the reserved image changes to a red reserved image.
At timing t54, one second after the reserved change roulette image stops, the reserved image changes to a red reserved image. FIG. 334(e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, the reserved change roulette image rotates and the specified characters are displayed stationary, allowing the player to recognize to which color the reserved image will change.

Fig. 334(f) shows a state in which the fighter character wins against the bomb character at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t70) during the special reach performance. When this display is made, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating a big win. When the display is made in which the fighter character loses to the bomb character, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating a loss.
After that, at timing t76, the special reach effect ends, and at timing t78, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed. Figure 334(g) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t77, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. The display of the reserved image, the expectation roulette image, and the reserved change roulette image ends at this timing. Figure 334 (h) shows the display state at this time.

In this way, the "Expectation Roulette Effect" is an effect that can be executed before the execution of a special reach effect starts. On the other hand, the "Reserve Change Roulette Effect" is an effect that can be executed during the execution of a special reach effect. As special reach effects, "Giant Tank Reach" (Fig. 224 to Fig. 236, etc.), "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (Fig. 252 to 255, etc.), "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Effect" (Fig. 277, etc.), "The Countdown Reach Effect" (Fig. 277, etc.), etc. can be adopted.
In this manner, in this embodiment, an effect using the expectation roulette image is performed before the start of the special reach effect, and an effect using the reserved change roulette image is performed during the special reach effect. In this manner, the effects using the roulette images are performed at different times and are not performed simultaneously, allowing the player to concentrate on the effects.

Although an example has been shown in which the expectation degree roulette image and the reserved change roulette image are displayed from the start of the changing display to the end of the changing display (until the timing of the decorative pattern stopping display), the display of the expectation degree roulette image and the reserved change roulette image may be started or ended at other timings.
For example, the display of the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change display (for example, when all decorative patterns are changing at high speed, or when some decorative patterns are changing at high speed while other decorative patterns are not changing at high speed (for example, slow change or swaying change)), or when a pseudo-change performance is being performed after suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive combination will occur (for example, when a display is being displayed indicating the number of pseudo-consecutive combinations such as x2 or x3, or when an effect or the like is being displayed on the LCD screen suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive combination is occurring).
Furthermore, even if it is decided to execute a double roulette effect, since the expectation degree roulette effect is executed before the special reach effect is executed and the reserved change roulette effect is executed while the special reach effect is executed, the expectation degree roulette effect and the reserved change roulette effect are not executed at the same time, it is possible to make the effect related to the reserved change roulette effect invisible when the effect related to the expectation degree roulette effect is executed, and to make the effect related to the expectation degree roulette effect invisible when the effect related to the reserved change roulette effect is executed. This is because it is possible to concentrate on the roulette effect that is being displayed.

In this way, even if the effects related to the reserve change roulette effects are hidden while the effects related to the expectation roulette effects are being performed, the start timing of the expectation roulette effects is not limited to the start of the changing display, but may be started, for example, when all decorative symbols are changing at high speed, when some decorative symbols are changing at high speed and other decorative symbols are not changing at high speed (for example, slow change or swaying change), or when a pseudo-changing effect is being performed after suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive will be performed (for example, when a display is being displayed indicating the number of pseudo-consecutives such as x2 or x3, or when an effect or the like is being displayed on the LCD screen suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive is being performed).

In addition, the timing at which the reserve change roulette effect is started is an effect that can be executed at a specified timing while the special reach effect is being executed, and this specified timing may be, for example, immediately after the special reach effect is started, or immediately before the branching timing (the timing at which the result of the win/loss effect is shown) of the win/loss effect in the special reach effect (an effect in which characters, etc. fight, etc., and the result of the variable display ultimately indicates whether it is a win or a miss), or it may be when a display is being displayed that prompts the user to operate an operating means that can be displayed when the special reach effect is being executed.
Whether or not to execute the double roulette effect is determined based on the result of the winning/losing judgment performed at the start of the variation, but whether or not to execute the "double roulette effect" may be determined based on a look-ahead process. In this case, if a winning/losing judgment is performed in advance at the time of the start winning and it is determined that the "double roulette effect" is to be executed, the reserved image corresponding to the start winning may be displayed as a normal reserved image (the reserved image at the time of effect execution) until the "reservation change roulette effect" is started.
Also, instead of or in addition to whether to execute the double roulette effect, it may be determined whether to execute the single roulette effect. The single roulette effect is an effect in which only one of the "expectation roulette effect" or the "reserved change roulette effect" is executed. For example, when it is determined to execute the single roulette effect and to execute the "expectation roulette effect", the "expectation roulette effect" is executed, but the "reserved change roulette effect" is not executed during execution of the special reach effect. Conversely, when it is determined to execute only the "reserved change roulette effect", the "expectation roulette effect" is not executed. Here, since the "reserved change roulette effect" is an effect executed during execution of the special reach effect, only the "expectation roulette effect" can be executed when it is not determined to execute the special reach effect as the variable effect, and when it is determined to execute the special reach effect as the variable effect, it is preferable to select either the double roulette effect, only the "expectation roulette effect", or only the "reserved change roulette effect".
Also, when it is decided to perform a double roulette presentation or a single roulette presentation and the "expectation roulette presentation" is performed, if the number displayed as the expectation image is displayed, it may be displayed until the change ends or may be hidden when the presentation related to the "reserved change roulette presentation" is started. However, for example, the display of the number displayed as the expectation image may be hidden after a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds) has passed, or may be hidden based on the fact that a predetermined operation means has been operated (unlike the expectation roulette presentation, a notice presentation for operating the operation means is displayed and the operation of the operation means for the notice presentation is accepted). Also, for the "reserved change roulette presentation", it may be hidden at the timing when the reserved image changes to the red reserved image or after a predetermined time has passed since that timing. This is because the reserved image allows the color of the reserved image to be clearly determined.
In addition, if the variable display in which it was decided to perform the double roulette effect or the single roulette effect is a miss, and it was decided or decided to perform the double roulette effect or the single roulette effect in the next variable display, the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image may be returned to the initial state (the state in which "period" and "guaranteed" are displayed) and the "double roulette effect" may be executed again in the next variable display. It is more preferable to display the initial state images of the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image (the state in which "period" and "guaranteed" are displayed) even during the period from the fixed stop due to a miss result until the next variable display starts (fixed stop period).

The colors of the expectation roulette image, the reserved change roulette image, and the rotation suggestion image should be expressed in a color that is not used as the color of the reserved image or reserved image (such as gray or brown). This will prevent the player from misunderstanding that the expectation is indicated by the color of the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image, and will make the player interested in the display state after rotation.

Although an example has been shown in which the degree of expectation is indicated by the numbers and letters displayed on the expectation degree roulette image and the pending change roulette image, in addition to these indications, the degree of expectation may be indicated by using color.
For example, the numbers "10", "30", "50", "70", and "99" are displayed as the result of rotation of the expectation roulette image, and the color of the expectation roulette image may be changed to a color corresponding to the number when these numbers are stopped and displayed. For example, the expectation roulette image may be displayed in blue when the stopped and displayed number is "10", in green when it is "30", in red when it is "50", in gold when it is "70", and in rainbow when it is "99". Note that the color of the numbers themselves may be the corresponding color, or the color of the numbers may be a common color, such as black, regardless of the number, and the color of the background other than the numbers may be the corresponding color, or both may be the corresponding colors.
Similarly, the rotation result of the reserved change roulette image is the letters "blue", "green", "red", "gold" and "rainbow", and when these letters are stopped and displayed, the color of the reserved change roulette image may be changed to a color corresponding to the letters. For example, if the stopped and displayed letters are "blue", the reserved change roulette image may be displayed in blue, if the stopped and displayed letters are "green", in green, if the stopped and displayed letters are "red", in red, if the stopped and displayed letters are "gold", in gold, in rainbow, in rainbow. Note that the color of the letters themselves may be the corresponding color, or the color of the letters may be a common color, such as black, regardless of the letters, and the color of the background other than the letters may be the corresponding color, or both may be the corresponding colors.

In addition, instead of changing the color of the expectation roulette image to the color corresponding to the number when the rotation of the expectation roulette image stops, the color of the expectation roulette image may be modified to display the color corresponding to the number from the start of rotation. When the expectation roulette image rotates, the numbers are displayed in the order of "10", "30", "50", "70", "99", "10", "30", etc., but when modified in this way, the expectation roulette image will be visually recognized by the player in the order of blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, blue, green, etc.

When the expectation roulette image is stopped, a display may be made to emphasize to the player which number (or color) has stopped. For example, the displayed numbers may be repeatedly reduced and enlarged during the period when the numbers are stopped, or the numbers may be gradually enlarged over one second from the timing of the stop compared to the rotating numbers.
Alternatively, if the expectation roulette image is displayed in a color corresponding to the number, the brightness of the color may be increased or decreased so that the player perceives it as brighter or darker.

Although an example has been shown in which the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image are rotated at high speed for two seconds and then stopped and displayed, the time required for high-speed rotation may be one second, and in the remaining one second, the rotation speed may be slower than during high-speed rotation or may be gradually slowed down so that the rotating numbers and letters become visible, and then the expectation image as a result display corresponding to the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image may be stopped and displayed.
In addition, while the expectation degree roulette image or the reserved change roulette image is rotating at high speed, the numbers and letters may be made invisible, or they may be difficult to see even though they are rotating at high speed.
In addition, when the expectation degree roulette image or the reserved change roulette image rotates at a low speed, a state where two (multiple) adjacent numbers or letters are displayed at the same time and can be seen, and a state where only one letter or number is displayed and can be seen alternately occur, and finally the state where only one letter or number is displayed is displayed and it stops. Alternatively, it may be displayed so that three (multiple) adjacent numbers or letters can be displayed at the same time and can be seen.

The numbers displayed on the expectation roulette image may be displayed in the order of "10", "30", "50", "70", and "99", or in the order of "99", "70", "50", "30", and "10", or may be displayed in a random order.
The letters displayed on the reserve change roulette image may be displayed in the order of "blue,""green,""red,""gold," and "rainbow," or in the order of "rainbow,""gold,""red,""green," and "blue," or in a random order.

In the performance examples shown with reference to Figures 332 to 334, the "expectation roulette performance" was performed only once, but it may be performed multiple times (two or more times). Below, an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 332(a) is shown with reference to Figure 335, but since the reserved images displayed are all normal (white) reserved images, the display mode of the reserved images is omitted in the time chart.
When the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times, it is preferable to display a number indicating a higher expectation than the number displayed the previous time. The effect pattern 01 shown in Fig. 335(a) is an effect pattern in which the second "expectation roulette effect" is executed from timing t14 to timing t16, and "50" is displayed.
Alternatively, in addition to a number indicating a higher expectation level compared to the previously displayed number, the same number as before the performance was executed may be displayed.

When the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times, a number with a relatively lower expectation compared to the number displayed immediately before may be displayed in the next effect. The effect pattern 02 shown in FIG. 335(b) is an effect pattern in which the first "expectation roulette effect" is executed from timing t6 to timing t8, displaying "50," and the second "expectation roulette effect" is executed from timing t14 to timing t16, displaying "30."

In addition, the "expectation roulette effect" may be made possible to be executed three or more times, so that a number with a relatively low expectation compared to the number displayed initially is displayed the second time, and then a number with a relatively high expectation is displayed.
Presentation pattern 03 shown in Figure 335 (c) is a presentation pattern in which the first "expectation roulette presentation" is executed from timing t6 to timing t8, displaying "50", the second "expectation roulette presentation" is executed from timing t14 to timing t16, displaying "30", and the third "expectation roulette presentation" is executed from timing t22 to timing t24, displaying "70".
In this way, a number with a relatively lower expectation than the first number displayed, such as "50" → "30" → "70", may be displayed the second time, and then a number with a relatively higher expectation than the first and second numbers may be displayed the third time.

In addition, it is also possible to have the number ("30") that has a lower expectation than the number "50" that was displayed the first time be displayed the third time, such as "50" → "10" → "30", or to have a number ("50") that has the same expectation as the number displayed the first time be displayed, such as "50" → "10" → "50".

Even if the number "99" with the highest expectation is displayed, it may be changed to a number with a lower expectation due to the next or subsequent performance, or the number with the highest expectation, "99", may be displayed again after changing to a number with a lower expectation. For example, the numbers may be displayed as "99" → "10" → "99".

In addition, after the display of the number with high expectation changes to the number with low expectation, the number with relatively low expectation may be displayed several times, and then the number with high expectation may be displayed again. For example, the numbers may be displayed as follows: "99" → "10" → "30" → "99", "99" → "50" → "30" → "99", "99" → "10" → "50" → "99", "99" → "50" → "99" → "30" → "99".
By adopting such an embodiment, the player's emotions can be varied, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, when the number "99" with the highest expectation is displayed, "99" may be displayed again in the next or subsequent performances, or even if a number with a low expectation is displayed once, "99" may be displayed in the final performances. In other words, when the number "99" with the highest expectation is displayed even once, "99" may be displayed in the final performance even if a number with a low expectation is displayed once. For example, numbers may be displayed in the order of "99" → "99", "99" → "99" → "99", "99" → "50" → "99", "99" → "50" → "99" → "70" → "99".
By adopting such an embodiment, the player is made to feel anxious that a number with low expectation will be displayed, but the number with the highest expectation is ultimately displayed, thereby maintaining the player's confidence in the presentation.

As shown with reference to Figures 332 to 335, the number that stops and is displayed at a specified timing is one of multiple numbers (multiple types may be displayed while the roulette is spinning). Therefore, even if a number with high expectation is displayed, the execution of the effect may cause the number with low expectation to be displayed instead of the number with high expectation, creating a sense of tension for the player.

When the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times, it is preferable to execute the next "expectation roulette effect" after a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed as the interval time (i.e., the time during which the spin result is displayed) after the end of the effect (for example, in the case of effect pattern 01 shown in Figure 335 (a), for five seconds from timing t8 to timing t13).
It is desirable to set the interval time to a length (for example, one second or more) that allows the player to clearly see the displayed numbers, thereby ensuring a period of time to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a big win.
In addition, when the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times, the time (e.g., 5 seconds) from the end of the effect to the start of the next effect should be the same. For example, in the case of the effect pattern 03 shown in Fig. 335(c), the execution of the next effect starts after waiting for 5 seconds from timing t8 to timing t13 and 5 seconds from timing t16 to timing t21.
Alternatively, the interval time may not be the same but may be gradually shortened or lengthened, or each interval time may be determined randomly. For example, in the performance pattern 04 shown in Fig. 335(d), the interval time is gradually shortened to 5 seconds, 4 seconds, and 3 seconds.

In this way, after the "expectation roulette effect" is performed multiple times, the special reach effect is initiated, which allows the player to have high or low expectations regarding the outcome of the special reach effect, depending on the outcome of the "expectation roulette effect."

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 332 to 334, an example is shown in which the "reserve change roulette effect" is performed only once. In this way, by performing the "reserve change roulette effect" only once, the player's attention can be focused on the battle between characters (for example, a martial artist character and a bomb character) that is performed during the special reach effect.

On the other hand, the "reserved change roulette effect" may be executed multiple times. Below, a modified effect pattern of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 332(b) will be described with reference to FIG.
The presentation pattern 01 shown in Fig. 336(a) shows a presentation example in which the "reserve change roulette presentation" is performed twice. The presentation pattern 02 shown in Fig. 336(b) shows a presentation example in which the "reserve change roulette presentation" is performed three times.
In the case of performance pattern 01, the reserved image changes from the normal (white) reserved image to a blue reserved image, and then changes from the blue reserved image to a red reserved image.
In addition, in the case of performance pattern 01, the reserved image changes from the normal (white) reserved image to a blue reserved image, then changes from the blue reserved image to a red reserved image, and further changes from the red reserved image to a gold reserved image.
In this way, by making it possible to execute the "reserve change roulette presentation" multiple times, even if a relatively low-promise result is displayed, the player can have the expectation that the "reserve change roulette presentation" will be executed again and a more promising result will be displayed.

If the character "rainbow", which is the most promising character, is displayed as the execution result of the "reserve change roulette effect", it is preferable to prevent the "reserve change roulette effect" from being executed thereafter. For example, if the character "rainbow" is displayed as the execution result of the first "reserve change roulette effect", the second and subsequent "reserve change roulette effects" will not be executed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to focus the player's attention on the content of the special reach performance itself (the battle between characters).

As a result of executing the "reserved change roulette effect", when the character "rainbow" with the highest expectation is displayed and the reserved image changes to rainbow colors, a special bonus display may be displayed after the reserved image changes to rainbow colors. The special bonus display may be, for example, a display that changes the image displayed in the special reach effect (for example, changing the hammer held by the martial artist character to a rainbow hammer and displaying it), a display that is added to the image displayed in the special reach effect (for example, by displaying the rainbow hammer in a manner overlapping the front side of the reserved change roulette image, suggesting that the attack with the martial artist character's hammer is powerful (easy to hit), etc.), or a display that is not displayed in the special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect, for example, a display that may be displayed even outside the special reach effect, such as displaying a bromide photo of a celebrity). Since "rainbow", the character with the highest expectation, is displayed, the player's expectation is at its highest, but by displaying a display that is not displayed in a special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect and may be displayed in other than the special reach effect, such as a photo of a celebrity, for example), it is possible to provide the player with an excited state that exceeds the limit of the expectation at its highest.
The special bonus display may be displayed at a predetermined rate (for example, once in 20 times) when the character "rainbow" with the highest expectation is displayed, instead of being displayed every time when the character "rainbow" with the highest expectation is displayed. The special bonus display may also be displayed even when a character other than "rainbow" with the highest expectation is displayed. However, in this case, the rate at which the special bonus display is displayed may be reduced as the character has a lower expectation. In other words, the special bonus display is less likely to be displayed when the character has a lower expectation. In this way, a premium feeling is created in the special bonus display, and if a character other than "rainbow" with the highest expectation is displayed and the lottery result is a loss, the disappointment of the loss can be reduced to some extent. In addition, when a character other than "rainbow" with the highest expectation is displayed and the special bonus display is displayed, it may be confirmed that the winner has won. In this way, the special bonus display can suggest the result of the special lottery.
In addition, when a display that is not displayed in a special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect and may be displayed in other ways besides the special reach effect, such as displaying a photo of a celebrity) is displayed after the character "rainbow", which has the highest expectation, is displayed and the reserved image changes to rainbow colors, this display that is not displayed in a special reach effect may be displayed overlapping the position where the reserved change roulette image was displayed, or may be displayed overlapping the entire area where the reserved change roulette image was displayed.
In addition, displays that are not displayed during special reach effects (displays that are completely unrelated to special reach effects and may be displayed even outside of special reach effects, such as displaying a photo of a celebrity) may be displayed even if the hold change roulette effect is not performed, or may be displayed after the display of the special reach effect has ended.
In addition, when a display that is not displayed in a special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect and may be displayed even in cases other than the special reach effect, such as a photo of a celebrity) is being displayed, a mock image of an effect button or the like may be displayed, and an instruction display is given encouraging a specified operation, and, for example, the display of the photo may be switched (changed) whether or not an operation is performed in accordance with the instruction display, or the player may be allowed to select the type of photo (for example, male idol, female idol, etc.).

With reference to Fig. 332, an embodiment in which an "expectation roulette effect" and a "reserve change roulette effect" are each executed once in a "double roulette effect" has been shown. Also, with reference to Fig. 335, an embodiment in which an "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times in a "double roulette effect" has been shown. Also, with reference to Fig. 336, an embodiment in which a "reserve change roulette effect" is executed multiple times in a "double roulette effect" has been shown. Also, there has been shown a case in which an "expectation roulette effect" and a "reserve change roulette effect" are not executed in a "double roulette effect".
These embodiments may be combined. For example, in the "double roulette effect", the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed 0, 1, or multiple times (2 or more), and the "reserved change roulette effect" may be executed 0, 1, or multiple times (2 or more), and the "expectation roulette effect" and the "reserved change roulette effect" may be executed a predetermined number of times (or not even once) by appropriately combining these.
For example, a presentation pattern in which the "expectation roulette presentation" is executed twice and the "reserved change roulette presentation" is not executed may be executable, or a presentation pattern in which the "expectation roulette presentation" is executed once and the "reserved change roulette presentation" is executed three times may be executable, but the most effective combination of the execution times of the "expectation roulette presentation" and the "reserved change roulette presentation" is a pattern in which the "expectation roulette presentation" is executed multiple times (two or more times) but the "reserved change roulette presentation" is executed only once. Since the "expectation roulette presentation" is a presentation that is executed before the occurrence of a special reach presentation, the expectation of the player is not so high, and if an image with a low expectation value is displayed in the "expectation roulette presentation", if the number is not changed thereafter, the expectation for the variable display in which the "expectation roulette presentation" is performed is lost until the end of the variable display (the stop of the fixed pattern). Therefore, it is preferable to execute the "expectation roulette presentation" multiple times (two or more times). On the other hand, the "reserve change roulette effect" is an effect that is performed after a special reach effect occurs, so the player's expectations are quite high. In this situation, if the "reserve change roulette effect" is performed multiple times, the player will not be able to concentrate on the special reach effect, and there is also a risk that the player will miss the expectation suggestion effect in the special reach effect (for example, an effect that suggests the expectation level by having multiple colors of letters or multiple character cut-ins).

Of the "double roulette effects," the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed only before the decorative pattern reaches a reach state, and the "reserve change roulette effect" may be executed only after the decorative pattern reaches a reach state.
In addition, among the "double roulette effects", the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed only before the decorative symbols reach a ready state, and the "reserved change roulette effect" may be executed only after the decorative symbols reach a ready state and a special ready effect has occurred. In this case, it is preferable to display each of the roulette effects when they are executed. For example, when the "expectation roulette effect" starts to be executed but the "reserved change roulette effect" does not start to be executed, only the display related to the "expectation roulette effect" is displayed.

The size of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" of the "double roulette effect" is smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the state before the decorative pattern becomes a reach state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 333(e)), and is larger than the size of the decorative pattern in the state where a special reach effect occurs (for example, the state shown in FIG. 334(a)). In this way, it is preferable to make the size of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" larger or smaller than the size of the decorative pattern depending on the timing at which the expectation roulette image is displayed. On the other hand, the size of the roulette image in the "reservation change roulette effect" of the "double roulette effect" is always larger than the size of the decorative pattern. This is because the player is aware that the reach state is in progress because the timing at which the "reservation change roulette effect" occurs is when a special reach effect is being performed, and the decorative pattern does not have much role (meaning).
In the display examples shown with reference to Figures 333 and 334, the size of the decorative patterns is changed, but instead of or in addition to changing the size of the decorative patterns, the size of the roulette image in the "double roulette effect" may be changed.

Although the display position of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette presentation" has been described as the bottom left of the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600, it is not limited to the bottom left of the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600, but may be approximately the center of the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600, or approximately the bottom center of the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600, or the display position may be changed at an appropriate timing when the "expectation roulette presentation" is started, or the expectation may be suggested depending on the display position. For example, the expectation of a win is higher when the expectation roulette image is displayed approximately in the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device than when it is displayed at the bottom left.
In addition, when the entire expectation roulette image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the number displayed in a predetermined position (for example, directly above) when the rotation stops can be used as the stopping result indicating the expectation.

The "hold change roulette effect" is executed during a special reach effect, but in the special reach effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in small size, so that the player can focus on the "hold change roulette effect."

When the "reserved change roulette effect" is executed, the small decorative symbols may be displayed even smaller or may be erased. Also, when the execution of the "reserved change roulette effect" is finished, the display of the small decorative symbols may be resumed.
In addition, when the "reserved change roulette effect" is executed before or after the start of a special reach effect, or when it is executed in a variable display where a special reach effect is not executed, the size of the decorative pattern may be reduced or the size of the reserved change roulette image may be increased at the start of the effect, similar to the case of the expectation degree roulette image. Also, at the end of the effect, the size of the decorative pattern may be returned to the original size, or the size of the reserved change roulette image may be returned to the original size.

The "double roulette effect" may be executed over multiple variable display times. In this case, the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed before the variable display starts based on a look-ahead process. For example, the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed to display a predetermined number in response to a reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the number may be displayed until the variable display corresponding to this reserved image ends. In this case, since the player does not know which reserved image the expectation is shown for, the expectation can be maintained until the display of the number ends.
On the other hand, for the "reserve change roulette presentation", it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute the presentation when the variable display starts, and to make it possible to execute the presentation at a predetermined timing during the variation of the decorative pattern (i.e., the "reserve change roulette presentation" is not executed before the variable display for the "reserve change roulette presentation" starts). This allows the player to have a sense of expectation that the "reserve change roulette presentation" will be executed, suggesting a higher expectation, even if a normal (white) reserved image is displayed as the reserved image at the start of the special reach presentation.

During the execution of the "expectation roulette effect", a predetermined display effect suggesting the expectation may be executed. Similarly, during the execution of the "reservation change roulette effect", a predetermined display effect suggesting the expectation may be executed.
As the predetermined display effect, for example, a predetermined comment may be displayed together with the display of a character image, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the content or color of the comment. Alternatively, a timer image that counts down a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) may be displayed, and a predetermined image may be displayed when the timer reaches 0 seconds, suggesting the predetermined degree of expectation by the type of image displayed. In addition to this, the predetermined degree of expectation may be suggested by the type of color or shape of the timer image, the time of the timer that is initially displayed (i.e., the time elapsed until 0 seconds), etc.
In addition, the specified display effect executed during the execution of the "expectation level roulette effect" and the specified display effect executed during the execution of the "hold change roulette effect" may be the same display effect or different display effects.
In addition, a specified display effect may be started while the ``expectation level roulette effect'' or the ``reserve change roulette effect'' is being executed, or the ``expectation level roulette effect'' or the ``reserve change roulette effect'' may be started while a specified display effect is being executed.
In addition, a specified display effect may be ended while the "expectation level roulette effect" or the "reserve change roulette effect" is being executed, or the "expectation level roulette effect" or the "reserve change roulette effect" may be ended while the specified display effect is being executed.
According to this embodiment, multiple entertainment options can be provided to the player.

Although the "expectation roulette presentation" and the "reserved change roulette presentation" have been described, both the expectation and the reserved change may be suggested by a presentation using one roulette image. For example, only one roulette image may be displayed, and one of ten numbers and letters, "10", "30", "50", "70", "99", "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow", may be displayed as a display result when the roulette spins and stops.
In addition, similar effects using roulette images may be executed for other display effects as well, not limited to expectation level and reserve change.
For example, the words "change", "pseudo consecutive", "rise", etc. may be displayed. Note that "change" suggests that a reserve change will be made, "pseudo consecutive" suggests that a pseudo consecutive will be made, and "rise" suggests that, for example, the color of the displayed comment will differ depending on the expectation level, and when it is displayed in a color with low expectation level, "rise" will change to a color with high expectation level.

Alternatively, a "change roulette effect," a "pseudo consecutive roulette effect," a "rising roulette effect," and a "development reach roulette" may be provided, and the change mode, the pseudo consecutive mode, the rising mode, or the special reach effect may be selected from a plurality of options. Note that it is preferable to make the degree of expectation suggested different depending on the option.
The "changing roulette effect" and the "rising roulette effect" are as described above, but in the case of a "pseudo consecutive roulette effect", the specific number of pseudo consecutive times to be executed may be suggested, and in the case of an "advanced reach roulette effect", the specific reach effect to be executed may be suggested. Note that in each roulette effect, the image when the roulette is spinning may be the same, and a predetermined display (for example, pseudo consecutive! or rising!) may be made when the roulette is stopped and displayed, or the type displayed may be distinguished from the image when the roulette is spinning.

Although an embodiment in which the "expectation roulette effect" and the "reserved change roulette effect" are executed in two places in the display area has been shown, the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed in each of the two places in the display area. Also, the "reserved change roulette effect" may be executed in each of the two places in the display area. In this way, the same roulette effect may be executed in two places.
In this case, the roulette effects may be started to be executed at the same time, and the display result as the roulette effect may be made at the same time, so that a display with high expectation is applied; alternatively, after one roulette effect is started to be executed and before the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, the other roulette effect may be started to be executed and before the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, and after the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, the other roulette effect may be stopped and displayed; or alternatively, one roulette effect may be started to be executed and the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, the result of the stopped display is made non-display and the other roulette effect may be started to be executed.
Even in this case, it is preferable to execute a specified roulette effect that starts when a special reach effect is being executed only once, and to allow the roulette effect before the special reach effect to be executed multiple times.
To explain in detail, for example, in the "double roulette effect", when it is decided to execute both "expectation roulette effects", one of the expectation roulette effects can be executed multiple times before the special reach effect is executed (for example, the expectation image is displayed as "10" → "30" → "50", "99" → "10" → "99", or "99" → "99" → "99"), and the other expectation roulette effect is executed once while the special reach effect is executed. In this case, it is preferable to hide the display result of one of the expectation roulette effects before the other expectation roulette effect is executed (for example, at the timing when the special reach effect is executed, the timing when the other expectation roulette effect is executed, or after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the display result of one of the expectation roulette effects is executed). This is because there is a risk of the player becoming confused if multiple expectation images are displayed.
In addition, since the result displayed in one expectation roulette presentation is hidden when the result displayed in the other expectation roulette presentation is displayed, it is possible that the player has forgotten the result displayed in one expectation roulette presentation, and therefore it is not necessary to display a result higher than the result displayed in one expectation roulette presentation, and the other expectation roulette presentation may display the lowest expectation ("10" as an expectation image). Also, a result display higher than the result displayed in one expectation roulette presentation may be displayed in the other expectation roulette presentation.

In addition, in the "double roulette effect", when it is decided to execute both "hold change roulette effects", the hold display is displayed even when the special reach effect is displayed, so so-called downgrading does not occur. In such a case, if multiple hold changes are performed before the special reach effect is performed, the display may be in a manner suggesting that multiple hold changes will be performed (for example, "hold change! x 2"), or may not suggest that multiple hold changes will be performed. In addition, if the result display as the hold change roulette effect is "hold change! (display result without showing a specific color)", the hold display after the change may be displayed immediately after "hold change!" is displayed, or the hold display after the change may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed instead of displaying the hold display after the change immediately.
The type of roulette presentation to be used is determined based on the results of the win/loss judgment, but with regard to the "pseudo consecutive roulette presentation," since the pseudo consecutive presentation does not occur after the special reach presentation is executed, it is not determined whether to execute the "pseudo consecutive roulette presentation" after the special reach presentation is executed.
Furthermore, the roulette effect may be executed in three or more display areas, not limited to two, or may be executed in only one display area.
Furthermore, as described above, it may be possible to execute roulette effects other than the "expectation level roulette effect" and the "reserve change roulette effect"("change roulette effect,""pseudo consecutive roulette effect," and "rise roulette effect"), and it may also be possible to execute an appropriate combination of each roulette effect.

In addition, "x" or "?" may be displayed as the display result for each roulette performance. For example, a roulette with "期" displayed starts and "?" is displayed as the display result, or a roulette with "預" displayed starts and "x" is displayed as the display result, with no reserve change.

This "double roulette effect" can provide new excitement to players.

Modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 etc. will be described below with reference to FIGS. 337 to 344 etc.
In the "silhouette preview performance", which is a special performance in the embodiment shown below, multiple characters are displayed as silhouettes in a performance window displayed in the display area, and then one of the characters is displayed to indicate the expectation level. Note that this "silhouette preview performance" is a performance that can be executed after a special reach performance (all SP reach performances excluding normal reaches or some of the SP reach performances excluding normal reaches (such as the battle reach performance described above)) has started.

First, the characters displayed in the "Silhouette Preview" will be explained with reference to Figures 337 and 339. Four types of characters are available for display in this performance: martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character.

FIG. 337(a) shows an image of a martial artist character painted in multiple colors.
FIG. 337(b) shows a state in which a martial artist character is displayed as a monochrome silhouette in the presentation window.
Figure 337 (c) shows a state in which the martial artist character is displayed as a monochrome silhouette in the production window, and a halo image is displayed behind the martial artist character, appearing to resemble a halo.
FIG. 337(d) shows a state in which a martial artist character painted in multiple colors is displayed in the presentation window.
337(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the performance window together with a martial artist character painted in multiple colors. In this example, the character image "Super Hot" is displayed on the tip of the hammer. Other character images may be displayed, but details will be described later.
FIG. 337(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed together with a martial artist character painted in multiple colors in the production window.
FIG. 337(g) shows a state in which a martial artist character painted in multiple colors is trembling and trembling in excitement in the performance window, and a dialogue image is being displayed.

FIG. 338(a) shows a warrior character image painted in multiple colors.
Figure 338 (b) shows a warrior character displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the presentation window.
Figure 338 (c) shows a warrior character displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the production window, along with a halo image that is positioned behind the warrior character and is perceived as a halo.
Figure 338(d) shows a state in which a warrior character painted in multiple colors is displayed in the production window.
338(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the performance window together with a warrior character painted in multiple colors. In this example, the character image "Super Hot" is displayed near the sword. Other character images may be displayed, but details will be described later.
Figure 338 (f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed in the production window along with a warrior character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 338 (g) shows in the production window a warrior character painted in multiple colors, wearing a tiara and armor, holding a sword, and displaying a dialogue image.

FIG. 339(a) shows an image of a samurai character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 339(b) shows a samurai character displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the production window.
Figure 339 (c) shows a state in which a samurai character is displayed as a monochrome silhouette in the production window, and a halo image is displayed behind the samurai character, appearing to resemble a halo.
Figure 339(d) shows a samurai character painted in multiple colors displayed in the production window.
Fig. 339(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the performance window together with a samurai character painted in multiple colors. In this example, the character image "Super Hot" is displayed on the headband worn on the forehead. Other character images may be displayed, but details will be described later.
Figure 339 (f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed in the production window along with a samurai character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 339 (g) shows a state in which a samurai character painted in multiple colors is holding his sword in a cross shape in the production window, and a dialogue image is displayed.

FIG. 340(a) shows an image of a wizard character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 340 (b) shows a wizard character displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the presentation window.
Figure 340 (c) shows a state in which the wizard character is displayed as a monochrome silhouette in the performance window, along with a halo image that is placed behind the wizard character and is perceived as a halo.
Figure 340 (d) shows a wizard character painted in multiple colors displayed in the presentation window.
340(e) shows a state in which a text image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the performance window together with a wizard character painted in multiple colors. In this example, the text image "Super Hot" is displayed at the tip of the wand. Other text images may be displayed, but details will be described later.
Figure 340 (f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed in the performance window along with a wizard character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 340 (g) shows a wizard character painted in multiple colors in the production window, raising his left hand and holding up his wand, along with a dialogue image being displayed.

Figures 337(a), 338(a), 339(a), and 340(a) show character images, with each character having a different hairstyle, facial expression, body shape, outfit, and weapon. These parts are also painted in a number of different colors. This allows the detailed aspects of the facial expression, hairstyle, and outfit to be seen within the outline of the character. In this embodiment, this type of display mode is sometimes called a non-silhouette display or a non-silhouette display. In this display, each character has a different hair color and clothing color. For example, a warrior character may have brown hair and blue clothing, and a wizard character may have pink hair and clothing. This type of non-silhouette display mode allows the player to easily recognize which character is being displayed.

On the other hand, in this performance, only the outlines of these characters can be recognized, and the inside of the outlines may be displayed in a manner in which only a predetermined color (for example, black or gray) is filled in. Figures 337(b), 337(c), 338(b), 338(c), 339(b), 339(c), 340(b), and 340(c) show a state in which the inside of the outline of each character is displayed in a manner in which it is filled in with a predetermined color. In this embodiment, this type of display mode is sometimes called a silhouette display. According to this display mode, the characters are displayed like shadow pictures or silhouettes, and only the outlines are visible, so although it is not visible whether the character described above has "super hot" displayed as a text image suggesting the degree of expectation, it is easy to recognize which of the characters it is.
It should be noted that rather than filling the inside of each character's outline with only one color, it may be filled with a predetermined pattern (e.g., a gradation or checkerboard pattern, etc.), and such a display mode may also be included in the silhouette display.

Figures 337(c), 338(c), 339(c), and 340(c) show a state in which a halo image is displayed behind a character displayed as a silhouette. Note that the display of a halo image suggests that expectations are higher than when a halo image is not displayed, but more details will be given later.

Figures 337(e), 338(e), 339(e), and 340(e) show a state in which a text image ("Super Hot") is displayed on a part of a character's weapon or body. The types of text images that can be displayed are "Chance," "Super Hot," and "Spot on," suggesting that the expectation level increases in that order, but details will be given later.

In Figures 337(f), 338(f), 339(f), and 340(f), a dialogue image is displayed to the left of the character displayed in a non-silhouette form. Note that each character is not displayed in a moving manner as described below, but is displayed statically.

In Figures 337(g), 338(g), 339(g), and 340(g), a dialogue image is displayed to the left of the character displayed in silhouette, and each character is dynamically displayed, such as moving, to show a change in the display mode (hereinafter, the dynamic display of each character moving may be referred to as a "specific display"). Note that the change in display mode suggests that there is a higher expectation than if the display mode does not change, but more details will be given later.

Next, the performance pattern of the "silhouette preview performance" will be described with reference to the performance pattern table of FIG. 341. In this embodiment, performance patterns 01 to 13 are provided. In addition, in each performance pattern, a plurality of execution modes may be provided for a given performance. For example, in "whether or not there is a halo when the silhouette is displayed,""display mode of the character when the character is confirmed,""text display when the character is displayed," and "character action," one of the plurality of display modes is selected and the performance is executed.
In the "Silhouette Preview Performance," silhouette characters are first displayed four times, and then one of these characters is displayed.
As shown in the "First Silhouette Display" column in FIG. 341, a silhouette of a martial artist character is displayed the first time.
Next, as shown in the "Second silhouette display" column in FIG. 341, a silhouette of a warrior character is displayed for the second time.
Next, a silhouette of a samurai character is displayed for the third time, as shown in the "Third Silhouette Display" column in Figure 341. The display mode up to the third silhouette display is common to all performance patterns.
Next, as shown in the "4th silhouette display" column in Fig. 341, one of the four characters is displayed in silhouette for the fourth time. Specifically, one of the martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character is displayed.

As shown in the "Whether or not to display a halo when displaying a silhouette" column in Figure 341, the display mode of the character when the silhouette is displayed for the first through fourth times can be either when no halo image is displayed behind the character, or when a halo image is displayed behind the character, and either display mode can be selected.
These display modes will be described using a martial artist character as an example. Fig. 337(b) shows an example of a martial artist character being displayed in a mode in which a halo image is not displayed. Fig. 337(c) shows an example of a martial artist character being displayed in a mode in which a halo image is displayed.

Thereafter, if there are three characters displayed, i.e., if the wizard character is not selected in the "fourth silhouette display", the three characters, the martial artist character, the warrior character, and the samurai character, are switched and displayed at high speed, and then one of the three characters displayed is finally displayed as still. The characters that are displayed as still are as shown in the "Finally displayed as still" column in Figure 341, and in the case of performance pattern 01 to performance pattern 03, the martial artist character is displayed as still, in the case of performance pattern 05 to performance pattern 07, the warrior character is displayed as still, and in the case of performance pattern 09 to performance pattern 11, the samurai character is displayed as still.
On the other hand, when there are four characters displayed, i.e., when the wizard character is selected in the "fourth silhouette display", the four characters, the martial artist character, the warrior character, the samurai character, and the wizard character, are switched and displayed at high speed, and then one of the four characters displayed is finally frozen. The characters frozen are as shown in the "Finally frozen character" column in Figure 341, and in the case of presentation pattern 04, the martial artist character is frozen, in the case of presentation pattern 08, the warrior character is frozen, in the case of presentation pattern 12, the samurai character is frozen, and in the case of presentation pattern 13, the wizard character is frozen.

As shown in the "Character display mode when character is confirmed" column in FIG. 341, there are two types of character display modes when stopped: "silhouette display" and "non-silhouette display", and either mode can be selected.
These display modes will be explained using a martial artist character as an example. Fig. 337(b) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in the "silhouette display" display mode. Fig. 337(d) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in the "non-silhouette display" display mode.
When a character is displayed as a silhouette, the character gradually begins to take on color from this state, and becomes painted in a plurality of colors rather than a silhouette.

When comparing a case where a halo is not displayed with a case where a halo is displayed, the expectation is higher for the latter.
The type of character displayed also indicates the degree of expectation. Specifically, the degree of expectation increases in the order of martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character.
Also, when a character is finalized, there are cases where the character is displayed as a silhouette and cases where the character is not displayed as a silhouette (i.e., the character is not displayed as a silhouette but is suddenly displayed in multiple colors), with the latter case being more anticipated.
Furthermore, when a character is determined, the expectation of a big win may be set higher when the character is displayed as a silhouette than when the character is not displayed as a silhouette.
Also, when a character is finalized, the expectation level for either the case where the character is displayed as a non-silhouette or as a silhouette may be set to 100%, and the expectation level for the other case may be set to less than 100%. By setting either case to 100%, a sense of security is provided when an effect with 100% expectation level is displayed, and the sense of expectation is maintained even if an effect with 100% expectation level is not displayed.

In a mode in which a character is displayed in multiple colors (i.e., in a non-silhouette display), a text image may be displayed together with the character to indicate the degree of expectation. As shown in the "Text display when character is displayed" column in Fig. 341, one of the following modes may be selected: a mode in which no text is displayed, a mode in which the text "Chance" is displayed, a mode in which a text image of "Super Hot" is displayed, or a mode in which the text "Opt" is displayed. Taking a martial artist character as an example, Fig. 337(e) shows an example in which the martial artist character's hammer is displayed with the text "Super Hot" written on it.
The degree of expectation increases in the order of the mode in which no text is displayed, the mode in which the text "chance" is displayed, the mode in which the text "super hot" is displayed, and the mode in which the text "right" is displayed. The degree of expectation for the mode in which the text "right" is displayed is 100%. The occurrence rate decreases in the order of the mode in which no text is displayed, the mode in which the text "chance" is displayed, the mode in which the text "super hot" is displayed, and the mode in which the text "right" is displayed.

After the character is confirmed, a predetermined dialogue image is displayed next to the character, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the character type and the dialogue displayed, as shown in the "Character dialogue" column in Fig. 341. For example, in the case of a martial artist character, the dialogue displayed is "Go, fight, and come back! Just like always!"
Simultaneously with the display of the lines, a display (dynamic display) may be made in which the character performs a specific action, such as swinging a weapon, as shown in the "Character Action" column of FIG.
Taking a martial artist character as an example, Fig. 337(f) shows a display mode in which the martial artist character does not perform a predetermined action, while Fig. 337(g) shows an example in which the martial artist character is dynamically displayed in a "whole body shaking" mode.
When the character does not move (when it is not dynamically displayed) and the character moves (when it is dynamically displayed), the expectation is higher for the latter.
It should be noted that the characters may be always displayed dynamically.

Next, a more specific embodiment of the "silhouette preview performance" will be described with reference to the performance pattern table shown in Figure 341, the time chart in Figure 342, and display examples in Figures 343 to 345.
In the time chart shown in Fig. 342, vertical lines indicating each timing are drawn in 0.5 second increments. Timings may be expressed in 0.5 second increments, such as timing t44.5 and timing t50.5. Similar notations may be used not only in this figure but also in other figures described in this specification.
In addition, expressions such as timing t10.2, timing t10.4, timing t10.33, and timing t10.67 may be used to specify any timing, not limited to 0.5 second intervals. These expressions indicate timings 10.2 seconds, 10.4 seconds, 10.33 seconds, and 10.67 seconds after timing t0, respectively.
Although an example has been shown in which vertical lines are drawn in increments of 1 second or 0.5 seconds in the figure, in explaining the technical content described in the specification, it is not necessarily necessary to draw vertical lines at the timings to be specified. For example, in a time chart in which vertical lines are drawn in increments of 1 second, it is possible to specify a specific timing shorter than 1 second (for example, the above-mentioned timing t10.2, timing t10.33, etc.) by using decimal numbers.

First, we will explain performance example 01 shown in Figure 342 (a). Performance example 01 is a performance example when "none" is selected as "Whether or not to display halo when silhouette is displayed", "silhouette display" is selected as "Display mode of character etc. when character is confirmed", "none" is selected as "Text display when character is displayed", and "none" is selected as "Character action" in performance pattern 04 shown in Figure 341.

First, at a predetermined timing (timing t44.5) during the execution of a special reach effect (all SP reach effects excluding normal reaches, such as the battle reach effect described above, or some of the SP reach effects excluding normal reaches), a performance window is displayed near the center of the display area. Figure 343(a) shows a display example at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44) before the performance window is displayed. In this example, a performance in which a martial artist character and a bomb character fight is displayed as the special reach effect, and if the martial artist character wins the battle, it is a jackpot, and if the bomb character wins, it is a miss. Note that instead of the martial artist character, a performance in which a warrior character, a samurai character, or a wizard character fights the bomb character may be displayed.
The effect window may be configured to use the entire display area for the effect, in which case the player cannot see the special reach effects or decorative symbols.
343(b) shows a display example during the display of the presentation window (for example, a predetermined timing between timing t44.5 and timing t45). Note that no characters are displayed in the presentation window during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t45, but character images and the like are displayed during the period from timing t45 to timing t50.5.
Next, details of the display contents in the performance window will be explained with reference to Figures 343 (d) and subsequent figures.
First, during the period from timing t45 to timing t45.5, an image of a silhouette of a martial artist character is displayed in the presentation window. Figure 343(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t45.5 to timing t46, an image of a silhouette of a warrior character is displayed in the production window. Figure 343(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t46 to timing t46.5, an image of a silhouette of a samurai character is displayed in the production window. Figure 343(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t46.5 to timing t47, an image of a silhouette of a wizard character is displayed in the production window. Figure 343(g) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t47 to timing t48, the silhouette images of the characters are switched and displayed in sequence in the presentation window at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds). Figure 344(a) shows the state in which all four silhouette characters are superimposed (the state visually perceived by the player).

Next, during the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5, a silhouette of a martial artist character is displayed as still. Figure 344(b) shows the display state at this time. By displaying the characters as silhouettes in this way, it is possible for the player to imagine which character will be displayed in color.
In other words, in a situation where the silhouette images of each character are switched and displayed at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds), it is not possible to recall which colored character will be displayed, but at the stage where the silhouette display of one of the characters is selectively performed (timing t48), it is possible to recall which colored character will be displayed, and therefore the display that enables one to recall which colored character will be displayed (the display at timing t48) may be referred to hereinafter as a recall display.
Note that, because one of the multiple silhouette characters displayed in the period from timing t45 to timing t48 is displayed in color, it could be said that the colored character can be recalled by the multiple silhouette characters displayed in the period from timing t45 to timing t48, but since the player cannot definitively determine which colored character has been selected, the multiple silhouette characters displayed in the period from timing t45 to timing t48 are not a recall display.
Next, during the period from timing t48.5 to timing t49, the martial artist character gradually changes from a silhouette to one painted in multiple colors. Fig. 344(c) shows the display state during the change. Fig. 344(d) shows the display state after the change has ended. Note that when the silhouette character displayed in the recalled display gradually changes to one painted in multiple colors, for example, if the silhouette character is a martial artist, the color gradually changes to a wizard and the character is not changed to another character.
Next, in the period from timing t49 to timing t50, the martial artist character is displayed in a stationary state. Figure 344(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t50 to timing t50.5, an image of the dialogue "Go, fight, and come back! Just like always!" is displayed to the left of the martial artist character. Figure 344(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t50.5, the display of the martial artist character and the lines ends, and at timing t51, the display of the presentation window ends. Fig. 343(c) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t52) after the display of the presentation window ends. Note that at the timing when the display of the presentation window ends, the hit/loss notification presentation (presentation suggesting whether it is a hit or a miss) in the special reach presentation (all SP reach presentations excluding normal reaches, such as the battle reach presentation described above, or some of the SP reach presentations excluding normal reaches) has not yet been performed.

Next, we will explain performance example 02 shown in Figure 342 (b). Performance example 02 is a performance example when "Yes" is selected as the "Whether or not to have a halo when a silhouette is displayed" in performance pattern 13 shown in Figure 341, "No silhouette display" is selected as the "Display mode of character, etc. when character is confirmed", "Super hot" is selected as the "Text display when character is displayed", and "Raises wand" is selected as the "Character action".

First, at a predetermined timing (timing t44.5) during the execution of a special reach performance (all SP reach performances excluding normal reaches, such as the battle reach performance mentioned above, or some of the SP reach performances excluding normal reaches), a performance window is displayed near the center, which is part of the display area. Figure 343(a) shows an example display at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44) before the performance window is displayed.
The effect window may be configured to use the entire display area for the effect, in which case the player cannot see the special reach effects or decorative symbols.
Also, Figure 343 (b) shows a display example during the display of the performance window (for example, a predetermined timing between timing t44.5 and timing t51). Note that no characters are displayed in the performance window during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t45. Note that the display content up to this point is the same as in performance example 01.
Next, the details of the display contents in the performance window will be explained with reference to Figures 345 (a) to 345 (g).
First, during the period from timing t45 to timing t45.5, an image of a silhouette of a martial artist character is displayed in the presentation window. Figure 345(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t45.5 to timing t46, an image of a silhouette of a warrior character is displayed in the production window. Figure 345(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t46 to timing t46.5, an image of a silhouette of a samurai character is displayed in the production window. Figure 345(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t46.5 to timing t47, an image of a silhouette of a wizard character is displayed in the production window. Figure 345(d) shows the display state at this time.
As shown in the figure, a halo is displayed behind each character.
Next, during the period from timing t47 to timing t48.5, the silhouette images of the characters are switched and displayed in sequence in the presentation window at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds). Figure 345(e) shows the state in which all four silhouette characters are superimposed (as visually perceived by the player).

Next, during the period from timing t48.5 to timing t49.5, a wizard character that is not silhouetted and painted in multiple colors is frozen and displayed. Also, the character is holding a staff with a text image saying "Super Hot" displayed on the tip. Figure 345(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t49.5 to timing t50, a dialogue image saying "Sorry to have kept you waiting!" is displayed to the left of the wizard character. Also, a specific dynamic display is performed in which the wizard character moves his left arm and changes into a pose with his wand raised up. Figure 345(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t50, the display of the wizard character and his/her lines ends, and at timing t50.5, the display of the production window ends. Figure 343(c) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t52) after the display of the production window ends.

Here, the differences between performance example 01 and performance example 02 will be explained.
The first difference is that the display mode of the characters after they are rapidly switched between in performance example 01 and performance example 02 is different. In the case of performance example 01, the characters are first displayed in silhouette, and then gradually become colored. On the other hand, in the case of performance example 02, the characters are not displayed in silhouette, but are suddenly displayed in color. In other words, in performance example 01, a recall display (a stopped display in silhouette) is performed that allows the viewer to recall which character has been selected among the characters that will later be displayed in color, whereas in performance example 02, a recall display (a stopped display in silhouette) is not performed.
In this way, in each presentation pattern, both a presentation mode in which the character is first displayed as a silhouette (with a reminder display) and a presentation mode in which the character is displayed as a non-silhouette suddenly colored (without a reminder display) may be executed. Also, the expectation of a win may differ depending on the presentation mode (depending on the presence or absence of a reminder display). For example, the expectation of the latter may be higher than that of the former between a presentation mode in which the character is first displayed as a silhouette (with a reminder display) and a presentation mode in which the character is displayed as a non-silhouette suddenly colored (without a reminder display). Also, the appearance rate of the latter in this case may be lower than that of the former.
Alternatively, for example, a presentation mode in which the character is first displayed as a silhouette (with reminder display) may be made more promising than a presentation mode in which the character is suddenly displayed as a non-silhouette with color (without reminder display). In this case, the appearance rate of the former may be made lower than that of the latter.

Next, as a second difference, in production example 01 and production example 02, in addition to the display mode of the character after the character is rapidly switched (with or without a recalled display), the length of time (period) during which the character is rapidly switched is also different, depending on whether the character is displayed in silhouette or non-silhouette after the rapid switching. Specifically, in production example 01, it is 1 second (the period from timing t47 to timing t48), and in production example 02, it is 1.5 seconds (the period from timing t47 to timing t48.5).
For this reason, if the expectation of winning is higher in the performance example 02 in which the time (period) of the characters being quickly switched is longer than in the performance example 01 in which the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a non-silhouette form than in the performance example 01 in which the time (period) of the characters being quickly switched is shorter and the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a silhouette form (reminiscence display), the player can be made to think that the time (period) of the fast switching display should be longer, and if the expectation of winning is lower in the performance example 02 in which the time (period) of the characters being quickly switched is longer than in the performance example 01 in which the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a non-silhouette form than in the performance example 01 in which the time (period) of the characters being quickly switched is shorter and the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a silhouette form (reminiscence display), the player can be made to think that the fast switching should end soon. Also, when the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a silhouette form (reminiscence display), the expectation of winning may be set to 100%. In this way, a sense of security is provided to the player when the fast switching ends early, and the expectation is maintained even if the fast switching does not end early.

In this way, according to the "silhouette preview performance," the player pays close attention to the progress of the performance, focusing on points such as whether or not there is a halo when the silhouette is displayed, whether or not a wizard character is displayed in the fourth silhouette display, which character will ultimately be displayed, whether or not the displayed character is in silhouette (whether or not the time for rapid switching display is long), the performance display in which a character displayed in silhouette gradually changes color to a non-silhouette (a performance display that changes from a state in which it is difficult to tell which character is displayed to a state in which it is clearly known), whether or not a text image is attached to a character displayed in color, and if text images are attached, what text images are attached, and whether or not the character will move (whether or not a dynamic display is performed), and the player's anticipation for the result of the changing display of the decorative pattern will be increased by the suggested degree of expectation.

In the embodiment shown, the "silhouette preview effect" is executed during the special reach effect, but after the "silhouette preview effect" ends (the effect window display ends), the battle between the characters ends at a predetermined timing, and a display is made to show which character has won. Also, depending on the battle result, the decorative pattern is displayed in either a mode indicating a big win or a mode indicating a loss.
In this embodiment, at timing t53, the character's battle result is indicated and a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a manner corresponding to the battle result, and at timing t54, the decorative pattern is changed to a decorative pattern exclusively for special reach performances or a decorative pattern for normal times, and the background image is changed from a background image exclusively for special reach performances to a background image for normal times, and at timing t55, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary.
After timing t56, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game starts. If the result of the special lottery is a miss and there is a reserved prize, a new variable display starts. If the result of the special lottery is a miss and there is no reserved prize, the game goes into standby mode.

Sound may be output together with the display of the dialogue image. The entire dialogue may be output as sound, or only a part of the dialogue may be output as sound.
Alternatively, the dialogue image may not be displayed, and only the audio may be output.

Note that the timing of rapid switching between character images is not limited to every 0.1 seconds, but may be, for example, every 0.33 seconds to every 0.2 seconds.

As mentioned above, the degree of expectation can be suggested by various effects (the presence or absence of a halo, the type of character finally displayed in a stopped state, the manner in which the character is displayed when the character is confirmed, the manner in which text is displayed when the character is displayed, whether or not the character moves, etc.), and it is best to increase the appearance rate the lower the degree of expectation, and decrease the appearance rate the higher the degree of expectation.
For example, the characters that are ultimately displayed in a stopped state are a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character. The expected probability of appearance of the martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character increases in that order, and the probability of appearance decreases accordingly.

Although the example in which the "silhouette notice performance" ends before the win/loss branch performance (performance suggesting whether it is a win or a miss) in the special reach performance (all SP reach performances excluding normal reaches, such as the battle reach performance described above, or some of the SP reach performances excluding normal reaches) is performed (at timing t51 in the case of performance example 01 in FIG. 342), the display of the performance window may be continued even after the timing of t51. For example, the display of the performance window may be continued even when the timing for the win/loss notification performance arrives, the display of the performance window may be continued even when the win/loss notification performance is being performed, or the display of the performance window may be continued even when the change state of the decorative pattern is a stop display (fixed stop period). Note that, when the timing for the win/loss notification performance arrives or when the win/loss notification performance is being performed, if the display of the performance window is to be continued, it is preferable to display the performance window in a different manner, such as by reducing the display of the performance window, so that the win/loss notification performance can be seen.
For example, if the decorative symbols stop and display as a jackpot, the display of the presentation window may continue during the jackpot game.
In addition, if the decorative pattern stops and the display result is a miss, and there is no hold, the effect window display may be continued.
For example, the display of the performance window may continue until the decorative patterns are temporarily displayed as a combination of "5", "6", and "5" (display state shown in Figure 346(a)), and then until the decorative patterns are temporarily displayed as a combination of "5", "6", and "5" (display state shown in Figure 346(b)).
In addition, it is preferable to set the display priority of the effect window (including characters and letters; the same applies below) lower than that of the normal decorative patterns. Also, after the decorative patterns are displayed stationary for one second, it is preferable to set the display priority of the effect window higher than that of the normal decorative patterns (display state shown in FIG. 346(c)).
Also, if no start winning occurs within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) from the stop display of the decorative pattern, the display of the decorative pattern may be interrupted and a demo video of the gaming machine (a video explaining the model name and the story and characters that are the motif of the model) may be played. Even in this situation, the display of the performance window may be continued (display state shown in FIG. 346(d)). The display priority of the demo video may be set lower than the display priority of the performance window, so that the performance window is displayed in front of the demo video. Alternatively, the display priority of the demo video may be set higher than the display priority of the performance window, so that the performance window is displayed behind the demo video.
In addition, the character may be displayed still in the performance window. In this case, it is preferable to continue to display the character in a static manner after the character has made a predetermined movement as shown in Figures 338(g), 339(g), and 340(g).
Alternatively, the character may be displayed dynamically. For example, the martial artist character shown in Fig. 337(g) may be displayed with the whole body shaking. Also, the warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character may be displayed with the weapon they are holding being continuously swung around.
In addition, the display of the presentation window and characters should end when a new variable display begins (when there is a hold or when a starting winning occurs when there is no hold) or after a predetermined time (e.g. 10 minutes) has elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped display.
In this way, the character continues to be displayed even after the special reach effect has ended, soothing the player's mind.
It is more effective if the dynamic display of each character has a comical movement. Also, as a dynamic display pattern, a dynamic display pattern that is not displayed during a special reach performance may be displayed.

For example, at timing t50 in rendering example 01, a dialogue image encouraging the player to operate the operating means may be displayed. For example, a character may encourage the player to operate the handle 302 by displaying "You missed... too bad, hit it left!"
By displaying in this manner, it is possible to prevent a player who has stopped shooting the game ball during a special reach performance from simply quitting the game, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine.
Furthermore, if there are holds, including one that will result in a jackpot, a line such as "You missed it...too bad, but now it's time to hit left!" may be displayed based on the pre-reading process to suggest that a jackpot will occur.
In this case, first, the text "You missed it...too bad," is displayed, and then the text "Hit left!" or "Hit left now!" is displayed in some cases, thereby contributing to preventing a decline in interest even if the special reach performance results in a miss.

In presentation example 01, the martial artist character is displayed as a silhouette in the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5. On the other hand, in presentation example 01, the martial artist character may be dynamically displayed in the period from timing t50 to timing t50.5.
Although an example has been given in which the time during which the character is displayed as a silhouette and the time during which the character is dynamically displayed are the same length, they may be different lengths.
For example, the length of time that a character is displayed in silhouette may be longer than the length of time that a character is displayed dynamically. For example, the length of time that a character is displayed in silhouette may be 2 seconds, and the length of time that a character is displayed dynamically may be 0.5 seconds. This allows the player enough time to recognize which character is displayed.
Alternatively, the length of time that the character is displayed in silhouette may be shorter than the length of time that the character is dynamically displayed. For example, the length of time that the character is displayed in silhouette may be 0.5 seconds, and the length of time that the character is dynamically displayed may be 2 seconds. In this case, even if the player does not seriously check the flow of the presentation in the middle, it is possible to secure enough time to check the type of character, the presence or absence and type of text display, and the presence or absence of character movement, and it is possible to provide the player with certain information about the degree of expectation. In addition, it is possible to ensure the time that the player can enjoy the character's movement mode.

In addition, the decorative elements for the performance described in the embodiment of the "hourglass hold change performance" may be used in the "silhouette preview performance".
For example, during the period from timing t50 to timing t50.5 of performance example 01 shown in Figure 342 (a), and during the period from timing t49.5 to timing t50 of performance example 02 shown in Figure 342 (b), there are cases where the character is displayed dynamically and cases where it is not displayed dynamically, but when the character is displayed dynamically, the decorative elements for the performance may move.
In addition, it is advisable to set the expectation level to be higher when the decorative member for performance moves than when the decorative member for performance does not move.

Whenever a character is dynamically displayed, the decorative members for presentation may be moved, thereby enhancing the dynamic display of the character.
Conversely, when the character is dynamically displayed, the decorative members for effect may be set not to move, so that the player can focus his/her attention on the dynamic display of the character.
In addition, when the decorative member for performance moves, it may be set to always be a big win. In addition, when the decorative member for performance does not move, it may be set to always be a loss.

During the period when the characters are displayed in silhouette (the period when it is determined which colored character will be displayed (for example, in presentation example 01, the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5)), button operation (for example, operation of operation button 401 or attack button 3710) may be made valid. Also, a simulated image imitating an operation unit indicating that button operation is valid or an image indicating the operation mode (an image such as "PUSH") may be displayed. Then, in response to the button operation by the player, the displayed character may sometimes change to a character with higher expectations.
For example, with a martial artist character displayed in silhouette, a simulated image of operation button 401 and an image saying "PUSH" indicating the operation mode are displayed in the display area, and when the player presses operation button 401, a warrior character (or a samurai character or a wizard character) may be displayed in silhouette instead of the martial artist character.
In this case, it is advisable to set the time during which the character is displayed as a silhouette to be longer than 0.5 seconds (for example, 3 seconds).
According to this embodiment, a character with low expectation is changed to a character with high expectation, so that even if a character with low expectation is displayed, the expectation of a big win can be maintained.
In addition, a plurality of display modes of the simulated image imitating the operation unit or the image showing the operation mode may be provided, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by the difference in the display mode. For example, the simulated image imitating the operation unit or the image showing the operation mode may be displayed in any one of white, red, and gold, and the degree of expectation may be increased in this order.

In addition, the decorative elements for the performance described in the embodiment of the "hourglass hold change performance" may be used in the "silhouette preview performance".
For example, during the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5 in performance example 01 shown in Figure 342 (a), a character is displayed in silhouette, but it is also possible for decorative elements for the performance to move during this period.
In addition, it is advisable to set the expectation level to be higher when the decorative member for performance moves than when the decorative member for performance does not move.

It is also possible to operate the decorative members for performance whenever the character is displayed in silhouette, thereby enhancing the display of the silhouette character.
Conversely, when a character is displayed in silhouette, the decorative members for performance may not be activated, so that the player can focus his/her attention on the display of the silhouette character.
In addition, when the decorative member for performance moves, it may be set to always be a big win. In addition, when the decorative member for performance does not move, it may be set to always be a loss.

Although the example has been shown in which the silhouette is displayed a total of four times, and then the display is switched at high speed before a specific character is displayed, a colored character may be displayed suddenly at a specific time out of the four silhouette displays. Also, the various effects described above (such as the effects shown in the "Character display when character is displayed" column and the "Character action" column in FIG. 341) may be executed in response to the character.
For example, a silhouette martial artist character may be displayed the first time, and then a non-silhouette colored warrior character may be displayed the second time, and an expectation indication effect corresponding to the warrior character may be performed.
Alternatively, a silhouette of a martial artist character may be displayed the first time, a silhouette of a warrior character may be displayed the second time, a silhouette of a samurai character may be displayed the third time, and a non-silhouette colored wizard character may be displayed the fourth time, and an expectation indication performance corresponding to the wizard character may be performed.

It is advisable to make the color of the presentation window (the color of the body part displayed as the background of the character) common regardless of the type of character.
Some players who are accustomed to playing games may be disappointed when they realize that a character with low expectations will be displayed because they can tell in advance the type of character to be displayed from the color of the presentation window, but this can prevent such a situation from occurring.
Alternatively, the colors of the presentation windows may be different depending on the type of character.
In this case, some players who are not familiar with the game can predict the type of character in advance from the color of the presentation window, and if the displayed character matches the predicted character, the player can feel happy that he or she is becoming accustomed to the presentation.

This type of "silhouette preview" can provide new excitement to players.

The decorative members provided on the game board 5 include a rear panel board base plate 2420 (Fig. 130, etc.), a rear panel board decorative member 2410 (Fig. 131, etc.), and a tank role object 3770 (Fig. 241, etc.), and examples have been given in which these decorative members can be used for effects, etc., but below, modified examples that can be applied to the decorative members will be described.

These decorative members can be moved between a standby position and a moving position, and therefore may be referred to as movable decorative members.
In addition, the movement mode is not limited to linear movement between the standby position and the moving position, and various movement modes and operation modes can be adopted. For example, as in the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown with reference to FIG. 134, a rotation operation may be performed between the standby position and the moving position. In addition, the direction of the rotation axis is not limited to the left-right direction, but may be the up-down direction or the front-back direction. Alternatively, any direction can be used as the rotation axis. In addition, the operation of the movable decorative member is not limited to rotation, and it may be configured to be rotatable.

Also, with reference to FIG. 241 etc., an embodiment has been shown in which the tank part 3770 can move in the up and down direction, but the direction in which the movable decorative member moves is not limited to the up and down direction, and it may also be left and right or front and rear. Or it may be movable along a straight line of any inclination. For example, the decorative member may move diagonally from the upper left to the lower right of the display area, or the movable decorative member may move diagonally from the upper right to the lower left of the display area.

Note that, with reference to FIG. 241 etc., an example has been shown in which when the tank role 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position, the tank role 3770 approaches the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and is visually overlapped with the display area, but the movable decorative member may move along a straight line of any inclination, or the decorative member may rotate or turn, causing the movable decorative member to move from the standby position to the moving position, changing from a state in which the movable decorative member does not overlap with the display area to a state in which it is visually overlapped with the display area.

It is also possible to adopt an operational mode in which the decorative member is vibrated in the standby position or the moving position.
Such an operating mode can be achieved by using a known drive source or drive mechanism (such as a pulse motor or a link mechanism) (the same applies when realizing other operating modes described in this specification).

Among these decorative members, the rear panel board 2420 and the tank accessory 3770 are equipped with a predetermined light source (multiple full-color LEDs) and can directly emit light in a predetermined color. Therefore, these decorative members are sometimes called light-emitting decorative members.
The panel board rear decorative member 2410 has a function of diffusely reflecting light of a predetermined color irradiated from a panel board rear substrate 2420 provided behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410, but the light irradiated from the panel board rear substrate 2420 ultimately passes through the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and is irradiated toward the player. This allows the player to visually recognize the panel board rear decorative member 2410 illuminated and decorated in a predetermined color.
In addition, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be integrated to function as a decorative member, a movable decorative member, an illuminating decorative member, etc.

As already mentioned, the light-emitting decorative member can be illuminated in a specific color (white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.) that indicates the likelihood of a big win. Alternatively, the light-emitting decorative member can be illuminated in a predetermined color simply for presentation purposes without indicating the likelihood of a big win. For example, the light-emitting decorative member can be illuminated in a predetermined color during a demo when no game is being played.

In this way, the decorative member in this embodiment can have either one or both of the functions of movement (or movement) and light emission. Furthermore, the decorative member can be used for various effects, such as effects that suggest a predetermined game content (for example, the expectation that the result of the change in the decorative pattern being displayed will be a jackpot) or effects that liven up a specific game period (for example, during a jackpot game state) by using one of these functions (for example, moving from a standby position to a moving position, emitting light in a specific or predetermined color, etc.) or a combination of multiple functions (for example, emitting light in a specific or predetermined color after moving from a standby position to a moving position, etc.). For this reason, these decorative members are sometimes referred to as decorative members for effects.

A plurality of decorative members (two or more) may be provided. In this case, a plurality of decorative members having the same function may be provided, or a plurality of decorative members each having a different function may be provided. Note that the function here refers to the movement mode, light emission mode, etc. of the decorative member.
Also, one or more decorative members having a first function may be provided, and one or more decorative members having a second function different from the first function may be provided. Similarly, one or more decorative members having a third function different from the first and second functions, one or more decorative members having a fourth function different from the first to third functions, and so on (hereinafter the same) may be provided.

For example, a first tank part 3770 that can move up and down may be provided below the display area, and a second tank part 3770 that can move up and down may be provided above the display area. Also, a first panel board rear decorative member 2410 and a first panel board rear substrate 2420 that can move left and right may be provided on the right side of the display area, and a second panel board rear decorative member 2410 and a second panel board rear substrate 2420 that can move left and right may be provided on the left side of the display area. Note that, as shown with reference to FIG. 241, when these decorative members are in the standby position, they do not overlap with the display area in a front view, and when they move from the standby position to the moving position, they may overlap with the display area in a front view.

The panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are decorative members representing mountain ranges. Furthermore, the tank character 3770 is a decorative member imitating a tank. The shape of the decorative member is not limited to these examples. For example, it may imitate a specified image (character, etc.) displayed in the display area. Furthermore, the decorative member and the specified image displayed in the display area may be integrated to represent a single motif. Furthermore, a single motif may be represented by multiple decorative members.
It is not necessary for the decorative member to represent or imitate any object in this way, and decorative members that do not represent or imitate any object may be used, because the decorative member can exert a dramatic effect simply by the way it moves or emits light.

As in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 134, the decorative member is arranged to be positioned between the panel board 1110 and the game board side performance display device 1600 in the front-to-rear direction.
The decorative member may be provided so as to be located between the glass plate 192 and the panel plate 1110. In this case, a partition or the like may be provided to prevent the rolling game ball from colliding with the decorative member, or the strength of the decorative member may be increased so that the decorative member is less likely to be damaged even if the game ball collides with it.

Alternatively, the decorative member may be provided behind the game board side performance display device 1600 or the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. By reducing the size of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is possible to position the decorative member at a position where it does not overlap with the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the decorative member may move from a standby position to a moving position, from a state where it is hidden behind the game board side performance display device 1600 and cannot be seen from the front, to a state where it can be seen from the front. In this case, the player will see the decorative member as if it is emerging from behind the game board side performance display device 1600.

Although an example has been shown in which decorative members are provided on the game board 5, the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, and door frame top unit 570 shown with reference to Fig. 5 etc. are luminous decorative members provided on the door frame 3. The door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, and door frame top unit 570 may be moved or rotated within a range of movement that does not pose a danger to players or game store staff, so as to function as movable decorative members.
Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown with reference to Figure 118 etc. are provided on the door frame 3. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are capable of emitting light and moving, and function as light-emitting decorative members and movable decorative members.
In addition, the functions of the various decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be appropriately applied to these decorative members provided on the door frame 3 to form an embodiment.

In addition, instead of the term "decorative member," terms such as "decorative body" and "decorative means" may be used, but this does not result in any substantial difference from the term "decorative member." Furthermore, even when terms such as "decorative body" and "decorative means" are used, the various embodiments described above can be applied in the same way as for decorative members.

When a game ball enters a winning hole (such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, or the large winning hole 2005), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. At this time, the paid-out game balls may be called prize balls. Also, the number of paid-out game balls may be called the number of prize balls.
The number of prize balls is set appropriately in the range of 1 to 15 depending on the specifications and playability of the gaming machine, but for example, the number of prize balls for the general winning port 2001 may be 4, the number of prize balls for the first starting port 2002 may be 4, the number of prize balls for the second starting port 2004 may be 1, and the number of prize balls for the large winning port 2005 may be 10.

Furthermore, the greater the number of prize balls at the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the second starting port 2004, the less likely the player's possession of game balls will decrease, and therefore the number of game balls that can be paid out in the event of a jackpot will be relatively reduced, making the game less gambling-oriented.
On the other hand, the fewer the number of prize balls at the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the second starting port 2004, the more likely it is that the number of game balls owned by the player will decrease, and therefore the number of game balls that can be paid out in the event of a jackpot will increase relatively, making the game more highly speculative.

In addition, by increasing the number of winning balls in the big prize slot, the total number of game balls paid out during a big win can be increased.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of winning balls in the big prize slot, the total number of game balls paid out during a big win can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in Figures 5 and 135, the second starting hole 2004 is located on the right side of the game area, and when a game ball is able to enter the second starting hole 2004 when a right hit is made, the obstacle pins 1201 and the second starting hole 2004 are located in a position such that the same number of prize balls as the number of game balls fired or slightly less than the number of game balls fired are paid out to the player, thereby preventing the game balls from decreasing during right hits and the player's interest from decreasing.
The number of winning balls at the second starting hole 2004 may be set to one, and almost all of the game balls launched may land in the second starting hole 2004. Alternatively, the number of winning balls at the second starting hole 2004 may be set to two, and almost half of the game balls launched may land in the second starting hole 2004.
In this way, the number of winning balls for each winning slot (general winning slot 2001, first starting slot 2002, second starting slot 2004, large winning slot 2005, etc.) is determined comprehensively taking into consideration the probability of winning for each winning slot, the probability of hitting the jackpot, and various other factors.

An embodiment including a new effect, "character current hold surprise effect," will be described below. Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 123 to 346 and the like.
Fig. 347 to Fig. 349 show various images displayed in the display area in this embodiment. Fig. 350 and Fig. 351 show time charts in this embodiment. Fig. 352 to Fig. 358 show display modes in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, the reserved image is called the current reserved image, and the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are called standby reserved images (first standby reserved image to fourth standby reserved image). The display of the decorative pattern changes, and the functions and actions of the reserved images and reserved images are as described above with reference to Figs. 123 to 125. Also, in the low probability non-time-saving state, the probability of the special lottery being a jackpot is 1/300 as shown with reference to Figs. 142 and 143, but the probability of the reach state being 30/300 (i.e. 1/10) is preferable. With such a probability, when the reach state is reached, there is a 29/30 probability of a reach miss, and a 1/30 probability of a jackpot. According to such an embodiment, the player will have a sense of expectation for a jackpot when the reach state occurs.

FIG. 347 shows various images that are displayed in the display area.
Fig. 347(a) shows a normal background image A. The normal background image A is an image showing a road in the center of a grassland with trees growing along the road. In addition, the words "Road Stage", which indicate the content of the background image, are added to the upper left area of the image.
347(b) shows a normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing a post town with two houses on the right side of the road. The words "Post Town Stage" indicating the content of the background image are added to the upper left area of the image.
347(c) shows a reach-time background image A. Reach-time background image A is an image in which a plurality of winding lines are provided from the upper right to the lower left.
Fig. 347(d) shows a reach-time background image B. The reach-time background image B is an image showing the inside of a limestone cave. The image includes a plurality of images of downward-facing stalactites and upward-facing stalactites.
Figure 347(e) shows a monster character image. The monster character image occupies more than half of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. The monster character has eyes, a mouth, hands, etc. Figures 347(f) and 347(g) show, in addition to the monster character image, miasma image A and miasma image B, which represent miasma spewed from the monster character's mouth. As is clear from the figure, miasma image B is larger in size than miasma image A.
347(h) shows the types of decorative symbols displayed in the display area in this embodiment. There are seven types of decorative symbols, each of which is assigned a number from "1" to "7."

FIG. 348(a) shows a normal background image C. The normal background image C is an image showing a map of Japan. The normal background image C is also an image that is displayed during right-hitting.
FIG. 348(b) shows an image that has a higher display priority than the normal background image C and a lower display priority than the decorative pattern among the images displayed during right-hand play. Specifically, as shown in the figure, a frame with an opaque background is displayed at the upper left position of the display area. The words "WIN x 15", "Breakthrough 12,000 Ryo!!", and "Next Destination: Owari" are also displayed in this frame. The number part of "WIN x 15" indicates the number of consecutive wins, and in this case, it indicates that the number of consecutive wins is 15. The number part of "Breakthrough 12,000 Ryo!!" indicates the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive wins. These number parts are displayed as numbers corresponding to the number of consecutive wins and the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive wins.
Additionally, the words "Musha Shugyo RUSH" are displayed at the top of the display area.
Also, the lower left corner of the display area displays the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("I'm going on a martial training trip all over the country!").
FIG. 348(c) shows an image that has a higher display priority than a decorative pattern among images displayed during right-hand hitting. Specifically, as shown in the figure, a right-facing arrow image including the characters "Right-hand hit!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. By visually checking the characters "Right-hand hit" and the direction of the arrow, the player can recognize that the game state (time-saving state) is one in which right-hand hitting is performed.

Figures 349(a), 349(b), and 349(c) show lightning strike image A, lightning strike image B, and lightning strike image C.
Lightning strike image A shows a lightning strike occurring from the upper right to the lower left of the display area.
Lightning strike image B shows a state in which lightning strikes from the upper right to the lower left of the display area, and a state in which lightning strikes from the upper left to the lower right of the display area.
Lightning strike image C shows a lightning strike occurring from the top right to the bottom left of the display area, a lightning strike occurring from the top left to the bottom right of the display area, and a lightning strike occurring from the top to the bottom of the display area.
A lightning strike image may be displayed when a reach state is reached, but details will be given later.

Figures 349(d), 349(e), and 349(f) show tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
Each tornado image includes three tornadoes. The positions where these three tornadoes are displayed correspond to the positions where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed. The tornado images increase in size in the order of tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
A tornado image may be displayed when a reach state is formed, but details will be described later.

350 and 351, description will be given of effect pattern 1 to effect pattern 5. Note that the variable display time of the decorative symbols in each effect pattern is 10 seconds, and the fixed stop period of the decorative symbols is 0.5 seconds.
In addition, a total of seven types of decorative patterns numbered 1 to 7 can be displayed as decorative patterns, and during variable display, the decorative patterns are displayed in a cyclical manner starting from the decorative pattern numbered 1.
Also, in FIG. 352 and the like, the number of reserved symbols immediately before the decorative symbols start to change is 3, but the number of reserved symbols can be any number between 1 and 4. Also, the first reserved display area displays a martial artist character standby reserved image, which is a reserved image based on the results of the look-ahead process, but the martial artist character standby reserved image is displayed at the time of the start of the winning or the start of a new variable display. Therefore, there are cases where the martial artist character standby reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. In this case, at the same time that the new variable display starts, a display process is performed in which the martial artist character standby reserved image moves leftward in the adjacent reserved display area.
Depending on the type of presentation pattern, the timing at which the left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, and center decorative pattern change from a state in which they are displayed changing at a high speed to a state in which they are displayed changing at a low speed, the timing at which they change from a state in which they are displayed changing at a low speed to a temporary stop, whether or not a reach state will occur, whether or not the background image will be switched, whether or not the current pending image and standby pending image will be hidden, and the timing at which they will be hidden will vary.

Referring to Figures 350(a) and 352, we will explain presentation pattern 1.
At timing t0, the variable display starts, and all decorative patterns are displayed and changed at high speed until timing t6. FIG. 352(a) shows the display state in the display area before the variable display starts. As shown in the figure, a normal background image A is displayed as the background image. As described above, the number of reserved items at this time is three. A martial artist character standby reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. Furthermore, a white circular normal standby reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area and the third reserved display area. Whether or not the martial artist character standby reserved image is displayed is determined based on the result of the pre-reading process.

Figure 352 (b) shows the display state at a specified timing from timing t0 when the varying display begins to timing t6 when the left decorative pattern is displayed at a slow speed. During this period, all decorative patterns are displayed while varying at high speed. In addition, the martial artist character current reserved image is displayed as the current reserved image. Note that, simultaneously with the start of the varying display, the image that was displayed as the martial artist character standby reserved image moves leftward within the display area and gradually increases in size, stopping approximately in the center in the left-right direction and being displayed as the martial artist character current reserved image.

During the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a slowly varying manner. Figure 352 (c) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is displayed in a slowly varying manner.

At timing t7, the left decorative pattern is displayed temporarily still. In addition, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the right decorative pattern is displayed slowly and variably. Figure 352(d) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern with the number 2 is displayed temporarily still, and the right decorative pattern is displayed slowly and variably.

At timing t8, the right decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped. In addition, during the period from timing t8 to timing t9, the middle decorative pattern is displayed variably at a slow speed. Figure 352(e) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern with the number 2 is displayed temporarily stopped, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed variably at a slow speed. Note that here, the number attached to the left decorative pattern and the number attached to the right decorative pattern are the same number (the number "2"), and a reach state has occurred.

At timing t9, the central decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 352(f) shows a state in which the central decorative symbol with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is "232," which indicates that the result of the varying display is a reach miss.

At timing t10, all the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the stopped state continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state is "232," which indicates that the result of the variable display is a reach miss.
Also, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current reserved image ends. Alternatively, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current reserved image starts to end, and the display of the martial artist character current reserved image ends by timing t10.5, for example, the transparency of the martial artist character current reserved image may be increased, or a predetermined display image (for example, an image of smoke) may be displayed so as to overlap the martial artist character current reserved image. Note that a similar mode can be adopted when the martial artist character current reserved image is not displayed in performance patterns 2 to 5. FIG. 352(g) shows the display state when all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new varying display begins.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, the variable display result stops in a reach miss mode, but there are also cases where the numbers attached to the left and right decorative patterns are different numbers and the reach state is not formed. Also, after the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop and the reach state is formed, at timing t9, a center decorative pattern with the same number as the number attached to the left and right decorative patterns may be temporarily stopped. After that, at timing t10, the numbers attached to the left, center, and right decorative patterns are all displayed as the same number, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, a jackpot game state (strictly speaking, a jackpot opening performance suggesting the start of a jackpot game) occurs from timing t10.5.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a fast changing manner, the decorative symbols are displayed by scrolling 10 symbols per second.
When the decorative symbols are displayed in a slow varying manner, the decorative symbols are displayed scrolling three symbols per second.
In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed in a very slow changing manner (details will be described later in performance pattern 2), the decorative patterns are displayed scrolling one pattern per second.

Furthermore, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a rapidly changing manner, it becomes difficult or impossible to identify the type of decorative pattern (the type of number attached to the decorative pattern).
On the other hand, when the decorative pattern is displayed variably at a slow or very slow speed, it becomes possible to easily identify the type of decorative pattern (the type of number affixed to the decorative pattern).
In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a slowly varying manner compared to when the decorative pattern is displayed in a very slowly varying manner, the type of decorative pattern (the type of number attached to the decorative pattern) can be more easily identified in the latter case.

Next, presentation pattern 2 will be explained with reference to Figures 350(b) and 353.
In addition, the performance mode from timing t0 to timing t6 is the same as performance pattern 1, so for simplicity, only the description of the figure will be given. Fig. 353(a) shows the display mode before the variable display starts, similar to Fig. 352(a). Also, Fig. 353(b) shows the state in which the variable display starts and all decorative patterns are displayed at high speed, similar to Fig. 352(b).

During the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. Figure 353 (c) shows the variable display mode of the decorative patterns during this period. As shown in the figure, decorative patterns with the same numbers attached as the left and right decorative patterns (specifically, a left decorative pattern with a "7" attached and a right decorative pattern with a "7" attached, a left decorative pattern with a "1" attached and a right decorative pattern with a "1" attached) are displayed in a variable manner scrolling synchronously at the same speed.

At timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed temporarily stopped. The left and right decorative patterns are displayed synchronously and in a variable manner, so when temporarily stopped, they are always displayed in a reach state. Also, at timing t7, the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at an extremely slow speed (scrolling one pattern per second). Also, in place of the normal background image A, a reach-time background image A may be displayed. Figure 353 (d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the central decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 353(e) shows a state in which the central decorative symbol with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is "232," which indicates that the result of the varying display is a reach miss.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the stopped state continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state is "232," indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach miss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current reserved image ends. Also, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 353 (f) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
After timing t10.5, a new varying display begins.

In performance pattern 2, a reach state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 353, the reach state is ultimately missed, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, at timing t9, a center decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative patterns on the left and right is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative patterns with the same number are stopped and displayed as the left, center, and right decorative patterns.

Next, presentation pattern 3 will be described with reference to Figures 350(c) and 354. Note that presentation modes other than the period from timing t7 to timing t9 are the same as presentation pattern 2, so for simplicity's sake, only the figures will be described. Figure 354(a) shows the display mode before the variable display starts, similar to Figure 353(a). Also, Figure 354(b) shows the state in which the variable display starts and all decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner at high speed, similar to Figure 353(b). Also, Figure 354(c) shows the state in which the same decorative patterns scroll synchronously as the left and right decorative patterns, similar to Figure 353(c).

In performance pattern 3, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at time t7, but the center decorative symbol is displayed in a high-speed, variable manner even during the period from time t7 to time t8. Figure 354 (d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, during the period from timing t8 to timing t9, the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a slowly varying manner. Figure 354 (e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the middle decorative symbol is displayed as a temporary stop. Figure 354 (f) shows the state in which the middle decorative symbol with the number 3 is displayed as a temporary stop.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the stopped state continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the decorative symbols in a stopped state is "232," indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach miss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current reserved image ends. Also, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 354 (f) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
After timing t10.5, a new varying display begins.

In performance pattern 3, a reach state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 354, the reach state is ultimately missed, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, at timing t9, a center decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative patterns on the left and right is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative patterns with the same number are stopped and displayed as the left, center, and right decorative patterns.

In the embodiment shown, the reach-time background image A is displayed instead of the normal background image A during the period from timing t7 to timing t10 in presentation pattern 2 and presentation pattern 3, but the background image may not be changed and the normal background image A may be displayed as is during the period from timing t7 to timing t10. In this case, the expectation level when the reach-time background image A, which is not displayed when the decorative pattern is not changing, is displayed instead of the normal background image A, may be higher than the expectation level when the normal background image A is displayed as is without being changed. This makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in whether the background image will change as the reach state occurs, and when the background image changes, it is possible to provide the player with great excitement and liven up the reach state.

The following describes performance pattern 4 ("Character Current Hold Surprise Performance") with reference to Figures 350(d), 351, and 355 to 357. Note that the performance mode from timing t0 to timing t1 is the same as performance pattern 1, so for simplicity's sake, only the explanation in the figures will be given.
Fig. 351(a) is a time chart showing the change state of the left, center, and right decorative symbols during the period from timing t8 to timing t10 when the result of the special lottery is a big win. Fig. 351(b) is a time chart showing the change state of the left, center, and right decorative symbols during the period from timing t8 to timing t10 when the result of the special lottery is a loss.
Fig. 355(a) shows the display state before the variable display starts, similar to Fig. 352(a). Also, Fig. 355(b) shows the state in which the variable display starts and all decorative patterns are displayed variably at high speed, similar to Fig. 352(b).

In effect pattern 4, a monster character image is displayed at timing t1. Also, an "!" mark (exclamation point) is displayed in the upper left corner of the martial artist character current pending image, indicating that the martial artist character has noticed the appearance of a monster character.
FIG. 355(c) shows the display state at this time.

From timing t1 to timing t2, the currently reserved image of the martial artist character escapes to the left within the display area, moves from the left end of the display area to the outside of the display area, and the display ends.
Fig. 355(d) shows a state in which the martial artist character current reserved image is on the run, and Fig. 355(e) shows a state in which the display of the martial artist character current reserved image has ended.

At timing t4, miasma image A is displayed in front of the monster character image, and at timing t6, miasma image B is displayed in front of the monster character image.
Fig. 355(f) shows a state in which miasma image A is displayed at timing t4, and Fig. 355(g) shows a state in which miasma image B is displayed at timing t6.
The miasma image may be displayed more dynamically. For example, a small amount of miasma may be emitted from the mouth of a monster character, and the miasma gradually increases in size over the course of two seconds. A moving image may be displayed in front of the monster character image.

During the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. Each pattern is displayed by scrolling synchronously at the same speed, and at this time, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed with the same numbers, and the center decorative pattern is displayed with the number one before the numbers attached to the left and right decorative patterns in the variable display order.
FIG. 355(h) shows a decorative pattern being displayed in a slow varying manner. The combination of “171” and “212” is shown in the figure as a combination of the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right that are displayed in synchronization with each other.

At timing t8, the decorative patterns that were scrolling synchronously are displayed temporarily stopped. Figures 356(a) and 357(a) show a state in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed temporarily stopped in the combination "212." Note that the large miasma image causes the player to perceive the left, center, and right decorative patterns as if they have been stopped, which can increase the interest of the display mode in which the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

At timing t8.1, a master character image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. The master character is set as the master of the martial artist character. At timing t8.1, the display priority of the decorative pattern and the monster character image is changed. Until timing t8.1, the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than that of the monster character image, and from timing t8.1 onwards, the display priority of the monster character image is set higher than that of the decorative pattern. At the same time as the display priority is switched, the display of the miasma image ends. The display priority of the master character is set higher than that of the decorative pattern and the monster character image.
Figures 356(b) and 357(b) show the display state in which a master character image is displayed at timing t8.1 and the display priority of the monster character image and decorative pattern is switched.

Next, at timing t8.5, the master character attacks (kicks) the monster character. The master character's attack causes the monster character to rotate and tilt counterclockwise and appear slightly smaller. This display continues until timing t9. Figures 356(c) and 357(c) show the display state at this time.

Figures 356(a) to 356(c) and Figures 357(a) to 357(c) show the same display mode, but below we will explain the display mode when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot with reference to Figures 351(a) and 356(d) to 356(f), and we will explain the display mode when the result of the special lottery is a loss with reference to Figures 351(b) and 357(d) to 357(f).

The display mode when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot will be explained with reference to Figures 351(a) and 356(d) to 356(f).
At timing t9, the master character returns to the bottom right position of the display area, and the monster character is displayed even smaller than when it was attacked by the master character. The monster character finally moves off the screen from the left side of the display area and is erased, becoming invisible.
FIG. 356(d) shows the display state at timing t9.1.

As shown in FIG. 351(a), from timing t9.4 to timing t9.6, the center decorative pattern moves by one pattern. The center decorative pattern was a decorative pattern with the number "1" attached, but in this case, by moving by one pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached is temporarily stopped and displayed. As the center decorative pattern is temporarily stopped with a shift of one pattern, the numbers attached to the left, center, and right decorative patterns all become "2", suggesting to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (the period from timing t9.6 to timing t10).
Figure 356 (e) shows the display state when the central decorative pattern is moving.

During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. During this period, the numbers attached to the left, center, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed all show "2", indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.
Figure 356 (f) shows the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

The display mode in the case where the result of the special lottery is a loss will be described with reference to Fig. 351(b) and Fig. 357(d) to Fig. 357(f). As shown in Fig. 351(b), the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right continue to be temporarily stopped during the period from timing t8 to timing t10.
At timing t9, the monster character is returned to its original position and size and is displayed. The master character is knocked away by the monster character and spins toward the bottom right of the display area. The master character finally moves from the bottom right of the display area off the screen and is erased, becoming invisible.
FIG. 357(d) shows the display state at timing t9.1.

At timing t9.5, the display priority of the decorative symbols becomes higher than the display priority of the monster character image. This causes the decorative symbols to be displayed in front of the monster character image, and the player can clearly see that the numbers attached to the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of "212," suggesting to the player that the result of the special lottery is a loss.
FIG. 357(e) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the monster character image.

During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. During this period, the numbers attached to the left, center, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are the combination of "212," which indicates to the player that the result of the special lottery was a loss.
Figure 357(f) shows the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

In performance pattern 4, the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the monster character image until the decorative pattern temporarily stops, and at the timing (timing t8) when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, the monster character image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. In this case, the impact of the display of the monster character image can be increased. On the other hand, the visibility of the decorative pattern is impaired. Therefore, for example, without changing the display priority, the transparency of the decorative pattern may be changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, so that the monster character image displayed in the background can be seen through the decorative pattern displayed in the foreground. Alternatively, without changing the display priority, only the numbers attached to the decorative pattern may be displayed in an opaque manner, and the rectangular part that constitutes the decorative pattern, which is the other area, may be made completely transparent, thereby increasing the visibility of the monster character image.

Next, presentation pattern 5 will be explained with reference to Figures 350(e) and 358. Note that the presentation mode from timing t0 to timing t5 is the same as presentation pattern 3, so for simplicity's sake, only the explanation of the figures will be given. Figure 358(a) shows the display mode before the variable display starts, similar to Figure 354(a). Also, Figure 358(b) shows the state in which the variable display has started and all decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner at high speed, similar to Figure 354(b).

During the period from timing t5 to timing t6, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. Figure 358 (c) shows the variable display mode of the decorative patterns during this period. As shown in the figure, decorative patterns with the same numbers attached as the left and right decorative patterns (specifically, a left decorative pattern with a "7" attached and a right decorative pattern with a "7" attached, a left decorative pattern with a "1" attached and a right decorative pattern with a "1" attached) are displayed in a variable manner scrolling synchronously at the same speed.

At timing t6, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a temporary stop state. The left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a synchronous and variable manner, so that when they are temporarily stopped, they are always displayed in a reach state. The center decorative pattern is displayed in a high-speed and variable manner. In addition, in place of the normal background image A, a reach-time background image B is displayed. Also, the current hold image and standby hold image are not displayed. Figure 358 (d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t7, the middle decorative pattern changes to a state in which it is displayed changing at an extremely slow speed (scrolling one pattern per second). Figure 358(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the middle decorative symbol is displayed as a temporary stop. Figure 358(f) shows the state in which the middle decorative symbol with the number 3 is displayed as a temporary stop.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the stopped state continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the combination of numbers attached to the decorative symbols in a stopped state is "232," indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach miss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the standby image is resumed. Also, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 358 (g) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
After timing t10.5, a new varying display begins.

In performance pattern 5, a reach state always occurs. In the display example shown in FIG. 358, the reach state ultimately fails, but if the special lottery results in a jackpot, at timing t9, a center decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative patterns on the left and right is temporarily stopped and displayed. During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative patterns with the same number are stopped and displayed as the left, center, and right decorative patterns.

In presentation pattern 5, as soon as the reach state is reached, the reach background image B is displayed, and the current hold image and standby hold image are hidden. In addition, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a state where it changes at high speed, and does not immediately change to a state where it changes at a low speed. This ensures sufficient visibility of the reach background image B that has just been displayed.

According to the "character current reserve surprise effect" executed in the effect pattern 4, the appearance of the monster character surprises the character current reserve image, causing it to move out of the display area and disappear from the display area, providing the player with a new and unprecedented interest. On the other hand, the reserved images in the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area do not disappear, so it is not difficult to check the number of reserved images.
In addition, the current pending image does not simply function to indicate the degree of expectation during the changing display; the current pending image is displayed in a character form and is displayed as if it is running away from other characters (monster characters), so that the current pending image can also be used as part of a dramatic display using characters.
Furthermore, by displaying the monster character large in front of the normal background image A, it becomes unnecessary to switch the background image, and therefore the display process can be simplified.

In presentation pattern 4, the normal background image is not changed to a background image for when a win occurs (part of the normal background image is recognizable), but the size of the monster character image is set to a size that occupies most of the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 (at least half the size), making it unnecessary to change the background image, reducing the cost and memory area required to create a dedicated background image, and making it possible to reduce the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine.

The selection rate of each of presentation patterns 1 to 5, which are selected by the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has been awarded, is such that presentation pattern 1 is most likely to be selected, followed by presentation pattern 2. Presentation pattern 3 is less likely to be selected than presentation patterns 1 and 2, but more likely to be selected than presentation patterns 4 and 5. Presentation pattern 4 may be more likely to be selected than presentation pattern 5, less likely to be selected than presentation pattern 5, or the same. The higher the selection rate, the lower the expectation of a jackpot. Note that selection rate is synonymous with appearance rate (probability of being displayed).

In addition, in presentation pattern 4, a monster character image is displayed in the area where the martial artist character current pending image was displayed, which increases the impact of the monster character being displayed and further enhances the reach state.

An embodiment regarding the demo period has been shown with reference to FIG. 232 etc., but in this embodiment too, the normal background image that was displayed during the varying display of the decorative pattern is displayed during the demo period that may occur after the varying display has ended.

Comparing presentation pattern 3 with presentation pattern 4, in presentation pattern 3, since no characters are displayed, whether or not the background image is changed can clearly communicate to the player whether or not the expectation is high.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, the characters (monster character and master character) are displayed occupying most of the display area, so there is no need to change the normal background image, and a presentation suggesting the variable display result (a presentation in which the monster character and master character fight) can be executed without changing the normal background image. Also, because the normal background image is displayed as is, there is no need to create a dedicated reach-time background image, which reduces the costs associated with image development and the storage capacity required to store images.

When presentation pattern 3 is executed and a reach state occurs with a normal background image displayed, the expectation level of the latter may be set higher than when presentation pattern 4 is executed.
In addition, when comparing the case where presentation pattern 4 is executed with the case where presentation pattern 3 is executed and a reach-state is reached with a reach-state background image being displayed, it is advisable to set the expectation level higher for the latter.

In addition, in presentation pattern 3, the time during which the reach-time background image is displayed and the decorative symbols form the reach state (3 seconds from timing t7 to timing t10) is longer than the time during which the decorative symbols form the reach state (2 seconds from timing t8 to timing t10) in presentation pattern 4. As described above, it is preferable to set the expectation level higher when presentation pattern 4 is executed than when presentation pattern 3 is executed and the reach state is entered with the reach-time background image displayed.
In this way, by extending the execution time of the effects that have a high expectation of a jackpot, the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot can be provided for a longer period of time.

Also, comparing the decorative symbols in the presentation pattern 3 and the presentation pattern 4, the left and right decorative symbols indicate a ready state in both presentation patterns. Presentation pattern 3 is a presentation in which the player recognizes which number the middle decorative symbol (the decorative symbol not indicating the ready state) will stop at while the left and right decorative symbols indicate the ready state by changing the decorative symbols (by switching from high-speed change to low-speed change), while presentation pattern 4 is a presentation in which a monster character is displayed in a short time (timing t1) from the start of the change, as described above, and the result of the winning or losing is suggested depending on whether the monster character is defeated. Presentation pattern 4 is a presentation in which the left and right decorative symbols indicate the ready state, and the middle decorative symbols are also displayed with decorative symbols of numbers different from the left and right decorative symbols, and all decorative symbols are swaying and changing (temporary stop display). In this way, by making all decorative symbols sway and changing and displaying a combination of decorative symbols that is not a big win, the player can focus on the fight with the monster character, not on the decorative symbols. If the decorative pattern of presentation pattern 4 were displayed like the decorative pattern of presentation pattern 3 (if the presentation were to show which number the middle decorative pattern would stop at), the player would be confused as to whether he should focus on the decorative pattern or on the fight with the monster character, resulting in the problem that the highly anticipated reach presentation would end without increasing his interest.
In addition, in presentation pattern 4, if the player loses the fight against the monster character (if the lottery result suggests that the player has lost), displaying a losing symbol combination after the loss in the fight against the monster character would mean appealing to the player multiple times that he or she has lost, which could irritate the player, but this can be avoided by configuring presentation pattern 4. Also, displaying a losing symbol combination after the player loses the fight against the monster character would take time, but reducing the time required would result in a gaming machine with good variability efficiency, which would also lead to increased sales.

The presentation pattern 4 is a presentation pattern that can be executed only in a variable display in which a character current pending image is displayed. In other words, the presentation pattern 4 is not executed in a variable display in which a character current pending image is not displayed.
When it is determined based on the look-ahead processing that a character standby pending image is to be displayed, presentation pattern 4 may be selected as the presentation pattern to be executed at the start of the variable display in which the character standby pending image is displayed as a character current pending image variable display.
Alternatively, when presentation pattern 4 is selected as the presentation pattern to be executed at the start of the variable display, the white circular current pending image may be changed to the character current pending image.

In addition, the display mode of the character standby image or the character current image may suggest the expectation that the result of the change in the display corresponding to the character standby image or the character current image will be a big hit. For example, three colors, white, red, and gold, may be provided as the colors of the vest worn by the martial artist character, and the expectation may be set to increase in the order of white, red, and gold.
As described above, the circular current pending image and standby pending image may be white, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow. The expectation of the variable display corresponding to the current pending image or standby pending image may be increased in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow.
Although a martial artist character has been given as an example of a character displayed as a character standby pending image or a character current pending image, other characters may be used. For example, characters such as a warrior character, a samurai character, or a wizard character shown with reference to Figures 338 to 340 may be displayed as a character standby pending image or a character current pending image. Also, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type of character. For example, the degree of expectation may increase in the order of a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character.
In addition, the circular current reserved image or standby reserved image and the character standby reserved image or character current reserved image are indicated with the same color (white, red, gold) to indicate the degree of expectation, but in this case, it is preferable to make the character standby reserved image or character current reserved image have a higher degree of expectation. For example, between a red character current reserved image and a red circular current reserved image, it is preferable to make the former have a higher degree of expectation.
In presentation pattern 4, the display of the current pending image ends immediately after the change begins, but if the degree of expectation is indicated by the display mode of the current pending image (for example, the three colors white, red, and gold), the player needs to keep a close eye on what the degree of expectation was, creating a sense of tension in the game immediately after the change display begins.

In addition, the circular current reserved image or standby reserved image may be changed to a character standby reserved image or a character current reserved image at a predetermined timing. For example, at the start of a new variable display, the circular standby reserved image may be changed to a character standby reserved image.
Similarly, the circular current reserved image may be changed to the character current reserved image. In this case, it is necessary to change the circular current reserved image to the character current reserved image before one second has elapsed from the start of the variable display (i.e., before the monster character image is displayed).
When changing a circular standby image or a circular current reserved image to a character standby image or a character current reserved image, it is preferable to change the color to the same color or a color with a higher expectation. For example, a white circular standby image may be changed to a white character standby image. Or, a red circular current reserved image may be changed to a gold character current reserved image.

In the case of presentation pattern 4, at the timing when the monster character image is displayed, some kind of character current pending image must be displayed as the current pending image, but in the cases of presentation patterns 1 to 3 and presentation pattern 5, a current pending image other than a character current pending image (for example, a circular pending image) may be displayed as the current pending image.

In the embodiment (presentation pattern 3, presentation pattern 5) shown with reference to Fig. 354 and Fig. 358, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a reach state at timing t7.0 and timing t6.0, but an embodiment modified so that the symbols forming the reach state during the temporary stop are changed from normal symbols to probability variation symbols will be described with reference to Fig. 349, Fig. 359 to Fig. 361.

Fig. 359(a) is a time chart (from timing t5.0 to timing t8.0) in an embodiment in which the symbols forming the reach state are changed from normal symbols to probability variable symbols in performance pattern 3. Fig. 360 shows a display example of a predetermined timing in this time chart.
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t7.0 to timing t7.2, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready state, and the center decorative symbol is displayed variably at high speed. Figure 360(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t7.2, a lightning strike image is displayed in the display area. The type of lightning strike image displayed is one of lightning strike images A to C. At the same time as the lightning strike image is displayed, the decorative pattern is switched to a non-display state. This display state continues until timing t7.8.
Fig. 360(b) shows a display state in which a lightning strike image A is displayed. Fig. 360(c) shows a display state in which a lightning strike image B is displayed. Fig. 360(d) shows a display state in which a lightning strike image C is displayed.

At timing t7.8, the display of any one of the lightning strike images A to C is finished, and the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready state with normal symbols or probability variable symbols, and the central decorative symbol is displayed variably at high speed.
Fig. 360(e) shows a display state in which the normal symbol is displayed again as the symbol that forms the reach state. Fig. 360(f) shows a display state in which the probability variable symbol is displayed instead of the normal symbol as the symbol that forms the reach state.

At timing t7.2, one of the lightning strike images A to C is displayed, and the type of lightning strike image displayed indicates the expectation that the symbol forming the reach state will change from a normal symbol to a probability variable symbol. Specifically, the expectation that the normal symbol will change to a probability variable symbol is set higher in the order of lightning strike image A, lightning strike image B, and lightning strike image C.
For example, the expected probability of a normal pattern changing to a probability variable pattern when a lightning strike image A is displayed may be 10%, the expected probability of a normal pattern changing to a probability variable pattern when a lightning strike image B is displayed may be 20%, and the expected probability of a normal pattern changing to a probability variable pattern when a lightning strike image C is displayed may be 50%. Also, the expected probability of a big win may increase in the order of the lightning strike image A, the lightning strike image B, and the lightning strike image C.

Fig. 359(b) is a time chart (from timing t5.0 to timing t8.0) in an embodiment in which the symbols forming the reach state are changed from normal symbols to probability symbols in performance pattern 5. Fig. 361 shows a display example of a predetermined timing in this time chart.
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t6.0 to timing t6.2, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready state, and the center decorative symbol is displayed variably at high speed. Figure 361 (a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t6.2, a tornado image is displayed in the display area. The type of tornado image displayed is one of tornado image A to tornado image C. At the same time as the tornado image is displayed, the decorative pattern is switched to a non-display state. This display state continues until timing t6.8.
Fig. 361(b) shows a display state in which a tornado image A is displayed. Fig. 361(c) shows a display state in which a tornado image B is displayed. Fig. 361(d) shows a display state in which a tornado image C is displayed.

At timing t6.8, the display of any one of the tornado images A to C ends, and the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready state with normal symbols or probability variable symbols, and the central decorative symbol is displayed variably at high speed.
Fig. 361(e) shows a display state in which the normal symbol is displayed again as the symbol that forms the reach state. Fig. 361(f) shows a display state in which the probability variable symbol is displayed instead of the normal symbol as the symbol that forms the reach state.

At timing t6.2, one of the tornado images A to C is displayed, and the type of tornado image displayed indicates the expectation that the symbol forming the reach state will change from a normal symbol to a probability variable symbol. Specifically, the expectation that the normal symbol will change to a probability variable symbol is set higher in the order of tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
For example, the expectation rate of the normal pattern changing to a probability variable pattern when a tornado image A is displayed may be 10%, the expectation rate of the normal pattern changing to a probability variable pattern when a tornado image B is displayed may be 20%, and the expectation rate of the normal pattern changing to a probability variable pattern when a tornado image C is displayed may be 50%. Also, the expectation rate of the big win may increase in the order of the tornado image A, the tornado image B, and the tornado image C.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 359 to 361, even if a reach state is reached with a normal pattern, an effect in which a lightning strike image or a tornado image is displayed is executed, giving the player a sense of anticipation that the state will change to a reach state with a special probability pattern.
In the following examples, the modified examples shown with reference to Figures 359(a) and 360 may be considered as part of performance pattern 3. That is, when performance pattern 3 is executed, if a lightning image is not displayed, any one of lightning images A to C may be displayed.
Similarly, the modified examples shown with reference to Figures 359(b) and 361 may be considered as part of performance pattern 5 to explain the embodiments. That is, when performance pattern 5 is executed, if no tornado image is displayed, one of the tornado images may be displayed.

When a reach state is formed by a probability variation pattern, it is advisable not to execute an effect that displays a lightning strike image or a tornado image. Alternatively, an effect that displays a lightning strike image or a tornado image may be executed so that the probability variation pattern can be changed to a special decorative pattern (e.g., "7") that has a high expectation of a jackpot.

359(a) and 360, an embodiment in which the effect pattern 3 is modified is shown. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is not displayed during the period in which the lightning strike image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t7.2 to timing t7.8).
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, the decorative pattern may be similarly hidden during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character (the 0.5 second period from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0).
In this way, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a reach state or a reach miss state, the decorative symbols are hidden for a predetermined period of time, making the decorative symbols in a display state in which they cannot be recognized by the player. This initially teases the player as to whether the decorative symbols forming the reach state or reach miss state will be promoted from normal symbols to probability variable symbols, whether the numbers attached to the decorative symbols forming the reach state will be promoted to numbers with a high probability of a jackpot, and what the outcome of the battle between the characters will be (whether the middle decorative symbol will move to show that a jackpot will occur or not), but after the predetermined time has passed, the display of the decorative symbols is resumed and a predetermined result (whether it will be promoted or not, or whether it is shown that a jackpot will occur or not) is displayed, so that the joy felt by the player when the result is favorable to the player can be increased by the amount of teasing.

In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which the decorative pattern is hidden during the period when the lightning strike image is displayed in a modified embodiment of presentation pattern 3 (0.6 seconds from timing t7.2 to timing t7.8) and during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character in presentation pattern 4 (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), but the length of the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed and the master character is shown attacking the monster character (i.e. the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden) can be set as appropriate.
For example, the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be longer than the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed. For example, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be 2 seconds. Since the expectation of a hit is higher in presentation pattern 4 than in presentation pattern 3, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed in presentation pattern 4 (the period during which the monster character is attacked) may be longer than the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed in presentation pattern 3 (the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed) (the presentation pattern with higher expectation has a longer interval), thereby giving a longer sense of excitement that something may change.
Also, the duration of the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed and the duration during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be set to the same length (for example, one second for both). By doing so, even in presentation pattern 3, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot compared to presentation pattern 4, players can expect a change in the symbols (because the duration of the change is the same for presentation pattern 3 and presentation pattern 4).
Also, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be longer than the period during which the master character attacks the monster character. For example, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be 2 seconds, and the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be 0.5 seconds. Presentation pattern 4, which has a higher expectation of a big win than presentation pattern 3, can add surprise by shortening the time until the decorative pattern is redisplayed, and can rapidly create a sense of expectation when the pattern changes.

In addition, when the display of the lightning strike image in performance pattern 3 ends and the decorative patterns on the left and right are displayed again, an example has been shown in which the same decorative pattern as before the decorative pattern was hidden or a decorative pattern with a different number is displayed, but it is preferable that the rate of displaying the same decorative pattern is set higher than the rate of displaying decorative patterns with different numbers.
Furthermore, when the same decorative pattern is displayed again, it does not have to be completely identical before and after display. For example, a decorative pattern that was composed of numbers and characters may consist of numbers only when redisplayed, or a decorative pattern that was composed of numbers and dynamic characters may consist of numbers and static characters when redisplayed, or the size of the decorative pattern may be different, or the font of the decorative pattern may be different. In this way, even if the numbers are the same but the appearance is different, it is acceptable to treat them as the same (similar) decorative pattern.
Also, in the performance pattern 4, all the decorative symbols may be given a higher priority than the master character and the monster character, and all the decorative symbols may be displayed in a manner that makes them visible even when the master character and the monster character are fighting (timing t8.1 to t9.0). In that case, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, all the decorative symbols that are made visible are symbol combinations corresponding to a miss, so they are displayed as they are. However, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 356(e), the center decorative symbol may be changed again to display decorative symbols of the same number as the decorative symbols on the left and right, or all the decorative symbols may be changed again. However, when all the decorative symbols are changed again, it is preferable to display a double number (a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot) of a different decorative symbol (for example, in FIG. 356, the reach is displayed as "2", but the decorative symbol other than "2"). For example, instead of the double number of "2", the double number of "3" or "7" may be displayed. In this way, a sense of expectation for a certain probability change can be provided.

During the period when the left and right decorative symbols of the performance pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10), the display mode of the standby reserved image may be changed based on the pre-reading process. For example, the white circular reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area may be changed to a red circular reserved image.
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, since the expectation for a big win is higher than in presentation pattern 3, the display mode of the standby image may not be changed during the period when the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (from timing t8 to timing t10). Note that, although the decorative symbols are a symbol combination corresponding to a miss from timing t8 to timing t9, the branching presentation of winning or losing (the presentation of whether the master character will win or lose) starts at timing t9, so the decorative symbols from timing t8 to timing t9 are synonymous with showing a reach mode.
In this way, in presentation pattern 3, the display mode of the waiting hold image may change, which not only makes it possible to know what the outcome of the variable display in the reach state will be, but also increases the anticipation of a jackpot occurring with respect to the waiting hold image.
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, the display mode of the standby image is not changed, allowing the player to focus on the outcome of the battle between the characters being displayed.

The display mode of the current reserved image may be changed during the period until the left and right decorative patterns of the performance pattern 3 temporarily stop (timing t0 to timing t7). For example, a white circular current reserved image may be changed to a red circular current reserved image. Alternatively, a white circular current reserved image may be changed to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white vest. Alternatively, a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white vest may be changed to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a red vest.
The display mode of the current reserved image may be changed during the period (from timing t0 to timing t1) until the monster character image of the performance pattern 4 is displayed. For example, the white circular current reserved image may be changed to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white vest. Alternatively, the current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white vest may be changed to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a red vest. Also, the current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white vest may be displayed at timing t1, and may be changed from white to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a red vest by the time of timing t2. In such a case, the display mode of the current reserved image changes while the martial artist character is moving (dynamic display), but when changing the display mode of the current reserved image while moving (dynamic display), a predetermined display image may be displayed for the current reserved image. It is preferable that this predetermined display image also moves in the same way as the character.
In addition, the display mode of the waiting hold image may be changed during the period until the left and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 3 temporarily stop (from timing t0 to timing t7) and during the period until the left, center, and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 4 temporarily stop (from timing t0 to timing t8).
In this manner, by changing the display mode of the current pending image and the standby pending image at a predetermined timing, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a reach state and the changing results in advance.

The rate at which a variation pattern that executes presentation pattern 3 is selected may be set higher than the rate at which a variation pattern that executes presentation pattern 4 is selected.
The long period during which the intermediate decorative pattern is displayed in a rapidly changing manner can give the player a sense of discomfort, making the player feel excited, as if "something special is happening."
Conversely, the rate at which a variation pattern that executes presentation pattern 3 is selected may be lower than the rate at which a variation pattern that executes presentation pattern 4 is selected.

When the rate at which the variable pattern for executing the performance pattern 3 is selected is set higher than the rate at which the variable pattern for executing the performance pattern 4 is selected, the rate at which the display mode of the current reserved image is changed during the period until the left and right decorative patterns of the performance pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (from timing t0 to timing t7) (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute the performance pattern 3) should be lower than the rate at which the display mode of the current reserved image is changed during the period until the monster character image of the performance pattern 4 is displayed (from timing t0 to timing t1) (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute the performance pattern 4). By doing so, when the display mode of the current reserved image changes during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, the player can expect that the performance pattern 4 will be executed.
In addition, when the rate at which the variable pattern for executing the performance pattern 3 is selected is set higher than the rate at which the variable pattern for executing the performance pattern 4 is selected, the rate at which the display mode of the current reserved image is changed during the period until the left and right decorative patterns of the performance pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (from timing t0 to timing t7) (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute the performance pattern 3) may be higher than the rate at which the display mode of the current reserved image is changed during the period until the monster character image of the performance pattern 4 is displayed (from timing t0 to timing t1) (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute the performance pattern 4). By doing so, if the display mode of the current reserved image does not change during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, the player can expect that the performance pattern 4 will be executed.

The period during which the decorative patterns on the left and right of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (from timing t7 to timing t10), and the period during which the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (from timing t8 to timing t10) are both before and after the timing when the display indicating whether or not the winner will win branches, so the player needs to focus his or her attention on whether or not the winner will win. If the position of the standby image were to be different during the period when the left and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10) and the period when the left, center, and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), the player would be given the mistaken idea that the standby image might change, or that a specific presentation might occur near the standby image, which would cause the player to be unable to concentrate on winning or losing. However, by making the position at which the standby image is displayed the same during both the period when the left and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10) and the period when the left, center, and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), this problem can be solved and the player can focus on winning or losing.

In a modified example of presentation pattern 3 shown with reference to Figures 359(a) and 360, the degree of expectation that the normal pattern constituting the reach state will be upgraded to a special probability pattern (and the degree of expectation of a jackpot in presentation pattern 3) is indicated depending on which of lightning strike images A to C is displayed (whether the number of lightning strikes is 1 to 3).
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, as shown in Figures 356(c) and 357(c), the master character kicks with only one foot, but the master character may drop kick the monster character with both feet. In this case, the expectation of beating the monster character (i.e., the expectation of a big win) may be higher than when the master character kicks with only one foot.
In this way, by making it possible to execute effects with different expectations while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win. In the modified version of the performance pattern 3, the expectation of the normal symbols that constitute the reach state being promoted to the probability variable symbols (and the expectation of a big win in the performance pattern 3) changes not only depending on whether or not a lightning strike image is displayed, but also depending on which lightning strike image is displayed, so while the display of a lightning strike image with high expectation is desired, in the performance pattern 4, only the display of a drop kick with both feet is desired. Since the performance pattern 4 has a higher expectation of a win than the performance pattern 3, when multiple expectation-increasing effects can be displayed in the performance pattern 4, in order to prevent the interest from decreasing when an expectation-increasing effect with low expectation is displayed even though the performance pattern 4 with high expectation is displayed, the expectation-increasing effect in the performance pattern 4 is limited to one.

In addition, when the lightning strike image C is displayed, the normal symbol may always change to the variable symbol. Alternatively, when the lightning strike image C is displayed, the normal symbol may or may not change to the variable symbol, but the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot. Alternatively, when the lightning strike image C is displayed, the normal symbol may always change to the variable symbol, and the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot.
Also, when the master character performs a drop kick with both feet on the monster character, the master character may always win against the monster character (i.e., the result of the varying display always becomes a jackpot).

In both presentation pattern 3 and presentation pattern 4, during the period when the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a rapid changing manner (the period when it is impossible to tell whether presentation pattern 3 or presentation pattern 4 is being used (the period from timing t0 to timing t1)), the same expectation suggestion presentation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot may be made executable. For example, as an expectation suggestion presentation, a samurai character image may be displayed for one second behind the decorative patterns, appearing from the right side of the display area and disappearing to the left. In addition, it is preferable to make the expectation of a jackpot when a samurai character image is displayed higher than the expectation of a jackpot when a samurai character image is not displayed.
In this way, by making it possible to execute the same expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation of a jackpot whether it is effect pattern 3 or effect pattern 4, the player can have a sense of expectation that an effect pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot will appear when the expectation suggestion effect is displayed.

The rate at which the expectation suggestive effect is executed in effect pattern 3 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute effect pattern 3) may be higher than the rate at which the expectation suggestive effect is executed in effect pattern 4 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute effect pattern 4). By doing this, when the expectation suggestive effect is executed, effect pattern 3 appears more frequently than effect pattern 4, but since the appearance rate of effect pattern 3 is higher than that of effect pattern 4, frequent execution of the expectation suggestive effect can prevent early onset of boredom.
Alternatively, the rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 3 (note that the rate here refers to all of the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 3 is selected as the denominator) may be lower than the rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 4 (note that the rate here refers to all of the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 4 is selected as the denominator).By doing this, it is possible to create anticipation for the appearance of effect pattern 4 when the expectation suggestion effect is executed, so that interest can be heightened just by the execution of the expectation suggestion effect.

Although it has been shown with reference to FIG. 350 etc. that presentation pattern 1 to presentation pattern 5 can be executed, it is also possible to execute any one of presentation patterns 1 to 5 after executing any one of presentation patterns 1 to 5. Since the variable display time of presentation patterns 1 to 5 is 10 seconds, the variable display time when presentation patterns can be executed consecutively in this way is 20 seconds. Also, when presentation patterns can be executed consecutively in this way, the number of combinations is 25.
In addition, when the presentation patterns are executed consecutively, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the end of the first presentation pattern (the period from timing t9 to timing t10) in a reach miss state, but when the second presentation pattern starts, all decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state. Therefore, even if a miss is shown when the first presentation pattern is executed, the player can have a sense of hope that the second presentation pattern will start and result in a jackpot.

In addition, when performance pattern 4 is executed, the current pending image is in a non-display state, so other performance patterns may not be executed after performance pattern 4 is executed. Alternatively, the display of the current pending image may be resumed at timing t10, and other performance patterns may be executed after performance pattern 4 is executed.
Moreover, after the performance pattern 3 is executed, the performance pattern 4 may be executed in succession. Alternatively, after the performance pattern 4 is executed, the performance pattern 3 may be executed in succession. In this case, the expectation level may be higher for the former, or higher for the latter.

Regarding the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation when a presentation pattern is executed and then a second presentation pattern is executed may be higher or lower than the degree of expectation when a presentation pattern is executed once and then terminated.
For example, the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 3 is executed followed by presentation pattern 4 may be set to be higher or lower than the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 3 is executed.
Alternatively, the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 4 is executed followed by presentation pattern 3 may be set to be higher or lower than the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 4 is executed.

During the period when the decorative symbols on the left and right of the performance pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10), the operation reception for the operation unit (for example, the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710) may be enabled. For example, during the period from timing t7.5 to timing t9.0, the operation reception for the operation unit may be enabled, and an operation unit simulation image imitating the enabled operation unit may be displayed in the display area. Also, when the operation is performed on the operation unit, a display may be performed indicating whether the result of the variable display is a jackpot (for example, display of characters such as "jackpot" or "miss"). Alternatively, instead of directly indicating the result of the variable display, a display may be performed indicating the degree of expectation such as "high expectation!" or "low expectation!". After these displays are performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t10, and the variable display result is shown to the player.
On the other hand, during the period when the left, center and right decorative patterns of performance pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), it is preferable not to enable operation acceptance at the operation unit (naturally, no display of an operation unit simulation image, etc. is performed).
According to this embodiment, in the case of presentation pattern 3, which has a relatively low expectancy compared to presentation pattern 4, the player can know early on whether or not a jackpot has been won, at his or her own will, thereby preventing the player from feeling disgusted by being shown a presentation with a low expectancy for a long period of time.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, which has a relatively higher expectation level than presentation pattern 3, the player cannot know whether or not a jackpot has been won until the decorative patterns stop regardless of the player's will, so the player can feel a sense of anticipation for a jackpot for a long period of time until the variable display ends.

In the embodiment of the "hourglass reserve change performance", it was shown that the performance decorative member may be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, moved or illuminated), but in this embodiment, the performance decorative member may be driven in a similar manner. The performance decorative member may be arranged between the panel board 1110 and the game board performance display device 1600 in the front-to-back direction as shown in FIG. 134. Also, when viewed from the front, when the performance decorative member is in the standby position, it is preferable that it does not overlap with the display area of the game board performance display device 1600, and when the performance decorative member is in the moving position, it is preferable that it overlaps with the display area of the game board performance display device 1600.
These decorative members may be driven during the period (timing t7 to timing t10) when the left and right decorative symbols of performance pattern 3, which has a relatively low expectation compared to performance pattern 4, are temporarily stopped. For example, the decorative members for performance may be moved from the standby position to the moving position during the period from timing t7 to timing t10 to enhance the variable display. The decorative members for performance may be made to emit light. In this case, the decorative members for performance may be made to emit light at the standby position, and then moved to the moving position while still emitting light. Alternatively, the decorative members may be moved to the moving position while still in an unlit state, and changed from the unlit state to the lit state at the timing when the movement to the moving position is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, which has a relatively high expectation compared to presentation pattern 3, the decorative member for presentation is not moved from the standby position to the moving position during the period when the left, center, and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), thereby preventing the visibility of the presentation display (battle between characters) from being hindered. Also, the decorative member for presentation may be moved from the standby position to the moving position before timing t8, but it is preferable to move it to the standby position before timing t8. Note that the decorative member for presentation may be made to emit light at the standby position during the period when the left, center, and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10).
In addition, it is preferable to set a higher expectation when the decorative member for performance moves than when the decorative member for performance does not move.Similarly, it is preferable to set a higher expectation when the decorative member for performance emits light than when the decorative member for performance does not emit light.

During the period (timing t7 to t10) when the left and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped, a first specific presentation sound may be output as BGM or SE when a normal background image is displayed as the background image, and a second specific presentation sound different from the first specific presentation sound may be output as BGM or SE when the reach-time background image A shown in FIG. 360 is displayed as the background image. On the other hand, during the period (timing t8 to t10) when the left, center, and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, when a normal background image is displayed as the background image, not only the first specific presentation sound but also other presentation sounds are not output at all. Presentation pattern 4 has a higher expectation of a win than presentation pattern 3, so making it silent can increase the sense of tension (however, if the game ball enters the start hole in this silent situation, the start winning sound that is output when the game ball enters the start hole is output).

Next, we will explain the differences between presentation pattern 4 described with reference to Figures 350(d) and 354 to 356 and presentation pattern 5 described with reference to Figures 350(e) and 358 (and in some cases differences from other presentation patterns), as well as variations of these presentation patterns.

Comparing presentation pattern 4 and presentation pattern 5, in presentation pattern 5, since no characters are displayed, the background image is changed to a special reach background (special background) that cannot be displayed when the decorative pattern is not changing, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player that expectations are high.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, the characters (monster character and master character) are displayed occupying most of the display area, so there is no need to change the normal background image, and a presentation suggesting the variable display result (a presentation in which the monster character and master character fight) can be executed without changing the normal background image. Also, because the normal background image is displayed as is, there is no need to create a dedicated reach-time background image, which reduces the costs associated with image development and the storage capacity required to store images.

The expectation of a big win may be increased in the order of presentation pattern 4, presentation pattern 3 (when the background image A is displayed during a reach), and presentation pattern 5. The time during which the left and right decorative symbols form a reach state and are temporarily stopped is 2 seconds in presentation pattern 4, 3 seconds in presentation pattern 3, and 4 seconds in presentation pattern 5.
According to such a configuration, the higher the expectation of the presentation pattern, the longer the time during which the reach state is formed, so that the sense of expectation caused by the reach state can be effectively provided to the player.

Also, comparing the decorative symbols in the presentation pattern 5 and the presentation pattern 4, the left and right decorative symbols in both presentation patterns indicate a ready state. Presentation pattern 5 is a presentation in which the player is made aware of which number the middle decorative symbol (the decorative symbol not indicating the ready state) will stop at while the left and right decorative symbols indicate the ready state by changing the decorative symbols (by switching from high-speed change to ultra-low-speed change), while presentation pattern 4, as described above, is a presentation in which a monster character is displayed in a short time (timing t1) from the start of the change, and the result of the winning or losing is suggested depending on whether the monster character is defeated. Presentation pattern 4 is a presentation in which the left and right decorative symbols indicate a ready state, and the middle decorative symbols are also displayed with decorative symbols of numbers different from the left and right decorative symbols, and all decorative symbols are swaying and changing. In this way, by making all decorative symbols sway and changing and displaying a combination of symbols that is not a winning combination, the player can be made to pay attention to the fight with the monster character, not the decorative symbols. If the decorative symbols in presentation pattern 4 were to be the same as those in presentation pattern 5 (if the presentation shows which number the middle decorative symbols will stop at), the player would be confused as to whether to focus on the decorative symbols or on the fight with the monster character, and the player would end up not getting interested in the highly anticipated reach presentation. In addition, in presentation pattern 4, if the player loses the fight with the monster character (if the result of the lottery suggests that the player has lost), displaying a combination of losing symbols after the loss of the fight with the monster character would appeal to the player multiple times that he or she has lost, which could upset the player, but this can be avoided by configuring presentation pattern 4. In addition, displaying a combination of losing symbols after the loss of the fight with the monster character would take time, but by reducing the time, the game machine would have good variable efficiency, which would also lead to increased sales.

359(b) and 361, an embodiment obtained by modifying presentation pattern 5 is shown. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is hidden during the period when the tornado image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t6.2 to timing t6.8). In presentation pattern 4, the decorative pattern may be hidden during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0).
In this way, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a reach state or a reach miss state, the decorative symbols are hidden for a predetermined period of time, making the player unable to recognize the decorative symbols. This initially teases the player as to whether the decorative symbols forming the reach state will be promoted from normal symbols to probability variable symbols, whether the numbers attached to the decorative symbols forming the reach state will be promoted to numbers with a high probability of a jackpot, and what the outcome of the battle between the characters will be (whether the middle decorative symbol will move to show that a jackpot will occur), but after the predetermined time has passed, the display of the decorative symbols is resumed and a predetermined result (whether it will be promoted or not, or whether it is indicated that a jackpot will occur or not) is displayed, so that the joy felt by the player when the result is favorable to the player can be increased by the amount of teasing.

In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which the decorative pattern is hidden during the period when the tornado image is displayed in a modified embodiment of presentation pattern 5 (0.6 seconds from timing t6.2 to timing t6.8) and during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character in presentation pattern 4 (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), but the length of the period when the tornado image is displayed and the master character is attacking the monster character (i.e. the length of the period when the decorative pattern is hidden) can be set as appropriate.
For example, the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be longer than the period during which the tornado image is displayed. For example, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be 2 seconds. Since the expectation of a hit is higher in presentation pattern 5 than in presentation pattern 4, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed in presentation pattern 5 (the period during which the tornado image is displayed) may be longer than the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed in presentation pattern 4 (the period during which the monster character is attacked) (the presentation pattern with higher expectation has a longer interval), thereby giving a longer sense of excitement that something may change.
Also, the period during which the tornado image is displayed and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be set to the same length (for example, one second for both). By doing so, even in presentation pattern 4, which has a lower expectation of a hit compared to presentation pattern 5, players can expect a change in the pattern (because the duration of the change is the same for presentation pattern 4 and presentation pattern 5).
The period during which the tornado image is displayed may be longer than the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character. For example, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be 2 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 0.5 seconds.

In addition, when the display of the tornado image in the performance pattern 5 is terminated and the decorative patterns on the left and right are displayed again, the example has been shown in which the same decorative pattern as before the decorative pattern was hidden or a decorative pattern with a different number is displayed, but it is preferable to set the ratio of displaying the same decorative pattern higher than the decorative pattern with a different number. Also, when the same decorative pattern is displayed again, it is acceptable to treat it as the same (similar) decorative pattern even if it is not completely the same before and after display, for example, a decorative pattern consisting of numbers and characters becomes only numbers when redisplayed, a decorative pattern consisting of numbers and dynamic characters becomes composed of numbers and static characters when redisplayed, the size of the decorative pattern is different, or the font of the decorative pattern is different, even if the numbers are the same but the appearance is different.
Also, in the performance pattern 4, all the decorative symbols may be given a higher priority than the master character and the monster character, and all the decorative symbols may be displayed in a manner that makes them visible even when the master character and the monster character are fighting (timing t8.1 to t9.0). In that case, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, all the decorative symbols that are made visible are symbol combinations corresponding to a miss, so they are displayed as they are. However, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 356(e), the center decorative symbol may be changed again to display decorative symbols of the same number as the decorative symbols on the left and right, or all the decorative symbols may be changed again. However, when all the decorative symbols are changed again, it is preferable to display a double number (a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot) of a different decorative symbol (for example, in FIG. 356, the reach is displayed as "2", but the decorative symbol other than "2"). For example, instead of the double number of "2", the double number of "3" or "7" may be displayed. In this way, a sense of expectation for a certain probability change can be provided.

It is preferable to set the rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected higher than the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected. For example, the ratio of the rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected to the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected may be 9:1. In this case, compared to the timing at which high-speed fluctuations switch to low-speed fluctuations in presentation pattern 5 (timing t5), the timing at which high-speed fluctuations switch to low-speed fluctuations when presentation pattern 4 is executed (timing t7) is later than the start of the fluctuation display. In other words, when presentation pattern 4 is executed, the time during which the decorative patterns are rapidly fluctuating feels long, giving the player a sense of discomfort and providing the player with a sense of excitement that a favorable state such as a jackpot may occur. It is also possible to prevent the fluctuation display from becoming monotonous.

The rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected may be lower than the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected. For example, the ratio of the rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected to the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected may be 1:9. In this case, the timing at which high-speed fluctuations switch to low-speed fluctuations in presentation pattern 4 (timing t5) is earlier from the start of the fluctuation display than the timing at which high-speed fluctuations switch to low-speed fluctuations when presentation pattern 5 is executed (timing t7). In other words, when presentation pattern 5 is executed, the time during which the decorative patterns are rapidly fluctuating feels short, giving the player a sense of discomfort and providing the player with a sense of excitement that a favorable state such as a jackpot may occur. It is also possible to prevent the fluctuation display from becoming monotonous.

In a modified example of presentation pattern 5 shown with reference to Figures 359 (b) and 361, the expected degree of progression of the normal pattern constituting the reach state to a special probability pattern (and the expected degree of a jackpot in presentation pattern 5) was indicated by which of tornado images A to C was displayed (whether the tornado was small, medium or large).
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, as shown in Figures 356(c) and 357(c), the master character kicks with only one foot, but the master character may drop kick the monster character with both feet. In this case, the expectation of beating the monster character (i.e., the expectation of a big win) may be higher than when the master character kicks with only one foot.
In this way, by making it possible to execute effects with different expectations while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win. In the modified version of the performance pattern 5, the expectation of the normal pattern that constitutes the reach state being promoted to a probability variable pattern (and the expectation of a big win in the performance pattern 5) changes not only depending on whether or not a tornado image is displayed, but also depending on which tornado image is displayed, so while the display of a tornado image with high expectation is desired, the display of a drop kick with both feet is only desired in the performance pattern 4. Since the performance pattern 4 has a higher expectation of a win than the performance pattern 5, when multiple expectation-increasing effects can be displayed in the performance pattern 4, in order to prevent the interest from decreasing when an expectation-increasing effect with low expectation is displayed even though the performance pattern 4 with high expectation is displayed, the expectation-increasing effect in the performance pattern 4 is limited to one.

In addition, when the tornado image C is displayed, the normal pattern may be changed to the variable pattern without fail. Alternatively, when the tornado image C is displayed, the normal pattern may or may not be changed to the variable pattern, but the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot. Alternatively, when the tornado image C is displayed, the normal pattern may be changed to the variable pattern without fail, and the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot.
Also, when the master character performs a drop kick with both feet on the monster character, the master character may always win against the monster character (i.e., the result of the varying display always becomes a jackpot).

In both presentation pattern 4 and presentation pattern 5, during the period when the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a rapid changing manner, the same expectation suggestion presentation that suggests the expectation of a jackpot may be made executable. For example, as the expectation suggestion presentation, a samurai character image may be displayed for one second behind the decorative patterns, appearing from the right side of the display area and disappearing to the left side. In addition, the expectation of a jackpot when the samurai character image is displayed may be set higher than the expectation of a jackpot when the samurai character image is not displayed.
By making it possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion performance, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to in what manner the left, center, and right decorative patterns will temporarily stop.

The rate at which an expectation level suggestive display is executed in presentation pattern 4 (note that the rate here refers to all of the variable displays for which presentation pattern 4 is selected as the denominator) may be higher than the rate at which an expectation level suggestive display is executed in presentation pattern 5 (note that the rate here refers to all of the variable displays for which presentation pattern 5 is selected as the denominator).
Alternatively, the rate at which an expectation level suggestive display is executed in presentation pattern 4 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which presentation pattern 4 is selected to be executed) may be lower than the rate at which an expectation level suggestive display is executed in presentation pattern 5 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which presentation pattern 5 is selected to be executed).

Although it has been shown with reference to FIG. 350 etc. that presentation pattern 1 to presentation pattern 5 can be executed, it is also possible to execute any one of presentation patterns 1 to 5 after executing any one of presentation patterns 1 to 5. Since the variable display time of presentation patterns 1 to 5 is 10 seconds, the variable display time when presentation patterns can be executed consecutively in this way is 20 seconds. Also, when presentation patterns can be executed consecutively in this way, the number of combinations is 25.
In addition, when the presentation patterns are executed consecutively, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the end of the first presentation pattern (the period from timing t9 to timing t10) in a reach miss state, but when the second presentation pattern starts, all decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state. Therefore, even if a miss is shown when the first presentation pattern is executed, the player can have a sense of hope that the second presentation pattern will start and result in a jackpot.

In addition, when performance pattern 4 is executed, the current pending image is in a non-display state, so other performance patterns may not be executed after performance pattern 4 is executed. Alternatively, the display of the current pending image may be resumed at timing t10, and other performance patterns may be executed after performance pattern 4 is executed.
Moreover, after the performance pattern 4 is executed, the performance pattern 5 may be executed in succession. Alternatively, after the performance pattern 5 is executed, the performance pattern 4 may be executed in succession. In this case, the expectation level may be higher for the former, or higher for the latter.

Regarding the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation when a presentation pattern is executed and then a second presentation pattern is executed may be higher or lower than the degree of expectation when a presentation pattern is executed once and then terminated.
For example, the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 4 is executed followed by presentation pattern 5 may be set to be higher or lower than the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 4 is executed.
Alternatively, the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 5 is executed followed by presentation pattern 4 may be set to be higher or lower than the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 5 is executed.

During the period when the decorative symbols on the left and right of the performance pattern 5 are temporarily stopped (timing t6 to timing t10), the operation reception for the operation unit (for example, the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710) may be enabled. For example, during the period from timing t6.5 to timing t9.0, the operation reception for the operation unit may be enabled, and an operation unit simulation image imitating the enabled operation unit may be displayed in the display area. Also, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display may be performed indicating whether the result of the variable display is a jackpot (for example, display of characters such as "jackpot" or "miss"). Alternatively, instead of directly showing the result of the variable display, a display may be performed indicating the degree of expectation such as "high expectation!" or "low expectation!". After these displays are performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t10, and the variable display result is shown to the player.
On the other hand, during the period when the left, center and right decorative patterns of performance pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), it is preferable not to enable operation acceptance at the operation unit (naturally, no display of an operation unit simulation image, etc. is performed).
According to this embodiment, in the case of presentation pattern 5, which has a relatively lower expectation level compared to presentation pattern 4, the player can know early on whether or not a jackpot has been reached at his/her own will, thereby preventing the player from feeling disgusted by being shown a presentation with a low expectation level for a long period of time.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, which has a relatively higher expectation level than presentation pattern 5, the player cannot know whether or not a jackpot has been won until the decorative patterns stop regardless of the player's will, so the player can feel a sense of anticipation for a jackpot for a long period of time until the variable display ends.

In the embodiment of the "hourglass reserve change performance", it was shown that the performance decorative member may be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, moved or illuminated), but in this embodiment, the performance decorative member may be driven in a similar manner. The performance decorative member may be arranged between the panel board 1110 and the game board performance display device 1600 in the front-to-back direction as shown in FIG. 134. Also, when viewed from the front, when the performance decorative member is in the standby position, it is preferable that it does not overlap with the display area of the game board performance display device 1600, and when the performance decorative member is in the moving position, it is preferable that it overlaps with the display area of the game board performance display device 1600.
These decorative members may be driven during the period (timing t6 to timing t10) when the decorative symbols on the left and right sides of performance pattern 5, which has a relatively lower expectation level than performance pattern 4, are temporarily stopped. For example, the decorative members for performance may be moved from the standby position to the moving position during the period from timing t6 to timing t10 to enhance the variable display. The decorative members for performance may be made to emit light. In this case, the decorative members for performance may be made to emit light at the standby position, and then moved to the moving position while still emitting light. Alternatively, the decorative members may be moved to the moving position while still in an unlit state, and then changed from an unlit state to an emitting state at the timing when the movement to the moving position is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, which has a relatively high expectation compared to presentation pattern 5, the presentation decorative member is not moved from the standby position to the moving position during the period when the left, center, and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), thereby preventing the impairment of visibility of the presentation display (battle between characters). The presentation decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the moving position before timing t8, but it is preferable to move it to the standby position before timing t8. Note that the presentation decorative member may be made to emit light at the standby position during the period when the left, center, and right decorative patterns of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10).
In addition, it is preferable to set a higher expectation when the decorative member for performance moves than when the decorative member for performance does not move.Similarly, it is preferable to set a higher expectation when the decorative member for performance emits light than when the decorative member for performance does not emit light.

In this way, the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 347 to 361 can provide new interest to the player.

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 123 to 361 etc. will be described with reference to Figs. 362 to 367 etc. In this embodiment, a "barbell training effect" in which a character trains using a barbell is performed in the display area, and then a special reach effect is executed, and the expected probability of a jackpot is indicated depending on the content of the effect. Note that during the training, barbells may fall from above, but details will be given later.

Figure 362 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Figures 364 to 367 show the display contents in the display area, or the display contents in the performance window displayed in the display area.

In the "Barbell Training" mode, one of the modes 1-1 to 3-8 is selected and executed. Based on the content of the executed mode, the probability of a big win is suggested.
First, the display mode common to presentation pattern 1-1 to presentation pattern 3-8 will be described.
In the performance pattern 1-1 and the performance pattern 1-2 shown in FIG. 362(a), from timing t0 to timing t14, in the performance pattern 2-1 to the performance pattern 2-4 shown in FIG. 362(b), from timing t0 to timing t16, and in the performance pattern 3-1 to the performance pattern 3-8 shown in FIG. 363, from timing t0 to timing t18, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Among them, from timing t0 to timing t4, in addition to the decorative pattern, a normal background image (here, the normal background image B shown in FIG. 347(b)), a current reserved image, a standby reserved image, etc. are displayed as shown in FIG. 364(a). After timing t4, a performance window is displayed in the center of the display area, a "barbell training performance" is started, and a display of a character training with a barbell is displayed in the performance window. FIG. 364(b) shows a state in which the performance window is displayed near the center of the display area.
Note that Figures 365(a) to 365(h), 366(a), 366(b), and 366(e) are figures showing the display modes within the performance window.
Although an example in which the effect window occupies most of the display area has been shown, it may be made to occupy the entire display area, or it may be displayed in a small effect window that does not occupy most of the display area. Also, the size of the effect window may be made variable (increased or reduced) when the "barbell training effect" is being executed.

The "barbell training effect" consists of a "training in progress effect", which is the period during which training using a barbell is displayed, a "training end effect", which displays the state when training has ended, and a "reach character confirmation effect", which shows the character that will be fought when the reach is reached.
In the "barbell training effect", first the "training in progress effect" is executed. The time required to execute the "training in progress effect" is either 4 seconds, 6 seconds, or 8 seconds. The time required for execution varies depending on the effect pattern selected. After the "training in progress effect", the "training end effect" is executed. The time required to execute the "training end effect" is 4 seconds. After the "training end effect", the "reach character confirmation effect" is executed. The time required to execute the "reach character confirmation effect" is 2 seconds.
After the "reach character determination effect" ends, the "window enlargement display effect" is executed, in which the effect window expands. In addition, when the "window enlargement display effect" starts, special reach decoration symbols are displayed in a reach state as decoration symbols on the left and right (details will be described later with reference to Figures 366(c) and 366(f)).
After the "window enlargement display effect" ends, a special reach effect ("character reach effect") is executed in which the character indicated in the "reach character confirmation effect" appears.

The display contents within the presentation window during the period from timing t4 to timing t6 are common to presentation patterns 1-1 to 3-8.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 365(a), in the production window, the words "Training Chance" are displayed in the upper left, the master character and the master character's lines are displayed in the lower left, and the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines are displayed to the right of the master character. Also, the martial artist character is shown holding a guts barbell with the word "guts" inscribed on it.

When the performance pattern 1-1 or 1-2 is selected, the time required for executing the "training performance" is 4 seconds. Also, at timing t6, a 1-ton barbell may fall.
When the performance pattern 2-1 to 2-4 is selected, the time required to execute the "training performance" is 6 seconds. Also, at timing t6, a 1-ton barbell may fall. Also, at timing t8, a 1-ton barbell or a 5-ton barbell may fall.
When presentation pattern 3-1 to presentation pattern 3-8 are selected, the time required to execute the "Training Presentation" is 8 seconds. Also, a 1-ton barbell may fall at timing t6. Also, a 1-ton barbell or a 5-ton barbell may fall at timing t8. Also, a 1-ton barbell, a 5-ton barbell, or a 10-ton barbell may fall at timing t10.

Figure 365(b) shows the display state when the 1 ton barbell falls. As shown in the figure, the 1 ton barbell is larger than the gutsy barbell. Also, the word "1 ton" is added.
Figure 365(c) shows the display state when a 5-ton barbell is dropped. As shown in the figure, the 5-ton barbell is larger than the 1-ton barbell. Also, the word "5 tons" is added.
Figure 365(d) shows the display state when a 10-ton barbell falls. As shown in the figure, the 10-ton barbell is larger than the 5-ton barbell. Also, the word 10 tons is added.
The barbells fall in the following order: 1 ton barbell, 5 ton barbell, 10 ton barbell. In other words, if the martial artist character is holding only the guts barbell, the 5 ton barbell and the 10 ton barbell will not fall.
As shown in the figure, the lines of the martial artist character and the master character change as the barbell falls.

When the "Training in progress effect" ends, the "Training end effect" begins. As shown in Figures 362 and 363, the timing at which the "Training end effect" begins varies depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when either effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 is being executed, the "Training end effect" begins at timing t8. When either effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 is being executed, the "Training end effect" begins at timing t10. When either effect pattern 3-1 to effect pattern 3-8 is being executed, the "Training end effect" begins at timing t12.
When the "Training End Performance" begins, the combinations of barbells held by the martial artist character will be four types: guts barbell only, guts barbell and 1 ton barbell, guts barbell, 1 ton barbell and 5 ton barbell, guts barbell, 1 ton barbell, 5 ton barbell and 10 ton barbell.
Fig. 365(e) to Fig. 365(h) show the display modes during the "Training End Presentation". Specifically, Fig. 365(e) shows a state in which the martial artist character is holding only the guts barbell. Fig. 365(f) shows a state in which the martial artist character is holding a guts barbell and a 1-ton barbell. Fig. 365(g) shows a state in which the martial artist character is holding a guts barbell, a 1-ton barbell, and a 5-ton barbell. Fig. 365(h) shows a state in which the martial artist character is holding a guts barbell, a 1-ton barbell, a 5-ton barbell, and a 10-ton barbell.

The longer the time for which the "training performance" is performed, the higher the expectation. For example, the expectation increases when the "training performance" is performed for 4 seconds, 6 seconds, and 8 seconds, in that order.
Also, the more barbells that fall, the higher the expectation. For example, the expectation increases in the following order: if it remains as the gutsy barbell, if it falls to a 1 ton barbell, if it falls to a 5 ton barbell, if it falls to a 10 ton barbell.
In addition, the higher the expectation, the lower the probability of the effect being executed (the probability of selection).
By adopting such an embodiment, the player will be able to visually observe the progress of the presentation in the hope that the "training presentation" will continue for a long time and that many barbells will fall.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 362 and FIG. 363, only one barbell falls at a certain timing (for example, timing t6, timing t8, timing t10) during the "training performance", but multiple barbells may fall at the same time at these timings. For example, two barbells (a 1-ton barbell and a 5-ton barbell, or a 5-ton barbell and a 10-ton barbell) or three barbells (a 1-ton barbell to a 10-ton barbell) may fall at the same time.
Specifically, for example, at timing t10 of performance pattern 3-2, instead of only the 1-ton barbell falling, a 1-ton barbell, a 5-ton barbell, and a 10-ton barbell may fall simultaneously.
In this way, by allowing multiple barbells to fall at the same time, the expectation level increases dramatically, making the player feel very excited.

In addition, a barbell may be dropped during the "training end performance." The "training end performance" lasts for four seconds, but one barbell may be dropped at each of the first, second, and third seconds from the start of the "training end performance."
For example, when performance pattern 3-5 is executed, the 1-ton barbell falls at timing t6, but the next barbell, the 5-ton barbell, does not fall until timing t12. In this situation, the 5-ton barbell may fall at timing t14 during the "training end performance", and the 10-ton barbell may fall at timing t15. Figure 366(a) shows the state in which the 5-ton barbell is falling.
In this way, by allowing the barbell to fall even during the "training end effect", it is possible to keep the player's hopes up that their expectations will increase.

In addition, at the timing when the barbells can fall in the "Training End" effect, multiple barbells (2 or 3) may fall at the same time, just as in the "Training In Progress" effect. In this case too, the expectation of a big win increases dramatically, heightening the excitement felt by the player.

When the "training end effect" ends, the "reach character confirmation effect" begins. As shown in Figures 362 and 363, the timing at which the "reach character confirmation effect" begins varies depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 is being executed, the "reach character confirmation effect" begins at timing t12, when effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 are being executed, the "reach character confirmation effect" begins at timing t14, and when effect pattern 3-1 to effect pattern 3-8 are being executed, the "reach character confirmation effect" begins at timing t16.
The "reach character confirmation effect" is an effect that notifies the player whether the SP reach effect that will be performed thereafter will be character reach effect 1 by a martial artist character or character reach effect 2 by a master character.
366(b) shows that character reach performance 1 will be performed by the martial artist character. Note that while the lines of both characters indicate that character reach performance 1 will be performed by the martial artist character, it may also be indicated by a special performance using the entire display area (for example, displaying a close-up of the martial artist character's face in the entire display area).
Fig. 366(c) shows that character reach performance 2 by the master character will be performed. Note that the lines of both characters indicate that character reach performance 2 by the master character will be performed, but it may also be indicated by a special performance using the entire display area (for example, displaying a close-up of the master character's face in the entire display area). Also, the size and display mode of the notification performance by the "reach character confirmation performance" may be changed depending on which character reach performance is developed, such as by displaying a close-up of the master character's face in the entire display area when character reach performance 1 by the martial artist character is performed by the lines of both characters, and by displaying a close-up of the master character's face in the entire display area when character reach performance 2 by the master character is performed.
Furthermore, since it is the martial artist character who is training in the "barbell training performance," it is generally better for the rate at which it develops into Character Reach Performance 1 by the martial artist character to be higher (for example, the rate at which it develops into Character Reach Performance 1 by the martial artist character should be 90%, and the rate at which it develops into Character Reach Performance 2 by the master character should be 10%).
In addition, the higher the expectation, the lower the probability of execution (selection probability) of the reach effect.
In this way, by occasionally selecting a master character as the character to appear in a "character reach performance" (and not selecting a martial artist character), a sense of surprise can be given to players who were expecting a "character reach performance" in which a martial artist character appears, thereby increasing interest.

The rate at which the character reaches a martial artist character progresses to character reach performance 1 may be set to the same as the rate at which the character reaches a master character progresses to character reach performance 2. By setting the same rate, character reach performance 1 by the martial artist character and character reach performance 2 by the master character appear evenly, and interest is maintained for a long time by displaying a variety of performances.
Also, the rate of progression to Character Reach Presentation 2 by a master character may be set higher than the rate of progression to Character Reach Presentation 1 by a martial artist character.This makes it possible to create a scenario that is easy for the player to understand, in which the expectation of Character Reach Presentation 1 by a martial artist character increases as the martial artist character becomes stronger through training.

When the "training end effect" ends (i.e., the "barbell training effect" ends), the "window enlargement effect" begins.
In the "expanded window display effect", the size of the effect window becomes the same as the display area over the course of two seconds, and the effect window continues to expand until the frame of the effect window moves outside the display area and becomes invisible. While the "expanded window display effect" is being performed, the character appearing in the "character reach effect" and the name of the "character reach effect" being performed are displayed within the effect window. Also, at the same time as the "expanded window display effect" begins, special reach decorative patterns (see FIG. 225(b)) are displayed in reach state, replacing the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right that had been displayed in rapid change up until that point.
Figures 366(c) and 366(f) show the display state one second after the "window enlargement display effect" started.
In FIG. 366(c), a martial artist character and the words "martial artist character reach" are displayed. Also, the size of the performance window is being enlarged. Also, the special reach decoration symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped and displayed at "2". Note that the center decoration symbol among the special reach decoration symbols is not yet displayed at this timing.
In FIG. 366(f), the master character and the word "master character reach" are displayed. Also, the state in which the size of the performance window is increasing is shown. Also, the left and right special reach decoration symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at "2" at the upper left and upper right positions of the display area. Note that the middle decoration symbol among the special reach decoration symbols is not yet displayed at this timing. Also, the timing at which the left and right special reach decoration symbols are displayed in the reach state may be simultaneous with the start of the "window enlargement display performance", after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the "window enlargement display performance", at the start of the character reach performance 1 and 2 which are the SP reach performance, or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the character reach performance 1 and 2 which are the SP reach performance.

To change the display content in the presentation window from that shown in Figure 366(b) or 366(e) to that shown in Figure 366(c) or 366(f), it is advisable to change the position and size of the characters (fighter characters and master characters) appearing in the "character reach presentation" and the barbells they are holding, and to terminate the display of other images in the presentation window. By adopting such an embodiment, the presentation can be smoothly developed from the "barbell training presentation" to the "character reach presentation", making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the presentation.
In addition, the name of the "character reach effect" that is being executed may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the "window enlargement display effect," or may begin to be displayed while the "window enlargement display effect" is being executed.

As shown in Figures 362 and 363, the timing at which the "window enlargement display effect" starts varies depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 is being executed, the "window enlargement display effect" starts at timing t14, when effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 are being executed, the "window enlargement display effect" starts at timing t16, and when effect pattern 3-1 to effect pattern 3-8 are being executed, the "window enlargement display effect" starts at timing t18.

When the "expanded window display effect" ends, the effect window display ends, at which point the background image switches from the normal background image to the reach-time background image. Also, when the "expanded window display effect" ends, a special reach effect, the "character reach effect" (such as a "fighter character reach effect" or a "master character reach effect"), begins.
366(d) shows the display state at the timing when the "fighter character reach effect" starts. Here, the reach-time background image B is displayed as the background image.
366(g) shows the display state at the timing when the "master character reach effect" starts. Here, the reach-time background image A is displayed as the background image.
When two seconds have elapsed since the start of the character reach performance, the display of the name "character reach performance" ends and an enemy character fighting the martial artist character or master character is displayed.

In addition, the display of the current pending image and the standby pending image is stopped at the same time as the timing of the end of the "window enlargement display performance". As shown in Fig. 366 (c) and Fig. 366 (f), the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed during the "window enlargement display performance", and as shown in Fig. 366 (d) and Fig. 366 (g), the display of the current pending image and the standby pending image is stopped after the timing of the end of the "window enlargement display performance". In addition, the timing of hiding the current pending image and the standby pending image does not have to be the exact timing of the end of the "window enlargement display performance", but may be slightly before the end of the "window enlargement display performance" or slightly after the end of the "window enlargement display performance". In the case of being slightly later, the current pending image and the standby pending image are made recognizable at the start of the "character reach performance", but are not immediately recognized.
If the result of the special lottery is a miss, the display of the standby reserved image will resume when the "character reach performance" ends and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. The current reserved image will not be displayed again.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, the standby reserved image may not be displayed or the current reserved image may not be displayed again even when the "character reach performance" ends and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, or it may be as described in the case where the result of the special lottery is a miss. Also, even if the result of the special lottery is a miss, it may be changed depending on the type of reach performance. For example, if the character reach performance by the martial artist is a miss, the current reserved image is not displayed, and if the character reach performance by the master is a miss, the current reserved image is displayed. Even if the result of the special lottery is a win, it may be changed depending on the type of reach performance, just like in the case of a miss.

In the "character reach performance", a display is made in which the character determined by the "barbell training performance" fights another character. Specifically, four types of "character reach performance" are executed: a reach performance in which a martial artist character fights a samurai character (Fig. 367(a)), a reach performance in which a martial artist character fights a warrior character (Fig. 367(b)), a reach performance in which a master character fights a fake samurai character wearing sunglasses (Fig. 367(c)), and a reach performance in which a master character fights a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses (Fig. 367(d)). Note that Figs. 367(a) to 367(d) show one scene of the reach performance, and during the reach performance, a dynamic display is made in which two characters move and fight with the weapons they are carrying.
In addition, if the martial artist character or the master character wins in the "character reach performance", the special reach decoration symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a big win after the reach performance ends. In addition, if the martial artist character or the master character loses in the "character reach performance", the special reach decoration symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a loss after the reach performance ends.

The expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the type of "character reach effect," with the expectation increasing in the following order: a reach effect in which a martial artist character and a samurai character fight, a reach effect in which a martial artist character and a warrior character fight, a reach effect in which a master character and a fake samurai character wearing sunglasses fight, and a reach effect in which a master character and a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses fight.
For example, the expected degree of a reach effect in which a martial artist character fights a samurai character may be set to 20%, the expected degree of a reach effect in which a martial artist character fights a warrior character may be set to 30%, the expected degree of a reach effect in which a master character fights a fake samurai character wearing sunglasses may be set to 40%, and the expected degree of a reach effect in which a master character fights a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses may be set to 50%.

The time required for the "character reach performance" may be set to a predetermined number of seconds, such as 60 or 90 seconds, independent of the execution time of the "barbell training performance". Alternatively, the time required for the "character reach performance" may be determined according to the type of character being fought. For example, the execution time for the "fighter character reach performance" may be 60 seconds, and the execution time for the "master character reach performance" may be 90 seconds.

The timing at which the reach effect starts varies depending on the effect pattern that was executed. If effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 was executed, the reach effect starts from timing t16. If effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 were executed, the reach effect starts from timing t18. If effect pattern 3-1 to effect pattern 3-8 were executed, the reach effect starts from timing t20.

In each of the performance patterns shown in FIG. 362, the display state up to timing t25 is shown, but the reach performance continues after timing t25 and the decorative symbols are displayed stationary at a predetermined timing. In an embodiment in which the reach performance described below is not executed, the decorative symbols may be displayed stationary before timing t25.

In this way, in the "barbell training performance", two characters appear, and the expectation level is shown depending on the duration of the "training performance" and the barbell that has fallen. Therefore, the player can know in advance the expectation level for the "character reach performance" that occurs afterwards.
In addition to simply indicating the degree of expectation, the characters that appeared in the "Barbell Training Performance" also appear as they are in the "Character Reach Performance," thus creating a sense of unity in the performance.
Furthermore, the probability that the "character reach effect" of the character who was training among the characters appearing in the "barbell training effect" (the martial artist character) will be executed is set to be high, but the "character reach effect" may also be executed for the character who was providing training (the master character) although with a low probability. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise (the excitement of "Oh, that's it!") that a character who was not training appears in the reach effect.
Furthermore, since there is a higher expectation when a character who has not been undergoing training appears in a reach effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit in addition to a sense of surprise.

In the "Training Performance," the master character's lines simply change in accordance with the various barbells falling, but the various barbells may also fall in response to the movements of the master character.
For example, the barbell may fall only when the master character jumps and hits the top edge of the presentation window one second before the barbell is about to fall (timing t6, t8, t10). In this case, the master character may say, "Watch your head!" to clearly show the player the meaning of the presentation.
It should be noted that the barbell may always fall when the master character jumps, or the barbell may fall with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%, 40%, etc.).
In addition, if the master character jumps, there is a relatively high probability (e.g., 60% or 50%) that the barbell will fall, and if the master character does not jump, there is a relatively low probability (e.g., 10% or 5%) that the barbell will fall.
In addition, a similar embodiment may be adopted not only during the "training in progress" but also during the "training completion" performance.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to realistically depict the state of a character undergoing training, and it is possible to further enhance the sense of surprise that a master character who has not been undergoing training appears in a reach performance.

Although an embodiment in which a master character gives training guidance to a martial artist character has been shown, an embodiment in which the master character trains using a barbell instead of the martial artist character may be executed. In this case, the martial artist character is displayed on the left side of the presentation window, and the master character holding up a guts barbell is displayed on the right side of the martial artist character, and various barbells may be dropped on the master character in the same manner as in the above embodiment.
In this case, the probability that the "fighter character reach performance" will be executed may be set to 10%, and the probability that the "master character reach performance" will be executed may be set to 90%.
According to this embodiment, the high probability of the "Master Character Reach Performance", which has a relatively higher expectation than the "Fighter Character Reach Performance", being executed can be recognized before the "Character Reach Performance" begins to be executed, so that a strong sense of expectation for a jackpot can be recognized at an early stage of the changing display, and a high sense of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot can be maintained for a long period of time until the changing display of the decorative pattern ends.

368 is a table showing the relationship between the effect contents and the expectation level of the "Barbell Training Effect" and the "Character Reach Effect" executed afterwards. Each effect number in the table has an effect content set, and one of the effect numbers is selected with a predetermined probability, and the effect corresponding to the selected effect number is executed.
For example, when effect number 1 is selected, effect pattern 1-1 is executed, the training effect lasts for 4 seconds, only the guts barbell is displayed in the end, and the type of character reach effect executed is "fighter character VS samurai character," with the expected probability at this time being 15%.
It should be noted that this table is based on an embodiment in which an additional barbell falls during the "training end performance."

The 1-ton to 10-ton barbells may be colored in any of a number of colors that are predefined. The color may also indicate the degree of expectation.
For example, three types of 1-ton barbells, a white 1-ton barbell, a red 1-ton barbell, and a gold 1-ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and one of the barbells may fall in the performance. In addition, it is preferable to set the expectation level to be higher in the order of the white 1-ton barbell, the red 1-ton barbell, and the gold 1-ton barbell.
Similarly, three types of 5-ton barbells, a white 5-ton barbell, a red 5-ton barbell, and a gold 5-ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and one of the barbells may fall in the performance. In addition, it is preferable to set the expectation level to be higher in the order of the white 5-ton barbell, the red 5-ton barbell, and the gold 5-ton barbell.
Similarly, three types of 10-ton barbells, a white 10-ton barbell, a red 10-ton barbell, and a gold 10-ton barbell, may be provided in advance, and one of the barbells may fall in the performance. In this case, it is preferable to set the expectation level to be higher in the order of the white 10-ton barbell, the red 10-ton barbell, and the gold 10-ton barbell.
Furthermore, the color of the strength barbell should not be multiple colors, but should be only one color (for example, white or brown).
According to such an embodiment, instead of simply waiting for a barbell to fall, the player will be anticipating the falling of a more promising barbell, thereby increasing the interest.

In the embodiment shown, the barbell is confirmed to fall by the master character jumping and hitting the upper side of the performance window, but it is also possible to make it possible to execute a performance in which the color of the falling barbell is confirmed. For example, the color of the falling barbell may be indicated by the type of dialogue displayed when the master character jumps.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to create a great sense of anticipation as to what color the barbell will fall.

In the embodiment shown, one-ton to ten-ton barbells of either white, red, or gold fall, and the color of the falling barbell indicates the degree of expectation, but if a red barbell falls, the next barbells to fall should be red or gold, and no white barbells should fall. Similarly, if a gold barbell falls, the next barbells to fall should be gold, and no white or gold barbells should fall.
For example, after a red 1-ton barbell falls, red and gold 5-ton barbells fall, but the white 5-ton barbell does not fall. Similarly, after a red 5-ton barbell falls, red and gold 10-ton barbells fall, but the white 10-ton barbell does not fall.
When multiple types of images (in this embodiment, multiple types of images shown in different colors) with a fixed order of relative expectation are displayed in succession, if an image with relatively high expectation is displayed followed by an image with relatively low expectation, the player may feel that his expectation has decreased and his interest may decrease; however, this embodiment can prevent such a situation from occurring.

As shown with reference to Figures 362, 363, 364(b), etc., the "Barbell Training Performance" is executed while the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are fluctuating at high speed. This allows the player to concentrate on the "Barbell Training Performance" without worrying about the temporary stopping state of the decorative symbols. If a reach state were to occur during the "Barbell Training Performance", it would be difficult for the player to concentrate on the "Barbell Training Performance" (this problem becomes particularly noticeable when the degree of expectation is indicated by the type of numbers attached to the decorative symbols that form the reach state), but this embodiment makes it possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The decorative pattern may be in a reach state while the "barbell training effect" is being executed. For example, the decorative pattern may be in a reach state while any of the "training in progress effect," "training end effect," and "reach character confirmation effect" of the "barbell training effect" is being executed.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the decorative pattern always goes into a reach state and a reach effect is executed when the "barbell training effect" is executed, there may also be provided cases in which the decorative pattern goes into a reach state when the "barbell training effect" is executed, but the reach effect is not executed and the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss (a so-called normal reach miss), or cases in which the decorative pattern does not go into a reach state when the "barbell training effect" is executed (naturally the reach effect is not executed either) and the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss.
In this case, when the "window enlargement display effect" is executed, it is advisable to perform an effect display in which the window is reduced in size and then disappeared over a period of two seconds.
In addition, it is advisable to end the varying display of the decorative symbols when these two seconds or a few seconds in addition to these two seconds (for example, 1 to 5 seconds) have elapsed.
In addition, during the "barbell training performance", it may be notified that the decorative pattern is in a reach state but the reach performance is not executed, or that the decorative pattern is not in a reach state.
For example, the master character may say, "I'm going home today!" or the martial artist character may drop all of the barbells he is holding while the "barbell training performance" is being performed (either during the "training in progress performance", "training end performance", or "reach character confirmation performance").

As shown with reference to Figures 364 to 367, while the "barbell training performance" is being executed, the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed, but while the "character reach performance" is being executed, the current pending image and the standby pending image are not displayed.
During the execution of the "barbell training performance", the current pending image and the standby pending image may be subjected to the hold change performance shown with reference to Figs. 123 to 125. For example, the current pending image and the standby pending image are white and circular in this embodiment, but these may be changed to a display form indicating a higher expectation. Specifically, they may be changed from white to any color ranging from blue to rainbow.

In addition, if the reserved change performance only changes the color, it will end in an instant at a predetermined timing, but by executing it over a predetermined period of time, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation about what display mode (specifically, what color) it will change to. For example, it may be possible to execute the reserved change performance over several seconds as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 322 to 329.
In addition, the timing of starting the execution of the hold change effect and the timing of ending the execution of the hold change effect may, for example, be such that the execution of the hold change effect begins before the execution of the "barbell training effect" begins and the hold change effect ends while the "barbell training effect" is being executed (the changed state of the hold display is shown), or the execution of the hold change effect begins while the "barbell training effect" is being executed and the hold change effect ends while the "barbell training effect" is being executed (the changed state of the hold display is shown), or the execution of the hold change effect begins while the "barbell training effect" is being executed and the hold change effect ends after the "barbell training effect" has ended (the changed state of the hold display is shown) (in this case, it is preferable to have the current hold image and the standby hold image displayed even while the "character reach effect" is being executed).
According to such an embodiment, while the "barbell training effect" or the "character reach effect" is being executed, the sense of anticipation can be increased by other effects that are different from the "barbell training effect" or the "character reach effect," thereby increasing the level of anticipation and increasing the player's anticipation of a jackpot.

Referring to Figure 278 (b), an embodiment has been shown in which a cut-in image is displayed during a special reach performance to indicate the expected probability of a jackpot, but it is also possible to display a cut-in image in a similar manner during a character reach performance in this embodiment.
The display mode of the cut-in image will be described with reference to Figures 369(a) to 369(c).
During the martial artist character reach presentation, the martial artist character and the samurai character are displayed approaching each other and fighting. Figure 369(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a cut-in image is displayed. The cut-in image is composed of a horizontally long rectangular frame, a character (in this embodiment, a "wizard character") displayed within the frame, and the character's lines. The cut-in image is displayed for several seconds (for example, 3 seconds). FIG. 369(b) shows the display state at this time. The cut-in image indicates the expectation of a big win by the background color within the frame. For example, three types of background colors within the frame can be displayed, green, red, and gold, and the expectation level may increase in this order. In addition to the background color within the frame, multiple types of characters (for example, three or more types) may be provided, and the expectation level may be set for each of them in a predetermined order. In the figure, light is shown emanating from the tip of the wand held by the wizard character, and three types of colors representing this light can be displayed, green, red, and gold, and the expectation level may increase in this order.
After the display of the cut-in image is finished, the fight between the characters is decided and one of the characters wins. If the fighter character wins, the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a big win. Conversely, if the samurai character wins, the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a loss. Figure 369(c) shows a display state in which the fighter character wins the fight and the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a big win.
Although the martial artist character reach performance has been given as an example, a similar cut-in image may also be displayed in the master character reach performance.
The cut-in image is not displayed during the "barbell training performance." The cut-in image is displayed immediately before the fight between the characters is concluded. For example, it is preferable to have the fight between the characters concluded 5 to 10 seconds after the cut-in image has finished being displayed. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a big win just before the results of the fight between the characters are announced. The display of the cut-in image also allows the player to recognize that the results of the fight between the characters will soon be announced.

The same suggestive effect that indicates the degree of expectation may be executed in the "training effect" and the "character reach effect".
As a suggestive effect, for example, a wizard character riding a wand may appear from the right side of the display area and fly horizontally to the left side, and the degree of expectation of a big win may be suggested by the type of lines displayed to the left of the wizard character (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "character flying suggestive effect"). Note that three types of lines may be provided, "hot,""veryhot," and "super hot," with the degree of expectation increasing in that order.
369(d) shows the display state in the presentation window when the "character flight suggestion presentation" is executed during the "training presentation." As shown in the figure, the wizard character's lines are "Hot."
369(e) shows the display state in the display area when the "character flight suggestion effect" is executed during the "character reach effect." As shown in the figure, the words of the wizard character are "super hot."
Note that the size of the wizard character and the dialogue window displayed by executing the "Character Flight Suggestion Effect" is the same during the "Training Effect" and the "Character Reach Effect", but Fig. 369(d) is the display within the effect window, showing the display content in a portion of the display area, whereas Fig. 369(e) shows the display content in the entire display area. Therefore, the size of the wizard character and the dialogue window shown in Fig. 369(d) is larger than that in Fig. 369(e).
The "character flight suggestion effect" may be executed twice, once during the "training effect" and once during the "character reach effect." Alternatively, if it is executed during either the "training effect" or the "character reach effect," it may not be executed during the other, so that the "character flight suggestion effect" is executed only once during one variable display.

A specified background music may be played while the "barbell training effect" is being executed. A specified background music may also be played while the "character reach effect" is being executed. The same background music may be played from the execution of the "barbell training effect" to the execution of the "character reach effect". By using such an embodiment, the player can recognize the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect" as a series of effects, enhancing the sense of unity of the effects.
On the other hand, different BGM may be played during the execution of the "barbell training effect" and during the execution of the "character reach effect". For example, a first BGM may be played during the execution of the "character reach effect", and a second BGM different from the first BGM may be played during the execution of the "barbell training effect". By adopting such an embodiment, the player can clearly recognize which effect is being performed.
In addition, there are two types of character reach performances: a "fighter character reach performance" and a "master character reach performance." The same background music may be played during the execution of the "barbell training performance," the "fighter character reach performance," and the "master character reach performance."
Alternatively, the first BGM may be played while the "fighter character reach performance" is being executed, and the second BGM may be played while the "barbell training performance" and the "master character reach performance" are being executed.
Alternatively, the first BGM may be played while the "master character reach performance" is being executed, and the second BGM may be played while the "barbell training performance" and the "fighter character reach performance" are being executed.

When the "barbell training performance" is executed and the "character reach performance" is performed, the second BGM output when the "barbell training performance" is executed is changed to the first BGM and the BGM is output (the output of the first BGM is stopped by the end of the pattern change). However, if the "character reach performance" is not performed even if the "barbell training performance" is executed, the second BGM output when the "barbell training performance" is executed may be continuously output (not played from the start of the second BGM) even after the end of the "barbell training performance". In addition, the output of this continuously output second BGM may be stopped before the pattern change ends, or it may be continuously output (not played from the start of the second BGM) even after the pattern change ends. If it is continuously output, it will be output across the next pattern change, so it is possible to provide a sense of expectation that the "barbell training performance" may be executed even in the next pattern change.

In the "barbell training performance," operation acceptance for the operation unit (e.g., operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled, and the barbell may fall based on the player's operation of the operation unit. For example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display may be made in which the master character jumps and hits the upper side of the performance window, causing the barbell to fall.
For example, at the timing when the guts barbell is displayed during the "barbell training performance," the operation reception for the operation unit may be enabled, and an operation unit imitation image shaped like the operation unit may be displayed in the display area. Also, when the operation unit is operated, the master character may be displayed jumping and hitting the top side of the performance window, causing the one-ton barbell to fall, and when no operation is performed on the operation unit, the master character may not jump and the one-ton barbell may not fall.
Similarly, at the timing when the 1-ton barbell is displayed during the "barbell training performance," operation reception for the operation unit is enabled, and an operation unit imitation image shaped like the operation unit is displayed in the display area. Also, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display is made of the master character jumping and hitting the upper side of the performance window, causing the 5-ton barbell to fall, and when no operation is performed on the operation unit, the master character does not jump and the 5-ton barbell does not fall.
It should be noted that even while the 5-ton barbell is being displayed, a display of the barbell falling may be performed in a similar manner based on the reception of an operation to the operation unit.
The effective operation period of the operation unit may be only a part of the "barbell training performance", or may be the entire period of the "barbell training performance". Alternatively, it may be only the entire period of the "training performance".
For example, when a 1 ton barbell can be changed to a 5 ton barbell, it may be set so that it changes to the 5 ton barbell only when the player operates it, or it may be set so that it changes to the 5 ton barbell even if the player does not operate it.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can drop the barbell at a timing of his/her preference, thereby enhancing the player's sense of excitement.

With reference to Figures 369(a) to 369(c), an embodiment in which a cut-in image is displayed during a "character reach performance" has been shown, but it is also possible to enable operation acceptance on the operation unit (e.g., operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) during the "character reach performance" and display an operation unit imitation image shaped like the operation unit in the display area, and to display one of the cut-in images based on the player's operation of the operation unit.
By adopting such an embodiment, the cut-in image can be displayed at a timing preferred by the player, thereby increasing the player's sense of excitement.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a barbell falls based on operations on the operation unit during a "barbell training performance", and an embodiment in which a cut-in image is displayed based on operations on the operation unit during a "character reach performance", it is also possible to enable operation acceptance on the same operation unit in both performances, and display the same operation unit simulation image in the display area as the operation unit simulation image.
For example, if a barbell falls based on the operation of the operation button 401 during the "barbell training performance", a cut-in image may be displayed based on the operation of the operation button 401 during the "character reach performance". Also, during the effective operation period during both performances, a simulated image that resembles the operation button 401 may be displayed in the display area.
Alternatively, if a barbell falls based on the operation of the attack button 3710 during the "barbell training performance", a cut-in image may be displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 during the "character reach performance". Also, during the effective operation period during both performances, a simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 may be displayed in the display area.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand which operating unit to operate.

Although the embodiment in which the same operation section simulative image is displayed during the "barbell training performance" and the "character reach performance" has been shown, the position where the operation section simulative image is displayed should also be the same during the "barbell training performance" and the "character reach performance". Also, the size of the operation section simulative image should be the same.
For example, whether during the "barbell training performance" or the "character reach performance," it is advisable to display an operation section simulating image in the center of the display area.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand which operating section to operate.

The effective operation period of the operation section may be the same or different during the "barbell training performance" and the "character reach performance".
For example, the effective operation period during the "barbell training effect" may be longer than the effective operation period during the "character reach effect."
Alternatively, the effective operation period during the "barbell training effect" and the effective operation period during the "character reach effect" may be set to the same length.
Alternatively, the effective operation period during the "barbell training effect" may be made shorter than the effective operation period during the "character reach effect".

The shape of the operation section simulation image is the same, but the operation section simulation image may be displayed in a plurality of colors. Also, the expectation of a big win may be different depending on the color of the operation section simulation image.
For example, the operation section simulated image displayed during the "barbell training performance" may be either a white operation section simulated image or a red operation section simulated image, and the operation section simulated image displayed during the "character reach performance" may be either a white operation section simulated image, a red operation section simulated image, or a gold operation section simulated image.
Alternatively, the operation section simulated image displayed during the "barbell training performance" may be any one of a white operation section simulated image, a red operation section simulated image, and a gold operation section simulated image, and the operation section simulated image displayed during the "character reach performance" may be any one of a white operation section simulated image and a red operation section simulated image.
In addition, the number of types of operation section simulated images displayed during the "barbell training performance" may be different from the number of types of operation section simulated images displayed during the "character reach performance".

Although the embodiment has been described in which the operation reception of the operation unit is valid only once during the execution of the "barbell training performance" or the "character reach performance", it may be possible to execute the performance multiple times. When the "barbell training performance" is being executed, it is preferable to make the barbell fall multiple times in response to multiple operations.
In addition, when a "character reach effect" is being executed, it is advisable to display the cut-in image multiple times in response to multiple operations.
It is preferable to display the operation section simulation image each time the operation acceptance is enabled, that is, when the operation acceptance is enabled multiple times, the operation section simulation image is displayed multiple times.
In addition, the number of times that operation acceptance to the operation unit is valid during execution of the ``barbell training performance'' and during execution of the ``character reach performance'' may be the same (which may be once or multiple times), or may be different numbers of times (which may be once or multiple times).
For example, while a "barbell training performance" is being executed, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled only once, whereas, while a "character reach performance" is being executed, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled once or multiple times, two or more times.
Alternatively, while a "barbell training performance" is being executed, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled multiple times, either once or twice or more, whereas while a "character reach performance" is being executed, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled only once.
Alternatively, while the "barbell training performance" is being executed, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled two or more times, whereas while the "character reach performance" is being executed, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled two or more times. In this case, the number of times that the "barbell training performance" and the "character reach performance" are enabled may be the same or different.
For example, the number of times that the operation unit's operation acceptance is enabled during the execution of a "barbell training performance" may be less than or more than the number of times that the operation unit's operation acceptance is enabled during the execution of a "character reach performance".

The execution time of the "barbell training effect" (10 seconds, 12 seconds, 14 seconds) is longer than the execution time of the "character reach effect" (60 seconds, 90 seconds).
According to such an embodiment, a player who likes the reach performance after the reach state is formed can be provided with a longer period of time to enjoy the reach performance.

Conversely, the execution time of the "barbell training effect" may be longer than the execution time of the "character reach effect." For example, the execution time of the "barbell training effect" may be 40 seconds, 48 seconds, and 56 seconds instead of 10 seconds, 12 seconds, and 14 seconds, and the execution time of the "character reach effect" may be 20 seconds and 30 seconds instead of 60 seconds and 90 seconds.
According to such an embodiment, the "character reach effect" can be executed in a state where the expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot has been heightened by the "barbell training effect". Even if the "character reach effect" is entered in a state where the expectation is low as suggested by the "barbell training effect", the short execution time of the "character reach effect" allows the player's feelings to be quickly switched to the variable display from the next time onwards.

Although the "character reach performance" includes a "fighter character reach performance" and a "master character reach performance", and various modified examples that can be applied to the "character reach performance" have been shown, the same modified examples may be applied to each of the "fighter character reach performance" and the "master character reach performance".
Alternatively, a certain modified example may be applied to one of the "fighter character reach performance" and the "master character reach performance", while not applying a modified example to the other.
Alternatively, different modified examples may be applied to each of the "fighter character reach performance" and the "master character reach performance".
The number of modified examples to be applied may be one, or two or more.

An embodiment has been shown in which the rate at which a "master character reach performance" is executed is lower than the rate at which a "fighter character reach performance" is executed after a "barbell training performance" is executed. For example, the rate at which a "fighter character reach performance" is executed is 90%, and the rate at which a "master character reach performance" is executed is 10% after a "barbell training performance" is executed. Also, as shown with reference to FIG. 368, the expectation level when a "master character reach performance" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "fighter character reach performance" is executed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to give a sense of surprise to a player who had expected the martial artist character who had been training with a barbell to appear in the reach performance as is, thereby increasing interest.

Conversely, after the execution of the "barbell training effect", the rate at which the "master character reach effect" is executed may be set to be higher than the rate at which the "fighter character reach effect" is executed. For example, the rate at which the "fighter character reach effect" is executed may be set to 10%, and the rate at which the "master character reach effect" is executed may be set to 90%.
At this time, the degree of expectation when a "master character reach performance" is executed may be set lower than the degree of expectation when a "fighter character reach performance" is executed.
According to this embodiment, the martial artist character who has been training with a barbell finally appears in the reach performance, and the expectation at this point is high, so that the player can feel great excitement and the interest can be increased.
On the other hand, the expectation level when a "master character reach performance" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "fighter character reach performance" is executed.
According to such an embodiment, when a martial artist character who has been training with a barbell appears in a reach performance, the decrease in interest due to low expectation can be compensated for by the satisfaction of being able to see a rare performance, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

The display state may be switched from the "training end effect" state to the "character reach effect" state without executing the "reach character determination effect" and the "window enlargement display effect", and the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 233 to 240 may be applied at the time of this switching. For example, at the end of the "training end effect", a predetermined background concealment image may be displayed to make the entire display area black or white and to display a predetermined character, and these displays may be gradually terminated at the start of the "character reach effect". In this case, the display state will transition from the display state shown in Figs. 365(e) to 365(h) to the display state shown in Figs. 366(d) and 366(g).
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation as to which character (the martial artist character or the master character) will initiate the reach performance when the "character reach performance" begins.

The length of time for which a specified background concealment image is displayed, turning the entire display area black or white, or displaying a specified character may indicate which character (a martial artist character or a master character) will be displayed.
For example, two display times for the background concealment image can be prepared: a short time (e.g., four seconds) and a long time (e.g., six seconds). When the time is short, a "fighter character reach performance" is executed, and when the time is long, a "master character reach performance" is executed.
Conversely, if the time is short, a "master character reach effect" may be executed, and if the time is long, a "fighter character reach effect" may be executed.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to keep the player interested in how long the display of the background concealed image will continue, and which reach effect will start when the display of the background concealed image ends.

Note that the type of reach effect to be executed is not determined in accordance with the display time of the background concealment image, but the type of reach effect may be selected with a predetermined probability in accordance with the display time of the background concealment image. For example, when the display time of the background concealment image is 5 seconds, the probability that the "fighter character reach effect" will be selected may be 50%, and the probability that the "master character reach effect" will be selected may be 50%.
Alternatively, when the display time of the background concealment image is short (e.g., 4 seconds), the probability that the "fighter character reach performance" will be selected is 90%, and the probability that the "master character reach performance" will be selected is 10%, and when the display time of the background concealment image is long (e.g., 6 seconds), the probability that the "fighter character reach performance" will be selected is 10%, and the probability that the "master character reach performance" will be selected is 90%.
Even in such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player more interested in which reach effect will be initiated.

In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which multiple display times for the background concealment image are prepared and the type of "character reach performance" to be executed is selected corresponding to the display time, but it is also possible to select the type of enemy character that appears in the "character reach performance" corresponding to the display time of the background concealment image.
For example, four different display times for the background concealment image (e.g., 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, and 10 seconds) may be prepared, and for 4 seconds a "fighter character reach performance" in which a samurai character appears as the enemy character is executed, for 6 seconds a "fighter character reach performance" in which a warrior character appears as the enemy character is executed, for 8 seconds a "master character reach performance" in which a fake samurai character appears as the enemy character is executed, and for 10 seconds a "master character reach performance" in which a fake warrior character appears as the enemy character is executed. In this case, the longer the display time of the background concealment image, the more likely a character reach performance will be executed.
After the "reach character confirmation performance" is executed, two display times for the background concealment image (e.g., two seconds and four seconds) may be prepared, and when it is indicated that the "fighter character reach performance" is to be executed, a samurai character may be displayed for two seconds, and a warrior character may be displayed for four seconds.Similarly, when it is indicated that the "master character reach performance" is to be executed, a fake samurai character may be displayed for two seconds, and a fake warrior character may be displayed for four seconds.
According to such an embodiment, the time taken for the background image to change can be used to allow the player to predict what type of reach effect will be executed and what type of enemy character will be displayed, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of a big win.

Although an embodiment in which the effect display is performed within a window has been shown, a similar effect display may be performed in the entire display area without displaying a window. In this case, the display priority of the image of the character, etc. may be higher than the background image, and lower than the fourth pattern, the reserved number display image, and the error notification image.
The display priority of the effect display may be higher or lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
When the display priority of the effect display is set higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the effect display can be ensured whether the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed, low speed, or temporarily stopped.
If the display priority of the effect display is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern, there is a risk that the visibility of the effect display will be hindered by the decorative pattern; however, for example, by displaying the effect only while the decorative pattern is rapidly changing and increasing the transparency of the decorative pattern during rapid change, the player can recognize both that the decorative pattern changing display is being performed and that a effect display is being performed.

In this way, the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 362 to 369 can provide new interest to the player.

Below, we will explain an embodiment that includes a new effect, the "bomb expectation effect." Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 123 to 369, etc.

First, an overview of the "bomb expectation effect" will be described. In the "bomb expectation effect", when a winning ball is entered into the second starting hole 2004 (the number of winning balls in this embodiment is one) in a time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) and the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 2004 reaches a predetermined maximum number (specifically, four balls), a bomb image and a countdown image are displayed. A part of the bomb image is modeled after a fuse, and the end of the fuse is lit. In addition, whether or not to start the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" when the condition that the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum is met is determined in advance at the time of the winning ball when the winning ball is entered into the second starting hole 2004 and the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined maximum number (specifically, four balls) in the peripheral control board 1510.
When it is decided to start the execution of the "bomb expectation performance" when a predetermined maximum number (specifically, 4) of winnings are won, the number "8" is displayed as a countdown image together with a bomb image when the predetermined maximum number (specifically, 4) of winnings are won. After the bomb image is displayed, each time a winning occurs in the second starting hole 2004, the number in the countdown image decreases by one with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2), and the length of the fuse shortens. Finally, when the number in the countdown image reaches 0, a display of a bomb exploding is performed, and an expectation suggestion image is displayed at the position where the bomb was displayed, suggesting the expectation that the changing decorative pattern will result in a big win. As the expectation suggestion image, "hot", "super hot", and "win?" are displayed. The expectation increases in the order of "hot", "super hot", and "win?".
In addition, "every time a win occurs in the second starting hole 2004" may be for an over-winning win in the starting hole described later, or for a win that is not an over-winning win, the numbers in the countdown image may be reduced by one and the length of the fuse may be shortened with the above-mentioned predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2). In addition, the predetermined probability may be set to 1/1, so that the numbers in the countdown image are always reduced by one and the length of the fuse is shortened when an over-winning win occurs in the second starting hole 2004, or the numbers in the countdown image are always reduced by one and the length of the fuse is shortened when a win occurs in the second starting hole 2004 regardless of whether an over-winning win occurs or not. In addition, the numbers in the countdown image are not subtracted unless the length of the fuse is shortened.

An over-winning refers to a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 when the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 2004 is at the maximum of four, and is sometimes referred to as an over-winning in this specification.
Similarly, when the number of reserved balls in first starting hole 2002 is at the maximum of four, a game ball entering first starting hole 2002 can be referred to as an over-entry.
In addition, on the condition that a predetermined number of game balls enter the large prize opening 2005, when the opened large prize opening 2005 is closed, a number of game balls more than the predetermined number may enter the large prize opening 2005. This is because there is a time lag between when the entry of the predetermined number of game balls is detected and when the closing of the large prize opening 2005 is completed, and game balls may enter the large prize opening 2005 during this period. Such a gaming situation may also be called an over-entry.

In addition, if a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 is not detected for a predetermined period of time (e.g., six seconds) while the bomb image and countdown image are displayed, the display of the bomb image and countdown image will be interrupted and the bomb image and countdown image will become hidden (or only one of the images may be hidden to make the player aware that the bomb expectation presentation itself is being performed).
Furthermore, if six seconds have elapsed since the bomb image and the countdown image went into a non-display state, the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" is terminated.
On the other hand, when the bomb image and the countdown image are not displayed or only one of the images is not displayed, if a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 is detected, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed. Note that when the display is resumed, the same process as that when a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 is detected while the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed is performed (a determination is made as to whether or not the number attached will decrease by one with a probability of 1/2), and the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed according to the determination result.

Next, with reference to Figures 370 and 371, the images displayed in the "bomb expectation effect" will be described.
Fig. 370(a) to Fig. 370(h) show eight bomb images, No. 1 to No. 8, and countdown images corresponding to each bomb image. Each bomb image is made up of a part showing a spherical bomb, a part showing a fuse, and a part showing the burning part at the end of the fuse. The length of the fuse is the longest in the No. 8 bomb image, followed by the No. 7 bomb image, the No. 6 bomb image, and so on, with the No. 1 bomb image being the shortest.
In addition, a certain number is displayed as a countdown image above the spherical bomb. The size of the number on the countdown image corresponds to the length of the fuse of each bomb image. In other words, the length of the fuse can be recognized by the number displayed as the countdown image.
As shown in the figure, the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed in positions where they do not overlap, thereby ensuring the visibility of both images.
In the "bomb expectation effect" described below, the eighth bomb image, the seventh bomb image, the sixth bomb image, ..., the second bomb image, and the first bomb image are displayed in that order to express the shortening of the fuse length.

371(a) shows an explosion image. The explosion image is an image that is displayed when a start winning occurs in a state where the first bomb image is displayed.
371(b) to 371(d) show the expectation degree suggestion images. The expectation degree suggestion images are images that are displayed after the explosion image has finished being displayed.
As shown in each figure, there are three types of expectation suggestion images: "Hot", "Very Hot", and "Hope?", and each suggests a different expectation. Specifically, the expectation of "Hot" is 20%, the expectation of "Very Hot" is 40%, and the expectation of "Hope?" is 100%.
It should be noted that this expectation level is merely an example, and the expectation level for "hot" may be 10%, the expectation level for "very hot" may be 20%, and the expectation level for "right?" may be 100%.
Also, the expected probability of "win?" is set to 100%, but it may be set to 90% or 95%.
The number of types of expectation level suggestion images is not limited to three, but may be two or more types (for example, four to ten types).

The "bomb expectation effect" will be described below with reference to the flowcharts shown in Figures 372 to 374.
Fig. 372 is a flow chart showing the bomb expectation effect execution process. The bomb expectation effect execution process is a subroutine that is periodically called from the main routine (the peripheral control unit regular process described with reference to Fig. 95 etc.) in the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined to execute the bomb expectation effect. Fig. 373 is a flow chart showing the bomb image display process. Fig. 374 is a flow chart showing the bomb image display stop process.
The bomb image display process and the bomb image display stop process are subroutines called from the bomb expectancy performance execution process.

In step S140 of the bomb expectation effect execution process, it is determined whether or not an expectation indication image is being displayed. If an expectation indication image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S142, and if an expectation indication image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S168.

In step S142, it is determined whether an explosion image is being displayed. If an explosion image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S146; if an explosion image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S164.

In step S146, it is determined whether the number of reserved items at the second starting port 2004 is four. If the number of reserved items at the second starting port 2004 is four, the process proceeds to step S148, and if the number of reserved items at the second starting port 2004 is not four (i.e., 0 to 3), the process proceeds to step S162.

In step S148, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004. If a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, the process proceeds to step S150, and if a game ball has not entered the second starting hole 2004, the process proceeds to step S162.

In step S150, it is determined whether the display of the bomb image is paused. If the display of the bomb image is paused, the process proceeds to step S152. If the display of the bomb image is not paused, the process proceeds to step S154.

In step S152, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is resumed. The bomb image and countdown image displayed may be the same bomb image and countdown image that were displayed before the display was interrupted, or may be an image that has advanced by one step (for example, if the countdown number is hidden at 5 and then resumed at 4). Then, the process moves to step S154.

In step S154, it is determined whether the bomb expectation effect execution flag is 1. If the bomb expectation effect execution flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S156. If the bomb expectation effect execution flag is not 1, the process proceeds to step S158.

The bomb image display process in step S156 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S180, it is determined whether or not the bomb image development lottery has been won. The bomb image development lottery is a lottery in which, for example, there is a 1/2 probability of winning and a 1/2 probability of losing. If the bomb image development lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S182, and if the bomb image development lottery is lost, the process returns to the bomb expectation performance execution process.

In step S182, it is determined whether the first bomb image is being displayed. If the first bomb image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S184. If the first bomb image is not being displayed (if the second to eighth bomb images are being displayed), the process proceeds to step S186.

In step S184, the first bomb image is hidden and an explosion image is displayed. The number "0" is also displayed as the next countdown image. Then, the process returns to the bomb expectation performance execution process.

In step S186, the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed as the bomb image and countdown image. For example, if the number "8" is displayed as the eighth bomb image and countdown image, the number "7" is displayed as the seventh bomb image and countdown image. Then, the process returns to the bomb expectation performance execution process.

The bomb image display process was explained with reference to Figure 373, but we will now return to the explanation of the bomb expectation effect execution process with reference to Figure 372.

In step S158, the bomb expectation effect execution flag is set to 1.

In step S160, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image begins. The first bomb image to be displayed is the eighth bomb image. The number "8" is also displayed as the countdown image.

The bomb image display cancellation process in step S162 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S200, it is determined whether or not a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 has occurred continuously for a predetermined time (6 seconds) while the bomb image is being displayed. If there has been no winning entry into the second starting hole 2004, the process proceeds to step S202. If there has been a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S202, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not a winning entry into the second start port 2004 has occurred continuously for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds) from the start of the suspension of the display of the bomb image. If there is no winning entry into the second start port 2004, the process moves to step S206. If there is a winning entry into the second start port 2004, the process returns to the bomb expectation performance execution process.

In step S206, the bomb expectation performance execution flag is set to 0. After that, the process returns to the bomb expectation performance execution process. Since there is no process to be executed in the returned bomb expectation performance execution process, the process returns to the main routine. In the main routine, when the bomb expectation performance execution flag is changed from 1 to 0, the execution of the bomb expectation performance is terminated, and the bomb expectation performance execution process is not executed until it is determined to execute the bomb expectation performance again.
It is possible to end the bomb expectation presentation midway by determining whether or not a winning entry into the second starting port 2004 has occurred continuously for a predetermined time (e.g., six seconds) from the start of the suspension of the display of the bomb image (for example, the countdown display may end at five without progressing to zero), but it is also possible not to end the bomb expectation presentation midway.

The bomb image display cancellation process was explained with reference to FIG. 374, but we will now return to the explanation of the bomb expectation effect execution process with reference to FIG. 372.

In step S164, it is determined whether two seconds have passed since the explosion image began to be displayed. If two seconds have passed since the explosion image began to be displayed, the process proceeds to step S166. If two seconds have not passed since the explosion image began to be displayed, the process returns to the main routine.

In step S166, the explosion image and countdown image are hidden and an expectation suggestion image is displayed. The expectation suggestion image to be displayed is determined based on the result of a special lottery. After that, the process returns to the main routine. Based on the result of a special lottery, if the numbers in the countdown image are decreased by one and the length of the fuse is shortened with a certain probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) even for wins that are not over-winning, when the explosion image is displayed, either there is a change but there are no reserved numbers, or there is a change and there are reserved numbers, so there are cases where an expectation suggestion image for a change that is in progress is displayed, and cases where the expectation suggestion image remains displayed even after the change that is in progress has ended and an expectation suggestion image for one of the reserved numbers is displayed. In other words, it may be based on the result of a lottery held at the start of the change, or it may be based on the result of a so-called pre-reading lottery.

In step S168, it is determined whether three seconds have passed since the expectation indication image was first displayed. If three seconds have passed since the expectation indication image was first displayed, the process proceeds to step S170. If three seconds have not passed since the explosion image was first displayed, the process returns to the main routine.

In step S170, the expectation degree suggestion image is not displayed.
Next, in step S172, the bomb expectation effect execution flag is set to 0. After that, the process returns to the main routine.
In the main routine, when the bomb expectation performance execution flag changes from 1 to 0, the execution of the bomb expectation performance is terminated, and the bomb expectation performance execution process is not executed until it is determined to execute the bomb expectation performance again.
That is, the expectation suggestion image is displayed two seconds after the explosion image is displayed, and the expectation suggestion image is hidden three seconds after the expectation suggestion image is displayed (the expectation suggestion image is displayed for a longer period of time than the time until the expectation suggestion image is displayed), but since it may happen that no fluctuation has occurred two seconds after the explosion image is displayed, the expectation suggestion image may be displayed together with the explosion image. Specifically, if a single shot is performed when the bomb expectation effect is being executed even though no fluctuation has occurred, the bomb expectation effect may progress every time a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004.

Below, with reference to Figures 375 and 376, we will explain the specific display mode in the "bomb expectation presentation".
The "bomb expectation effect" is executed in the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the time-saving state, the probability that the game ball will enter the second starting hole 2004 is higher than in the non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state). Also, since the second starting hole 2004 is provided on the right side of the game area, the player will hit the ball to the right.
Fig. 375 shows a time chart of a performance example in this embodiment. Fig. 376 shows a display state at a predetermined timing in the performance example.

First, referring to Fig. 375(a) and Fig. 376, a description will be given of performance example 1. Performance example 1 shows a performance example assuming that the bomb image development lottery is won in all of the multiple start winnings for the second start port 2004, and it is determined that the next bomb image is to be displayed. As described above, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2, and the probability of losing is 1/2, so there is a 1/2 probability that the next bomb image is displayed, and a 1/2 probability that the original bomb image continues to be displayed, but in this case, the next bomb image is always displayed.
In addition, the timings at which the start winning occurs in presentation example 1 are timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t22.

FIG. 376(a) shows the display state in the display area immediately before the timing t0 (immediately before the start of the variable display). At this time, the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 2004 is four, and "4" is displayed as the reserved number display image. In addition, the game is in a time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and the game is in a state in which the player is required to hit the right. In the display area, the normal background image C, the number of consecutive wins (the number part of "Win x 15") and the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive wins (the number part of "Breakthrough 12,000 ryo!!"), the characters "Next destination: Owari", the characters "Musha Shugyo RUSH", the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("I'm going on a martial artist training all over the country!"), a right-facing arrow image including the characters "Hit right!", and a decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed are displayed. Note that these characters and images continue to be displayed during the variable display of the decoration pattern.
At timing t0, the display of the decorative pattern begins to change. At the same time, the number of reserved balls decreases by one to three, and the waiting reserved image displayed in the first reserved ball display area moves leftward while becoming larger, and is displayed as the current reserved image in the current reserved ball display area. Additionally, the waiting reserved images displayed in the second reserved ball display area to the fourth reserved ball display area each move leftward and are displayed in the first reserved ball display area to the third reserved ball display area. As a result, the waiting reserved image is no longer displayed in the fourth reserved ball display area. Additionally, "3" is displayed as the number of reserved balls display image.
FIG. 376(b) shows the display state at this time (a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t9).
The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at high speed from the timing t0 to at least the timing t33. The variable display manner of the decorative symbols after the timing t33 will be described later.

At timing t9, a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004. In response to this entry, a waiting hold image is displayed in the fourth hold display area. In addition, the eighth bomb image and a countdown image (the number "8") are displayed on the left side of the display area. Note that the display priority of the bomb images (the first bomb image to the eighth bomb image) and the countdown image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. In addition, "4" is displayed as the hold number display image.
FIG. 376(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, at timing t10, the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004. This winning occurs when the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 2004 is four (as described above, this is an over winning). In response to this winning, the eighth bomb image changes to the seventh bomb image. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "8" to the number "7." As the eighth bomb image changes to the seventh bomb image, the length of the fuse becomes shorter.
FIG. 376(d) shows the display state at this time.

Similarly, at timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19, the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004. With each entry, the bomb image changes in sequence from the seventh bomb image to the first bomb image. At the same time, the countdown image changes in sequence from the number "7" to the number "1". Also, the length of the fuse gradually becomes shorter as the bomb image changes.
FIG. 376(e) shows a display state in which the first bomb image and a countdown image of the number "1" are displayed (the display period is from timing t19 to timing t22).

Next, at timing t22, the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004. In response to this entry, the first bomb image changes to an explosion image. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "1" to the number "0." The display priority of the explosion image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. The explosion image is displayed for two seconds.
FIG. 376(f) shows a display state in which the first bomb image and a countdown image of the number "0" are displayed (the display period is from timing t22 to timing t24).

Next, at timing t24, the display of the explosion image and the countdown image ends. Also, an expectation suggestion image is displayed in the position where the explosion image was displayed. In this case, the expectation suggestion image of "Super Hot" is displayed. The expectation suggestion image is displayed for three seconds.
FIG. 376(g) shows the display state in which the expectation degree suggestion image is displayed (the display period is from timing t24 to timing t27).

Next, at timing t27, the display of the expectation indication image ends, and the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" also ends.
FIG. 376(h) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t30) after the display of the expectation degree indication image has ended.

Next, referring to Fig. 375(b) and Fig. 376, a description will be given of the second example of the performance. The second example of the performance shows a performance example in which it is assumed that the next bomb image is displayed in some of the multiple start winnings for the second start port 2004, and the next bomb image is not displayed in the other start winnings. As described above, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2, and the probability of losing is 1/2, so that the next bomb image is displayed with a 1/2 probability, and the original bomb image continues to be displayed with a 1/2 probability. However, in this case, there are cases where the next bomb image is displayed and cases where the original bomb image continues to be displayed.
In addition, the timings at which the start winning occurs in presentation example 2 are timing t9, timing t10, timing t12, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t17, timing t18, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t22.

Of these, for the start winning events at timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t22, the next bomb image will be displayed in response to the occurrence of the start winning event.
On the other hand, for the start winning at timing t12, timing t17, and timing t21, the original bomb image continues to be displayed even though the start winning has occurred. For example, at timing t12, the start winning has occurred but it is determined that the original bomb image continues to be displayed, so the display content in the display area does not change.
The display content in the display area (specifically, the display format of a bomb image, countdown image, explosion image, etc.) is displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 375 (a).

Next, referring to FIG. 375(c), a description will be given of a performance example 3. The performance example 3 shows a performance example in which it is assumed that a start winning occurs at the second start port 2004, and the execution of the "bomb expectation performance" is started, but the player stops shooting the game ball, and the bomb image changes only once during the "bomb expectation performance", and then the start winning does not occur. As described above with reference to FIG. 374, if a start winning does not occur for a predetermined time during the execution of the "bomb expectation performance", the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted. Also, if a start winning does not occur for a predetermined time after the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted, the execution of the "bomb expectation performance" is terminated.
In the third embodiment, the start winning occurs at timing t9 and timing t10. The bomb image development lottery executed in response to the start winning at timing t10 is considered to be won.

As shown in Fig. 375(c), at timing t9, the start winning occurs, and the display of the eighth bomb image and the number "8" of the countdown image starts. Fig. 376(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t10, a start winning occurs and the bomb image development lottery is won, so that the seventh bomb image and the number "7" are displayed as a countdown image.
After that, no start winning occurs, and at timing t16 (6 seconds after timing t10), the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" as the countdown image is interrupted. Figure 376 (h) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t22 (6 seconds after timing t16), the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" ends. In other words, even if a start winning occurs after timing t22, the seventh bomb image and the number "7" of the countdown image will not be displayed again.

Next, referring to Fig. 375 (d), we will explain the performance example 4. The performance example 4 is a partial modification of the performance example 3, and in addition to the timing shown in the performance example 3, it shows a performance example assuming that the start winning occurs at the second start port 2004 at the timing t18.
In this example of presentation, at timing t16, the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" in the countdown image is interrupted, but at timing t18, in response to the occurrence of the starting winning, the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" as the countdown image is resumed.
Furthermore, at timing t24 (six seconds after timing t18), the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" in the countdown image is interrupted again.

Presentation examples 1 to 4 of the "bomb expectation presentation" have been shown, but from timing t33 onwards, the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss without entering a reach state, or the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss or a jackpot after entering a reach state.
After the reach state is reached, a special reach effect (for example, the martial artist character reach effect or the master character reach effect described above) may be executed. In this case, the effect content during the reach effect (such as the result of a battle between characters) indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating a miss or a jackpot.

In spite of the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), if a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) is selected and the "bomb expectation effect" is executed, and if start winnings occur continuously for the second start port 2004, as in the performance examples 1 to 4, the "bomb expectation effect" is executed only within one fluctuation display. However, in the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds) is selected at a high rate (for example, 1/2 or more), and therefore such a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds) is selected at a high rate (for example, 1/2 or more). When a "bomb expectation effect" is executed when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) is selected despite the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) and the "bomb expectation effect" is executed, and the launch of the game ball is stopped or a left shot is performed despite the "bomb expectation effect" being executed, a start winning will not occur for the second starting hole 2004, so it is also expected that the fluctuation will be interrupted before the explosion image is displayed in the "bomb expectation effect" (when the first bomb image to the eighth bomb image and the numbers corresponding to them as countdown images are displayed).
In this case, even if the fluctuation is interrupted (the pattern is fixed, there is no hold, and the next fluctuation does not start), the "bomb expectation effect" itself continues to be displayed (the first bomb image to the eighth bomb image and their corresponding countdown images are displayed even if the fluctuation is interrupted (the pattern is fixed, there is no hold, and the next fluctuation does not start)), so that the "bomb expectation effect" is executed over multiple fluctuation displays. In this case, the expectation of the display result of the newly started fluctuation display (specifically, for the fluctuation that triggered the display of the explosion image in the "bomb expectation effect", or for the fluctuation before the fluctuation that triggered the display of the explosion image in the "bomb expectation effect") is suggested by the expectation suggestion image.
Even if the "bomb expectation effect" is executed across the variable display, the bomb image and countdown image will continue to be displayed. This allows the player to continue to recognize that the "bomb expectation effect" is being executed, and keeps the player interested.

According to the aspects such as the first and second performance examples, the bomb image is switched to the next bomb image with a predetermined probability in response to the occurrence of the start winning, and the countdown by the countdown image is shown to the player as the fuse gradually shortens, so that a player who wants to know the expectation level will play a game to generate the start winning positively. Furthermore, by displaying numbers as the countdown image, the progress of the performance can be clearly communicated to the player. Furthermore, when the bomb image is switched, the countdown image is always switched as well, and the expectation level suggestion image is displayed when the countdown image decreases toward 0, and when it reaches 0, a normal player can quickly understand what kind of performance it is by watching the "bomb expectation level performance" two or three times. Furthermore, a player who understands the content of the performance will feel a sense of elation as the numbers on the countdown image decrease toward 0.
Or, there are a certain number of players who feel it is troublesome to interrupt the firing of the game balls and do not interrupt the firing of the game balls. Also, some game establishments prohibit interrupting the firing of the game balls. In such cases, an over-winning may occur, and the player may feel that he has lost out because he did not get any profit from the initial winning, which may reduce his interest. However, according to this embodiment, the fuse gradually shortens as an over-winning occurs, and the degree of expectation is finally suggested, which can increase the interest.
On the other hand, a player who does not want to know the expectation level, or a player who does not want to release the game ball because they are more concerned about the risk of losing game balls than knowing the expectation level, can immediately stop the release of the game ball, even if they have released the game ball, thereby interrupting or ceasing the display of the bomb image or countdown image (in this case, the result may be something like presentation example 3 or presentation example 4).
In addition, if such a player changes his/her mind midway, the display of the bomb image or countdown image can be resumed by restarting the shooting of the game ball. For example, in the fourth example of the presentation, if the player continues to shoot the game ball after the timing t18, it is possible to display the expectation indication image.

In this way, according to this embodiment, since the player continues to fire game balls even when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, the operation rate of the gaming machine can be increased, which contributes to the sales of the gaming store. In addition, since the player continues to fire game balls at least until the start winning occurs multiple times, the operation rate of the gaming machine can be increased. On the other hand, players who do not like their expectation level being suggested can avoid their expectation level being suggested by the "bomb expectation level effect" by suspending the firing of game balls.

In the embodiment shown, when the varying display ends while a bomb image is being displayed, the display of the bomb image continues, but the display of the bomb image may be ended at the same time that the varying display at which the execution of the "bomb expectation performance" has begun is stopped, thereby terminating the execution of the "bomb expectation performance."
Alternatively, during the varying display, the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" may be terminated at the timing when the decorative pattern forms a reach state or when the reach effect is started.

This embodiment shows that the "bomb expectation effect" is started based on the number of reserved balls in the second start hole 2004 during the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state or high probability time-saving state). During the time-saving state, the movable piece 2004a is opened more frequently, so it is possible to increase the number of reserved balls in a short time. Therefore, the number of reserved balls in the second start hole 2004 is likely to reach its maximum, which may be an opportunity for the player to stop firing the game balls, but the "bomb expectation effect" can be executed, so it is possible to motivate the player to continue firing the game balls.
On the other hand, a "bomb expectation effect" may be executed based on the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 2002 during left-handed play (in a low-probability non-time-saving state or in a high-probability non-time-saving state). The first starting hole 2002 is not provided with a member that changes the winning rate, such as the movable piece 2004a in the second starting hole 2004. When executing a "bomb expectation effect" based on the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 2002, it is preferable to display the normal background image A or the normal background image B as the background image.

In addition, it is preferable that the expectation of winning when a bomb image is displayed (when any of the eighth bomb image to the first bomb image is displayed) remains the same regardless of the type of bomb image.
By adopting such an embodiment, even if a player who has been firing a game ball wanting to know the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion image becomes anxious during the execution of the "bomb expectation level effect" that "an expectation level suggestion image with low expectation level may be displayed" and changes his/her mindset to "I don't want to see the expectation level suggestion image after all," by immediately stopping the firing of the game ball, the expectation level suggestion image will no longer be displayed, thereby providing an effect that can respond to the psychological changes of the player and making it possible to maintain the sense of expectation until the expectation level suggestion image is displayed.

Note that the bomb image may be provided in a number of colors, and different degrees of expectation may be suggested depending on the color of the bomb image.
For example, a white bomb image, a red bomb image, and a gold bomb image may be displayed as the bomb image. In addition, the expectation level may be set to be higher in the order of the white bomb image, the red bomb image, and the gold bomb image.
The color of the entire bomb image may be changed, or only a part of the bomb image may be changed.
When changing the color of a part of the bomb image, the part to be changed may be one or two of the following: the part representing the spherical bomb, the part representing the fuse, and the burning part at the end of the fuse. If there are two parts, it is better to make them the same color rather than different colors.
When the next bomb image is displayed, the part whose color has changed should be left the same color or should be changed to a color with a higher expectation level. Conversely, it is preferable not to change to a color with a lower expectation level.
For example, when the seventh bomb image with a red burning portion is being displayed, if the bomb image development lottery is won and it is decided to display the sixth bomb image, either the sixth bomb image with a red burning portion or the sixth bomb image with a gold burning portion will be displayed, but it is preferable that the sixth bomb image with a white burning portion will not be displayed.
In this way, the timing of changing to a state with high expectation may be the timing of displaying the next bomb image, or may be changed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the timing of displaying the next bomb image. In the case of the elapse of a predetermined time, the interval between launches is generally about 0.6 seconds, and since the progress of the "bomb expectation performance" of the present invention (the progress of the countdown) is triggered by the entry into the second start hole 2004, it is preferable to set the time shorter than the interval between launches. This is because the player can recognize that the game ball that was launched is the one that changed to a state with high expectation, and the sense of excitement is heightened. In addition, if the predetermined time is set to, for example, 1.0 seconds, which is longer than the interval between launches, it may be determined that the ball will enter the second start hole 2004 again before the red is displayed, even though it has been determined that the ball will change to red, and the ball will change to gold before the red is displayed. In such a case, the gold color may be displayed after the red color is displayed once, or the gold color may be displayed by skipping the red stage (without displaying it).

Instead of the bomb image, the color of the countdown image may be changed in the same way as the bomb image. Alternatively, when changing the color of the entire bomb image or part of the bomb image, the color of the countdown image may be the same or a different color, or only the countdown image may be changed.

The color of the explosion image may also be changed to the same color as the first bomb image (all or part) or the countdown image. For example, if a gold first bomb image is displayed, a gold explosion image may be displayed.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the degree of expectation is indicated by the color of the bomb image and the countdown image, it is also possible to prepare multiple display formats for the bomb image and the countdown image and indicate the degree of expectation by their type, without being limited to color. For example, three types of bomb images may be displayed: a small bomb image, a medium bomb image, and a large bomb image, and the larger the bomb image, the higher the expectation. A similar format may also be adopted for the countdown image.

When the number of winning balls in the second starting hole 2004 is a predetermined maximum (specifically, 4 balls), the 8th bomb image and the countdown 8 are always displayed, and when the 8th bomb image is displayed, any one of a white bomb image, a red bomb image, and a gold bomb image may be displayed. In this case, the red bomb image or the gold bomb image, which has a relatively high expectation, is suddenly displayed at the start of the "bomb expectation performance", so that the player can feel a sense of excitement that the highly expected bomb image will be displayed when the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 2004 becomes 3 and it is likely that a game ball will win the second starting hole 2004.
Although the bomb image has been given as an example, as described above, the color of part of the bomb image or the countdown image may be changed.

An embodiment has been shown in which an expectation indication image is displayed on the condition that a start winning occurs multiple times (e.g., at least eight times) during the "bomb expectation effect" and the bomb image development lottery is won a predetermined number of times. In other words, the expectation level is not indicated to the player until a start winning occurs multiple times. This makes it possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine. Note that the number of times is not limited to eight, and may be any number between three and ten times, for example, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine and the probability of a start winning occurring.

When the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 (either in the case of an over-entry or a non-over-entry), a bomb image development lottery is held, and an embodiment has been shown in which the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2, but the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery may be other probabilities, for example, 1/3 or 2/3.
Alternatively, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 without performing the bomb image development lottery (when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 in the case of an over-winning or when the game ball does not enter the over-winning), the next bomb image and countdown image or an explosion image may be displayed. To change in this way, the process of step S180 in the flow chart of FIG. 373 may not be performed or the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery may be set to 1/1.

The above shows an example in which the expectation level indication image in the "bomb expectation level effect" indicates the expectation level for the display result of the decorative pattern during the changing display, and an example in which the expectation level for any of the waiting holds displayed in the first to fourth hold display areas is indicated. However, when the expectation level for any of the waiting holds displayed in the first to fourth hold display areas is indicated, the waiting hold image may be displayed with an arrow or the like to indicate which hold the "bomb expectation level effect" is being performed on, or this arrow or the like may be displayed on multiple waiting holds (for example, the first and third hold display areas) and the display may correspond to one of the waiting holds that is displayed. In this case, both may be displayed as chances, or only one may be a chance.

In steps S150 and S152 of Fig. 372, an embodiment in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is resumed has been shown, but at this time, instead of displaying the original bomb image and countdown image, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed. Note that if the number "1" was displayed as the first bomb image and countdown image, it is advisable to display the number "0" as the explosion image and countdown image.
According to such an embodiment, when the display is resumed, the explosion image and countdown image are displayed one step ahead of when the display was interrupted, so that a player who resumes firing the game ball can feel as if he or she has scored one goal by scoring a game ball.

As special reach effects, a first reach effect during time-saving, a second reach effect during time-saving, and a third reach effect during time-saving may be executed during the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the first reach effect during time-saving to the third reach effect during time-saving, the martial artist character fights against different opponent characters, and if the martial artist character wins, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating a big win after the reach effect ends, and then the big win game starts. On the other hand, if the martial artist character loses, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating a loss after the reach effect ends, and then the next decorative symbols are displayed in a changed state.
In addition, the first reach performance during the time-saving period, the second reach performance during the time-saving period, and the third reach performance during the time-saving period each begin to be executed a predetermined number of seconds after the start of the variable display, based on the performance pattern determined at the start of the variable display.
In addition, the expectation level increases for the first reach performance during the time-saving period, the second reach performance during the time-saving period, and the third reach performance during the time-saving period.

Since the period during which the "bomb expectation effect" is executed varies depending on the launch state of the game ball, a game situation may occur in which a reach effect is started during the execution of the "bomb expectation effect."
In this case, it is advisable to stop displaying the bomb image and the countdown image when all of the reach effects have started. By adopting such an embodiment, the player can concentrate on the reach effects.
Alternatively, for some reach performances, the bomb image and countdown image may be continued to be displayed even during the reach performance, and for other reach performances, the display of the bomb image and countdown image may be stopped at the timing when the reach performance starts. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to generate cases where the bomb image and countdown image are displayed and cases where they are not displayed during the reach performance depending on the type of reach performance.
For example, during the execution of the third reach performance during the time-saving period, which has the highest expectation, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image may be suspended, and during the execution of the first reach performance during the time-saving period or the second reach performance during the time-saving period, which has the relatively lower expectation, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image may be continued.
In this way, by making the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb images and countdown images is not interrupted (hidden) greater than the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb images and countdown images is interrupted (hidden), it is possible to remind players that the reach effects in which the display of the bomb images and countdown images is interrupted (hidden) are reach effects with a particularly high level of expectation.
Also, the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is not interrupted (hidden) may be made smaller than the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden). In this case, a sense of expectation can be provided even in the second reach effect during the time-saving period, which has a relatively low expectation (because the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden) in the third reach effect during the time-saving period, which has a high expectation, the player is given the illusion that the expectation is high when the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden).
In addition, the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted (hidden) may be the same as the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is not interrupted (hidden). Note that the reach effects referred to here are reach effects other than so-called normal reach effects that are performed while the background image is displayed during the time reduction.
In such a case, the bomb image and countdown image are displayed from the start of the fluctuation until the reach performance starts (until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation), and are hidden while the reach performance is being executed, but it is preferable that the time during which the bomb image and countdown image are hidden is longer than the time during which they are displayed.

If the martial artist character loses during the first reach performance during the time-saving period through the third reach performance during the time-saving period (if a display suggesting a loss is displayed in the display suggesting the result of the lottery), the display of the bomb image and countdown image should be resumed after the display suggesting the result of the lottery is displayed, but before the decorative pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop. By using this type of embodiment, the feelings of disappointment felt by the player who finds out that the result of the special lottery is a loss can be alleviated by the display of the bomb image and countdown image.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 during the execution of the first reach performance during time reduction through the third reach performance during time reduction (including both over-winning and non-over-winning), it is preferable not to resume displaying any of the bomb images and countdown images. According to such an embodiment, the player can concentrate on the reach performance. Note that it is preferable not to resume displaying any of the bomb images (first bomb image through eighth bomb image) and their corresponding countdown images, but it is also possible to resume displaying a specific bomb image (for example, the first bomb image) and its corresponding countdown image.

In the first reach performance during the time-saving period to the third reach performance during the time-saving period, if the martial artist character wins (if a display suggesting a jackpot is displayed in the display suggesting the result of the lottery), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and the bomb image and countdown image are hidden until the jackpot game state ends, and when the jackpot game state ends and the next variable display starts, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is resumed. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to concentrate the player on the jackpot game state.
The "bomb expectation effect" may be ended when the display of the decorative symbols is finished. In this case, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image will not be resumed after the big win game state is finished.
In addition, in the first reach effect during the time-saving period to the third reach effect during the time-saving period, if the martial artist character wins (if a display suggesting a win is made in the display suggesting the result of the lottery), the display of the bomb image and the countdown image may be resumed before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. In this case, a sense of expectation can be provided after the end of the big win game state.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed at the timing when the big win game state ends and the next variable display starts, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image may be resumed at a predetermined timing during the big win game state, or at a timing after the martial artist character wins (a display suggesting a big win is made in the display suggesting the result of the win or loss) during the first reach effect during the time-saving period to the third reach effect during the time-saving period, and before the decorative pattern is determined and stopped. According to such an embodiment, the variable display executed after the big win can make the player feel a sense of expectation that another big win will occur (a consecutive win will occur).
Although the embodiment has been shown in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is resumed when the big win game state ends and the next variable display starts, the bomb image and countdown image may be displayed before the big win game state ends and the next variable display starts. In such a case, a sense of expectation can be provided even before the change occurs.

The embodiment has been described in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed when the big win game state ends and the next variable display starts. The bomb image and the countdown image displayed at the time of resuming are the same bomb image and the countdown image as before resuming. According to this embodiment, the variable display executed after the big win can make the player feel a sense of expectation that another big win will occur.
On the other hand, when the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed, a bomb image and a countdown image different from those displayed before the display was interrupted (display was turned off) may be displayed.
For example, regardless of the type of bomb image and countdown image that were displayed, an eighth bomb image and countdown image (number "8") may be displayed so that the countdown starts from the beginning. According to such an embodiment, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.
Alternatively, the display may be changed to display a bomb image and a countdown image that are one step ahead of the image before the display was interrupted. According to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has shot the game ball in vain.

In the embodiment shown, if no winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 occurs for six consecutive seconds while the bomb image is being displayed, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted and hidden, but the time for which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is hidden may not be set to six seconds, but may be determined by a predetermined lottery. For example, at the start of the "bomb expectation performance", six seconds may be selected with a 1/2 probability, or ten seconds with a 1/2 probability.
Also, 10 seconds may be added with a probability of, for example, 3/4 by a predetermined lottery when a prize is won at the second starting port 2004. In this case where 10 seconds are added, the prize will be hidden if there is no prize at the second starting port 2004 for 16 seconds (6 seconds + 10 seconds), so there will be multiple times before the prize is hidden.
Specifically, a case will be described in which six seconds is determined at the start of the "bomb expectation performance", and no winning is made in the second start port 2004 until all fluctuations, including reserved ones, are completed. In this case, if six seconds have passed before all fluctuations, including reserved ones, are completed, no fluctuations are made, and the bomb image and the countdown image are also hidden. If a winning is made in the second start port 2004 at this time, the bomb image and the countdown image will be redisplayed (the redisplayed image may be the same image as before the image was hidden, or may be a different image), but the time until they are hidden again may be six seconds or sixteen seconds. In this way, there are multiple patterns of the time from the start of the fluctuation until the bomb image and the countdown image are hidden, and a player who thought that they would be hidden in six seconds will feel more excited when he or she sees that they were not hidden in six seconds. In addition, a pattern may be set in which the bomb image and the countdown image are not hidden from the start of the fluctuation until the end of the fluctuation by making the number of seconds to be added substantially infinite. This is because it is possible to clearly recognize that the "bomb expectation performance" is being performed.

In the embodiment shown, when a winning entry is made into the second starting hole 2004, the next bomb image with a shortened fuse and the next countdown image are displayed in the same position instead of the bomb image and countdown image currently being displayed, but the positions at which the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed may also be set to be different from the original bomb image and countdown image.
For example, when a winning combination occurs in the second starting hole 2004, the next bomb image and the next countdown image may be displayed by swinging left and right.
FIG. 377(a) shows the display state before a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 occurs. FIG. 377(b) shows the display state after a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 occurs. In the figure, the seventh bomb image and the number "7" of the countdown image are shown shifted to the right. FIG. 377(c) also shows the display state after a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 occurs. In the figure, the seventh bomb image and the number "7" of the countdown image are shown shifted to the left.
It is advisable that this shaking display continue for a predetermined time (for example, one second) after the start of displaying the next bomb image and new countdown image.
In this way, by making the bomb image visible as if it is flickering, the player can more clearly recognize that a win has occurred in the second starting hole 2004. Also, the player can be made to feel tense as if the bomb might explode at any moment.

The bomb image and the countdown image may be dynamically displayed in a manner other than a swaying display, for example, the bomb image and the countdown image may be gradually moved linearly toward a predetermined position each time a new bomb image and countdown image are displayed.
For example, the bomb image and countdown image may move toward the current pending display area and finally be displayed immediately to the left of the current pending image. Figure 377(d) shows a state in which the bomb image is displayed to the left of the current pending image.
The final display positions of the bomb image and the countdown image may not be immediately to the left of the currently reserved image, but may be a position where the currently reserved image and the bomb image overlap in part or in whole. In this case, the bomb image may be displayed in front of the currently reserved image, or may be displayed behind the currently reserved image.
FIG. 377(e) shows a display state in which the first bomb image is displayed in front of the current pending image.

At the start of the "bomb expectation performance", the eighth bomb image and the number "8" of the countdown image are displayed simultaneously, but the timing of displaying the bomb image and the timing of displaying the countdown image may be different.
For example, when the "bomb expectation effect" starts, only the eighth bomb image may be displayed, and when the seventh bomb image is displayed, a countdown image (in this case, the countdown starts from the number "7") may be displayed.
Alternatively, only the bomb image may be displayed until the "bomb expectation effect" starts, and then the countdown image may be displayed at a predetermined stage. For example, the countdown image (in this case, the countdown starts from the number "4") may be displayed when the fourth bomb image is displayed.
According to such an embodiment, the bomb image, which is difficult for other players to distinguish, is displayed first compared to the countdown image, which clearly indicates the stages by numbers, so that other players are less likely to know that the "bomb expectation effect" is being executed, and the player can enjoy it alone. Also, a player who does not want to launch game balls unnecessarily can avoid the countdown image from being displayed by quickly stopping the launch of game balls even if the bomb image is displayed, so that the "bomb expectation effect" can be interrupted or stopped before the overall volume of the effect is achieved.

In the embodiment shown, when the "bomb expectation performance" is executed, the bomb image and the countdown image can change to the next bomb image and countdown image at the same time when the second start gate 2004 is entered, but the timing at which the bomb image and the countdown image change to the next bomb image and countdown image may be different. For example, the next bomb image may be displayed at the time of entering the second start gate 2004, but the next countdown image may not be displayed at the time of entering the second start gate 2004, and the next countdown image may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this way, the next images may be displayed simultaneously, and the next countdown image may be displayed delayed when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., when a delayed lottery is won, or when an even number of images among the first bomb image to the eighth bomb image is displayed). In such a case, the ratio of the delayed situation to the situation occurring simultaneously may be the same, or the delayed situation may be made easier or harder to occur.

In the embodiment shown, the eighth bomb image is switched to the first bomb image in sequence, but the part showing the fuse and the part showing the burning part of the fuse end may be displayed more dynamically. Specifically, when switching from one bomb image to the next bomb image, the length of the fuse may be displayed dynamically so as to gradually shorten. In this case, it is preferable to dynamically display the burning part of the fuse as it shortens.
Furthermore, when this dynamic display ends and the switching of one bomb image to the next bomb image is completed, the countdown image may be switched to the next countdown image.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed on the condition that a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 occurs, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed depending on other conditions.
For example, the bomb image and countdown image may be displayed in response to the start of the "bomb expectation effect" or the occurrence of a winning entry into the second starting port 2004 while the "bomb expectation effect" is being executed, and then the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed based on the passage of a predetermined time.
Specifically, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed when two seconds and four seconds have elapsed since the bomb image and countdown image were displayed. If no gaming ball enters the second start hole 2004 for six consecutive seconds, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted, so that a player who wants to view the "bomb expectation performance" without interruption needs to enter a gaming ball into the second start hole 2004 within the remaining two seconds.
Similarly, after the bomb image and countdown image are displayed, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed one second and two seconds later. In this case, it is necessary to get the game ball to enter the second starting hole 2004 within the remaining four seconds.
In addition, if a winning jackpot is won at the second starting port 2004 before the specified time has elapsed, the timing may be started again from the beginning to determine whether or not the specified time has elapsed.
According to such an embodiment, some of the bomb images and countdown images are displayed automatically, and the presentation can be enjoyed with a relatively small number of game balls fired, which has the effect of reducing the reluctance of players who do not like to fire game balls aggressively as described above to participate in the presentation.

An embodiment has been shown in which an expectation indication image, either "Hot,""VeryHot," or "Right?", is displayed in the position where the explosion image was displayed at the same time as the display of the explosion image and countdown image ends, but the following display forms may also be adopted.
For example, the position where the expectation level suggestion image is displayed may be the position where the countdown image was displayed instead of the position where the explosion image was displayed. In this case, the expectation level suggestion image is displayed at the position where the number "0" of the countdown image was displayed.
Alternatively, the expectation level suggestion image may be displayed at a position different from the position where the explosion image or countdown image was displayed. In this case, the position where the expectation level suggestion image is displayed may be a predetermined position.
According to this embodiment, when the expectation level suggestive image is displayed, the display of the explosion image or countdown image has ended, so the player's attention can be focused on the expectation level suggestive image. Also, since the player can recognize in advance the position where the expectation level suggestive image is displayed, the player can be prevented from missing the expectation level suggestive image.

As the expectation suggestion image, a "change!" message may be displayed to suggest a change in the current reserved image or the standby reserved image. In this case, it is suggested that the color of the current reserved image or the standby reserved image will change to a color with a higher expectation (the relationship between the color of the standby image and the expectation is as described above). For example, it is preferable to change the color of the current reserved image or the standby reserved image from white to any of blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow colors.
Similarly, a message "Changed twice!" may be displayed. In this case, the color of the current reserved image and the standby reserved image is changed twice. Note that the same reserved image is changed twice, not two separate reserved images.
In addition, it is preferable to change the current pending image or the standby pending image while the expectation degree indicating image is being displayed or when the display of the expectation degree indicating image has ended.
Also, based on the look-ahead processing, the number of pending balls among the four waiting balls that will be the jackpot as a result of the special lottery may be counted, and the number may be notified by an image indicating the degree of expectation.
For example, the expectation suggestion image may display "Win x 1", "Win x 2", "Win x 2", "Win x 4", etc. In this case, the player is suggested that the four pending waiting times include one to four special lottery results that will result in a big win.
In addition, an example has been shown in which an image indicating expectation (such as "Hot!" or "Change!") is displayed after an explosion image is displayed, but instead of an image indicating expectation, a display that is only displayed during the time-saving period and that does not induce expectation of a jackpot (as shown in Figure 376 (b)), which is different from the basic information displayed during the time-saving period (such as the number of consecutive wins and the number of wins), may be displayed, for example, the time spent in the time-saving period and the jackpot period (for example, "40 minutes and 30 seconds have passed now!") or a message such as "Today is Sports Day!").

The display of the countdown image may be ended at the timing when the display of the explosion image is ended, but the display of the countdown image may be ended at the timing when the display of the bomb image is ended, and only the explosion image may be displayed. According to such an embodiment, the display mode of the "bomb expectation effect" becomes simple, and the player can concentrate on the fact that the bomb has exploded and on the expectation indication image that is displayed after the display of the explosion image is ended.
Alternatively, the display of the countdown image may be terminated before the bomb image. For example, the display of the countdown image may be terminated at the timing when the sixth bomb image, the seventh bomb image, and the eighth bomb image are displayed. According to such an embodiment, since no clear countdown using numbers is performed, the player can feel a sense of suspense as to when the bomb will explode.
On the other hand, the display of the bomb image may be terminated before the countdown image. For example, the display of the bomb image may be terminated at the timing when the numbers "3,""2," and "1" of the countdown image are displayed. According to such an embodiment, a clear countdown is performed using numbers, so that it is possible to clearly indicate to the player when the explosion image will be displayed.

Although an embodiment in which the displayed bomb image and the countdown image correspond one-to-one has been shown (see, for example, FIG. 370), when a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 occurs after the start of the bomb expectation effect, the eighth bomb image may continue to be displayed as is, and the next countdown image may be displayed for the countdown image. In this case, even if a winning entry into the second starting hole 2004 occurs next time or later, the eighth bomb image may continue to be displayed, and only the number of the countdown image may decrease. In addition, such an effect is executed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, as an expectation indication image, the words "miss" or "the opposite of miss!" are displayed. In addition, such an effect may be executed with a low probability (for example, 1/100) when the "bomb expectation effect" is executed. According to such an embodiment, although a player who sees the effect for the first time may feel strange, a player who has seen the effect multiple times may be able to recognize that a jackpot will occur.
It should be noted that this type of effect may be executed when other bomb images are displayed, not limited to the eighth bomb image.
In addition, it may be used as a one-shot announcement mode that is executed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and always executes this sense of incongruity effect (an effect in which only the countdown proceeds) when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, it may be possible to allow the player to select whether to suggest or announce the result of the special lottery in this one-shot announcement mode or in the normal notice mode (a notice mode in which the bomb image and the countdown image as described above are displayed until the end).

In addition, when the second starting hole 2004 is won and a "bomb expectation effect" is executed after it is determined in advance by a pre-read, an eighth bomb image and the "8" of the countdown image may be displayed as an effect different from the above-mentioned feel-good effect, and when the second starting hole 2004 is won, the game progresses up to a predetermined number (for example, up to the fifth bomb image and the "5" of the countdown image), but once the predetermined number is exceeded, a feel-good effect may be executed that does not progress no matter how many times the second starting hole 2004 is won. By doing this, the player may initially feel the feel-good effect of the "bomb expectation effect" not progressing halfway through, but later know that a win is confirmed when the "bomb expectation effect" stops progressing halfway through, and it is possible to increase interest when the second starting hole 2004 is won and the game does not progress. For example, if the predetermined number progresses to the first bomb image and the countdown image "1," the expectation suggestion image will be displayed soon, and the player will be concentrating on which expectation suggestion image will be displayed. Therefore, it is preferable to set the predetermined number to "4," which is the first half of the "bomb expectation effect," or to "4" or less. In this way, the player can play the "bomb expectation effect" while hoping for the appearance of a strange effect in the first half, and for an expectation suggestion image with high expectation to be displayed in the second half, so that the "bomb expectation effect" can be an effect in which the decline in interest is suppressed throughout the entire effect. The player may also be allowed to choose whether or not to execute such an effect.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between the displayed bomb image and the countdown image (see, for example, FIG. 370), either one may be hidden for a given period of time.
For example, the countdown image may be hidden until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then displayed. Specifically, during the execution of the "bomb expectation effect", the countdown image is not displayed during the period from the eighth bomb image to the fifth bomb image is displayed, and the countdown image is displayed during the period from the fourth bomb image to the first bomb image is displayed.
Alternatively, the countdown image may be displayed until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then hidden from that point on.
Also, the bomb image may be hidden until the middle of the "bomb expectation performance", and then displayed from that point on.
Alternatively, the bomb image may be displayed until the middle of the "bomb expectation performance" and then hidden from the middle.
The timing for switching the display in this manner may be any of the seven times when the bomb image and countdown image are changed to the next bomb image and countdown image.
According to such an embodiment, when only one of the images is displayed, the player will want to see both images displayed, and will launch a gaming ball, thereby increasing the operation of the gaming machine. Also, by hiding one of the images midway through, the player can concentrate on the countdown presentation. Also, when only the bomb image is displayed, the progress of the countdown becomes unclear, and thus a motivation to want to see the countdown image is generated. Also, when only the countdown image is displayed, a motivation to want to reduce the numbers displayed as the countdown image is generated. In either case, a gaming ball will be launched, and the operation of the gaming machine can be increased.

When the bomb image or the countdown image is displayed, sound corresponding to the bomb image or the countdown image may be output.
For example, the same explosion sound may be output at each timing corresponding to the display of the eighth bomb image through the first bomb image.Also, the same sound (such as a "beep" sound) may be output at each timing corresponding to the numbers of the countdown image.
Alternatively, different explosion sounds may be output in response to the display of the eighth bomb image through the first bomb image, respectively.Also, different numbers (e.g. "eight,""seven," etc.) may be output in response to the numbers on the countdown image.
In addition, the same explosion sound or audio may be output during the first half of the "bomb expectation effect" (for example, up to the time when the fifth bomb image and the fourth bomb image are displayed), and different explosion sounds or audio may be output during the second half.
According to this embodiment, the progress of the "bomb expectation effect" is made clear, which can enhance the player's sense of excitement.

As described above, if the timing when the bomb image advances (the next bomb image is displayed) is different from the timing when the countdown image advances (the next countdown image is displayed), it is preferable to output a sound or voice corresponding to the time when the bomb image advances (the next bomb image is displayed), but not output a sound or voice corresponding to the time when the countdown image advances (the next countdown image is displayed). If the timing when the bomb image advances (the next bomb image is displayed) is different from the timing when the countdown image advances (the next countdown image is displayed), and the player continues to hit the ball from the right, it is relatively easy to enter the second starting hole 2004, so many game balls will enter the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, if the firing interval is about 0.6 seconds and the timing is different, some kind of sound will be output twice in 0.6 seconds, that is, once every about 0.3 seconds on average, which may cause the player to feel disgusted. Note that the opposite pattern may be used, where no sound or audio is output when the bomb image advances (the next bomb image is displayed), but a sound or audio is output when the countdown image advances (the next countdown image is displayed).

In the "bomb expectation effect," decorative members may be made to move or emit light.
For example, the decorative members may not be activated when a bomb image or countdown image is first displayed, but the movable decorative members may be activated when any subsequent bomb image or countdown image is displayed.
Also, the movement of the movable decorative member may be gradually increased. For example, the movable decorative member may not be moved when the bomb image or countdown image is first displayed, and may be moved when the second or subsequent bomb image or countdown image is displayed. By adopting such an embodiment, the player's sense of elation may be enhanced.
In addition, a movable decorative member having a light emitting means may be adopted, and the light emitting means may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable decorative member or after the movement of the movable decorative member. By adopting such an embodiment, the player's sense of elation can be further enhanced.

At the timing when the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed, the acceptance of operations on the operation unit may be enabled and an operation unit simulative image may be displayed to prompt the user to operate the operation unit. Fig. 377(f) shows an example in which an operation unit simulative image is displayed above the number "7" on the countdown image.
In addition, when an operation is performed on the operation unit and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the bomb image or countdown image may change with a predetermined probability (for example, from a white bomb to a red bomb).
In addition, if the operation section simulative image is displayed but the player does not operate it (if one change has been confirmed and stopped before the player operates it), the operation section simulative image may not be hidden at the timing of the confirmed stop, but may continue to be displayed even when the timing for the next change to start arrives, so that the operation section simulative image is displayed over multiple change displays.
Also, while the operation section simulative image is being displayed, multiple operations on the operation section may be accepted. Also, in response to the acceptance of multiple operations, the display mode of the bomb image or the countdown image may be changed multiple times. In such a case, the display of the operation section simulative image continues even if an operation is performed on the operation section.
Also, the operation section simulative image may be displayed less conspicuously than the bomb image or countdown image, making it difficult for the player to notice that the operation of the operation section is enabled. Fig. 377(g) shows a state in which the operation section simulative image is displayed in the lower left of the display area. By displaying the operation section simulative image smaller than the bomb image or countdown image and closer to the edge of the display area in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the operation section simulative image is being displayed.

In this way, the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 370 to 377 can provide new interest to the player.

Below, we will explain an embodiment that includes a new effect, the "scroll stock effect." Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment that was explained with reference to Figures 123 to 377, etc.

First, an overview of the "scroll stock effect" will be described. In the "scroll stock effect," when a reservation occurs, a look-ahead process is performed for the reservation, and based on the look-ahead result, it is determined whether or not to execute the "scroll stock effect."
When it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect", a martial artist character is displayed behind the current reserved image, and a demon character is displayed behind each of the displayed standby reserved images. Note that the characters are displayed so as to overlap with the current reserved image and each standby reserved image, but they may be displayed so as not to overlap.
When the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, the martial artist character continues to be displayed at the same position, but as the reserved image moves, the demon character displayed corresponding to the first standby reserved image that is closest to the martial artist character moves in, and a "scroll acquisition performance" is executed in which the demon character fights with the martial artist character.
In the battle in the "scroll acquisition performance", the martial artist character may win or lose against the demon character, but if the martial artist character wins, he or she can acquire the scroll. The acquired scroll is displayed in a specified position in the display area (for example, the upper left position of the display area). If the martial artist character loses, he or she cannot acquire the scroll.
In this way, each time the decorative pattern is changed, a "scroll acquisition effect" is executed, and a display is made of the martial artist character and the demon character fighting. Note that the final battle between the martial artist character and the demon character takes place in the changeable display corresponding to the reserved memory that triggered the execution of the "scroll stock effect." Also, even if a new reservation occurs during the execution of the "scroll stock effect," a new demon character will not be displayed in response to that reservation.
After the battle with the last demon character is over, the scrolls acquired up to that point are opened in a "scroll release effect" during the changing display of the decorative pattern. The opened scrolls contain certain characters and other inscriptions, which indicate the degree of expectation, and the display contents of the preview effect are changed to display contents with a higher expectation of a jackpot. The changing display during which the battle with the last demon character takes place may develop into a reach effect.
The timing at which the "scroll release effect" is executed is a predetermined timing within the period from immediately after the end of the battle with the last demon character to the stop display of the decorative symbols. For example, the "scroll release effect" can be executed at a predetermined timing before the decorative symbols enter a reach state, during the reach state, or during the reach effect.

FIG. 378 is a presentation pattern table showing the number of scrolls in standby at the timing when it is determined to execute the "scroll stock presentation", and the type and number of scrolls that can be acquired. In the "scroll stock presentation", a presentation pattern is selected based on a look-ahead process.
Specifically, if the number of pending items at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is one, one of the effect patterns PTN01 to PTN03 is selected.
Furthermore, if the number of pending items at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is two, one of the effect patterns PTN04 to PTN09 is selected.
Furthermore, if the number of pending items at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is three, one of the effect patterns PTN10 to PTN19 is selected.
Furthermore, if the number of pending items at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is four, one of the effect patterns PTN20 to PTN34 is selected.

The presentation pattern is selected so that the more scrolls in reserve at the time it is decided to execute the "scroll stock presentation", the greater the number of scrolls that can ultimately be acquired. Also, the more scrolls acquired in total, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

As shown in the figure, the maximum number of scrolls that can be acquired in the "scroll stock effect" is the same as the number of scrolls in the waiting reserve at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect." For example, if one of the performance patterns PTN30 to PTN34 is selected at the time when the fourth waiting reserve occurs and the "scroll stock effect" is started, a display is displayed in which the martial artist character defeats the demon character four times, and four scrolls can be acquired.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of scrolls in reserve at the start of the "scroll stock effect," there may be cases where no scrolls are acquired. For example, when effect pattern PTN01, effect pattern PTN04, effect pattern PTN10, or effect pattern PTN20 is selected, the martial artist character does not win even once against the demon character, and no scrolls are acquired.

Also, the types of scrolls that can be acquired include scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer.
FIG. 379 is a table showing the correspondence between the number of scrolls acquired and the order of acquisition of the scrolls. In addition, which scroll acquisition pattern the scroll will be acquired in is also determined based on the result of the look-ahead. For example, scroll acquisition pattern PTN04 is a pattern in which a scroll with a timer is acquired as the first scroll, and a scroll without a timer is acquired as the second scroll. Also, scroll acquisition pattern PTN25 is a pattern in which a scroll without a timer is acquired as the first scroll, a scroll with a timer is acquired as the second scroll, a scroll without a timer is acquired as the third scroll, and a scroll with a timer is acquired as the fourth scroll.

In this way, in the "scroll acquisition effect," the focus of the player's attention is on how many scrolls are pending when the "scroll stock effect" begins, i.e., how many times the "scroll acquisition effect" will be performed, and how many scrolls with and without a timer will ultimately be acquired.

At a predetermined timing in the variable display after the last "Scroll Acquisition Presentation" has ended, a "Scroll Release Presentation" corresponding to each acquired scroll is executed. In the "Scroll Release Presentation", the scroll is opened and enlarged and displayed near the center of the display area, and a predetermined change is made to the content of the presentation being executed. Specifically, a display is made to increase the expectation suggested by the presentation.
Furthermore, there are two types of scrolls that can be acquired: scrolls without a timer, which do not have a timer, and scrolls with a timer, which have a timer.
When a scroll with a timer is acquired, the timer counts down from the time the scroll is acquired, and when the timer reaches zero, the scroll is opened, causing a change to the predetermined effect content being executed when the scroll is opened. In other words, the player can recognize when the "scroll release effect" will be executed. Also, the countdown may start not when the scroll is acquired, but after it has finished moving to the upper left, as described below.
On the other hand, with a scroll without a timer, the player is not informed when the scroll will be opened, but the scroll is opened at a predetermined timing, and a change is made to the predetermined performance content that is being executed when the scroll is opened. In other words, the player cannot recognize when the "scroll release performance" will be executed.
Also, the expectation of a big win is higher when a scroll with a timer is acquired than when a scroll without a timer is acquired. Also, for scrolls with a timer, the timer counts down from a specified number of seconds, and the longer the number of seconds at the start of the countdown, the higher the expectation of a big win. Also, a scroll without a timer at the time of acquisition may be changed to a scroll with a timer when it finishes moving to the upper left and starts the countdown, as described below. In other words, in this case, the scroll without a timer functions as a premonition suggestive performance of a scroll with a timer.

Below, specific examples of the "scroll stock effect" will be described with reference to Figs. 378 to 385. Fig. 378 shows the effect pattern table in this embodiment as described above. Fig. 379 shows the scroll acquisition pattern table in this embodiment. Figs. 380 and 381 show time charts of this effect example. Also, Figs. 382 to 387 show the display state of the display area at a specified timing in this effect example.
In this example, when there are three reserved balls, a winning ball enters the first starting hole 2002, bringing the number of reserved balls to four. Based on the look-ahead process based on this winning ball, the look-ahead process selects look-ahead process pattern PTN32 to start the "scroll stock look-ahead process." After that, every time the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to each reserved ball is changed, the "scroll acquisition look-ahead process" is performed. Also, the scroll acquisition pattern PTN25 is selected, and in the "scroll acquisition look-ahead process," two scrolls without a timer and two scrolls with a timer are acquired. In the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the fourth reserved ball that was the subject of the look-ahead process, the "scroll release look-ahead process" is performed four times after the "scroll acquisition look-ahead process" is performed.
That is, in this example, the "scroll stock effect" is executed over five variable displays. The first to fourth variable displays out of the five variable displays result in a miss, and the fifth variable display results in either a big win or a miss.

Figures 380(a) to 380(d) show time charts corresponding to the first to fourth variable display, and Figures 381(a) and 381(b) show time charts corresponding to the fifth variable display.
Also, timing t20 in Fig. 380(a) (the timing when the static display in the first variable display ends) is the same as timing t0 in Fig. 380(b) (the timing when the second variable display starts). Similarly, timing t20 in Fig. 380(b) and timing t0 in H30(c), timing t20 in Fig. 380(c) and timing t0 in H30(d), timing t20 in Fig. 380(d) and timing t0 in H32(a), and timing t30 in Fig. 381(a) and timing t30 in H32(b) are the same.

Here, the execution time for each of the first through fourth variable displays is set to 19 seconds, and the stop period for determining the decorative pattern is set to 1 second; however, as long as there is enough time to execute the "scroll acquisition performance," the execution time for each variable display can be set appropriately, for example, within the range of about 5 to 40 seconds.
Similarly, the execution time of the fifth variation display is set to 59 seconds, but as long as the time for executing the reach effect and the "scroll release effect" is secured, it can be set appropriately within the range of, for example, about 30 to 180 seconds. In other words, it is preferable to set the average variation time of the reserved determined to perform the "scroll stock effect" to be longer than the average variation time of each of the first to fourth variations. Even when the "scroll stock effect" is performed, since the number of scrolls acquired may be 0, the target variation may be the so-called normal variation time (a time of about 10 seconds in non-reach) or the shortened variation time (for example, a variation time of about 3 seconds that is most likely to be selected when the number of scrolls is 4). It is preferable to set the time of the fifth variation display to be longer as the number of scrolls acquired increases, but it is also possible to set a pattern in which the variation time is long but the number of scrolls acquired is small, such as, for example, two scrolls acquired in a variation time of 120 seconds and three scrolls acquired in a variation time of 90 seconds.

The first variable display will be described with reference to Fig. 380(a). The number of pending items at the start of the variable display is three. In addition, normal background image A (see Fig. 347(a)) is displayed as the background image. Fig. 382(a) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t0 to timing t10.
At timing t10, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and the "scroll stock effect" starts based on the look-ahead process. Here, a martial artist character is displayed in the upper left corner of the current reserved image, and a demon character is displayed in the upper right corner of each standby reserved image. Figure 382 (b) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t10 to timing t17.
At timing t17, the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, at timing t18, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and at timing t19, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss, and the stopped display continues until timing t20. Fig. 382(c) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t19 to timing t20.
As shown in Fig. 382(d) etc., the display priority of the martial artist character and the demon character is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols during the varying display. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 382(c), the display priority of the martial artist character and the demon character is lower than the display priority of the decorative symbols during the stationary display.

Next, referring to Figure 380 (b), the second variable display will be explained.
At timing t0, the second variable display begins. From timing t0 to timing t1, each reserved image moves one position to the left. At the same time, the demon character moves along with each reserved image. At timing t1, the movement of each reserved image and the demon character ends, and from timing t1 to timing t3, a battle begins between the martial artist character and the demon character that has moved above the current reserved image. The word "battle" is also displayed behind both characters. Figure 382(d) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t1 to timing t3.

At timing t3, the battle between the martial artist character and the demon character ends, and from timing t3 to timing t4, a display is given indicating that the martial artist character has won, or a display is given indicating that the demon character has won.
If the martial artist character wins, the demon character falls to a position where it is not displayed, and the martial artist character acquires the scroll and holds it in his left hand. Figures 382(e) and 382(f) show the display state at this time. Next, the scroll acquired by the martial artist character is displayed moving to the upper left of the display area while becoming slightly larger, and the "scroll acquisition performance" ends. Figures 382(g) and 382(h) show the display state at this time. Also, the scroll displayed in the upper left may be made smaller than the scroll that the martial artist character acquires and holds in his left hand.
On the other hand, if the martial artist character loses, the martial artist character falls to the ground, the demon character is not displayed, and the "scroll acquisition effect" ends. If the martial artist character loses, the scroll cannot be acquired, and the scroll is not displayed. Figure 383(a) shows the display state when the martial artist character falls to the ground. Also, Figure 383(b) shows the display state when the "scroll acquisition effect" ends.
Thereafter, the left decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped at timing t17, the right decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped at timing t18, and all decorative patterns are displayed temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss at timing t19, and the stopped display continues until timing t20.

As shown in Figures 380(c), 380(d), and 381(a), a "scroll acquisition effect" in which the martial artist character and the demon character fight is also performed at timings t3 to t4 of the third to fifth variable displays. Also, in the third and fourth variable displays, the decorative pattern is displayed stationarily in the same manner as in the second variable display. In this example, the martial artist character wins the battle against the demon character in all four "scroll acquisition effects" and acquires four scrolls. Figure 383(c) shows a display example at timing t5 of Figure 381(a).
The acquired scrolls are displayed in the order of acquisition from the top left to the right of the display area. In this example, the first and third scrolls from the left are scrolls without a timer, and the second and fourth scrolls from the left are scrolls with a timer. The countdown for the scrolls with timers starts from the time they are acquired, but at timing t5 in FIG. 381(a), the value of the second timer from the left is "14:00" and the value of the fourth timer from the left is "38:00", and the "scroll release performance" is executed at timing t19, 14 seconds after timing t5, and timing t43, 38 seconds after timing t5. The countdown may start not at the time the scroll is acquired, but at the time when the moving display to the upper left starts, or after the moving display to the upper left ends.

If four scrolls have been acquired at the start of the fifth varying display, the "scroll release effect" will be executed four times, and an example of the effect is shown below.
The first "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t10 during the execution of the "step-up preview effect" in the period from timing t8 to timing t12 when the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed.
The second "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t19 during the execution of the "dialogue preview effect" in the period from timing t17 to timing t21 when the decorative pattern is rapidly changing.
The third "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t33 during the execution of the "reach title preview effect" in the period from timing t31 to timing t35 during the reach effect.
The fourth "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t43 during the execution of the "dialogue preview effect" in the period from timing t41 to timing t45 during the reach effect.
The following describes the presentation of each "scroll release presentation." Note that a "scroll release presentation" using a scroll with a timer and a "scroll release presentation" using a scroll without a timer will not be performed at the same time (when the countdown using a scroll with a timer reaches 0, a "scroll release presentation" using a scroll without a timer will not be performed).

Here, with reference to Figure 384, we will explain the "Step Up Preview Performance".
In the "Step Up Preview" mode, multiple images are displayed in a predetermined order, and the degree of expectation is indicated by which image is displayed. Specifically, a rectangular frame is displayed near the center of the display area, and a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character are displayed in that order within the frame.
The presentation patterns include a presentation pattern in which only the first stage character, the martial artist character, is displayed, a presentation pattern in which up to the second stage warrior character is displayed, a presentation pattern in which up to the third stage samurai character is displayed, and a presentation pattern in which up to the fourth stage wizard character is displayed.
Fig. 384(a) shows a display state in which a martial artist character is displayed. Fig. 384(b) shows a display state in which a warrior character is displayed. Fig. 384(c) shows a display state in which a samurai character is displayed. Fig. 384(d) shows a display state in which a wizard character is displayed.
For example, when a presentation pattern in which up to the fourth stage wizard character is displayed is executed, the display state of the display area will change in the order of Figure 384(a), Figure 384(b), Figure 384(c), and Figure 384(d).
The display time for each character can be set as long as the visibility of the character is ensured, but in the example presentation shown below, it is set to two seconds.

In the "Step Up Preview Performance", the degree of expectation is also indicated by the background color within the frame. Specifically, one of three colors, white, red, and gold, is selected as the background color. The degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and gold. Figures 384(a) to 384(d) show the display state when white is selected as the background color.
The background color may remain unchanged at the start of the "step-up preview performance" or may change to a color with a higher expectation during the "step-up preview performance". For example, a white background image may be continuously displayed from the first stage to the fourth stage, and the color may not change. Alternatively, the color of the background image may change to a color with a higher expectation at the timing of changing from one stage to the next stage, or may change to a color with a higher expectation while the background image of one stage is being displayed. When the background image changes in this way, the color of the background image after the change is adopted as the color of the background image of the next stage. Note that the color of the background image may change from white to red at one timing, and then change from red to gold at another timing.
In such a "step-up preview performance," the player's level of expectation is indicated depending on what stage of the character has been displayed and the final color of the background image.

Although an embodiment in which the color of the background image is changed has been shown, the color of the frame may be changed instead of the color of the background image. Also, an embodiment in which different characters are displayed in sequence from the first stage to the fourth stage has been shown, but the character may not be changed and different poses of the same character may be displayed in sequence. Also, different images may be displayed up to the fourth stage, not limited to the character.
Although the "Step Up Preview" is executed up to the fourth stage in the above example, the number of stages is not limited to four, and any number of stages (two or more) may be used, and the maximum number of stages to which the characters are displayed can be set as appropriate. Similarly, the number of colors of the background image and frame is not limited to three, and any number of colors (two or more) may be used, and the maximum number of colors that can be displayed can be set as appropriate.

As shown in the time chart in Figure 381 (a), in the fifth changing display, a "step-up preview performance" is carried out from timing t6 to timing t14.
Fig. 384(e) shows the display state at timing t5 before the execution of the "Step Up Preview Performance" starts, and Fig. 384(f) shows the display state at timing t10 when the display of the samurai character, which is a third stage character, starts during the execution of the "Step Up Preview Performance".
At timing t11, a "scroll release performance" is performed. In the "scroll release performance," the leftmost scroll without a timer moves to the center of the display area and then opens, making certain characters, such as "Rise!", visible, and the background color changes from white to red (the background color may be changed a certain amount of time (e.g., one second) after the certain characters are displayed). At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). Figure 384(g) shows the display state at timing t11.
At timing t12, the wizard character, which is a fourth stage character, is displayed. At this time, the background color remains red. As shown in the figure, the display of the scroll that was opened at timing t12 ends. Figure 384(h) shows the display state at timing t12.
At timing t14, the "Step Up Preview" ends, and the display of the horizontally long rectangular frame and character ends.

Here, we will explain the "dialogue preview performance" with reference to Figure 385.
The "line preview" is a display in which one of a number of lines is displayed for a predetermined time (four seconds in this example), and the type of line displayed indicates the level of expectation. Specifically, one of the lines "No, no...", "I don't really understand...", and "Just wait and hope!" is displayed in a line display frame displayed in the display area. The lines have increasing expectation in the order of "No, no...", "I don't really understand...", and "Just wait and hope!".
Fig. 385(a) shows a display state in which the low expectation line "It's no good, it's no good..." is displayed. Fig. 385(b) shows a display state in which the medium expectation line "I don't really get it..." is displayed. Fig. 385(c) shows a display state in which the high expectation line "Wait with anticipation!" is displayed. Note that a character speaking the lines (here, a master character) may be displayed as shown in these figures.

As shown in the time chart in Figure 381 (a), in the fifth varying display, a "dialogue preview" is performed in the period from timing t17 to timing t21.
Fig. 385(d) shows the display state at timing t16 before the execution of the "dialogue preview performance" starts. Fig. 385(e) shows the display state at timing t18 when the "dialogue preview performance" starts and the line "No, no..." is being displayed. Here, the number of seconds indicated by the scroll with timer on the far left is "1:00", indicating that the "scroll release performance" will be performed in one second.
At timing t19, a "scroll release performance" is performed. In the "scroll release performance," the scroll with timer that was at the far left moves to near the center of the display area and then opens, making a predetermined character (e.g., "Dialogue Change!") visible, and the dialogue changes from "No, no..." to "Wait with anticipation!" (The dialogue may be changed a predetermined time (e.g., one second) after the predetermined character is displayed). At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). Figure 385(f) shows the display state at timing t19.
At timing t21, the "dialogue preview" ends, and the display of the dialogue display frame, dialogue, master character, and open scroll ends.
In this manner, an example has been given in which, when a "scroll release effect" is performed, other preview effects or reach effects different from the "scroll release effect" are changed to displays with higher expectations, but it is also possible to have the "scroll release effect" be completed on its own (without affecting the display of other preview effects or reach effects).
Also, in the "step-up preview performance" and "dialogue preview performance", examples have been shown in which the display is changed to one with high expectations when a specific character is displayed by the "scroll release performance", but the time from when the specific character is displayed by the "scroll release performance" to when the display is changed to one with high expectations may be the same for the "step-up preview performance" and the "dialogue preview performance" shown in the examples, or may be different. For example, in the "step-up preview performance", the display is changed to one with high expectations one second after the specific character is displayed, but in the "dialogue preview performance", the display is changed to one with high expectations two seconds after the specific character is displayed.

At timing t25, the left decorative pattern (number "2") temporarily stops, and at timing t26, the right decorative pattern (number "2") with the same number as the left decorative pattern temporarily stops, resulting in a reach state. Next, at timing t30, the reach performance begins. Specifically, at timing t30, the background image is switched to a background image dedicated to reach performance (here, reach-time background image A shown in Figure 347 (c)), and the decorative pattern becomes a reach-time decorative pattern and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the top left and top right of the display area.

Here, with reference to Figure 386, we will explain the "reach title preview performance".
There are several types of reach effects, and the characters and background images that appear are different. At the start of a reach effect, a display showing the name of the reach effect is displayed.
For example, Figure 386 (a) is an example of the display at the start of a "martial artist character reach", showing a martial artist character, a background image A during the reach, and the words "martial artist character reach!".
Figure 386 (b) is an example of the display at the start of a "warrior character reach", showing a warrior character, a reach background image B, and the words "Warrior character reach!".
The background color within the frame displaying the reach name is either white, red, or gold. Fig. 386(c) shows a display example in which the background color within the reach title display frame displaying the reach name "Fighter Character Reach" is displayed in red. Fig. 386(d) shows a display example in which the background color within the reach title display frame displaying the reach name "Warrior Character Reach" is displayed in red.
The likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on the type of reach effect, with a "warrior character reach" having a higher likelihood of a jackpot than a "fighter character reach."
The background color of the reach title display frame also indicates the expectation of a big win, with the expectation increasing in the order of white, red, and gold. In this way, the expectation of the "reach title preview performance" is indicated by the background color of the reach title display frame.

As shown in the time chart in Figure 381 (a), in the fifth varying display, a "reach title preview performance" is carried out from timing t31 to timing t35.
385(e) shows the display state at timing t32, one second after the start of the "reach title preview performance." Here, the color within the reach title display frame is white.
At timing t33, a "scroll release performance" is performed. In the "scroll release performance," the leftmost scroll without a timer moves to the center of the display area and then opens, making the predetermined text ("Up!") visible, and the color in the reach title display frame changes from white to red (the color in the reach title display frame may be changed after a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the predetermined text was displayed). At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). Figure 386(f) shows the display state at timing t33.
At timing t35, the "reach title preview performance" ends, and the display of the reach title display frame, reach name, and scroll ends.

Here, with reference to Figure 387, we will explain the "Line preview performance during reach performance".
The "Line preview during reach performance" is a performance in which one of several different lines is displayed, and the type of line displayed indicates the degree of expectation. The lines displayed are the lines of the opponent in battle. Specifically, one of the following lines is displayed in the line display frame displayed in the display area: "I won't lose!", "You look strong!", or "No way!". The expectation level of these lines increases in the order of "I won't lose!", "You look strong!", and "No way!".
Fig. 387(a) shows a display state in which a low expectation line, "I won't lose!" is displayed. Fig. 387(b) shows a display state in which a medium expectation line, "You look strong!" is displayed. Fig. 387(c) shows a display state in which a high expectation line, "No way!" is displayed. As shown in these figures, the facial expression of the opponent character (here, a samurai character) and the way he holds his weapon may be displayed in accordance with the line.

As shown in the time chart in Figure 381 (a), in the fifth varying display, a "reach performance dialogue preview performance" is carried out in the period from timing t41 to timing t45.
Fig. 387(d) shows the display state at timing t40 before the execution of the "reach performance dialogue preview performance" starts. Also, Fig. 387(e) shows the display state at timing t42 when the "reach performance dialogue preview performance" starts and the dialogue "I won't lose!" is displayed. Here, the number of seconds indicated by the scroll with timer on the far left is "1:00", indicating that the "scroll release performance" will be performed in one second.
At timing t43, a "scroll release performance" is performed. In the "scroll release performance", the scroll with timer moves to near the center of the display area and then opens, making predetermined text ("Chance!") visible, and the dialogue changes from "We won't lose!" to "You look strong!" (The dialogue may be changed a predetermined time (e.g., one second) after the predetermined text is displayed). At this point, the number of scrolls displayed in the upper left of the display area becomes zero. Figure 387(f) shows the display state at timing t43.
At timing t45, the "reach effect dialogue preview effect" ends, and the dialogue display frame, dialogue, and scroll display end. Also, at this timing, the "scroll stock effect" ends.

During the period from timing t45 to timing t57, a display is shown of a battle between a martial artist character and a samurai character, and if the martial artist character wins, at timing t57, the decorative symbols during reach are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (for example, "2", "2", "2"), and at timing t59, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the samurai character wins, the decorative symbols during the reach are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss (for example, "2", "3", "2") at timing t57, and the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss at timing t59.

Next, referring to the time charts in Figures 381 (c) and 381 (d), an example of a presentation when the "scroll stock presentation" is not executed will be shown.
The time charts shown in Figures 381(c) and 381(d) show examples of effects when the various effects executed in the fifth changing display shown with reference to Figures 381(a) and 381(b) are executed without the ``scroll stock effect.''
In this example, no scrolls are acquired or released, and therefore the preview mode (such as the type of dialogue or the background color within the frame) does not change at timing t4, timing t19, timing t33, and timing t43.

According to such an embodiment, it is not clear when a scroll without a timer will be released, but the release timing of a scroll with a timer can be clearly indicated.
In the above embodiment, scrolls are released in all of the "Step Up Preview Effect,""Dialogue Preview Effect,""Reach Title Preview Effect," and "Dialogue Preview Effect During Reach Effect," but the number of scrolls acquired ranges from 0 to 4. Therefore, for example, when the number of scrolls acquired is small (for example, 1), the player can enjoy imagining in which preview effect the "scroll release effect" will be executed.
In addition, the "Step Up Notice Effect" and "Dialogue Notice Effect" are executed before the reach state is reached, and the "Reach Title Notice Effect" and "Dialogue Notice Effect during Reach Effect" are executed during the reach effect. Therefore, depending on the length of time indicated by the scroll with timer, the player can enjoy imagining whether or not a reach effect will occur and which notice effect the scroll with timer corresponds to.
Although four effects, "Step-up preview effect", "Dialogue preview effect", "Reach title preview effect", and "Reach effect dialogue preview effect", have been given as examples, the preview effects performed in one change may be more than the maximum number of scrolls obtained (four). In this way, the player can enjoy wondering which preview effect corresponds to which scroll release effect.

In scroll acquisition pattern PTN04 and scroll acquisition pattern PTN08 shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (Figure 379), it is possible to acquire a scroll without a timer after acquiring a scroll with a timer (while the countdown display of the scroll with a timer is being displayed).
According to this embodiment, the player can be entertained even during the period until the timer of the timer scroll reaches zero.
Also, a scroll with a timer may be acquired, and then a scroll without a timer may be acquired before the countdown for that scroll begins (before the scroll with a timer starts moving to the top left of the display area or finishes moving).

In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN05 and scroll acquisition pattern PTN11 shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (Figure 379), it is possible to acquire a scroll with a timer after acquiring a scroll without a timer.
According to such an embodiment, while the player is waiting with anticipation to see what will be displayed from the scroll without a timer, the player may be able to acquire a new scroll with a timer, which can further increase the player's sense of excitement.

In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN03 and scroll acquisition pattern PTN08 shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (FIG. 379), it is possible to acquire a scroll without a timer after acquiring a scroll without a timer.
According to such an embodiment, the player may be able to obtain a new scroll without a timer while waiting in anticipation to see what will be displayed from the scroll without a timer, which can further increase the player's sense of excitement.
In the embodiment described later, it is possible to obtain multiple types of scrolls without a timer, each having a different expectation level depending on the display mode. In such an embodiment, it may be possible to obtain the same scroll without a timer after obtaining a scroll without a timer, or to obtain a different scroll without a timer after obtaining a scroll without a timer. For example, it may be possible to obtain a red scroll without a timer, which has a relatively high expectation level, after obtaining a blue scroll without a timer, which has a relatively low expectation level.
According to such an embodiment, it may be possible to obtain a scroll without a timer with high expectation from a situation in which a scroll without a timer with low expectation has been obtained, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the "scroll stock effect."

A plurality of display modes may be provided for the martial artist character. For example, two types of display modes for the martial artist character may be provided: a martial artist character without a halo and a martial artist character with a halo. In the case of a martial artist character without a halo, the probability of winning the battle, i.e., the probability of obtaining a scroll, is higher (i.e., the expectation of a big win is higher) in the case of a halo. FIG. 388(a) shows a display state in which a halo is displayed behind the martial artist character. The display mode of the martial artist character is not limited to the presence or absence of a halo, but may be realized by changing the facial expression of the martial artist character, holding one of a plurality of weapons (club, hammer, nunchucks, etc.) for the martial artist character, or by combining these modes.
According to this embodiment, the probability of acquiring a scroll varies depending on the display mode of the martial artist character, so that the sense of expectation for acquiring a scroll can be increased.

A plurality of display modes may be provided for the demon character. For example, two types of demon characters may be provided, one with one horn and one with two horns. The demon character with two horns is weaker than the demon character with one horn and the probability that the martial artist character can win the battle, i.e., the probability that the martial artist character can obtain the scroll is higher (i.e., the expectation of a big win is higher). FIG. 388(b) shows a display state in which, from the left, a demon character with one horn, a demon character with two horns, a demon character with two horns, and a demon character with one horn are displayed. This example is not limited to this example, and either a demon character with one horn or a demon character with two horns can be appropriately arranged for each of the first to fourth waiting reservations. The most preferable situation for the player is when all the demon characters are demon characters with two horns. Conversely, the least preferable situation for the player is when all the demon characters are demon characters with one horn. The types of demon characters may be three or more.
In addition to the demon character, multiple types of display objects such as other characters and treasure chests may be displayed, and scrolls may be acquired depending on the results of battles between the martial artist character and these characters, or whether the martial artist character can open the treasure chest. Also, the probability of acquiring a scroll may be varied depending on the type of these characters.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of acquiring a scroll varies depending on the type of character or object displayed, so that the expectation of acquiring a scroll can be increased.

It is also possible to have a martial character without a halo change to a martial character with a halo, or a martial character with a halo change to a martial character without a halo during the "scroll stock performance" (such as at the end or start of a change, or after fighting the demon character and the result is displayed (after it is displayed whether the martial character won or lost the battle)).
Similarly, during the "scroll stock performance", a demon character with one horn may change into a demon character with two horns, or a demon character with two horns may change into a demon character with one horn.
For example, in a "scroll stock effect" that is started when there are four reserved scrolls, the display mode of the martial artist character or the type of demon character may be changed when the "scroll acquisition effect" is executed twice.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of obtaining a scroll increases or decreases during the "scroll stock effect," thereby increasing the interest of players hoping to obtain a scroll.
It is also possible to make it possible to execute only effects that increase the probability of obtaining a scroll, and not execute effects that decrease the probability of obtaining a scroll.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the likelihood of acquiring a scroll differs depending on the display mode of the martial artist character, the display mode of the martial artist character may be of three or more types. Also, it is preferable to make the probability of acquiring a scroll different depending on the type.
Note that any one of a number of types of characters (e.g., a martial artist character, a samurai character, a warrior character, a wizard character) may be displayed, and the probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the displayed character. Also, it may be possible to display a number of display modes for characters other than martial artist characters, and the probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the type and display mode of the character.
Although two types of demon characters are shown, three or more types may be displayed. Also, it is preferable that the probability of acquiring a scroll differs depending on the type.

Although an embodiment in which a demon character with one horn and a demon character with two horns appear has been shown, the ratio of scrolls that can be acquired when winning a battle may differ depending on the type of demon character. For example, when defeating a demon character with one horn, there may be a 1/3 probability of acquiring a scroll without a timer and a 2/3 probability of acquiring a scroll with a timer, and when defeating a demon character with two horns, there may be a 2/3 probability of acquiring a scroll without a timer and a 1/3 probability of acquiring a scroll with a timer.
Alternatively, if the player wins against a demon character with one horn, the player may obtain a scroll with a timer, and if the player wins against a demon character with two horns, the player may obtain a scroll without a timer.

In the embodiment shown, the ratio of scrolls with timers and scrolls without timers obtained when a battle is won differs depending on the type of demon character, but the ratio of scrolls with timers and scrolls without timers obtained when a battle is won may differ depending on the display mode of the martial artist character. For example, the probability of obtaining a scroll with a timer may be higher when a martial artist character with a halo wins a battle compared to when a martial artist character without a halo wins a battle.

As shown, there are scrolls with timers and scrolls without timers as scrolls that can be obtained, but the display mode (timer time) at the start of the display of the scroll with timer can be set in multiple types, and the longer this time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Also, the time displayed at the start of the countdown is set so that the countdown ends at the timing when a specified preview performance is being executed. The time displayed at the start of the countdown is determined based on the time required for multiple variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the longer the time displayed on the scroll with timer (remaining time on the countdown) at the start of the variable display corresponding to the starting winning that was the subject of the pre-reading process, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Similarly, the display mode of the scroll without a timer may be of multiple types (two or more types). In addition, it is preferable that the expectation of a big win is made different depending on the type.
Specifically, three types of scrolls without a timer, blue, green, and red, may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to set the expectation of a big win to be higher in the order of blue scrolls without a timer, green scrolls without a timer, and red scrolls without a timer. Figure 388(c) shows a display state in which four scrolls without a timer have been acquired. The scroll acquisition state shows, from the left, a state in which a blue scroll without a timer, a blue scroll without a timer, a green scroll without a timer, and a red scroll without a timer have been acquired.
The thickness of the scroll may be different depending on the color of the scroll without a timer. For example, the length or thickness of the scroll may be increased in the order of a blue scroll without a timer, a green scroll without a timer, and a red scroll without a timer.
According to such an embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated in advance by the display mode of the scroll without a timer, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a jackpot.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a scroll without a timer may have a plurality of display modes, the display content displayed when the scroll is opened may differ depending on the type of scroll without a timer.
For example, a blue scroll with no timer may display either "Up!" or "Change!", and a green scroll with no timer may display either "Hot!" or "Super Hot!".
According to such an embodiment, different displays are made depending on the type of timerless scroll being displayed, so that the player can know in advance what type of display will be made depending on the type of timerless scroll.
In this way, by making the characters displayed on the blue no-timer scroll and the characters displayed on the green no-timer scroll completely different, it becomes clear which display will be made for each color no-timer scroll, and the player can hope that if it is a blue no-timer scroll, the display with the highest expectation of a win that can be displayed on a blue no-timer scroll will be made, and if it is a green no-timer scroll, the player can hope that the display with the highest expectation of a win that can be displayed on a green no-timer scroll will be made, so that players can be excited no matter what color scroll they are.
Also, for example, in the case of a blue scroll without a timer, either "Rising!" or "Change!" may be displayed, and in the case of a green scroll without a timer, either "Rising!" or "Super Hot!" may be displayed. In this case, a part of the display in the scroll release performance of the scroll without a timer appears in common to multiple types of scrolls without a timer, so that even the blue scroll without a timer, which has a lower expectation of winning than the green scroll without a timer, can be expected to win. Also, all of the display in the scroll release performance may be the same for multiple types of scrolls without a timer.

In the embodiment shown, when the "scroll release effect" is executed, the display mode of the preview effect being executed changes, and the expectation level always increases, but it is also possible to provide a case where the expectation level does not change.
For example, when a "scroll release effect" is executed using a scroll with a timer, the display mode of the preview effect being executed will always change, but when a "scroll release effect" is executed using a scroll without a timer, even when the scroll is opened, there may be no text written inside the scroll, or only the letter "X" written inside, and the display mode of the preview effect being executed may not change.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of tension when the scroll is opened. Also, since the display that increases the expectation of the preview effect being performed is not performed, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the "scroll stock effect."

Referring to Figures 389(a) to 389(c), an embodiment in which a "scroll release effect" is applied to a hold change effect will be described.
At timing t18 in Fig. 381, if a reserve change performance is performed instead of a "dialogue preview performance", the display state at timing t18 will be the display state shown in Fig. 389(a). Note that at this timing, the color of the current reserve image is white.
Next, at timing t19, the timer scroll opens and displays "Pending change!" At this time, the color of the current pending image changes from white to a more promising color. Figure 389(b) shows the display state in which the color of the current pending image has changed from white to green as a result of the pending change performance. Also, Figure 389(c) shows the display state in which the color of the current pending image has changed from white to red as a result of the pending change performance.
As mentioned above, the relationship between the color of the currently pending image and the degree of expectation is as follows: for example, the degrees of expectation increase in the order of white, blue, green, red, and gold.
In this way, even if the target of the change in display mode is the current reserved image due to the scroll release performance, it is possible to increase interest. In addition, the color of the current reserved image may be changed after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the display of "Reserved change!"

With reference to Figures 389 (d) to 389 (f), an embodiment in which a "scroll release effect" is applied to a "character display effect" that indicates the degree of expectation will be described.
If a "text display effect" is implemented instead of a "dialogue preview effect" at timing t18 in Figure 381, the display state at timing t18 will be the display state shown in Figure 389 (d).
Next, at timing t19, a display is made to open the scroll with timer. Inside the opened scroll, there is written the characters "Maybe it's hot?", which indicates a relatively low degree of expectation, the characters "Hot!", which indicates a hypothetical medium degree of expectation, or the characters "Super hot!!", which indicates a relatively high degree of expectation. Fig. 389(e) shows a display state in which the characters "Maybe it's hot?" are displayed. Fig. 389(f) shows a display state in which the characters "Super hot!!" are displayed.
Although the types of characters displayed in the "character display effect" are three types with relatively different degrees of expectation, any number of types (two or more) may be used.
In this way, the "scroll release effect" may display text indicating the degree of expectation.

Referring to Figure 390, an embodiment in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to a "cut-in preview effect" that displays a cut-in image will be described.
A display example in the case where a "cut-in advance notice performance" is performed at timing t50 in Fig. 381 is shown below. The display state at timing t49, which is the timing immediately before the cut-in advance notice performance is performed, is as shown in Fig. 390(a).
Next, at timing t50, the "cut-in preview" starts to be executed, and a horizontally long rectangular frame and a wizard character are displayed as a cut-in image. The "cut-in preview" is executed for 4 seconds until timing t54. Figure 390(b) shows the display state at timing t50.
At timing t52, a display is made of the scroll with a timer being opened. The word "Chance!" is written inside the opened scroll, and the background color within the frame of the cut-in image changes from white to red. Figure 390(c) shows the display state at this time.
There are three background colors within the frame of the cut-in image: white, red, and gold. The expectation level increases in the order of white, red, and gold.
In this way, the background color of the cut-in image may be changed by the "scroll release effect," thereby increasing the level of expectation.

When displaying the title of the reach effect, a predetermined number of stars (any of 1 to 5) may be displayed in the display area, and the number of stars may indicate the degree of expectation of the reach effect. Also, if the expectation of the reach effect increases due to the "scroll release effect," the number of displayed stars may be increased to indicate the increased expectation of the reach effect.

With reference to Figures 380 to 387, an embodiment has been shown in which, during the execution of a "scroll stock effect", after all of the "scroll acquisition effects" in which the martial artist character and the demon character battle have been completed, a "scroll release effect" is executed at a predetermined timing; however, the "scroll release effect" may also be executed at a timing before all of the "scroll acquisition effects" have been executed.
For example, a "scroll release effect" may be executed during a "scroll acquisition effect," and a display may be displayed showing the martial artist character winning the battle against the demon character. In this case, the scroll that can be acquired may be more promising than the scroll that is released. For example, a scroll with a timer may be acquired as a result of releasing a scroll without a timer. Or, a green or red scroll without a timer may be acquired as a result of releasing a blue scroll without a timer.

Note that if the "scroll stock effect" is executed but no scroll is acquired, interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, it may be possible to make it so that at least one scroll is acquired.

When a scroll with a timer is acquired, the countdown may start when the scroll is displayed (as shown in FIG. 382(f)). Alternatively, the countdown may start when the scroll starts to move or when the scroll is in the middle of moving (as shown in FIG. 382(g)). Alternatively, the countdown may start when the scroll stops moving (as shown in FIG. 382(h)).

In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 380, 381(a), 381(b), etc., the scrolls are released in the order in which they were acquired, but the scrolls may be released in other ways.
For example, in a situation where both a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer are acquired, the "scroll release performance" corresponding to the scroll without a timer may be executed first, and then the "scroll release performance" corresponding to the scroll with a timer may be executed. According to such an embodiment, the timing of the release of the scroll can be made clear in a relatively later period in the entire variable display.
Furthermore, in this case, the "scroll release performance" of the scroll with a timer will not begin to be executed until the specified display of the "scroll release performance" of the scroll without a timer has ended (the countdown display will never reach 0), so the time for which the countdown display is performed will be longer than the time for which the scroll without a timer is displayed.
In addition, by doing this, the "scroll release effect" by the scroll with a timer can be thought of as a chance-up effect that is performed in the latter half of the variable display of the target that is supposed to perform the "scroll stock effect" (for example, it can be thought of as being performed for the title display of the reach effect or the cut-in display during the reach effect), so the "scroll release effect" by the scroll without a timer can be thought of as a chance-up effect that is performed in the first half of the variable display (for example, a "step-up notice effect"). A player who thinks of this in this way can hope for not only the most promising display when the "step-up notice effect" performed in the first half of the variable display is performed, but also a display one step lower in expectation than the most promising display, which can increase the interest, and a player who thinks that the "scroll release effect" by the scroll without a timer will be performed when the "step-up notice effect" is performed can easily take the timing when he or she wants the most promising display to be performed.

Conversely, in a situation where both a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer are acquired, the "scroll release performance" corresponding to the scroll with a timer may be executed first, and then the "scroll release performance" corresponding to the scroll without a timer may be executed. According to such an embodiment, the timing of the release of the scroll can be made ambiguous in a relatively later period in the entire variable display.
Furthermore, in this case, the "scroll release performance" of the scroll without a timer will not begin to be executed until the specified display of the "scroll release performance" of the scroll with a timer has ended (while the countdown display is being displayed); the time during which the countdown display is performed is shorter than the time during which the scroll without a timer is displayed, so although the recall timing described in the previous paragraph is reversed, the same effect can be obtained.

Although embodiments of a "step-up preview performance," a "dialogue preview performance," a "reach title preview performance," a "dialogue preview performance during reach performance," and a "cut-in preview performance" have been shown, rather than executing these preview performances in separate periods, the execution periods of two or more preview performances may overlap for at least a portion of the period.
For example, the execution of the second preview performance may be started while the first preview performance is being executed. Also, the execution of the first preview performance may be started while the second preview performance is being executed. Also, the execution of the first preview performance and the second preview performance may be started simultaneously.
Furthermore, the execution of the second preview performance may be completed during the execution of the first preview performance. Furthermore, the execution of the first preview performance may be completed during the execution of the second preview performance. Furthermore, the execution of the first preview performance and the second preview performance may be completed simultaneously.
These may also be combined.
For example, the execution of a "dialogue preview performance" may be started while the "step-up preview performance" is being executed.

Specifically, for example, when the third stage of the "step-up notice performance" of FIG. 384(c) is displayed, the character of FIG. 385(a) is displayed. In this way, even if there are multiple scrolls acquired, it is possible to execute the "scroll release performance" by the acquired scrolls in a relatively short time. In this case, for example, when the "scroll release performance" (display of "Rise!" etc.) performed in response to the scroll with the timer is displayed, the "scroll release performance" (display of "Rise!" etc.) performed in response to the scroll without the timer can also be displayed. In this case, the display of the "scroll release performance" performed in response to the scroll with the timer and the display of the "scroll release performance" performed in response to the scroll without the timer may be displayed so as to overlap or not overlap. In addition, the "scroll release performance" displayed first may be hidden first, the "scroll release performance" displayed later may be hidden first, or both may be hidden at the same time.
In addition, when a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll without a timer is displayed when a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll with a timer is displayed, the gaze will be drawn to the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" that appeared later. Therefore, by making the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" that appeared earlier is displayed longer than the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" that appeared later is displayed, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to multiple "scroll release effects" from being overlooked (forgotten).

Also, an example has been given in which a "scroll release performance" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll without a timer is displayed when a "scroll release performance" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll with a timer is displayed, but the same applies in other cases, such as when a "scroll release performance" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll with a timer is displayed, a "scroll release performance" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll without a timer is displayed, a "scroll release performance" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll with a timer is displayed, and when a "scroll release performance" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll without a timer is displayed, a "scroll release performance" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll without a timer is displayed, a "scroll release performance" (display such as Rise!) performed in response to a scroll without a timer is displayed.
Although an example has been shown in which the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release presentation" displayed earlier is made longer than the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release presentation" displayed later is made, the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release presentation" displayed earlier is made shorter than the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release presentation" displayed later may be made shorter. This is because the display corresponding to the "scroll release presentation" displayed earlier is displayed to some extent, and therefore there is a possibility that the player will recognize it.
Also, the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" may be displayed for the same time regardless of the "scroll release effect" that was performed earlier and the "scroll release effect" that was performed later. By displaying it for the same time, the time until it is hidden becomes fixed, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding (not to give unnecessary thought to whether the display time is long and therefore it is a chance).

When multiple preview performances are executed simultaneously, the display area may be divided into multiple areas, and the preview performance may be executed in each divided area. For example, the display area may be divided into left and right, and a display related to a "step-up preview performance" may be executed on the left side of the display area, and a display related to a "dialogue preview performance" may be executed on the right side of the display area.

Also, although an embodiment has been shown in which the display mode of the "step-up preview performance", "dialogue preview performance", "reach title preview performance", "reach preview performance", "cut-in preview performance", etc. is changed by the "scroll release performance", as described above, for example, the "step-up preview performance" and the "dialogue preview performance" may be executed at almost the same time, and both the display of the "step-up preview performance" with the expectation level increased by the "scroll release performance" and the display of the "dialogue preview performance" with the expectation level increased by the "scroll release performance" may be displayed. In such a case, the display period in the display mode after the display mode has changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "post-change display mode") will overlap for at least a part of the period.
In this case, the display of the second post-change display mode may be started while the first post-change display mode is being displayed. Also, the display of the first post-change display mode may be started while the second post-change display mode is being displayed. Also, the display of the first post-change display mode and the second post-change display mode may be started simultaneously.
The display of the second post-change display mode may be terminated while the first post-change display mode is being displayed. The display of the first post-change display mode may be terminated while the second post-change display mode is being displayed. The displays of the first post-change display mode and the second post-change display mode may be terminated simultaneously.
These may also be combined.
For example, the period during which a scroll is released during the execution of a "Step Up Preview Performance" and the background color is displayed with the changed background color and the period during which a scroll is released during the execution of a "Dialogue Preview Performance" and the dialogue is displayed with the changed dialogue may overlap for at least a portion of the period.
In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of post-change display modes, the sense of excitement upon hitting a jackpot can be further enhanced.

During the period from when a scroll with a timer is obtained until the "scroll release effect" performed for that scroll with a timer is performed (or until the display mode changes due to the "scroll release effect" and is displayed after the change), a player-participation effect (a preview effect different from the above-mentioned "step-up preview effect,""dialogue preview effect,""reach title preview effect,""reach dialogue preview effect," and "cut-in preview effect") may be executed, in which an operation instruction display is given to an operation unit that the player can operate (e.g., operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.), and the operation instruction display, player-participation effect, and result effects displayed by operating the operation unit (including result effects that are displayed without operating the operation means) may be displayed. In this case, interest can be maintained even before the countdown display by the scroll with a timer reaches "0."
The same may be done for scrolls without a timer, but because the player does not know when the "scroll release effect" will be executed for scrolls without a timer, it is preferable not to execute the player participation effect described above (start of display of operation instructions) between the time the scroll without a timer is acquired and the time the "scroll release effect" for the scroll without a timer is executed.
On the other hand, if both a scroll with a timer and a scroll without a timer are acquired, the above-mentioned player participation type performance (start of display of operation instructions) is not performed until the first scroll release performance is executed, but the player participation type performance (start of display of operation instructions) may be performed thereafter, or the player participation type performance (start of display of operation instructions) may be performed before the first "scroll release performance" is executed, or the player participation type performance (start of display of operation instructions) may be performed after a predetermined number of "scroll release performances" less than the number of scrolls acquired are executed, or the player participation type performance (start of display of operation instructions) may be performed after "scroll release performances" corresponding to all of the acquired scrolls are executed. Also, in the variation that is the subject of the "scroll stock performance", the player participation type performance may be performed multiple times. In that case, multiple player participation effects (start of operation instruction display) may be performed before the first "scroll release effect" is executed, or multiple player participation effects (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after the "scroll release effect" is executed and the next "scroll release effect" is executed, or one player participation effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after the scroll release effect is executed and the next "scroll release effect" is executed, with the remaining player participation effects (start of operation instruction display) being executed after the next "scroll release effect" is executed, or multiple player participation effects (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after the "scroll release effect" corresponding to all of the acquired scrolls is executed.

In response to the execution of the "scroll release performance," the above-mentioned luminous decorative member may be illuminated.
As the illuminating decorative components, for example, one or more of the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, door frame top unit 570, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200 provided on the door frame 3, the panel board rear base plate 2420 provided on the game board 5, the tank role-playing device 3770, etc. can be used.
When performing a "scroll release performance" for a scroll without a timer, it is advisable to make the illuminating decorative member emit light in a specific illumination mode.
The timing for starting light emission in a specific light emission mode can be any of the following: before the start of the "scroll release performance", simultaneous with the start of the "scroll release performance", and after the start of the "scroll release performance". Also, the timing for ending light emission in a specific light emission mode can be any of the following: before the start of the "scroll release performance", simultaneous with the start of the "scroll release performance", and after the start of the "scroll release performance".
The luminous decorative member having the specific luminous mode may be one or more of the above-mentioned. In addition, as the specific luminous mode, a luminous decorative member provided on the door frame 3 and a luminous decorative member provided on the game board 5 may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode, and then the luminous decorative member provided on the door frame 3 may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode.
With a scroll without a timer, there is a risk that the player will miss the changed display state because it is not known when the scroll will be released. However, according to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the changed display state.
When performing a "scroll release effect" for a scroll with a timer, the luminous decorative member may not be illuminated in a specific illumination mode. In this case, it is preferable to adopt an illumination mode that matches the background music being output as the illumination mode of the luminous decorative member. This is because the player can recognize the timing of the scroll release by the timer counting down. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming excessive.

The above-mentioned movable decorative member may be moved in response to the execution of the "scroll release performance."
As movable decorative members, for example, one or more of the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, door frame top unit 570, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200 provided on the door frame 3, the panel board rear base plate 2420 provided on the game board 5, and the tank role-playing device 3770 can be adopted.
For scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer, a specific movable decorative member (which may be one or more) may be operated at the timing when the "scroll release performance" is executed.
In addition, a specific movable decorative member is operated at the timing when a ``scroll release performance'' is executed for a scroll without a timer, but when a ``scroll release performance'' is executed for a scroll with a timer, the specific movable decorative member may not be operated.
In addition, a specific movable decorative member may not be operated when executing a "scroll release performance" for a scroll without a timer, but a specific movable decorative member may be operated when executing a "scroll release performance" for a scroll with a timer.
In addition, for scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer, a specific movable decorative member (which may be one or more) may not be operated at the timing when the "scroll release performance" is executed.
The operation of the movable decorative member may be, for example, moving from a standby position to a moving position. When the movable decorative member moves to the moving position, the predetermined notice display in the changed display mode may overlap the movable decorative member when viewed from the front. For example, a part or all of the predetermined notice display in the changed display mode may overlap the movable decorative member. In this case, the visibility of the notice display in the changed display mode is reduced, but the player can feel a sense of excitement as to what has been displayed.
On the other hand, when the movable decorative member moves to the moving position, the predetermined preview display in the post-change display mode may not overlap with the movable decorative member when viewed from the front.
In addition, when multiple movable decorative members are moved to their moving positions, a specified preview display in the post-change display mode may overlap some of the movable decorative members when viewed from the front, while a specified preview display in the post-change display mode may not overlap other movable decorative members when viewed from the front.

In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which the display mode in the ``Step-up Preview Performance,'' ``Dialogue Preview Performance,'' ``Reach Title Preview Performance,'' ``Dialogue Preview Performance during Reach Performance,'' and ``Cut-in Preview Performance'' changes depending on the ``scroll release performance,'' but the type of display mode after the display mode has changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as ``post-change display mode'') may be different between a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer.
For example, the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released may be greater than the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released. According to this embodiment, the player can wait with excitement to see which post-change display mode will be displayed during the period until the countdown reaches zero.
The number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released may be the same as the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released. Alternatively, the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released may be less than the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released.

A predetermined sound effect may be output in response to the execution of the "scroll release effect."
Also, different sound effects may be output depending on whether a scroll without a timer is released or a scroll with a timer is released.
Also, a sound effect may be output when a scroll without a timer is released, and no sound effect may be output when a scroll with a timer is released.
In addition, when a scroll without a timer is released, one of a plurality of sound effects corresponding to a plurality of post-change display modes may be output, and when a scroll with a timer is released, either no sound effect is output, or the same sound effect is output regardless of the post-change display mode.
With a scroll without a timer, there is a risk that the player will miss the changed display state because it is not known when the scroll will be released. However, according to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the changed display state.
For scrolls with a timer, a countdown sound may be output in accordance with the countdown display from a predetermined number of seconds before the scroll is released. For example, the sound "5,""4,""3,""2," and "1" may be output from 5 seconds to 1 second before the scroll is released.

In this way, the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 378 to 390 can provide new interest to the player.

The light guide plate 1140 functioning as a decorative member will be described below with reference to Figures 391 and 392.
Fig. 391(a) is a front view, and Fig. 391(b) is a plan view (sectional view). Fig. 392 shows the light guide plate 1140 and the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 as viewed from the front.
The panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate opening 1118. A light guide plate 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the rear so as to cover a part of the panel plate opening 1118. The size of the light guide plate 1140 is slightly larger than the display area 1600a.
The light guide plate 1140 is a flat member made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 formed of fine irregularities on the rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 1140 is 2 mm. The shape of the portion where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided is a decorative shape such as a predetermined character, design, pattern, or letter (in the example described below, a monster character and multiple lightning bolts are expressed).
A light guide plate illumination member 1146 is attached along the up-down direction of the right end portion of the light guide plate 1140. The light guide plate illumination member 1146 is composed of a thin light guide plate substrate 1147 and a plurality of light guide plate light emitting members 1148 mounted on the light guide plate substrate 1147 along the longitudinal direction of the light guide plate substrate 1147. The light guide plate light emitting members 1148 are made of full-color LEDs. The light emission of the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is controlled by a peripheral control board 1510.

The light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is reflected within the light guide plate 1140 and reaches the left end of the light guide plate 1140. Therefore, the light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 reaches the entire area inside the light guide plate 1140.
The light that enters the light guide plate 1140 is diffusely reflected by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142. A part of the diffusely reflected light changes its optical path toward the player, and is visually recognized by the player as if the portion where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided is emitting light.
On the other hand, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is visually recognized in a substantially transparent state, and it is difficult for a player to notice the presence of the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142. Furthermore, the portion of the light guide plate 1140 where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is not provided is in a smooth state, and it is difficult for a player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 1140 regardless of whether the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light or not.
Therefore, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is visually recognized as emitting light in a predetermined manner. In addition, the player can visually recognize the display content of the display area 1600a located behind the light guide plate 1140 when the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is overlapped with the emitting light.
Furthermore, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light, the player can see the display contents of the entire display area 1600 a located behind the light guide plate 1140 .

Next, a specific visual recognition mode of the display region 1600a and the light guide plate 1140 will be described with reference to Fig. 392. Fig. 392(a) to Fig. 392(c) are front views.
Fig. 392(a) shows how the light guide plate 1140 (dashed line portion) overlaps with the display area 1600a (solid line portion). It also shows the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 provided on the light guide plate 1140. The light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 in the shape of a monster character is provided near the center of the light guide plate 1140. Furthermore, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 in the shape of a lightning bolt is provided radially from the monster character as the center.
392(b) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is changing and the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light. In this state, since no light is introduced onto the light guide plate 1140, the monster characters and lightning are not visible, and the entire display content of the display area 1600a is visible.
392(c) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is changing and the light guide plate illumination member 1146 emits light. In this state, the light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is introduced into the light guide plate 1140, and the light is scattered at the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142, making the monster character and the lightning visible.

In this way, by introducing the light emitted by the light guide plate illumination member 1146 into the light guide plate 1140, the light is diffused at the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 provided on the light guide plate 1140, and an image of a predetermined pattern (such as a monster character or a lightning bolt) formed by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 can be displayed. Also, when the player is viewing the display area 1600a, a predetermined image (here, an image of a monster character or an image of a lightning bolt) is suddenly displayed on the light guide plate 1140 located in front of the display area 1600a, giving the player a great surprise.

The light guide plate illumination member 1146 may be provided with a plurality of colors of light to be emitted. For example, when light of colors such as blue, green, and red is emitted, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 of the same shape can be made to emit light in different colors. In the above, examples of indicating the degree of expectation by various images (reserved images, preview images, etc.) and the luminous color of the luminous decorative member have been described, and similarly, the degree of expectation of a jackpot, etc. can be indicated by the color of light introduced into the light guide plate 1140.
For example, three colors of light, blue, green, and red, may be provided as the colors of light introduced into the light guide plate 1140, with the expectation levels increasing in the order of blue, green, and red. In this case, the monster character and the lightning bolt will be displayed in one of the colors blue, green, and red.

Below, the "weather forecast performance" will be explained with reference to Figure 393.
The "weather forecast" display involves displaying an image that represents a weather phenomenon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "weather phenomenon image") in the display area 1600a, and indicating the likelihood of a jackpot depending on the type of weather phenomenon image displayed.
There are three types of weather phenomenon images: rain, lightning, and tornado. In the "weather forecast", one of the images is displayed. The expectation of a big win increases in the order of rain, lightning, and tornado. For example, the expectation when a rain image is displayed may be 3%, the expectation when a lightning image is displayed may be 7%, and the expectation when a tornado image is displayed may be 10%.
The "weather forecast" is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and any weather phenomenon image continues to be displayed while the execution of the effect is being performed.

Fig. 393(a) shows an example of the display state when the "weather forecast performance" is not being executed. Here, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image, the decorative pattern is in a state of high-speed fluctuation, and the current reserved image and two standby reserved images are displayed.
An example of the display when the "weather forecast" performance starts in this state is shown below.
Fig. 393(b) shows a state where the "weather forecast performance" is executed and a rain image is displayed. Fig. 393(c) shows a state where the "weather forecast performance" is executed and a thunder image is displayed. Fig. 393(d) shows a state where the "weather forecast performance" is executed and a tornado image is displayed.
As shown in each figure, the display priority of the weather phenomenon image is set higher than the display priority of the background image, and lower than the display priority of the fourth pattern, the hold number display image, the current hold image, the waiting hold image, and the decorative pattern.

The "weather forecast" may indicate the likelihood that the result of the decorative pattern change during its change will result in a jackpot, or, based on a look-ahead process, may indicate the likelihood that the result of the change corresponding to any of the pending waiting images will result in a jackpot.
Note that the weather phenomenon image may be displayed dynamically, for example, in the form of rain or lightning falling from above or a tornado moving from side to side.
In the example of the performance shown with reference to Fig. 393, the timing for executing the "weather forecast performance" was when the decorative symbols were fluctuating at high speed, but the "weather forecast performance" may be executed when one to three of the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. For example, in the "pseudo consecutive performance", the "weather forecast performance" may be executed when the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, or when the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as the same symbol in a reach state.

The variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern will be described with reference to Fig. 394. Here, there are misses and big wins as a result of the special lottery, and in the case of a miss, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table for the miss shown in Fig. 394(a). In addition, in the case of a big win, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table for the big win shown in Fig. 394(b).
The execution of the special lottery and the determination of the variation pattern are performed by the main control board 1310, and the result of the special lottery and the determined variation pattern are transmitted as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the received result of the special lottery and the variation pattern, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the display using the game board side performance display device 1600, the output of sounds, the operation and illumination of decorative members, and the like as performances.

In this embodiment, the probability of a big win is 1/300. For the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that small wins and misses with time reduction do not occur. The illustrated variation pattern table is a variation pattern table that is referenced when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 in a normal state (low probability non-time reduction state) and the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 2002 is 0.
In the loss fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation time becomes longer but the allocation probability becomes lower from fluctuation pattern 01 to fluctuation pattern 07. On the other hand, in the big win fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation time becomes longer but the allocation probability becomes higher from fluctuation pattern 08 to fluctuation pattern 14. Here, the probability that fluctuation pattern 07 and fluctuation pattern 08 are selected is set to 0%.

From Figures 394(a) and 394(b), it can be said that the longer the fluctuation time of the decorative pattern, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. For example, the expectation of a fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds (fluctuation pattern 01, fluctuation pattern 08) is 0%, while the expectation of a fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds (fluctuation pattern 05, fluctuation pattern 12) is approximately 1.6%, the expectation of a fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds (fluctuation pattern 06, fluctuation pattern 13) is approximately 9.1%, and the expectation of a fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 240 seconds (fluctuation pattern 07, fluctuation pattern 14) is 100%.

By employing such a fluctuation pattern table, it becomes possible to execute pseudo consecutive effects or special reach effects when the fluctuation display is long.
Furthermore, the longer the varying display time of the decorative symbols, the higher the expectation of a big win, making it possible for the player to enjoy an elaborate presentation for a long period of time while keeping the player in anticipation of a big win.
In addition, in the variation pattern table of the same number of seconds (for example, variation pattern 06 and variation pattern 13), the same presentation display is executed until the predetermined timing of the variation display, and after the predetermined timing, a display is performed showing whether the result of the special lottery is a miss or a jackpot (for example, a win/loss display performed at the end of a special reach presentation). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can guess the expectation of a jackpot during the presentation display, and can watch the result of the presentation display while expecting what kind of display will be performed at the end.

Note that the number of change patterns, change times, and allocation probabilities shown in FIG. 394 are merely examples, and the number of types of change patterns may be six or more, and other change times such as 5 seconds, 90 seconds, or 300 seconds may be used. By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes possible to execute a variety of effects during the display of the changing decorative patterns.

Although a table is shown to be referenced when the state when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 is the normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) and the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 2002 is zero, a different variation pattern table may be used depending on the type of starting port into which the game ball entered (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), the game state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and the number of reserved balls (0 to 4).
For example, the five types of variable time may remain as shown in the example, but the allocation probability may be different. Alternatively, a variable pattern table in which the types of variable time (number of seconds) are increased or decreased may be used.

In particular, in the low probability time-saving state and high probability time-saving state, many game balls enter the second starting hole 2004 in a short period of time. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern table of the second starting hole 2004, it is advisable to set the allocation probability so that the fluctuation time is relatively short compared to the fluctuation pattern table used in the low probability time-saving state and high probability time-saving state. By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the number of times the decorative pattern is displayed per unit time can be increased, making it less likely that an over-entry will occur in the second starting hole 2004, and reducing a decline in interest.

The fluctuation pattern table may also be set according to the number of reserved items. In this case, it is advisable to set the allocation probability so that the greater the number of reserved items, the shorter the fluctuation time will be. Conversely, it is advisable to set the allocation probability so that the smaller the number of reserved items, the longer the fluctuation time will be. By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the display of the decorative patterns is less likely to be interrupted, preventing a decline in interest.

Below, the "hold change color indication effect", which is a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 123 to 390, etc., will be described with reference to Figs. 395 to 405, etc. Fig. 395 shows an example of an image displayed in this embodiment (or a modification), etc. Figs. 396 and 397 show an effect pattern table in this embodiment. Figs. 398 and 399 show time charts in this embodiment. Figs. 400, 401, 403, 404, and 405 show display examples in display area 1600a of this embodiment.

The outline of the "reserved change color indication effect" will be described below. In the "reserved change color indication effect", the color of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed suggests the color to which the reserved image will change.
In the "reserve color change indication performance", a "first reserve color change indication performance" and a "second reserve color change indication performance" are executed, but there are cases where only the "first reserve color change indication performance" is executed and cases where the "second reserve color change indication performance" is executed after the "first reserve color change indication performance" is executed.

Figure 395 (a) shows an example of a decorative pattern displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 in this embodiment.
The colors of the numbers in the decorative pattern are blue, green, and red. The numbers attached to the decorative pattern include "1" to "9". As shown in the figure, the numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue, "1", "5", and "9" are green, and "3" and "7" are red. In the figure, blue is represented by a diagonal line going down to the left, green is represented by a diagonal line going down to the right, and red is represented by a grid-like line. This point may also be applied to other drawings, and the color of an image other than the decorative pattern may be indicated by the type of line. The parts of the decorative pattern other than the numbers (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "background area") may be white, gray, black, or the like. Alternatively, a color similar to the color of the decorative pattern (navy blue or light blue when the color of the decorative pattern is blue, yellow-green when the color of the decorative pattern is green, and orange or pink when the color of the decorative pattern is red) may be used.
In addition, decorative symbols with blue numbers are normal symbols, and decorative symbols with green or red numbers are special symbols.
Also, the type of the symbol forming the ready state may suggest the expectation of a big win. For example, when the numbers attached to the decorative symbols are "1", "2", "4", "5", "8", and "9", the expectation may be less than 5%, 20% for "6", 50% for "3", and 90% (or 100%) for "7". This makes it possible to heighten the interest of the player not only in whether the ready state symbol is a normal symbol or a probability variable symbol (i.e., whether it is an even number or an odd number), but also in whether the number attached to the symbol is one of "1" to "9".
As shown in FIG. 395(b), the color of the background area of the decorative pattern may be a color (blue, green, red) corresponding to the type of number, not limited to numbers. In this case, the number part of the decorative pattern may be a color such as white, gray, black, etc. Alternatively, a color similar to the color of the background area (navy blue or light blue when the color of the background area is blue, yellow-green when the color of the background area is green, orange or pink when the color of the background area is red) may be used.

Figure 395 (c) is a background image for the premonition effect that is displayed as the background image in the "second hold color change premonition effect" of the "hold color change premonition effect." The background image for the premonition effect imitates a slot machine installed in a casino facility. Note that the letters "PAYS," "BET," and "SPIN" are also part of the background, but they do not indicate that the acceptance of operations from the player is valid; they simply function as decoration.

The colors used for the hold images (current hold image and waiting hold image) are white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. The color of the hold image is determined based on the look-ahead process. White is the color used for normal hold images. The expectation level increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. When a gold hold image is displayed, the expectation level is less than 100% (for example, 80%). When a rainbow hold image is displayed, the expectation level is 100%. The appearance probability decreases in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 during the display of the decorative pattern variation and a reserve occurs, a pre-reading process performs a pre-determination of the random number obtained at the time of the winning, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "reserved color change indication effect" based on the result of the pre-determination. When it is determined that the "reserved color change indication effect" is to be executed, the three decorative patterns on the left, center, and right are immediately temporarily stopped and displayed (immediately regardless of the situation of the variable display being executed (for example, a situation in which all of the decorative patterns are rapidly changing or a reach effect is being executed)). Note that, although details will be described later, the condition for determining that the "reserved color change indication effect" is to be executed is an effect that can be determined when the result of the variable display being executed is a miss and the remaining variable time of the variable display being executed is more than a predetermined time.
In addition, all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped are the same color. For example, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in combinations such as "2", "4", "8" or "2", "2", "8" using blue decorative symbols, "9", "1", "1" or "1", "5", "9" using green decorative symbols, and "3", "3", "7" or "7", "3", "3" using red decorative symbols. It goes without saying that other combinations may be used as long as the condition that the colors of the left, center, and right decorative symbols are the same is satisfied.

In addition, the combinations of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the "first reserved color change indication" and the "second reserved color change indication" described below do not include combinations that indicate a missed chance (the left and right decorative symbols are the same, and the center decorative symbol is different) or combinations that indicate a jackpot (the left, center, and right decorative symbols are the same). For example, decorative symbols will not be temporarily stopped and displayed in combinations such as "2", "4", "2" or "2", "2", "2". This prevents the player from misunderstanding that a missed chance has occurred, or that a jackpot will occur after the temporary stop display ends.

In addition, the "hold color change indication" may be executed not only when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 but also when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004.

A look-ahead process is carried out based on the start winning, and based on the result of the advance judgment of the look-ahead process, it is determined whether or not to execute the "hold color change indication effect."
In addition, when there are multiple holds (2 to 4), the display mode of the hold image of one of the existing holds will change according to the "hold change color indication."
In addition, the result of the variable display being executed is always "miss." In other words, if the result of the variable display being executed is a big win, the "reserved color change indication effect" is not executed.
In addition, the more reserved balls there are, the higher the probability that the "reserved color change prediction effect" will be executed. In other words, the more reserved balls there are, the higher the probability that the reserved balls will include a jackpot result. As a result, the more reserved balls there are, the higher the probability that the "reserved color change prediction effect" will be executed.
According to such an embodiment, a player who wants to start the "reserved color change indication effect" will try to increase the number of reserved balls, thereby improving the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the display mode of the standby image corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution of the pre-reading process may be changed by the "standby color change indication effect." In this case, the display mode of the standby image displayed most recently will change.
In this case too, a player who wants to start the "reserved color change indication effect" will try to increase the number of reserved balls, thereby improving the operation of the gaming machine.

The presentation pattern table shown in Figure 396 indicates the relationship between the color of the decorative pattern that temporarily stops, the color of the aura image that is displayed, and the change pattern of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication presentation."
In this performance pattern table, the relationship between the color of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (the color of the aura image that is displayed) and the change mode of the standby image is shown. For example, when the performance pattern PTN-1-02 is executed, the blue decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and after the blue aura image is displayed, the standby image changes from white to blue. Also, when the performance pattern PTN-1-07 is executed, the green decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and after the green aura image is displayed, the standby image changes from white to red. Also, when the performance pattern PTN-1-09 is executed, the red decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and after the red aura image is displayed, the standby image changes from white to red.
On the other hand, when presentation pattern PTN-1-01, presentation pattern PTN-1-05, or presentation pattern PTN-1-08 is executed, the color of any of the reserved images will not change, including the color of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (the color of the aura image that is displayed).

In this way, the standby reserved image may change to a reserved image of a color with a higher expectation than the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern, but it will not change to a standby reserved image of a color with a lower expectation than the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern.
For example, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is blue, the white standby reserved image may change to any of the reserved images of blue, green, or red. On the other hand, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is green, the white standby reserved image may change to a green or red standby image, but it will not change to a blue standby image. Also, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is red, the white standby reserved image may change to a red standby reserved image, but it will not change to a blue or green standby reserved image.
Therefore, even if the color of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is blue, the player can expect it to change to red. Also, if the color of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is red, the player can only expect it to change to red, since it will not change to blue or green.

Below, examples of effects when effect patterns PTN-1-01 and PTN-1-02 are selected will be described with reference to the time charts shown in Figs. 398(a) and 398(b) and the display examples shown in Figs. 400, 401, and 402. Note that here, an example is shown in which a combination of decorative symbols "2", "4", and "8" are temporarily stopped. Note that Figs. 398(a), 400, and 401 show an example of an effect in which the color of the standby image does not change. On the other hand, Figs. 398(b), 400, and 402 show an example of an effect in which the color of the standby image changes. The effect contents of both effects are the same until halfway through. Therefore, the explanation up to halfway through is for both effects. Note that the explanation will be given for a case in which the decorative symbol change display is being executed, and there are two standbys, and it is decided that a new game ball will enter the first start hole 2002 and a "reserve color change indication effect" will be executed.

At timing t0, the display of the decorative pattern begins to change. The color of the current reserved image and the color of the two standby reserved images are white, which has the highest display rate as a reserved display. Figure 400 (a) shows the display state during the high-speed change of the decorative pattern.
At timing t4.5, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and a white third standby reserved image is displayed and a look-ahead process is performed. At timing t5, a "reserved color change indication effect" is started based on the result of the look-ahead process. Here, the effect pattern PTN-1-01 is selected, and the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of "2", "4", and "8" in a provisionally stopped state. The color of these decorative symbols is blue. Figure 400(b) shows the display state when the decorative symbols are provisionally stopped. The "reserved color change indication effect" may be started at the timing when the look-ahead process is performed.
Next, at timing t6.0, one second after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination of "2", "4", and "8", the current reserved image is hidden. FIG. 400(c) shows the display state in which the current reserved image is hidden.
When the "Pending Color Change Premonition" starts, it is confirmed that the ongoing changing display will result in a loss, so it is preferable to hide the current pending image in order to avoid creating unnecessary hope, but it is also possible to leave the current pending image displayed.
In this case, just like the waiting pending image, the current pending image is also displayed by moving it to the upper right corner of the display area 1600a, and the current pending image is displayed until the changing display ends.

From timing t6.5 to timing t7.5, each pending image moves from the lower right of the display area 1600a toward the lower center of the display area 1600a at a constant speed. FIG. 400(d) shows a state in which the pending images have completed moving to the lower center of the display area 1600a.
Since the "hold color change indication effect" is an effect that may change the waiting hold image, it is easier for the player to recognize it if it is moved near the center of the display area 1600a. Also, although the waiting hold image is described as moving at a constant speed, it may be moved at different speeds, the timing of the movement may be shifted, or a combination of these may be performed. When shifting the timing of the movement, it is preferable to move the waiting hold image that is drawn earlier faster so that multiple waiting hold images are not displayed overlapping each other.
The arrows in the figure indicate the movement of the standby image, and are not actually displayed in the display area 1600a. In other figures, arrows may also be included in the figure to indicate the trajectory of the current standby image or the standby image.
At timing t7.5, a blue aura image is displayed near the center of display area 1600a. Diagram 400(e) shows the display state in which the blue aura image is displayed.

From timing t7.5 to timing t10, the aura image moves downward and then gradually becomes smaller so as to overlap one of the waiting hold images. Figure 400(f) shows a display state in which the blue aura image moves downward and overlaps with the waiting hold image. Also, Figure 400(g) shows a display state in which the reduced blue aura image overlaps with one waiting hold image (here, the first waiting hold image). As described above, the display mode of the waiting hold image corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution of the pre-reading process may be changed by the "hold change color indication". In this case, the display mode of the waiting hold image displayed most recently (the third waiting hold image shown in Figure 400) will change.

Below, referring to Figure 398 (a), we will explain an example of a presentation (presentation pattern PTN-1-01) in which the color of the waiting hold image does not change.
At timing t10, the display of the aura image ends and the display becomes non-displayed. The color of the first standby image overlapping the aura image does not change and remains white. Figure 401 (a) shows the display state after the display of the aura image ends.
From timing t11 to timing t12, the standby image moves toward the upper right of the display area 1600a at a constant speed. Fig. 401(b) shows the display state during the standby image movement. Fig. 401(c) shows the state after the standby image movement is completed.
At timing t13, each of the left, center, and right decorative symbols will be in a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the same time as the high-speed fluctuation is resumed, the color of the decorative symbols will return to the original color of the decorative symbols. Figure 401 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of each of the left, center, and right decorative symbols has ended and the high-speed fluctuation state has been entered again. When each of the left, center, and right decorative symbols is in a state of high-speed fluctuation, it is better to make the swaying decorative symbols semi-transparent (when semi-transparent, the type of decorative symbol can be recognized) before making them fluctuate at high speed. This is because smooth movement does not give a strange feeling to the player.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, and at timing t29.5, the center decorative pattern is temporarily displayed. Next, at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are temporarily displayed. FIG. 401(e) shows a display state in which the variable display ends and the left, center, and right decorative patterns are temporarily displayed. It is also possible to display the left, center, and right decorative patterns at timing t30 without temporarily displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns.
At timing t31, a new variable display is started, and the left, center, and right decorative patterns are in a high-speed variable state. At timing t31, the display of the reserved images displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a as the first reserved image to the third reserved image is terminated, and at the same time, the reserved images are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area 1600a as the current reserved image to the second reserved image, and the "first reserved color change indication performance" is terminated. Figure 401 (f) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are in a high-speed variable state.

Below, we will explain an example of a presentation (presentation pattern PTN-1-02) in which the color of the waiting hold image changes, with reference to Figure 398 (b).
At timing t10, the display of the aura image ends and the display becomes non-displayed. The color of the first standby image overlapping the aura image changes from white to blue, which is the color of the aura image. Figure 402 (a) shows the display state after the display of the aura image ends.
From timing t11 to timing t12, the standby image moves toward the upper right of the display area 1600a at a constant speed. Fig. 402(b) shows the display state during the movement of the standby image. Fig. 402(c) shows the state after the movement of the standby image is completed.
At timing t13, each of the left, center, and right decorative symbols will be in a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the same time as the high-speed fluctuation is resumed, the color of the decorative symbols will return to the original color of the decorative symbols. Figure 402 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of each of the left, center, and right decorative symbols has ended and the high-speed fluctuation state has been entered again. When each of the left, center, and right decorative symbols is in a state of high-speed fluctuation, it is better to make the swaying decorative symbols semi-transparent (when semi-transparent, the type of decorative symbol can be recognized) before making them fluctuate at high speed. This is because smooth movement does not give a strange feeling to the player.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, and at timing t29.5, the center decorative pattern is temporarily displayed. Next, at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are temporarily displayed. FIG. 402(e) shows a display state in which the variable display ends and the left, center, and right decorative patterns are temporarily displayed. It is also possible to display the left, center, and right decorative patterns at timing t30 without temporarily displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns.
At timing t31, a new variable display is started, and the left, center, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state. At timing t31, the display of the reserved images displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a as the first reserved image to the third reserved image is terminated, and at the same time, the reserved images are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area 1600a as the current reserved image to the second reserved image, and the "first reserved color change indication performance" is terminated. Figure 402 (f) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state.

In this way, in the "first pending color change indication effect," an aura image of the same color as the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is displayed. Also, the color of one of the pending images may change to the color of the aura image or a color with a higher expectation than the color of the aura image. For example, if a blue aura image is displayed as shown in effect patterns PTN-1-02 to PTN-1-04, the color of the pending image may change to blue, green, or red.

An example of the effect when there are three standby images is shown, but the "first standby color change indication effect" can also be executed when there are one, two, or four standby images. Note that regardless of the number of standby images, only one standby image changes.

It is also possible to show the player in advance which waiting hold images are likely to change in display mode. For example, from the same timing as the aura image starts to be displayed (timing t7.5), an arrow or marker may be placed around a waiting hold image whose display mode may change, or a waiting hold image whose display mode may change may be periodically enlarged or reduced for display. According to such an embodiment, it is easier for the player to recognize which waiting hold images are likely to change. Note that such a display mode may be continued until the "hold change color indication effect" ends. Alternatively, it may end when the waiting hold image changes due to any effect.

In addition, when the display mode of the standby image changes, an arrow or marker may be added to indicate the change, or the standby image whose display mode has changed may be periodically enlarged or reduced for display. For example, such display may be started at timing t10. After repeating the enlargement and reduction a predetermined number of times, the standby image may be finally displayed in an enlarged state, or the standby image may be gradually enlarged without enlarging or reducing until it finally reaches a predetermined size.
This display emphasizing the waiting hold image may be continued until the execution of the ``first pending color change indication'' is completed (timing t13), or until the waiting hold image returns from the upper right position of display area 1600a to the lower right position of display area 1600a (timing t31).
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make the user aware that the standby image has changed. Also, when multiple standby images are displayed, it is possible to make the user aware which standby image has changed.

As shown in Figures 401(e), 401(f) and 402(e) and 402(f), the standby image displayed in the upper part of the display area 1600a is erased at the same time as the next variable display starts. At the same time, the image is displayed as the current standby image and the standby image in the standby image display area provided in the lower part of the display area 1600a.
In addition, a dynamic display may be performed in which the reserved image displayed at the top is moved to the bottom.

By executing the "first pending color change indication" in this way, the player can be made aware of the color to which the pending image may change depending on the color of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped. Also, if there are multiple pending images, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation as to which pending image will change.

In addition, when the "first hold color change indication effect" is executed, the display position of the hold image in the display area 1600a is changed from the usual position in the bottom right to the final position in the top right. This allows the hold image to be dynamically visually recognized. Also, because the hold image is moved while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the player can more clearly recognize that it has moved. Also, because the hold image is located in a different position than usual, other players can recognize that a highly anticipated effect has been performed.

Next, we will explain the "second reserved color change indication effect." The "second reserved color change indication effect" is an effect that may be performed after the execution of the "first reserved color change indication effect," and in the "second reserved color change indication effect," the standby reserved image that changed in the "first reserved color change indication effect" may further change.
The presentation pattern table shown in Figure 397 indicates the relationship between the color of the standby hold image after the change due to the ``first hold change color indication presentation'', the type and color of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the ``second hold change color indication presentation'', the combination of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped, whether the decorative patterns will continue to be temporarily stopped and the type and color of the decorative pattern if the temporary stop is continued, and the display mode of the standby hold image.

In the "second reserved color change indication effect", the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, similarly to the "first reserved color change indication effect". After that, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns change to a high-speed changing state in order. If all three decorative patterns are in a high-speed changing state, the standby reserved image does not change. On the other hand, if two decorative patterns are in a high-speed changing state but one decorative pattern maintains a temporarily stopped state for a predetermined period of time, the color of the standby reserved image is displayed changing to the color of the decorative pattern that maintained the temporarily stopped state.
In addition, during the "second reserved color change indication effect", the correspondence between the number and the color of the decorative pattern changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 397, the decorative pattern temporarily becomes one of green, red, gold, and rainbow colors.
In addition, in the "second hold color change indication effect", the background image changes to the background image for indication effect shown with reference to Figure 395 (c).

Below, the performance examples when performance pattern PTN-1-02 and performance pattern PTN-2-06 (performance patterns in which the color of the standby hold image does not change from blue in the "second hold color change indication performance") are selected and executed, and the performance examples when performance pattern PTN-1-02 and performance pattern PTN-2-08 (performance patterns in which the standby hold image changes from blue to red in the "second hold color change indication performance") are selected and executed, and the performance state from timing t13 onwards will be explained with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 399(a) and 399(b) and display examples shown in Figures 403, 404, and 405. Note that the performance contents before timing t13 are omitted as they are as shown with reference to Figures 398(a), 398(b), and 400 to 402.
399(a) is a time chart when effect pattern PTN-2-06 is executed, and FIG. 399(b) is a time chart when effect pattern PTN-2-08 is executed.

Fig. 403(a) shows the display state from timing t12 to timing t13. Here, the first pending waiting state is shown in blue in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a.
From timing t13 to timing t13.5, an "advanced effect" is executed in which the characters "from..." are displayed. Figure 403(b) shows the display state at this time.
In other words, if the "development effect" is executed after the "first reserve color change indication performance" has ended, then the "second reserve color change indication performance" will start, but if the "development effect" is not executed after the "first reserve color change indication performance" has ended, then the "second reserve color change indication performance" will not start.

Note that even if the "development effect" is executed, there may be cases where the "second pending color change indication effect" is not executed. In this case, at timing t13.5, the display of the words "From..." ends, and the display state becomes as shown in FIG. 398.

At timing t13.5, the "second reserved color change indication effect" is started. At the timing when the "second reserved color change indication effect" is started, the background image is switched from the normal background image A shown with reference to FIG. 347(a) to the indication effect background image shown with reference to FIG. 395(c). As described above, the indication effect background image imitates a slot machine installed in a casino facility. The display of the indication effect background image suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the waiting reserved image will change further.
In addition, a red "3" as the left decorative pattern, a green "2" as the center decorative pattern, and a red "7" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily displayed as initial patterns.
In addition, the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved position!" are displayed at the bottom of display area 1600a as text display indicating the effect.
FIG. 403(c) shows the display state from timing t13.5 to timing t14.5.

At timing t14.5, instead of the text "Chance to upgrade reserved jack!", the text "The reserved jack's color will be upgraded to the color of the symbol on the reel that doesn't move until the end!" is displayed.
FIG. 403(d) shows the display state from timing t14.5 to timing t15.5.
At timing t15.5, the text "READY GO!" is displayed in place of the text "The reserved color will be upgraded to the color of the symbol on the reel that does not move until the end!"
FIG. 403(e) shows the display state from timing t15.5 to timing t16.
By displaying the information in this manner, the player can fully understand the content of the presentation.

At timing t16, the display of the characters "READY GO!" ends, and a horizontally long remaining time gauge image is displayed. The remaining time gauge image is displayed for three seconds, from timing t16 to timing t19.
The remaining time gauge image is entirely black when it is first displayed, but as time passes from when the display starts, it gradually changes to white from the left side, and finally turns entirely white when the display ends.
FIG. 403(f) shows the state immediately after the remaining time gauge image is displayed.
FIG. 403(g) shows the display state two seconds (timing t18) after the remaining time gauge image is displayed.

Below, referring to Figure 399 (a), we will explain an example of a presentation (presentation pattern PTN-2-06) in which the color of the waiting hold image does not change.
At timing t19, the display of the remaining time gauge image ends. At the same time, the left, center, and right decorative symbols change at high speed. Figure 404(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t20.5, the display of the prognostic effect background image ends, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 404(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, and at timing t29.5, the center decorative pattern is temporarily displayed. Next, at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are temporarily displayed. FIG. 404(c) shows a display state in which the variable display ends and the left, center, and right decorative patterns are temporarily displayed. It is also possible to display the left, center, and right decorative patterns at timing t30 without temporarily displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns.
At timing t31, a new variable display is started, and the left, center, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state. At timing t24, the display of the reserved images displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a as the first reserved image to the third reserved image is terminated, and at the same time, the reserved images are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area 1600a as the current reserved image to the second reserved image, and the "second reserved color change indication performance" is terminated. Figure 404(d) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state.

Below, we will explain an example of a presentation (presentation pattern PTN-2-08) in which the color of the waiting hold image changes, with reference to Figure 399 (b).
At timing t19, the display of the remaining time gauge image ends. At the same time, the center decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern enter a high-speed variable state. The left decorative pattern continues to be temporarily stopped. Figure 405 (a) shows the display state at this time. At this timing, it is determined that the standby reserved image will change to red, which is the color of the left decorative pattern.
From timing t19 to timing t19.5, a display is performed to emphasize the left decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped. Here, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 395(a) and the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 395(b) are displayed alternately multiple times. FIG. 405(b) shows a display state in which the decorative symbol "3" shown in FIG. 395(b) is displayed.
From timing t19.5 to timing t20, the left decorative pattern shrinks and moves to a position where it overlaps with the waiting reserved image, and when the movement ends, the color of the waiting reserved image changes to the color of the decorative pattern. Since the color of the left decorative pattern is red, the color of the first waiting reserved image changes to red. Figure 405 (c) shows the display state during the movement of the left decorative pattern. Note that the above-mentioned highlighting may be continued even during the movement.
The left decorative pattern is erased from its position at the timing (timing t20) when it overlaps with the first standby image, and instantly starts to fluctuate at high speed on the left side of the display area 1600a. Figure 405 (d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t20.5, the display of the predictive effect background image ends, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 405(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, and at timing t29.5, the center decorative pattern is temporarily displayed. Next, at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are temporarily displayed. FIG. 405(f) shows a display state in which the variable display ends and the left, center, and right decorative patterns are temporarily displayed. Note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be temporarily displayed at timing t30 without being temporarily displayed.
At timing t31, a new variable display is started, and the left, center, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state. At timing t24, the display of the reserved images displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a as the first reserved image to the third reserved image is terminated, and the reserved images are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area 1600a as the current reserved image to the second reserved image, and the "second reserved color change indication" is terminated. Figure 405 (g) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are in a high-speed variable state.

In this way, the "second hold color change indication effect" allows the player to know in advance what color the standby hold image is likely to change to, depending on the color of the decorative pattern displayed in a provisional stop state.
In addition, since a suggestion effect is executed that displays a background image for the premonition effect at the same time as the start of the "second hold color change premonition effect," the player can be made aware that the waiting hold image may change.
In addition, even if the reserved image is about to change to a color with low expectation (e.g., a blue reserved image) in the "first reserved image change indication," or actually does change, there is a possibility that the reserved image will change to a reserved image with higher expectation if the "second reserved image change indication" is executed, so the player can feel at ease.

As such, in the "pending color change indication effect" of this embodiment, there are cases where only the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed and the pending image changes (Fig. 398(b)), and cases where there is no change (Fig. 398(a)). Also, there are cases where the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed after the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed and the pending image changes (Fig. 399(b)), and cases where there is no change (Fig. 399(a)).

In the embodiment shown, the end timing of the "first reserved color change indication effect" and the "second reserved color change indication effect" (the timing when the standby reserved image is returned to the bottom right of the display area 1600a) is set to timing t31, but the end timing of the "first reserved color change indication effect" and the "second reserved color change indication effect" may be the timing just before the high-speed fluctuation ends (timing t28), the timing when the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern starts (timing t28.5), the timing when the left-center-right decorative patterns become in a temporary stop state (timing t29.5), or the timing when the left-center-right decorative patterns become in a stopped display state (timing t30). In this case, at these timings, the standby reserved image displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a will be displayed in the bottom right of the display area 1600a.
In this way, by returning the position of the standby image to its original position before the timing of the start of the next variable display, the next variable display can be started with the player being fully aware of the number of reserved items and the display mode of the standby image. Also, even if various effects are executed immediately after the start of the next variable display, the display contents in the display area 1600a do not become complicated, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused.

Other timings may be used to return the standby image to its original position at the bottom right of display area 1600a. For example, the standby image may be returned to its original position at the timing when the background image for the predictive effect starts to be displayed (timing t13.5), at a predetermined timing within the period when the display explaining the effect content is being displayed (timing t13.5 to timing t16), or at a predetermined timing within the period when the remaining time gauge image is being displayed (timing t16 to timing t19). In this case, the display mode of the standby image will change when it is displayed at the bottom right of display area 1600a.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the standby image moved to the upper right of the display area 1600a does not overlap with the decorative pattern during the temporary stop or stopped display, the standby image may also be displayed in a position where it overlaps with the decorative pattern during the temporary stop or stopped display.
In this case, the display priority of the standby pending image may be higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during the temporary stop or stopped display, or the display priority of the standby pending image may be higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during the temporary stop or stopped display.
Alternatively, the display priority of the standby image may be set higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during a temporary stop, so that the standby image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and during a stopped display, the display priority of the decorative pattern during the stopped display may be set higher than the display priority of the standby image, so that the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the standby image.

The "Pending color change indication effect" does not span the changing display, but starts in the middle of a certain changing display, and ends at the same time as the stop display ends (timing t31 in Figs. 398 and 399). Incidentally, the time for which the changing display is performed is predetermined by a random number acquired by the main control board 1310 when the start winning occurs. Therefore, the "Pending color change indication effect" is executed only when there is sufficient remaining time for the changing display.
Specifically, if the remaining time of the ongoing variable display is less than 15 seconds at the time when the start winning occurs, the "pending color change indication effect" will not be executed.
When the start winning occurs, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 15 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds, the "first pending color change indication performance" is executed, but the "second pending color change indication performance" is not executed.
When the start winning occurs, if the remaining time of the ongoing variable display is between 20 seconds and less than 35 seconds, only the "first pending color change indication performance" may be executed, or the "second pending color change indication performance" may be executed after the "first pending color change indication performance".
When the time remaining for the variable display being executed is 35 seconds or more at the time when the start winning occurs, the "reserved color change indication effect" is not executed. As shown with reference to FIG. 394, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. In addition, in that case, the probability of a special reach effect with high expectations being executed for a long time increases. Therefore, if the "reserved color change indication effect" is started when the remaining time for the variable display is long, the player will feel a great disappointment because it will be confirmed that the result is a miss even though the expectation was high. However, in this embodiment, by not starting the "reserved color change indication effect" when the remaining time for the variable display is long (35 seconds or more), the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels disappointment can be prevented.

When it is decided that the "Hold Color Change Prediction" will be performed, all displays related to the ongoing variable display will generally be canceled. This is because the ongoing variable display will result in a miss. Examples of effects and images that will be canceled include pseudo consecutive effects, reach effects, and current hold images. On the other hand, images that will not be canceled include the fourth symbol and the hold number display image.

An outline of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped in the "second pending color change indication effect" is shown in the "Type and color of decorative patterns temporarily stopped" and "Combination of decorative patterns temporarily stopped" columns of the effect pattern table in Figure 397, but it is advisable to determine the combination of numbers randomly so that the numbers are evenly distributed.
As in the case of the "first pending color change indication," it is advisable not to display combinations that indicate a missed reach, such as "3,""1," and "3," or combinations that indicate a jackpot, such as "3,""3," and "3."

In the performance patterns PTN-2-01 to PTN-2-12, the more the number of red decorative symbols, the higher the probability that the standby image changes to red (i.e., the expectation of a big win).
In the performance pattern PTN-2-16, the combination of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is two gold decorative symbols and one rainbow decorative symbol, but the two gold decorative symbols always change at high speed, the rainbow decorative symbol always stops temporarily, and the standby image changes to rainbow. Note that the expected probability of the rainbow standby image is 100%, so the timing when the rainbow decorative symbol is displayed determines that a jackpot will occur.

An embodiment has been shown in which two or three of the decorative patterns that have been temporarily stopped and displayed at the end of the display period (timing t16 to timing t19) of the remaining time gauge image simultaneously enter a high-speed changing state, but the decorative patterns may also enter a high-speed changing state in sequence.
For example, one of the decorative patterns may change from a temporarily stopped state to a rapidly changing state at a timing (timing t17) when one second has elapsed since the remaining time gauge image began to be displayed, one of the decorative patterns may change from a temporarily stopped state to a rapidly changing state at a timing (timing t18) when two seconds have elapsed since the remaining time gauge image began to be displayed, and one of the decorative patterns may maintain the temporarily stopped state or change to a rapidly changing state at the timing (timing t19) when the display of the remaining time gauge image ends.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with the excitement of wondering whether or not the decorative symbol of a color with a high expectation will remain in a temporarily stopped state.

In addition, instead of uniformly changing the decorative pattern to the high-speed changing state (1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds after the display of the remaining time gauge image starts) as the remaining time decreases, the decorative pattern may be changed to the high-speed changing state at other timings. For example, the decorative pattern may be changed from the temporary stop state to the high-speed changing state 0.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds after the display of the remaining time gauge image starts. Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be changed from the temporary stop state to the high-speed changing state 0.5 seconds, 1 second, and 3 seconds after the display of the remaining time gauge image starts.
According to such an embodiment, the candidates for decorative patterns (i.e. the colors to which the waiting pending image can change) are narrowed down early, which can increase interest.

FIG. 406 is a diagram showing the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect." The arrows in the diagram show the movement path of the standby image (the arrows are not actually displayed, but are shown for explanatory purposes).
Fig. 406(a) shows the path (start position, intermediate position, end position) of the standby image in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 400 to Fig. 402. Fig. 406(b), Fig. 406(c), Fig. 406(d), and Fig. 406(e) each show an example in which the path of the standby image is modified.
Although an embodiment has been shown in which the standby image is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position, it may also be possible to move the image at a constant speed from the start position to the end position via the intermediate position without temporarily stopping the image at the intermediate position.
The standby image may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced during its movement, or may be gradually enlarged so as to reach a maximum size at an intermediate position, gradually reduced after passing the intermediate position, and displayed in its original size at the end of the movement.
In addition, when the standby image is moved along the path shown in Figure 406 (a) to Figure 406 (e), the order of the standby image does not change in any case. Therefore, when the color of the standby image changes, the player can easily understand how many changes will be required before the highly anticipated variable display is performed.

In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 398, 399, and 403 to 405, the decorative pattern was displayed overlapping the reserved image, but another image may be superimposed on the reserved image instead of the decorative pattern.
Below, with reference to Figure 407, we will explain an embodiment in which an aura image with the same color as the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and the aura image moves toward the reserved image, and the color of the reserved image changes after the movement is completed.
From timing t19 to timing t19.5, a display is performed to highlight the left decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped. Here, an aura image of the same color as the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the decorative symbol. Figure 407 (a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t19.5, the left decorative pattern is in a high-speed variable state, and from timing t19.5 to timing t20, the aura image gradually shrinks and moves toward a position where it overlaps with the waiting reserved image, and at the end of the movement, the color of the waiting reserved image changes to the color of the decorative pattern, and the display of the aura image ends. Figure 407 (b) shows the display state during the aura image's movement. Figure 407 (c) shows the display state at the time when the aura image arrives at a position where it overlaps with the waiting reserved image. Figure 407 (d) shows the display state when the waiting reserved image changes to the color of the aura image. Figure 407 (e) shows the display state when the display of the aura image ends.
The display contents from timing t20 onwards will be the same as those in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 399(b) and 405.
In this manner, a specific image having the color of a decorative pattern may be moved so as to overlap with the waiting-held image, thereby changing the color of the waiting-held image.

When only the "first pending color change indication" is executed, the pending image may be hidden at a predetermined timing during the period from a predetermined timing after the movement of the pending image is completed or a timing thereafter until the next changing display is started.
Similarly, when a "second hold color change indication effect" is executed following a "first hold color change indication effect," the standby hold image may be made invisible simultaneously with the end of the display of the background image for the indication effect or at a specified timing thereafter.
In either case, the display of the standby image is resumed when the next variable display starts.
According to such an embodiment, even if the color of the waiting hold image does not change, or if it does change to a color with a relatively low expectation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels embarrassed in front of surrounding players.
Furthermore, when the color changes to one with a relatively high expectation, if the variable display result turns out to be a miss, the standby image with the relatively high expectation color will be displayed for a long period of time, which may cause embarrassment in front of surrounding players. However, by hiding the standby image, the display time of the standby image with the relatively high expectation color can be shortened, thereby preventing the player from feeling embarrassed.

An embodiment has been shown in which the standby hold image may be hidden when only the ``first hold color change indication performance'' is executed, or when the ``second hold color change indication performance'' is executed following the ``first hold color change indication performance,'' but rather than always being hidden, it may be hidden a predetermined percentage of the time.
In this way, by making the rate at which the standby image is not hidden higher than the rate at which the standby image is hidden, the original purpose of the presentation, which is to allow the player to recognize the state of the standby image, is not lost.
When only the "first hold color change indication" is executed, it is preferable to make the proportion of the standby hold image not displayed higher than the proportion of the standby hold image displayed.
When the "second hold color change indication performance" is executed following the "first hold color change indication performance", it is preferable to make the proportion of the hold images that are not hidden higher than the proportion of the hold images that are hidden.
In this case, even the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed, and in a situation where an effect with high expectations is performed, if it is unsuccessful, the player may feel embarrassed, but this can be prevented.
Conversely, the ratio of the standby pending images not being displayed may be higher than the ratio of the standby pending images being displayed.
In this case, the "second hold color change indication effect" has been executed, and in a situation where an effect with high expectations has been performed, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened by showing the waiting hold image.

With respect to the probability that only the "first reserved color change indication effect" is executed and the probability that the "second reserved color change indication effect" is executed following the "first reserved color change indication effect," it is better to increase the probability of the former. Alternatively, the probability of the latter may be increased. Note that the "probability" referred to here is the probability that the effect is executed when one variable display is executed.
By increasing the probability of the former, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win when the "second reserved color change indication" is reached. On the other hand, by increasing the probability of the latter, it is possible to maintain the expectation even if the "first reserved color change indication" is changed to a waiting reserved image with a low expectation.
Similarly, between the probability that only the "first reserved color change indication effect" is executed and the standby reserved image is not displayed, and the probability that the "second reserved color change indication effect" is executed following the "first reserved color change indication effect" and the standby reserved image is not displayed, it is better to increase the probability of the former. Alternatively, the probability of the latter may be increased.
By increasing the probability of the former, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win when the "second reserved color change indication" is reached. On the other hand, by increasing the probability of the latter, it is possible to maintain the expectation even if the "first reserved color change indication" is changed to a waiting reserved image with a low expectation.

Although an embodiment in which the display of the standby image is not displayed has been shown, in this case, only the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the normal background image while changing at high speed. Also, the result of the changing display during execution is assumed to be a miss, and the display content is uninteresting.
Therefore, during the period until the variable display in which the "hold color change indication effect" is executed ends, a predetermined reach effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect.
As the predetermined reach performance, two or more types of reach performance can be executed, and it is preferable that the expectation of a big win differs depending on the type of reach performance.
The predetermined reach effect executed as the look-ahead effect corresponds to the standby reserved image changed in the "reserve color change indication effect." And when the variable display corresponding to the standby reserved image is executed, the same predetermined reach effect is executed.

In addition, there are cases where the execution time of the predetermined reach performance as a look-ahead performance does not match the execution time of the predetermined reach performance itself (the probability of not matching is extremely high because the "hold color change indication performance" is an indication that starts with the start winning as a trigger). Therefore, if the high-speed fluctuating time is longer than the execution time of the predetermined reach performance and there is enough time to execute the entire predetermined reach performance as a look-ahead performance, it is good to execute the entire predetermined reach performance. Alternatively, the predetermined reach performance may be executed until just before the performance that indicates the winning or losing of the final stage of the predetermined reach performance.
On the other hand, if the time during which the high-speed fluctuation is shorter than the execution time of the predetermined reach performance and sufficient time is not secured to execute the entirety of the predetermined reach performance as a look-ahead performance, only a part of the predetermined reach performance may be executed. For example, the predetermined reach performance may be executed from the beginning, and the execution of the predetermined reach performance may be terminated at a timing several seconds before the end of the predetermined fluctuation display time (for example, two seconds before the fluctuation stop period starts).
After the end of these reach effects, the background image and decorative patterns that were displayed before the reach effects started are displayed again.
In addition, when the time period during which the number of turns changes at high speed is even shorter, the predetermined reach effect may not be executed. Alternatively, only the reach name of the predetermined reach effect may be displayed as a look-ahead effect.

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player aware in advance of what kind of reach performance will be executed. In addition, since there are a plurality of reach performances executed with different expectancies, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the expectancy of a big win.
In addition, the player can be allowed to visually recognize a predetermined reach presentation based on the look-ahead processing in an appropriate manner corresponding to the remaining time of the high-speed changing display.

As a look-ahead performance, the timing for starting execution of a specified reach performance may be after a predetermined time (e.g., after one second has elapsed) from the timing when the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right enter a state of high-speed fluctuation (timing t13 in Figure 398(a) and Figure 398(b), timing t19 in Figure 399(a), and timing t20 in Figure 399(b)).
In addition, when the execution of a specified reach performance is started as a look-ahead performance, the decorative patterns should not be maintained in a state of rapid variation, but should be displayed as a reach state in which the decorative patterns on the left and right are temporarily stopped at the same number as the decorative patterns in the actual specified reach performance.

In the "first pending color change indication effect", an effect of operating the operation unit (operation button 410, attack button 3710, etc.) may be executed. An embodiment in which an operation on the attack button 3710 is effective will be described below. Note that FIG. 408 shows a display example when an effect of operating the operation unit is executed.
FIG. 408(a) shows the state when the display of the blue aura image has begun.
While the aura image is displayed, an operation instruction image with the word "PUSH!" written in a horizontally long oval is displayed. Fig. 408(b) shows a state in which the operation instruction image is displayed. Here, at the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated or the operation effective period ends without the attack button 3710 being operated, a small aura image of a color corresponding to the color of the changed reserved display is displayed in the center of the display area 1600a in place of the aura image, and either starts moving toward one of the waiting reserved images (Fig. 408(c), Fig. 408(d)), or a display indicating that the display of the aura image is finished (Fig. 408(e)) is performed.

408(c) shows an example of a display in which the display mode of the standby image is changed. In this example, a small aura image starts moving toward the first standby image.
Figure 408 (d) shows the state in which the movement of the aura image has been completed and the color of the first standby image has changed from white to blue.

Figure 408 (e) shows an example of a display when no display that changes the display mode of the pending image is performed. In this case, a small aura image is not displayed, and the pending image is not changed.

In this way, while the "first pending color change indication" is being performed, operation acceptance to the operation unit may be enabled, and the display mode of the aura image may change depending on whether the operation unit is operated or the valid operation period ends.

Referring to Figure 408, an embodiment has been shown in which, when the operating unit is operated or the valid operation period ends, a small aura image of a color corresponding to the color of the changed hold display is displayed in place of the aura image currently being displayed. However, instead of a small aura image, a hold image of the same shape and size (or a different size) as the waiting hold image may be displayed, and this hold image may move toward the waiting hold image, overlapping on top of the existing waiting hold image and displayed as the changed waiting hold image.
FIG. 409(a) shows a state in which an operation instruction image is displayed.

Figure 409 (b) shows a state in which a reserved image of the same color as the changed reserved image is displayed in response to operation of the operating unit or the end of the valid operation period, and is moving toward the standby reserved image.
Figure 409 (c) shows the state where the movement of the reserved image of the same color as the aura image has finished and it is displayed as the first waiting reserved image.

Figure 409 (d) shows the display state when the display of the aura image ends in response to operation of the operation unit or the end of the valid operation period.

The operation instruction image includes the characters "PUSH!" indicating the operation method of pressing, but an operation unit mock-up image that mimics the shape of the operation unit to be operated may also be displayed as the operation instruction image. Furthermore, characters indicating the operation method (such as "PUSH!") may be added to the operation unit mock-up image.

An operation instruction may be always requested as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 408 or FIG.
On the other hand, there may be a case where an operation instruction is not required as in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 400, and a case where an operation instruction is required as in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 408 or 409. In this case, the probability of the color of the reserved image changing (i.e., the expectation of a big win) may be different between when an operation instruction is not required and when an operation instruction is required.
For example, the probability of the color of the pending image changing may be higher when an operation instruction is requested than when no operation instruction is requested. Alternatively, the color of the standby pending image may be more likely to change to a color with a higher expectation when an operation instruction is requested than when no operation instruction is requested.
For example, in the case where the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is blue (presentation pattern PTN-1-01 to presentation pattern PTN-1-04), if no operational instruction is requested, the probability of changing to blue may be 10%, the probability of changing to green may be 7%, and the probability of changing to red may be 3%, and if an operational instruction is requested, the probability of changing to blue may be 20%, the probability of changing to green may be 14%, and the probability of changing to red may be 6%.

White, red, or rainbow colors may be used as the colors of the text of the operation instruction image or the background other than the text. These colors may also indicate the degree of expectation, with the degree of expectation increasing in the order of white, red, and rainbow. Note that the degree of expectation for rainbow colors is 100%.

Two types of operation reception effects may be provided as "operation reception effects" that receive the player's operation on the operation unit. Specifically, a "first operation reception effect" may be provided in which a suggestive image suggesting that the operation will be valid is displayed before the operation valid period is valid, and then an operation instruction image is displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period, and a "second operation reception effect" may be provided in which a suggestive image suggesting that the operation will be valid is not displayed before the operation valid period is valid, and an operation instruction image is displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period.
Furthermore, as the suggestion image or the operation instruction image, an operation unit simulation image that imitates the operation unit may be used.
It is preferable that the display mode of the suggestion image suggesting that the operation is valid and the operation instruction image showing that the operation reception is valid are different. For example, the suggestion image may display a simulated operation image semi-transparently, and the operation instruction image may display the same simulated operation image opaquely. In this case, the change of the simulated operation image from semi-transparent to opaque allows the player to recognize that the valid operation period has started.
Alternatively, a predetermined image that does not imitate the operation unit may be used as the suggestion image, and an operation unit simulation image that imitates the operation unit may be used as the operation instruction image.
In addition, when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the effective operation period of the "operation reception effect" or when the effective operation period of the "operation reception effect" ends, execution of a predetermined "post-operation effect" is started. For example, an image of a predetermined color (either blue, green, or red) is displayed in the display area 1600a to indicate the expectation of a jackpot.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 408 and 409, operation acceptance may be performed using a "second operation acceptance presentation" rather than a "first operation acceptance presentation."
According to such an embodiment, the "operation reception performance" can be executed while ensuring the visibility of the color of the decorative pattern (the color to which the waiting hold image may change).

On the other hand, during the "first hold color change indication effect", the "second operation reception effect" may not be executed, and only the "first operation reception effect" may be executed. In this case, during the execution of the "first hold color change indication effect", only a suggestion image suggesting that the operation in the "first operation reception effect" will be valid is displayed, and after the "first hold color change indication effect" ends, the operation valid period in the "first operation reception effect" starts and an operation instruction image is displayed. In addition, the "first operation reception effect" may execute a hold change effect in which the standby hold image that has finished moving to the upper right of the display area 1600a changes to a standby hold image with a higher expectation (for example, changing from white to blue), or, unlike the hold change effect, a notice such as a comment notice ("dialogue notice effect" shown with reference to FIG. 385) in which a predetermined message is displayed or a "weather notice effect" shown with reference to FIG. 393 may be displayed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can be focused on the "first reserved color change indication effect". In addition, even if the change of the waiting reserved image based on the display of the aura image is not executed, the waiting reserved image can be changed to a waiting reserved image of a color with a higher expectation by operating the operation unit after that, so the expectation of the player can be maintained for a long period of time, and if the effect is different from the reserved change effect such as the above-mentioned comment notice, the expectation can be maintained even if the reserved display with a high expectation is not performed by the "reserved color change indication effect".

Instead of or in addition to executing the "operation reception effect", the operation unit (e.g., the attack button 3710) may be vibrated during the execution of the "first reserved color change indication effect". In this case, when the operation unit vibrates, the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot is higher than when the operation unit does not vibrate.
Alternatively, the operation unit may be made of a transparent material, and a predetermined movable decorative member that is visible to the player may be provided inside the operation unit, and the movable decorative member may be rotated, vibrated, or moved. Also, when the movable decorative member performs such an action, the expectation of the special lottery being a jackpot is higher than when the movable decorative member does not perform such an action.
During the period when the operation unit is operating in this manner, the operation reception of the operation unit is not valid, and the operation instruction image as described above is not displayed.
In this way, by executing the action presentation using the operation unit (sometimes called "operation unit action presentation"), the player is shown the degree of expectation tactilely or visually, and the interest can be increased. Also, by executing the action presentation using the operation unit while the aura image is displayed, it is executed in parallel in time with the presentation of whether the reserved will change, so it is possible to provide a sense of expectation that a jackpot will occur in the "interval" between the color change.
The result of the special lottery referred to here is the result of the special lottery corresponding to the standby hold image whose display state has changed due to the "standby hold color change indication effect". Or, in the case of an embodiment in which the standby hold that changes due to the "standby hold color change indication effect" is the standby hold image corresponding to the most recently generated standby hold, it is the result of the special lottery that determines that the "standby hold color change indication effect" will be executed. The same applies to the notation of other expectation levels in the "standby hold color change indication effect".

The fact that the "operation unit operation presentation" is being executed may be displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side presentation display device 1600. For example, text such as "Attack button vibrating!" may be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the "operation unit operation presentation" is being executed on the operation unit.
Alternatively, the fact that the operation performance of the operation unit is being executed may not be displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. This can give a sense of satisfaction to a player who notices that the "operation unit operation performance" is being executed. Also, since it becomes difficult for surrounding players to notice that the "operation unit operation performance" is being executed, a player can enjoy a state of high expectation of a big win by himself.

In addition, in the "operation unit operation presentation", multiple patterns of vibration of the operation unit and movement of the movable decorative member may be provided. For example, a presentation pattern in which the vibration or movement continues for one second, a presentation pattern in which the vibration or movement continues for one second, a presentation pattern in which the vibration or movement continues for one second, is interrupted for one second, and continues again for one second, etc. may be adopted. The expectation of a jackpot may increase in this order. Also, the vibration may be of multiple types of strength, such as weak and strong vibrations. In this case, it is also preferable to increase the expectation of a jackpot in this order.
In the case of movable decorative members, presentation patterns with different movement speeds may be provided. For example, a presentation pattern in which the movable decorative members move at a slow speed and a presentation pattern in which the movable decorative members move at a fast speed may be provided. The expectation of a jackpot may be increased in this order. Although the movable decorative members have the same movement mode, the expectation may be varied depending on the light emission mode of the light-emitting decoration of the movable decorative members during operation. For example, the expectation may be higher when the movable decorative members are in a white light emission mode than when they are in a red light emission mode.

The vibrations generated by the vibration of the operation unit or the movement of the movable decorative member may be strong and transmitted to the handle 302, or a mechanism for transmitting vibrations to the handle 302 may be operated so that the vibrations are transmitted to the handle 302 in a manner different from the vibrations generated by the vibration of the operation unit or the movement of the movable decorative member. In this case, only the player holding the handle 302 can recognize that the "operation unit operation presentation" is being executed, and since it is difficult for surrounding players to notice that the "operation unit operation presentation" is being executed, the player can enjoy a state of high expectation of a jackpot by himself or herself. Also, a player who is not paying attention to the display area 1600a by, for example, operating a smartphone with his or her left hand can be made to recognize that the "hold color change indication presentation" has started.

The timing for starting the "operation unit operation presentation" should be the same as the timing at which the waiting hold image in the "first hold color change indication" starts to move (timing t6.5 in the embodiments shown in Figures 398 and 399).
In addition, the timing for ending the "operation unit operation presentation" should be the same as the timing for the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication presentation" to finish moving (timing t12 in the embodiments shown in Figures 398 and 399).
According to this embodiment, it is possible to impress upon the player that the waiting pending image has moved.

On the other hand, the timing to end the "operation unit operation presentation" may be earlier than the timing to end the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication presentation" (earlier than timing t12 in the embodiment shown in Fig. 398 and Fig. 399). For example, the timing to end the "operation unit operation presentation" may be timing t9 during the display of the aura image or timing t10.5 after the display of the aura image has ended.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to clearly check whether the standby image has changed or not.

Alternatively, the timing to end the "operation unit operation presentation" may be set to a timing later than the timing at which the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication presentation" ends its movement (a timing later than timing t12 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 398 and FIG. 399). For example, the timing to end the "operation unit operation presentation" may be set to the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation shown in FIG. 398(a) and FIG. 398(b) is resumed (timing t13) or a predetermined timing during the high-speed fluctuation (for example, timing t15). Alternatively, the timing may be set to the timing at which the display explaining the presentation contents in FIG. 399(a) and FIG. 399(b) is made (for example, timing t15), the timing at which the remaining time gauge image is displayed (for example, timing t17), or the timing at which the display of the remaining time gauge image is completed (timing t19).
According to such an embodiment, even after the standby image has changed, the expectation of a big win can be maintained. Even if the standby image has not changed, the "operation unit operation presentation" is being executed, so that the interest can be prevented from decreasing. In addition, although there is a risk that the player will not notice the "operation unit operation presentation", it is possible to make the player more aware that the "operation unit operation presentation" has started.

In the embodiment shown, the timing at which the "operation unit operation presentation" starts and the timing at which the standby image starts moving in the "first standby color change indication presentation" are the same, but the "operation unit operation presentation" may be started before the standby image starts moving in the "first standby color change indication presentation". Alternatively, the "operation unit operation presentation" may be started after the standby image starts moving in the "first standby color change indication presentation".

A performance in which the movable decorative member is moved from a standby position to a moving position (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "movable decorative member moving performance") may be executed simultaneously with the "first pending color change indication performance."
Specifically, the timing to start the "movable decorative member movement performance" (the timing when the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position) should be the same as the timing when the standby image in the "first standby color change indication performance" starts to move (timing t6.5 in the embodiment shown in Figures 398 and 399). Also, the timing to end the "movable decorative member movement performance" (the timing when the movable decorative member completes its movement to the moving position) should be the same as the timing when the standby image in the "first standby color change indication performance" ends its movement (timing t12 in the embodiment shown in Figures 398 and 399) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation pattern A").

As described above, the movable decorative member may be the rear panel board 2420 (FIG. 130, etc.), the rear panel board decorative member 2410 (FIG. 131, etc.), the tank accessory 3770 (FIG. 241, etc.), etc. The movable decorative member may be in the above-mentioned operating mode (e.g., up-down, left-right, diagonal, etc.).
According to this embodiment, it is possible to impress upon the player that the waiting pending image has moved.

On the other hand, the execution period of the "movable decorative member moving performance" and the movement period of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication performance" (the period from timing t6.5 to timing t12) may be shifted.
For example, the movable decorative member may start moving from the standby position to the moving position after the standby image starts moving, and the movable decorative member may complete moving to the moving position after the standby image stops moving. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t9 to timing t13 (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "operation pattern B").
Alternatively, the movable decorative member may start moving from the standby position to the moving position after the standby image starts moving, and the movement of the standby image may end after the movable decorative member has completed moving to the moving position. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t8 to timing t10.5 (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "operation pattern C").
In addition, it is preferable that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the ``movable decorative member moving effect'' is executed than when it is not executed.
The timing for starting execution of the "movable decorative member moving performance" may be until the color of the waiting hold image changes (timing t10), or after the color of the waiting hold image changes (timing t10).

According to such an embodiment, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation that a jackpot will occur in the "interval" between when the standby image changes color.
Alternatively, the player can be provided with a sense of anticipation for a big win after the color of the pending waiting image changes.

On the other hand, the "movable decorative member movement performance" may be started after the end of the movement period of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication performance" (the period from timing t6.5 to timing t12).
For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the moving position after the standby image starts moving and the standby image stops moving. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t13 to timing t16 (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "operation pattern D").
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the movement of the waiting hold image and the change in color of the waiting hold image in the "first hold change color indication effect."

As the specified movable decorative member to be moved in the "movable decorative member movement performance", one movable decorative member may be used, or two or more movable decorative members may be used. When two or more movable decorative members are used in the "movable decorative member movement performance", all the movable decorative members may be moved in "movement pattern A", all the movable decorative members may be moved in "movement pattern B", all the movable decorative members may be moved in "movement pattern C", or all the movable decorative members may be moved in "movement pattern D".
Alternatively, some of the movable decorative members may be operated according to "operation pattern A", while other movable decorative members are operated according to "operation pattern B", "operation pattern C" or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some of the movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern B", while other movable decorative members are operated in "operation pattern A", "operation pattern C" or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some of the movable decorative members may be operated according to "operation pattern C", while other movable decorative members are operated according to "operation pattern A", "operation pattern B" or "operation pattern D".
Similarly, some of the movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern D", while other movable decorative members are operated in "operation pattern A", "operation pattern B" or "operation pattern C".
In this way, by operating multiple movable decorative parts in a variety of ways, the ``first hold color change indication performance'' can be enhanced.

With reference to Figures 406(a), 406(b), and 406(e), the movement path of the standby image is shown, but the length of the movement path of the standby image may be longer than the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member.
On the other hand, the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member may be longer than the length of the movement path of the standby image.
Alternatively, the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member may be the same as the length of the movement path of the standby image.

In addition, the linear path shown in Figure 406 (c) or Figure 406 (d) may be adopted as the movement path of the standby image, and the movement distance of the standby image and the movement distance of the movable decorative member may be compared. In this case, it is also preferable to adopt a linear path for the movable decorative member.
For example, the distance traveled by the standby image may be longer than the distance traveled by the movable decorative member.
On the other hand, the movement distance of the movable decorative member may be longer than the movement distance of the standby image.
Alternatively, the distance traveled by the movable decorative member may be the same as the distance traveled by the standby image.

If the movement path and movement distance of the standby image are made longer than the movement path and movement distance of the movable decorative member, it is possible to emphasize that the standby image has changed.
Furthermore, if the movement path and movement distance of the movable decorative member are made longer than the movement path and movement distance of the reserved image, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the movement of the movable decorative member.
Furthermore, if the movement path and movement distance of the standby image are made the same as the movement path and movement distance of the movable decorative member, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of overlooking either the movement of the standby image or the movement of the movable decorative member.

The movement speed of the standby image may be slower than the movement speed of the movable decorative member.
Alternatively, the movement speed of the movable decorative member may be slower than the movement speed of the standby image.
Alternatively, the movement speed of the movable decorative member may be set to the same as the movement speed of the standby image.
Although the embodiment in which the standby image is temporarily stopped at the intermediate position has been shown, it is preferable that the speed at which the image moves from the movement start position to the intermediate position is the same as the speed at which the image moves from the intermediate position to the movement end position. Also, if the standby image is not temporarily stopped at the intermediate position, it is preferable that the image moves from the movement start position to the movement end position at a constant speed.

When the speed of the standby image is made slower than the speed of the movable decorative member, the standby image moves for a long period of time, allowing the player to be sure that the standby image is moving.
When the speed of the movable decorative member is made slower than the speed of the standby image, the movement of the movable decorative member is carried out for a long period of time, so that the player can be sure to recognize that the movable decorative member is moving.
By making the movement speed of the standby image and the movement speed of the movable decorative member the same, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of missing either the movement of the standby image or the movement of the movable decorative member.

When the movable decorative member moves from the standby position to the moving position, the display area 1600a and the movable decorative member may be changed from a state in which they do not overlap when viewed from the front to a state in which they overlap when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the movable decorative member may be originally overlapped with a part of the display area 1600a when viewed from the front, and the overlapping area may be enlarged as the movable decorative member moves from the standby position to the moving position. This allows a player who is mainly looking at the display area 1600a to recognize that the movable decorative member has moved.
When moving the movable decorative member, it is preferable to move the movable decorative member and a certain standby image so that the movable decorative member during or after the movement and a certain standby image during or after the movement do not overlap in a front view. In other words, during the period from the start of the movement of a certain standby image to the end of the movement, the movable decorative member and a certain standby image do not overlap in a front view.
In addition, after a certain standby image moves, the moving movable decorative member and the stopped standby image may overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, if the entire standby image overlaps with the movable decorative member, the standby image becomes difficult or impossible to see, so it is preferable that only a part of the standby image (for example, only half of the top or bottom) overlaps with the movable decorative member when viewed from the front, but it is also possible that the entire standby image overlaps with the movable decorative member when viewed from the front.
In addition, it is possible to make the presentation mode similar to that of a certain standby image for all standby images that are displayed in multiple numbers, not limited to a certain standby image, or to make the presentation mode similar to that of a certain standby image for some of all standby images that are displayed in multiple numbers.
In addition, at least for standby pending images whose display mode has been changed by the "hold change color indication effect", the effect may be the same as that of a certain standby pending image.

In an embodiment in which the entirety of such a standby image does not overlap with the movable decorative member, the visibility of the standby image while it is moving is not impeded, and it is not impossible to confirm the display mode (color) of the standby image after it has changed. In addition, the range of movement of the movable decorative member is not excessively impeded, making it difficult to limit the presentation mode using the movable decorative member.

In the "first pending color change indication effect," the pending image moves to a predetermined position over a predetermined time, and a predetermined preview effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed between the time the pending image starts to move and the time it finishes moving.
As a predetermined preview effect, the "step-up preview effect" shown with reference to FIG. 384 or the "weather preview effect" shown with reference to FIG. 393 can be adopted.
For example, a "step-up preview performance" or a "weather preview performance" may be executed in the period from timing t8 to timing t10. Timing t10 is the timing at which the color of the standby image can change. The "step-up preview performance" has different performance execution times depending on the number of stages, but it is preferable to divide the performance execution time into four equal parts, with each period being the execution period for the first to fourth stages. For example, if the "step-up preview performance" is executed in two seconds, the display times for the first, second, third, and fourth stages may each be set to 0.5 seconds.
The expectation level indicated by the "Step-up preview effect" and the "Weather preview effect" is not the expectation level that the change in the decorative pattern during the change will result in a jackpot, but the expectation level that the change corresponding to the waiting pending image, which may change color at timing t10, will result in a jackpot.
The display priority of the horizontal frame and characters in the "Step Up Preview Performance" and the weather phenomenon image in the "Weather Preview Performance" may be lower than the display priority of the standby image and the aura image.

According to this embodiment, a sense of anticipation for a big win can be provided to the player during the period when it is determined whether the standby image will change. Furthermore, since the specified advance notice performance does not require the player to accept any operation on the operation unit, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation without making the player feel impatient. Furthermore, since the moving standby image is displayed closer to the player than the image displayed by the specified advance notice performance, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the moving standby image is hidden by the image displayed by the specified advance notice performance and the player loses sight of the standby image.

In the embodiment shown, the timing at which the execution of a specified preview performance (such as a "step-up preview performance" or a "weather preview performance") ends is timing t10, which is the timing at which the color of the waiting hold image can change, but it may also be a specified timing during the period until the variable display of the decorative pattern ends.
For example, a predetermined preview performance may be executed until the timing immediately after the movement of the standby image has finished (timing t12.5 in Figures 398 and 399).
For example, a predetermined preview performance may be executed until the timing (timing t13) when the "first pending color change indication performance" in Figures 398(a) and 398(b) ends, or until a predetermined timing during the resumed high-speed fluctuation display (from timing t13 to timing t28.5).
Alternatively, a specified preview performance may be executed until the timing when the display of the background image for the premonition performance of the ``second pending change color premonition performance'' in Figures 399 (a) and 399 (b) ends (timing t20.5), or until a specified timing during the resumed high-speed changing display (from timing t20 to timing t28.5).

According to such an embodiment, a predetermined preview performance is executed even after the movement of the waiting hold image has finished, so that even if the waiting hold image does not change or only changes to a color with a low expectation level in the "first reserve change color indication performance" or the "second reserve change color indication performance", the predetermined preview performance can arouse interest in the player.
In particular, the "hold color change indication effect" is determined to be executed when the start winning is triggered (in the example of the effect shown with reference to Figs. 398 and 399, the start winning occurs at timing t4.5 and a series of effects are executed, but the timing of the start winning is not necessarily timing t4.5), so the time of the resumed high-speed fluctuation may be long. Also, it is determined that the stopping result of the decorative pattern during the fluctuation is a miss. Therefore, it can be said that the period in which the player is shown a somewhat boring fluctuation display.
In this embodiment, a predetermined preview performance continues to be executed during the period of resumed high-speed fluctuation, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player for the results of the next and subsequent fluctuation displays.

In addition, a display effect that determines that a jackpot will occur during the execution of the variable display (a display effect in which the expectation of a jackpot is 100%) may be executed. As a display effect that determines that a jackpot will occur, the text "jackpot confirmed!" may be displayed in the display area 1600a, or a premium effect may be executed to display an image of a specific character. In this case, during the execution of the "first reserved color change indication effect", the execution of a display effect that determines that a jackpot will occur may not be started, and a display effect that determines that a jackpot will occur after the end of the "first reserved color change indication effect" may be executed. In this case, the jackpot is determined to occur by the specific standby reserved image whose color has changed (or a display that appears to be about to change was made but did not change) due to the "first reserved color change indication effect".
As shown in the presentation pattern table of FIG. 396, in the "first reserved color change indication presentation", the standby reserved image does not change to a standby reserved image with a 100% expectation. In other words, in the "first reserved color change indication presentation", a display presentation that determines the occurrence of a jackpot using a standby reserved image is not executed.

In this way, by not executing a display effect with a 100% expected degree during the execution of the "first pending color change indication effect", the interest in the "first pending color change indication effect" is not reduced, and the player can be excited about the outcome of the "first pending color change indication effect".

It is preferable not to execute a display effect with an expectation rate of 100% during the period from when the standby image starts to move in the "first standby color change indication effect" to when it stops moving (the period from timing t6.5 to timing t12 in Figures 398 and 399).

On the other hand, in order to add an element of surprise, a display effect with an expectation rate of 100% may be executed during the period from when the standby hold image in the "first hold color change indication effect" starts to when it stops moving (the period from timing t6.5 to timing t12 in Figures 398 and 399).

In the "second pending color change indication effect" described with reference to Figure 399 and Figures 403 to 405, a period (timing t16 to timing t19) is provided in which the remaining time is indicated by the remaining time gauge image as shown in Figures 403(f) and 403(g), but a modified embodiment in which an effect is executed in which the player operates the operation unit during this period will be described with reference to Figure 410.

In this embodiment, during the period in which the remaining time gauge image is displayed (from timing t16 to timing t19), an operation acceptance effect is performed in which acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled.
Specifically, the temporarily stopped left, center, and right decorative symbols swing up and down within the range not exceeding the display area 1600a in response to the successive tapping of the attack button 3710. Also, a predetermined number of small aura images are added around the left, center, and right decorative symbols in response to the successive tapping.
The aura images come in three colors: white, blue, and red. Two auras are displayed in the case of a white aura image, four in the case of a blue aura image, and six in the case of a red aura image.
In addition, the likelihood of winning increases in the order of a white aura image, a blue aura image, and a red aura image.
The type of aura image that is finally displayed is predetermined to be either white, blue, or red based on the result of a special lottery, and the color of the aura image changes gradually depending on the number of operations performed on the operation unit.

For example, if it has been decided that a red aura image is to be displayed, the aura image is not displayed when no operation is performed, but by operating the operation unit five times, a white aura image is displayed, then by operating the operation unit five times, a blue aura image is displayed, and by operating the operation unit five more times, a red aura image is displayed.
On the other hand, if it has been decided that a white aura image is to be displayed, the aura image is not displayed when no operation is performed, but the white aura image is displayed by operating the operation unit five times. After that, even if the operation unit is operated five times, the white aura image will continue to be displayed as is, and even if the operation unit is operated another five times, the white aura image will continue to be displayed as is.

An example of the presentation when it is decided that a red aura image will be displayed is shown below.
410(a) shows the display state at the start of the remaining time gauge image. Here, an attack button imitation image that imitates the attack button 3710 is displayed to the left of the remaining time gauge image. Note that the attack button imitation image includes the word "repeated hits."
FIG. 410(b) shows the state when the attack button 3710 is pressed five times and a white aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(c) shows the attack button 3710 being pressed five more times, causing a blue aura image to be displayed.
FIG. 410(d) shows the state after the attack button 3710 has been pressed five more times, causing a red aura image to be displayed.
410(e) shows a display state in which the remaining time gauge image has ended and the aura image has ended. In this state, the left decorative symbol is maintained in a temporarily stopped state, and the center decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are in a high-speed fluctuating state.
As shown in Figures 410(a) to 410(e), the display priority of the standby image, remaining time gauge image, and attack button simulation image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern and aura image.

In this embodiment, the player's emotions can be heightened while the remaining time gauge image is displayed.

The operation mode required of the player is not limited to repeated taps, and may be, for example, a long press or a single press. In the case of a long press, the color of the aura image may be changed in stages according to the length of time the button is pressed. In the case of a single press, an aura image of one of the colors white, blue, or red may be displayed in response to a single operation. In addition, the operation parts such as the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be required to be tilted back and forth or left and right multiple times (corresponding to repeated taps of the attack button 3710), tilted for a long period of time (corresponding to a long press of the attack button 3710), or tilted once (corresponding to a single press of the attack button 3710).

The operation reception performance in this embodiment may be always executed. Alternatively, the operation reception performance may be executed in some cases and not in others. In addition, the expectation level may be higher when the operation reception performance is executed than when it is not executed.

In the "second hold color change indication effect" described with reference to Figures 399, 403 to 405 (in a situation where an image suggesting that the standby image may change (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for the indication effect) is displayed in the "second hold color change indication effect"), if an indication is executed that prompts the player to perform a specified operation (operation reception indication), the image imitating the operation unit should be displayed after the image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed in the "second hold color change indication effect". In this way, the player can be made aware that the standby image may change before performing the specified operation, and can perform the specified operation with a sense of anticipation.

The image simulating the operation unit may also be displayed before the image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed in the "second standby color change indication." In this way, the image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed when the player tries to operate the operation unit before the player realizes that the standby image may change, providing a sense of surprise to the player. Therefore, when the image simulating the operation unit is displayed before the image suggesting that the standby image may change in the "second standby color change indication," it is preferable to display the image suggesting that the standby image may change in an extremely short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) after the image simulating the operation unit is displayed. In this case, the image simulating the operation unit is displayed in such a way that it straddles the timing before and after the image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed.

When the player performs a predetermined operation or when the operation valid period ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 410(e), a decorative pattern (a decorative pattern of a color corresponding to the color of the waiting image that may change) that will finally stop temporarily is displayed as a post-operation effect. Since the image that imitates the operation unit is hidden at the same time as this post-operation effect is displayed, the image that imitates the operation unit is hidden when an image that suggests that the waiting image may change is displayed. In this way, it is possible to focus on the waiting image that may change. In addition, when the image that imitates the operation unit is hidden, it may be hidden gradually rather than suddenly. Gradually means a display in which the transparency of the image that imitates the operation unit is gradually increased, a display in which the image that imitates the operation unit pops, a display in which a predetermined effect is superimposed on the image that imitates the operation unit, etc. In such a case, the timing at which the image that imitates the operation unit is completely hidden may occur when the image that suggests that the waiting image may change is hidden, but the image that imitates the operation unit is not hidden. Even in such a case, a beautiful flowing image can be provided, and a display that does not feel strange to the player can be provided.

When an effect (operation reception effect) is executed to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation in the "second hold change color indication effect" (in a situation where an image (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for the indication effect) is displayed in the "second hold change color indication effect" suggesting that the standby hold image may change), either a "first operation reception effect" that displays a suggestive image suggesting that an image imitating the operation unit will be displayed before the image imitating the operation unit is displayed (suggesting that the operation will be effective) or a "second operation reception effect" that does not display a suggestive image suggesting that an image imitating the operation unit will be displayed before the image imitating the operation unit is displayed (suggesting that the operation will be effective) may be applied. This is because the "first operation reception effect" provides a sense of expectation in advance, and the "second operation reception effect" provides a surprise to the player.

Also, as explained above, when the decorative pattern that will eventually stop temporarily is displayed as a post-operation effect (a decorative pattern of a color corresponding to the color of the waiting image that may change), an image suggesting that the waiting image may change (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for the predictive effect) is displayed, but it is also possible to hide the image suggesting that the waiting image may change (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for the predictive effect) when the decorative pattern that will eventually stop temporarily is displayed as a post-operation effect. In this way, only the decorative pattern that will eventually stop temporarily is displayed as a post-operation effect, making the player clearly aware of the color of the waiting image that may change. In addition, instead of displaying a decorative pattern that will eventually stop temporarily as a post-operation effect (a decorative pattern of a color that corresponds to the color of the standby image that can change), for example, a display such as "Chance" or "Hot!" may be used as a preview effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, rather than suggesting the color of the standby image that can change. Alternatively, the post-operation effect may display a decorative pattern that will eventually stop temporarily (a decorative pattern of a color that corresponds to the color of the standby image that can change) (for a hold change effect), or a preview effect such as "Chance" or "Hot!" may be displayed.

In addition, when the display of the background image for the predictive effect ends and the decorative pattern changes at high speed, a predetermined "operation reception effect" may be executed. In addition, the standby reserved image may be promoted in this operation reception effect. This allows the player to maintain his or her expectation of a big win even if the standby reserved image does not change in the "second standby color change predictive effect". In addition, in this operation reception effect, instead of promoting the standby reserved image, a predetermined notice effect as described above may be executed. In addition, this operation reception effect may be executed multiple times, or all of these multiple times may be used to promote the standby reserved image or to execute a predetermined notice effect, or each of the promotion of the standby reserved image and the predetermined notice effect may be executed.
In this case, the "operation acceptance presentation" can be a "first operation acceptance presentation" that displays a suggestive image suggesting that the operation will be valid, or a "second operation acceptance presentation" that does not display a suggestive image suggesting that the operation will be valid.

In this way, by executing the "operation acceptance effect" during or before/after the display of the premonition effect background image, it is possible to add more excitement to the effect of whether or not the display mode of the standby image changes.

The "movable decorative member movement performance" in which the movable decorative member is moved from a standby position to a moving position may be executed simultaneously with the display of the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance".
Specifically, the timing to start the "movable decorative member movement performance" (the timing when the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position) should be the same as the timing to start displaying the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance" (timing t13.5 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 399). Also, the timing to end the "movable decorative member movement performance" (the timing when the movable decorative member completes moving to the moving position) should be the same as the timing to end displaying the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance" (timing t20.5 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 399).
As mentioned above, when comparing a case where the "movable decorative member moving effect" is executed with a case where it is not executed, it is preferable that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the effect is executed.

On the other hand, the execution period of the "movable decorative member movement performance" and the display period of the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) may be shifted.
For example, after the display of the background image for the predictive performance in the "second pending color change predictive performance" starts, the movable decorative member may start moving from the standby position while the background image for the predictive performance is being displayed, and after the display of the background image for the predictive performance in the "second pending color change predictive performance" ends, the movable decorative member may complete its movement to the moving position. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t15 to timing t22.

Alternatively, after the display of the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance" has begun, the movable decorative member may start moving from the standby position while the background image for the premonition performance is being displayed, and after the movable decorative member has completed its movement to the moving position, the display of the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance" may end. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t15 to timing t18.

According to this embodiment, a sense of anticipation can be provided even during waiting times, such as when the performance is being explained, and if the remaining time gauge is decreasing, two types of anticipation performances can be provided, thereby increasing interest.

On the other hand, during the display period of the background image for the "second reserved color change indication effect" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5), the "movable decorative member movement indication" may not be executed. This allows the player to focus on the "second reserved color change indication effect."

On the other hand, the "movable decorative member movement performance" may be started after the end of the display period of the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5).
For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the moving position between timing t21 and timing t22 after the display of the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance" has ended.
According to this embodiment, even if the standby reserve image is not upgraded in the "second reserve color change indication performance", the expectation of a big win can be maintained.

In the "second pending color change indication effect," a background image for the indication effect is displayed for a predetermined period (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5), but a predetermined advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed between the start and end of the display of the background image for the indication effect.
As a predetermined preview effect, the "step-up preview effect" shown with reference to FIG. 384 or the "weather preview effect" shown with reference to FIG. 393 can be adopted.
For example, in the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5, a "step-up preview performance" or a "weather preview performance" may be executed. Note that the execution time of the "step-up preview performance" differs depending on the number of stages, but it is preferable to divide the performance execution time into four equal periods, with each period being the execution period for the first to fourth stages. For example, if the "step-up preview performance" is executed in two seconds, the display times for the first, second, third, and fourth stages may each be set to 0.5 seconds.
The expectation level indicated by the "Step-up preview effect" and the "Weather preview effect" is not the expectation level that the change in the decorative pattern during the change will result in a jackpot, but the expectation level that the change corresponding to the waiting pending image, which may change color at timing t20, will result in a jackpot.
The display priority of the horizontal frame and characters in the "Step-up Preview" and the weather phenomenon image in the "Weather Preview" may be lower than the display priority of the standby image and the remaining time gauge image.

According to this embodiment, a sense of anticipation for a big win can be provided to the player during the period when it is determined whether the standby image will change. Furthermore, since the specified advance notice performance does not require the player to accept any operation on the operation unit, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation without making the player feel impatient. Furthermore, since the moving standby image is displayed closer to the player than the image displayed by the specified advance notice performance, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the moving standby image is hidden by the image displayed by the specified advance notice performance and the player loses sight of the standby image.

Rather than starting a predetermined preview performance (such as a "step-up preview performance" or a "weather preview performance") at the same time as the display of the premonition performance background image starts, the predetermined preview performance may start a predetermined time after the display of the premonition performance background image starts. For example, the timing to start the predetermined preview performance may be a predetermined timing within the period from timing t13.5 to timing t16 when the display explaining the performance content is being displayed, or a predetermined timing within the period from timing t16 to timing t19 when the remaining time gauge image is being displayed.

Instead of ending a predetermined preview performance (such as a "step-up preview performance" or a "weather preview performance") at the same time as the end of the display of the premonition performance background image, the predetermined preview performance may end before the end of the display of the premonition performance background image. For example, the timing at which the predetermined preview performance ends may be timing t18.
Alternatively, the predetermined preview effect may be ended after the display of the prognostic effect background image is ended. For example, the timing at which the predetermined preview effect ends may be set to timing t21.

After the display of the background image for the premonition effect has ended, a predetermined premonition effect (such as a "step-up premonition effect" or a "weather premonition effect") may be started. For example, a predetermined premonition effect may be executed during the period from timing t22 to timing t27. Instead of the predetermined premonition effect (such as a "step-up premonition effect" or a "weather premonition effect"), a display effect that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot (a display effect in which the expectation of a jackpot is 100%) may be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the expectation of a big win can be maintained even if the pending image is not upgraded.

The embodiments and variations of the "first pending color change indication effect" and the embodiments and variations of the "second pending color change indication effect" have been described above, but these can be implemented in appropriate combinations.
For example, it can be implemented as a "pending change color indication effect" that adopts a certain embodiment (or variation) of the "first pending change color indication effect" and a certain embodiment (or variation) of the "second pending change color indication effect."

In addition, a specified effect (such as the above-mentioned "first operation acceptance effect,""second operation acceptance effect,""operation unit operation effect,""movable decorative member movement effect,""step-up preview effect,""weather preview effect," etc.) may be executed across the "first hold change color indication effect" and the "second hold change color indication effect."
In addition, after the "first reserved color change indication effect", a "development effect" is executed to start the "second reserved color change indication effect", but the execution period of the "development effect" may be set to a predetermined number of seconds (about 0.5 to 10 seconds) to heighten the player's anticipation. Also, during the execution of the "development effect", a predetermined effect executed during the "first reserved color change indication effect" may end, or a predetermined effect may start and be executed until a predetermined timing during the "second reserved color change indication effect".

After the "first reserved color change indication effect" is finished and the decorative pattern is changed to a high speed change, the operation of the operation unit may be accepted. Also, after that, the "second reserved color change indication effect" may be started.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399 etc., a decorative pattern may be displayed with high speed fluctuation from timing t12.5 to timing t13.5, and a "development performance" may be executed from timing t13 to timing t13.5. Also, at a predetermined timing after the timing when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed (a predetermined timing within the period from timing t12.5 to timing t13.0) or at a predetermined timing during the execution of the "development performance" (a predetermined timing within the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5), execution of a "second operation acceptance performance" without displaying a suggestion image in advance may be started.

Based on the operation reception of the "second operation reception effect", the color of the characters "from..." may be changed, and the color may indicate the expectation of a jackpot. For example, the characters "from..." may be displayed in white, and depending on the operation of the operation unit, the color may change to red or remain white without changing to red. It is also preferable that the color change to red indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot.
It should be noted that instead of changing the color of the words "From...", either a predetermined white image or a predetermined red image (e.g., an aura image) may be displayed based on the operation reception, and the color of the image may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. In this case, it is preferable that the predetermined red image indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot. Instead of executing the "second operation reception performance" in which a suggestive image is not displayed in advance, it is also possible to start executing the "first operation reception performance" in which a suggestive image is displayed in advance.

According to this embodiment, after the high-speed fluctuation is resumed, the "development effect" is executed, and it is confirmed that the "second pending color change indication effect" will be executed, and the "operation reception effect" is started while the "development effect" is being executed, so that the player can have high expectations of hitting a jackpot.

If no operation is performed on the operation unit, the execution period of the "second operation reception effect" ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing at which the "development effect" ends.
When an operation is performed on the operation unit, an image corresponding to the operation is displayed, but this display also ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing at which the "development performance" ends.

In this way, by making the period during which the operation unit is capable of accepting operations and the period during which images corresponding to the accepted operations are displayed extremely short, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the game.

The image corresponding to the operation reception may be displayed continuously until a predetermined timing during the period in which the "second pending color change indication" is started and the background image for the indication indication is displayed (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5). Alternatively, the image corresponding to the operation reception may be displayed continuously until a predetermined timing after the display of the background image for the indication indication has ended.

In this embodiment, although the period during which operations are accepted is short, the image corresponding to the accepted operation is displayed for a long period of time, giving the player a sense of satisfaction in having successfully operated the operating unit.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the "second operation reception effect" ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing when the "development effect" ends, the "second operation reception effect" may be continued even during the period when the "second hold color change indication effect" starts and the indication effect background image is displayed. In this case, an image corresponding to the operation reception is displayed even during the "second hold color change indication effect".
According to this embodiment, the valid operation period can be extended, so that the operation unit can be operated reliably.

The image corresponding to the operation acceptance will be displayed during the "second pending color change indication effect", but the display of the image corresponding to the operation acceptance may be terminated while the background image for the indication effect is being displayed, or the display of the image corresponding to the operation acceptance may be continued even after the background image for the indication effect is displayed.

In the modified example shown, the decorative pattern changes at high speed during the period from the end of the "first reserved color change indication effect" to the start of the "second reserved color change indication effect," but during the period when the decorative pattern changes at high speed, the "movable decorative member movement effect" may be started, and the movable decorative member may start moving from the standby position to the moving position. Also, it is preferable that the movement of the movable decorative member to the moving position is completed while the background image for the indication effect is being displayed.
Alternatively, the "second pending color change premonition performance" may be started after the movable decorative member has completed moving to its movement position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the display of the background image for the premonition performance has ended.
In addition, when the movable decorative member moves, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the movable decorative member does not move. Therefore, when the movable decorative member moves, the "second reserved color change indication effect" can be made more exciting.

Although a modified example has been shown in which the decorative pattern changes rapidly during the period from the end of the "first pending color change indication performance" to the start of the "second pending color change indication performance", it is also possible not to execute the "movable decorative member movement performance" during the period in which the decorative pattern is changing rapidly, depending on the type of background image for the indication performance displayed in the "second pending color change indication performance".
For example, when the background image for the first premonition performance is displayed in the "second pending color change premonition performance", the "movable decorative member movement performance" may or may not be executed, and when the background image for the second premonition performance is displayed in the "second pending color change premonition performance", the "movable decorative member movement performance" may not always be executed.
The degree of expectation of a big win may be different depending on the type of the background image for predictive effect. For example, the degree of expectation of the first background image for predictive effect and the second background image for predictive effect may be higher than that of the first background image for predictive effect, or the degree of expectation of the latter may be higher than that of the second background image for predictive effect, or the degrees of expectation of both may be the same.
According to such an embodiment, depending on whether or not the "movable decorative member moving effect" is executed, the type of the background image for the predictive effect to be displayed can be guessed, and the expectation of a big win can also be guessed. Also, by not executing the "movable decorative member moving effect", the player can focus on the "second reserved color changing predictive effect".

Although the modified example in which the decorative pattern is changed at high speed during the period from the end of the "first reserved color change indication effect" to the start of the "second reserved color change indication effect" has been shown, the display of the characters "From..." may be started during the period in which the decorative pattern is changing at high speed. In addition, the color of the characters "From..." may be set to three colors: white (low expectation), red (medium expectation), and rainbow (guaranteed jackpot), and the expectation of the jackpot may be indicated by the color of the characters. In addition, it is preferable to end the display of the characters "From..." while the background image for the indication effect is being displayed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can be made to look forward to the "second hold color change indication effect."

In addition, instead of ending the display of the characters "From..." while the background image for the predictive effect is being displayed, the display of the characters "From..." may end before the background image for the predictive effect is displayed. According to such an embodiment, the display of the characters "From..." ends in a short period of time, allowing the player to focus on the "second pending color change predictive effect."

Below is an explanation of the time relationships between the start timing of the "second operation acceptance performance", the "movable decorative member movement performance", the specified preview performance (the "step-up preview performance" and the "weather preview performance"), the specified timing during the performance (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "intermediate timing"), and the end timing.

First, for the "second operation reception presentation," there is a timing to start displaying the operation instruction display, a timing to end displaying the operation instruction display (which is the end timing of the operation valid period and also the timing to start displaying the post-operation display), and a timing to end displaying the post-operation display. Note that when the operation instruction display starts and an operation is performed on the operation unit, the post-operation display is displayed immediately. Note that the end timing of the post-operation display does not change regardless of whether an operation is performed or not.
In addition, the "movable decorative member movement performance" includes the timing when the movable decorative member starts moving to the moving position, the timing when it completes moving to the moving position, and the timing when it completes moving to the standby position.
In addition, certain preview effects (such as "step-up preview effects" and "weather preview effects") have start and end timings.
The temporal relationship between each of these timings and the other timings will be described.
As shown in Figure 411, the earliest start timing of these effects (at least one of the start timing of the display of operation instructions, the start timing of the movement of the movable decorative part, and the start timing of the preview effect) is the timing when the display of ``From...'' in the ``Developing effect'' starts (timing t13).

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other start timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the display of the operation instructions has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the start of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun.
It is also possible to start execution of a specified preview performance after starting display of operation instructions, to start execution of a specified preview performance simultaneously with starting display of operation instructions, or to start display of operation instructions after starting execution of a specified preview performance.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed simultaneously with the start of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position has been completed.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and the other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the start of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.
The execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the display of the operation instructions has started, the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the start of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be started after the execution of the specified preview performance has been terminated.

The relationship between the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other start timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the display of the operating instructions has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the end of the display of the operating instructions, or the display of the operating instructions may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has started.
The execution of a specified preview performance may be started after the display of the operation instructions has ended, the execution of the specified preview performance may be started simultaneously with the end of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be ended after the execution of the specified preview performance has started.

The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position may be completed simultaneously with the end of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position has been completed.

The relationship between the display end timing of the operation instruction display and other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the end of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.
The execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the display of the operation instructions has been terminated, the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the termination of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be terminated after the execution of the specified preview performance has been terminated.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other start timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the post-operation display has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has started.
It is also possible to start execution of a predetermined preview performance after the post-operation display has ended, to start execution of a predetermined preview performance simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or to end the post-operation display after starting execution of the predetermined preview performance.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the post-operation display has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position has been completed.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.
The execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the post-operation display is terminated, the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be terminated after the execution of the specified preview performance is terminated.

Below, the relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member starts to move and other timings will be explained.
The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving and other start timings will be explained.
The display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has started, or the display of the operation instructions may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the display of the operation instructions has started.
The execution of a specified preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has started, the execution of the specified preview performance may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of the specified preview performance has started.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member starts to move and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The display of the operation instructions may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun, the display of the operation instructions may be ended simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the display of the operation instructions has been ended.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving and the timing at which it ends moving will be explained.
The post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun, the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the post-operation display has been ended.
The execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun, the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the display of operation instructions may be started after the execution of the specified preview performance has been terminated.

Below, the relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the moving position and other timings will be explained.
The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the moving position and the start timing of other movements will be explained.
The display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position is completed, or the display of the operation instructions may be started simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions is started.
The execution of a specified preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to its moving position is completed, the execution of the specified preview performance may be started simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its moving position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its moving position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance has started.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the moving position and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position is completed, or the operation instruction display may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the operation instruction display is terminated.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the moving position and other end timings will be explained.
The post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position is completed, the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the post-operation display is ended.
The execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to its moving position is completed, the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its moving position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its moving position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance is terminated.

Below, the relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the standby position and other timings will be explained.
The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the standby position and other start timings will be explained.
The display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, or the display of the operation instructions may be started simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions is started.
The execution of a specified preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, the execution of the specified preview performance may be started simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance has started.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the standby position and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The display of the operation instructions may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, or the display of the operation instructions may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions is terminated.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member completes its movement to the standby position and other end timings will be explained.
The post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display is ended.
The execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance is terminated.

The relationship between the start timing of execution of a specified preview performance and other timings will be explained below.
The relationship between the start timing of execution of a specified preview performance and other start timings will be explained.
The display of operation instructions may be started after the execution of a specified preview performance has started, the display of operation instructions may be started simultaneously with the start of the execution of a specified preview performance, or the execution of a specified preview performance may be started after the display of operation instructions has started.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of a specified preview performance has started, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the start of the execution of a specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has started.

The relationship between the start timing of execution of a specified preview performance and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The display of operation instructions may be ended after the execution of a specified preview performance has started, the display of operation instructions may be ended simultaneously with the start of the execution of a specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be started after the display of operation instructions has been ended.
The movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the execution of a specified preview performance has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed simultaneously with the start of the execution of a specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position has been completed.

The relationship between the start timing of a specified preview performance and other end timings will be explained.
The post-operation display may be ended after the execution of a specified preview performance is started, the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the start of the execution of the specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be started after the post-operation display is ended.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of a specified preview performance has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the start of the execution of a specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may begin after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.

The relationship between the timing at which a specified preview performance ends and other timings will be explained below.
The relationship between the end timing of a specified preview performance and the start timing of other performances will be explained.
The display of operation instructions may be started after the execution of a specified preview performance is completed, the display of operation instructions may be started simultaneously with the completion of the execution of a specified preview performance, or the post-operation display may be ended after the execution of a specified preview performance is started.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of a specified preview performance has been completed, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the completion of the execution of a specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be completed after the movement of the movable decorative member has been started.

The relationship between the timing at which a specified preview performance ends and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The display of operation instructions may be terminated after the execution of a predetermined preview performance is completed, the display of operation instructions may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the execution of a predetermined preview performance, or the execution of a predetermined preview performance may be terminated after the display of operation instructions is terminated.
The movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the execution of a specified preview performance is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed simultaneously with the completion of the execution of a specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position is completed.

The relationship between the execution end timing of a specified preview performance and other end timings will be explained.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the completion of the execution of the specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed.
The post-operation display may be ended after the execution of a predetermined preview performance is completed, the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the completion of the execution of the predetermined preview performance, or the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be ended after the post-operation display is completed.

Although the temporal relationship between two timings is shown, the temporal relationships between the above timings may be combined. In this case, the temporal relationships between three or more timings will be shown.

Below, an embodiment combining three or more timings is illustrated with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 399 and 411. Note that Figure 411 is a time chart showing the execution modes of the "second operation acceptance performance", "movable decorative member movement performance", and "predetermined advance notice performance" during the period from timing t11 to timing t20 shown in Figure 399. Note that in Figures 411(a) to 411(c), the execution timing of each performance and the length of time for which the performance is executed during the period from timing t11 to timing t20 are different.

The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the operation instruction display is started, a predetermined preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member is started, the operation instruction display may be ended after the performance of the predetermined preview performance is started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the operation instruction display is ended, the performance of the predetermined preview performance may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the post-operation display may be ended after the performance of the predetermined preview performance is ended, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display is ended.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(a), the display of the operation instruction is started at timing t13, the movement of the movable decorative member is started at timing t13.5, the execution of a predetermined preview performance is started at timing t14, the post-operation display is started at timing t14.5, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at timing t15.5, the execution of the predetermined preview performance is completed at timing t16, the post-operation display is completed at timing t16.5, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t17.5.

The operation instruction display may be started after starting the execution of a specified preview performance, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after starting the execution of the specified preview performance, the operation instruction display may be ended after starting the movement of the movable decorative member, the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after ending the operation instruction display, the execution of the specified preview performance may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position is completed, the post-operation display may be ended after the execution of the specified preview performance is completed, and the movement of the movable decorative member to its standby position may be completed after ending the post-operation display.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(b), the display of operation instructions is started at timing t13, the execution of a specified preview performance is started at timing t13.5, the movement of the movable decorative member is started at timing t14, the post-operation display is started at timing t14.5, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at timing t16, the execution of the specified preview performance is completed at timing t16.5, the post-operation display is completed at timing t17, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t18.

The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of a specified preview performance has started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the movement of the movable decorative member has started, the display of operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position has been completed, the execution of the specified preview performance may be ended after the display of operation instructions has started, the display of operation instructions may be ended after the execution of the specified preview performance has been completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the display of operation instructions has been ended, and the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 411(c), execution of a predetermined preview performance begins at timing t13, movement of the movable decorative member begins at timing t13.5, movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at timing t15.5, display of operation instructions begins at timing t16, execution of the predetermined preview performance ends at timing t16.5, post-operation display begins at timing t17.5, movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t18, and the post-operation display ends at timing t19.5.

It is desirable that the difference between the occurrence timing of a certain event and the occurrence timing of another event that occurs thereafter is at least 0.5 seconds or more. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 411, all of the differences are 0.5 seconds or more. This allows the player to recognize whether a certain event and another event occurred simultaneously or whether the other event occurred with a delay.
It should be noted that the minimum time may be 1 second or more, rather than 0.5 seconds or more. In this case, it is possible to more clearly recognize that an event has occurred with a delay.

A "second operation reception effect" may be adopted as the operation reception effect instead of the "first operation reception effect." In this case, a suggestion image suggesting that the operation will be effective is displayed at a predetermined timing before the operation instruction display starts. The display timing of this suggestion image may have the same temporal relationship as the temporal relationship between the start timing of the operation instruction display and other timings described above.
For example, in terms of the timing at which the movement of the movable decorative member begins, the movement of the movable decorative member may begin after the display of the suggestion image begins, the movement of the movable decorative member may begin at the same time as the display of the suggestion image begins, or the display of the suggestion image may begin after the movement of the movable decorative member begins.
The same applies to the relationship between the timing at which the suggestive image starts to be displayed and various other timings.

Although the relationship between the timing of each of the three effects, "operation acceptance effect,""movable decorative member movement effect," and "specified preview effect," has been shown, it is also possible to define the relationship between the timing of each of the three effects when any two of them are executed.
For example, the execution timing of the ``operation reception performance'' and ``movable decorative member movement performance'' may be such that the movement of the movable decorative member is started after the operation instruction display is started, the operation instruction display is ended after the movement of the movable decorative member is started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the operation instruction display is ended, the post-operation display is ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the waiting position is completed after the post-operation display is ended.
In addition, it is preferable to set the expectation level higher the more the number of effects that are executed among the three effects, "operation reception effect,""movable decorative member movement effect," and "predetermined advance notice effect." In other words, it is preferable to set the expectation level higher when two effects are executed than when only one effect is executed, and to set the expectation level higher when three effects are executed than when two effects are executed.

As shown in Figure 399, the period (7 seconds) during which the background image for the premonition effect in the "second hold color change premonition effect" is displayed (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) is longer than the period (5.5 seconds) required to move the standby hold image in the "first hold color change premonition effect" (from timing t6.5 to timing t12).
The length of time for which the prognostic effect background image is displayed may be longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is advisable to lengthen the display time for the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image.
Although both the "first hold color change indication effect" and the "second hold color change indication effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby hold image, by using such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player aware that there is a higher chance of winning if the effect progresses to the "second hold color change indication effect" than if the effect ends with only the "first hold color change indication effect."

The length of time required for the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect" may be the same as the length of time required for displaying the indication effect background image in the "second standby color change indication effect". In this case, it is advisable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image. Since both the "first standby color change indication effect" and the "second standby color change indication effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby image, making them the same time makes it easier for the player to grasp the timing at which the standby image changes, and prevents the player from feeling frustrated that they do not understand or cannot understand the timing at which the standby image changes.
Alternatively, the length of time required for the movement of the standby reserved image in the "first reserved color change indication effect" may be longer than the length of time required for displaying the indication effect background image in the "second reserved color change indication effect". In this case, the display time of the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image may be shortened (for example, to a total of 3 seconds).
Since there is a higher expectation of a jackpot if the performance progresses to the "second hold color change indication" than if it ends with only the "first hold color change indication", if the "second hold color change indication" is shown to the player for a long time, the player will have to maintain a sense of tension for a long period of time, which will cause fatigue to build up; however, by deliberately making the period required for moving the standby hold image in the "first hold color change indication" longer than the period for displaying the background image for the indication indication in the "second hold color change indication", it is possible to eliminate the accumulation of fatigue and to suddenly increase the sense of expectation in a short period of time.

As shown in Figure 399, the period (6.5 seconds) from when the background image for the premonition effect in the "second hold change color premonition effect" is displayed to when the display mode of the hold image changes (from timing t13.5 to timing t20) is longer than the period (5.5 seconds) required for the hold image to move in the "first hold change color premonition effect" (from timing t6.5 to timing t12).
The length of time from when the predictive effect background image is displayed until the display mode of the standby image changes may be longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is advisable to lengthen the display time of the display explaining the effect content or the remaining time gauge image.
Although both the "first reserve change color indication effect" and the "second reserve change color indication effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby reserve image, by using such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player aware that there is a higher chance of winning if the effect progresses to the "second reserve change color indication effect" than if the effect ends with only the "first reserve change color indication effect."

The length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color indication effect" may be the same as the length of time from when the indication effect background image in the "second standby color indication effect" is displayed until the display mode of the standby image changes. In this case, it is preferable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image. Since both the "first standby color indication effect" and the "second standby color indication effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby image, setting them to the same time makes it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the standby image changes, and prevents the player from feeling frustrated that the timing at which the standby image changes is unclear or difficult to understand.
Alternatively, the length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color change indication effect" may be longer than the length of time from when the indication effect background image is displayed to when the display state of the standby image changes in the "second standby color change indication effect." In this case, the display time of the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image may be shortened (for example, to a total of 3 seconds).
Since there is a higher expectation of a jackpot if the performance progresses to the "second hold color change indication" than if it ends with only the "first hold color change indication", if the "second hold color change indication" is shown to the player for a long time, the player will have to maintain a sense of tension for a long period of time, which will cause fatigue to build up; however, by deliberately making the period required for moving the standby hold image in the "first hold color change indication" longer than the period for displaying the background image for the indication indication in the "second hold color change indication", it is possible to eliminate the accumulation of fatigue and to suddenly increase the sense of expectation in a short period of time.

As shown in Fig. 398, the period (5.5 seconds) required for the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication" (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) is longer than the period (1 second) from the end of the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern (from timing t12 to timing t13). As mentioned above, in the modified example of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 399, the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be in a high-speed change state at timing t12.5 when the "development indication" is executed.
The reason for adopting this embodiment is that since the "first reserve change color indication performance" does not necessarily progress to the "second reserve change color indication performance", there is no need to set too long the period from when the movement of the waiting reserve image in the "first reserve change color indication performance" ends until the decorative pattern starts to change rapidly (from timing t12 to timing t13), and it is preferable to have the player clearly recognize the change in reserve in the "first reserve change color indication performance".

The length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color change indication" may be the same as the length of time from the end of the standby image to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern in the "first standby color change indication". In this case, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern may be extended (for example, temporarily stop for 5.5 seconds from the end of the standby image).
Although the "first reserve change color indication effect" does not necessarily progress to the "second reserve change color indication effect", by adopting such an embodiment, the time until the branching of whether or not the "first reserve change color indication effect" will progress to the "second reserve change color indication effect" is made the same as the length (5.5 seconds) of the period (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) required for the movement of the waiting reserve image in the "first reserve change color indication effect" that occurs before the branching, thereby having the effect of making it easier for the player to recognize the timing of the branching of whether or not the first reserve change color indication effect will progress to the second reserve change color indication effect.
Alternatively, the length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color change indication" may be shorter than the length of time from the end of the standby image to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern in the "first standby color change indication". In this case, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern may be further extended (for example, ten seconds after the end of the standby image).
Although the "first pending color change indication performance" does not necessarily progress to the "second pending color change indication performance," by making the time until the branch of whether or not the "first pending color change indication performance" will progress to the "second pending color change indication performance" longer than the length of the period (5.5 seconds) required for the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication performance" that occurs before the branch (from timing t6.5 to timing t12), even if it progresses to the second pending color change indication performance, it will not progress to the length of the period required for the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication performance" that occurs before the branch, thereby reducing excessive tension.

As shown in Fig. 398 and Fig. 399, the display period (7 seconds) of the background image for the indication effect in the "second reserved color change indication effect" (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) is longer than the period (1 second) from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern in the "first reserved color change indication effect" (from timing t12 to timing t13). As mentioned above, in the modified embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 399, the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be in a high-speed change state at timing t12.5 when the "development indication" is executed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to clearly recognize the change in the standby hold image in the "second hold change color indication effect."

In addition, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern may be the same as the length of the display period of the indication effect background image in the "second standby color change indication effect". In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop it for 7 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can clearly grasp the timing of the reservation change in the "second standby color change indication effect".
Alternatively, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image in the "first reserved color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern may be longer than the length of the display period of the indication effect background image in the "second reserved color change indication effect". In this case, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern may be further extended (for example, temporarily stopped for 10 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image). Since the "second reserved color change indication effect" itself has a high expectation of a win, and when it develops into the "second reserved color change indication effect", the expectation of the player is improved by increasing the expectation of a win, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player by making the time for the development into the "second reserved color change indication effect" longer than the time required for the reserve change by the "second reserved color change indication effect".

As shown in Fig. 398 and Fig. 399, the period from the end of the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern (timing t12 to timing t13) is longer than the period (6.5 seconds) from the start of the display of the background image for the indication effect in the "second standby color change indication effect" to the change of the display state of the standby image (timing t13.5 to timing t20). As described above, in the modified example of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 399, the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be in a high-speed change state at timing t12.5 when the "development indication" is executed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to clearly recognize the change in the standby hold image in the "second hold change color indication effect."

In addition, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern may be the same as the length of the period from the start of the display of the indication effect background image in the "second standby color change indication effect" to the change of the display mode of the standby reserved image. In this case, it is preferable to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop it for 6 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can clearly grasp the timing of the hold change in the "second standby color change indication effect".
Alternatively, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image in the "first reserved color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern may be longer than the length of the period from the start of the display of the indication effect background image in the "second reserved color change indication effect" to the change of the display mode of the standby reserved image. In this case, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern may be further extended (for example, temporarily stopped for 10 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby reserved image). Since the "second reserved color change indication effect" itself has a high expectation of a win, and when it develops into the "second reserved color change indication effect", the expectation of the player is improved by increasing the expectation of a win, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player by making the time for the development into the "second reserved color change indication effect" longer than the time required for the reserve change by the "second reserved color change indication effect".

In the embodiment shown, if the remaining time of the variable display is between 15 seconds and less than 20 seconds at the time when the start winning occurs, the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed, but the "second pending color change indication effect" is not executed. However, it is also possible to prevent the "pending color change indication effect" from being executed when the remaining time of the variable display is between 15 seconds and less than 20 seconds.
In this case, the "hold color change indication effect" will be executed only if the remaining time of the variable display is between 20 seconds and less than 35 seconds at the time when the start winning occurs.
In addition, the "reserved color change indication effect" may be executed when the remaining time of the variable display is 35 seconds or more. In this case, the "reserved color change indication effect" is executed when the remaining time of the variable display is 20 seconds or more at the timing when the start winning occurs.
As mentioned above, when executing the "Pending hold color change indication effect", there are cases where only the "First pending hold color change indication effect" is executed and cases where the "Second pending hold color change indication effect" is executed after the execution of the "First pending hold color change indication effect". The following percentages can be adopted as the execution percentages.

The rate at which only the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed may be higher than the rate at which the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed after the execution of the "first pending color change indication effect."
For example, the percentage of times that only the ``first hold change color indication effect'' is executed may be 90%, and the percentage of times that the ``second hold change color indication effect'' is executed after the execution of the ``first hold change color indication effect'' may be 10%.
According to this embodiment, since the "second hold color change indication effect" is unlikely to be executed, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when the "second hold color change indication effect" is executed.

Conversely, the rate at which only the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed may be lower than the rate at which the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed after the execution of the "first pending color change indication effect."
For example, the percentage of times that only the ``first pending color change indication effect'' is executed may be 10%, and the percentage of times that the ``second pending color change indication effect'' is executed after the execution of the ``first pending color change indication effect'' may be 90%.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of the "second hold color change indication effect" being executed is increased, thereby providing the player with more opportunities for the waiting hold image to change.

In the changing display, if the "Pending change color indication performance" is not executed, a "Pending change color indication performance" in which only the "First pending change color indication performance" is executed is executed, or a "Pending change color indication performance" in which the "Second pending change color indication performance" is executed after the "First pending change color indication performance" is executed may be executed.
As for the execution ratios, the rate at which the "reserve color change indication effect" is not executed may be higher than the rate at which the "reserve color change indication effect" in which only the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed is executed. Also, the rate at which the "reserve color change indication effect" in which only the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed may be higher or lower than the rate at which the "reserve color change indication effect" in which the "second reserve color change indication effect" is executed after the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed is executed.
For example, the percentage of times that the "pending color change indication effect" is not executed may be set to 70%, the percentage of times that the "pending color change indication effect" in which only the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed may be set to 20%, and the percentage of times that the "pending color change indication effect" in which the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed after the "first pending color change indication effect" may be set to 10%.
Alternatively, the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' is not executed may be set to 70%, the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' in which only the ``first pending color change indication effect'' is executed may be set to 10%, and the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' in which the ``second pending color change indication effect'' is executed after the ``first pending color change indication effect'' may be set to 20%.
According to this embodiment, since the "hold color change indication effect" is unlikely to be executed, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when the "hold color change indication effect" is executed.

Conversely, the percentage of times that the "reserved change color indication effect" is not executed may be lower than the percentage of times that the "reserved change color indication effect" in which only the "first reserved change color indication effect" is executed is executed, or the percentage of times that the "reserved change color indication effect" in which the "second reserved change color indication effect" is executed after the execution of the "first reserved change color indication effect" is executed. Also, the percentage of times that the "reserved change color indication effect" in which only the "first reserved change color indication effect" is executed may be higher or lower than the percentage of times that the "reserved change color indication effect" in which the "second reserved change color indication effect" is executed after the execution of the "first reserved change color indication effect" is executed is executed.
For example, the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' is not executed may be 10%, the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' in which only the ``first pending color change indication effect'' is executed may be 70%, and the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' in which the ``second pending color change indication effect'' is executed after the ``first pending color change indication effect'' is executed may be 20%.
Alternatively, the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' is not executed may be set to 10%, the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' in which only the ``first pending color change indication effect'' is executed may be set to 20%, and the percentage of times that the ``pending color change indication effect'' in which the ``second pending color change indication effect'' is executed after the ``first pending color change indication effect'' may be set to 70%.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of the "hold color change indication effect" being executed is increased, so that the player can be provided with more opportunities for the waiting hold image to change.

In addition, the percentage at which the "hold color change indication" is not executed may be set to 0%.
For example, the percentage of times that a "pending color change indication effect" in which only the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed may be set to 70%, and the percentage of times that a "pending color change indication effect" in which the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed after the "first pending color change indication effect" is executed may be set to 30%.
Alternatively, the percentage of times that a "reserve color change indication effect" in which only the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed may be set to 30%, and the percentage of times that a "reserve color change indication effect" in which the "second reserve color change indication effect" is executed after the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed may be set to 70%.

During the execution of the "hold color change indication effect", a specific tune (e.g., a specific piece of music or specific background music) may be output as a variable effect sound from the speaker (upper speaker 573 or lower speaker 921) for a predetermined period of time. In this case, the output of the variable effect sound being output is stopped at the same timing as the start of output of the specific piece of music or at a predetermined timing before the start of output of the specific piece of music.
For example, a specific song may be output from the time (timing t5) when the decorative pattern temporarily stops in the time chart shown with reference to Figures 398 and 399 to the time (timing t31) when a new changing display starts.
Alternatively, the specific music may be output from a timing before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. For example, the specific music may be output simultaneously with the start winning, and the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped two seconds later (the "first reserved color change indication performance" may be started).
In addition, a predetermined light-emitting member provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 may be illuminated in a light-emitting manner that matches the melody of the variable effect sound. This can enhance the effect of the variable effect sound.
According to such an embodiment, the "hold change color indication effect" can be enhanced.

In the "pending color change indication performance", there are cases where only the "first pending color change indication performance" is executed, and cases where the "second pending color change indication performance" is executed after the "first pending color change indication performance" is executed, but in either case, it is preferable to continue outputting a specific song until a predetermined timing (timing t31 when a new variable display starts).
Specifically, in the time chart shown in Fig. 398, it is preferable to continue outputting a specific song even during the period from timing t13 onwards when the "second reserved color change indication effect" is not performed. Also, in the time chart shown in Fig. 399, it is preferable to continue outputting a specific song even during the period from timing t13 onwards when the "development indication" or the "second reserved color change indication effect" is being performed.
According to this embodiment, the "reserved change color indication effect" can be made more exciting. In addition, the specific music can ease the disappointment felt by the player when the display state of the standby reserved image does not change. In this embodiment, the time during which the decorative pattern changes at high speed is indefinite (it depends on the time of change of the variable display during execution and the timing of the start winning that triggers the start of the "reserved change color indication effect"), so it is effective to use this output mode.

The change effect sound that starts to be output when the change display starts or the change effect sound that has been output before the change display starts may be continued to be output as a specific song during the "hold color change indication effect". In this case, the volume of the change effect sound being output may be made louder than normal when the "hold color change indication effect" starts to add excitement to the start of the "hold color change indication effect".

The display mode of the standby image may change based on the execution of the "hold color indication effect", but the output of the specific song may be continued until the variable display corresponding to the standby image whose display mode has changed stops. Alternatively, the output of the specific song may be continued until a predetermined timing after the variable display corresponding to the standby image whose display mode has changed starts. In this case, it is preferable to start the execution of a special reach effect at the predetermined timing and output a song corresponding to the special reach effect. In addition, if it takes a long time for the variable display corresponding to the standby image whose display mode has changed to end, the playback of the specific song may end. In this case, it is preferable to start the playback of the specific song again after the playback of the specific song ends.
In this way, the same tune is output continuously across a plurality of variable displays, thereby building up anticipation for a big win during the period until the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the standby image whose display mode has changed starts.

A function for adjusting the volume output from the gaming machine may be provided so that the volume can be changed while the "hold color change indication effect" is being executed.
Specifically, a volume up button and a volume down button that allow the volume to be adjusted are provided at predetermined positions near the upper tray 321, so that the volume increases by one step each time the volume up button is pressed, and decreases by one step each time the volume down button is pressed.
The volume can be set to two or more levels, but it is preferable to provide 10 levels, for example. In this case, the lowest level is level 1 and the highest level is level 10. It is also preferable to configure the volume of the sound output when set to the minimum volume to be 70 decibels, and the volume of the sound output when set to the maximum volume to be 90 decibels, so that each operation of the adjustment button increases or decreases the volume by one level.

It is preferable to provide a waiting time during which the volume control button is not accepted in succession. Specifically, even if a pressing operation is performed during the period from a pressing operation until a predetermined waiting time has elapsed, the pressing operation is not treated as a valid operation. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the volume from suddenly increasing or decreasing even if the volume control button is pressed repeatedly, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the volume cannot be adjusted properly due to a sudden change in volume, or the volume suddenly increasing and causing a nuisance to other players.
However, if the waiting time is too long, it may take a long time to change the volume, which may cause stress to the player. Therefore, it is recommended to use a predetermined time of about 0.1 to 1 second as the waiting time.
The volume level may be changed by one step when the volume adjustment button is continuously pressed. In this case, the volume level does not change until the standby time has elapsed, and the volume level is changed by one step each time the standby time has elapsed.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can operate the volume adjustment button to set the volume to a desired level.

The length of the waiting time may be a predetermined constant length, or may be changed depending on the game status.
For example, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the "first pending color change indication performance", the waiting time length may be 1 second, and during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the "second pending color change indication performance", the waiting time length may be 0.2 seconds.
According to such an embodiment, during the period when the decorative pattern in the "first pending color change indication effect" is temporarily stopped (or during the period when the indication effect background image is displayed), the volume cannot be changed from the minimum volume 1 to the maximum volume 10 by repeatedly pressing or holding down the button. Similarly, the volume cannot be changed from the maximum volume 10 to the minimum volume 1.
Even during the movement period of the standby image which is shorter than the period during which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the volume cannot be changed from the first level, which is the minimum volume, to the tenth level, which is the maximum volume, and the volume cannot be changed from the tenth level, which is the maximum volume, to the first level, which is the minimum volume.
However, if the volume is set to a predetermined intermediate level (e.g., level 2 or level 3), the volume can be minimized. Similarly, if the volume is set to a predetermined intermediate level (e.g., level 8 or level 9), the volume can be maximized.

On the other hand, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the "second reserved color change indication performance", the volume can be changed quickly from the minimum volume 1 to the maximum volume 10 by repeatedly pressing or holding down the button. Similarly, the volume can be changed quickly from the maximum volume 10 to the minimum volume 1.
In addition, even during the period when the background image for the prognostic effect is displayed, the volume can be changed from the first level, which is the lowest volume, to the tenth level, which is the highest volume, and from the tenth level, which is the highest volume, to the first level, which is the lowest volume.
Although the embodiment has been shown in which the volume changes by one step by pressing or holding down the button, the volume may change by multiple steps (e.g., two or three steps) by pressing or holding down the button. For example, the volume may increase by three steps each time the volume up button is pressed once. According to such an embodiment, the volume can be changed more quickly.

The following embodiment may also be adopted.
When the volume level is at the maximum level, a period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the minimum value (it may be made to do so) before the period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume stage is at the minimum value, a period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time that the period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the maximum value (it may be made to do so) before the period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume level is at a predetermined level (for example, level 4) other than the maximum or minimum value, a period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the maximum level at the same time that the period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the maximum level (it may be made to do so) by the time the period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume level is at a predetermined level (for example, level 4) other than the maximum or minimum value, a period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the minimum value (it may be made to do so) before the period during which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped ends.

When the volume level is at the maximum level, a period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the minimum value (it may be made to do so) before the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume step is at the minimum value, a period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time that the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the maximum value (it may be made to do so) before the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change indication performance" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume level is at a predetermined level (for example, level 4) other than the maximum or minimum value, a period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the maximum level at the same time that the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the maximum level (it may be made to do so) before the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume level is at a predetermined level (for example, level 4) other than the maximum or minimum value, a period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the minimum value (it may be made to do so) before the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication performance" is temporarily stopped ends.
In addition, instead of the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change indication effect" is temporarily stopped, it may be the period during which the background image for the indication effect of the "second pending color change indication effect" is displayed.

The above-mentioned embodiment and variants of the volume adjustment during the execution of the "first pending color change indication" may be combined as appropriate with the embodiment and variants of the volume adjustment during the execution of the "second pending color change indication."

According to such an embodiment, the volume of the music output during the execution of the "hold color change indication effect" can be adjusted during the execution of the "hold color change indication effect."
Since it is difficult to significantly change the volume of the "first hold change color indication effect," the player can concentrate on the effect itself.
On the other hand, when the "second reserved color change indication effect" is executed, there is a possibility that a waiting reserved image with a higher expectation (for example, a gold waiting reserved image) will be displayed than when the "first reserved color change indication effect" is executed, but if the result is a loss despite the display of such a waiting reserved image with a high expectation, the player may feel embarrassed. Therefore, in the "second reserved color change indication effect", it is made easy to change the volume to a large value, making it difficult for other players to notice that the "second reserved color change indication effect" in which a waiting reserved image with a high expectation may be displayed is being executed.
Also, in the "second pending color change indication effect," when a provisional stop pattern with high expectation is produced (for example, when the "effect pattern PTN-2-16" is executed and the rainbow colored decorative pattern provisionally stops, confirming the occurrence of a jackpot), the volume can be increased to the maximum level even if it is at the minimum level, so that the player can increase the volume to the maximum level and brag to other players.

Instead of or in addition to providing a volume up button and a volume down button at a designated position near the upper tray 321 to allow adjustment of the volume, a light up button and a light down button at a designated position near the upper tray 321 to allow adjustment of the light intensity may be provided.
In addition, the above-described embodiment of the volume adjustment can be applied not only to the volume adjustment but also to the light amount adjustment. For example, the light amount can be changed from the first level, which is the minimum light amount, to the tenth level, which is the maximum light amount, and the light amount can be adjusted in the same way as the volume adjustment during the execution of the "hold color change indication performance."
According to this embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effect as when the volume is adjustable.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 399, the "second reserve color change indication performance" was executed once, but the "second reserve color change indication performance" may be executed again after the "second reserve color change indication performance" has ended.
For example, during the period from timing t20 to timing t20.5 in Figure 399 (a), a "development effect" may be executed to display "From... to...", and at timing t20.5, all of the decorative patterns on the left, center and right, which are in a state of rapid fluctuation, may be temporarily stopped, and the "second pending color change indication effect" may be executed again.
Similarly, during the period from timing t21 to timing t21.5 in Figure 399 (b), a "development effect" may be executed to display "From... to...", and at timing t21.5, all of the decorative patterns on the left, center and right, which are in a state of rapid fluctuation, may be temporarily stopped, and the "second pending color change indication effect" may be executed again.
In addition, the number of times that the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed is not limited to two, but may be three or more.
In addition, when deciding whether to execute the "second reserved color change indication", the remaining time of the variable display is taken into consideration. Specifically, if the execution of the "second reserved color change indication" is completed before the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the "second reserved color change indication" is executed, and if the execution of the "second reserved color change indication" is not completed before the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the "second reserved color change indication" is not executed.

According to this embodiment, the "second pending color change indication effect" can be executed multiple times (two or more times), which increases the opportunities for the state of the pending image to change. In addition, the remaining time of the variable display can be effectively utilized, which prevents the player from becoming bored.

In the embodiment shown, a part of the normal background image A is visible in the "first reserved color change indication effect", and an indication effect background image is displayed instead of the normal background image A in the "second reserved color change indication effect", but a common image may be displayed. For example, an image indicating that the "reserved color change indication effect" is being executed may be displayed in front of the normal background image A. For example, an image including the words "Reserved promotion chance!" may be displayed in front of the normal background image A.
The image containing the words "Chance to upgrade to reserved status!" begins to be displayed from the start of the "first reserved status change color indication effect" and the start of the "second reserved status change color indication effect."
The display ends when the "first pending color change indication effect" and the "second pending color change indication effect" end. Alternatively, the display may end when a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the timing at which the pending image changes.
In addition, the display priority of an image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" is set lower than that of a temporarily stopped decorative pattern or a standby reserved image, and the image is displayed behind the temporarily stopped decorative pattern or the standby reserved image.

Referring to Figure 412, the display mode of an image including the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" will be described.
Figures 412(a) to 412(c) show a display state in which an image including the words "Pending promotion chance!" is displayed at the timing when the display of the aura image during the "first pending color change indication performance" begins (timing t7.5 in Figures 398 and 399).
The size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" increases in the order of Figure 412(a), Figure 412(b), and Figure 412(c).

Figures 412(d) to 412(f) show a display state in which an image including the words "Pending promotion chance!" is displayed at the timing (from timing t15.5 to the latter half of timing t16 in Figure 399) when an explanation of the performance content during the "second pending color change indication performance" is being displayed (when the words "READY GO!" are displayed).
The size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" increases in the order of Figure 412(d), Figure 412(e), and Figure 412(f).

In addition, the size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" shown in Figure 412 (a) is the same as the size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" shown in Figure 412 (d).
In addition, the size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" shown in Figure 412 (b) is the same as the size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" shown in Figure 412 (e).
Also, the size of the image including the text "Chance to be promoted to reserved!" shown in Fig. 412(c) is the same as the size of the image including the text "Chance to be promoted to reserved!" shown in Fig. 412(f). Note that the size of the image including the text "Chance to be promoted to reserved!" in Fig. 412(c) and Fig. 412(f) is the same as the size of the display area 1600a, and the background image (here, normal background image A) is not visible as shown in the figure.

The display mode of the image including the text "Chance to get promoted to reserved position!" may be different during the execution of the "first reserved color change indication effect" and the "second reserved color change indication effect." For example, a large image including the text "Chance to get promoted to reserved position!" as shown in FIG. 412(c) may be displayed during the execution of the "first reserved color change indication effect," and a small image including the text "Chance to get promoted to reserved position!" as shown in FIG. 412(d) may be displayed during the execution of the "second reserved color change indication effect."
Conversely, during execution of the "first hold color change indication effect", a small image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" as shown in Figure 412 (a) may be displayed, and during execution of the "second hold color change indication effect", a larger image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" as shown in Figure 412 (f) may be displayed.
In addition to this example, during the execution of the "first reserved color change indication effect", any of the images including the text "Reserved promotion chance!" shown in Fig. 412(a) to Fig. 412(c) can be displayed. Similarly, during the execution of the "second reserved color change indication effect", any of the images including the text "Reserved promotion chance!" shown in Fig. 412(d) to Fig. 412(f) can be displayed.

In this embodiment, the visible area of the background image (here, normal background image A) changes depending on the size of the image containing the words "Chance to upgrade to reserved item!", clearly signaling that the "reserved item change color indication" has begun.
Also, when the size of the image containing the words "Chance to upgrade to reserved status!" is different, the player can tell whether the "first reserved status change color indication effect" or the "second reserved status change color indication effect" is being executed.
In addition, if the size of the image containing the text "Chance to be promoted to reserved jackpot!" is small, it is difficult for other players to notice it. On the other hand, if the image containing the text "Chance to be promoted to reserved jackpot!" is large, it is easy for other players to notice it.
Although an image including text has been given as an example, the same effect can be obtained when a character image or other image is displayed instead of text.

Referring to Figures 400 to 402, etc., an embodiment has been shown in which the standby image moves in front of the aura image, but the display priority of the aura image may be made higher than the display priority of the standby image, and the standby image may be moved behind the aura image.
For example, before the standby image starts to move, an aura image may be displayed in front of the standby image, making it invisible. Alternatively, the standby image may move to the position of the aura image being displayed, and the standby image may be positioned behind the aura image. In this case, the standby image is also invisible.
In addition, when the standby image moves and appears from behind the aura image, the display mode of the standby image may change. Alternatively, when the standby image is located behind the aura image, the display of the aura image may be terminated and the display mode of the standby image that has become visible may change.
The size and display position of the aura image may be such that it overlaps with the display position of the waiting hold image (bottom right of display area 1600a), or it may be such that it does not overlap with the display position of the waiting hold image (bottom right of display area 1600a).
Also, it may be possible to display aura images of different sizes, so that the larger the aura image, the greater the possibility that the display mode of the standby image will change.

In the "hold color change indication effect", an effect in which the light-emitting decorative member of the gaming machine is made to emit light (hereinafter, may be referred to as a light-emitting effect) may be executed. As the light-emitting decorative member, one or more of the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, and door frame top unit 570 provided on the door frame 3, the light guide plate 1140 provided on the gaming board 5, the panel board rear substrate 2420, and the tank role object 3770 may be adopted.
Specifically, the light-emitting effect involves changing a specific light-emitting decorative member from an off state to a light-emitting state, continuing the light-emitting state for a specific period of time, and then changing the light-emitting state from the light-emitting state to the off state. In the light-emitting state, the light source may be made to emit light continuously, or the light source may be made to blink periodically so that the light-emitting decorative member blinks and is visible.

As a specific example of the timing for executing the light-emitting effect, it is good to illuminate the light-emitting decorative component from the time when the starting winning occurs until just before the waiting hold image changes in the "first hold change color indication effect" (timing t9.5 in the examples of Figures 398 and 399).
Alternatively, the illuminating decorative member may be illuminated from the time when the starting winning occurs until a predetermined timing (timing t7 in the examples of Figures 398 and 399) during the movement of the waiting hold image in the "first hold color change indication performance."
Alternatively, the illuminating decorative component may be illuminated from the timing when the movement of the waiting hold image in the "first hold color change indication performance" starts (timing t6.5 in the examples of Figures 398 and 399) to the timing when the movement of the waiting hold image in the "first hold color change indication performance" ends (timing t12 in the examples of Figures 398 and 399).
According to this embodiment, it is possible to appeal to the player that the "hold color change indication effect" has started.

During the period in which the background image for the premonition performance in the "second pending color change premonition performance" is displayed, the luminous decorative member that was changed to a luminous state in the "first pending color change premonition performance" may not be changed to a luminous state.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the "hold change color indication effect" from becoming excessive, and to allow the player to concentrate on the display content in the display area 1600a.

The light-emitting effect that started in accordance with the execution of the "first reserved color change indication effect" may be continued during the execution period of the "development effect" (the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399). For example, the light-emitting effect may be executed during the period from timing t5 to timing t13.5 in FIG.
Alternatively, the light emitting effect may not be performed during the "first pending color change indication effect" or the "second pending color change indication effect", and the light emitting effect may be performed only during the execution period of the "development indication" (the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399).
Alternatively, the light-emitting effect may be executed from the execution period of the "development effect" (the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399) until a predetermined timing in the execution period of the "second pending color change indication effect".
According to this embodiment, it is possible to appeal to the player that the "second hold color change indication effect" will be started.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the light-emitting effect using the luminous decorative components ends during the execution of the ``first pending color change indication effect'' or the ``development indication,'' it may also end during the ``second pending color change indication effect.''
For example, the light-emitting effect may be ended at a predetermined timing while the remaining time gauge image is being displayed (the period from timing t16 to timing t19 in FIG. 399), or the light-emitting effect may be ended when the display of the background image for the premonition effect ends (timing t20.5 in FIG. 399), or the light-emitting effect may be ended at a predetermined timing after the display of the background image for the premonition effect ends (a predetermined timing within the period from timing t20.5 to timing t28.5 in FIG. 399).

As examples of light-emitting effects using light-emitting decorative members, a light-emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light and a light-emitting state in which the light source blinks have been shown, but the degree of expectation may be indicated by these light-emitting states. For example, the degree of expectation may be higher for a light-emitting state in which the light source blinks than for a light-emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light. Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be higher for a light-emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light than for a light-emitting state in which the light source blinks.
The degree of expectation may be indicated by the color of light emitted by the light source.
For example, the light source may emit three colors of light, namely, white, blue, and red, and the light-emitting decorative member may emit light in one of the three colors, white, blue, and red. Also, the expectation level may increase in the order of white, blue, and red.
According to such an embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the light-emitting state of the luminous decorative member, thereby enhancing the "hold color change indication effect."

The display time for the standby hold image whose display mode has been changed by the "second hold change color indication effect" is indefinite (because the "hold change color indication effect" starts based on the timing of the start winning), and the display time for the standby hold image whose display mode has been changed by the "second hold change color indication effect" may vary.

When a variable display is performed corresponding to a reserved image whose display mode has changed due to the "first reserved color change indication performance", in the variable display, there are cases where the decorative pattern indicates a reach state and a reach indication that leads to the expectation of a jackpot is executed, and cases where the decorative pattern does not indicate a reach state and a reach indication that leads to the expectation of a jackpot is not executed. Also, when a variable display is performed corresponding to a reserved image whose display mode has changed due to the "first reserved color change indication performance" and the "second reserved color change indication performance", there are cases where the decorative pattern indicates a reach state and a reach indication that leads to the expectation of a jackpot is executed, and cases where the decorative pattern does not indicate a reach state and a reach indication that leads to the expectation of a jackpot is not executed. Since the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the "first reserved color change indication" and the "second reserved color change indication" are performed than when only the "first reserved color change indication" is performed, it is preferable to execute the reach indication at a higher rate when the "first reserved color change indication" and the "second reserved color change indication" are performed than when only the "first reserved color change indication" is performed.

When it is decided to execute the "reserved color change indication effect", all of the decorative patterns corresponding to the current variable display are temporarily stopped, and when the current variable display is, for example, a predetermined reach effect being executed, it is determined that the result of the current variable display is a miss. Therefore, the predetermined reach effect is stopped, and an effect corresponding to the "reserved color change indication effect" is executed (the background image at this time is a normal background image). An example in which a reach effect is executed as a look-ahead effect has been shown, but the display of a predetermined reach effect that has already been executed is not displayed in each variable display, so it can be said to be a rare effect. Therefore, even if it is decided to execute the "reserved color change indication effect" when a predetermined reach effect is displayed, the predetermined reach effect being executed may be continued. This is because there are players who become interested just by watching the effect itself, even if they know that the result of the variable display will be a miss. In such a case, while the reach effect is being executed, only the "first reserved color change indication effect" may be executed, or only the "second reserved color change indication effect" may be executed.

In addition, in a certain reach performance, there is a reach performance in which a simulated image simulating an operation means is displayed just before the timing suggesting the winning or losing result, and the operation of the operation means is enabled to display a display suggesting the winning or losing result based on the operation. In the case of such a reach performance, it is preferable that the "first reserved color change indication performance" or the "second reserved color change indication performance" is not executed (it is not decided to execute the reserved color change indication performance as a look-ahead performance) during the period when the operation of the operation means is enabled just before the timing suggesting the winning or losing result (the period during which the simulated image is displayed), and when the "first reserved color change indication performance" or the "second reserved color change indication performance" is executed in the certain reach performance (it may be decided to execute the "reserved color change indication performance" as a look-ahead performance), it is preferable that it may be executed at a certain timing after the start of the certain reach performance and before the period (the period during which the simulated image is displayed). Also, there are reach effects that display a winning or losing result without enabling the operation of the operating means (without displaying a simulated image that mimics the operating means) immediately before the timing that suggests the winning or losing result, but even in the case of such reach effects, it is preferable that the "first reserved color change indication effect" or the "second reserved color change indication effect" is not executed (it is not decided that the reserved color change indication effect will be executed as a look-ahead effect) immediately before the timing that suggests the winning or losing result. If the "first reserved color change indication effect" or the "second reserved color change indication effect" is executed (it can be decided that the reserved color change indication effect will be executed as a look-ahead effect) in the case of such reach effects, it is preferable to avoid executing it immediately before the timing that suggests the winning or losing result, for example, before 1/2 of the length (time) of the reach effect has elapsed.

In the embodiment, the technical matters in the structure of the gaming machine and the performance examples executed in the gaming machine may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. In addition, some of the technical matters in the structure of the gaming machine and the performance examples executed in the gaming machine may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. In addition, the technical matters in each role configuration may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. In addition, these technical matters may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. The number of technical matters to be combined is not limited to two and can be any number of two or more. In addition, an embodiment in which a certain embodiment (or another embodiment) is modified may be applied to an embodiment in which a certain embodiment is modified, to form another embodiment. In addition, one embodiment described in the specification may be modified multiple times. For example, it is also possible to apply two embodiments and two modified embodiments to one embodiment. In addition, a plurality of embodiments that a person skilled in the art could conceive in this way may be adopted in one gaming machine.
In addition, the "embodiment" referred to here may include not only those explicitly described as "embodiments" in this specification, but also various modified forms, examples, modified examples, technical matters, problem-solving means, etc., shown in this specification.

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible, as mentioned above.

In the embodiment, a pachinko machine has been used as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machines to which the embodiment can be applied are not limited to pachinko machines, and gaming machines other than pachinko machines may be adopted. For example, the embodiment may be adopted in a ball game machine, an enclosed gaming machine (controlled gaming machine) in which the gaming balls are enclosed within the gaming machine, a pachislot machine, a pachislot machine that does not require the insertion of medals (medalless gaming machine), a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine (Parrot, etc.), etc. In this case, it is possible to achieve the same action and effect.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5' Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel plate 1110a Obstruction nail through hole 1110b Panel plate back rough surface portion 1118 Panel plate opening 1140 Light guide plate 1142 Light guide plate rough surface portion 1146 Light guide plate illumination member 1147 Light guide plate substrate 1148 Light guide plate illuminating member 1201 Obstruction nail 1201a Obstruction nail head 1201b First body of obstacle nail 1201c Spiral-shaped obstacle nail portion 1201d Second body of obstacle nail 1201e Tip of obstacle nail 1230 Life nail 1231 Jumping nail 1232 Left guide nail 1310 Main control board 1402 Ordinary pattern display 1403 First special pattern display 1404 First special reserved number display 1405 Second special pattern display 1406 Second special reserved number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side performance display device 1600a Display area 2000 Front unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate portion 2004 Second starting port 2004a Movable piece 2005 Large prize opening 2100 Starting opening unit 2400 Panel board lower light-emitting board 2410 Panel board rear decorative member 2410a Panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410c Panel board rear decorative member pivot shaft 2420 Panel board rear board 2425 Panel board rear board light-emitting portion 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 3700 Mission button 3710 Attack button 3720 Left lever 3722 Left lever vibration source 3724 Left lever light-emitting source 3730 Right lever 3732 Right lever vibration source 3734 Right lever light-emitting source 3740 Defense button 3770 Tank role-playing device 7000 Door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7010 Door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body first surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7114 Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7116 Right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7118 Right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body first surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7214 Left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface HKB Whitened part YGK Game ball

Claims (1)

A lottery means for acquiring lottery information related to a win based on the establishment of a start condition, and for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition for the acquired lottery information;
a performance display device on which a performance is displayed;
A decorative pattern varying means for varying and displaying decorative patterns on the performance display device in response to the execution of the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition;
and a holding means for storing the lottery information until the start condition is satisfied when the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied,
When the decorative symbols are being varied, a specific reach effect can be executed based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
when a specific timing arrives in the specific reach performance, whether or not a result of the lottery by the lottery means is the win is displayed;
Under a situation where the lottery information is stored by the reserve means, after the specific timing arrives in the specific reach performance and it is displayed that it is not a win but a miss, it is possible to display an expectation performance regarding the result of the lottery of the lottery information stored by the reserve means;
The expected performance can be executed in a plurality of types including a first display type and a second display type, and when the expected performance that can be executed in a plurality of types is executed in the first display type, it can be executed in a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, and when the expected performance is executed in the first display type, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the outline of the performance after the expected performance regardless of which of the plurality of modes the execution mode is.
The expected performance executed in the first display type and the expected performance executed in the second display type are executable within one variation,
the expected performance can be executed in a third display type different from the first display type and the second display type, and when the expected performance is executed in the third display type, an operation acceptance period is generated in which an operation by a player can be accepted by an operation means;
the third display type, which will result in the operation accepting period, can be executed in a plurality of modes including a specific mode and a special mode, and an operation instruction image corresponding to the executed mode can be displayed during the operation accepting period;
The expected performance can be executed in a fourth display type different from any of the first display type, the second display type, and the third display type, and when the expected performance is executed in the fourth display type, the decorative pattern which has started to vary based on the satisfaction of the start condition and which has been temporarily stopped starts to vary again .

Images